00170 Câu Hỏi Trắc Nghiệm Kĩ Năng Đọc Hiểu - Vĩnh Bá

WWW.DAYKEMQUYNHON.UCOZ.COM WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/DAYKEM.
QUYNHON
VNH B
(6V chya Anh, PI0B8 Quc hc Hu)
N
NH
UY
.Q
TP
u h i \ \ 0 . 0 l i C ' d C I ' h
O
/

NG
H
N
TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
C HIEU
C
A
H
-
-L
(ENGLISH READING COMPREHENSION SKILLS)

N
TO
(Ti bn l n th nh t)
NG

ID
B
ng gp PDF bi GV. Nguyn Thanh T WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

WWW.DAYKEMQUYNHON.UCOZ.COM WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/DAYKEM.QUYNHON
N
NH
UY
.Q
TP
O

NG
H
N
TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
C
A
H
-
-L
N
TO
NG

ID
B

V N H B
(Gio vin Chuyn A nh - Trng Quc hc Hu)
N
NH
UY
.Q
TP
O

NG
H
CU HI TRC NGHIM
N
TR
Chuyn
B
00
10
K NNG C HIU
+3
P2
(ENGLISH READING COMPREHENSION SKILLS)

C
A
TI LIU N THI I HC
H
-
-L
(Ti bn ln th nht)
N
TO
NG

ID
B
NH XUT BN I HC QUC GIA H NI

SACBTHAM KHO ' ^ \
- ~Coiictonis ihileadm g, nxb Oxford University Press, 1-98T

Mosaic - A Reading Skills Book, Brenda. WegmanandMDaPnj-ik
N
Kbezevic, nxb Randon House, Nev/York, 1985
NH
- Read All About It 1&2, Lori Howard, nxb Oxford University Press, 2000;
- The Guardian Weekly, onestopenglish.com
UY
- Reading Comprehension Skills & Strategies Level 7&8, nxb Saddleback
Educational Publishing, 2002
.Q
- Reading Comprehension Success, nxb Learning Express, New York, 2009
TP
- Reading Extra, Liz Driscoll, nxb Cambridge University Press
- Advanced Reading Power, Beatrice s. Milulecky and Linda Jeffries, nxb
O

Pearson Longman, 2007.
- Reading Skills for First Certificate, Malcolm Mann and Taylore-Knowles,
NG
nxb MacMillan
- W hat A W orld 1&2, Milada Broukal, nxb Longman, 2007
H
- Comprehension 1&2, DArcy Adrian and Lewis Lansford, nxb Longman
- Reading Advanced, Rod Ellis & Brian Tomlinson, nxb Oxford University
N
Press, 1997
- The Glencoe Reader, nxb McGrawHill, 2004
TR
- Longman Preparation Series for the TOEC Test, Lin Louheed
B
- The Heine&Heine TOEFL Test Assistant - Reading, Milada Broukal,
00
nxb Glendale Community College

10
- TOEFL Practice Tests 1999-2000, Educational Testing Service,

http://\vww.toef].org
+3
- Building Reading Skills for the TOEFL iBT, 2007

P2
- Advanced E xpert CAE, ca Jane Bell v Roger Gower, nxb Pearson

C
Longman, 2008
- CAE Result, ca Kathy Gude and Mary Stephens, nxb Oxford University
A
Press, 2008
H
- CAE Practice Test Plus, ca Alan Stanton v Susan Morris, nxb Longman,
999
-
- C am bridge CAE Course, ca Mary Spratt & Linda B. Taylor, Cambridge

-L
University Press, 1997

- Chuyn San English Language Studies, nxb English Foreign Language
N
Exam, Th Nh K, cc nm t 2004 n 2008

TO
- Cc luyn thi ting Anh tt nghip ph thng ton Nga (Russian State
Exams) cc nm t 2003 n 2010.
NG

ID
B

L I N I U
N
Phn c v Hiu Vn l phn khng th thiu trong mi thi Ting Anh cc cp.
D ch chim mt t i im khng ln, nhng phn ny khin cho th sinh mt nhiu
NH
thi gian suy ngh v d lm cho th sinh e s nu gp phi mt bi vn kh hiu. Mc
kh ca 'bi vn th hin cc ch: ti bn n c th khng nm trong kinh
UY
nghim sng ca la tui hc sinh, t vng v cu trc nm ngoi vn hiu bit, v
cch thc t cu hi !t lo, nh by.
.Q
Tp sch ny l tp hp nhng bi vn thuc cc ti nm trong phm vi kin thc
TP
ph thng. Cch hnh vn ca tng bi c th n gin m-cng c th phc tp, nhng
khng n qu ri rm.
O

: Cu h trc nghim di mi bi c thng gm cc loi sau:
NG
li Cu hi v chnh: yu cu ngi c phi tm tt c ch c bn hoc mc
ch ca tc gi, vi cc dng m u nh sau:
H
+ What is the main topic of this passage?
+ The best title for the passage is...
N
+ The main topic for this passage is...
+ What does the author mainly discuss?
+ The main idea of this passage is...TR
B
chn c cu tr li ng, hc sinh nn:
00
(1) Lu n cu ch im (thirng nm u mi on vn).

10
(2) Lu ging vn ca tc gi.

+3
(3) c !t qua ton bi, c bit l cu ch im, tim nhng t ng mu cht (key
vocabulary) c th biu th thi ca tc gi i vi ti.
P2
(4) c k bi chn cu tr !i. Lu rng ch cu ch imkhng thicha

C
thng tin xc nh chnh ca bi. chnh ch c thc khi qut ha sau

khi c k ton bi v theo di thi ca tc gi.
A
H
2. Cu hi v s kin. Loi cu hi ny yu cu hc sinhphi tr li bng ccthng

tin c th v bi vn.
-
Cu hi v s kin c dng l mt cu b lng v bn di l 4 chn la, trong ch

-L
c mt chn la hon thnh cu b lng ng bi vn.

N
Phn m u ca loi cu hi ny thng c dng sau:

+ According to the article,....
TO
+ The passage states that...

+ The author indicates that...
NG
e chn ng cu tr li cho loi cu hi ny, hc sinh cn:

(1) Xc nh t/cm t mu cht trong cu hi.

ID
(2) Lt qua bi vn tm t/cm t mu cht ny, hoc cc t lin quan n t mu

cht ny.
B
(3) Sau khi xc nh c v tri ca t/cm t mu cht trongbi vn,.c k phn bi

vn c cha cm t ny chn cu tr li.
3
Cu hi v s kin hu nh lun un c hi theo th t xut hin ca cc s kin

trong bi vn. Do , cu hi s kin u tin s nm gn u bi vn hn l cu hi s
kin cui cng. Hiu c iu ny s gip hc sinh lm bi nhanh han v nu ang
tm cu tr li cho cu hi s 1, hc sinh ch cn tm thng tin u bi vn. Tri li,
N
nu ang tr li cu 5 chng hn, hc sinh s nhn vo phn cui bi c.
3. Cc cu hi s kin ph nh: a ra 3 pht biu ng v mt pht biu sai. Hc
NH
sinh phi loi tr c 3 pht biu ng, pht biu sai cn li chnh l cu phi
chn tr li.
UY
Cc cu hi s kin ph nh thng c dng nh sau:
.Q
+ According to the passage, ali of the following are true EXCEPT...
TP
+ The author mentions aii of the following EXCEPT...
O
tr !i cc cu hi s kin ph nh, hc sinh phi:

(1) c k cc chn la xc nh v tr ca thng tin trong bi vn.
(2) c lt qua bi vn loi tr 3 chn la c thng tin khp vi thng tin trong
NG
bi vn.
(3) Chn la cn st li chnh [ cu tr li ng.
H
4. Cu hi suy lun: Thng tin tr li loi cu hi ny i khi khng c pht
biu r rng trong bi vn. Hc sinh phi suy lun cn c trn nhng thng tin
N
khc, hoc phi c gia hai hng ch (read between the lines) mi thy n
tng ca tc gi. TR
Nhng cu hi loi ny thng c ip vn nh sau:
B
00
+ While not directly stated, we can infer from the passage that...
10
+ According to the passage, the author implies that...

+ It can be inferred from paragraph 6 that ...
+3
+ Which of the following can be inferred from the passage?

P2
5. Cu hi v ng ngha: Loi cu hi ny trc nghim vn t vng ca hc sinh. '

Hc sinh phi chn trong 4 t cho sn mt t ng ngha vi t dng trong bi vn.
C
Cc cu hi ng ngha thng c dng nh sau;

A
H
+ The word subsequent in line 19 is closest in meaning to ...

+ The word varied in line 2 couid best be replaced'by ...
+ The word their in line 20 refers to ...
-
+ In line 5, the phrase giant patriarchs could best be replaced by which of the fol-
-L
lowing?
Hy vng sau khi kin tr rn luyn vi cc bi tp trong sch ny, hc sinh s nm c
N
k nng lm bi v t c im ti a cho phn cu hi c hiu vn.

TO
Tp sch ny cng c th l ngun t liu c ch cho cc ng nghip trong vic son

bi kim tra.
NG
Ngi su tp v tuyn chn

ID
Vnh B
B

1 THE FAMOUS CUP

Its only 36 centim eters tall, b u t to fans th ro ugho ut th e world, it
N
represen ts th e highest achievem ent in football. Every four years, team s
NH
from all over the globe compete to take hom e the FIFA World Cup Tro-
- phy, yet nobody ever does.
UY
Do you know why? Nobody ever tak es it hom e because the 18-carat
gold trophy is kept, u n d e r c k ' an<r:fcev by FIFA (Federation In tern a-
.Q
tionale de Football Association). The cham pions of each World Cup
TP
to u rn am e n t receive only a replica. This is to protect the valuable prize
O
from thieves, who have stolen the World Cup trophy twice in its 75-year

history.
The little trophy h a s certainly had a troubled existence. The original
NG
trophy w as m ade by a French sculptor, Abel LaFleur, and w as called
H
the Ju le s Rjmet Clip. in honor of th e founder of the World C up tou r-^
n a m e n t. Sometime durin g the first three World Cup events (1930, 34
N
and 38), the nam e changed to simply the W orld C up. Then during
World W ar II, not m uch w as seen or heard of the trophy. It w as being
TR
kept hidden in a shoe box u n d er the bed of Dr. Ottorino B arassi, the
B
Italian vice-president o fFIFA, to prevent it from falling into the h an d s
00
of the Nazi army.

10
Although th e trophy m ade :it -safely through the w ar, it d id nt fare so

+3
well du ring the tu rb u le n t 1960s. In 1966, the Cup w as stolen during a

public showing of th e trophy prior to the World Cup tou rn am ent in
P2
England. Luckily, it w as found a sh ort time later none the worse for
C
w ear in a tra s h container, by a little dog nam ed Pickles.

fe^F our years later, Brazil earned perm an ent possession of the original
A
H
trophy by w inning its third World C up title. Unfortunately, the trophy

was stolen a second time, in 19837 and w as never recovered. The B ra-
-
zilian Football A ssociation had to have a duplicate trophy made.

-L
After the first trophy becam e th e possession of Brazils football asso -

ciation, a new World C up Trophy for FIFA w as designed by a n Italian
N
artist, Silvio Gaz&zniga, in 1974. This trophy ca n n o t be won outright,

TO
b u t rem ain s in the possession of FIFA, an d rest assu red they are keep-
ing a close eye on it. Today, World Cup w inners are aw arded a replica
NG
of the trophy th a t is gold-plated, rath er th a n solid gold like the real

one.

Gazaznigas World C up trophy weighs alm ost five kilogram s. Its base
ID
contain s two layers olTasem i-precious stone called m alachite, and h a s

B
room for 17 sm all plaques bearing the n am es of the w inning team s -

enough space to h onor all the World Cup cham pions u p to the year
] 2038. After th at, a new trophy will have to be made. x
5
N
NH
UY
(^d ) H o w m uch m oney is the trophy w orth?
.Q
3. The first trophy w as nam ed th e J u le s Rimet C up b ecause Rimet
TP
O
A. m ade the trophy

B. w as a fam ous player.
c. scored the final goal in 1930
NG
(^rx)came up w ith the idea of the World Cup
H
W hich is tru e abo ut Gazaznigas World Cup trophy?
A. It is m ade of gold a n d silver.
N
B. It is a replica of the first trophy,
c . It is in a m useum in Brazil
^Dylt will only be used u n til 2038. TR
B
5. In w hich year did Brazil win the World Cup cham pionship for the
00
th ird tim e?
10
1970 B. 1974 c. 1986 D . 2002

+3
GLOSSARY
P2
- trophy chic cp (lm gii thng) - none the worse for wear/Cn nguyn
C
- 18-carat gold vng 18 ca-ra vn, cha suy suyn g

- to be kept under l.ock and key c - trash container thng rc
A
ct gi cn thn - to earn permanent possession f,

H
- FIFA [Federation Internationale de ;sth c quyn s hu ci g trn i

Football Association] Lin on - title anh hiu
-
Quc t Cc Hip hi Bng - to recover thu hi, ly ii

-L
- replica bn sao - duplicate bn sao

- troubled (adj) nhiu rc ri - outright (adv) ngay tc th
N
- sculptor nh iu khc - rest assured xin hy yn tm rng

- founder ngi sng lp - to keep a dose eye on sth canh gi
TO
- vice-president ph ch tch cn thn

- Nazi c ..Quc X - solid gold vng rng, vng khi
NG
- to make it safely through the war - base ci

an ton qua c cuc chin tranh - layer lp mng

- to fare well tin trin tot p, n nn - semi-precious stone bn qu

- malachite [tn mt loi ]
ID
lm ra
- turbulent (adj) nhiu bin ng - plaque tm tm loi
B
- prior to (prep) (xy ra) trc - to honor vinh danh, tn vinh

&Q 'v ^.TTi

2 GOAL: ENDING CHILD LABOR , r
Carefully guiding a needle th a ts longer th a n h is tiny fingers, a
N
young boy in P ak istan stitches together the leather pieces of a soccer
ball. He sits crouched in the corner of a hot, airless shed for 12 h ours.
NH
For h is long day's work, he will eajTi 60 cents. \
The boy is one of more th a n 200 million children/w ho work a t hard,
UY
som etim es dan gerous jobs all over the world. Child labor exists in two-
.Q
th ird s of the w orlds nations. From Indonesia to G uatem ala, poor chil-
TP
O
for firecrackers in C hina and knot the th re ad s'fo r carp ets in India, all

for pennies a ay. Sometim es they are sold a s slave s.
NG
In a speech to the Child Labor Coalition when he w as U.S. Secretary
of Labor, Robert Reich expressed gratitude for the organizations work
H
(6\ to end a b n sp- nfLnhi 1H labor. Yon tu rned u p .th e h eat, an d you got re-
sults. He also congratulated Craig Kielburger, th en 13, of C anada, who
N
traveled the world for a year fighting for k id s rights. Craig believes kids
TR
can m ake a difference. He offers this advice, Write letters to com panies
and governm ent officials. P ut pressure on leaders to m ake ch anges and
B
to stop th e m isu se of children . -N.
00
One solution to the child-lab.or jp r oblem in -poor qm intrips is edu ca-

10
tion. The futu re of these countries, Secretary Reich declared, de-

+3
pend s on a work force th a t is educated. We are prepared to help build

P2
schools.
C
E ducation h a s helped to m ake the world a brighter place for one

youth, Aghan of India. W hen he w as nine, Aghan w as kidnapped from
A
his hom e an d sold to a carpet m aker. A ghans boss w as very cruel. I

H
a wa s always crying for my m other, he recalls. Aghans dream w as to

leam to write so th a t he could send letters to His parents. Fortunately,
-
a group th a t opposes child labor rescued Aghan from the factory. He

-L
w as se n t tQ_gjs h e lte r in New Delhi where he worked h ard to learn to

N
write.
TO
1. W hat is a n example of dangerous work done by a child?

A. stitching a soccer ball B. knotting carpet th rea d s
NG
0 mixing gunpow der ( ^ n o n e o f the above

2. W hen voung children are forced to w o rk , _____

A. they never see their families.
ID
B. they work b u t never 'get paid.

B
(c ^th ey are pu nish ed if they do not work hard.

D. they are always sold as slaves.

' CHiM'labor is m o'st'cam m on m \____

A>jctrts tiaatmakef firecrackers.
' ^ _-- ^ .poor
^- .cmit
_ trie s . 1*V
w- %
%'- . ~V , >i
ccran ies tht-hye. slavery: \ J
N
D. cuntris-tat m ake carpets. T - 'v f-
NH
The c h ild re n wKo w ork are o fte n _____ . ' ' 1
A. treated well y-'- *?v
UY
Bw paid generously
.Q
(Q jm isused :-
TP
D. all o f the above
O
W hen children are used to work for un fair wages in poor working

conditions, it is best described a s _____ .
Q i\a n ab u se of working children.
NG
B. h ard work. *
c . a poor w orking environm ent.
H
D. unfair labo r practices.
N
According to the article, children who work u n d e r poor conditions
A. s ta rt to work only after age 13.

TR
B
B. sta rt to work only after age 12.
00
c. m ake only 60 cen ts an hour.

10
(DT)may m ake only 60 cen ts a day.

+3
According to the article, w hat is the best way to keep m any children
P2
from falling victim to the ab u se of child labor in th e future?

(A^; Help poor countries educate th eir children.
C
B. Refuse to buy p ro ducts m ade in co untries th a t ab u se child la-

A
bor.
c. Rescue each child.
H
. none o f the above

-
Why do families allow young children to go to work?

-L
A. They d o n t know how bad it is.

N
B. The grow nups d o n t w ant to work.

(^CjThe families are very poor and need the income.
TO
D. The children are paid a lot of money.

NG
How do you know Aghan w as no t happy m aking ca rp ets away from

h is family?

A. He dream ed of learning to write.

ID
B. He w as rescued.
(^} He cried for h is m other.
B
D. He lives in a shelter.

10. Ijdl New Delhi, Aghan

A.W orked for a group th a t is opposed to child labor.
(Bp received an education,
N
c . lived w ith his family.
NH
D. m ade carpets.
UY
GLOSSARY
- child labor tnh trng lao ng tr em - Secretary of Labor B Trng Lao
.Q
- to stitch khu bng kim ng M
TP
- leather da thuc - gratitude lng bit n
- crouched (adj) lom khom, ci gp - abuse s lm dng
O

ngi - to congratulate chc mng
- airless (adj) thiu khng kh, ngt ngt - to fight for kids' rights u tranh cho
- shed nh kho
NG
quyn ca tr-em
- to put pressure on sfrgay sc p i
H
vi a
- firecrackers pho - to misuse s dng sai mc ch
N
- to knot the threads, tht gt cc si - work force lc lng lao ng
. chi - to kidnap bt cc
- carpet tm thm TR - cruel (adj) c c
- slave n l - tooppossth chng [i ci g
B
- Child Labor Coalition Lin Minh Chng - to rescue giai cu
00
Lao ng Tr Em - shelter ch , ch tr thn

10
+3
P2
W ikipedia is an encyclopaedia th a t is available on th e Internet and

C
w hat people love about it is th a t it can be edited by absolutely every-

body.
A
When and how did it start?

H
It w as founded in 2001 by a guy called Jim m y Wales. It started a s a

-
fancy idea, a kind of a hobby and everybody is su rprised how popular it

-L
h a s becom e an d how m any com puter scientists it h a s attracted, it h as

got a caUeciorucjâb-O ut_l, 8_rrl articles, the m ajority of w hich are in
N
English; however, one can find som e articles in over 200 languages. If it
w as a b u sin ess, it would earn lots of money.
TO
How is it possible th at articles that can be changed by anyone are

NG
correct?

The W ikipedia is based on wikis - a special software w hich lets every-

one modify a webpage and it is true th a t anyone can change the infor-
ID
m ation on the page if they th in k its incorrect. But, the W ikipedia h a s a

team of over 13.000 people who are experts in different fields an d who
B
correct an y in accurate inform ation sen t by people
9
I s i t error-free?
very reliable- an d th a t they -didn't find m any' errors: 3t..;.was 'very good
N
new s for th e founder a s well a s for all the u sers.
NH
Why is it becom ing so popuiar?
UY
.Q
th a t its fun to be able to add w hat you know t th e inform ation on the
TP
net. IT specialists believe it h a s a very bright future an d m ost claim it's
the m ost brilliant invention ever.
O

1. W ikipedia______
A. w as created by a team of com puter scientists,
NG
B. began
began aass aa bbuusin
siness
ess idea,
idea.
c. becam e popular a s soon a s it started.
H
( t x \ starte d a s one m a n s passion.
W; Wr;ikipedia . a r e _____
N
Articles in
A. m ostly ab o u t science.
(iTi m ostly in English. TR
c . tran slated into 200 languages.
B
D. very interesting.
00
10
3. W ikipedia rem ains accu rate a s m u ch a s possible b e c a u s e _____

A. all people who w rite for it are experts.
+3
B. it h a s a special type of software program m e.

P2
c ci) there are people who m onitor it for m istakes.

C
Lh not everybody can change the inform ation.

4. The best advantage of Wikipedia is t h a t _____
A
fA ^you d o nt have to pay for it.

H
B. everyone ca n u se it.
c . it is created by ordinary people.
-
f is quick an d reliable.
-L
5. The tex t probably com es from - .

N
A. a leaflet '<\ G a speech

c . a scientific article ( D ) a m agazine article
TO
GLOSSARY ^
NG
- encyclopaedia t in bch khoa - error-free (adj) khng c sai st

- to edit bin tp, chnh sa - to confirm khng nh

- to found thnh lp - to stress nhn mnh

- a fancy idea mt tng p s say - IT = Information Technology cng
ID
m ngh thng tin

B
- min = million - passion nim am m

- webpage trang web - to monitor theo di x
10

4
In todays competitive world, w hat responsible p a re n t would not
w an t to give their children the b est possible sta rt in life? For th is re a-
N
son, m any p aren ts w ant their children, often a s young as ten m onths
NH
old, to become fam iliar with com puters. They seem to th in k th a t if th eir
children grow up with com puters, they will be b etter equipped to face
UY
the challenges of th e future. -/7 -^
.Q
No one h a s proved th a t com puters m ake children m ore creative or
TP
m ore intelligent. The tru th may even be the opposite. E ducational psy-
chologists claim th a t too m uch exposure to com puters, especially for
O
the very young, may negatively affect norm al brain development. Chil-

dren gain valuable experience of the world from their interaction with
physical objects. Ten-m onth-old babies may benefit more from bu m p -
NG
ing th eir h ead s or p u tting various objects in their m o uths th a n they
H
will from staring at eye-catching cartoons. A four-year-old child can
improve hand-eye coordination and u n d ersta n d cause an d effect better
N
by experim enting w ith a crayon th a n by moving a curso r aro u n d a
com puter screen. So, as educational psychologists suggest, instead of
TR
governm ent funding going to more an d m ore com puter classes, it m ight
B
be better to devote resources to m usic and a rt program s.
00
It is lu d ic ro u s to think th a t children will fall behind if they are not

10
exposed to com puters "from a n early age. Time is too precious to spend
+3
with a m ouse. Now is the time when they should be out- there learning
P2
to ride a bike. There will be time later on for them to start banging
away a t keyboards.
C
1 . Why do p aren ts w ant their children to learn how to use a com puter
A
from an early age?

H
)B e c a u s e they are afraid their children will become competitive.

B ecause they w ant th eir children to be well prepared for their
-
future.
-L
c. B ecause th is is w hat all the other p aren ts seem to do.

D. B ecause they believe their children will have difficulty learning
N
to use one if they dont s ta rt early.

TO
2. Children who spend a lot of time on their c o m p u te rs_____

do no t necessarily m ake more progress th a n those who d o n t,
NG
tend to like m usic an d a rt more th a n those who d o n t.

c. will suffer from b rain dam age.

D. ten d to have m ore accidents th a n those who d on t.
ID
3. The a u th o r implies th a t children lem better ______

B
A. after they have developed hand-eye coordination.

B. w hen they u se a com puter.
11

c. a s they get older.

^?)when they hold an d feel things aro u n d them .
ef
41 W hat would be an appropriate title for th is passage?
N
NH
Never too early to s ta rt
UY
Let kids be kids
C om puters in schools
.Q
D. More com p uters m ean b righter future
TP
5. W hat is tru e according to the passage?
O
A. It is b etter for children to take com puter lessons th a n a rt les-

sons.
P arents should n ot p u t off buying a com puter for th eir children.
c. C om puters seriously h arm children's eyesight.
NG
(D )T h e re is no evidence th a t children who u se co m p uters are more
H
clever th a n those who do not. 7
D. sensible
6 . W hat does the word ludicrous m the third p arag rap h (first sen -
N
GLOSSARY
tence) <4 o>
- to (be
A. exposed to sth phi
ridiculous B. hu chu,
m orous
hng - c.
hand-eye TR
ironic coordination s phi hp
phi nm tri, c c hi tip xc vi gia tay v mt
B
(exposure) - crayon bt chi mu
00
- interaction with s tng tc vi - cursor con nhy trn mn hnh

10
- to bump one's head va u - funding s ti tr

- eye-catching (adj) hp dn, bt mt - to bang away at sth p mnh vo
+3
P2
5
C
A m assage is relaxing, an d m akes you feel great, b u t did you know

th a t its also good for you? T h ats w h at doctors are now saying. M as-
A
H
sage relieves pain an d anxiety, eases depression a n d speeds u p recov-

ery from m edical problems.
-
R esearch h a s show n th a t people of all ages benefit from touch. Pre-

-L
m atu re infants who a re held develop J iaster Than th ose left alone, an d
healthy babies who get a lot of physical con tact ciy less an d sleep b et-
N
ter. R esearchers are n ot su re why th is occurs b u t they have also found

TO
out th a t touch can slow h e a rt rate, lower blood p ressu re an d increase

levels of seraton in, the, brain chem ical th a t is linked to well-beingpjtt
NG
also decreases levels of th e stress horm one cortisol, a n d th is in tu rn

increase s your, r esistance toil| e^ s^

M assage also 'speeds, u p/ healing. Bone-m arrow tra n sp la n t p atien ts
ID
who were given m assages h ad better neurological function th a n those

B
who w erent. Furtherm ore, m assage reduced pain by 37% in p atien ts

with chronic m uscle aches.
12

C ) _
Gavipg->somjeaQS a m assag m ay be_as_good as^getmg-_one- A study
conducted by the university of Miami found th a t m others suffering
from depression felt better after m assaging th eir infants.. In th a t sam e
N
study, elderly volunteers who m assaged infants reported feeling less
NH
anxious and depressed.
It even w orks w hen you do it yourself; 43% of headache sufferers re-
UY
ported. getting relief after m assaging their tem ples and neck and sm ok-
.Q
ers who were tau gh t self-m assage while trying to quit felt less anxiety
TP
and sm oked less.
O
21. W hat h a s recently been said abo ut getting a m assage?

t relaxes you.
It m akes you feel good.
NG
H
It im proves your physical condition.
D. It requires a special technique.
N
A* cry less
2. Babies bom an d sleep
before better
th eir tim if they are m assaged.
e _____
TR
f
grow faster if they are held.
develop faster th a n healthy babies if they get a lot of physical
B
contact.
00
D. d o n t survive if they are not held.

10
3. The au th o r suggests th a t touch ______

+3
A. increases levels of the stress horm one cortisol.

P2
B. m akes your h eart beat faster.

( ^ ) increases' the feeling of well-being.
C
D. helps you deal with your feelings.

A
4. P atients who get m a ssa g e s _____

H
A. d o n t experience m uscle pain.

B avoid having surgery. ^ J
-
(j3y m ake a quicker recovery.

-L
D. are not better off th a n those who do not.

N
5. According to the a rtic le _____

. m assage h as no effect on smokers.
TO
B. m assage relieves headaches by 43%.

c. sm okers who gave others m assages felt less anxious and
NG
sm oked less.
(p j m assaging yourself is as effective a s being m assaged.

6 . W hat did the study conducted in Miami show ? 1

ID
A. Elderly volunteers who got m assages felt less anxious.

B. M others were depressed after m assaging th eir babies,
B
c. Babies who got m assages felt better.

QSj Giving a m assage is as beneficial as getting one.
13
?:
they do nt m ssage th eir
N
NH
-V - getting one. .. , : , ..........
help s sm okers quit'sm oking.
UY
GLOSSARY
.Q
- relaxing(adj) gy cm gic d chu - resistariceto sc khng i vi :
TP
-depressed (adj) trm cm (depression) ~ bone-marrow transplant s cy ghp
- to is p ^ s th Uyy nhanh ci g ty xng
O
- premature infant tr sinh thiu thng - neurological (adj) thuc thn kinh

- heart rate nhp tim - chronic (adj) mn tnh
- blood pressure huyt p - musde ache s au nhc c bp
NG
- well-being trng thi mnh khe - temple thi dng
- self-massage s t xoa bp
H
6
N
If we took a look a t how people in Europe com m unicated ju s t one .
h un d red years ago, we would be very surprised to find o u t th a t English
TR
was hardly used outside the U nited Kingdom. The language m ost
comm only used between people of different nationalities, an d p articu -
B
00
larly the aristocracy, w as French. In fact, French w as th e lan gu ag e o f

10
diplom acy , cu lture and education. However, th a t is not the case

now adays. E nglish h a s replaced French a s the international language
+3
of com m unication. Today there are more people who sp eak E nglish a s a
P2
second language th a n people who speak it a s a first language.

C
There are m any reason s why English h as become the language of in-
ternational com m unication. B ritains colonization of m any p a rts of the
A
world had som ething to do with it, but it is m ainly due to A m ericas rise
H
to the position of m ajor world power. This helped spread popular

American cultu re throughout the world bringing th e language w ith it.
-
-L
B ut is it good th at English h a s spread to all p a rts of the world so

quickly? Language specialists seem to be divided over this'i&ûe. There
N
are those who claim th a t it is im portant to have a language th a t th e

people in our increasingly globalized world have in comm on. According
TO
to others, English is associated w ith a p articular culture an d therefore

NG
prom otes th a t cu ltu re a t the expense of others. L inguists have sug-

gested E sp eran to, an artificially put-together language, a s a solution

to international com m unication problem s b u t w ithout success. So,

English will continue being the world language u ntil some o th er la n -
ID
guage, m aybe C hinese, w hich is the m ost widely-spoken native lan -

B
guage in the world, takes over a s the w orlds internation al language in -

stead of English.
14

1. According to the passage, a century ag o _____

A. educated people th rou ghout Europe spoke English.
B. foreign travelers to England spoke only French.
N
< French w as m uch m ore popular th an English.
NH
D. only the French aristocracy could speak English. -
2. W hat is chiefly responsible for the growth in popularity of English?
UY
A. B ritains becoming an international power.
.Q
B. The F rench losing m any colonies.
TP
Am ericas becoming powerful.
D. The developm ent of American culture.
O

3. W hat is m eant by the language of diplomacy (lines 5-6)?
A. The language used by ordinary people.
NG
B. The language used by the English an d the French.
The language used by the aristocracy.
H
The language used by governments.
N
4. W hat is tru e according to the passage?
A. The experts d on t like Esperanto.
TR
E speranto is difficult to learn.
B
E speranto is not a n a tu ra l language
00
D. E sp eran to is becom ing more and more popular.

10
5. Th experts' opinion on the spread of English is

+3
(a / split B. positive c . negative (B)i undecided

P2
6 . The a u th o r believes t h a t _____

C
A. English is easier to learn th a n Chinese.

English will probably be replaced a s an in tern ational language.
A
C hinese is going to be the next language of internatio nal com -

H
m unication.
D. C hinese is growing in popularity am ong non-native speakers.
-
-L
7. These d a y s _____
French is the language of diplomacy,
N
m ore non-natives speak English th a n natives.

c . m ore people speak French th a n English.
TO
D. French is a dying language.

NG
8 . W hat would be a good title for this passage?

y O English: Past, Present and F uture

( b ) English a s an International Language
ID
c . English language m eans English culture

B
D. English: a difficult language to learn
15
GLOSSARY : > 4
- ristocrcgjfci3 qitytgc.:
' ' :j;j- -a ;
N
thittii chngi .khc.
NH
7 ' : :
UY
The term dyslexia is used to describe a n u m b er of problem s asso -
ciated w ith reading, w riting or spelling. S hort-term m em ory, m ath em at-
.Q
ics, concentration, personal organization a n d sequencing m ay also be
TP
affected. We do not know exactly w hat cau ses dyslexia, b u t we-o know
O
th a t it tend s to ru n in th e family. We also know th a t m ore boys suffer

from dyslexia th a n girls an d th a t dyslexia is m ore com m on in u rb a n
areas th a n in rural.
NG
One of the m ost com m on sign's of dyslexia is "reversals. People w ith
this kind of problem often confuse letters like b an d d w hen reading
H
and writing or they som etim es read an d write w ords like tip an d
N
w on a s pit and now. O ther com m on ch aracteristics are lack of
punctuation, m isspelling, m ixed-up sentence s tru c tu re an d poor
gram m atical construction. TR
People are born with dyslexia, b ut it is only when they begin -to learn
B
00
to write th a t it becom es a noticeable problem . For children w ith dys-

10
lexia, going to school can be a trau m atic experience. Poor achievem ent
can m ake them feel frustrated an d insecure. They are re lu ctan t to go to
+3
school an d som etim es even skip school altogether. Cheating, stealing

P2
an d experim enting with d rugs can also occur w hen children regard
C
them selves as failures.

It is a com m on m isconception th a t dyslexic people are of inferior in -
A
telligence. Yet Albert Einstein, Leonardo da Vinci, T hom as Edison an d

H
H ans C hristian A ndersen were apparently all dyslexic. There is no total

cure for dyslexia; however, the effects of dyslexia can be lessened w ith
-
the guidance of skilled specialists an d a lot of determ ination.

-L
N
1. W hen does it becom e ap p aren t th a t a child m ay be suffering from

dyslexia?
TO
w hen they are bom

\ B j w h e n they begin their education
NG
c. w hen they use symbols instead of words

D. w hen they s ta rt talking

ID
2. According to the passage, dyslexic c h ild re n _____

m ight have behavioral problem s.
B
B. end u p taking drugs.
16

c. look forward to going to school.

D. do well a t school.
N
3. The passage states th a t one common characteristic of dyslexics is
th a t they ______
NH
A. have difficulty expressing their feelings.
B. are n ot able to read three-letter words,
UY
c . have difficulty learning the letter b.
.Q
read w ords backw ards.
TP
4. The p urpose of th is passage is to inform readers t h a t _____
O
A. Albert E instein w as dyslexic.

B. it is difficult for dyslexics to get professional help.
X c ) dyslexics are as intelligent a s other people.
NG
D. dyslexics are inferior to other people.
H
5. Who is more likely to be dyslexic?
A. girls
N
* B. children who live in the country
c . children who are not bright
TR
children whose p a ren ts are dyslexic
B
6 . How can th e effects of dyslexia be m ade less severe?
00
by learning to live w ith them

10
by learning a special skill

+3
w ith professional help and hard work

P2
by learning how to deal w ith failure

C
7. According to th e passage, w hich of the following is tru e?

A. Dyslexia refers to a specific learning disability.
A
B. Dyslexic people become famous.

H
Dyslexia affects only reading an d writing skills

The ca u ses of dyslexia h av en t been fully explained.
-
-L
GLOSSARY
N
- dyslexia chng c v vit kh - dys- - mixed-up (adj) ln xn, ri lon

lexic (adj) - traumatic (adj) gy chn thng
TO
- short-term memory tr nh ngn hn/ - frustrated (adj) chn nn, tht vng
tr nh s cp - insecure (adj) bt an, khng yn tm
NG
- sequencing kh nng [in kt cc s - to skip school b hc

kin ................... - misconception quan nim sai jam

- to run ri thtapiHyx tnh di truyn - inferior (adj) thp km

- reversal s o ngc - to lessen lm gim bt, lm nh i
ID
- misspelling s nh vn sai
B
17
8
' 'vBaccn'. 853, t ' th e age of':24-V Levi S ^ i s s i^ne;.a;.:w est co ast ,
. branch- of his. b ro th ers dry goods b u sin e ss m; New York; . Oyer th e next
N
tw enty,y ^ s ^ le b uilt his .business into a lucrative operation, y:
NH
One of Levis custom ers w as a tailor by the nam e of Ja c o b Davis.
Originally from Latvia, Jaco b lived in Reno, Nevada, an d regularly p u r-
UY
chased bolts of cloth from Levi S tra u ss & Co. Among Ja c o b s custom ers
w as a m an who kept ripping the pockets on the p a n ts th a t Jac o b m ade
.Q
for him. Ja c o b tried to find a way to strengthen h is cu sto m ers p a n ts
TP
w hen, one day, it finally occurred to him . He decided to p u t m etal rivets
on the pocket corners an d a t the b ase of the b u tto n fly. It worked and
O

the p a n ts becam e an in sta n t success.
Jacob knew he h ad discovered som ething new an d w orried th a t
NG
som eone m ight steal his idea. T h ats why he decided to apply for a p a t-
ent, b u t he did n t have the $68 th a t w as required for the paperw ork.
H
So, he tu rn ed to Levi S trau ss. He wrote him a letter suggesting th a t
they hold th e p aten t together. Being the b u sin essm an th a t he was,
N
S trau ss agreed im m ediately seeing the potential for th is new product.
TR
So, on May 20, 1873, th e two m en received p a te n t n u m b er 139,121
from the u s P atent an d T radem ark Office an d w ent into b u sin ess to-
B
gether. T hat w as the day blue je a n s were bom . Who would have
00
th ought back th en th a t denim , th read an d a little m etal w ould becom e

10
the m ost popular clothing pro du ct in th e world an d its all th a n k s to

+3
two m en - Levi S trau ss an d Jaco b Davis.

P2
1. According to the passage, why did Jaco b w rite to Levi?

C
\ a ) He d idn 't have the necessary fu nds to get a p aten t.

A
B. H d id n t know how to apply for a p atent,

c. He h ad no one else to tu rn to.
H
D. He knew Levi h ad the right connections.

-
2. Which' of the following titles b est sum m arizes the con ten t of the
-L
passage?
N
A. The Beginning of a Successful P artnership

B. The H istory of J e a n s
TO
tci) How J e a n s Were Invented

D. The Lives of Levi S trau ss an d Jac o b Davis
NG
3. According to the passage, w hat happened in 1853?

A. Levi set u p a bu sin ess w ith his brother,

ID
B. Levi moved to th e w est coast.

c. Levi becam e a successful businessm an.
B
Levi started working on h is own.
18

4. W hat is tru e about Jac o b Davis?

He w as Levis friend.
N
He w as Levis custom er in Latvia.
U l)H e w as Levis b u sin ess partner,
NH
D. He w as Levis tailor.
5. Why did Ja c p b .p u t m etal rivets on the p an ts he m ade?
UY
Ai because h is custo m ers asked for it
.Q
\ 0 ) because he w anted to prevent som ething from happening
TP
c . because it w as fashionable
D. because he w anted to do som ething different
O

6 . Why did Levi accept J a c o b s offer?
{ a ) because he knew it would pay off
NG
B. because his bu sin ess w as in trouble
c . because he w as looking to expand his b u sin ess
H
D. b ecause Jac o b was a good custom er
N
^ 7. IgL 1873, Levi an d J a c o b _____ .
( a J founded their first com pany.

TR
B. applied for a paten t num ber.
B
'& ) m ade th eir first blue jeans.
00
D. got their first custom ers.

10
GLOSSARY
+3
- lucrative (adj) sinh li, nhiu nhun - patent bng sng ch

P2
- bolt of cloth cun vi, sc vi - paperwork giy t hnh chnh

C
- to rip lm rch - Patent and Trademark Office s cp

- pants ci qun bng pht mnh v cng nhn thng
- rivet con inh tn hiu .
A
H
- base phn pha di, phn y - denim [tn loi vi may qun jeans]
- button fly ca qun - thread si ch
- to pay off (rt cuc) mang li I ch
-
-L
9 PROTECT OUR PLANET WITH CAT!

N
B ack in the 1960s and 70s, the world was. becom ing m ore aw are of
TO
the destructive effects of in du stry on the environm ent an d people were

startin g to th in k seriously about ways of protecting the envonm ent.
NG
O ne m an who w as particularly affected by th is subject w as G erard

Morgan-Grenville. As Morgan-Grenville travelled rou n d earning his liv-

ing as a gardener, he noticed signs of the dam age th a t w as being done

ID
to th e countryside aro u n d him . It w a sn t long before M organ-Grenville

decided th a t he h ad to do som ething ab o u t this situation. He felt th a t if
B
people could be show n a better way of living th en maybe they w ould be

interested enough to try to protect their precious environm ent.
19
Mr Morgan-Grenville decided to set up a project th a t would prove

w hat w as happening to o u r su rrou nd ing s an d w hat' could be done
ab ou t it. So, in 1975, Morgan-Grenville created th e C entre for A lterna-
tive Technology (CAT) in a village in Wales.
N
The m ain aim of CAT is to search for a n ecologically b etter -way of
NH
living by u sing technology th a t does n ot h arm the environm ent. One of
the m ost im p ortan t things CAT did initially w as to explore a n d dem on-
UY
strate a wide range of techniques and to point o u t w hich ones h a d the
least destructive resu lts on the world aro u n d u s. It is also very im por-
.Q
ta n t for CAT to provide inform ation and advice to people all over B ritain
TP
and all over the world. If m ore a n d m ore individuals are inform ed ab ou t
O
how m uch dam age o u r m odem lifestyle is doing to th e planet, m aybe

m ore of them would be prepared to look for solutions.
The point ab o u t CAT is th a t by com bining theoretical an d practical
NG
ideas, it h a s show n w ays in w hich people, n a tu re and technology can
exist together successfully. CAT' now covers m any them es, including
H
energy-saving techniques, good use of land, the correct m an agem ent of
N
w aste prod ucts, recycling and health a n d food issu es. Visitors to CAT
are able to observe m any new ways of living, all of w hich are ecologi-
TR
cally correct a n d u se u p less of our valuable raw m aterials. For exam -
ple, th e sewage system s a t CAT th a t get rid of all th e w aste from the
B
00
kitchens an d bathroom s are organised so a s to be completely environ-

10
m entally friendly, and m uch of the energy used a t the centre is created
by power from, the su n , wind or rain. In addition, all th e building m eth -
+3
ods u sed are ecologically ideal an d no chem icals are u sed a t the centre;
P2
for instance, no chem icals are used in gardening or cleaning. Every-

C
th ing is based on th e use of n atu ra l products.

One m ajor global problem is the dam age done to the whole p lanet by
A
the effects of ind u stiy . Problem s su ch a s global w arm ing, th e holes in

H
the ozone layer, the d estruction of huge areas of forests, an d pollution

in our atm osphere are all connected to the fact th a t there is an in -
-
crease in industry. Now, a t last, this problem is being recognised

-L
worldwide.
People now agree th a t we w ant clean air, p ure drinking w ater, safe
N
sunlight an d h ealthy food. W hat CAT is trying to do is to dem o nstrate

TO
th a t we can have all those things w ithout the environm ent paying the
price. Slowly, CAT is com m unicating its m essage to cou n tries across
NG
the world. In E urope, several co untries have set up sim ilar ecological
centres to look a t alternative environm entally friendly technology. The

w orkers a t CAT hope th a t one day there will be so m any centres all over
the world th a t governm ents an d m anagers of in d u stry will s ta rt to
ID
change th eir ideas an d will th in k more carefully ab o u t the environ-

B
m ent. Once th is h ap p en s, the possibilities for protecting o u r beautiful

planet will be endless.
20

1. Mr M organ-Grenville w as worried ab ou t _ _ _

the dam age h is gardening was doing to title countryside,
N
th e countryside being harm ed,
people protecting the environm ent.
NH
D. w hat h e did for a living in the countryside.
UY
2. One of the m ain aim s of CAT i s _____ '
A. to use better technology to h arm the environm ent.
.Q
B. to u se less technology in the envonm ent.
TP
to stop using technology th a t does not h arm th e environm ent,
to u se technology th a t causes less dam age to the environm ent.
O

3. W hich one of the following statem ents is tru e?
NG
\ a ) c a t u ses a m ixture of theory and practice to explain its m es-
sage.
H
B. CAT only u ses practical solutions to explain its m essage. -
c. CAT h a s dem onstrated how successful its theories are.
N
D. CAT believes it would be better if technology d id n t exist.
4. Visitors to CAT _____ TR
A. can u se valuable raw m aterials.
B
* B. are all ecologically correct.
00
< c ) can see new ideas in practice.

10
D. can see valuable raw m aterials. .

+3
5. The increase in in du stry w orldw ide _____

P2
(X ^ has led to an increase in environm ental problem s.

C
B. is due to the dam age done to the whole planet,

c. is a resu lt of efforts to protect the environm ent.
A
D. h a s been ca used by problem s like global warm ing.

H
6 . The w orkers a t CAT are h o p in g ______

-
A. th a t their m anagers will sta rt to change industry.

-L
( b )th a t th eir ideas will be used ail over the world,

c. th a t o u r beautiful planet will end.
N
* th a t it can protect governm ents an d m anagers worldwide.

TO
GLOSSARY
NG
- the Centre for Alternative Technol- - theme ch

ogy Trung Tm s Dng cng Ngh - waste products cc cht thi, ph

Thay Th phm
- initially (adv) lc ban u - sewage system h thng x J cht
ID
- theoretical (adj) thuc v [ thuyt thi

B
21-
10 c ANUNWELCOME GUEST : .
O f th e e In -seven people m the UK who caim to-have seen a ghost,
the m ajority ''are 1women.* T h is m ay' be because woi&rhve fax, more
N
association w ifevihe-spirit->worldv-W-omen t r u s t their.-erootions an d are
generally b e tte r .able th a n .men to,cope with the unexpected.---..
NH
Housewife Fiona Blair describes hersetf a s very practical-and down-
to-earth, an d never believed in the idea th a t a house could be h au n ted .
UY
T hat all changed w hen she an d h er family moved into a m an or h ouse
.Q
in the Midris. Although the surveyor reckoned th a t th e ho use re-
TP
quired ., lot -of atten tio n and w as som ew hat dam p, they th o u g h t it w as
stunning. They could ju s t afford it and it would be a good investm ent,
O
so they took the plunge an d decided to buy it.

Nonetheless, right from the start, Fiona had a strange sense th a t
they were not alone in the house. One of her teenage d au g h ters h ad left
NG
a towel over the back of a chair in the kitchen. Fiona w as in the garden,
and when she re tu rn ed to the house, the towel w as over the kitchen
H
table like a tablecloth. On other occasions the family would find th a t
objects su c h a s glasses an d vases had been tu rn ed upside-dow n.
N
This w as only the sta rt of the peculiar happenings. A particularly
TR
strange incident happened on Fiona's birthday. Fionas h u sb an d , Mark,
came hom e from work an d w ent into the living room. He im m ediately
B
came ru sh in g o u t to ask who had bought h e r the beautiful flowers -
00
b ut nobody had given Fiona flowers an d h er d au g h ters h ad n ot p u t the

10
flowers there. It rem ained a m ystery how they had m iraculously a p -

peared.
+3
Fiona w as curious an d decided to find o ut ab o u t th e h istoiy of the

P2
house. W hat she discovered w as ra th er alarm ing. A pparently a young

C
girl, servant to a previous generation of ow ners, h ad been found dead

in peculiar circum stances in the attic. Fiona an d h e r family inevitably
A
began to feel claustrophobic and trapped in th e house, an d eventually

H
decided th a t they would have to move.

U nfortunately, things were not a s simple as th at. Each tim e they a t-
-
tem pted to show the h ouse to potential buyers, Fiona w ould of course
-L
en su re beforehand th a t everything was n ea t an d tidy in order to m ake

a good im pression. B ut by ,the time anyone arrived, the entire house
N
would be in a com plete m ess, and visitors com plained of an u n p le asa n t

atm osphere. Eventually, after m any m onths, a n A m erican couple
TO
viewed the house, an d decided it had a certain attraction. For som e

NG
reason, the ghost did n ot play its u su a l tricks, an d Fiona w as able to

sell w hat h a d been h er dream hom e.

Now living in a spacious m odem ap artm en t in London, Fiona w ants

to forget it all an d move on w ith h er life. At one point I th o u g h t I m ight
ID
be going ou t of my m ind, it w as all so frightening. We can alm ost laugh

B
about it all now, b u t I hope we never experience anything like th a t

again.
22

1. Why did the w riter and h er h u sb an d w ant to move into th e house
N
NH
c . They knew som eone im portant had lived there.
D. They were looking for a house to m odernise.
UY
2. After they moved in, th e y ______
.Q
A. began to h e a r strange noises in the attic.
TP
realised th a t the ho use was incredibly cold,
discovered th a t objects were being moved.
O
D. broke a lot of glasses.

3. W hat happened on Fionas birthday?
NG
A. Her d au g h ters bought h er flowers.
There w as an unexplained occurrence.
H
c . A burglar broke into the living room.
D. M ark forgot to buy a present.
N
A wix
4. W hat h ad h appened to the servant girl?
TR
She h ad killed h erself in the attic.
B
B. She w as m urdered by the owners,
00
c . She had been locked in the attic.

10
( She died in the house.

+3
5. W hat did th e ghost do w hen they decided to sell the house?

P2
' A. It disappeared im mediately.

It m ade people viewing it feel unwelcome,
C
c . It tidied th e house.
A
D. It m ade horrible noises.

H
6 . W hat does it {first sentence of the la st paragraph) refer to?

the h ouse she lived in
-
B. the m odem ap a rtm en t

-L
(c ) th e experience she h ad
N
D. the sale of the house

TO
GLOSSARY
NG
- spirit 1) tinh thn 2) tm linh 3) bng - stunning (adj) tuyt vi, rt hay
ma - to be turned upside-down b lt p

- down-to-earth (adj) thc t - attic rm thng, gc xp

- haunted (adj) (nh) b ma m - claustrophobic (adj) cm thy s khi
ID
- the Midlands vng Trung Nguyn ( trong khng gian ng kn

Anh) - to play tricks gi tr chc ph
B
- surveyor nhn vin a chnh - spacious (adj) rng mnh mng

- to reckon cho l, on l - to g 'oyt of one's mind pht in
23
\ recen t survey ,of-crime: statistics show s :rth a t:we r.' all mo re likely
: to be.;brgld: now ttiah- 20 ;y ears ago' and' thei p o & ^ ady-veryone to
N
take a.few sim ple p re c a u tio n st; p rotect their-H om es|:: .
NH
The first fact IS ^ t b u r g l a r s o t h e r .'intruders prefer, easy oppor-
tu nities, like a h o u se w hich is- very obviously 1em pty This .is,m uch le s s :
UY
of a challenge th a n a n occupied house, a n d one w hichr is well-
protected. A b u rglar will wonder if it is w orth th e bother. '.
.Q
There are some general tips on how to avoid y our hom e becom ing
TP
an o th er crim e statistic. Avoid leaving signs th a t your h o u se is em pty.
O
W hen you have to go out, leave a t least one light on a s well a s a radio

or television, a n d do n o t leave any c u rta in s wide open. The sight of
your late st m usic centre or com puter is enough to tem pt any burglar.
NG
Never leave a sp are key in a convenient hiding place. The first place
H
a bu rglar will look is u n d e r th e doorm at or in a flower pot a n d even
som ew here m ore im aginative could soon be uncovered by the in-
N
truder. It is m uch safer to leave a key w ith a neighbour you can tru st.
B ut if your h o u se is in a quiet, desolate a rea be aw are th a t th is will be
TR
a b u rg lars dream , so d eter any potential crim inal from approaching
B
your h o use by fitting security lights to th e outside of.your h ouse.
00
B ut w hat could h ap p e n if, in spite of the aforem entioned _jgecauz;

10
tions, a burg lar or in tru d er h a s decided to target y our hom e. Windows

+3
are usu ally th e first point of entry for m any in trud ers. D ow nstairs w in-
dows provide easy access while u p sta irs windows can be reached with
P2
a ladder or by clim bing up th e drainpipe. Before going to bed you

C
should double-check th a t all windows an d sh u tte rs are locked. No m at-

ter how sm all y o u r windows may be, it is surp risin g w hat narrow gap
A
a determ ined b u rg lar ca n m anage to get th roug h. For ex tra security, fit
H
window locks to th e inside of th e window.

-
W hat ab o u t entry via doors? Your back door and patio doors, w hich
-L
a re easily forced open, should have top quality security locks fitted.
Even though th is is expensive it will be money well spent. Install a b u r-
N
glar alarm if you can afford it a s a n o th er line of defence a g a in st in tru d -

TO
ers.
A sobering fact is th a t n ot all in tru d ers have to b reak a n d e n ter into
NG
a property. Why go to th e trouble of breaking in if you ca n ju s t knock

and be invited in? Beware of bogus officials or w orkm en and , p a rtic u -

larly if you are elderly, fit a chain an d a n eye hole so you can scru tin ise
ID
callers a t y o u r leisure. W hen you do have callers never let anybody into
your hom e u n le ss you are absolutely su re they are genuine. Ask t see
B
a n identity card, for example.
24

If you are in the frightening position of w aking in the m iddle of the

night and th in k you can h ea r an intruder, th en on no acco un t should
N
you app roach the in trud er. Far better to telephone the police an d wait
for help.
NH
1 . A w eil-protected h o u s e _____
UY
(A jis less likely to be burgled.
.Q
(B J is regarded a s challenge by m ost crim inals.
TP
C: is a lot of Bother to m aintain.
D. is very unlikely to be burgled.
O

2. According to th e w riter, we s h o u ld _____ _
A. avoid leaving our ho use empty.
NG
B. only go ou t w hen we have to.
c. always keep the cu rtain s closed. '
H
give the im pression th a t our house is occupied w hen we go out.
N
3. The w riter th in k s th a t hiding a key u n d er a doorm at or flower pot
TR
(Â) is a predictable place to hide it.
B
B. is a useful place to hide it.
00
c. is im aginative.
10
D. is where you always find a spare key.

+3
4. The aforem entioned precautio ns refer to steps t h a t _____

P2
A. will tell a burglar if your house is em pty or not.

C
0 are the m ost im portant precautions to take to m ake your hom e

safe.
A
c . will stop a potential burglar

H
D. will n ot stop an in tru d er if he h a s decided to try and en ter your

-
home.
-L
5. Gaining entry to a h ouse through a sm all w indo w _____

N
A. is surprisingly difficult.
(BJ is not as difficult as people think.
TO
c . is less likely to hap pen th a n gaining entry thro ug h a door.

D. is tried only by very determ ined burglars.
NG
6 . According to the writer, window locks, security locks a n d b urglar

a la r m s _____
ID
( j p c o s t a lot of money b u t are w orth it.

B. are -good value for money,
B
c. are luxury item s.

D. are absolutely essential item s.
25
N
pVgives you tim e to check if the visitor is genuine.
NH
8 . The b est title for the text is
A. Increasing Household Crime.
UY
Protecting Your Home from Intru d ers
.Q
xf. W hat To Do If A B urglar B reaks into Your Home.
TP
D. Burglary Statistics.
GLOSSARY
O

- survey cuc kho st - point of entry im t nhp, !i vo
- crime statistics s iu thng k cc - drainpipe ng xi
NG
v phm ti - to double-check kim tra k
- to burgle a house vo n trm mt - shutter l c s
H
ngi nh determined (adj) quyt tm
- take precautions p dng cc bin - pato khong sn ngoi nh
N
php phng - money well spent tin tiu ng ch
- intruder k t nhp - line of defence phng tuyn
- occupied (adj) ang c ngdi bn TR
- sobering (adj) ng suy glm
trong - Beware of sth Hy co chng ci gi
B
- bother s bn tm, s b cng
00
- bogus (adj) gi mo, mo danh, bt

- music centre dn my nghe nhc hp l
10
- to tempt cm d - chain dy xch

+3
- doormat tm thm ch chn ca - eye hoe l nh trn ca quan st

- to uncover pht hin, khm ph
P2
ngi ng ngoi
- to leave sth with sb gi ci gi li ni - to scrutinise quan st k
C
ai - caller ngi gh thm

- aforementioned (aj) c k ra trn - to do sh at one's leisure lm g mt
A
y cch th th khng cn gp gp
H
- to target sth chn ci gi [m mc tiu, - identity card giy t ty thn, th cn

nhm ti ci gi cc
-
-L
12 HEALTHY LIVING FOR TEENAGERS

N
Food
In a recent governm ent survey on healthy eating teen s scored only 5
TO
out of 10 {8 indicated a healthy diet an d 6 a p a ssa b le one). Only 1 in

NG
10 teens e a ts th e recom m ended am o u nt of fruit and the only vegetable

th a t m any teens eat is chips. Most teens in the developed w orld are

eating too m uch b u t are still n ot getting the vital n u trie n ts to help them
grow and stay healthy. More inform ation abou t nu tritio n and healthy-
ID
eating is needed to help young people eat properly. Teens w ho diet of-
B
ten cut ou t food they need, such as bread or milk, because they th in k it
is fattening.
26

O thers d o n t know w hat foods to choose in the s.chool canteen in order

to have a balanced diet. There is a saying you are w h at you ea t. So if
N
you w an t to become the next David Beckham th en y o u d b etter sta rt
eating properly.
NH
Exercise
UY
Lack of m oney in schools plus increased p re ssu re to .do well in the
course exam s m eans th a t teenagers are doing less sport in school th an
.Q
ever before. Giris, in particular, are more likely to suffer from lack of
TP
exercise a n d u p to 4 in 10 girls stop playing spo rts in th eir early teen -
O
age years. J u s t because you a re n t sporty doesnt m ean you can 't be

active. W alk or cycle to school instead of taking th e bus. Help at home
w ith the housew ork or gardening. Go dancing w ith your friends. There
NG
are lots of ways you can stop being a couch potato L
H
Sleep
If we. are w hat we eat th en sleep is like food for the brain. Teens need
N
a t least 9 h o u rs sleep every night and even mild sleepiness can affect
TR
your perform ance, h u m o u r an d health. Lack of sleep can m ake you
tired, angry or depressed. Nearly 40% of secondary school stu d en ts go
B
to bed after 11 p.m . on school nights and 15% of teen s say they have
00
fallen asleep during class. In the USA some schools are startin g classes
10
a t 10 a.m . so th a t teens can get some extra sleep. These schools have
+3
noticed an im provem ent in their stu d e n ts work.

P2
C
1. The text-suggests th a t teenagers

A. are healthier th a n their p aren ts were.
A
B. d o n t have enough inform ation abou t healthy eating and life-

H
style.
c. sleep m ore th a n is needed.
-
D. do m ore spo rts in schools th an before.

-L
2. According to the text, teens who go on a diet cu t down o n _____

N
. vegetables.
TO
B. bread an d milk,
c. chips.
NG
D. m eat.

3. . Most teens in th e developed w o rld ____^

ID
A. eat too m uch b u t are not eating healthy food.

B. eat properly and stay healthy.
B
G. e at less an d grow and stay healthy.

D. eat a lot of vegetables and healthy food.
27
4. Schools p u t p re ssu re on stu d en ts t o _____

A. do well in sports.
B. improve th eir physical condition,
N
c . do well in course exam s.
D. take a b us instead of walking or cycling to school.
NH
5. According to the text, m any secondary school s tu d e n ts on school
n ig h ts _____
UY
A. sleep a t least 9 hours.
.Q
B. feel angry or depressed,
c . play com puter gam es.
TP
D. go to bed after 1 1 p.m.
O
6 . According to the text, some schools in the USA have changed the

startin g tim e of lessons b e c a u s e _____
A. they w anted to please th eir students.
NG
B. they w anted to improve stu d en ts' perform ance,
H
c. p aren ts insisted on changing the time.
D. teach ers com plained about how unm otivated th e stu d e n ts were.
N
GLOSSARY
- to score 1) t c mt im s
2) ghi c (1 bn thng)
TR
- nutrient cht dinh dSng
- sporty (adj) thch/ gii th thao
B
- passable (adj) t yu cu, chp nhn - couch potato ngi nghin xem TV
00
c - depressed (adj) bun b, trm cm

10
- vital (adj) thit yu - unmotivated (adj) thiu hng th

+3
13 GRAFFITI - A DANGEROUS WAY OF LIFE

P2
Scrawling graffiti is seen a s a crime in th e UK, y e t in th e u s it has be-

C
com e a recognized art form.

A
J u s t a few weeks ago eight graffiti gang m em bers were convicted of

H
causing 5,000 w orth of dam age on.the London U nderground. They are
am ong m ore th a n 70 hard-core graffiti artists tho u g h t to be operating
-
in London today. Most are aged u n d e r 20.

-L
Graffiti artists, or graffers, operate in m any B ritish towns. They of-

ten work at night, covering walls, train s and railway statio n s with
N
brightly painted m u rals or scrawls in spray p ain t an d m arker pen.

TO
Some people regard graffiti as a form of vandalism an d a m enace.

London U nderground says th a t railusers find it ugly an d offensive. It
NG
spends 2 m a year dealing with graffiti, and h a s even introduced train s

with graffiti-resistant paint. We dont th ink its artistic or creative - it's

vandalism . Its a huge n u isan ce to ou r custom ers, an d its ugly an d of-

fensive, says Serena Holley, a spokesw om an for th e London U nder-
ID
ground. It creates a sense of an archy an d ch ao s, says R ichard

B
M andel, a b arriste r who prosecuted th e graffiti gang. P assengers feel

as if the whole rail system is out of control.
28

B ritish T ran sport Police h a s a graffiti u n it designed to catch graffers

in the act. It sp en t five m onths tracking down the recently prosecuted
gang.
N
Graffiti a rt can also be a dangerous pastim e. The London U nder-
NH
ground says th a t som e teenagers have died in accidents during n o ctu r-
nal graffiti ra id s.
UY
However, o th ers say th a t graffiti a t its best is an a rt form. Art galler-
.Q
ies in London an d New York have exhibited work by increasingly fa-
TP
m ous graffiti artists. Of course graffiti is art. Theres no question ab o u t
th a t, says David Grob, director of the Grob Gallery in London. Even
O
some of those who think graffiti is wrong adm it th a t graffers are ta l-

ented. Its ju s t th a t their artistic talent is channeled in the wrong di-
rection, says Barry Kogan, a barrister who represented Declan Rooney,
NG
one of the gang m em bers.
H
There is a difference between good graffiti an d vandalism , says
Dean Colman, a 24-year-old graffiti artist. Id never spray private
N
property, like som eones house. Some graffiti are disgusting. Theres a
TR
big difference betw een th a t an d graffiti w hich can brighten u p grey
w alls.
B
D ean m akes a living as a graffiti artist. His days of illegal spraying
00
are behind him, he says. He h a s w orked on a television program m e

10
about graffiti, designed a- series of governm ent posters, an d decorated

+3
nightclubs. He h a s exhibited his work a t B attersea Arts Centre in Lon-

P2
don, a n d he h a s tau g h t graffiti-spraying in youth clubs.

Dean sees him self a s an artist, and thin ks th a t graffiti a rt does not
C
get du e recognition. Theres no graffiti art in the Tate Gallery an d there

A
should be, he says. Graffiti is a valid a s any other a rt form .

H
1. The graffiti a rtists arrested recently in London w e re _____ .

-
A. p u t in prison
-L
B. fined 5,000
c. wrongly accused
N
D. found guilty
TO
2. The attitu d e of London U nderground is th a t graffiti_____

A. is a kind of art, b u t a problem because som e passengers d o nt
NG
like it.

B. is som ething to be stopped at all cost.

c. is irritating b u t they have more serious problem s to worry
ID
about.
B
D. is causin g the price of tickets to go up and therefore needs to be

stopped.
29

.B. s p e n t ' W l o t t o ct cr a;gronp of graffiti artists.
N
. c . have recently'critcee the'behavionof.the -London Under-
grounxk 1 ' ' *-
NH
. ,D. don't.know w hat'to.do.about:the problem . ^
UY
4. i B ry Kogaik', who defended one of th e convicted grafiitivartists,.
''Ytlmks.tKev-~ ' I
.Q
: sho,uld ishow th eir work in a rt galleries.
TP
VB-.should not have been convicted.
; G. stold u se th eir abilities in different ways.
O
D. should be m ore careful w hen working in the U nderground.

5. D ean Colman
NG
A. h a s never broken the law.
B. is concerned ab o u t how little he earn s from h is work w ith graf-
H
fiti.
c. would like to see graffiti taken more seriously by th e rt world.
N
D. is worried about young people taking u p graffiti-spraying.
6 . The w rite r_____ TR
B
A. is for people who draw graffiti.
00
B. is ag ain st people who draw graffiti,

10
c. po ints h is opinion quite unclearly.

D. sup po rts th e attitu d e of the London U nderground tow ards
+3
graffers.
P2
C
GLOSSARY
- graffiti s vit/v by - anarchy tnh trng v chnh ph
A
H
- gang nhm/ bng ng chaos tnh trng hn lon

- to be convicted of b buc vo ti - barrister lut s
-
- hard-core (adj) trung kin, ct cn - to prosecute truy t

- mural tranh tng, bch ha - to catch sb in the act bt qu tang ai
-L
- scrawl ( ) vit ch nguch ngoc; (r) - to track sb down truy lng ai

N
ch nguch ngoc - nocturnal (adj) hot ng v m

- spray paint sn xt t bnh kh nn - raid cuc b rp, cuc lng bt
TO
- marker pen bt nt n - to channel truyn i, chuyn i

- vandalism hnh vi ph hoi ca cng - spray phun sn
NG
- menace mi e da - to brighten sth up [m cho ci g sng

- rail user khch i tu ha ln

- offensive (adj) gy kh chu - the Tate Gallery [tn phng trng by

ID
- graffiti-resistant paint loi sn chng ngh thut London]

vit v by - due (adj) ng ra phi c (hng)
B
- spokeswoman n pht ngn vin
30

14 1 0 1 WAYS TO AVOID STUDYING

The Six-O clock-In-The - Evening-Enthu siastic- D eterm ined-And-W ell-
N
Intentioned-Studier-U ntil-M idnight is a person w ith whom you are
probably already familiar. At 6 oclock he ap proaches his desk, and
NH
carefully organizes everything in preparation for th e stu dy period to fol-
UY
low. Having eveiything in place he next carefully a d ju sts each item
again, giving him self tim e to complete the first excuse: he recalls th a t
.Q
in th e m orning he did no t have quite enough time to read all item s of
TP
in terest in the new spaper. He also realizes th a t if he is going to study it
is b est to have su ch sm all item s completely ou t of the way before set-
O

tling down to th e ta s k a t hand.
He therefore leaves h is desk, browses th roug h th e new spaper and
NG
notices a s he brow ses th a t there are m ore articles of in terest th a n he
ha d originally thought. He also notices, as he leafs thro ugh the pages,
H
th e e n tertain m en t section. At th is point it will seem like a good idea to
plan for the evenings first break - perhaps an interesting half-hour
N
program m e betw een 8 and 8.30 p.m.
TR
He finds the program m e and it inevitably s ta rts a t ab ou t 7.00 p.m.
B
At th is point, he th ink s, Well, IVe h ad a difficult day a n d its n ot too
00
long before the program m e starts, an d I need a re st anyway an d the

10
relaxation will really help m e to get down to studying ... He re tu rn s to

his d esk a t 7.45, b ecau se the beginning of th e next program m e w as
+3
also a bit m ore interesting th a n he thought it would be.

P2
At th is stage, he still hovers over his desk tapping his book re a s s u r-

C
ingly a s he rem em bers th a t phone call to a friend which, like th e arti-

cles of in terest in the new spapers, is b est cleared o ut of th e way before
A
the serious studying begins.

H
The phone call, of course, is m uch more interesting an d longer th an

-
originally planned, b u t eventually the intrepid stu d e n t finds him self

-L
back t h is desk a t ab o u t 8.30 p.m.

At this point in the proceedings he actually sits down a t the desk,
N
opens the book w ith a display of physical determ ination a n d sta rts to
TO
read (usually page one) a s he experiences the first pangs of hu n g er an d

th irst. This is d isastro u s because he realizes th a t the longer he w aits to
NG
satisfy the pangs, the w orse they will get, and the m ore in terru pted his
study concentration will be.

The obvious an d only solution is a light snack. This, in its p re p a ra-

ID
tion, grows a s m ore an d m ore tasty item s are piled onto the plate. The
sn ack becom es a feast.
B
Having removed th is final obstacle the desk is retu rn ed to w ith the

certain knowledge th a t th is time there is nothing th a t could possibly
31

interfere w ith .-the following period of study. ;:The-' .Fst cp of sen -

ten ces' 0X1' page- onp are locked a t again: ... as- :the stu d e n t realizes th a t
his stom ach isfeelin g decidedly, heavy ancLa gerieral::;'droWsiness seem s
to have' set in. ' F ar -.better 'at- th is ju n c tu re t' w atch 'th at .other in terest-
N
ing half-hour program m e a t 10 o clock after w hich th e digestion will be
m ostly com pleted and' th e re st will enable him to really get down to the
NH
ta sk a t hand.
At 12 o clock we find him asleep in front of the TV. Even at this
UY
point, w hen he h a s been w oken u p by whoever com es into th e room , he
.Q
will th ink th a t thing s have not gone too badly, for after all he h a s h a d a
good rest, a good m eal, w atched some interestin g an d relaxing pro-
TP
gram m es, fulfilled h is social com m itm ents to h is friends, digested the
O
d ay s inform ation, an d got everything completely o u t of the way so th a t

tomorrow, at 6 o clock...
NG
1. The stu d en t in fact reads the new spaper in. order t o _____
A. find ou t w hat is on TV.
H
B. avoid beginning work.
c . be able to w ork continuously w ithout a break later.
N
D. keep u p-to-date w ith world events.
TR
2. The stu d en t s ta rts p lanning his first b re a k _____
B
A. w hen he sits down a t his desk a t 6 o clock.
00
B. after working for a very short period..

10
c . while he is reading the new spaper before startin g work.

D. a t 7 p.m.
+3
P2
3. After he w atches television, the stu d e n ts study period is fu rth e r

delayed b e c a u s e ___ _
C
A. he h a s to m ake a n im portant phone call.

A
B. he phones a friend to avoid startin g work.

H
c . he realizes he w ont be able to concentrate u n less he calls h is

friend first.
-
D. he finds w h at his friend says on th e phone very interesting.

-L
4. W hat does th is final obstacle refer to?

N
A. the feast he h a s ju s t eaten

B. th e pangs of hu n g er and th irst he w as experiencing earlier
TO
c . th e phone call he m ade earlier

D. feeling tired
NG
5. The text suggests th a t the next day the p e r s o n _____

A. will be able to study m ore efficiently.

ID
B. will not attem p t to study.

c . will do exactly the sam e thing.
B
D. will feel guilty ab o u t w asting a whole evening.

6 . W hich best describes the w riters attitu d e to the stu d en t he is d e-

scribing?
A. He is angry with him.
N
B. He is gently poking fun a t him.
c . He feels sorry for him.
NH
D. He d o esn t care ab o u t him.
UY
7. The w riter th in k s th a t the re a d e r _____
A. will have had some sim ilar experiences of avoiding studying.
.Q
B. will be am azed .by the behaviour of th is lazy stu dent,
TP
c . will im mediately resolve to be a b etter student.
O
D. will feel guilty abo ut all the tim es they have allowed them selves

to be distracted.
NG
GLOSSARY
H
- to adjust iu chnh, sa Ei cho ngay - to pile chng/.cht cao n
ngn - feast ba i tic
N
- to browse through c lt qua - obstacle chng ngi vt
- to leaf through lt d (cc trang sch) - to interfere with xen vo, gy tr ngi
- break qung tm ngh TR- decidedly (adv) r rt
- to hover over (a place) ng lng - drowsiness cn' bun ng
B
vng bn ci g - to set in ko n, p n
00
- to tap chm tay vo ci g - at this juncture vo lc ny

10
reassuringly (adv) vi v an tm - digestion s tiu ha

+3
- intrepid (adj) iiu lnh, bt mng - commitments to sb ngha v/ bn

P2
- proceedings ot s kin, chui hnh phn i vi ai

ng - to poke fun at sb a ct, ch nho ai
C
- pangs of hunger cm gic i cn co - to resolve to do sth quyt tm lm g

- snack mn n dm
A
H
15 POLAR PURPOSE
-
In 1997, a group of tw enty B ritish women m ade history. Working in

-L
five team s with four women in each team , they walked to the North
N
Pole. A part from one experienced female guide, the o th er women were
all ordinary people who had never done anything like th is in their lives
TO
before. They m anaged to survive in an environm ent which h ad defeated

several very experienced m en during the sam e few spring m onths of
NG
th a t year. Who were these women and how did they succeed where

others failed? .
In 1995 an advertisem ent about a selection for the expedition was
ID
p u t in several B ritish new spapers. Nearly one h u nd red wom en took

B
part in the first selection weekend and then, after several training ex-
peditions designed to weed ou t u nsuitable applicants, twenty women
33

were'&S.en.iiThe youngest, of.'t-hs- w as tw enty-one..and'the o ld est fifty-

oii.: M ''&>'gûp> thre'-.was- . o th e r of triplets, a te a c h e r^ :flig h t- a t -
tenHant.andevenproducer.
- They.-werea-m ikedbuiic-h b u t they -all really w ajnteti'to'take p a rt in
N
ie. venture-and. ma'ke it a .success. Each of th e wom en agreed to raise
NH
th e 2500 needed ' for the expenses a n d the airfare to .Canada, w here
the expedition began. They also com m itted them selves to following a n
UY
intensive physical training program m e before leaving th e UK so th a t
they were fit enough to take p a rt in the expedition w ithout endangering
.Q
their own or o th e rs lives.
TP
The wom en set off a s soon a s they were ready. Once in the ice, each
O
wom an h ad to ski along while dragging a sledge weighing over 50 kilos.

This would n o t have been too bad on a sm ooth surface, b u t for long
stretches, the Arctic ice is p u sh ed u p into huge m ou nd s two or three
NG
m etres high and the sledges h a d to be h au led up one side a n d carefully
let down th e o th er side so th a t they did nt sm ash. The tem p eratu re was
H
always below freezing point and som etim es strong w inds m ade walking
N
while pulling so m uch weight alm ost im possible. It w as also very diffi-
cult to p u t up th eir ten ts when they stopped each night.
TR
In su ch conditions the women were m aking good progress if they
covered fourteen of fifteen .kilom eters a day. B ut th ere w as an oth er
B
00
problem. P art of the journey w as across a frozen sea w ith moving w ater
10
u n d e rn e ath th e ice an d at some points the team would drift b ack m ore
th a n five kilom eters du ring th e night. T hat m eant th a t after walking in
+3
these very h a rs h conditions, for ten h o u rs on one day, they h ad to

P2
spend p art of th next day covering the sam e ground again. F u rth e r-
C
more, each day it would take three h o u rs from w aking u p to setting off
an d an o th er three h o u rs every evening to set u p the cam p and prepare
A
the evening meal.

H
So, how did they m anage to succeed? They realised th a t they were
p art of a team . If any one of them didn't pull h er sledge or get h er job
-
done, she would be jeopardizing the su ccess of the whole expedition.

-L
Any form of selfishness could result in the efforts of everyone else being
N
completely w asted, so personal feelings had to be p u t to one side. At

the end of th eir journey, the women agreed th a t it w as m ental effort far
TO
more th a n physical fitness th a t got them to the North Pole.

NG
1. W hat w as so extraordinary about the expedition?

A. There w as no one to lead it.

B. The women did not have any m en w ith them .
ID
c. It w as a new experience for. m ost of the women.

B
D. The women h ad not m et one an o th er before.
34

2. W hat did the women who answ ered the ad vertisem ent have in
com m on?
A. They were about the sam e age.
N
B. They had all suffered pain an d discomfort,
c. They all h ad plenty of money.
NH
D. They all w anted to achieve a goal.
UY
3. W hat does underlined th ese refer to?
A. all the- app licants
.Q
B. the training expeditions
TP
c . the women who w ent on the trip
O
D. the unsu itable applicants

4. W hat did each wom an have to do before the sta rt of the expedition?
A. visit C anada B. get fit
NG
: c. learn to ski . . . D. m eet the other women
H
5. On the expedition, th e women had to be careful to av o id _____
A. falling over on the ice. B. being left behind,
N
c . dam aging the sledges. D. getting too cold at night.
TR
6 . It w as difficult for the women to cover 15 kilom etres a day because
B
00
A, they got too. tired.

10
B. the ice w as moving,

c. they kept getting lost.
+3
D. the tem p eratu res were too low.

P2
7. W hat is the m ain m essage of the text?

C
A. Motivation an d team work achieve goals.

A
B. Women can do anything they want.

c. It is som etim es good to experience difficult conditions.
H
D. Arctic conditions are very harsh.

-
GLOSSARY
-L
- to weed sth out loi b ci g ra - stretch vng (t) rng ln tri di

N
- trip le ts nhng a con sinh ba - mound I t, m t, g

- flight attendant tip vin hng khng - to haul sth up ko ci gi ln
TO
- bunch m, bn, l (ngi) - to smash v tan nt

- venture cuc mo him - to drift back tri ngc tr li
NG
- airfare tin v my bay - harsh (adj) khc nghit

- to commit oneself to sth cam kt lm - to jeopardize lm hi, lm lm nguy

g - selfishness s ch k
- intensive (adj) ro rit, c cng - to be wasted b ing ph, tr nn hoi
ID
cao, chuyn su cng v ch

- siedge xe trt tuyt
B
- mental (adj) thuc tm tr/tnh thn

16
Tennis started in France nearly 1000 y ears ago. The game was
originally played in th e courtyards of royal palaces, using the w alls (like
N
squash) ra th e r th a n a n e t One of the G rand Slam to u rn am e n ts tak es
place in W imbledon every year. The Tournament or The Fortnight, a s the
NH
B ritish call the W imbledon Tennis C ham pionships, is very im p o rtan t to
the English.
UY
So here you are, standing in the queue to buy your ticket to w atch
.Q
the m atches. Everybody is waiting for their tu rn to get inside. Nobodv is
TP
pushing. If you are English, you will have all the necessary thing s with
you: a therm os of tea (of course), a folding cha ir and (surprise, s u r-
O

prise) an umbrella!
At last you go through the gates, and you discover the atm osphere.
NG
People are sitting un d er their um brellas enjoying the B ritish w eather.
H
The atm osphere is calm and controlled. You feel as if you are in a select
private club - and, in fact, you are. The gardens are su p erb (well, you
N
are in England...). Eveiy year 3,500 geranium s are planted!
TR
W hat is so special about Wimbledon? Well, it is the oldest to u rn a -
m ent in the world, an d th e last of the big four cham pio nships to be
B
played on n a tu ra l grass. The American, A ustralian an d French C ham -
00
pionships are played on cem ent, artificial g rass and clay. All the play-
10
ers m u st d ress only in white. W imbledon is free from sponsorship,

+3
which m akes it different from alm ost all other sporting events. This
P2
m eans th a t there are no advertising b an n e rs aro u n d the courts. The

people who come to w atch the m atches, com pared to those who watch
C
m any other international to urn am ents, are well disciplined. You can
only som etim es h ea r sh o uts or w histles when a player p repares to
A
serve. And if any sp ectator behaves badly, he or she m ay be asked to

H
leave.
-
You think th a t the English are very serious ten n is fans. B ut if you
-L
w ant a good place, you may well find one aro u n d 4 p.m. W here h as
N
everybody gone? Look in the tents: they are having straw berries and
tea. After all, ten n is is ju s t one of many traditions, an d the English like
TO
to continue them a l l - especially tea!

(Adapted from ! Love English, 1994)
NG
1. The Fortnight i s _____

A. ano th er nam e for the G rand Slam tournam ents.

B. the original nam e for a game sim ilar to squash.
ID
c. the nam e of one of the two W imbledon to urnam ents.

D. an o th er nam e for the Wimbledon C ham pionships.
B
36
\

2. To en te r W imbledon you have t o _____

A. wait in a line of people.
N
B. book the tickets earlier,
c . have your own chair.
NH
D. belong to the club.
UY
3. W hich of these sentences is true?
A. Most of the courts at W imbledon have artificial grass.
.Q
B. Only the W imbledon to u rn am ent is played on n atu ra l grass,
TP
c. The Wimbledon cham pionships are played on cem ent or clay.
D. All four Grand Slam T ournam ents are played on n a tu ra l grass.
O

4. S pectators a t W im bledon _____
A. never behave badly during a m atch.
NG
B. leave w hen a player serves badly,
c. do no t often sh out during a m atch.
H
D. are given special discipline rules.
N
5. It is easier to find a seat a t 4 o'clock b e c a u s e _____ .
A. English spectators go to some special tents.
TR
B. it is an English tradition to go hom e for tea.
B
c. m ost of the spectators leave Wimbledon.
00
D. serious tennis fans come in the morning.

10
6 . The text is m ainly a b o u t _____

+3
A. th e m ost popular spo rts in England.

P2
B. the history of tennis cham pionships,

c . the ten nis to u rn ain en ts a t Wimbledon.
C
D. different English custom s and traditions.

A
H
GLOSSARY
- courtyard ci sn trong - sponsorship s ti tr
-
- tournament gii thi u . - advertising banner di bng qung co

-L
- thermos bnh thy - well disciplined (adj) c tinh thn ki

- folding chair gh xp
N
lut, trt t
- select (adj) (cu lc b) dnh ring - whistle ting hut so
TO
- geranium cy hoa phong l tho - strawberry tri du ty

- day t st; (tennis) sn t nn. - to serve pht bng, giao bng
NG
- to be free from sth (adj) hon ton

khng c ci g

ID
B

17 . , . '4 r ^g: '

H ave -/hear':frmis'hers? -They.are:people who :$nvelpg->sledges.
Every, year, or tfoe^ferst'Satttrday-'in--'March,. ,6:;o 75 tam ;;of';m ushers
N
-from- around--the .world istaiS;-:th e [Idifarod, f:lt^Jami|s:-sled-dog
NH
race. The ;raee goes from Anchorage^, t ie,.ciy>f ;
H q w did,the Iitrod start?.:Irr 925, th ere -was diphtheria epidem ic
UY
.Q
TP
sib l: S ilf t-iien -the train lines stopped. There were Stm-.v525 m iles to
cross in fa: cold, hostile environm ent. There w as only one solution. The
O
first dog team left on J a n u a ry 28th, with tem p eratu res of -45CC! Men

and their dogs tran sp o rted the serum , w arm ing it occasionally. On
February 2nd, the serum finally arrived in Nome. H u ndreds of children
NG
were saved.
H
The Iditarod w as started in 1973 to com m em orate this. The ro u te is
symbolically 1049 miles long: 1000 (a ro un d num ber) plus 49 (Alaska
N
is th e 49th U.S. state}. The race sta rts in Anchorage: a team leaves
every two m inutes. There are more th an .twenty checkpoints on the Idi-
TR
tarod, some in Eskim o villages. The m u sh e rs dogs are H uskies, Mala-
B
m utes an d Sam oyeds. These dogs love to ru n , to m ake their m asters
00
happy, and th eir m asters w ant to come first in the race.

10
The lead dogs are the ones who best obey' the m u s h e rs com m ands.
+3
They are generally the m u sh e rs 5 favorites. W hen the dogs are not ru n -
P2
ning, they live outside, attac h ed on long ch a in s n ea r a dog house.

Many m u sh e rs raise their own dogs. O thers borrow or re n t them . A
C
m u sh er knows all his dogs 5nam es and he som etim es h a s 150 dogs!
The m u sh ers come from England, Germany, J a p a n , France, A ustra-
A
H
lia an d the U.S. They travel across m ou ntains, the frozen Yukon River,
forests and ice fields, all in the horrible cold. With tem p eratu res of -
-
55c, the m u sh ers have to w ear warm clothes. They do it for th e love of
-L
it, b u t there are m any dangers, too: dangers of being lost, getting stuck
in th e snow, bad w eather, and anim als th a t can attac k th e dogs. The
N
race is difficult. B u t'to the people who do the Iditarod, the A laskan si-
TO
lence is the m ost beautiful sound .in the world. They really enjoy it.
(Adapted from I Love English, 1995)
NG

1. The Iditarod is a race in which 6 0 -7 5 _____

A. people from the area take part.
ID
B. children from Nome take part.

B
c . organised groups take part.

D. types of dogs take part.
38

2. The serum to protect the children got to Nome

A. by two m eans of transport.
N
B. w ith the help of dogs only,
c. by p assen g er train only'.
NH
D. by m edical inland post.
UY
3. The Iditarod team s lea v e _____
A. all at the sam e time. B. one after another,
.Q
c. two per m inute. D. two a t a time.
TP
4. The m u s h e r s _____
O
' A. rarely know their dogs nam es.

B. do no t need to have their own dogs,
c. always borrow th eir dogs.
NG
D. always have their own dogs.
H
5. The people who take p art in the itaro lik e _____
A. dealing w ith difficulties. B. the changing weather,
N
c. the peace an d quiet. D. being in danger.
TR
6 . W hich of these is the best title for the text?
A. Saving the Children o f Nome B. A laskan Hunting Expedition
B
c. Lost in the Snouf D. On Their Way to Win
00
10
GLOSSARY
+3
- dog sledge xe trt tuyt do ch ko - hostile (adj) thiu thn thin, th nghch
P2
- sled-dog race cuc ua ch ko xe - to commemorate tng nim

- symbolically (adv) c tnh tng trng
C
trt tuyt
- diphtheria bnh bch hu - round nmber con s lm trn
- epidemic trn dch - checkpoint trm kim sot
A
H
- serum huyt thanh

-
18
-L
Ever since a Polish Jew invented Esperanto in 1887 in the hopes of

N
fostering a cro ss-cultural community,, cynics have m ocked it a s an ide-

alistic cult for linguistic weirdos. Yet for such an am bitious and
TO
unlikely idea it h a s earned its share of notoriety. Iraq s only Esperanto

teacher w as expelled during the regime. And billionaire benefactor
NG
George Soros owes h is prosperity to the idea: he defected from Com-

m unist Hungary a t the 1946 World E speranto Congress in Switzerland.

To h ea r a growing n u m ber of en th u siasts tell it, the languages m ost
ID
glorious days may actually lie ahead. Though n u m b e rs are h ard to

B
come by - and those available' are h a rd to believe (the Universal E spe-

ranto Society - UES - estim ates 8 million speakers) - the language may
be spreading in developing nations in Africa, Asia an d South America.
39
B ecause s>f ti Internet, .vvve seen a. vast im p ro v em e n ts. th e levels

of com petent 1-sjafeakers-. iri placesîke C h in a.a n d :Brazil, says- Humphrey
T ^kinX tkei'-form ei'presidentofth e Universal E sp eran to A ssociation.
N
M eanwhile,, a sm all com m unity :of.-diehardS'. h a S ; i b e e n . y lobbying to
m ake it theoffiqiaT language of i Erope'n:-nioii. Indeed'; E sp eranto
NH
seem s-perfect for a m odem age, w hen global barrier's are being to m
down by free trade, im m igration and the Internet.
UY
The renew ed en th u siasm for the language w as on display in G oth-
.Q
enburg, Sweden, at .the 88th an n u a l World E speranto C ongress. Some
TP
1,800 m em bers of the Universal E speranto A ssociation - from places as
varied as J a p a n , Israel, Nepal an d Brazil - conversed in w h at sou nd s
O

like a m ixture of overenunciated. Italian an d softly spoken Polish. Or-
ganizers say atten dance outstripped last y ea rs m eeting by alm o st 20
NG
percent. Meanwhile, the num ber of E speranto hom e pages h a s jum ped
from 330 in 1998 to 788 in 2003.
H
So w h a ts the big appeal? Unlike th a t other global language, E spe-
ranto p u ts everyone on a level playing field; native English speakers
N
m ake up only 10 p ercent of the world population, b u t they expect eve-
TR
rybody else to be as articu late a s they are. T hroughout Asia, for exam -
ple, people are conscious of the language problem b ecause they all
B
speak different languages, says J o h n Wells, professor of phonetics at
00
University College London. Some are questioning w hether they have to

10
use English as their language for wider com m unication or w hether

+3
there is some other possible solution.

P2
The m ajority of E speranto speakers still live in Europe, w here the

C
language w as invented by Ludovic Zamenhof, u n d e r the pseudonym

Doktoro E speranto (meaning one who hopes). B ack in his time, peo-
A
ple were draw n to E speranto because it is five tim es easier to learn

H
th a n English an d ten tim es sim pler th a n R ussian.

Nowadays, E uropean E speranto speakers tend to be older throw-
-
backs of the cold-w ar era though, as sources report, stu d e n ts in Po-

-L
land an d H ungary can still earn PhDs in the language. Many believe
N
the popularity of the language in the developing world is being fueled

by growing resen tm en t of English as the language of global com m erce
TO
and political rhetoric. B ush a n d Blair have become E sp eran to s best

friends, jokes Probal D asgupta, professor of linguistics a t Indias U ni-
NG
versity of H yderabad. Globalization h a s p u t a wind in o u r sails, m ak -

ing it possible for people to have in terest in E speranto a s n ot only a

language, b u t a social idea. Sim ilar hopes have been voiced from the
ID
m om ent Z am enhof .first came u p w ith his egalitarian lingo. B ut in to-

B
days rapidly shrinking world, the timing cou ld nt be better.

(Abridged from Newsweek, August 2003)
40

1. In the first parag rap h, the w riter m e n tio n s_____

A. two people who survived th an k s to Esperanto.
N
B. the nam e of the m an who invented Esperanto.
c . the year w hen E speranto gained popularity.
NH
D. th e idea th a t lay behind Esperanto.
UY
2. From the first paragraph, we can infer th a t George S o ro s _____
A. w as one of the participants a t the 1946 World E speranto Con-
.Q
gress in Switzerland.
TP
B. becam e very rich th a n k s to Esperanto.
c. d idn t approve of the idea of using Esperanto a s a su b stitu te for
O

his native language.
D. left the H ungarian Com m unist party so th a t he would be free to
NG
use Esperanto.
H
3. The word n u m b e rs , in paragraph two, refers t o ______
A. E speranto u sers all over the world.
N
B. m em bers of the E speranto Society.
c . Internet u se rs who learn Esperanto.
TR
D. sp eakers of E speranto in Asia.
B
4. W hat do you learn abou t the 88 th World E speranto Congress?
00
A. The people present in G othenburg practised a variety of la n -

10
guages.
+3
B. The p articip an ts were encouraged to set up new Esperanto

websites.
P2
c . The nu m b er of its participants exceeded the n u m b er present

C
th e year before.
D. The p articip an ts h ad a n opportunity to see different displays
A
organized there.
H
5. Which of these facts is n ot mentioned a s an advantage th a t E spe-

-
ranto h a s over English?

-L
A. Nobody is privileged to be a native speaker of Esperanto.

B. E speranto is not a s h ard to learn as the English language.
N
c . English is m uch more difficult to pronounce th a n E speranto.

TO
D. More an d m ore people reject English a s a global language.

6 . In the last paragraph, the au th o r of the a rtic le _____
NG
A. explains why E speranto is spoken mainly by the older genera-

tion of Europeans.
B. expresses h is belief th a t it is very good time for E speranto to be-
ID
come widely used.

c . analyses the efforts m ade by some politicians, aim ed at popu-
B
larising E speranto.
D- gives re aso n s why E speranto should be treated only a s a m eans
of com m unication.
41
Polish 3ewmt.ngui Do. Thi goo V. - birrier ro cn

Ba Lan- . i- - renewed (ad0':c'phc'hi, c ti
N
- Esperanto Quc t ng/ The gii ng sinh
- to foster nui dng, khuyn khch, c - enthusiasm nim say m, nhit tnh
NH
v - to be on display c ph by ra
- cross-cultura (adj) giao vn ha - to converse tr chuyn
UY
- cynic ngi hoi nghi, ngi hay ch - overenundated (adj) c pht m
trch cay c qu cn thn
.Q
- to mock ch giu - attendance s ngi tham d
TP
- idealistic (adj) c tnh duy tm - to o utstrip sb vt xa hn/ b xa ai
O
- c u lt's sng bi - home page trang ch (ca 1 website)

- ling uistic (adj) thuc ngn ng hc - appeal sc thu ht '
- w eirdo iu/ ngi lp-d - a level playing field mt sn chi bnh
NG
- notorie ty s ni ting (xu), s kht ng
ting - articu late (adj) (pht m, ni nng) r
H
- to expel ui, trc xut rng, rnh mch
- regime ch (ang cai tr) - phonetics ng m hc
N
- benefactor n nhn, ngi lm vic - pseudonym tn gi, bit hiu, bt
thin danh
- to owe sth to sb /sth nhd ai/ci g m TR
- throwback ngi/vt gi nh/thuc v
cccig mt thi k qua
B
- prosperity s giu c, thnh vng - cold-w ar era thi k chin tranh lnh
00
- to defect from chy trn khi, o - to be fueled by c cung cp nhin

10
thot khi liu/ kch ng bi

+3
- congress i hi - resentment s bt mn, ni hn

- enthusiast ngi nhit tnh ng h - rhetoric li ni hoa m/ khoa trng
P2
- glorious (adj) y vinh qung - to joke ni a

C
- come by tnh c kim c - linguistics ngn ng hc

- diehard ngi c chp/ bo th n - globalization s ton cu ha
A
cng - egalitarian lingo mt ngn ng binh

H
- to lobby vn ng hnh lang ng

- the European Union Lin Minh Chu - shrinking (adj) ang ngy cng thu
-
u nh li
-L
19
N
Shoplifting is an addictive crime. There are two types of shoplifters

TO
{people who steal goods from shops): professional crim inals who do it
for a living, o r to ea rn money for a drug habit; an d non-professionais.
NG
Non-professionals know th a t there are consequences, a n d they usually

have the money to pay, b u t they continue to steal anyway. These peo-
ple steal item s they often d o nt need and som etim es d o n t use.
ID
Although people of all ages shoplift, alm ost one third of all shoplift-
B
ers arrested by the police are between the ages of 13 a n d 17. Teens
usually steal thing s th a t they c a n t afford or are not allowed to buy,

such a s CDs, cosm etics, clothes and cigarettes. But m any also steal
things they could simply buy. Why? I think, I could be spending my
m oney on this, b u t Fm getting it for free, a teenage girl said. Besides,
N
th e res also the thrill of doing som ething bad. Your h ea rt s ta rts to race,
and all you can th in k about is getting out of the store, the girl added.
NH
Teens who shoplift often believe their actions d on t really h u rt any-
UY
one. They d o n t think th a t shoplifting m eans stealing. They th in k th at
the store will not notice the losses. They are wrong. Stores know exactly
.Q
how m any articles they lose, and the costs are huge. Ask teens who
TP
shoplift why they do it, and they usually say they d o n t know.' Or they
may say th a t its fun; shoplifting can eheer up the mood of a teen who
O
is feeling depressed, angrv or bored. Friends can also force friends to

shoplift together - to be cool.
B ut why? Shoplifters usually dont know the tru e m otivations b e-
NG
hind their actions. However, shoplifting can become an addiction. In
H
fact, drug addicts who shoplift say it is a s h ard to stop stealing as it is
to quit drugs. W ithout intervention, shoplifting can become a danger-
N
ous lifetime habit.
For teens who are ju s t trying o ut shoplifting, the best thing th at
TR
can happen is getting caught. And the sooner, the better. When they
are caug h t by store security personnel, they feel frightened, and the
B
experience can stop m any teens from repeating their behaviour. Shop-
00
lifting is stealing. Stealing is wrong, it's really ju s t th a t simple.

10
(Adapted from Weekly Reader, 2003)

+3
1. According to paragraph o n e ,_____

P2
A. non-professionals work w ith professionals.

B. some professionals are addicted to drugs.
C
c . non-professionals rarely have enough money.

D. professionals steal things th a t they do not need.
A
H
2. In p arag rap h two, you can find o u t _____

A. w hat articles were stolen bv a teenage girl..
-
B. why people of different ages steal from shops.

-L
c . how shoplifters m anage to get out of stores.

D. w hat things are usually stolen by young people.
N
3.. P aragraph three is about the reasons w h y _____

TO
A. young people steal from shops.

B. shoplifting m akes people angry.
NG
c . stores do not notice their losses.

D. teenagers say shoplifting is wrong.

4. P aragraph four inform s you t h a t _____

ID
A. shoplifters can not often tell why they steal.

B
B. m ost shoplifters c a n t live w ithout taking drugs.

c . som e shoplifters are scared of their bad habit.
D. quitting drugs is easier th an giving up stealing.
43

5. According to paragraph five,_____

A. m any teenagers thin k th a t shoplifting is simple.
B. it is quite easy for teenagers to get really scared,
N
c. some teenagers often frighten security personnel.
D. young shoplifters should be cau gh t a s soon a s possible.
NH
6 . W hich of the following would be the best title for the text?
UY
A. How to Catch Shoplifters
B. How to Recognise Shoplifters
.Q
c. Teenagers Who Steal from Shops
TP
D. Burglars Who Never Get Caught
O

GLOSSARY
NG
- to shoplift n cp ca hng - thrill cm gic hi hp th v
- shoplifting (n); shoplifter (n) - intervention s can thip, s ngn chn
H
- consequence hu qu - security personnel nhn vin an ninh
- cosmetics m phm
N
20 TR
B
Can the school you go to m ake a m assive difference to y o u r life?
00
This is the question th a t a TV com pany w anted to answ er, so they ran
10
an experim ent. They paid for a 14-year-old boy who co nstantly got into
+3
trouble an d w as throw n out of his S outh London school to go to an ex-

P2
clusive 1 5,000 a year boarding school.

C
The experim ent w as a second chance for 14-year-old Ryan Bell. He

had never had the opportunities th a t his new classm ate s a t Downside
A
School had. W hen he w as asked if he m ight have trouble getting used

H
to a sm art and po sh new school, he simply said, D ont worry ab o u t

-
me looking like a person with no friends, all 14-year-old guys are the
-L
sam e - we like ca rs an d girls! Im certain I wont have any problem s.

R yans first year at his new school w as a definite success. He w as
N
coming top in Latin and got into the rugby team , w here he w as one of
TO
the best. His m other w as really proud - she hoped h e r son would never
have the problem s with money she had. His father had left them both
NG
when Ryan w as a baby. His m other h ad always done h er best, b u t a d -

m itted she c o u ld n t give Ryan ,the best sta rt in life. Now Ryan started
talking ab ou t going to university and a possible career a s a TV director.
ID
At his old school, R yans teachers used to say he w as always c a u s -

B
ing problem s b u t a t h is new school Ryan got on very well w ith th e other
44

stud en ts. His teach ers said he would get throu gh his GCSE exam s e a s-
ily. There were a few. sm all problem s, but at first they w erent consid-
N
ered too serious. The first one was w hen Ryan returned hom e for the
holidays and. w as cau gh t doing graffiti. It w as bad, b u t the school
NH
blam ed his friends at hom e for encouraging him to do it and said it
would be un fair to expect Ryan to transform overnight. They were less
UY
tolerant of the second incident - Ryan took an o th er boys mobile phone
.Q
and even though it was apparently a joke, he was not allowed to attend
school for a week.
TP
After returnin g to the school which he w as enjoying being p art of,
O
Ryan went into the n earest town one evening w ith som e of his friends.

At the local disco he lost his tem per an d hit an o ther boy in the face.
The incident reflected badlv on the schools reputation as the police
NG
were called. B ecause Ryan had already been in trouble and the regula-
H
tions were the sam e for everyone, he had to be throw n out of school.
This decision was crue, though the teachers believed his aggression
N
and wrongdoings were caused by his previous experiences. Everyone
TR
agrees th at Ryan was doing very well and even though he failed to
com plete his education a t Downside School, he progressed a long way
B
educationally and emotionally.
00
(Adapted from Club, Nov/Dec 2003)

10
1 . The aim of the experim ent w as to

+3
A. help a young boy get out of trouble at school.

P2
B. find o ut if the choice of a school m atters,

c. check how good Downside School was.
C
D. show Ryan w hat an exclusive school w as like.

A
2. R y a n _____
H
A. w as optim istic ab out joining the school.

B. was worried abou t m aking friends.
-
c . th o ug h t he m ight have some problems.

-L
D. w anted his m other to be proud of him.

N
3. Ryans m o th e r_____
A. didn't like the experim ent.
TO
B. never had financial problem s,

NG
c . offered him the best she could.

D. expected Ryan to go to university.

4. Ryans new te a c h e rs _____

ID
A. expected him to change a t once..

B. d id n t p u n ish him in any way.
B
c . never tried to justify his m anners.

D. blam ed his p ast for his behaviour.
45
<2l While-reading,;..tie children-w ere araused b ec a u se " -ri

' A-.', th e book h a d yellow pages J -'I
' B:: they had-to t m th e pages. ..-. :'
C: th e w ords-stayed in the sam e place. , :
N
D. they h ad to read the sam e page tw ice.': . ^
NH
3. W hat did Margie h ate m ost?
A. Tests and homework;
UY
B. Her ugly teacher.
c . The questions on the screen.
.Q
D. Getting bad m arks.
TP
4. The difference between Margies school a n d the school cen tu ries
O
ago was in t h e _____

A. n u m b er of tests the children were given.
NG
B. subjects the children were taught.
c . age w hen the children w ent to school.
H
D. place, where the children had their lessons.
N
5. In her school Margie m is s e d _____
A. the regular ho u rs of lessons.
B. th e com pany of other children. TR
c . individual lessons with h er teacher.
B
00
D. textbooks printed on paper.

10
6 . The w riter w an ts to show u s t h a t _____

A. todays schools are m uch worse th a n future schools.
+3
B. todays children should be happy abo ut p resent schools,

P2
c . teaching and learning w ont change m uch in the future.

C
D. the com puter is a better teacher th an a m an.

A
7. The text is p art o f _____

H
A. a fairy tale. B. a fantasy book,

c . a science fiction story. D. a historical novel.
-
-L
GLOSSARY
N
- cynical (adj) t v hoi nghi

- County Inspector vin thanh tra gio dc qun
TO
- to scream tht ln, ht in

NG
22

E ducation is an im portant issue for m any people in the UK as well

ID
as aro u nd the world. In m ost countries pupils who atten d secondary

schools take an exam to get a school leaving certificate. One particular
B
worry is whv boys are. doing so badly. Some tw enty y ears ago, exam
48

scores of girls a n d boys in a class were com pared. Boys got b ettr re -
su lts in exam s, so various steps were taken to improve the resu lts of
girls, including having single sex girl-only classes. Now, the situation is
N
reversed, w ith girls getting b etter scores th a n boys.
NH
So, w hat h a s gone wrong with boys, and w hat can be done abou t it?
Jo h n D unsford, leader of the Association of Head T eachers in Secon-
UY
dary Schools, says th a t the fact th a t boys do not achieve m uch aca-
demically h a s its, roots in society rath e r th a n the classroom . Girls, more
.Q
th a n boys, see education a s a passport to a good job. On the other
TP
hand, according to Penny Lewis, a head teacher, young m en are not
O
confident enough an d are often uncertain ab out their place in society.

Some boys grow u p in families where th ere is no father, w hich m eans
no male roe model to follow.
NG
Moreover, boys learn in a different way to girls, preferring small
H
am ou n ts of work with sho rt deadlines ra th er th a n large projects ex-
tended in time. And education is not seen as cool. As som eone on a
N
BBC website p u t it, Girls achieve more a t school because they are
watching the future while the boys are watching the girls. This is not
TR
ju s t a problem in Britain. In a study by the O rganisation for Economic
B
Cooperation an d Development an d UNESCO, girls did b etter th a n boys
00
at reading a t the age of 15 in all 45 countries. The UK took the n inth

10
place am ong the 45 countries in reading skills, although pupils in the

UK spend less time reading th a n in m ost other countries. Interestingly,
+3
th e study suggested th a t B ritish children read for p leasure more often

P2
th a n those in other countries.

C
(Adapted from www.bbc.co.uk)

1. Twenty years a g o _____
A
A. boys d idnt do very well in exams.

H
B. school au th orities decided to change the situation.

-
c . girls had very good re sults in exams.

-L
D. all pupils w ent to single-sex classes.

2. Girls have b etter exam results th a n boys b e c a u se _____
N
A. boys are too su re of themselves.

TO
B. girls th in k th a t a good education will help them find a job.

c . boys come from a different place in society th a n girls.
NG
D. gls grow up in complete families.

3. Boys differ from girls i n _____

A. the n u m b e r of books they read.
ID
B. the tim e sp ent surfing the Internet.

B
c . the way they spend th eir free time.

D. the way they learn.
49

4.. The study by UNESCO show ed th a t B ritish childreii a t ili.e: age of

fifteen \
A;.'read_a:lQt-althoiigK'tIi'ey d o n t have;t(X : "y-^'
' -B:. Spend m ore tim e reading th a n children in o th e r:countries.
N
. c. a re th e b est a t reading.
D. c an t read very well.
NH
5. The text is m ainly a b o u t_____
UY
A. th e kind of exam s pupils take.
B. boys a n d girls su ccess in education,
.Q
c . the educational system in Britain.
TP
D. w hat pupils read for pleasure.
O
GLOSSARY

- reversed (adj) o ngc
NG
- head teacher hiu trng
- role model ci gng noi theo
H
- deadline hn cht
- extended in time di ngy
N
23
TR
Leanne B eetham s work is surprising. B ut w hat m akes h er a r t truly
B
exceptional is th a t her paintings are all done w ith a b ru s h th a t she
00
holds in h e r m outh. Since birth the girl h as been u nab le to u se h er

10
arm s or legs, b u t her talent an d en th u siasm have allowed h e r to be-

come a successful artist.
+3
Leanne w as b om w ith a serious genetic disease. The prospect w as

P2
so depressing th a t h er m other could not learn to live w ith it. However,

C
she d id n t w ant to p u t the baby up for adoption, so eventually, sh e gave

Leannes g ran d p aren ts the right to look after Leanne.
A
H
Despite h e r young age, L eannes work h a s already been show n at

th e Royal Academy of Arts. Last week one of h e r paintings w as sold at
-
C hristies auction h ouse in London. Leanne w as the youngest a r tist in

-L
th e auction, w hich w as organised to raise funds for the David S h epherd

Wildlife Foundation for endangered wildlife.
N
W hen Leanne w as two, she began drawing w ith a pencil in h er

TO
m outh. Her talen t w as discovered a t the age of 13 w hen she painted a

reindeer on a school C hristm as card. It w as even p ub lished in th e local
NG
new spaper. As a 19-year-old she says: I w as able to hold a pen in my

m outh quite naturally. I started draw ing before I started writing. I p ain t

because I like it. Although m any people say I am very talented, I have
ID
never th o u g h t ab o u t m yself in th is way. I d o n t w an t to im press any -

body or win a com petition, b u t to feel better. Its som ething I do w ithout
B
thinking an d I c a n t im agine my life w ithout it.
50

Her talent b ro ught h er to the attention of a fam ous landscape artist,

S hepherd, who occasionally p aints flowers. And crime w riter Frederick
N
Forsyth is also am ong the people who adm ire h er en th u siasm for por-
traying . elephants, horses an d dogs. This fam ous w riter, who h a s a
NH
large collection of p ortraits, came to the gallery and saw th ree of her
p ictures on sale for 250. He sent h er a note, with a four-figure cheque
UY
for each one, telling h er she was underselling h er talent.
.Q
L eannes artistic talent shows h e r attitud e to life. If you say I c a n t
TP
do som ething, Ill go out of my way to prove you w rong, she said.
O
(Adapted from The Daily Mail, May 2, 2007)

1 . L eannes m o th e r_____
A. allowed stran gers to bring h er daughter up.
NG
B. accepted her daug hter's h ealth problem,
c. learned how to look after h er daughter. .
H
D. let h er relatives take care of h er daughter.
N
2. The aim of the auction a t C hristies w as t o _____
A. prom ote Leannes paintings.
TR
B. collect m oney for the protection of anim als,
B
c . a ttra ct young a rtis ts attention.
00
D. exhibit the p aintings showing wild anim als.

10
3. Leanne p ain ts b ecause s h e _____

+3
A. w an ts to show how good she is.

B. w ould like to be b etter a t it.
P2
c . h as a con tract with a local paper.

C
D. h a s always enjoyed doing it.

A
4. Leanne loves p a in tin g _____ .

H
A. lan dscap es B. p ortraits

c . anim als D. flowers
-
5. Frederick Forsyth _____

-L
A. bought some of her paintings.

N
B. did not recognize h e r talent.

c . offered h er regular financial help.
TO
D. sold three of h e r paintings.

NG
6 . In th e article, the a u t h o r _____

A. encourages people to take up painting a s a hobby.

B. suggests th a t everyone h a s a talent for painting.

c . proves th a t disability do esnt always prevent success.
ID
D. invites a rt collectors to buy disabled a rtists paintings.

B

GLOSSARY
- genetic (adj) thuc di truyn - crime writer nh vn vit truyn hnh
prospect trin vng s
- depressing (adj) ng bun, gy chn - to portray m t
N
nn - four-figure cheque ngn phiu ghi s
NH
- to put a baby up for adoption em tin c 4 con s
mt a tr i cho lm con nui - to undersell sth bn ci g vi gi
- Royal Academy of Arts Vin Hn Lm khng xng .vi gi tr tht ca n
UY
Ngh Thut Hong Gia - to go out of one's way to do sth C
- auction cuc bn u gi ht sc m g
.Q
- reindeer con tun lc - disabled (adj) tn tt - disability (n)
TP
O
24 SHYNESS

S hyness m ay n o t seem to be a serious com plaint, b u t for some who
NG
suffer from it, it ca n become unbearable. Even talking to a sm all group
of people you know can seem like an ordeal - it can feel a s if youVe
H
been asked to give a speech on a topic you know very little a b o u t to a
n u m b er of experts. You sta rt to feel h o t a n d shaky, you r h e a rt b ea ts
N
faster, your knees feel weak, you begin to stu tte r an d th e whole experi-
ence seem s to last forever.
TR
The fact of th e m atter is th a t shyness is som ething we often recog-
nise in others: blu shin g (going red) is one of the m ore visible signs, for
B
00
example. Yet we d o n t judge som eone h arsh ly because of this. B u t shy-

ness does m ean yo u re h ard er to approach, so you becom e m ore iso-
10
lated. As one shy person p u t it, Its like being in a prison, a n d its veiy
+3
h ard to break o u t.
P2
E xperts on the subject have come u p with various possible solu-

tions, an d one h a s been singled o u t a s being th e key to su cc ess -
C
nam ey, finding an in tere st in comm on w ith oth er people. Spending a

lot of tim e on th e sidelines w atching o ther people an d envying th em b e-
A
H
cau se they are m u ch more outgoing doesnt help; rem em bering th a t

some of the people you envy m ost are probably shy them selves, does.
The secret is how you deal with it. And experts have come u p w ith four
-
thing s you can d today to help.

-L
Firstly, you c a n sta rt by listening to o ther people. You will find y o u r-

N
self getting in terested in w hat theyre talking ab o u t a n d ask in g q u e s-

tions - an d before you know it, you 11 be having a conversation.
TO
Secondly, you could tiy asking neighbours if you can w alk th e ir dog.
Like children, p ets ca n be. excellent icebreakers for conversations with
NG
passers-by.

Thirdly, try joining a class to learn som ething like tap -d an cin g or
flamenco, w here people are likely to laugh a lot. Youll feel relaxed, an d
ID
also you II be m u ch too b u sy concentrating on w h at y o u re doing to feel

shy.
B
Lastly, try telling yourself th a t it doesn t m a tter if you say or do

52

som ething silly. Most people m ake a fool of them selves eveiy so often -
and its not th e end of the world if you do!
N
1. One of the sym ptom s of shy ness in a stressful situation i s _____
NH
A. sw eating a lot.
B, an increased h e a rt rate,
UY
c. pain in the knees.
D. excessive talkativeness.
.Q
TP
2. Why do shy people become more reserved?
A. Their social u n ea se m akes them m ore difficult to talk to,
O
B. They see th a t o thers are shy too.

c . O ther people lack the patience to talk to them .
NG
D. They dread being ju dged by others.
3. W hat do experts believe is the m ost essential m easure to be taken?
H
A. Studying o th e rs' behaviour in social situations.
B. Discovering shared interests with others,
N
c . Com paring yourself to other people.
TR
D. Finding ou t w hat m akes oth er people shy.
B
4. How can listening to o thers prove helpful in com bating shyness?
00
A. You develop useful psychological skills.

10
B. It is the first step to getting into conversation,

c . People will see you care about .their interests!
+3
D. It is a visible sign of becoming ess shy.

P2
5. It is suggested in the' text th a t a shy person s h o u ld _____

C
A. learn to laugh more.

B. learn to relax.
A
H
c. take up a social hobby.

D. help o th er people in the com m unity.
-
6 . Shy people should realise th a t eveiybody_____

-L
A. says stu p id things som etimes.

B. m akes jokes som etim es,
N
c . is foolish.
TO
D. is self-conscious.
7. The m ajor aim of the a u th o r of the text is t o _____
NG
A give im portant advice on how to deal with shy people.

B. raise the re ad e rs in terest in sh yness as a social problem,

c . p resen t recent findings ab ou t the n a tu re of shyness.
ID
D. offer useful h in ts on how shy people can help them selves.

B

. .. . ; - ' ' ^ n. '' -1 :. V,
' ; * * ' ..i- ' ' ; , , : h : 'Ms;,-
GLOSSARY ~ 1 , :. >
N
NH
-shaky (adj) run ry- - . , - to walk a:dog dt;mt <iOn;<h i do
- to stutter ni [p bp - icebreaker ti mao .cho cuc
UY
-tbibush mt cnuyn tr :- ': ..
-harshly (adv) gay gt, khc khe - tap-dancing iu nhy clacRet'
.Q
TP
25
O
I. rem em ber going to the British M useum one day to read about a

treatm e nt for some slight illness which I believed I had. I think it was
hay fever. I got the book and read the fragm ent I cam e to read and th en
NG
I began tu rn in g the leaves an d studying other diseases. I don't rem em -
H
ber which w as the first I read about b u t I soon realised I h ad them all.
I sat for a m om ent, frozen with horror; and then, in despair, I again
N
turned over the pages. I came to typhoid fever, m u st have h ad it for
m onths w ithout knowing it. I wondered w hat else I had got; tu rn ed to
TR
Blights disease an d was relieved to find I had only a modified version
B
so I m ight live for years. I read through the whole book an d the only
00
disease I decided I d id n t have was housem aids knee.

10
I w ent to my doctor. He is an old friend of m ine, an d feels my pulse,

+3
and looks a t my tongue and talks abo ut the w eather an d I tho ught I
P2
would be doing him a favour by going to him now. W hat a doctor

w a n ts, I thought, is practice. He shall have me. He will get m ore p ra c-
C
tice out of me th a n ou t of seventeen hu n d red of your ordinary' p atien ts

with only one or two illnesses each.
A
H
So I w ent straig ht up to him and he said, Well, w hat is the m atter

with you? I told him it would be easier for m e to tell him w hat was not
-
the m atter with me. I said I didnt have hou sem aids knee. I said I had
-L
every other illness. And th en I told him how I cam e to discover it all.
N
Then he looked a t me, took hold of my wrist, counted the pulse an d

continued the exam ination. After th at, he sat down an d w rote out a
TO
prescription. He folded it up and gave it to me an d I p u t it in my pocket

and w ent out.
NG
I did not open it. I took it to the nearest ch em ists, an d h an d ed it in.

The m an read it, an d th en handed it back saying th a t he did nt have

the things I needed. Are you a chem ist? I said in surprise. I am , he
ID
replied. If I w as a grocer and a family hotel com bined, I m ight be able

B
to help. B ut being only a chem ist m akes it im possible.
54

I looked a t the prescription an d read it slowly. It ran:

lb beefsteak w ith 1 p t bitter beer every 6 hours. 1 ten-mile w alk
N
every morning. 1 bed at 11 sharp every night A n d don't s t u f f up your
head reading things you d on t understand.
NH
followed the directions, with the happy re su lt - speaking for myself,
th a t my life w as saved an d is still going on.
UY
(adapted from three Men in a Boat by Jerome K Jerome)
.Q
TP
1. The a u th o r w ent to the B ritish M useum b e c a u s e _____
O
A. he w as in terested in history.

B. he w anted to study books about medicine.
c . he w anted to find inform ation on one p artic ular illness.
NG
D. he d idn t tru s t his doctors diagnosis.
H
2. After reading the book h thou ght t h a t _____
A. he suffered from less illnesses th a n he had previously thought.
N
B. he w as perfectly healthy,
c . he w as going to die soon.
TR
D. he suffered from alm ost all possible illnesses.
B
3. He tho u g h t he w as doing his doctor a favour b e c a u s e _____
00
A. treating him would give the doctor a lot of experience.

10
B. h is doctor d id n t have m any patients.

+3
c . he w as going to have to pay his doctor a lot of money.

P2
D. he knew the doctor w anted to see him.

C
4. D uring th e ex a m in a tio n _____

A. th e doctor looked very worried.
A
B. th e doctor laughed a t w hat the m an had told him.

H
c . the doctor pretended to trea t h is illnesses seriously.

D. the doctor refused to give him any m edicines
-
-L
5. The chem ist couldnt help the a u th o r b e c a u s e _____

A. the m edicines were veiy rare.
N
B. the doctor had not prescribed any medicines,

c . he th ou g h t the m an was joking.
TO
D. he w as not a real chem ist

NG
6 . The overall tone of the text i s _____

A. serious.

B. sad.
ID
c . hum orous.
D. critical.
B
55
GLOSSARY -
hay fever-bnf ^'raua.-Gp.kft0v - housemaid's .kn^bnhsng u gi
r-fragm ent.:m arrh.\^,vûi^0v;'.iv-..'. C . -- to feel ones' pui îbat mch cho ai
9 .fj0 z e n v y |tk h 0 r rr, hotg .s;n 'r : ' - wrist c tay V
N
' ing h g i V '' : ' b vittt. n y:^ran;fng.pound =
. - m 'despair tuyt vng /-. . .
NH
453 grams] V . ."
typhoid fever bnh st thng hn - bitter beer bia 3ang: :'
- relieved (dj) an'tm, nh nhm - to stuff sth up nhi nht vo ci g
UY
- a modified version mt th (bnh)
.Q
bin i
TP
26 THE GENTLEMAN THIEF
O

I once heard som eone say th a t people who m ake fake d o cu m en ts do
their work m u c h m ore carefully th a n people who m ake real ones. So I
NG
su ppose the b e st con a rtists do th e ir b est to look m ore re spectable th a n
truly respectable people. J o n a th a n Wilde h a d ch a rm a n d intelligence:
H
in fact, he w as a h it with th e ladies. He also knew how to rea d th e
tim es he lived in. In eighteenth century England, people were terrified
N
of crime. In d u stry started to grow very quickly a t th a t time. This m ade
TR
tow ns an d cities grow bigger very quickly. Many people from the co u n -
try h ad to go to look for work in th em b ecause th eir sm all family b u si-
B
n e sse s co u ld n t com pete w ith the bigger fish. The m o d em police force
00
h a d n t yet been created, so these growing tow ns an d cities were full of

10
crime.
+3
Wilde u sed peoples fear of crime. His gang robbed, people a t night
P2
and he offered to get people's thing s back for th em if they gave him
C
money for h is work. He also helped the a u th o rities to c atch a lot of

crim inals (his rivals a n d former p a rtn e rs in crime). He w as like a m afia
A
boss: he created a heroic image for him self to cover u p his crim inal a c -
H
tivity. He w as know n as the gentlem an thief.

You c a n t call to days con a rtists gentlem en! Many of them trick old
-
people into giving them money. Some con a rtists in G erm any u se th e
-L
nephew trick. They look for old-fashioned first n am es in telephone

N
directories. They th en call old people, saying th a t they are younger rela-
tives who need money quickly. The trick often w orks b eca u se its
TO
h ard er for older people to be su re who they are talking to on the tele-
phone. W h ats more, older people often d o n t tell other people th a t they
NG
have problem s w ith this. Som etim es they feel em b arrasse d a b o u t it,

som etim es they worry th a t they m ight have Alzheim ers D isease an d
som etim es th ey re afraid of being p u t in an old peoples hom e. The con
ID
a rtist an d the victim m eet each other a t a bank. The victim ta k e s the
B
money o u t an d gives it to the con artist. These people move aro u n d the
country verv quickly an d are in organised gangs. Many of th e gang
56

bosses are in Poland: people on the Polish-Germ an border tell them

ab out police operations.
Even the best con a rtists a re n t always luckv. For example, Wilde
N
w as executed. And you c a n t trick all old people. A clever old lady in
NH
Germany recently cau ght two relatives with th e help of the police.
UY
1. J o n a th a n W ilde______
A. w as a politician.
.Q
B. w as not very intelligent,
TP
c. was not very nice.
D. was popular wife women.
O

2. In 18th centu ry E n g la n d _____
A. a lot of people had to move to big cities.
NG
B. there w a sn t a lot of crime.
c . the ind ustry w as not well developed
H
D. there were a lot of small businesses.
N
3. J o n a th a n W ild e______
A. cooperated with the police.
B. w as a real gentlem an, TR
c . w as a real hero.
B
D. gave monev to the poor.
00
10
4. Con a rtists in Germany pretend th e y _____

A. have a lot of money.
+3
B. w ant to give some money away,

P2
c . are related to their victims.

D. have health problems.
C
5. Older people are easier to trick because they

A
A. have problem s w ith using com puters.

H
B. live alone.
c. have old-fashioned nam es.
-
D. m ight have health problems.

-L
6 . J o n a th a n W ilde_____
N
.A. w as never caught.

B. moved to an o th e r country,
c. was killed.
TO
D. w as ca u g h t by an old lady.
NG
GLOSSARY

fake (adj) gi rival i th

- con artist k life o, tni bi.p - to trick la phnh, lng gt
ID
- charm s quyn r - Alzheimer's Disease bnh mt tr nh

B
- h it ngi / vt c achung - to execute x t

- terrified of (adj) s hi
57
27 RMBLING r o b
I- This-:wk&bTj^rts.<>n^&&'<m-^-tegtoesrcM;i&a.'in:the world.
- '-A lter e n jo y in g 'iie':.GioniaJcharm''of. P e r a ?s-0id ''tp w n s a n d c itie s ,-1 d e -
N
c id e d -it w a s tim e to go fo r th e big o n e. A jo u rn e y - o n - t h e h ig h e s t ra ilw a y
in the world: through'. the A ndes'M ountains an d a climb u p M achu Pic-
NH
chu. This is a really high m ou ntain an d the views th e n are am azing.
I arrived a t the station early in the m orning b ecause I th o u g h t there
UY
would be lots of to u rists w aiting for tickets. I really hoped there
.Q
w ouldn't be too m any of them on the train. They always talk loudly to
TP
each other and never really look a t things. I w as lucky th is tim e. There
were ju s t one or two other travellers. They looked m ore in terested in
O
their books th a n anything else.

The carriage w as full. Each seat was full a n d some people h ad a n i-
m als with them . There w erent any dogs, ju s t chickens a n d a couple of
NG
goats. Some of the people sa t silently, others talked quietly to each
other in Quechua(*). I looked ou t of the window. The train moved slowly
H
through the beautiful scenery. There were green m o u n tain s everywhere
I looked. I felt like I was in a dream an d I d id n t w ant th e dream to end.
N
Alter m any h o u rs of travelling, the train finally arrived a t the station
TR
near M achu Picchu. It w as getting dark, so I found a bed for the night
in the youth hostel. My room w as basic: there was only a ed, a chair,
B
a sm all table and a reading lam p. B ut it w as com fortable. I fell asleep
00
with my book on Peru in my hands.

10
The next day, I woke u p early to get ready for my climb. The w eather
+3
was perfect for climbing. U nfortunately, I forgot to chew coca leaves.

P2
The local people chew these leaves because it helps them no t to feel
dizzy high u p in the m ountains. As I climbed u p the m ountain, I felt
C
dizzier and di 22er. In th e end, I felt so bad th a t I fainted! A doctor woke

me up and took me back down the m ountain. He told me to re st for a
A
couple of days. He also said I could climb the m oun tain w ith him w hen
H
I felt better. Were going tomorrow. I c a n t wait!

(*} uechu a is a Native Indian language spoken in South America.
-
-L
1. Rob arrived a t the statio n early b e c a u s e _____

A. he wanted t avoid crowds.
N
B. he w anted to ch a t with other tourists.

c . he w anted to choose a good seat on the train.
TO
D. he d id n 't w ant to m iss the train.

NG
2 . In the c a rria g e _____

A. there w eren't m any people.

B. there were people with dogs an d other anim als,

c . som e people talked in English.
ID
D. no one talked in English.

B
3. W hen he looked out of the w indow _____

58

A. he saw the scenery he saw in a dream .

B. he saw M achu Picchu.
c. th ere w as am azing scenery around him.
N
D. he co uldnt see anything because of the train m oving too fast.
NH
4. After arriving a t the s ta tio n _____
A. it w as already dark.
UY
B. he rented a room.
.Q
c. he w ent to climb u p M achu Picchu.
D. he w as very tired.
TP
5. Before he went for a h ik e _____
O

A. it started to rain.
B. he. checked the w eather forecast,
NG
c . he m ade som e preparations.
D. he felt dizzy.
H
6. The local p e o p le _____
N
A. never chew coca leaves high u p in th e m ountains.
B. chew coca leaves because they do nt w ant to feel dizzy,
TR
c . only chew coca leaves when they feel dizzy.
D. chew coca leaves n ot to feel sleepy.
B
00
7. Up in the m o untains h e _____

10
A. lost consciousness. B. felt very good

+3
c . m et som e local people D. m et a friend who w as a doctor.

P2
GLOSSARY
C
- to ramble i do, i ngao du - youth hostel l qun thanh nin

A
- colonial (adj) thuc thi thuc a - dizzy (adj) chng mt

H
- carriage toa xe la - to faint ngt xu

-
28 CHOOSING A LANGUAGE SCHOOL

-L
Today, there are language schools on practically every street (well, it

N
seem s like th a t som etim es, especially in the bigger cities here in Viet-
nam). How do you decide which school is right for you? Here are a few
TO
thing s to th in k abo ut when you are looking through flyers, leaflets and
NG
brochures from different schools.

Before you v isit a school:

If you are going to studv English in the- UK, contact the B ritish
ID
Council to see which schools are accredited by them . If a school is

accredited, it m eans th a t their inspectors regularly check it to m ake
B
sure th a t it is good enough. If a school isn t good enough, it loses its

accreditation. So, if you choose an accredited school, you will
59
probably be happy with it.

Talk to people you know who are doing language courses a t different
schools. W hat do they th in k ab ou t the schools an d cou rses? If you
choose the sam e school or sam e course a s them , you m ay have the
N
sam e opinions later.
NH
Ask yourself w hat you w ant to learn English for. Do you have any
specific goals, like passing an exam or going to work in a n English-
UY
speaking country? If you have, m ake a list of them . Think ab o ut
w hether it would be b etter for vou to have private lesso ns with a
.Q
teacher or lessons in a group. Then look at the co u rses th a t local
TP
schools are offering to see w hat m ight be right for you.
O
While yo u re visitin g a school:

Take a look aro u n d the building. Does it look tidy? Does it look well-
organised? Do you feel comfortable in it?
NG
Ask ab o u t the teachers th a t work a t the school. Remember, you
H
have a right to see copies of their qualifications.
Ask ab o u t w hether you can w atch a class for free before signing up
N
for a course. A good school will be happy to arrang e th is for you.
TR
Found a good place? Great! Now go away an d study!
B
1 . Nowadays there are a lot of language sc h o o ls _____
00
A. in big cities in Poland.

10
B. in big an d sm all cities in Poland.

+3
c . in cou ntries other th a n Poland.

P2
D. all over Europe.

C
2. The school is accredited if '

A. it is not on the British Council list.
A
B. it is checked by experts.
H
c . its teachers have contact with the British Council.

D. its teach ers are trained by the B ritish Council.
-
-L
3. Before choosing a school you s h o u ld _____

A. talk to the school m anager.
N
B. talk to the teachers.

c . talk to people who study there.
TO
D. discus your choice with vour familv.

NG
4. Before choosing a school you s h o u ld _____

A. go to an English speaking country.

B. have private lessons first.
ID
c. decide w h at you w ant to study English for.

D. p a ss an exam
B
60

5. While visiting a school you should pay atten tion t o _____

A. o th er stu d en ts.
B. equipm ent,
N
c . furniture.
NH
D. how you feel abou t the school.
6 . While visiting a school you m a y _____
UY
A. check if the teachers have proper qualifications.
.Q
B. check if the teach ers have proper qualifications an d w atch a
class.
TP
c . w atch a class.
O
D. check w hat textbook is used.

GLOSSARY
NG
- practically (adv) hu nh, gn nh - to accredit y nhim
- flyer t qung co - accreditation s y nhim
H
- leaflet t ri - inspector vin thanh tra
N
29
TR
Angelina Jolie is a talented actress who h as been in m any films.
Even though no t all of h e r films have been good ones, m any people say
B
th a t she is a good actress. In fact, she won an O scar for h er role in Girl,
00
Interrupted, in 2000. She is now one of the highest-paid actresses in

10
Hollywood. Many people also respect h er for h er work as a Goodwill

+3
A m bassador for the United Nations. She h as visited poor people in

P2
m any different countries and h a s even adopted two children, one from
Cam bodia and the other from Ethiopia. She h as been m arried twice
C
an d now lives with Brad Pitt, the father of h er biological child.

A
She is the dau g h ter of Jo n Voight, who starred in Midnight Cowboy

H
with D ustin Hoffman. Her parents divorced when she w as a baby. An-
gelina an d h er b ro ther were brought up by their m other. W hen she was
-
a child, she often w atched movies with h e r m other. She later said th a t
-L
this inspired her to become an actress, not h er father. In fact, she

N
blam ed him for the break-up of h er p a re n ts marriage.

W hen she w as 1 1 years old she decided th a t she w anted to be an a c -
TO
tress an d trained for 2 years. She was not happy w hen she was a .s tu -
d ent a t the Beverly Hills High School. Her m other did not have m uch
NG
money, so she often had to wear second-hand clothes. She felt lonely

am ong th e richer kids. O ther stu d en ts were horrible to her because of

the way she looked: she w as very thin and wore both braces on her
ID
teeth and glasses. W hen she w as 14, she stopped going to acting
B
classes and becam e a rebel. She wore black clothes, dyed her h air p u r-
ple and w ent o ut to p u n k concerts a lot. In the end, however, she went
back to theatrical classes and back to high school.
61 '

*She-' fts':;:stKat.-jsixe>.r;? stiiL.at.Keart!-jxtsi a p im k kid. w ith ta tto o s.

Anti s h e h a s a -lot'of th e m iA il'o f Her ".tattoos h av4 .a special m eaning.
:She h as removed .-sine::Gf,;lem\ovF' the-years. j Eo f ;-exam ple, she u sed
N
to have a -tattdo-oCaîndow.'XD'n her lower. back. She saysi she u sed to
Spend 'hentmioofciEkg- out xrf.toioctow&and waasting'.tQ be outside,
NH
bufikowL:s h e &: outside. SH-the time. T bati why she. .doesnt have th a t
tattoo any m ore.
UY
.Q
1. Angelina Jolie gained respect by -
TP
A. being a Goodwill A m bassador for the United N ations.
B. being a good actress.
O
c. being a Goodwill A m bassador for the United N ations a n d a good

' actress.
D. w inning an Oscar.
NG
2. Her fa th e r i s _____ .
H
A. a film director B. an actor
c . h er m anager D. D ustin Hoffmans m anager
N
3. Angelina Jolie com es fro m _____ .
A. an intellectual family. B. a rich family, TR
c . a m usical family. D. a broken family.
B
00
4. The inspiration to becom e an ac tress cam e fr o m _____

10
A. th e films she w atched a s a child.

+3
B. h e r father.
c . other directors.
P2
D. h er school teacher.
C
5. W hen she w as a te e n a g e r _____

A
A. she had a-lot of friends.

H
B. she w as very pretty.

c . she suffered because of her appearance.
-
D. she w as constantly on a diet.

-L
6 . She becam e a re b e l _____

N
A. after she h ad stopped going to acting classes.

B. because she didn't w ant to go to acting classes.
TO
c . because she w anted to dye h e r h air and go to p u n k concerts.

NG
D. after she had retu rned to school.

7. Her ta tto o s _____

A. are very sm all

ID
B. h av en t changed since she started m aking them ,

c . cover only h er lower back.
B
D. are very im portant to her.
62

GLOSSARY
- Goodwill Ambassador for the - break-up s v/ tan v
United Nations i s Thin ch cho - brace ci ning
N
Lin Hip Quc - acting class = theatrical class lp
NH
- to adopt a child nhn mt a tr lm dy din vin
con nui - rebel k ni lon
- biological child con - to dye nhum
UY
- to divorce ii d - punk [tn loi nhc rock mnh]
- to inspire sb to do sth gi cm hlng - tattoo hnh xm
.Q
cho ai lm gi
TP
O
30

I rem em ber a holiday of mine being completely ru in ed one late a u -
NG
tu m n by o u r paying attentio n to the w eather report of th e local new s-
paper. Heavy show ers, with thun derstorm s, m ay b expected today, it
H
would say on Monday, an d so we would give u p o u r picnic, an d stay
indoors all day, waiting for the rain. Meanwhile people would p ass the
N
house, the su n shining brightly, and not a cloud to be seen.
TR
Ah! we said, a s we stood looking out a t them through th e window,
wont they come hom e soaked!" And we chuckled to th in k how wet
B
they were going to get. By twelve oclock, with the su n pouring into the
00
room, the h eat becam e quite oppressive, and we wondered w hen those
10
heavy show ers and th u n d ersto rm s were going to begin.

+3
Ah! Theyll come in the afternoon, y o u ll- find, we said to each other.
P2
Oh, w o n t those people get wet. At one oclock, the landlady would come
in to ask if we werent going out, as it seemed such a lovely day.
C
No, n o , we replied, not we. We dont m ean to get wet - no, no.
A
And when the afternoon was nearly gone, an d still there was no sign
H
of rain, we tried to cheer ourselves u p w ith the idea th a t it would come

down all a t once, ju s t a s the people h ad started for hom e. B ut not a
-
drop ever fell, and it finished a great day, and a lovely night after it.
-L
The next m orning we would read th a t it w as going to be a warm,

N
fine day; m uch h eat; an d we would go out, and, lialf an h o u r after we

h ad started , it would s ta rt to rain hard, we would come hom e with
TO
colds an d aching all over from rheum atism , an d go to bed.

NG
The w eather is a thing th a t is beyond me altogether. I never can u n -

d erstan d it.

(Adapted from Three Men in a Boat by Jerome. K. Jerome)

ID
1. The au th o r describes a situation w hen he gave u p on a picnic be-

B
cause o f _____
A. the w eather.
B. w hat som eone told him.
63
-c. the w e a th er forecast he heard:

D. the weather, forecast'he -read.
2. The-other people - X
N
A.'dgnored-the. w eather.forecast altogether. .. .
B. dressed for rain. ' ' ; V
NH
c . stayed indoors.
'D. laughed a t the author.
UY
3. The landlady w as surprised b e c a u s e ____ _
.Q
A. the w eather was good.
TP
B. the au th o r d id n t go out.
O
c . the au th o r w as alone in his room

D. the a u th o r told her ab ou t the forecast.
4. In the a fte rn o o n _____
NG
A. it finally rained.
H
B. th e w eather was still great,
c . it rained a little.
N
D: the a u th o r an d h is friends w ent out.
5. The new spaper forecast w a s _____ TR
A. wrong.
B
B. right.
00
c . im possible to un d erstan d .
10
D. easy to predict
+3
6 . The w eather forecast for the next day w a s _____

P2
A. the sam e.
C
B. m uch worse,
c. better.
A
D. ju s t a s the a u th o r expected.
H
7. The next day the a u t h o r _____

-
A. w as prepared for rain.

-L
B. got wet.
c. stayed a t home.
N
D. th o u g h t it w as going to be rainy again.

TO
GLOSSARY
NG
- soaked>(adj) t sng - rheumatism bnh thp khp

- to chuckle ci khy - to be beyond sb vt khi tm hiu

- oppressive (aj) ngt ngt, bc bi bit ca ai

- aching s au nhc
ID
B
64

31 A STAR IS BORN!
Katie M elua w as born in Georgia: not th e one in America, b u t the
N
one th a t is quite n ea r Turkey. She moved to Belfast in N orthern Ireland
with h er family w hen she w as eight. The people in N orthern Ireland
NH
were very friendly to h e r an d she m ade really good friends at school
there. W hen she w as thirteen, she dream ed of becom ing a politician
UY
(she th o u gh t she could m ake the world peaceful if she controlled it!} or
.Q
a historian. After five years of living in Belfast, h er family moved to
TP
London. Two years later, she w as in a talen t com petition on television,
she sang W ithout You (a M ariah Carey song) a n d won! The com peti-
O
tion gave h er experience of perform ing live on national TV.

Later, she w ent to a perform ing a rts school. While she w as there,
NG
she found o u t ab o u t different kinds of m usic. She wrote a song about
Eva Cassidy called Faraway Voice: Katie really liked one of Evas
H
songs an d wrote it w hen she learned th a t the singer was dead. She
sang th is song w hen Mike Batt, a successful songw riter an d producer,
N
cam e to her school. He could see Katies taent an d asked h er to work
TR
with him . The Closest Thing to Crazy becam e her. first hit in the
sum m er of 2003.
B
Since then, she h as won m any aw ards and h e r records have sold
00
very well: Im sure you have heard Nine Million Bicycles on the radio!
10
She h a s perform ed for the B ritish, D utch a n d Norwegian royal families.

+3
She h as also done a lot of concerts, both in big a ren as an d sm aller

P2
cubs. She likes playing in sm all places b ecause you can feel closer to
other people in them .
C
She is an am b assad o r for a charitv called Save the Children an d has

A
visited Sri Lanka to see the work th a t it is doing there. She perform ed
H
a t 46664, a concert organised by Nelson M andela to get m oney for peo-

ple with AIDS. She w as on a new version of Do They Know Its C h rist-
-
m as?, a song w ritten more th a n twenty years ago to get money for
-L
poor people in Africa. She also sang on a new version of Tears In

Heaven: it was recorded to raise money for people who lost their
N
hom es and families because of the tsunam i.

TO
She is a talented young wom an with a good heart.

NG
(adapted from www.katiemelua.com)

1 . Katie Melua w as b o m i n ___

A. N orthern Ireland, B. the USA.
ID
c. the form er Soviet Union. D. Turkey.

B
2. She first ap peared on TV when she was years old.

A. 15 B. 13 c. 8 D 18
65

3. One-of h e r songs w as dedicated 'to a(n) -- .: '

A. h isto ria n B. politician ' c . singer :r ,D\. actress
4: : Katie w as noticed by a fam ous p roducer
N
A. a t a ta le n t com petition. B. on TV.
1 -C. in a school. D. in a club.
NH
5. Katie prefers to s in g _____ _
UY
A. in big con cert halls. B. in sm all clubs,
c . a t private parties. D. in stadium s.
.Q
TP
6 . Katie helped to ra ise money for
A. children, people w ith AIDS an d tsu n am i victims.
O
B. children a n d people w ith AIDS,

c . children a n d tsu n am i victims.
D. people w ith AIDS an d tsu n am i victims.
NG
7. Do They Know Its C hristm as ?7w as w ritten i n _____ .
H
A. the early 90s B. the late 90s c . 2003 D. th e 80s
N
GLOSSARY
- performing arts school trng ngh - royal family hong gia, hong tc
thut biu din TR
- arena sn vn ng ln
- hit bn nhc n khch nht
B
00
10
32 A FAMILY TRAGEDY
+3
Today, Cecile Dionne looks m uch like any o th er su b u rb a n g ra n d -

P2
m other, b u t she an d h e r four identical sisters were once the m ost cele-
brated children on the face of the planet. They were know n to th e world
C
as th e Dionne Q uintuplets.
A
25-vear-old Elzire Dionne, already the m other of five children, gave

H
b irth to the q u in tu p le ts in May, 1934. Identical siste rs were b orn in the

family hom e in ru ra l Ontario. No one expected the five tiny in fan ts to
-
survive. B ut w hen Annette, Emilie, Yvonne, Cecile an d Marie did - the

-L
first q u in tu p le ts ever do so - they becam e a sensation.

N
W ithin days of th e ir birth , their father sold a prom oter th e rig h ts to

exhibit his d au g h ters. S tung by th e re su lta n t public outcry, the Ontario
TO
governm ent stepped in. The girls were tak en away from th eir p a re n ts
an d placed u n d e r the care of a board of guardians.
NG
It w as n o t long, however, before th e g u ard ian s, too, began to exploit

them . The O ntario au th o rities built a nine-room n u rse ry on Olivas

farm right ac ro ss the road from the family hom e, later expanding it into
ID
a bizarre facility nicknam ed Q uintland . It included a ho rsesh o e-

B
sh aped observatory, w here crow ds peered th ro u g h screened glass w in-
66

dows while the little girls played. The quints soon developed into a m a-
jo r to u rist attraction, draw ing as m any a s 10,000 visitors a m onth.
N
The q u in ts should have earned a fortune, certainly enough to last
them the re st of th eir lives. They were on the covers of m agazines. They
NH
appeared in films an d on radio. Still, by the tim e they were seven years
old in 1941, $1 million had accum ulated in a tru s t accou nt held for the
UY
girls until they tu rn e d 21 in 1955. The quin ts were finally reunited with
.Q
their p aren ts an d siblings (three more were b om after them ) when they
TP
were nine. Around th a t time, the p aren ts won back custody of the girls
and greater access to the tru s t fund fed by th eir earnings.
O

Cecile h a s decidedly mixed feelings ab ou t h er parents. In television
d ram a h er m other is portrayed as consum ed by love for the five little
NG
girls. T hat is no t the way Cecile rem em bered her. I d idn t even really
H
know my m other. She w as always too busy. B ut I suppose there were
too m any for h er to love. After all, she already had seven o ther kids by
N
the time we w ent back to the big hou se. If there is a glimm er of sym pa-
thy in Ceciles attitu d e to h er m other, there is little for h er father. He
TR
was a difficult m an to know and com m unicate, she says.
B
The difficult m om ents cam e later, after the Dionnes were reunited.
00
There were two distinct entities in the family. On the one hand, there
10
were the five little girls who had finally retu rn ed hom e. On the other,
+3
there were b ro th ers an d sisters who were both proud an d envious at

P2
the sam e time. It w as not an easy situation. Cecile rem em bers it well.
We lived separate lives, she says. But there w as always so m uch te n -
C
sion. in o u r relationships, always so m any quarrels. O ur b roth ers and

A
sisters, even o u r paren ts, always thou g ht th a t we were the cause of

H
th eir misery, their u n h ap p in e ss.

-
1. The Dionne sisters becam e so fam ous because they were the only
-L
q u in tu p le ts ____ _
N
A. who had lived p ast infancy.

B. who were no t b o m in a hospital.
TO
c. whose m other had already had children.

NG
D. who nearly died a t birth.

2. Why did th e O ntario governm ent take th e girls away from th eir p a r-
ents?
ID
A. They th o u g h t th eir p aren ts would cause problem s.

B
B. They tho ugh t their father was exploiting them .

c. They responded to. peoples reaction to the q u in ts situation.
D. They w anted to m ake m oney out of the girls.
67
3. W hat is Ceciles lasting im pression of the q u in ts early y ears at

Q uintland? >
A. The n u rse s were cruel to them .
N
B. The oth er q u in ts m issed th eir parents,
c . People m ade a lot of fu ss of them .
NH
D. They h ad very little privacy.
UY
4. W hat h appened w hen the q u in ts were nine?
A. Their m other h ad triplets.
.Q
B. They gained more control over their finances,
TP
c . They earned $1 million dollars.
D. They w ent back to live w ith the re st of the family.
O

5. How does Cecile feel abo ut h e r p aren ts?
A. She feels sorry for them both for having had su ch a large family.
NG
B. She ap preciates th e difficulty of her m o thers situation,
H
c . She w ishes she h ad been able to talk to h e r father.
D. She feels they were not properly portrayed in a book an d TV
N
program m e.
TR
5. Why w as life m ore difficult when the q u in ts moved back to live w ith
their family?
B
A. The family were divided over w hat to do w ith q u in ts earnings.
00
B. The other Dionne children felt am bivalent ab o u t them .

10
c. The girls couldnt spend as m uch time together as they had before.
+3
D. They made the rest of the family miserable by quarrelling all the time.
P2
7. How does the w riter of the article react to'C eciie's accou nt of her
C
childhood?
A. She is not convicted by it.
A
B. She accepts it as fact.

H
c . She th in k s Cecile is concealing th e tru th .

D. She th in k s Cecile is exaggerating.
-
GLOSSARY
-L
- suburban (adj) thuc ngoi - observatory i quan st

N
- celebrated (adj) ni ting - to peer through gh mt nhn qua

- quintuplets nhng a tr sinh 5 - screened (adj) c li chn
TO
- rural (adj) nng thn - to accumulate tch iy

- infant tr s sinh - trust account ti khon y thc
NG
- sensation tin git gn, tin gy xn xao - siblings anh ch em rut

d lun - custody s trng nom chm sc (mt

- promoter ngi t chc qung b sn a tr)

phm - trust fund qu y thc
ID
- to be stung b ch trch - earnings tin kim c, thu nhp

B
- resultant (adj) xy ra sau nh - to portray m t

hu qu - to be consumed by love for sb chan
68

- publsc outcry nhng phn i m ! ca cha lng .yu thng dnh cho ai
cng chng - glimmer tia sng le !t, mt cht gi t i
- to step in can thip - entity thc th, ci thc t ang tn ti
N
- board of guardians ban gim h - envious (adj) ganh t
- to exploit khai thc, bc lt - tension s cng thng
NH
- nursery nh tr - misery s khn kh
- bizarre (adj) k qui - infancy giai on s sinh
UY
- facility c s vt cht - to make a lot of fuss of sth lm rm
- nicknamed c bit danh l beng mt chuyn khng u
.Q
- horseshoe-shaped (adj) hnh vng - triplets nhng a tr sinh ba
- ambivalent (adj) va yu va ght
TP
cung nh mng nga
O
33 THE BEST OF FRIENDS

The evidence for harm ony in the family may not be obvious in some
NG
households. But it seem s th a t four out of five young people now get on
H
with their paren ts, w hich is the opposite of the popularly-held image of
sullen teenagers locked in th eir room after endless family rows. An im-
N
p o rtan t new study into teenage a ttitu d e s surprisingly reveals th a t their
family life is m ore h arm on ious th a n it h a s ever been in the past: more
TR
th a n half of 13 to 18-year-olds get on with their brothers. Eighty-five
per cent of 13 to 18-year-olds agree with the statem ent I'm happy with
B
00
my family life, while a m ajority said th eir lives were happy, fun and
carefree. Only one in ten said th a t they definitely did not get on with
10
their parents.
+3
We were surprised by ju s t how positive todays young people seem

P2
to be ab out their fam ilies, said one m em ber of the research team .
C
T herere expected to be rebellious an d selfish b u t actually they have

other things on their m inds; they w ant a car an d m aterial goods, an d
A
they worry abou t w hether school is serving them well. Theres m ore n e -
H
gotiation an d discussion between p aren ts and children, and children

expect to participate in the family decision-m aking process. They d o n t
-
w ant to rock the b oat.

-L
So it seem s th a t th is generation of p aren ts is m uch m ore likely th a n

N
paren ts of 30 years ago to trea t their children a s friends ra th e r than

sub ord in ates. There are actu al statem ents to back this up. My paren ts
TO
are happy to d iscu ss things w ith me and m ake com prom ises, says 17-
NG
year-old Daniel Lazall. I always tell them w hen Im going o ut climbing,

or w hich girl Im going out with. As long as they know w hat Im doing,

they are fine w ith it.

S u san Crome, who is now 21, agrees. Looking back on the last ten
ID
years, th ere w as a lot of w hat you could call negotiation... or you m ight
B
have called it bribery. B ut a s long a s Id done all my housew ork, I could

go out on a S aturd ay night. But I think my gran d p aren ts were a lot
69
stricter .with texr children. B u t m aybe th is positive,'view o f,family life

should not ) u n e x p e c t e d . p o s s i b l e th a t ideas of oscsnce being
a difficult tim e are, not- rooted, in real facts. psychologist com m ents,
"O ur surp rise 'h,at rtenagervsay' thejs get along- well .'With'-their p aren ts
N
com es because.-of a 'b rie f period m ou r social history w hrr teenagers
NH
were .id entifi ed" a s different -b e in g sB u t the idea of rebelling .aild b re ak -
ing âvvay from 'their parents-really only happ ened during th a t one tim e
UY
in the 1960s w hen everyone rebelled. The norm al situatio n th rou g ho ut
history h a s been a sm ooth transition from helping out w ith the family
.Q
b u sin ess to taking it over.
TP
The p resen t generation h a s grown up in a period of economic
O
growth, and a s a result teenagers app ear to believe m uch m ore in indi-

vidualism and self-reliance th a n in the past. T h a t h a s contributed to
their confidence in the fairness of life, an d th u s to a general peace
NG
w ithin the family u n it.
H
B ut is life really fair? Nine o u t of ten young people th in k if you work
hard enough, you will get ju s t rew ards. However, some recognized th a t
this w as not actually inevitable - and not always fair. If you have fewer
N
opp ortunities and live in an inner city, one 15-year-old boy told re-
TR
searchers, y o u ve got to work 110 per cent. O therw ise you can work 50
p er cent and get away w ith it.
B
. B ut greater family stability h as to be a good place for young people
00
to s ta rt out in life, an d the findings of the study sup p orts this. In spite
10
of some gloomy forecasts ab o ut the decline of the family, the future

+3
looks good!
P2
.1. W hat is im p ortant ab o u t the study into teenage attitu d e?

C
A. It confirm s previous findings.

B. It gives actual figures for its results.
A
c. It show s th a t m ost teenagers do not get O1 w ith th eir p arents.

H
D. It identifies unexpected facts.ab out family relationship s.

-
2 . W hat is surp rising ab o ut young people today, according to the re-

-L
search team ?
A. They w orry ab out being rebellious.
N
B. They th in k th a t education is im portant.

TO
c . They negotiate w ith their parents.

D. They discuss, things w ith their families.
NG
3. Daniel Lazall and S u san C ro m e_____

A. have very different opinions ab o u t parents.

B. could b oth talk to th eir p are n ts honestly.
ID
c . h ad no lim its placed on w hat they were allowed to do.

B
D. are both veiy responsible.
70

4. The w riter says th a t the positive view of family life should not be
un expected b e c a u s e _____
N
A. a happy family is the norm al situation.
B. th is view com es from a specific time in the past,
NH
c. p aren ts allow children a lot of freedom nowadays.
D. children can be bribed to behave well.
UY
5. W hat does u nderlined th a t refer to?
.Q
A. a period of economic growth
TP
B. a belief in individualism an d self-reliance
c . a n attitu d e held only in the p a st
O
D. a confidence in the fairness of life

6 . W hat do some young people believe abu t life today?
NG
A. It always gives everyone a fair chance.
H
B. M aking m oney is the m ost im portant goal.
c . Some people have to work longer th a n others.
N
D. Not everyone have equal opportunities.
7. The p urpose of the article is t o _____
TR
A. help people improve family relationships.
B
B. show young people how to choose a career.
00
c . dem o nstrate th a t popular ideas about relationships m ay be

10
false.
+3
D. suggest ways of educating children in developing relationships.

P2
GLOSSARY
C
- harmony s hi ha, s ha thun => - adolescence thi mi ln, la tui

harmonious (adj) thnh xun
A
- opposite iu tri ngc li - to be rooted in c ngun gc ti

H
- popularly-held image (adj) hnh nh - to break away from thot li khi

m mi ngi thng hnh dung - a smooth transition from... to... mt
-
- sullen (adj) mt my r s chuyn i sung s t... n...

-L
- positive (adj) c'tnh tch cc - to take sth over tip qun, nhn bn
- rebellious (adj) hay ni lon giao
N
- material goods ca ci vt cht - individualism ch ngha c nhn

- negotiation s thng lng - self-reliance s t lp/ t thn vn
TO
- decision-making process tin trnh ng

a ra quyt nh - fairness s cng bnh, hp l
NG
- to rock the boat m o !n, gy xo - inevitable (adj) tt yu, khng th

trn trnh c

- subordinate cp di, thuc h - inner city khu lao ng ngho kh

- to back sth up h , ng h ci g trong mt thnh ph tn
ID
- to make compromises a ra tha - stability tnh n nh

hip, nhng b nhau - to start out n life bt u vo i
B
- to look back on hi tng i, nhn li - gloomy (adj) u m, en ti, m m

- bribery s hi - decline s suy gim, s xung dc
71
34 y . SUPERSTITIONS EVERYWHERE :
. Was-.it' poor visibility'-or.'superstition'ât^m ade .WEanchesfer U niteds
N
players. A bandon; ''theiij gey.st'ti'p :f9;,w:'gam es'in -th m iddle of a
P re n u e rsh ip /m a tc k m l 1990!?./The-.'players cou ldn t.pick each oth er out,
NH
m anager Alex Ferguson told rep orters a t the time. It w as noth ing to do
with superstition. They said it was difficult to see their team m ates a t a
UY
distance. But his protest failed to m ention th a t one of th e five occasions
.Q
the grey strip had been worn, the team had failed to win.
TP
Dr Richard W isem an, a psychologist a t H ertfordshire University,
says U niteds players m ay have succum bed to th e power of sup erstition
O
w ithout even realising it. I m ight argue th a t the players m ay have un- .

consciously noticed th a t w hen they do certain things, one of which
m ight well involve the wearing of red shirts, they are su ccessful. He
NG
draw s a parallel with research into stock m arket speculators. Like
H
gam blers they swore th a t certain days were lucky for them . Eventually
it was shown th a t the successful m arket sp eculators were u n c o n -
N
sciously picking u p on num erou s indicators an d were shadow ing m ar-
ket tren d s b ut were unable to explain how they did it. Superstition
TR
plays a p art w henever people are not certain w hat it is they do to
B
achieve a good perform ance and people who have to perform to order
00
are particularly vulnerable. It is a s if the im agination steps into the gap

10
in the dialogue betw een the conscious an d th e u nconscious m ind.

+3
Many sup erstitions have deep roots in the p ast according to Moira
Tatem, who helped edit the 1,500 entries in the Oxford D ictionaiy of
P2
Superstitions. People today observe superstitio ns w ithout know ing why

C
an d th ey d probably be surprised to discover origins. The idea th a t mail

vans are lucky is a good example. Sir W inston C hurchill, th e B ritish
A
Prime M inister during World War II, w as said to have touched a mail
H
van for luck w henever he saw one in the street. The reaso n for th is s u -
perstition resides in the ancient belief th a t Kings an d Q ueens h ad the
-
ability to cure by touch. M onarchs, naturally enough, grew fed u p with

-L
being constantly touched and a t some point started trailing ribbons

N
with gold m edals or coins o u t of the door of th eir coaches w hen travel-
ling and people touched them instead. Mail van s carry the Crown sym -
TO
bol on the side an d touching the van is a direct throw back to th a t e a r-

lier belief.
NG
While some ancient superstitio us beliefs an d practices have been

m aintained, others have died out. This is b ecause those practices w ith
a connection t farm ing and a life sp en t in close proxim ity to n a tu re no
ID
longer m ake m uch sense now th a t so m any of u s live in cities. Never-

B
theless, we continue to develop ou r own som etim es very private and

personal su perstitio ns. Many people carry or w ear lucky objects al-
72

though they may n o t in fact thin k of them as such. It only becom es ob-
vious th a t the object forms a p art of a sup erstitio us belief w hen the
person is u n able to w ear or carry it and feels uncom fortable as a result.
N
E xperts agree th a t th ese individual sup erstitiou s practices ca n be an
NH
effective m eans of m anaging stress and reducing anxiety. The self-
fulfilling n a tu re of sup erstitio n s is what- can help. The belief th a t som e-
UY
thin g brings you good luck can m ake you feel calm er, an d as a resu lt,
.Q
able to perform m ore effectively. International cello soloist Ralph Kir-
TP
sh b a u m savs m u sicians are a good example of th e effectiveness of
these very p a rticu la r rituals. I know string players who w ont w ash
O
th eir h a n d s on the day of a recital an d others who avoid eating for eight

h o u rs prior to a perform ance. They can th en play w ith confidence.
B ut th is self-fulfilling asp ect of sup erstition s can also work against
NG
you. This is why K irshbam prefers to confront the su p erstitio u s p ra c-
H
tices of o th er m usicians. *If yo ure in a situation where you c a n t avoid
eating or forget an d w ash your h an d s, you th en feel th a t y o u ll play
N
badly. And you often do, simply because you feel so anxious. I w ash my
h a n d s an d have broken th e taboo ab o u t eating. My only vice is to in sist
TR
th a t people leave a nd give me two m i utes com plete silence in the
dressin g room before I go on.
B
S uperstition s can become even more harm ful w hen they develop
00
into p hobias or obsessions, often characterized by elaborate collections

10
of rituals. Its n o t a problem if carry a lucky object of som e k ind ,

+3
says psychologist Robert Kohlenberg of the University of W ashington.

B u t if I d o n t have it w ith me and I get terribly u p se t an d tu rn the
P2
house upside down looking for it, th a ts a bad th ing .

C
1. According to their m anager, Alex Ferguson, M anchester United d e-

A
cided to change out of th eir grey sh irts b e c a u s e _____

H
A. they h ad lost every time they h ad worn them.

B. th e colour w as n ot bright enough.
-
c.. it w as difficult for the o ther team to see them .

-L
'
D. a psychologist told them they m ight play be tte r w ithout therr

N
2. Dr W isem an says M anchester United players and- stock markek-

TO
sp eculators are sim ilar in t h a t _____

A. both g ro ups can identify the factors th a t contribute to im prov-
NG
ing perform ance.

B. both groups attrib u te th eir success to wearing p artic u lar item s

of clothing.
ID
c . n eith er group can u n d e rsta n d why they do well on som e occa-

sions a n d n o t on others. -
B
D. both gro up s believe th a t certain days of the weefe-are lucky for

them .
73,.
A, A' fam ous p o 4 itjc i^ l,used:' t 6';d,b it too."

B .Th van^;are lucky ^b.ut l ;dnt know-why.
N
c , B eing'touched 'by 'm onarch can cure disease.
NH
V . Tie royal coat of arm s is on the side of the v an .
4. Which older sup erstitions have been preserved?
UY
A: Those th a t still seem m eaningful.
.Q
B. Those connected w ith life in the city.
TP
. G. Those connected with life in the countryside.
D. Those th a t are created and held by individuals.
O

5. How does going w ithout food affect some string players?
A. It m akes them feel too tired and hungry to play well.
NG
B. It helps them play w ith more assurance.
< c. It m akes no difference to the way they perform.
H
D. It en su res th a t they perform.
N
6 . Why d o esn t Ralph K irshbaum keep the su p erstitiou s p ractices of.
other m usicians?
A. He c a n t be bothered with them . TR
B
B. He h as his own com plicated rituals,
00
c. He d o esn t think they always help.

10
D. He is not sup erstitio us.

+3
7. W hat attitu d e does the au th o r of th e article have to su p erstitio ns?

P2
A. He th in ks they are harm ful.

B. He th ink s they are inevitable.
C
c. He th ink s they can be nonsensical.

D. He th ink s they can be beneficial.
A
H
GLOSSARY
-
- visibility tm nhn xa, mc nhn r - to cure by touch cha lnh bng cch
-L
- superstition s/ iu m tn d oan s tay

- strip ng phc ca i bng - monarch vua/ hong hu
N
- away game trn u sn khch - to trail ko l ng sau

- Premiership match trn u gii ngoi - ribbon di bng
TO
hng Anh - coach c xe nga

- to pick each other out nhn thy nhau - Crown symbol biu tng Hong gia
NG
~ protest s phn - throwback ngi/vt/ iu tng

- t be succumbed to chu thua ci gi ng nh trong qua kh

- unconsciously (adv) mt cch v thc - n close proximity to sth rt gn vi

- to draw a parallel with sth so snh - self-fulfilling (adj) (li tin tri) tr
ID
ci gi vi thnh s tht v ngi ta tin s

- stock market th trng chng khon thnh s tht/ c tin thi c thing
B
- speculator ngi u c - cello soloist nhc s c tu n celo

- gambler ngi nh bc - ritual nghi l, nghi thc

- to pick up on sth thy ci g - string player ngi chi n dy
N
- indicator iu chi dn, du hiu - recital bui trnh tu nhc
- to shadow market trends thm d, - to confront thch thc
NH
theo di cc xu th th trng - taboo iu cm k
- vulnerable (adj) d b tn thng - vice thi xu
UY
- gap khong trng - phobia chng s hi v l
- mail van x ch th - obsession ni m nh
.Q
- to reside c tr ti - to turn the house upside down xo
tung c nh ln ( tm)
TP
O
35

W ilbur an d Orville Wright, aviation pioneers a n d Am erican inven-
tors, achieved the first powered, su stain ed and controlled flight of an
NG
airplane. W ilbur w as b o m on April 16 1867, in Millville, Indiana, and
H
Orville on A ugust 19 1871 in Dayton, Ohio. They were the sons of Mil-
ton Wright, m in ister an d his wife, S u san Wright. Their aviation in te r-
N
est sta rte d a t a young age when in 1878 th eir fath er brought them -a
rubberband-pow ered helicopter toy th a t they adored. They instantly
began m aking various copies of it. TR
B
W ilbur an d Orville lived very proper lives. They did not smoke,
00
drink, or m arry, and they always dressed in sm art b u sin ess suits, even
10
when they were likely to get dirty working with m achinery. They com -
pleted high school courses, but. neith er graduated formally. In 1892
+3
they opened a bicycle shop where they sold, repaired an d m an ufac-

P2
tu red bicycles. Income from the shop supported them d u rin g the early
C
years of th eir aeronautical experim ents. Their in tere st in m echanical

flight was reinforced-by the gliding flights of the G erm an pioneer Lil-
A
lienthal. The W right brothers followed Lillienthals career an d studied

H
all the available literature on aviation a t the time. This inspired them to
begin their aeronautical experim entation. D uring the w inter of 1901-
-
1902 they built a wind tu n n el to test th e drag a n d lift of various wing

-L
shapes. They also m anaged to design a gasoline engine th a t w as light

enough an d powerful enough to propel an aeroplane.
N
Finally, on Decem ber 17 1903 a t Kitty Hawk, North Carolina, Orville

TO
m ade histo ry s first powered and controlled aeroplane flight. The press,
however, refused to believe th a t m an had flown, an d th eir 1903 flight
NG
w as n o t im m ediately acknowledged by the public. This first W right a ir-

plane was underpow ered an d difficult to control, an d it becam e obviu

th a t a lot h ad to be done to perfect their invention. As a result, they e

ID
tid ed to co ntinue experim entation. W ithin two y ears of trials, th<

Wright B rothers m anaged to fine-tune the controls, engine, propeller
B
and configuration, a n d created the w orlds first practical aeroplane. !

1905, after they perfected their aircraft, they began looking for buyer

passp o rts. He collected them wearily, stam ped them m echanically, an d

handed th em b ack to u s. He h ad no sooner left th a n th e cu sto m s offi-
cers entered. They were extremely polite an d m uch to o ur su rp rise (es-
N
pecially th e lady in the fu r coat), did not seem too concerned ab o u t the
goods we h ad w ith u s. They opened one or two cases, w hich they did
NH
not exam ine thoroughly, and then asked each of u s how m u ch money
we h ad with u s an d requ ested to see it. {I learned afterw ards th a t large
UY
am o u n t of money were being smuggled out of th e countiy).
.Q
The officers rem ained quite satisfied th a t all w as in order an d were
TP
p rep arin g to lea v e w h e n o n e of th e m c a s u a lly p ic k e d u p th e
c ig a r e tt e - lig h te r to lig h t h is pipe. The m an opposite me m ade an
O
involuntary m ovem ent an d checked himself, saying th a t the lighter w as

broken. The officer replied jokingly th at th a t w as why th e m an h ad
probably h ad no cigarettes to declare. The m an stam m ered an em b ar-
NG
rassed reply an d it w as clear he w as trying to hide som ething. The c u s -
H
tom s officer noticed th is too, an d offered to rep air the m a n s lighter. He
unscrew ed th e bottom of it an d , to o ur am azem ent, began to draw out
N
a thick roll of dollar bills of high value. A lighter like th is w as too valu -
able to be left lying aro un d, the officer said, an d he ask ed the m an to
follow him o u t of the com partm ent. TR
B
00
1. The n a rra to rs fellow -passenger_____

A. w as a ra th e r reserved an d bottled-up m an.
10
B. spoke with a very strong accent.

+3
c, u sed stron g language.

P2
D. w as cheerful an d jolly.
C
2. The fact th a t the m an co u ld n t give the n a rra to r a lig h t_____

A. d id n t seem strange to him because he d id n t give it a second
A
thought.
H
B. w as ra th e r unexpected.
c. su rp rised him b ecause his fellow-traveller used to be so helpful
-
all the way to the frontier.

-L
D. w as a t th e b ack of his m ind as they were rapidly reachin g the

N
frontier.
3. W hen an official cam e into the c o m p a rtm e n t,_____
TO
A. he found th e n arrato r fast asleep.

NG
B. he did his d uty habitually, w ithout fixing his m ind on it.

c. he w ent th ro u g h the m otions 'of the procedure m echanically

pretending n othing was wrong.

D. he w arned the p asseng ers th a t a lot of money w as sm uggled ou t
ID
of the country.
B

4. After a very quick survey of p asse n g ers things the custom s officers
N
A. seemed dissatisfied w ith its results.
B. were suspiciously polite with the passengers an d quickly left the
NH
com partm ent.
c. inquired w hether the passeng ers had any currency along.
UY
D. state d the value of them.
.Q
5. One of the officers_______
TP
A. w as a heavy cigar smoker.
B. w as a violent opponent of smoking,
O
c. wanted to light a cigarette.

D. liked to sm oke a pipe.
NG
6 . One of the cu sto m s officers susp ected th a t som ething w as wrong
H
A. after they were through with the thorough exam ination of the
N
things.
B. after one of them m ade a motion to take the lighter an d tried to
m ake u se of it. TR
c . because the m an looked very em barrassed.
B
D. after th e officer unscrew ed the bottom of the lighter.
00
10
7. The custom s officers asked the owner of the lighter to come along
with them b e c a u s e _____
+3
A. the m an was a smuggler.

P2
B. they cou ldnt leave such a valuable thing a s the lighter lying
C
around.
c . he w as too nervous and it was clear he w as trying to hide som e-
A
thing.
H
D. one of them w anted to repair a lighter.

GLOSSARY
-
-L
- jerk ci git mnh - to be in order hp php, hp l

- to take to sth/sb thch ci g/ ngi - involuntary (adj) ngoi mun, bt
N
no gic
- bright (adj) thng minh - to check oneself t km ch, km
TO
- good-tempered (adj) vui v, vui tnh mnh ii

- frontier bin gii - to unscrew'vn,tri m ra
NG
- compartment bung hnh khch trn - roll mt cun

tu ho - narrator ngi k chuyn

- to stamp ng du - at the back of one's mn vn cn

- mechanically (adv) mt cch my mc ng i trong tr
ID
khng cn ngh ngi - to make a motion to do sth lm ci

- to smuggle bun lu, vn chuyn iu ng tc l
B
hng ha - smuggler k bun lu
79

37 _..........., .
.D id VOU >p0--that'-w'-.o;gt a?ut-8.0% - th e -m e d ic L m r m tio n a
doctor m ig h t jg iv ew iiiP ^ h is/fe cam e to
N
light.'.s,: resuitôf stodv ârried-.o.ut-by-'/tJtrecht-Unfê.rsity. W hat is
.'even''more;iriterestiwg' is ttia t'a lm o st half of ihat w e-thir% w e rem em ber
NH
is wrong.. Why do yo think: th is is? WeH, gng to tibte doctor can m ake
m ost people-nervous and when we are stressed we 'are*more inclined to
UY
focus on tfte".diagnosis ra th e r th an on the treatm ent-'..Therefore,:we
know w h a t isfwrong with u s b u t have no idea w h at to do ab o u t it.
.Q
Here re some good tips to have in m ind w hen seeing a doctor. Al-
TP
ways bring along a notepad to jo t down im po rtant pieces of inform ation
O
such a s how to take prescribed m edication or how to prepare for any

m edical te sts you m ight need. W hat would be even b e tter is if your doc-
tor agreed to having your consultation recorded. In this way, you can
NG
replay his advice a t hom e, where you are m ore likely to be able to a b -
sorb it. Should you believe the situation is serious or y o u re really wor-
H
ried, get a family m em ber or close friend to accom pany you to listen in.
The P artnersh ip for Clear Com m unication recom m ends you ask
N
these three questions every time you talk to a h ea lth care professional:
W hat is my m ain problem ?, W hat do I need to d o ? a n d Why is it
TR
im portant for me to do th is?. It's also very im p ortant to get any w ritten
B
inform ation th a t is available on your condition.
00
10
1. According to the passage, the inform ation doctors give u s _____ .

A. is not enough B. is only 80% correct
+3
c . is m ostly forgotten D. should be studied carefully

P2
2. Research carried o u t by U trecht U niversity_____

C
A. brought new m edical inform ation to light.

B. showed th a t fifty per cent of w hat we h ear from doctors is m is-
A
H
understood.
c . showed th a t fifty per cent of doctors give us m isinform ation.
-
D. was seen as not very accurate.

-L
3. The a u th o r says th a t .when people consu lt a d o c to r_____

N
A. they only w ant to know w hat is wrong with them .

B. they are only interested in knowing w hat they should do.
TO
c . they believe their situation is serious.

D. they usually have a family m em ber or close friend w ith them .
NG
4. Why is it good to have a notepad with you?

A. to show your notes to a health care professional

ID
B. to write down any im portant details

c . to let th e doctor w r i t e h i s suggestions
B
D. to keep track of how m uch m oney you pay the doctor
80

5. The word prescribed in paragraph 3 m e a n s _____ .

A. u s u a l B. ordered c. used D. perm itted
N
6 . The a u th o r suggests recording th e consultation in order to _
A. listen to it w hen you have calm ed down.
NH
B. play to your family and friends to get th eir opinion,
c. refer to it later to better u n d ersta n d you r condition.
UY
D. use ag a in st the doctor if necessary.
.Q
7. Who should you a sk three particular questions?
TP
A. Anyone you con sult with regards to your health
B. The P artnership for Clear Health Com m unication
O

c . E ither a family m em ber or a friend
D. R esearchers w ith knowledge of your particular condition
NG
GLOSSARY
H
- to come to light c cng b - to jot down ghi chp
- stressed (adj) cm thy cng thng - medication thuc men
N
- to be inclined to'do sth c xu hng - consultation s hi , trao i kin
thch m g
- diagnosis s chn on
TR - to repiay m ra nghe/xem (bng ghi
m/ phim)
B
- notepad cun s tay - health care professional chuyn vin
00
y t
10
+3
38
P2
For m illions of people, the in tern et h a s opened u p a whole new

world. From th eir personal com puters they are ordering books, sending
C
greetings card s an d finding o ut abou t literally anything on E arth. For

s tu d en ts it is invaluable for homework, for travellers it m akes planning
A
H
and booking astonishingly easy, while for m any o th ers it is a great way
of keeping in to uch w ith family and friends or, indeed, m aking new
-
friends. It is, in short, a wonderful resource for obtaining inform ation,

-L
getting th ing s done an d com m unicating with others. And yet it is also
creating one of th fastest-growing social problem s of ou r time: Internet
N
addiction.
TO
A recent study involving Internet u sers from all over the world found
th a t 50 p er cent of them claim ed to be addicted, spending an average of
NG
over 60 h o u rs per week on-line. Some of these reported routinely log-

ging on a s soon as they arrived hom e from work, university or school,

often rem aining on-line un til the sm all hours. "Som etim es Im feeling
ID
absolutely exhausted , dying to go to bed, said one resp o nden t b u t

th en I th in k to m yself Ill just, try one m ore page, it m ight be really
B
good. And then I th in k the sam e abou t the next page. And the next.
And so on.
81

The- study .showed no difference in the rate of addiction betw een m en

a n d woihen.-and-revealed th a t m anv heavy, u sers sim ply lo s t trac k of
time. vinyextrencases they'.begaji to.negleet themseiyes^.vtSeir families
arid -their' friends^ apparently preferring lê.companyiôf com puter '
N
to th a t of o th er people..They were also fo u n d t be npre',:likly to be de-
NH
pressed th a n m oderate u se rs, although it is s yet unclear;.w hether this
is brought ab o u t by the excessive time, sp ent on-line, or w h eth er al-
UY
ready depressed individuals have a greater tendency to stay a t hom e
and engage in w hat is, essentially, a solitary activity.
.Q
The re search ers com pared it with o ther addictions su ch a s gam -
TP
bling, which, they say, shares with it the elem ent of in term itten t re-
O
wards: in the case of the Internet, the occasional discovery of an excit-

ing web page. In addition, both activities tend to take place against a
background of dark ness. Net surfing often tak es place at night; casinos
NG
deliberately keep the lights tu rn ed down low so th a t the p u n ters, too,
H
lose all sense of time. Television addiction, however, ap p ears to be dif-
ferent, as TV w atching tends to be m ore passive, m erely filling the
N
available free time.
Many Internet u sers, of course, would say the sam e of going on-line.
TR
So when does norm al extensive Net surfing become an addiction? In
B
som e cases the indications are clear: skipped m eals, lack of sleep,
00
strained relationships, etc., but in others the sym ptom s are m ore s u b -
10
tle. Obsessive u sers m ay check an d re-check th eir e-m ail boxes u n n e c -

+3
essarily. They m ay deceive them selves, an d others, abo ut how long they
actually sp en d on-line, an d spend th eir off-line tim e looking forward to
P2
their next on-line session. They m ight even ru s h to th eir PCs th e m in -

C
ute they have the h ouse to them selves, relieved th a t o th ers are not
there to p ass judgem ent.
A
W hat, though, can those who recognise they have a problem actually
H
do ab o u t it? The first thing is not to panic. One expert points o u t th a t

m any people spend an enorm ous am ou nt of tim e reading, say, or talk -
-
ing on the telephone, som etim es to the detrim ent of family relation-
-L
ships. Yet nobody talks about book addiction, or phone addiction as

N
if they were in som e way akin to chronic alcoholism or heavy smoking.

If they are cutting them selves off, so th is theory goes, it is b ecause o f a
TO
weak relationship. Going on-line is m erely one way, like tu rn in g on the

TV or going o u t for a drink, of avoiding' conversation with those at
NG
home. The problem is th e relationship, not th e com puter.

W here an addiction genuinely does exist, the advice is to seek pro-

fessional help sim ilar to th a t for sufferers of other com pulsive d iso r-
ID
ders. This co nsists of gradually reducing the tim e sp en t on line, as well

as dealing w ith any personal difficulties th a t m ay underlie th e condi-
B
tion. O ther experts advise the addict to talk to su p p o rt groups specifi-
82

cally formed to help people w ith th e problem of Intern et overuse. Ironi-

cally, these groups can currently only be contacted via th e Internet.
N
1. W hat did the study discover?
NH
A. Half of all u se rs always go on-line w hen they get home.
B. Marry people use the In tern et ali night.
UY
c . Some keep hoping to find som ething interesting on-line.
.Q
D. The heaviest u se rs are usually male.
TP
2. According to the text, d e p re s s io n _____
A. is com m on am ong all In ternet users.
O

B. is asso ciated w ith heavy Intern et use.
c . is c a used by In tern et addiction.
NG
D. leads to overuse of the Internet.
H
3. In the fo u rth p aragrap h , the w riter implies t h a t _____
A. gam blers rarely win.
N
B. gam bling is less harm ful th a n In ternet addiction,
c . In tern e t addicts are often also gam blers.
TR
D. people prefer to gam ble in darkened places.
B
4. W hich of th ese is a n example of a less obvious sign of addiction?
00
A. not eating a t proper tim es because of excessive surfing

10
B. being shocked to discover how long they have been on-line

+3
c . telling o th e r people how long they have spent on-line

D. being afraid th a t o th er people will criticise them
P2
5. In the sixth p aragrap h, the au th o r likens heavy In tern et u se to

C
A
A. having long telephone conversations.

H
B. drinking too m uch alcohol. ' ,

c . sm oking a lot of cigarettes.
-
D. talking to relatives for m any hours.

-L
6 . W hich, according to the au th o r, could have the opposite re su lt from

N
w h at is intended?
A. obtaining the sam e treatm e n t a s for other conditions
TO
B. attem p tin g to spend less time on-line

c. treatin g th e possible ca u ses of th e addiction
NG
D. d iscussing-the addiction with specialist o rganisations

7. W hat is th e a u th o rs aim in writing th is text?

ID
A. to call for m ore controls on th e co ntent of In tern et pages

B. to describe In tern et addiction an d suggest rem edies
B
c. to discourage people from usin g th e In tern et

D. to dism iss claim s th a t th e Internet is addictive
83
^GLOSSARY ....: .=
^-'Kteraly-Caiyie: dung ngtjTa. den/ ; : '^kippiedâeij)' bhtxxqua ,
ng tht'l; .^ . . . . - strairied (adi) Gng thng .
N
-addiction'S nghin/ghin. - obsessive (adj) b m nh
- addicted (adj) nghin/ ghin - session phien lam'Vic; t
NH
- routinely (adv) nh thrig / thng - t o pass judgement a ra li nhn xt
ngy nh gi
UY
- to log on ng nhp vo mng - to panic hong lon
- the small hours khong thi gian sau - detriment s tn hi
.Q
. na m - akin to c b con vi, gn ging, na n
- respondent ngi tr li (mt cuc - chronic (adj) mn tnh
TP
thm d kin) - alcoholism chng nghin ru '
O
- to lose track of time khng cn thc -sufferer ngi ang mc bnh/ ang

v thi gian phi chu ng
- moderate (adj) chng mc, iu - compulsive disorder s ri lon do
- excessive (adj) qu qu ham m
NG
- solitary (adj) n c, mt mnh - to under!ie nm bn di, l nn tng
- intermittent (adj) khng u n, lu
H
ca
lu mdi c mt ln - overuse s lm dng
- deliberately (adv) c tinh - ironically (adv) ng ma mai !
N
- punter ngi nh bc, ngi c - via (prep) thng qua, qua ng
TR
39 THE eBAY ADDICTS
B
00
Katie is sitting a t h e r com puter, eyes glued to the screen. Its 2 am

10
and the eBay auction is ab o u t to end. W ithin m in u tes the 25-year-old

events m anager from London will know if- she has won an o th er p air of
+3
Gucci shoes to add to h e r collection.

P2
The scene m ay sou nd familiar. Indeed, eBay - th e In tern et auction

C
site - h a s becom e a m odern phenom enon, w ith 10 million British u s -

ers, 135 million worldwide an d u p to 600,000 joining every m onth.
A
The other side-effects of h er self-confessed addiction are far m ore

H
alarm ing. Katie h a s sp en t so m uch of' h er su b stan tia l 50,000-a-year

-
salary on eBay since discovering it in November th a t she is already

-L
10,000 in debt.
It is not ju s t h er finances which are feeling the strain. Her h ealth is
N
also- deteriorating u n d er the stress of owing so m uch, a n d she h a s been

TO
to see h er GP. W hat horrifies Katie even m ore is the fact th a t she can
see h er personality changing as a reult of h e r addiction: she adm its
NG
she is now prepared to lie to cover the extent of h e r problem .

Natalie, 27, from London, who w orks for a casting agency, also finds

taking p a rt in the eBay auctions and h u n tin g for barg ains addictive.
ID
I adm it th a t I am an addict an d I probably do need professional

B
help, she' says. Every day I wake u p an d say th a t today I am no t going

on eBay. B ut I c a n t stop myself. It started a s my stre ss-b u ste r from
84

work an d now its the cause of my stress. The thrill of the auction is
like a gam bling ru s h .
These young women are not isolated cases. David Nott, Addictions
N
Program m e M anager, is seeing an increasing n um b er of p atien ts with
NH
eBay addiction, which he says is a very real condition.
While shopaholism h a s been recognized as a problem for years, he
UY
believes eBay addiction is different because of the com bination of
.Q
shopping and gam bling which m akes it so compelling an d potentially
more addictive.
TP
While a lot of people claim th a t the possibility of picking u p a b a r-
O
gain is w h at a ttra c ts them to eBay, the single biggest thing th a t tends

to keep them coming back is not w hat they buy, b u t how they buy it,
he says. The whole thing is geared around anticipation, w inning and
NG
losing - its a verv emotive process.
H
He says eBay addiction should be treated as seriously as any other.
It is potentially life'destroying. While it doesn't have the im m ediate
N
health im plications, it can lead to disrupted sleep, the sam e types of
TR
adrenaline highs and lows an d obviouslv the overspending and conse-
quent financial problem s th a t this entails.
B
00
1 . Whv does the au th o r in the second paragraph say th a t the scene

10
may sou nd fam iliar? B ecause people taking p a rt in th e eBay a u c -

+3
tions a r e _____
P2
A. a rare case B. ordinary buyers

c. spread all over the world D. decreasing in num ber
C
2. People visiting eBay auctions a r e _____

A
A. gam blers B. addicts c. shopaholics D. lonely people

H
3. According to the au th o r w hat attra cts people in eBay auctions?

-
A. the ru sh of excitem ent

-L
B. anticipation, w inning and losing

c . the need to by things
N
D. the possibility to pick up a bargain

TO
4. eBav addiction is different from shopaholism b e c a u s e _____

A. there is no h u m an interaction
NG
B. it is a com bination of shopping an d gam bling

c . it is m ore addictive
D. you buy things online
ID
5.. David Nott says th a t the side effects of eBay addiction- a r e _____
B
A. destroyed relationship and stress

B. financial problem s
85
c . deteriorating health a n d change of personality

D. adrenaline ru sh , disrupted, sleep a n d financial problem s
6 . EBay addiction according to David Nott should be treated seriously
N
b e c a u s e _____
A. you get hooked
NH
B. it h a s im m ediate h ea lth im plications
c . bidding is exciting
UY
D. it m ay destroy your life
.Q
7. Natalie th in k s th a t h er a d d ic tio n _____
TP
A. is self-destructing
B. influences h e r relationship w ith p aren ts
O

c . is th e cau se of h er stre ss
D. is ju s t a hobby
NG
GLOSSARY
H
- to be glued to (b) dn cht vo - shopaholism chng nghin mua sm
- auction cuc bn u gi -shopaholic ngi nghin mua sm
- compelling (adj) hp din
N
- Gucci [tn cng ti sn xut da thi
trang hng sang] - to be geared around lin kt cht ch
-
-
sde-effect tc dng ph
self-confessed (adj) t cng nhn
vi TR
~ anticipation s mong i, s hy vng
B
- in debt ang mc n - emotive (adj) gy xc ng, to ra
00
- to deteriorate suy thoi, thoi ha, nhiu cm xc

- implication h qu
10
bin cht
- GP [General Practitioner] bc s a - disrupted (adj) b gin on
+3
khoa - adrenaline highs and lows mc tng

- casting agency cng ti mi gii ngi v gim s hng phn (do tit ra hc-
P2
nng khiu cmn adrenaline nhiu hay t)

C
- addictive (aj) gy nghin - to overspend chi tiu qu mc

- stress-buster hot ng gip gim - to entail gy ra, mang li, ko theo
A
stress nh mt hu qu
H
- to get hooked tr nn nghin/ ghin

-
40 WIMBLEDON
-L
There is a definite buzz to W imbledon in July. This is the village

N
where Londoners celebrate both th e su n an d th eir prou d lawn ten n is

roots. W hen you see th e crowds stream in g into th e stre e ts w earing
TO
su n g lasses, sum m ery dre sses an d straw h a ts, its like a n official decree
from the Q ueen herself: th e long aw aited B ritish sum m er h a s rolled in.
NG
Up un til 6 Ju ly , there is only one reason to come to W imbledon: te n -

nis. Over one fortnight in J u n e an d Ju ly , th e w orlds top-seeded players

fight it o u t in a g rass cou rt for the prestigious trophies. The atm o s-
ID
phere is electric. F am ous faces dot the crowds, English flags wave for
th e players a n d vendors do a steady trad e in straw berries a n d cream ,
B
which h a s come to be th e official food of th e C ham pionships.
86

It is possible to get ticket for Wimbledon on th e day of the m atch.

Get u p an d get there a s early a s possible. Day-of-play tickets are sold
on strictly o ne-per-person queuing basis. Q ueues can be extremely long
N
a n d your position in the queue can n o t be reserved by equipm ent, you
NH
m u st be th ere in person!
If youVe m issed th e C ham pionships, m ake u p for it w ith a visit to
UY
th e aw ard-w inning Wimbledon Lawn Tennis M useum . The m useu m
.Q
offers a glim pse of how th e gentle game of lawn tenn is, once all th e rage
on th e law ns of Victorian England an d with origins th a t go far back to
TP
Medieval Roya T ennis, h a s become a multi-m illion dollar professional
O
sport.

The m u seu m offers w onderful views over C entre Court. Youll find
m em orabilia donated from fam ous players and great footage of p a st
NG
m atches, a s well as a rt an d artifacts th a t bring the excitem ent of the
H
spo rt to life.
Visitors also p artak e in the other gam e in Wimbledon: walking. Take
N
a picnic on one of W imbledons m any green areas. Wimbledon Common
covers ab o u t 1,140 acres of woodland, h ea th land and mown recreation
TR
areas. Ten ponds prom ote a variety of bird, anim al a n d plant life. The
B
entire area is unfenced and is open to the public 24-h o urs a day
00
th ro u g h o u t the year.
10
Shopaholics should head for the 320,000 squ are foot shopping cen-
+3
tre a t C entre Court, Wimbledon - the h e a rt of Wimbledon retail. Three

floors, w ith 62 sho ps an d food outlets offer visitors a plethora of pleas-
P2
a n t shopping. Its also a convenient place to p u rc h ase m em orabilia or

C
to get a snack an d stock up on provisions before the big m atch a t the

Wimbledon T ennis G rounds.
A
If you wish to seek o u t a bit of quiet time pe rh ap s to m editate and

H
th in k w inning th o u g h ts for your chosen ten n is player hopeful, th e first

B ud dhist tem ple in th e UK is th e place to visit. Four peaceful acres e n -
-
com pass a n im posing temple, ornam ental lake, a small grove, flower
-L
garden an d orchard.
N
1. Wimbledon is a fam ous place in England w here you c a n _____

TO
A. see fashionably d ressed people.

B. celebrate th e beginning of sum m er.
NG
c. buy straw berries and cream .

D. w atch ten nis m atches.

2. Tennis C h a m p io n sh ip _____
ID
A. is officially an n oun ced by th e Queen.

B. ta k es place over one fortnight.
B
c. is a close event.
D. is th e time w hen Londoners celebrate the sun.
87

3.
A. ;on ;-perso3:<^Ti:m m^y'tGkets:.for:e match'J
' B: ..you .can getîektvr he : i&^niatefr/ -:
;: C. -yLb cn :book' ticlcetron,-ihe::day;.ofthfe Tnatct: '
N
; D . o m u s t q u for while-.' .... --'ysM:
NH
4. In th e-- Wimbled'an.-La^frenn^WMuseumVycu can _11
' A. tr a c e tie history-of tehnisv ' - -f
UY
B. play tennis- ; '<
.Q
c . becom e a m ulti-m illion dollar professional.
TP
D. see fam ous players.
O
5. W imbledon Com mon i s _____

A. a private area.
B. rich in flora and faun-a.
NG
c . an o th er gam e in Wimbledon.
D. ju s t a picnic area.
H
6 . W here can you have a m eal?
N
A. a t the W imbledon Tennis G rounds.
B. a t C e n tr e C o u rt.
c . a t W imbledon Common. TR
B
D. a t Wimbledon Lawn Tennis M useum .
00
7. The B u ddhist te m p le _____

10
A. is the only place to visit in Wimbledon.

+3
B. is the place for religious people.

c. is a beautiful place to visit and m editate.
P2
D. is th e fourth in the UK.

C
GLOSSARY
A
H
- buzz tm trng/ bu khng kh n nc - to donate hin tng

- to stream chy tun tro - footage on phim ngn
-
- summery (adj) thuc ma h - artifact ch tc, m ngh

- straw hat m rm - to partake in sth tham gia vo
-L
- decree sc lnh - common khu t cng

N
- long awaited (adj) c ch i lu - mown (adj) (c) c ct xn

- to roll in ko n - unfenced (adj) khng c hng ro
TO
- fortnight khong thi gian 2 tun - to head for a place nhm hng mt
- top-seeded player cu th ht ging ni i n
NG
hng u - retail s bn l
- prestigious (adj) danh gi, uy tn - outlet im.bn hng

- trophy gii thng, cp - plethora trng, thi tha thi, d

- electric (adj) si ng, si ni - snack mn n dm
ID
- to dot c mt lc c - to stock up n provisions mua d

- vendor ngi bn rong ngoi ng tr
B
- to do a trade in sth mua bn mn g - to meditate suy gm, thin qun

- hopeful (adj) ay trin vng

- strawberry tri du ty - to encompass bao gm, cha ng

- day-of-piay ticket v bn ng vo - imposing (adj) oai nghim, hng v, b
ngy thi u v, nguy nga
N
- on a one-per-person queuing basis - ornamental (adj) dung trang tr
da n c s mi ngi xp hng - grove khu rng nh
NH
ch c mua mt v - flora h thc vt
- rage s say m cung nhit - fauna h ng vt
UY
- memorabilia k vt, IU nim
.Q
41
TP
Although I left university w ith a good degree, I suddenly found th a t
O
it w as actually quite h ard to find a job. After being unem ployed for a

few m onths, I realised I h ad to take the first thing th a t cam e along or
Id be in serious financial difficulties. And so, for six very long m onths, I
NG
becam e a m arket research telephone interviewer.
H
I knew it w a sn t the best com pany in the world w hen they told me
th a t Id have to undergo th ree days of training before startin g work, and
N
th a t I w ouldnt get paid for any of it. Still, I knew th a t the hourly rate
TR
when I actually did s ta rt full time would be a lot better th an un em -
ploym ent benefit, and I could work up to twelve h ou rs a day, seven
B
days a week if I w anted. So, I tho ught of the money Id earn an d p u t up
00
w ith th ree days of u n paid training. W hatever those th ree days tau g h t
10
me - an d I ca n 't really rem em ber anything abou t them today - I w a sn t

+3
prepared for the way I would be treated by the supervisors.

P2
It w as worse th a n being a t school. There were abou t twenty in ter-

viewers like myself, each sitting in a sm all, d ark booth w ith an ancient
C
com puter and a dirty telephone. The booths were aro u n d the walls of
the fifth floor of a concrete office block, an d the supervisors sa t in the
A
H
middle of the room, listening in to all of o u r telephone interviews. We

w erent allowed to talk to each other, and if we took m ore th a n about
-
two seconds from ending one phone call and startin g another, they
-L
would sh o u t a t u s to h u rry up and get on with our jobs. We even had

to ask perm ission to go to the toilet. w as am azed how slowly the day
N
went. O ur first break of the day cam e a t eleven o clock, two h o u rs after
we started. Ill always rem em ber th a t feeling of desp air w hen I would
TO
look a t my w atch thinking, It m u st be nearly time for th e break, only

NG
to find th a t it was q u arte r to ten and th a t there w as an o th er h o u r and

a q u arte r to go. My next th oug ht w as always, c a n t believe Im going

to be here un til nine oclock tonight.

ID
It w ouldnt have been so bad if w hat we were doing h ad been useful.

But it w a sn t. Most of o u r interviews were for a m ajor telecom m unica-
B
tions com pany. Wed have to ring u p b u sin esses and ask them things
like, Is your telecom s budget more th a n three million pou nds a year?
89
The Ghnce are w ed..get'tibie r-epiy, O h ,,! don 'tx tM nksp.. Ill a sk my
husb^d:;.This:is.-a:,coriierislio.p^ W;eke cîy^gbt-on&'pJipne:.1 And so the
day w ent on. ?' _ ' - ' 1 - f|
N
- TH e-m ost'frightening asp ect of- th e job -w's th a t ! w as actually quite
good at it. Oh no! I thought. Maybe Im -destined to be a m ark e t re-
NH
searcher for the re st of m y life. My boss certainly seem ed to th in k so.
One day - during a break, of course - she ordered m e into h e r office.
UY
Sim on, she said, Fm prom oting you. From tom orrow, youre off tele-
com s and onto credit card com plaints. Im sure you can handle it.
.Q
Theres, no extra pay, b u t it is a very responsible position."
TP
Three w eeks later I quit. It was one of the best decisions IVe ever
O
m ade.

1. Why did the w riter become a m arket research telephone in ter-
NG
viewer?
A. He h ad completely ru n out of money.
H
B. He had the right university degree for the job.
c . It w as the first job he was offered.
N
D. He knew it w as only for six m onths.
TR
2. The w riter had doubts abo ut the com pany w h e n _____
A. they only offered him th ree days of training.
B
00
B. they told him he w ouldnt receive paym ent for his training,
10
c . they told him he h ad to be trained first.

D. he w as told w hat the hourly rate would be.
+3
3. His w orkplace could best be described a s _____

P2
A. large an d noisy.
C
B. silent and dirty.

c . untidy an d crowded.
A
D. old-fashioned and uncom fortable.

H
4. How did he feel w hen he realised it w asnt time for the b reak yet?
-
A. He felt th a t he would have to go hom e early.

-L
B. He felt th a t he w ouldnt survive to the end of the day.

c. He felt th a t the end of the day seem ed so long away.
N
D. He felt th a t he m u st have m ade a m istake.

TO
5. W hat w ould have m ade th e job more bearable?

A. know ing th a t he w as carrying out a valuable service
NG
B. being able to phone m uch larger com panies

c . n ot having to talk to shopkeepers

D. not having to ring up b usin esses

ID
6 . W hat w as u n u s u a l about Sim ons prom otion?

B
A. It showed how good he w as a t his job.

B. it m eant he would be phoning different people.
90

c. It involved greater responsibility.

D. There w as no increase in salary.
N
7. W hat would be the m ost suitable title for th is extract?
A. Typical Office Life
NH
B. U npleasant Employm ent
c. How To E arn a Decent Salary
UY
D. You Get W hat You Deserve
.Q
GLOSARY
TP
- market research telephone inter- - break qung gii lao
O
viewer nhn vin phng vn khch - despair cm gic tuyt vng

hng qua in thoi phc v cng - telecommunications = telecoms
vic nghin cu th trng vin thng
NG
- to undergo tri qua - budget ngn sch
- hourly rate tin i ng tnh theo gi
H
- to be destined to do sth c s
- unemployment benefit tr cp tht phn an bi ! s lm gi
nghip - to promote sb thng chc cho ai
N
- supervisor vin gim th - credit card complaints b phn gii
- booth bung in thoi/ ngn ring TR quyt cc khiu ni lin quan n th
- concrete (adj) bng b tng tn dng
B
- to handle x l, gii quyt
00
10
42 GETTING AWAY FROM IT ALL

+3
Som ewhere aro u n d February it begins. The drizzle is com ing down
P2
outside and the kids are bored on a S aturday afternoon. Its usually
C
th en th a t my h u sb an d decides it is time to plan o u r sum m er holiday.

O ut come the brochures and the discussion begins.
A
Its not th a t we're an argum entative family, b u t it seem s th a t where

H
we are to spend two weeks in the sum m er relaxing brings out the worst
-
in us. Before too long, we're all insisting on places an d refusing others,
-L
the volume steadily increasing. My d aug hter discovers a lifelong am bi-

tion to go to India. Funny how she never m entioned it before. My sn
N
isn t going anyw here u n less he can bring his dog an d my h u sb an d

d oesnt m ind where he goes as long a s its w ithin five m iles of a golf
TO
course.
NG
As u su al, its left to som eone, and guess who, to find som ewhere
th a t everybody is willing to accept (the dog goes to the neighbours,

though). This can take some weeks of persuading, rem inding an d con-
vincing on my part, b u t usually th e res a solution. Then its time to
ID
plan the packing. It seem s th a t everybody else believes th a t it can be

B
done half a n h o u r before we leave for the airport. My h u sb a n d lays out

th ing s he w ants to take an d p u t them back w hen h e s no t looking and
91
get ot' th real holiday clothes.' My d au g h ter w an ts to take everything

sh e owns. Each; item'.'she h a s to. -put back is the su b jec t;of an o th e r a r-
gum ent. : ' -

Finally th e "day arrives an d we get to the airp o rt in plenty of time.
N
This h ap p e n s b ecause I s ta rt to sh o u t five h o u rs earlier th a t we are go-
NH
ing in five m inutes, ready or not. Once a t the airport, we check in. It
so unds simple enough, b u t the thing is th a t airpo rts are full of people
UY
ru nn in g aro u n d who d o n t know w here to go. Not su rp risin g since we
only do it once a year an d weve forgotten where we w ent last time. We
.Q
finally find the right desk, get rid of the bags an d go th ro u gh to the de-
TP
p artu re lounge.
O
Somewhere aro u n d here I can finally th in k ab o u t relaxing. Not for

me the cold sw eats, shaking, an d nervous wondering ab o u t the plane.
Everything is somebody eises problem. If th e re s som ething wrong w ith
NG
the plane, the pilot can worry abou t it. If a passen ger h a s a h e a rt a t-
H
tack, the stew ards can worry about it.
And so begin two weeks of relaxation. I learned long ago th a t the
N
only way to do it is to stop being called M um . For those two weeks,
TR
w henever I h ea r the word I look aro u n d a s if it refers to som eone else. I
ignore any question th a t begins with W heres m y.... The funny thing
B
is th a t they always find it anyway. The only thing I worry ab o u t is
00
w hich book Im going to take to the pool. My h u sb a n d follows a ball

10
aro u nd a course, my kids do w hatever kids do these days an d I becom e

+3
m yself again for a sh ort while.

P2
C
1. The w riter im plies th a t her fam ily _____

A. find it h ard to agree on anything.
A
B. all have very different personalities.

H
c . d o n t usually fight over things.

D. d o n t care ab o u t each o th ers feelings.
-
-L
2. The w riter th in k s h e r d a u g h te rs am bition to go to India i s _____

A. not as strong as she claim s.
N
B. am u sin g in a girl her age.

TO
c . strange for som eone like her.

D. a secret she should have shared.
NG
3. The w riter im plies t h a t _____

A. h er son refuses to go with them .

B. the o th ers try to m ake her agree.
ID
c . nobody is reallv happy with the idea.

B
D. she gets the oth ers to agree.
92

4. Why does the w riter p u t back the clothes her h u sb an d chooses?

A. She d o esn t like w hat he w ears.
B. He forgets to choose things for her.
N
c . He c a n t decide w hat to take.
NH
D. The clothes a re n t suitable.
5. The w riter im plies t h a t _____
UY
A. its not far from h er house to the airport.
.Q
B. they would be late if she d idnt m ake a fuss,
TP
c. airpo rts are usually badly designed.
D. people should go on holiday more often.
O

6 . The w riter th in k s she is different from some other, people because
s h e _____
NG
A. finds flying an enjoyable experience.
B. d o esn t worry ab o u t problem s,
H
c . u n d e rsta n d s w hat pilots face.
D. d o esn t care ab o u t other passengers.
N
7. The w riter th in k s th a t h er fam ily_____
TR
A. .tryt stop h er from relaxing on holiday.
B. d o n t recognise h er when she's on holiday,
B
c . d o nt need her as m uch as they think.
00
D. ignore her u n less they need som ething.

10
GLOSSARY
+3
- drizzle cn ma phn. - volume khi lng

P2
- argumentative (adj) hay tranh ci - packing s sp xp hnh l

C
43 HOW ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY AM ?

A
H
Ja n e Gregson called in an expert to find out.

I like to th in k th a t IJm bringing my kids up to care about the world
-
aro un d them . They know th a t resources are scarce: th a t they sh o u ld n t

-L
w aste w ater an d th a t they should tu rn lights off to save electricity when

theyre not in a room. They know th a t we have to save th e rainforests
N
and respect the w orlds fragile eco-balance. They know th a t we have to

TO
ensure th a t the air we breathe is clean. I tho ught my family w as envi-

ronm entally friendly, so I invited Tom H arper from Pollution Prevention
NG
Ltd to come and see if I w as doing everything right.

Tom arrived a t our detached house early on a Saturday m orning. I

w as m aking breakfast, and my two children, J o sh u a (aged nine) and
ID
Rebecca (twelve) were w atching cartoons on TV.

B
The first thing Tom asked w hen he cam e into the kitchen w as How
olds your fridge? I told him it w as about fifteen years old. Well, by the
look of it, you ought to think about getting a new one.
93
A new one? I said. I thought we were supposed to use p ro du cts for

as long a s possible before buying new ones. It still w orks quite well.
Well, said Tom, it may still keep your food cold, b u t look a t those
N
door seals. Theyre old, so theyre leaking cold air. T hat m eans your
fridge h as to work h ard er to stay cold, so th a t u ses m ore electricity. A
NH
new one w ould be m uch more efficient an d cost-effective. We m oved to
the living room. It w as November, so the heating w as on. Its nice and
UY
w arm in here, said Tom, b ut, to be honest, th e re s a problem with
.Q
your windows. Those alum inium window fram es let a lot m ore hot air
TP
out of the house th an wooden or plasti fram es do. And you d o n t have
do ub le. glazing. Double-glazed windows keep in alm ost twice a s m uch
O
heat a s single p ane windows. Once again, y ou re usin g far m ore elec-

tricity th a n you need to. Right, kids, I said. T urn the TV off, have a
quick shower, th en come down for breakfast. Okay?
NG
Before they have their show ers, said Tom, le ts have a look a t your
H
bathroom . We all w ent up. You see th a t show erhead? said Tom. Its
got lots of big holes. T h ats going to let through ab out tw enty litres of
N
w ater per m inute. A new w ater-saving show erhead lets th ro u g h a lot
iess w ater, an d you still get a good shower. So, if you fit one o f th o s e ,
TR
you'll not only save w ater, you 11 also save hot w ater, so you 11 lower
your energy an d heating costs. This w as m ore like w hat I w anted to
B
00
hear. A new fridge and double-glazing were expensive. A new show er? I
could afford that.
10
While the kids had their show ers - Tom w as pleased they d id n t have
+3
b a th s - we w ent to.look a t th e car. Now I know cars are b ad for th e e n -

P2
vironm ent, b u t w hen youVe got two children w anting to go to p arties

and to the sp orts centre, w hat other option is there? The n ea rest b u s
C
stop is too far away. Tom was understanding. If you have to have a
car, you have to have a ca r, he said. T heres no such thing as a n envi-
A
ronm entally friendly car, b u t there are things you can do to reduce the
H
negative im pact cars have on the environm ent.

-
I only u se it w hen absolutely necessary, I said proudly. T h ats

-L
good, said Tom. B ut you should m ake sure the engine is kep t p rop -
erly tuned. This can increase fuel efficiency by a s m uch a s 8%. Also,
N
regularly check th a t your air filters are clean. If theyre dirty, th a t will
increase your fuel consum p tion. By now, the kids were w anting th eir
TO
breakfast. We all sa t down together in the kitchen. There are som e

things ypu can do, said Tom, like checking your car, th a t w ont cost
NG
you m uch m oney, an d th ey ll save you money in the long ru n . Equally

im portantly, th eyll help a little to protect the environm ent, o th e r

things w eve talked ab out, like a new fridge, do cost quite a lot. B u t you
ID
have to be aw are th a t yo ur windows an d your fridge a t the m om ent are

costing you m ore th a n they should in term s of heating bills an d elec-
B
tricity use. Nobody benefits from th a t.
94

1. Why did th e w riter invite Tom H arper to h e r house?

A. She w anted him to see how difficult it is to be environm entally
N
friendly.
NH
B. She w anted to know if she could be m ore environm entally
friendly.
UY
c . She w anted him to teach h er children to be environm entally
friendly.
.Q
D. She w anted to show him how to be environm entally friendly.
TP
2. The w riter w as surprised by w hat Tom said ab ou t the fridge be-
O
cau se _____

A. sh e h ad h ad it for so long.
B. it w as only ab ou t fifteen years old.
NG
c . she w anted it to stop working before she bought a new one.
H
D. she th o u g h t he would not recom m end throw ing things away.
3. Why is the w riter using too m u ch electricity in th e living room?
N
A. A lot of the h eat is escaping through the windows.
TR
B. Theiwriter h a s the heating on in November,
c . The children have the TV on too m uch.
B
D. The window fram es are not the right size.
00
4. W hat does th e p hrase one of those in paragrap h 6 refer to?

10
A. a show erhead w ith big holes

+3
B. a good shower
P2
c . a w ater-saving show erhead

D. thei show er in the w riters bathroom
C
5. Tom is sym pathetic to the w riters _____

A
A. desire n ot to use public transport.

H
B. childrens desire to have showers,

c . willingness to buy a new shower.
-
D. explanation of why she h a s a car.

-L
6 . According to Tom, both clean air filters an d a properly-tuned engine

N
TO
A. reduce fuel consum ption by ab ou t 8%.

B. help to reduce the am o u n t of fuel a ca r uses,
NG
c . prevent high fuel bills. ;

D. m ake a car environm entally friendly.

7. Tom points o ut to the w riter th a t buying a new fridge

ID
A. m ay save h er money in other ways.

B
B. m ay not be a s expensive a s she thinks,

c. w ouldnt really benefit her.
D. is m ore im portant th an checking the car.
95
c. It may.be' a -lief ,4 . - .
D. It 'sW w s i'-ne<i-;fQF actioni'
,*7:. \ W iia t w o u l& | D ie ^ ( e : m o s t r s u it a l3 t e '.t M e io r it h iS exteafct?'
N
'Be-Fooled layd esig n ers-
'B.'-A R eturn to 'Popularity
NH
c. The D ecline in. th e F ur Trade
\ D. Millions of Animals Are Suffering
UY
GLOSSARY
.Q
- fur lng th
TP
- to dye nhum
- fur farm tri nui ng vt ly b - powder blue mu xanh dng
O
lng - trick mnh li

- to be bound to do sth nht nh s - fur trapper ngi t by bt th ly
!m g b lng
- slogan khu hiu
NG
- leghold trap by kp chn
- trend xu th - fox con co
H
- to disguise ngy trang - to go bankrupt ph sn, v n
- to trim ct ta bt - trendy (adj) hp thi trang
N
45 LOUD AND PROUD IN THE NOISE CAPITAL OF EUROPE
TR
Echoing those academ ic studies th a t dem o nstrate the blindingly ob-
B
vious, M adrid's local auth orities have sp ent nearly 5 .5m in a three-
00
year study th a t shows th a t the Spanish capital rem ains the noisiest in
10
Europe. The resu lts confirm a n OECD study som e years back th a t
+3
ranked Spain a s the noisiest country in the world, after Jap a n .

P2
Six acoustic m easuring points set u p th ro u g h o u t the city registered

a noise level of more th a n 65 decibels for m ost of th e time. T his is the
C
safety limit of tplerance set by the World Health O rganisation an d the

EUs m axim um perm itted sound level. Main ro ad s ro ar beyond the
A
H
citys own 70 decibels limit, and big traffic intersections h it a m ighty 80

decibels during th e th ree daily ru s h hours: from 6.30 a.m . to 10 a.m ., 1
-
p.m. to 5 p.m . an d 7 p!m. to 10 p.m.

-L
An angry opposition socialist councillor, R uth Porta, com plained th is

week: The conservative city council h a s sp ent P ts l.3 b n (5.4m) to
N
m easure the noise level we have to endure, b u t h a s n t contributed a

TO
single peseta to reducing it. Eighty per cent of th e noise pollution is

caused by traffic - car horns, engines an d m otorcycle ex h a u sts - an d
NG
the rest from industry , bars an d shopping areas.

The au th orities insist th a t noise levels are no w orse th a n 20 years

ago, despite a 30 per cent increase in traffic. In so u th ern cities like
ID
ours, we have m ore street life, there is more activity, an d you notice it,
explains the h ead of noise control a t the City Hall, Plcido Perera.
B
98

Stress, insom nia, aggression an d lack of concentration are the m ain

effects, b u t according to Mr Perera, city noise does not cau se perm a-
n en t dam age.
N
The best way of quietening the row, the authorities adm it, is for
NH
people to use public tran sp o rt ra th er th a n the private car, b u t nobody
seriously expects th a t to happen. The Socialists propose ro u nd a bo u ts
UY
in stead of traffic lights, m ore acoustic screens - the la st one w as put
up in 1991 - an d repaying streets with a more porous asp h a lt th a t a b -
.Q
sorbs m oisture an d reduces noise.
TP
So w h at will the city do? Set up more m easuring stations, for a start:
O
there will be 25 throug hou t M adrid by Septem ber. From next week they

will sta rt m easuring the noise produced by heavy lorries and building
works.
NG
The problem is th a t m ost people don t find noise a problem . S pan-
H
iards - whose own language was described by the w riter Laurie Lee as
the dry throaty rattle of pebbles being rolled down a gully - are m ostly
N
self-assertive an d sociable and used since childhood to raising, their
TR
voices to m ake them selves heard. You find gentle speakers outside Ma-
drid, b u t few in th e capital.
B
Awoken on a Sunday m orning by a m onotonous sh outing down a
00
m egaphone, I looked from my terrace to see two m en selling bouquets

10
of roses off the back of a truck, inflicting a horrible form of noise pollu-
+3
tion upon a quiet residential street. B ut it seemed to be effective: a

P2
wom an no t only bought two bunches, she broke off a bloom and pinned
it behind h er car.
C
(adapted from "Loud And Proud in the Noise Capital of Europe" by Elizabeth Nash,
A
The Independent, Sunday, 7 June 1999}

H
1. Finding out th a t Madrid is the noisiest capital of Europe h a s _____

-
A. come as a surprise.
-L
B. been a long process.

c. contradicted the re su lts of an OECD study ab o u t Spain.
N
D. changed the ranking of Ja p a n a s the noisiest country.

TO
2. M adrid's local safety limit of noise level suggests t h a t _____

A. there m u st be more tolerance of noise in the city th a n in other
NG
p a rts of Europe.

B. the citys authorities should pay m ore atten tio n to the EUs offi-
cial regulations,
ID
c. its no use trying to set down the regulations nobody follows,

B
D. it m u st be very difficult to control the noise du ring the citys

ru s h hours.
99
3. W hich sentence.best sum m arizes w hat p aragraph 3 is ab o u t?

< . A.--TTieath(>rMesHave!ia[ed-.to:-notice;rMa<irid,-i5problem-.;'.
' B. .Solving M adrids'problem h a s -cost- t a m ch.
N
c . M adrids: problem ,ias; been studied b u t not solved.
." . ThecitysTeabproblem is a conflictbetw een politicians,:.
NH
4. According to M adrids autho rities, _____ ;
A. noise in the city h as recently risen by 30 per cent.
UY
B. typical Maxirid street Me m akes noise m ore noticeable,
.Q
c. stress an d aggression are worse th a n th e effects of noise.
TP
D. city noise will be u n d er control veiy soon.
5. The m ost effective m ethod of stopping th e noise pollution would be
O

A. u nacceptable to m ost people.
B. contrary to the Socialists suggestions,
NG
c . technically difficult to introduce.
H
D. based on new traffic regulations.
6 . Laurie Lees description of Spanish is m entioned in the text in order
N
t o _____
A. prove th a t it is a difficult language.
TR
B. em phasize som e of th e S paniard s b e st qualities.
B
c . explain why S paniard s c a n t help being w hat they are,
00
D. suggest w h at m akes Madrid different from o th er cities of Spain.

10
7. The form of noise pollution in the last parag raph is described as

+3
effective because i t _____

A. helped sell the product.
P2
B. d id nt d istu rb anybody,
C
c. m ade the w riter feel good.

D. w as pleasing to the Spanish ear.
A
H
GLOSSARY
- to echo lp !i - roundabout vng xoay giao thng
-
- blindingly obvious r rng n mc - acoustic screen tm chn/ vch ngn

-L
khng th chi ci c cch m

- OECD [Organisation for Economic Co- - porous (adj) xp/ c nhiu !i ti
N
operation and Development] T Chc - asphalt nh tri ng

- throaty (adj) (ging) khn khn
TO
Hp Tc v Pht Trin Kinh T

- to rank xp ai vo v th - rattle ting long xong, rn rng
- acoustic measuring point trm o - pebble si, cui
NG
n - guliy rnh nc, mng, mng

- to register 1) ng k 2) o c - self-assertive (adj) (ngi) t tin/

- decibel [n v o cng m thanh] mnh dn pht biu kin

ID
- tolerance s chp nhn c - sociable (adj) thch gio du/ thch kt

- to roar gm r bn, d gn, chan ha
B
- intersection ng t, giao l - monotonous (adj) n iu, t nht

- pts [peseta] n v tin t cu ca Ty - megaphone !oa 'phng thanh
100

Ban Nha - terrace sn thng, sn hin

- insomnia chng mt ng - bouquet b hoa
- aggression tnh hung hng/ hay gy s - to inflict gy ra
N
- to quieten lm im ting/ lm cho du i - bunch b (hoa), chm (cha kha)
- row $ om sm, huyn no - bloom bng hoa
NH
- Socialists ngi theo ng X Hi - to pin ghim cht, nh vo
UY
48
.Q
Most children a t the tender age of six or so are full of m ost im prac-
TP
tical schem e for becom ing policemen, firemen or train drivers when
O
they grow up. B ut w hen I w as th a t age, I could not be bothered with

su ch m u n dane am bitions. I knew exactly w hat I w anted to do, I was
going to have my own 200. At the time, th is did n ot seem to me, and
NG
still does not seem, a very unreasonable idea. My friends an d relatives,
who h ad long found me strange b ecause I showed little in tere st in any-
H
thing th a t did not have fur or feathers, accepted this a s ju s t ano ther
m anifestation of my strangeness. They felt that, if they ignored my of-
N
ten-repeated rem arks abo ut owning my own zoo, I would eventually
grow out of it. TR
As the years passed, however, to the bew ilderm ent of those friends
B
00
and relatives, my resolve to have my own 200 grew greater an d greater

and eventually, after going on a num b er of expeditions to bring back
10
anim als for other zoos, I felt the time w as ripe to acquire my own.
+3
From my latest trip to W est Africa, I had brought back a consid-

P2
erable collection of anim als w hich were living,- tem porarily I assured
C
her, in my sister's su b u rb a n garden in B ournem outh. B ut after a n u m -

ber of u n su cc essfu l attem p ts to convince local councils in various areas
A
to su p p ort my plans, began to investigate the possibility of startin g

H
my zoo on the island of Jersey in the English C hannel.

I w as given an introduction to a m an nam ed H ugh F raser who, I w as
-
told, w as a broad-m inded, kindly soul. He would show me aro u nd the

-L
island an d point ou t suitable sites. So, I flew to Jersey an d w as m et by

N
Hugh F raser who drove u s to his family home, probably one of the m ost
b eautiful old h o u ses on the island. There w as a huge walled garden
TO
with lots of outbuildings all b uilt in the beautiful local stone which was
the colour of a u tu m n leaves glowing in the sun shin e. T urning to my
NG
wife, I said: W hat a m arvellous place for a 200.

If my h o st h ad prom ptly fainted on the spot, I could not have blam ed

him . The th o u g h t of creating the average p erso n s idea of a 200, w ith all
ID
the grey cem ent and iron bars, in such a lovely spot w as horrible. To
B
my astonishm ent, however, Hugh F raser did not faint, b ut merely

cocked an enquiring eyebrow at me and asked w hether I really m eant
w hat I said. Slightly em barrassed, I replied th a t I had m eant it, b u t
101
. added 'h a stily 'th at I.reaiised/% ît'âs;.:im possible^:.H uî ,said he did
n o t'th in k it was.;as im possk)leras ali'that,?.. - ,
V'-He- w ent on to explajji-.that .the hojise, arid.grounds'r'were 'too big for
N
him to'lceep up a s 'a private individual, an d so he w anted to move to a
sm aller .place in E ngland. Wotild I care to consider renting th e property
NH
for the p urpose of establishing my zoo? I could not im agine m ore a t-
tractive surroun dings for ray purpose, an d by the tim e lunch w as over,,
UY
the bargain h ad been sealed.
.Q
The alarm displayed by all who knew me w hen th is w as an no u n ced
TP
can be im agined. The only exception to the general ch o ru s of d isap -
proval w as my sister. Although she tho ught it a m ad schem e, a t least it
O
would rid her back garden of the assorted jungle creatu re s th a t were

beginning to p u t a great strain on h er relationship w ith h er neighbours.
NG
1. The w riters friends and. fam ily ____ _
H
A. encouraged him in his childhood am bition.
B. took no notice of his childhood am bition.
N
c . tried to talk him ou t of his childhood am bition.
D. tried to interest him in other things.
TR
2. In p aragrap h 2 the word bew ilderm ent m ean s th at the w riters
B
friends an d re la tiv e s _____
00
A. were pleasantly surprised by him.

10
B. becam e increasingly angry with him.

+3
c . were show n to be right ab out his ideas.

P2
D. didn't really u n d erstan d his am bitions.

C
3. The w riter didnt s ta rt a zoo in England b e c a u s e _____

A. nobody w anted to help him.
A
B. he had too m any anim als,

H
c . his sister w as against it.

D. he co uldn t get perm ission.
-
-L
4. The w riter w as introduced to Hugh F raser b e c a u s e _____

A. Hugh knew a lot ab ou t zoos.
N
B. Hugh owned a n u m b er of houses,

c . Hugh knew th e island very well.
TO
D. Hugh h ad offered land for rent.

NG
5. W hen th e w riter m ade a com m ent ab o u t the walled garden, Hugh

A. w as horrified a t the prospect.

ID
B. w as surp rised by the suggestion,

c. w as too em b arrassed to reply.
B
D. w as interested in the idea.
102

6 . The w riter p articularly liked the place he chose for the zoo because
of i t s _____
A. size. B. price. c. setting. D. facilities.
N
7. W hen the w riters sister learned ab out the establishm ent of the 200
NH
in Jersey, she fe lt _____ .
A. alarm ed B. relieved c. supportive D. disappointed
UY
.Q
GLOSSARY
TP
- tender (adj) (tui) cn non nt, mng - to glow sng in
non - promptly (adv) ngay lp tc
O
- mundane (adj) tarn thng - to faint ngt xu, bt tinh

- feather lng v - iron bars cc chn song st
- manifestation s biu l, biu th - horrible (adj) kinh khng, khng khip
NG
to grow out of sth (rt cuc s) t.b - t o cock an enquiring eyebrow
ci g, s qun ci g i nhng my t ra thc mc
H
- bewilderment s hoang mang, b ri - hastily (dv) mt cch vi v, hp tp
- resove s quyt tm - grounds khu t quanh nh
N
- to acquire kim c - to seal a bargain i n mt tha
- temporarily (adj) tm thi thun
- suburban (adj) ngoi
- broad-mnded (dj) c u c phng
TR - chorus ng thanh, cng nhau ni
- disapproval sir khng tn thnh,
B
khong khng bng lng
00
- soul 1) linh hn 2) k, ngi - to rid sth of sth gii thot cho ci g

- walled garden vn c tng bao khi ci g
10
quanh - assorted (adj) mi oi khc nhau

+3
- outbuilding nh ph (xy tch ri nh -jungle creatures th rng

chnh) - strain s cng thng
P2
C
47
A
The m iddle-aged w om ans voice on the other end of th e phone w as

H
icily im perious: Oliver, come and sp eak t th is lady, now, sh es from

clearing.
-
Jud g in g by Oliver's rather slow response., it w as ap p aren t he w as re-

-L
lu ctan t to d iscuss h is p lan s for further education, in the light of his

disappointing A-levei results. B ut when he finally m ade it to the receiver,
N
he was m et with the soothing, tones of a clearing centre adviser.

TO
At universities across the country, sim ilar scenes were played out
from th e m om ent clearing lines were opened, in some cases a s early as
NG
8.30 am.

C andidates who m issed their target resu lts by a grade or two des-
perately dialled their adm issions tu to rs to discover if they would still be
ID
accepted. Those who did m uch worse th an expected, tu rn ed to clearing,

B
the system through w hich tem porarily unplaced stu d en ts apply for
spare places on degree courses.
103

Im here to help by m atchm aking stu d e n ts w ith co urses, said Ryan

S aun d ers, 29, a paid volunteer a t Kingston University. Ive ju s t h a d a
bloke who skipped lots of his exam s an d w anted to get on a b u sin ess
N
course, for w hich he needed 180 points, b u t he only h ad 60. C ertainly
he w a sn t accepted by u s. He w as quite a persuasive talker. I personally
NH
thin k h e s got a great career in sales.
UY
Figures show th a t there w as a rise of m ore th a n 16,000 people from
2002. Almost one stu d en t in 1 1 found a place on a degree course
.Q
th rough clearing.
TP
U niversities are typically at p ains to stress th a t stu d e n ts should
O
take time before m aking m ajor decisions. They claim they are careful of

aw arding places to app licants who have hitherto show n no in tere st in a
subject. Their advice to anyone who h a s n t got into th eir first choice
NG
university is to ring around an d see w h a ts available elsew here ra th e r
H
th an simply taking, the first course theyre offered. Its b etter to m ake a
considered decision th a n end up on the wrong course in the wrong
N
place.
TR
All th e sam e, nationw ide, there was a mood sim ilar to th e opening
day of a budget airline in tern et sale. Anyone w ho lost th e ir nerve an d
B
hesitated ra n the risk th a t the place w ould be snapp ed u p w hen they
00
called back later.

10
At Greenwich University some professional train in g co u rses were

+3
filled w ithin hours. Nursing, midwifery and education proved popular,

P2
followed by newly introduced courses in criminology an d forensic sci-

ence.
C
With h u n d re d s of clearing places available, th e university h ad 100

A
p hone lines pen b u t w as still sw am ped by th e flood of calls ju s t after

H
10 am , the tim e w hen m any stu d en ts received th eir results.

-
The overall quality of th e stu d en ts caling u p is b e tter th a n in p re-

-L
vious years. B ack a t K ingston University adm issions tu to r for geological

sciences w as confident the m ajority of his 15 places w ould be filled
N
throu gh clearing.
TO
As far a s w ere concerned, once a n app licant is accepted by u s it

doesn t m atter w heth er theyve come through clearing or n o t, he said.
NG
It often h as a positive effect. Some stu d en ts suddenly realize they need

to work h ard er th a n they have done in the p a st.

ID
1. The purpo se of clearing is to provide school leavers w it h _____ .

B
A. w ork place B. mobile p hones

c. university degree D. training courses
104

2. Who tu rn s to clearing system ?

A. Those w hose re su lts lack a grade or two.
N
B. Those who do m uch worse th a n they should have,
c . Adm issions tu to rs
NH
D. In tern et u se rs
UY
3. Universities w ant stu d e n ts t o _____
A. choose the university
.Q
B. take only professional courses
TP
c . th in k carefully before choosing the course
D. h u riy in order n o t to lose the place
O

4. Clearing s y ste m _____
A. provides only professional courses.
NG
B. provides ch eap air tickets.
c . suffers lack of good stu d e n ts applying.
H
D. invites stu d e n ts with perfect A-level results.
N
5. More people call th e C learing s y s te m _____
A. after 10 am.
B. from 8.30am . TR
c . on th e opening day of the sale.
B
D. when they m ake th eir decision.
00
10
6 . One of th e ca nd idates called clearing b e c a u s e _____

A. he w anted to upgrade his results.
+3
B. he w as a good sales representative,

P2
c . he w anted to apply for a course.

D. he w as very assertive.
C
7. Clearing provides can dida tes with degree co urses a t _

A
A. Kingston University.
H
B. Universities across the country,

c . 15 places.
-
D. Greenwich University.
-L
GLOSSARY
N
- cly (adv) c v lnh lng - bloke ci anh chng, ci g, ci cu

- imperious (adj) ra v cp trn, k c, - to skip b qua
TO
hng hch - persuasive (adjj c tnh thuyt ph<

- clearing centre adviser nhn vin t - sales hot ng bn hng
NG
vn thuc trung tm xt tuyn - to be at pains to do sth n ic ti

nguyn vng 2 lm g

- soothing (adj) c v an i, d dnh - to stress nhn mnh

- sympathetic (adj) c v cm thng - hitherto (adv) cho n nay
ID
- clearing line ng dy in thoi ca - budget airline internet sale bn \

B
trung tm xt tuyn nguyn vng 2 my bay h gi trn mng

- target results s im ti thiu - to lose one's nerve mt ht can ;
vo i hc - to snap sth up v, chp ly ci g

- desperately (dv>'*mt cGh..ttiyt.'vongt '-^midwifery khoa ho snh/.

- admissions ttor nhn vint viTv- -eriinQlgy khoa tp ;phm. hc
' tuyn sinh *;s*- v-/ ' ':.'vV fN ^r'-fqrienacsciencevkiioa'Wpcdieufra
-temporarily -(adv} mtcchtmtbdiTv^-hmhsS;.-
N
- unpiacetf-Cadj) khng'.trng . t u y n swampârri trn .ngp;
-.degree courses cckha hc a-n - -geological (adj) thuc a cht hc
NH
bng c nhn
- t o match make sth with sth ghp ci
UY
. g cho hp V c g- ; :/
.Q
48
TP
It started w ith sh ep h e rd s pie 30 years ago and now ready-m ade
O
m eals have transform ed th e n atio n s eating h ab its. B ritons sp en t 1.9

billion on ready-m ade m eals la st year, twice a s m u ch a s th e F rench
an d G erm ans, four tim es a s m u ch a s the Italians a n d six tim es as
NG
m uch as th e Spanish. Nearly one in three B ritish a d u lts e a ts a ready-
m ade m eal more th a n once a week. D em and for in sta n t m eals in -
H
creased by 29 per cent between 1998 a n d 2002 acro ss Europe a s a
whole b u t in B ritain it increased by 44 per cent.
N
B ritain becam e th e European, capital of ready-m ade m eals, second
TR
only in the world to America. Some claim th a t th e reaso n for it is an ex-
cuse C an t cook, w ont cook. However, o th ers consider it to be a case
B
00
of culture. Regular cooking h a s disappeared first in th e u s an d th e n in

Britain. In France, G erm any, Spain, Italy, th ere is still a traditio n of
10
going hom e to a cooked meal.

+3
Convenience is definitely p art of the attractio n . A recen t survey

P2
found th a t 77 per cent of buyers said they only bought ready m eals
C
when they did n o t have tim e to cook.

Dr S u san Jeb b , h ead of nu tritio n a t th e Medical R esearch Council,
A
said: People in th e UK work the longest h o u rs, we are very time-poor,

H
an d we d o n t have a strong cu ltu ral history of cooking.

The ready-m ade m eal boom also reflects changing social tre n d s in
-
Britain. More people live alone an d so are less likely to cook. And w ith
-L
families eating a p a rt m ore often, ready-m eals allow people to eat w hat
N
they w ant w hen they w ant. Besides, people are becom ing m u ch more
dem anding a s th ere 's p re ssu re on time.
TO
B ut ready m eals also reflect changing ta ste s in food. B ritain s m ulti-

cu ltu ralism h a s broug ht a wider range of re sta u ra n ts th a n o th er E uro-
NG
pean countries, a n d ethn ic cuisines, which people are often scared of

cooking, are far more popular. One q u arte r of chilled m eals are Indian,

an d nearly one in five is Chinese. T raditional B ritish food ac co u n ts for

ID
only 18 p er cent of sales.

Weve always h a d more C hinese and Indian takeaw ays an d m ore
B
ethn ic re sta u ra n ts, says a co n su ltan t nutritionist.
106

S up erm ark ets have responded by offering a wider range. As in -

creasing n u m b ers of B ritish people travel to the F ar E a st an d regularly
eat o ut a t oriental re sta u ra n ts, custom ers are now looking for a u th e n -
N
tic E astern foods they can enjoy a t hom e.
NH
The quality of ready-m ade m eals h as become b etter since the 1970s.
However, Dr Je b b says: Ready-made m eals tend to be higher in fat,
UY
su gar an d salt th a n the m eals we would cook ourselves at hom e. Fat is
cheap an d it ad d s flavour. Most of the salt we eat is added by m anufac-
.Q
tu rers - people like it. B ut it is n ot necessarily bad. People can choose
TP
healthy options, or have ready-m ade salads. There is a whole genera-
tion th a t h a s been brought up with ready m eals. They h av en t grown
O
up w ith cooking, they have neither th e ability nor the desire to cook

and; th a t is alarm ing.
NG
If we cook, we are interested in life. For m any of us, cooking is a way
of keeping some control over o u r own health an d happ in ess. There is
H
no way to g u arantee a long and healthy life, b u t there are three ways to
m ake it possible. The first is to drink a lot of w ater, the second is to
N
walk a lot an d th e third is to cook.
TR
1. According to the article, B ritish p eo p le _____
A. Buy less th a n 30 years ago
B
00
B. Buy less th a n other E uropeans

c. Buy the sam e as the French and G erm ans
10
D. Buy m ore ready-m ade m eals th a n other E uropeans

+3
P2
2. The reaso n for buying ready-m eals i s _____ .

A. The US influence B. Lack of time
C
c . Laziness D. Tradition
A
3. According to the article, the reason for changing ta ste s in food is

H
A. E thnic diversity in Britain

-
B. Lack of cu ltu ral history of cooking

-L
c . The influence of the su perm arkets

D. E ating out
N
4. The m ost popular ready-m ade m eal i s _____ .

TO
A. . E thnic food B. Indian food c. British food D. C hinese food

NG
5. Ready-m ade m eals a r e _____ .

A. of poor quality B. as good a s hom e-m ade

c . bad for people . D. varied

ID
6 . The growing popularity of ready m e a ls _____

B
A. m akes food cheaper B. is a n atu ra l process

c . leads to a longer life D. spoilt a whole generation
107

7'.. . The \ic..giyeiv ,the. article i s _____ .

/:toCa;Tdyrrh.i<3;. sald s . / -y^-; -
:V v i t L S t i t n g ..'..-; , > . : ' vi%; : . ; i
Jp1':- c . to be healthjâiid'hkppy :v'o;
N
- " i ' D. to follow th ree rules' to have a; long and healthy life
NH
GLOSSARY
UY
- shepherd's pie mn tht bm nu vi - chilled meal ba n ngui
- khoai ty hm - takeaway sut n mua mang v
.Q
- boom s pht trin rm r, s bng n, - consultant nutritionist nh t vn v
TP
s thnh hnh dinh dng
- multi-culturaism tnh cht a vn ha - oriental (adj) thuc phng ng
O
- ethnic (adj) thuc cng ng nhp c/ - authentic (adj) tht (tri vi gi mo)

nhm thiu s - alarming (adj) ng bo ng
- cuisine php nu nng
NG
49
H
My friendship w ith Kathy w asn t a perfect friendship. I learned very
N
soon in o u r relationship th a t Kathy w as jealous. We would have great
fun going o ut shopping b u t if I bought, say, a d ress for a party an d she
TR
thought my d re ss w as better th a n hers, she would s ta rt to say slightly
un k in d things ab o u t it. She would be keen to com e o u t w ith m e to buy
B
00
the dress. She would give me a lot of helpful advice while I w as trying
on the various d re sses in the shops. Her advice would be good. She
10
would even tell the shop a s s is ta n t if she th o u g h t th e price w as too

+3
high. I can.rem em ber one occasion w hen she said th is and, to my s u r-

P2
prise, they knocked the price down so th a t I could afford to buy it. The
trouble would come later. W hen we were actually going to the p arty and
C
we were both d ressed u p and she w as looking m arvellous (for she w as

very beautiful) she would suddenly say, I think, S arah, we were both
A
wrong a b o u t th a t dress. It iooks a bit cheap, d o esn t it!

H
Once or twice I dropped Kathy. I told h er I w as too busy to see her.

-
Or I told h er I h ad to see an o th er friend. All these lies h u rt m e because

-L
I had no o th er friend and I w as so lonely. B ut they never h u rt her. She

ju s t sm iled sweetly an d said sh ed see me next week. And of course,
N
w ithin a week or so, Id be on the phone asking h e r to come out. She

TO
never m inded this! She never sulked a t m e a n d pretended th a t she w as

too busy.
NG
S tu d en ts alw ays celebrated the end of the college year w ith a fancy-
dress ball. It w as a big event. But a s luck would have it, Kathy a n d I

had m ade an o th er arrangem ent for the day of the ball. We had booked
ID
to go to the th eatre. We h a d talked for ages of going, an d a t last we h ad

our tickets. For u s it w as a big event. It w as a m usical an d o u r favour-
B
ite singer s ta r w as in it, so o u r h ea rts were set on the theatre.
108

Then Kathy cam e ro u n d to see me. M other w as in a t th e tim e, an d I

had to sp eak to h er on the doorstep b ecause Mum had ju s t been hav-
ing a go a t me for seeing too m uch of Kathy.
N
I d o n t w an t th a t girl coming in th is house and nosing a ro u n d . So I
NH
told Kathy I cou ldn t invite h er in because my M um h ad a bad h ea d -
ache.
UY
Kathy d id n t m ind. She smiled and said she w as sorry ab ou t my
.Q
m o thers bad head. I w as sure she knew w hat h ad really happened.
TP
B ut she carried on smiling, an d then she said: T m sorry, b u t I c a n t
come to the th eatre w ith you after all. My b ro th ers come hom e an d he
O
w a n ts to take me to the fancy-dress ball a t the college. I c a n t let him

down. I couldn t believe th a t she would let m e down. She knew how
m uch I had looked forward to the th eatre trip. We had talked ab ou t it
NG
together for m onths.
H
I w as alm ost in tears bv the tim e I had said goodbye to her and
closed the door. My M um w as kind an d und erstand ing . She m ade me
N
prom ise I would never see Kathy again. I agreed, an d felt th a t w as the
TR
least I could do by way of revenge for my disappointm ent. I told myself
th a t I would never so m uch as talk to Kathy if I saw her. O ur relation-
B
ship w as a t an end. I would never forget w hat sh e'h ad done to me.
00
10
1. W hen S arah says th a t Kathy w as jealo us she im plies th a t Kathy

+3
d id n t like it w hen S a r a h _____

P2
A. h ad fun going out

B. m anaged to buy the d ress cheaply,
C
c . wore expensive clothes.

D. wore clothes sm arter th a n h er own.
A
H
2. W hen S arah was buying a dress in a shop Kathy w o u ld _____

A. sta rt to say slightly u nkind things ab o u t it.
-
B. do her best to ensu re th a t S arah m ade the best buy.

-L
c . in sist th a t S arah should buy a cheap dress.

D. be keen to buy a m arvellous d ress for herself.
N
3. W hen S arah tried to drop her, K a th y _____ .

TO
A. pretended to be b usy B. w ent to see an o th er friend

NG
c . felt h u rt an d lonely D. always took it easy

4. B ut a s luck would have it in p aragraph 3 m eans Kathy and S arah

ID
A. had the luck to get the tickets for the m usical.

B. were happy to have m ade arrangem ents for the ball.
B
c. were looking forward to hearing their favourite singer. k

D. h ad by chance two events on the sam e ay.
109
5. Sarah'Coiddi}7t invite Kt to come in b caus .

A. th eir h ouse was-.m..a m e s s .' ' V-:'v
B. h er m o ther was' suffering from ba^-jheadache*. :
c. h e r m oth er disapproved of her d au g titers friend.
N
D. Kathy h ad com e'to th eir house to nose around!
NH
6 . Kathy said she d id n t m ind speaking to S arah on the doorstep b e-
cau se s h e _____
UY
A. didnt w an t to m ake S arah feel uncom fortable:
.Q
B. believed th a t S a ra h s Mum h ad a headache,
TP
c . did n ot w ant anyone to overhear them talking.
D. w as in a h u rry to see h er brother.
O

7. S arah decided n ot to see Kathy again b e c a u s e _____
A. h er m other forbade her.
NG
B. she co uldnt forgive Kathy,
c . her m other w as disappointed.
H
D. she w anted to revenge for h er m other.
N
GLOSSARY
- jealous (adj) ganh t, ghen tung TR
one's heart is set on sth khao kht,
- to be dressed up n mc p chng trng ch ci gi
B
din - doorstep bc thm
00
- to sulk at sb hn di ai ;t - to have a go at sb la mng ai

10
- fancy-dress ball v hi ha trartg - to let sb down lm ai tht vng, ph

- a s luck would have it tnh c ! lng ai
+3
run ri l ... - by way of sfch nh l m gi

P2
- musical v nhc kch revenge s tr th

C
50
A
The London M arathon celebrates its 23rd birthday. T hat is 23 years

H
of stresses and strain s, blisters an d sore bits, and incredible tales.

Somehow, yours truly h a s m anaged to ru n four of them . And 1 have
-
m edals to prove it. It seemed like a good idea a t the time. I w atched the
-L
in aug ural London M arathon on M arch 29th 1981. It seem ed extraordi-

N
nary th a t norm al people would w ant to ru n 26 m iles an d 385 yards.

And, it m u st be said, they looked strange an d no t quite steady a t the
TO
end of it all. There are, indeed, terrible tales of people losing con-
sciousness by the tim e they reach th a t glorious finishing line. B ut I w as
NG
captivated. I knew 1 had to do it.

Three y ears later I was living in London, not far from Greenwich
where the event begins, an d it seem ed the perfect opportunity to give it
ID
a go. I w as only a short train ride from the starting line, b u t m ore th an
B
26 m iles from the finish. Who cares? I thought. By the end I did. The
m om ent crossed th a t finishing line, an d h ad th a t m edal placed
110

aro u n d my neck, w as one of the finest in my life. The sense of achieve-

m en t w as im m ense. It w as a m ad th in g to do, an d ultim ately pointless.
Bilt knowing th a t Id ru n a M arathon - th a t m o st historic of all d istan t
N
races - felt incredible.
NH
London provides one of the easiest of all the officially sanctioned
m arath on s because m ost of it is flat. Yes, there are th e cobblestones
UY
while ru n n in g through th e Tower of London, an d there are the quiet
p atch es w here crowds are thin and you are crying o ut for some en co u r-
.Q
agem ent - those thin gs m atter to the .alleged fu n ru n n e rs like myself,
TP
the serious ru n n e rs d o n t th in k of such things.
O
This year London will a ttra c t unprecedented n u m b e r of athletes, a

lot of title holders am ong them . It is set to w itness w hat is probably the
greatest field ever for a m arathon. In the m ens race, for example,
NG
am ong n u m ero u s ap plicants th eres the holder of the worlds b est time,
H
Khalid K hannouchi of the USA; the defending cham pion El Mouriz of
Morocco; E thiopias Olympic bronze-m edallist Tesfaye Tola. And, m ak-
N
ing h is m a ra th o n debut, is one of the finest long distance ru n n e rs of all
time Haile G ebrselassie.
TR
Since 1981, alm o st h alf a million people have com pleted th e London
B
M arathon, raising m ore th a n $125 million for charity. For the majority
00
of the ru n n e rs, this is w hat it is al about. It is for charity, for fun, for
10
self-development. t is a w onderful day. I have ru n it with poor training,

+3
with proper training. And I have always loved it. Its crazy, an d its one
of the greatest things Ifve ever done. If you w ant to feel a s though
P2
vouVe achieved som ething, ru n a m arathon.

C
1. P articipation in th e London M arathon resulted for the a u th o r in

A
H
A. stresse s an d strain s. B. blisters an d sore bits,

c. m em orable m edals. D. incredible tales.
-
2. W hen th e a u th o r w atched th e end of the first m arath o n he saw

-L
people who w e re _____

N
A. extraordinarily steady.
B. feeling w eak an d exhausted,
TO
c . losing consciousness.
D. having a glorious time.
NG
3. The reason for the a u th o rs participation in the m ara th o n was the

fact th a t h e _____
A. was fascinated by it.
ID
B. lived not far from its finishing line,

c . w anted to receive a medal.
B
D. w anied to do som ething incredible.
111

4. By the end I did m ean s th a t the a u t h o r _____

A. found the distan ce suitable.
B. found th e distance challenging.
c. decided to take p a rt in the m arathon.
N
D. eventually took a train to the finish.
NH
5- According to th e au th o r, th e London M arathon is one of th e ea siest
b e c a u s e _____
UY
A. it goes thro ug h the Tower of London.
B. there are quiet p atch e s w ithout crowds,
.Q
c. m any fun ru n n e rs participate in it.
TP
D. its course does no t slope u p or down.
O
6. th e greatest field ever for a m arath o n m ean s th a t th e m arath o n

A. win tak e place on a big field.
NG
B. is to be ru n by the fam ous ru n n e rs only,
c . will be w itnessed by more people.
H
D. will welcome a huge n u m b e r of sportsm en.
7. According to th e au th o r, one should ru n th e London M arathon to
N
A. raise m oney for charity TR
B. get some trainin g
c. feel self-fulfillment D. have fun in a crazy way
B
00
GLOSSARY
10
- stresses and strains s cng thng patch mt mng, mt m

+3
thn kinh v th cht to cry out for sth rt cn n, rt khao

- blister ch phng rp trn da kht ci gi
P2
- sore bits nhng ch au nhc alleged (adj) c cho l, theo nh

C
- yours truly [li xng h khi hi] (nh) ngi ta ngh th l

ti y, ring m y, ti h unprecedented (adj-):trc y cha
A
- inaugural (adj) m mn, khnh thnh, tng c

H
khai trng title holder ngi ang gi danh hiu

- to give sth a go gng lm th ci g (v ch,...)
- steady (adj) vng vng, khng nghing It Is set to do sth Chc chn/ Nht
-
ng nh s im gi
-L
- to lose consciousness bt tnh, ngt to witness chngkin

xu defending champion ngi ang thi
N
- glorious (adj) vinh quang, v vang u bo v chc v ch

- captivated (dj) m mn, say m bronze-medallist ngi gi huy
TO
- starting ine vch xut pht chng ng

- Who cares? Mc k/ s g/ Chuyn debut s ra mt ln u (ca din vin
NG
nh/ Ai thm quan tm ch? hoc vn ng vin)

- ultimately (adv) rt cuc, cui cng charity hot ng/ qu t thin

- pointless (adj) v ch self-development s tin b bn thn

crazy (adj) in khng
ID
- to be officially sanctioned c chnh

thc ph chun/ chp thun to siope up or down dc ln hoc dc
B
- cobblestone si/ cui tri trn mt xung

ng
112

51 INDIANA UNIVERSITY
Intensive English Program
The University Indiana Universit}' was founded in 1820 an d is one of
N
the oldest and largest state-sponsored universities in th e U nited States.
NH
It is internationally known for the excellence and variety of its pro-
gram s. The University h as over 100 academ ic dep artm en ts an d a full-
UY
tim e faculty of over 1,500, including m em bers of m any academ ic socie-
ties.
.Q
It is located in Bloomington, the cultu ral an d recreational center of
so uthern Indiana in th e m id-w estern us. Bloomington, a dynam ic, safe
TP
and culturally-sophisticated town, h a s a population of 65,000 (not in-
O
cluding university students). It is su rround ed by hills, green woodlands

a n d lovely lakes th a t m ake this area fam ous for vacationing.
IEP
NG
The goal of the Ind iana University Intensive English Program (IEP) is to
H
increase the English language skills of non-native English speakers to
the level needed for study a t a college or university in the United
N
States. We encourage stu d en ts to reach this goal as quickly a s possi-
ble. T eachers in the EP are qualified to teach English as a second la n -
TR
guage an d have ta u g h t in the United S tates an d abroad.
B
R equirem ents for Admission
00
All stu d en ts adm itted to the program m u st have earned a high school
10
diplom a an d m u st show th a t they or their sponsors are able to pay for

+3
their living expenses an d tuition while in the United S tates. O ur appli-

P2
cation m aterials will tell you how m uch m oney is needed for each ses-
sion.
C
Curriculum
A
There are seven levels in the IEP. All levels m eet for 20-24 classroom
H
h o u rs each week. Levels One through' Five use audio-visual m aterials,

as well as cam pus com puter a n d language laboratory resources. These
-
levels concentrate on listening, speaking, writing, an d gram m ar.

-L
Level Six is a high' interm ediate academ ic reading an d w riting class,

N
which focuses m ainly on writing. After completing Level Six, m ost s tu -

d en ts are ready to begin academ ic work a t a college or university. How-
TO
ever, som e additional English may be recom m ended to help them a d -

ju s t to th eir new environm ent. In Level Seven stu d en ts focus on w ritten
NG
analysis of au th en tic texts. This gives them a clear idea of the kind of

work w hich is required by Am erican universities. At levels Six an d

Seven, stu d en ts also select from a variety of courses in advanced
ID
gram m ar, advanced pronunciation, b usiness, com puter skills, com m u-

B
nication, film, literature, test preparation and the World Wide Web to
m eet their p articu lar needs and interests.
113

C ollegeand' ltty ^ciit^v..,^ ....,

OradiiteS-of,the -C e H te r^ K B n g H s h ^ f? ^ ^ & ^ r^ ^ S -^ v e gone on to
p u rsu e c a r e e rs 'n s c h areas a s physics,,:-t,v m u sic, cftem istiy, b u si-
ness," edu ctioriv:an&-.;everi-: teaching . n ^ s ^ s a foreign .language. We
N
offer careers .guidance to -qualified students/w fro w ant to apply eith er to
NH
Indiana "University; pr ta: other colleges o r ûniversities .in th e United
S ta te s. Adm ission, however, to the intensive English. Program does not
UY
guarantee adm ission to'-specific academ ic program s a t In d ian a Univer-
sity.. . . ' Vy:- ,
.Q
TP
Housing
There' is a wide variety of housing available in Bloomington for both
O
m arried and single stud ents: on-cam pus housing is arran g ed thro u gh

the IU Halls of Residence. After receiving your application form, we will
send you a cam pu s housing application. C am pus ap a rtm en ts are all
NG
within walking distance of classes an d are on the University b u s
routes. Many off-cam pus ap a rtm en ts are located n ear cam p u s or n ea r
H
city b u s routes. Off-campus housing is best arranged after y o u r arrival
in Bloomington, b u t you can begin your search by brow sing th e elec-
N
tronic classifiedfadsMn he Bloomington Herald Times.
Extracurricular Activities TR
Bloomington an d In dian a University offer a large variety of recreational
B
activities an d social events. To begin with, soccer, swim ming, boating,
00
tennis, racquetball, skiing, and m any other form s of exercise an d re-

10
laxation are readily available. The internationally-know n Ind ian a Uni-

+3
versity School of M usic p resen ts operas, concerts an d ballets on a regu-

lar basis. Concerts on cam p us range from sym phony o rch estras to the
P2
latest popular m usic groups. There are also th eate r presen tatio ns
C
which include Broadway m usicals and individual perform ances by fa-

m ous a rtists from aro u nd the world. We have also com bined education
A
an d enjoym ent with trip s to nearby zoos, m u seu m s an d n a tu re centers.

H
At Indian a University there is never a night w ithout som e form of e n ter-

tainm ent!
-
-L
1. W hat is said ab o u t In diana University?

A. It is th e oldest university in the us.
N
B. It is th e largest university in the m id-w estern u s .

c. It h a s m ore th a n 65,000 stu den ts.
TO
U j }) It is situ ated in a beautiful spot

NG
2. Apparently, in order to get on-cam pus acco m m odation _____

x a ) stu d en ts m u st fill ou t a cam pu s h ousing application form.

stu d e n ts m u s t be m arried,
ID
stu d e n ts should com e to Bloomington first.

B
D. stu d e n ts m u st share a room w ith other stu dents.
114

3 . U idents interested in finding off-cam pus acco m m od atio n _____

/ a ) can s ta rt looking in new spapers.
N
nO can s ta rt looking for a p a rtm e n ts on th e Internet.
. can co n tact the IU Halls of Residence.
NH
D. m u st arrive in th e u s first.
UY
4. According to th e passag e, stu d en ts staying on c a m p u s _____
O / c a n also take th e b u s to class.
.Q
(By can only walk to'class,
TP
c . n e e d n t go throu gh the IU Halls of Residence.
O
D. have b e tter room s th a n those staying off cam pus.

5. W hat does th e w riter say ab o ut th e univ ersitys teaching staff?
A. They are non-native English speakers.
NG
B. They have only tau g h t in non-E nglish speaking countries.
H
c . They encourage non-native English speakers to atte n d the pro-
gram.
N
They help stu d e n ts improve th eir English.
TR
6 . W hat is tru e a b o u t In d ian a University?
It is located in m id-w estern Bloomington.
B
C am pu s concerts cater for different m usical tastes.
00
E x tra-cu rricu lar activities are ra th e r limited.

10
D. It is attend ed by foreigners only.

+3
7. Apparently, th e IEP is m ean t for somebody w h o _____

P2
A, sp e ak s English fluently.
/jO is already studying a t an American university.
C
(T) com es from' a non-E nglish speaking country.

D.p la n s to live in th e u s perm anently.
A
H
8 . In Level Seven, s tu d e n ts _____

tak e a w riting course.
-
ca n choose from a n u m b er of courses offered,

-L
learn how Am erican universities are organized.

D. have more h o u rs per week th a n in Level Six.
N
9. According to th e passag e, after completing the IE P _____

TO
A. stu d e n ts get a degree in English.

Brvstudents have successful careers.
NG
( c ./stu d e n ts have th e n ecessaiy background to atten d a u niver-

sity/college in th e US.

D. stu d e n ts can begin w orking for a university.

ID
10. S tu d e n ts on the IE P _____

have to study a t least 24 h o u rs per week,
B
have access to lots of entertainm ent,

move on to do a coupse a t Indiana University.
D. usu ally stay u p late a t night.
115
N
aiuvv u** ^ ,
NH
12 . W hich of th e following does th e C enter for E nglish Language T rain -
ing offer to its stu d e n ts?
UY
A. A daily edition of The Bloomington Herald Tim es.
.Q
B. Free b u s passes.
TP
c . Trips to New York to w atch Broadway m usicals.
^j5) C areers advice.
O

13. C ourses in com puter skills an d the World Wide Web are available
NG
A. for stu d e n ts a t all levels.
B. only for beginners.
H
(c?) only for stu d e n ts a t the la st two levels.
D. only for stu d e n ts who live on-cam pus.
N
14. Inform ation on living expenses an d tuition fees
is available to stu d e n ts ori application. TR
B. is available on the Internet.
B
00
c . is available only to qualified stu d en ts.

10
D. is available to stu d e n ts after they arrive in Indiana.

+3
GLOSSARY
P2
- state-sponsored (adj) c nh nc - college and university placement s

C
ti tr c b tr theo hc ti cao rig v

- academic departments cc khoa o i hc
A
to - careers guidance s tvn ngh

H
- faculty ban ging hun khoa nghip

- dynamic (adj) nng ng - Halls of Residence K Tc x
-
- culturally-sophisticated (adj) c trnh - off-campus apartment cn h nm

-L
vn ha cao ngoi khu i hc

- tuition hc ph - extracurricular activities cc hot
N
- session phin (hp), t (hc) ng ngoi kha

- recreational (adj) c tnh cch vui chi
TO
- curriculum chng trnh hc

- audio-visual materials cc ti iiu gii tr
NG
nghe nhn - racquetbail mn bng qun (dng vt

- analysis s phn tch nh bng vo tng)

- bus pass v i xe but

ID
B
116

52
My p aren ts always said I was b om to be a sportsm an. They said th a t
N
even w hen I w as in nappies, I w asn t happy u n less I w as kicking or
NH
throwing a ball. My first memory is of Dad nd me playing football in
our back garden. I recall my m um sitting down on the grass u n d er the
UY
sum m er su n cheering m e on as I clumsily kicked a football into the
goal net my dad w as defending. The sense of achievem ent w hen I
.Q
scored my first goal stu ck with me, and my life h a s revolved around
TP
football ever since.
O
As I grew up, dream ed of becoming a football player. During class,

I tried to stay focused on-ray studies; I knew th a t few people becam e
professional sportsm en and it was crucial to get a good education. But
NG
1 dvote every sp are second to my passion. At break tim es, I could be
H
found in the playground practising ball skills, an d alm ost a s soon as
the bell rang a t the end of the school day, I w as playing five-a-side
N
gam es a t the local playing fields, I knew th a t if I w anted to become a
success, I would have to p u t all my energy into the game.
TR
My big break cam e w hen I was 18. Leicester City FC offered me a
B
place in the squad. It was there th a t I learned the tru e value of team -
00
work. I played w ith a fantastic group of guys there and we worked to-
10
w ard one com m on goal - to win! I learned th a t every .person h a s their

own individual talen ts, an d a great team brings these talen ts together.
+3
P2
We enjoyed great success at Leicester, and I w as lucky enough to

become one of the UKs top scorers! I was transferred to Everton and,
C
while I w as sad to leave my fellow team -m ates, I was excited about

working with new people an d m aking new friends. My time at Everton
A
was an o utstan ding experience. While I was there; I scored 38 goals in

H
52 gam es. It w a sn t long until I w as on a new journey, th is tim e across

-
th e sea to S pain to play for FC Barcelona. I w as nervous a t first, b u t it

-L
tu rn ed o u t th a t th ere w as no reason to panic.

I felt great pride when I stepped into the stadium an d onto the pitch
N
in Barcelona. Many footballers dream of playing for su ch a glorious

TO
team ! It w as a wonderful time for me. Not only did we beat our a rc h -
rivals, Real M adrid, b u t we also fought our way th ro ugh to the UEFA
NG
finals where we defeated Sam pdoria and becam e E uropean Champions.

As you can im agine, th e proudest I felt was w hen I played for my

country, England, in the World Cup. The to u rn am en t raises the level of

ID
com petitiveness for every player. Not only do you have to be m entally
prepared, b u t you have to be a t the peak of physical fitness - so, as you
B
can imagine, it did n t help th a t I had to play the tou rn am en t with my

left arm heavily strapped up! B ut I was determ ined no t to let one injury
117
stop, me a n d played anywayr B ecause we were a strong, team , we got to

th e.q u a rter finals, an d I scored.six goals d uring th e e n tir e com petition
and won the Golden Boot award!
Football hats ..taken m e .aj'ound' ^ Spain to
N
apari! I have becom e fluent in two other languages an d have experi-
NH
enced other cultures. Since retiring, I have worked a s a sp o rts com -
m entator an d a s a writer. Ive even done som e TV advertisem ents, b u t
UY
Im n ot quite an O scar winner! Ive become quite the all-roun d sp o rts-
m an - Ive even played for Leicester Cricket Club. My career provided
.Q
me with m any happy m em ories th a t I w ouldnt change for th e world.
TP
Plus, Ive played m any fun gam es of footy!
O

1. W hat is the w riters first memory?
A. throw ing a ball with his father
NG
B. ru n n in g aro u n d his garden in his nappy
c . scoring his first goal
H
D. sitting in the garden with his m other
N
2. W hat w as the w riters attitu d e tow ards his education?
A. He believed it w as im portant to get a good education.
TR
B. He d id n t like concentrating on his studies.
B
c . He would ra th e r have practised his ball skills.
00
D. He w anted to p u t all his energy into the game.

10
3. W hat did the w riter learn a t Leicester City FC?

+3
A. th a t th e only thing th a t m atters is to win

P2
B. the im portance of working a s p art of a team

c . how to show people his individual talen ts
C
D. th a t it was his big break in football

A
4. How did the w riter feel about has tim e a t Everton?

H
A. He was sad there a n d m issed his old team -m ates.

B. He always felt nervous when he w as playing,
-
c . He found it to be a wonderful experience.

-L
D. He would have preferred to play for Barcelona.

N
5. In lines 2-3 of parag rap h 5, the w riter refers to a glorious team .

TO
Who is h e referring to?

A. Real M adrid B. Barcelona c . Sam pdoria D. E ngland
NG
6 . W hat two things are required of a World Cup player?

A. com petitiveness a n d physical fitness

B. determ ination and physical fitness
ID
c . determ ination an d m ental fitness.

B
D. physical an d m ental fitness

7. W hat im pression do we get of the w riters attitu d e tow ards his a c t-

ing skills?
N
A. He th in k s h e is good enough to win an Oscar.
B. He doesn t th in k he is very good a t acting,
NH
c. He expects them to improve.
D. He th in k s he m ight win an Oscar.
UY
8 . How does the w riter seem to by the end of the text?
.Q
A. He h as some regrets, b u t he is m ainly happy.
TP
B. He is very happy that he can speak two other languages fluently,
c. He is happy he can play more cricket and try new things.
O
D. He believes th a t he h as had m any great experiences in his life

and h as no regrets.
NG
GLOSSARY
H
- nappy t t tr em - big break dp may, c hi ln
- to cheer sb on reo h c v ai - squad i bng
N
- clumsily (adv) mt cch vng y - scorer cu th gii ghi bn
- to stick with sb c mi bn ai - to panic hong lon, hong ht
- to revolve around xoay quanh ci g TR - pitch sn bng
- focused on sth (adj) tp trung tm tr - archrival i th khng i tri chung
B
vo ci g - peak nh cao
00
- crucial (adj) qan trng, h trng - physical fitness the [c, phong
10
- passion nim am m - strapped up (adj) (cnh tay b thng)

- break time qung nghi gii tao, gi ra c treo bng dy
+3
chi - quarter final trn t kt

P2
- bail skills cc k nng iu khin tri - sports commentator bnh lun vin
bng th thao
C
- five-a-side game mn bng gm mi - footy [ngn ng bnh dn = football]

i nm ngi bng
A
H
53 FINDING A HEALTHY BALANCE

-
As a growing boy, I dont th in k anyone would have called me h ea lth -

-L
conscious. I w as typical of my peer group - the odd fizzy drink, trips to

m eet friends a t the local fast food re sta u ran t. However, I w as lucky to
N
have a m other who m ade sure I ate well. She enjoyed cooking and all
TO
o ur m eals were varied and delicious!

At the age of eighteen, I moved to a university far from hom e and
NG
suddenly h ad to look after myself. I really m issed my m u m s home-

cooked m eals. She had sen t me away arm ed with recipes, b u t I never

w anted to cook when I got back to the flat, after a h ard day of lectures.
For th is reason, it w asn t long before my friends an d I discovered our
ID
local ham b u rger bar, ju s t two roads from ou r hom e. It w as so easy to

B
get o u r dinner there and, com pared to our few a ttem p ts in the kitchen,
the food tasted great. Visiting on th e way back from classes becam e a
regular habit.
119
After a couple of m onths, I started to notice som e ch an g es in myself;

I was getting acne an d my clothes were getting tight and uncom fort-
able. I w as also very lethargic an d friends com plained th a t I would get
N
irritable, often for no good reason. At first, I d id n t pay too m u ch a tte n -
tion to it all, I w a sn t surp rised th a t the stre ss of university w as .taking
NH
its toll. However, over the weeks th a t followed, I w as getting colds an d
h ead ach es on a regular basis. My health, seem ed to be deteriorating,
UY
b u t everyone else ap peared to be- coping. I sta rte d to question if I w as
.Q
cut ou t for university.
TP
I decided to listen to friends suggestions to visit a doctor. I w ent
along and, after a five-m inute discussion of ray u n h ea lth y eating h a b -
O

its, she referred m e to a nutritionist; I have to adm it I w as a little scep-
tical; I could accept th a t my acne an d weight gain m ight re su lt from the
NG
foods I ate, b u t the moods, headaches, colds - surely diet co u ld n t
cause these too?
H
N onetheless, I m ade the appointm ent an d soon found I. h a d u n d e r-
estim ated th e im portance of diet. I w as told th a t th e food I ate w as high
N
in fat b u t low in goodness. The lack of fruit, vegetables, an d o th er food
TR
groups in my diet w a sn t balancing th is ou t a n d my body w as stru g -
gling to keep u p w ith the dem ands I w as p u ttin g on it. She explained
B
th a t if I continued to eat so unhealthily, I would be a t risk of obesity
00
and diabetes. Apparently, obesity w as now an epidem ic in America, an d

10
England w as following suit. F ast food seem ed to be a serious h ealth

+3
hazard.
P2
Some simple blood tests revealed th a t I had an iron deficiency, so to

C
com bat this an d my generally rundow n system , th e n u tritio n ist m ade

me a personalised plan of n u tritio u s m eals to prepare an d listed th e
A
vitam ins I needed to supplem ent my diet with. She w as very stern
H
when giving me the advice. She told me n ot to expect it to be easy,

since it is now believed th a t the body becom es addicted to a ju n k food
-
diet. Id never h eard this claim before an d w as completely tak en aback.

-L
There w as a lot to do to get back on track.

N
After four weeks, I could really see a difference. The h ead ach es an d
colds h ad completely disappeared and the acne an d weight gain were
TO
well on the way to being rectified. A few relieved friends were also
pleased to have th eir hap py flat m ate back! It took time to learn ab o u t
NG
food and prepare decent m eals. B ut it soon becam e a habit, ju s t like

my un h ealth y lifestyle had. My energy levels were really high an d m ain -

taining my grades w as no longer a m assive struggle. I'm no t saying th at
ID
everyone should ab stain from fast food completely, b u t we sho uld all be
B
health-conscious. Once you experience the benefits of a h ealthy life-

style, you w ont w ant to see an o th e r ham burger again!
120

I. Wha-t does th e w riter m ean w hen he says h e w as n o t h ea lth con-

scious?
N
A. he did. n o t worry m uch a b o u t the food he consum ed
B. he ate lots of u nh ea lth y foods
NH
c . h e d id n t u n d e rsta n d th a t some foods were u n h ealth y
D. it w as form al for people he age to eat fast food
UY
2. Why did th e w riter s ta rt to eat fast food m eals a t university?
.Q
A. b ecause it w as easy a n d convenient
TP
B. b ecau se th e re sta u ra n t w as close to his flat
O
c . because they ta ste d b etter th a n h is own cooking

D. becau se he d id n t w ant to cook in the flat
3. As tim e progressed, w h at began to concern th e w riter?
NG
A. He w as getting ill on a frequent basis.
H
B. O ther people were aw are of his u n h ealth y diet,
c . He w a sn t su re he could succeed a t university.
N
D. He w as th e only person who s tru ggling.
TR
4. Why w a sn t th e w riter en th u siastic a b o u t seeing a n utritio n ist?
A. B ecause his friends h a d forced him into it.
B
B. He w as do ubtful th a t they could be of help.
00
c . He felt th e doctor m ade h er decision too quickly.

10
D. He d id n t agree th a t diet could cau se m any of h is sym ptom s.

+3
5. Why does the w riter call fast a h ea lth h az a rd ? (line 43)

P2
A. F ast food h a s a high fat content.

C
B. Obesity is a serious .problem in America,

c . The food he ate w as n o t nutritiou s.
A
D. A poor diet can re su lt in ill health.

H
6 . On visiting th e n u tritio n ist, w hat did th e w riter find surp rising?

-
A. The a m o u n t of effort it would take to get better.

-L
B. T h at fast food can be addictive.

c . T hat his body w a sn t getting enough iron.
N
D. The n u tritio n ists stern m anner.

TO
7. The w riter found the new eating plan to be

A. good a t first, b u t h e developed bad habits.
NG
B. a success, som ething th a t eveiyone should do.

c . a little difficult b u t w orth the effort.

D. good, it quickly got rid of all his sym ptom s.
ID
8 . How does the w riters attitu d e tow ards diet develop over the course
B
of th e article?
A. He h a s becom e totally again st eating fast food.
B. He pays atten tio n to the food he eats.
121
c . He 'thiriks;it "is -too. hard' to m a in ta in s balanced diet.

/ D-'-iie-'-believe s *halty-jatmg ^tame-CQjasiiming: 1 .
GLOSSARY
N
- health-conscious (adj) bit-qirantm - epidemic trn dch . "
NH
n sc khe - t o follow suit bt chc lm theo
- peer group nhm bn cng-trang la - health'hazardmoi nguy hi n sc
UY
- fizzy drink thc ung c ga khe - ,
-a cn e mn - blood test s thumu
.Q
- tight (adj) (o qun) cht - iron deficiency s thiu cht st
- ethargic (adj) l , ph phc, u oi - rundown (adj) suy kit
TP
- to take its toil (on sb) c tc dng - personalised (adj) c c nhn ha
O
xu (n ai) - stern (adj) nghim khc

- to deteriorate tr nn xu i, xung - to supplement sth with sth b sung
cp, thoi ha ci g bng ci g
- to be cut out for sth c phm cht - junk food thc n ngon ming nhng
NG
v nng lc lm g khng b dng
- sceptical (adj) hoi nghi
H
- to be taken aback cm thy bt ng
- weight gain s tng cn - to get back on track tr ti con ng
- to underestimate nh gi thp ng n
N
- to balance sth out cn bng vi/c gi - to rectify sa cha sai m, sa li cho
tr tng ng vi ci gi, sc lm V ng
i trng ca TR
- massive (adj) to ln, khng f
- obesity chng bo ph - to abstain from sth king c ci g
B
- diabetes bnh tiu ng
00
- time-consuming (adj) tn qu nhiu

th gi
10
+3
54
P2
was struggling to get by. I- h ad ju s t moved to G loucester from Lon-

C
don an d h ad taken th e first job th a t I w as offered a s a cash ier in a local

superm ark et. I w as barely earning enough to do my weekly shopping
A
and I yearned for the money I used to m ake b ack in London. As I

H
cou ldn 't afford my own place, I had settled for my b est friends sofa, b u t
the h ard cu sh io n s an d b ackaches h ad m ade m e realise th at, above all
-
else, I craved my old flat - my little sanctuary! I soon began to w onder if

-L
moving had been the right decision. T h ats w hen I heard a radio advert
N
th a t changed my life...
Looking for you r own place b u t dreading the cost? Worry no more!
TO
You could live free for a year in the Enviro-H ouse, one of B ritain s
first environm entally friendly hom es. We're looking for a resid en t to live
NG
rent-free! For more details, visit W W W ... My friend h ad h eard ab o u t th is

carb o n -n eu tral h o u se an d h e th o u g h t th a t it would be very difficult to

stick to an energy conserving routine. I should have considered this, or

ID
at least have been concerned ab o u t how m any g u ests would actually

p ass through. But, a s I sat on the painfully uncom fortable sofa, the
B
only thing in my head were th e w ords... Live free, live free.
122

I visited the w ebsite and' entered the competition to become an eco-

h o u sem ate. I w as one of three lucky finalists who had to battle it out
for a place in th e ho use live on local television. We h ad to cook a m eal
N
for five ju d g es usin g a solar cooker and only organic vegetables and
then face questions from the studio audience. The judg es w eren't im-
NH
pressed with my cooking an d I thought I had lost. But, as I looked at
UY
my friends in the studio audience th e y all gave m e sm iles and the
th u m b s u p and it w as ju s t the confidence boost I needed. Thankfully,
.Q
I m ade the audience laugh, they liked me an d I w as voted into the
TP
house.
O
The o th er finalists were keen environm entalists w ith a passion for

the issue, unlike me. I had never really given it m uch atten tion to be
honest, a s it w as insignificant to me. I joked w ith the audience th a t the
NG
only way I was going to learn w as if they sen t me to the house! They
agreed. As I moved into the house and tried to prepare for a drastic
H
change in lifestyle, I suddenly becam e nervous and asked m yself if I
N
bad th o u g h t this through properly.
As I walked th rou gh the front door, I had worrying visions of living
TR
in a futuristic house, full of high-tech gadgets. 1 certainly w ouldnt have
B
been su rp rised to see a num ber of complex-looking m achines. However,
00
I was shocked to see the house was completely norm al. In fact, it
10
looked ju s t like any other house. This eased my m ind a bit, as I rarely
find m odern technology easy to u n derstan d , I prefer the simple life.
+3
The h eating system , w ater supply an d electricity all worked in ex-

P2
actly the sam e way as they would in any other House in the UK. The
C
only difference w as th a t the house used renewable sources of energy.

At first I th o u g h t th e house would definitely need some fossil fuels, like
A
coal an d gas b u t instead, solar panels an d sm all wind tu rb in es (which

H
could be a little noisy a t times!) were used to provide the hot w ater and
electricity. The ho use d id n t b u m wood or oil either b ecause sm oke pol-
-
lutes th e atm osphere.

-L
My experiences in the house m ade me look a t the way had lived my

N
life in th e p a s t an d how I should live it in the fu tu re. For example, its

TO
n either difficult nor tim e-consum ing to recycle, a s long a s you m ake it
p art of your daily routine. I also changed my perspective on which e n -
NG
ergy sources to use. I used to th in k solar panels were' too expensive,

b u t now I realise th a t although the initial cost is high, they actually

save a lot of m oney over time. Ive recognised th a t spending a few extra
ID
p o und s is preferable to losing o u r beautiful planet. Its very simple to

m ake those all-im portant changes; we ju s t need th e m otivation to m ake
B
them .
123
. W hat is t h e m ain res rr {he w riter gives^for m issing London?

A. "Earning a-higher -salary'^'-. ^ '
: -;rT B. Not having'h s. w n iiom e.
N
V' c . Living th e'inn erît} 'lifestyle, ' '
D. S haring a flat w ith his b est friend.
NH
2. W hat did th e w riter th in k sifter hearing the radio advertisem ent? .
UY
A. T hat he h ated having to sleep on th e uncom fortable sofa.
B. T hat he could have h is own,'home w ithout having to pay.
.Q
c . He w as worried abo ut how m any people would visit th e Enviro-
TP
H ouse.
O
D. He w ould nt be very good a t energy conservation.

3. In line 25 (para. 3), the w riter says th e y . Who is he referring to?
A. The audience B. The ju d ges
NG
c . The finalists D. His friends
H
4. W hat h ad the w riter previously th ou ght ab o u t th e environm ent?
A. He considered it unim po rtant.
N
B.. He h a d always been passio nate ab o u t the issue,
c . It m ade him nervous. TR
D. He always joked ab out it,
B
00
5. As the w riter entered the house, he w s su rp rised t h a t _____

10
A. the hou se looked futuristic.

B. the h o use hadffots of complex m achinery,
+3
c. the technology w as easy to un d erstan d .

P2
D. the h ouse looked the sam e a s other houses.

C
. W hich so urces of energy did the h ouse use?

J A. Coal and gas only.
A
H
B. Some fossil fuels plu s solar and wind,

c . Renewable sources of energy only.
-
D. Wood a n d oil only.

-L
7. W hat is the w riter's opinion of recycling?

A. It tak es a lot of tim e out of his daily routine.
N
B. It is expensive to do. <

TO
c . It d oesnt tak e a long time if done daily.

D. It is difficult to m ake it p a rt of his daily routine.
NG
8 . How did the w riters attitu d e change during the passage?

A. He realised how m uch he enjoyed living alone again.

B. He realised he h ad no reason to fear m odem technology.
ID
c . He realised how im portant it is to talk abo ut environm ental is-

sues.
B
D. He decided to adopt a more environm entally friendly lifestyle.
124

GLOSSARY
- to get by c xoay x song qua ngy - studio audience khn gi ang ngi
- cashier nhn vin thu ngn trong phng thu
N
- to yearn for sth khao kht ci g - to give sb thumbs up ra hiu khch i/
- to settle for sth nh chp nhn/ nh ng vin ai (bng cch a ngn ci
NH
bng lng vi ci g ln)
- cushion tm m ngi - confidence boost s thc y lng t
UY
- backache cn au lng tin
- to crave (for) sth ao c, thm mun, - t o joke ni a
.Q
thm kht ci g - drastic (adj) trit
TP
- sanctuary ni tr n, chn dung thn - to think sth through suy ngh k v
- to dread sth s gp phi ci gi iu g
O
- rent-free (adj) khi tn tin thu - futuristic (adj) mang tnh tng lai/ s

- carbon-neutrat (adj) khng thi ra kh c trong tng lai
cc-bon - high-tech gadgets cc tin nghi gia
NG
- to pass through gh qua, gh n dng cng ngh cao
chi - to ease sb's mind [m ai ht lo lng
H
- finalist ngi vo vng chung kt - solar panel tm thu nng lng mt
- to battle it out thi u ginh ci g tri
-judge gim kho - wind turbine ng c chy bng sc
N
- solar cooker bp dng nng lng mt gi
tri
- organic vegetables rau hu c/ rau
TR - perspective quan im
- initial cost chi ph ban u
B
sch
00
10
55
+3
Most of u s associate robots w ith films such as Star Wars, , Robot or

P2
A, b u t in reality they have more to do with social issu es an d politics

ra th e r th a n science fiction. The term robot first jn ad e its app earance in
C
a play entitled R o ssu m s Universal Robots w ritth alm ost a century ago
by a C zechoslovakian playwright by th e nam e of Karel Capek. Capek
A
H
got the nam e robot from the Slavic word robota w hich m eans forced
labour. In his play, he portrays a society where robots which look h u -
-
m an are m ass-produced to work in the place of people.

-L
C apeks story w as well received by the critics b u t never really got

credit for being the source of the notion of robots. The play h a s a sig-
N
nificant relevance to o u r society today, as hum anoid type robots are

TO
being created to fulfil a wide range of tasks. Robot engineers are not
only developing m indless w orker drones, b u t are attem pting to create
NG
hum an-like com panion robots for people. Consequently, th e question of

w hat actually m akes u s h u m an is th e subject of lively, debate.

In the USA, sociable robotics is developing a t a relatively rapid rate
ID
and a h u m an com panion type of robot could soon be a reality. J a p a -

B
nese research ers see a very bright future for these robots who will serve
a s friends or family to the lonely. Nevertheless, one needs to ask if a
125

h u m an b ein g'cn ;haê\a.-relation ship w ith a m achine in 'th e sam e way

as they do with- otfter^peopieÔT; anim als, an d if .'so; w h at effect th is
could have o n o u r ^sce.':'T he; su ccess of robot toys or v irtual pets
suggests .-tfcrat th is type of relationship is possible. R esearch show s th a t
N
children tend to have sim ilar relationships w ith h u m an s a s w ith non-
NH
h u m a n s w hereas th e sam e is tru e for a d u lts only w ith p ets or w hen the
robot is designed to look like a child. This is probatply b ecau se robots
UY
display superficial em otions an d can no t a s yet replace h u m an touch.
B u t will th ese m achin es one day succeed in replacing h u m an s?
.Q
Some p ain t a very d ark picture of a robot society an d predict th at
TP
artificially intelligent m achines will tak e control of th e entire p lan et an d
O
dom inate th e h u m a n race. However, robot technology is still in its in -

fancy an d the idea of them taking over th e world is p u re fan tasy to
m ost of u s, including scientists. In fact, m ost robots can only perform
NG
very basic ta s k s an d even th e m ost advanced robot th a t is p resum ably
H
capable of expressing over forty different em otions seem s to do so in a
totally random m an n er independently of w h at is going on aro u n d it.
N
In spite of th e simplicity of today's robots, robotic technology is im -
pacting o u r everyday lives in a dram atic way. Nowadays, o u r robots are
TR
becom ing m ore an d m ore like those portrayed in C apeks work. In a so-
B
ciety where h u m an relatio nships are so often strained , it is no su rp rise
00
th a t th e possibility for h u m an-robo t relatio nsh ips is increasing.

10
1. W hen m ost people th in k of robots, they tend to th in k o f _____

+3
A. politics B. science fiction

P2
c. films D. social issu es

C
2. Robots were first p o rtra y e d _____ .

A. as h u m an s B. in a play
A
H
c . as C zechoslovakians D. in a film
3. Most critics ignored th e fact t h a t _____ '
-
A. robots are im portant in o ur society.

-L
B. robots can do a lot of tasks.

N
CL C apek cam e u p w ith th e idea of robots.

D. hu m anoid robots are being created.
TO
4. Many people axe questioning w h a t____ .

NG
A. a robot really is B. a h u m an really is

c . a h um ano id robot is. D. a com panion really is

5. Ja p a n e se research ers th in k th a t robots could be of u s e _____ .

ID
A. to families B. to engineers
c . as serv an ts D. to people w ho live alone
B
126

6 . A dults tend to have good relationships w ith _____ .

A. virtual p ets B. childlike robots
c . n o n -h u m an s D. robot toys
N
7. Advanced robots still o n ly _____
NH
A. perform basic tasks.
B. re act to em otions ju s t like h u m an s,
UY
c. express em otions random ly.
.Q
D. express up to forty em otions.
TP
8 . W hat is the w riters conclusion?
O
A. Robots are not im po rtant enough to really affect o u r lives.

B. Hes concerned abo ut the ro bots future role in society,
c. He can u n d ersta n d the robo ts role in society.
NG
D. He th in k s the robo ts role h as been dram atised.
H
GLOSSARY
- Czechoslovakian (adj) thuc Tip - worker drone con ong th
N
Khc (c) - lively (adj) si ni, sinh ng
- playwright nh vit kch - debate cuc tranh lun
- Slavic (adj) thuc h ngn ng slave TR- sociable robotics cng nghip ch to
- forced labour lao ng cng bch, r-b thn thin
B
lao ng kh sai - virtual pet th cnh o
00
- critic nh ph bnh -superficial (adj) hi ht, khng su sc

10
- to get credit for sth c ghi nhn l - infancy giai on s sinh

c cng trong vic g - fantasy s hoang tng
+3
- relevance to s thch hp vi - presumably (adv) c

P2
- humanoid b my c dng ngi - random (adj) ngu nhin

- mindless (adj) thiu b c, khng bit - to impact tc ng, nh hng n
C
suy ngh - strained (adj) cng thng

A
H
56 CAN YOU PROVE WHO YOU ARE?

APPEARANCES CAN BE DECEPTIVE
-
The film Catch Me I f You Can told th e story of F ran k A bagnale, who
-L
sold th e Eiffel Tower an d passed $2.5 million w orth f bad cheques

N
while posing as an airline pilot or a surgeon. In th e film, Abagnal; a p -

pears a s a ra th e r am iable crook, b u t of course in reality frau dsters
TO
aren 't am iable, glam orous or daring: theyre ju s t thieves w hose lifestyle
is paid for by other peoples money. And these days, frau d sters can do
NG
m ore th a n j u s t steal your cash: they can steal your identity too.

In 2003, Derek Bond, a 7 2 -year-old retired civil engineer, found out

how dreadful m odern fraud can be. As he stepped off a plane a t Cape
ID
Town airport, he w as arrested and throw n into jail. It w as worrying

B
enough th a t he could have been m istaken for a m ost w anted crim inal.
B ut w hat m ade m atters worse was th at, despite having a n impeccable
reputation in h is hom e town, it took three weeks for Mr B onds family
127
to convince the auth orities th a t they had m ade a m istake. Away from
people who knew him , Mr Bonds rep u tatio n w as based solely on the
contents of a police file. And if th a t file said th a t Derek Bond, a m an of
m edium height an d build, was actually Derek Lloyd' Sykes, a conm an
N
responsible for a m ultim illion-dollar fraud in Texas, th e n who could
NH
prove th a t it w asn t true?
Mr Bond w as the victim of identity theft or im personation fraud,
UY
w here a thief a ssu m es your identity an d u ses it to steal directly from
you or to com m it crim es usin g your nam e. Drug trafficking, m oney
.Q
laundering, illegal im m igration, benefit fraud - in th e world of organ-
TP
ised crim e, a fake ID is a icence to p rin t money. Even m ore w orrying is
O
the fact th a t there is now a ready m arket am ong the w orlds terro rists

for stolen identities. As m ore people shop an d b an k online or by phone,
the opportunities for frau d u len t u se of credit card s or o th er personal
NG
inform ation grows. The b u sin ess of identity theft is b o o m in g ,'a n d for
H
those it affects, the consequences can be catastrophic.
Under existing financial regulations, b an k s a n d credit organisations
N
are required to know th eir custo m ers before they can open an a c -
count. This m ean s they have to req uest specific proofs of identity before
TR
they allow them to s ta rt spending: usually proof of nam e a n d add ress,
B
and a photo ID, su ch as a p assp o rt or drivers licence.
00
This so u n d s satisfactory, b u t in reality its far from foolproof. The

10
problem is th a t identity theft isn't rocket science. In theory, all a thief

+3
needs is a few snip pets of inform ation - su ch a s a discarded pho ne bill

P2
or a credit card receipt - to s ta rt using your nam e.

In fact, bin diving is the m ost u su al way for thieves to get inform a-
C
tion. In an extensive survey, a credit checking agency exam ined the

A
con ten ts of 400 ru b b ish bins. One in five contained enough sensitive
H
inform ation to com m it identity fraud. Every tim e we buy or sell goods,
we provide inform ation abo ut ourselves on paper. Receipts, invoices
-
an d bills all contain sensitive personal inform ation. B ut identity thieves

-L
d o n t even need to get th eir h an d s dirty. How often do we h a n d over

N
cheques an d credit or debit cards? How m any of u s buy by phone or

shop online? All it tak es is one disho nest employee, a n d we can say
TO
goodbye to o u r h ard -earn ed cash.

NG
1. The m ain p urpose of th is article is t o _____

A. tell the stories of F rank bagnae and Derek Bond.

B. describe the dangers of identy theft.
ID
c. explain how to steal som eones identity.

B
D. advise read ers how to avoid having their identity stolen.
128

2. The w riter says th a t real life fra u d s te rs _____

A. are ju s t ordinary likeable people.
B. live a glam orous lifestyle.
N
c . are crim inals who ch eat other people.
NH
D. are not as bad a s they seem.
3. In Cape Town, it was.difficult for Derek Bond to estab lish his in no-
UY
cence b e c a u s e _____
.Q
A. his correct details were in a police file.
B. he had a bad reputation in Cape Town,
TP
c. there w as proof th a t he w as a crim inal.
O
D. nobody knew him personally there.

4. W hat developm ent does th e w riter consider to be a particularly dis-
tu rb in g asp ect of identity theft?
NG
A. Terrorists will sta rt stealing peoples identities.
H
B. T errorists will becom e involved in the buying an d selling of false
identities.
N
c. There will be a great dem and from terrorists for false identities.
D. Identity theft will become a form of terrorism .
TR
5. According to the article, having a false identity enables crim inals to
B
00
A. steal even m ore personal inform ation.

10
B. organise th eir crim inal activities better,

+3
c. obtain licenses of different kinds.

D. m ake large am ou nts of money.
P2
6 . The cu rre n t security system s used by ban k s an d other financial

C
o rg a n isa tio n s _____

A. are n ot completely reliable.
A
H
B. have proved to be effective,

c . are perfectly acceptable.
-
D. have existed for a long time.

-L
7. Crim inals com m only collect inform ation abo ut individuals b y _____
A. stealing th eir credit cards.
N
B. reading throu gh th eir telephone bills.

TO
c. going through things people have throw n away.

D. contacting a credit checking agency.
NG
8 . M embers of the public should be particularly careful abou t using

credit or debit card s b e c a u s e _____

A. crim inals m ay find a way of stealing them .
ID
B. co rru pt staff may p ass on th eir details to crim inals,

B
c . online system s may no t be secure.

D. crim inals m ay listen to people giving their details on the phone.
129
GLOSSARY -V r /. ; - ;x i; v -s
-?deceptivetadjjj/de-gay^nham; liny d :rr;beijefit fraud Slte ,p chim
.. nh ia nglkhc- - -- '' '::' ; otn phc ~ '
to pass bad; xeqes.nh<tin:'btig V ;;r ID;:=->icfentificatton giy,t chng
N
nhifrg'ngan phiu gia" .- ''; rrttnh:nhn thn-'
NH
- to pose: a s gi danh l, ngvaU ^ to bank giao ch' ngn hng
- amiable {adj) t't, rh nhn,'d . -fraudulent (adj) nhm mc ch gian
UY
thng ln, la o
r- crook k Ia o *v;' - t o boom n r, pht trin ram r
.Q
- fraudster k la - catastrophic (adj) gy 'ra thm ha
TP
- glamorous (adj) y quyn r - credit tn dng
- daring (adj) to bo, c gan - foolproof (adj) khng c k h, khng
O
- civil engineer k s xy ng th sai m dc

- fraud s gian n, s la o - snippet mu nh, ming vn
- jail = prison nh t - bin diving s lc li trong thng rc
NG
- impeccable (adj) hon ho, khng t . - credit checking agency c quan kim
vt fra tn dng
H
- solely (adv) ch - invoice ha n
- police file h s cnh st - to get one's hands dirty lm iu phi
N
- build vc ngi php
- conman k la o
- identity theft s n cp nhn thn
TR
- debit card th ghi n
- hard-earned cash ng tin m hi
B
- impersonation fraud s la o bng nc mt
00
cch mo danh ^ terrorist k khng b

10
- to assume sb's identity t nhn [ - terrorism hnh vi khng b

- drug trafficking s bun lu ma ty - corrupt (adj) tham , tham nhng,
+3
- money laundering s ra tin thoi ha

P2
- immigration s nhp cut

C
57
A
They died where they stood. Violently, w ith alm ost no warning.
H
We'althy wom en in their jewels. Armed soldiers. Babies. Almost 2,000

years ago a seaside town in so uthern Italy h ad the m isfortune to be in
-
the shadow of M ount Vesuvius - one of E u rop es active volcanoes - at

-L
the wrong tim e. The 16,000 in h ab itan ts of the Rom an tow ns of H ercu-
laneum and neighbouring Pompeii who were buried b eneath 30 m etres
N
of d u st on a n A ugust night in AD 79 bear silent w itness to the d estru c-

TO
tive force of volcanoes.

Objects of terro r a n d fascination since the beginning of h u m a n time,
NG
volcanoes take their nam e from Vulcan, the Rom an god of fire. Today
there are som e 1,350 active volcanoes in the world. At any given m o-

m ent, som ew here between one dozen an d two dozen are throw ing out
ID
ash an d m olten rock from the e a rth s core.

Approximately one billion people live in th eir dangerous shadows.
B
Experts expect the n u m b er to rise. The rapid growth of population,
130

greater com petition for land and an increase in u rb a n m igration are

driving m ore an d m ore people to settle aro u n d volcanoes, significantly
increasing the potential loss of life and properly in th e event of e ru p -
N
tions.
NH
Despite m ajor advances in technology, the ability to predict w hen a
volcano m ight eru p t rem ains imprecise. B ut m eeting the challenge is
UY
vital because volcanoes are people m agnets. A recent stu dy identified
457 volcanoes where there are one million or m ore people living within
.Q
100 kilom etres. Many of these volcanoes - several in Indonesia an d J a -
TP
pan, for instance - have surrou nding populations greatly exceeding one
O
million. Today, 3.75 million people live w ithin 30 kilom etres of the

sum m it of M ount V esuvius in the so u th ern Italian city of Naples. W hat
do they do if it sta rts erupting? No one can.im agine evacuating a city
NG
the size of N aples, said c. Dan Miller, chief of the us Geological S u r-
H
veys Volcano D isaster A ssistance Program. P ersuading people to move
perm anently o ut of hazard zones is n ot usually a n option. Many of the
N
land -u se p a tte rn s are long established, a n d people ju s t w ont do i t ,
Miller w ent on. The only thing you can do is have system atic volcano
TR
m onitoring to detect the earliest departure from norm al activity.
B
Nowadays it is easier to predict volcanic activity, b u t evaluating the
00
th re a t of eruption is frequently still difficult. Mexico City know s the

10
problem well. The city, which h a s a population of more th an twenty

million, lies within 60 kilom etres of the sum m it of Popocatepetl, a vol-
+3
cano w hich h a s erupted a t least fifteen tim es in th e la st 400 years. The

P2
flanks an d valleys surrou nding Popo have been evacuated several

C
tim es since 1994 in response to earth quakes and eruption s of volcanic

a sh an d plum es of steam . Each time the m oun tain h a s settled down
A
w ithout a m ajor eruption, although some activity h a s continued. Yet

H
when, or if, a m ajor eruption will occur next rem ains unknow n.
-
There could be weeks, m onths, or years between the time a volcano

-L
shows som e activity and the tim e of its eruption, said Miller. It may
never erupt. Most people are willing to be evacuated once. B ut if n o th -
N
ing h ap pen s, the loss of credibility could cause people to ignore future
w arnings.
TO
Volcanic eruptions, when they do come, are som etim es relatively

NG
slow an d quiet. There w as no loss of life w hen the worlds largest active
volcano erupted in 1984. The people who lived in th e proxim ity of Ha-

waiis M auna Loa volcano h ad plenty of tim e to get out of the way when
ID
it erupted in 1984. Its lava crept down the slope a t abo ut the speed of
honey. At other tim es the eruption is sudden and violent, an d evacua-
B
tion unfortunately com es too late.
131
lo/:-.What happened when..Mo.urit,Vesuvius erupted in AD 79?

The rich; m anaged t s a p e ."
. ^B. -It covered m any to w n s with; dust.
N
c . A few people w erkd. V- ^
D. People were unprepared.
NH
2. W hat d experts th in k will happen in the-future?
UY
, A. More volcanoes will become active.
B. People will move away from volcanic areas,
.Q
c . More people will set up hom e near volcanoes.
TP
D. Around one billion people will die in volcanic eruptions.
O
3. According to the article, w hat is the p resen t situatio n regarding vol-

canic eruptions?
A. E ruptions are m o st likely to happen in Indonesia an d Ja p a n .
NG
B. E xperts can predict w hen there will be a volcanic eruption.
H
c . Most large cities have no appropriate evacuation plans in place.
D. People will be less affected th a n before.
N
4. W hat does do it (underlined) in parag raph 4 refer to?
A. go a n d live som ewhere else. TR
B. build farm s on th e land
B
c . force people to leave the area
00
D. leave the are a un til the danger h a s passed

10
5. W hat does the article say abou t Popocatepetl?

+3
A. There w as a m ajor eruption in 1994.

P2
B. Experts expect a m ajor eruption w ithin a few years,

C
c . Nobody know s w hether it will erupt again.

D. People who live nearby are fed u p w ith being evacuated.
A
6 . Why w as the eruption of M anna Loa less dangerous?

H
A. People h ad been evacuated from the area beforehand.

-
B. People were able to keep ahead of the lava.

-L
c. Scientists had w arned people well in advance.

D. It w as not a m ajor eruption.
N
7. W hat would be the m ost appropriate title for th is article?

TO
A. Volcanoes: Sleeping T hreat for Millions.

B. Volcanic E ruptions an d O ther N atural D isasters,
NG
c . Volcanic Activity in Italy.

D. Volcanic Eruption: A Study of Volcanic Behaviour.

ID
GLOSSARY
B
- misfortune iu bt hnh, s ri ro - summit nh n

- active volcano ni la ang hot ng - to evacuate s tn, i tn, tn c
- neighbouring (adj) k cn - Geological Survey's Volcano Disas-
132

to bear witness to sth l nhn chng ter Assistance Program Chng

cho Trnh Tr Gip Thm Ha Ni La
terrors kinh hong thuc Cc Quan Trc a Cht
N
fascination sc hp dn/ m hoc - hazard zone vng nguy him
molten (adj) nng chy - to monitor theo di
NH
core !i, nhn -fla n k sn (ni)
urban migration s di c n thnh - plumes of steam cc lung hi nc
UY
ph - credibility tnh/s ng tin
imprecise (adj) khng chnh xc - in the proximity of gn vi
.Q
to meet a challenge i u vi mt - lava dng nham
thch thc - slope sn dc
TP
to exceed vt qu
O

58 CHINAS BIG DAM
NG
Farm er W ang Zuolu grows oranges an d p e a n u ts on a hilltop over-
looking C hinas beautiful Yangtze River. His family h a s lived there for
H
generations in a farm house of thick, m ud-packed walls. B ut Wang, 70,
an d h is wife Zhang Changying, 60, know th a t th eir familys happy life
N
on the hill is coming to an end. Soon their farm will be covered by w a-
TR
ter. They m u st s ta rt a new life in a new village. They will have to move
their family cem etery and replant their orchards.
B
00
Wang an d his wife are ju s t two of the 1.2 million C hinese who are
being forced from their hom es by the construction of the Three Gorges
10
Dam.
+3
The Three Gorges Dam is nam ed for three sp ectacular gorges, or

P2
canyons, in central China. W hen it is completed, the dam will u se w a-

C
te r power to create electricity. Its builders say it will help prevent flood-
ing by th e Yangtze. B ut it will also be very destructive, changing
A
C hina's n atu ra l scenery and the lives of m any of its people forever.
H
For h u n d re d s of years; poets and pain ters have been inspired by the
-
Yangtzes w inding p ath and the steep cliffs an d flat plains th a t lie on
-L
either side of its waters. B ut the Yangtze can rise over its banks, c a u s-
ing terrible floods.
N
W orkers are building a 600-foot-high wall th a t will stretch across

TO
the Yangtze. Then they will install giant generators. These will provide
a s m uch energy for the area as 15 large coal-burning power stations.
NG
However, m any scientists say the dam will be an ecological disaster. It

will destroy the n a tu ra l su rrou ndin g s (including the stu n n in g gorges)

an d th rea te n m any fish an d anim als.

ID
By blocking the flow of the Yangtze, the dam will create a 370-mile
lake, or reservoir, w est of the city of Yincliang. It will swallow h u n d re d s
B
of tow ns an d villages.
133
The reservoir .will' also, tftreaten the habitats,:0 "hundreds of fish,

plnts, arid, anim al species^ Among' tiie' creattixres :a t risk: ra re river dol-
phins, -eIoxided lpppard's, an d .Siberian, white cranes. . The governm ent
promisife^ tb' ;monitor^tih.e ienvironment'âroiund' t h e ' daim an d h a s set
N
aside m oney to creaite'1a protective area for th e dolphins.
NH
B ut scientists are doubtful ab o u t prom ises. They w arn th a t blocking
the river will create sewage back ups an d p erh ap s even ca u se >more
UY
floods. Some fear th t the dam m ay-collapse' M any d am s in C hina have .'
.Q
collapsed in the p a st 20 years.
TP
C hinas cu ltu re an d history are also endangered by the dam . A n -.
O
cient pagodas (temples) an d o ther im portant historic sites will be u n d e r

water.
The Chinese who m u st leave their hom es are already feeling th e im-
NG
pact of the Three Gorges Dam. These resettlers, or yim in, have no
H
choice b u t to find new hom es and jobs.
Despite th eir worries, th e Chinese are not perm itted to sp eak out
N
again st th e project, w hich is expected to cost m ore th a n $24 billion.
TR
Jo u rn a list Dai Qirig landed in prison after she criticized th e dam .
There is only one Yangtze River, sh e wrote in protest. And we have
B
already subjected it to m any stupid deeds.
00
10
1. A gorge is an o th er nam e for a _____ .

+3
A. valley B. canyon c . dam D. river

P2
2. Why is the Three Gorges Dam being created?

C
A. to create electricity
B. to change C hina's n a tu ra l scenery
A
H
c . to create a protective area for dolphins

D. to protect pagodas an d tem ples
-
3. Which word or p h rase does not describe Wang?

-L
A. farm ed oranges an d p ea n u ts
N
B. lived on a hilltop
c . a yim in
TO
D. h u sb a n d of Dai Qing
NG
4. By building a dam , the Yangtze w ill _____

A. create a reservoir w here tow ns and villages u sed to be.

B. en danger historic sites an d pagodas,
ID
c . g e n e r a te p o w er.
B
D. all o f the above
134

5. At the p resen t time, before the generators are installed, energy

com es fro m _____
A. water.
N
B. Yinchang.
c. coal-burning power stations.
NH
D. n a tu ra l sources.
UY
6 . In w h at way will this cause an ecological disaster?
.Q
A. People will have to move.
TP
B. Fish a n d o ther anim als will die.
c. It will create a lake.
O
D. People will have to b u m m ore coal.

7. Why don't the 1.2 million people refuse to leave?
NG
A. They know the dam will be good for the country.
B. They m ight be sen t to. prison,
H
c. They w an t a change of sceneiy.
D. Their hom es are old an d run-dow n.
N
8 . W hat anim als will be placed in a government-funded protected area?
A. clouded leopards TR B. Siberian w hite cran es
B
c. pagodas D. ra re river dolphins
00
9. W hat does a jo u rn a list do?

10
A. p ro tests B. reports the new s

c. sells hom es
+3
D. advises the governm ent

P2
10. Why do som e people fear the dam will collapse?

C
A. Many of C hina's d am s have collapsed in the past.

B. They are poorly constructed,
A
c. The river is too strong.

H
D. The people will knock it down in protest.

GLOSSARY
-
-L
mud-packed walls nhng bc tng - reservoir h cha nc nhn to

trt bng t - dolphin c heo
N
cemetery ngha trang, bi tha ma - clouded leopard con bo my

the Three Gorges Dam p Tam Hip - crane con cq
TO
spectacular (adj) ngon mc - to set aside money ring ra mt s

gorge = canyon hrn ni tin
NG
the Yangtze River sng Dng T - sewage backup s tch t cht thi
winding (adj) un khc quanh co, cng rnh

ngon ngoo - to collapse sp

steep (adj) dc ng - resettler ngi ti nh c
ID
cliff vch ni - protest s phn i

generator my pht in - to subject sth to sth bt ci g phi
B
- ecological disaster thm ha sinh thi nhn chu ei gi

- stunning (adj) khin ngi ta sng s - deed hnh ng, vic lm
135
59 PREDICTING EARTHQUAKES
Since the beginning of recorded history, virtually every cu ltu re in the
N
world h a s reported observations of u n u su a l anim al behaviour prior to
ea rth q u ak es an d , to a lesser extent, volcanic eruptions, b u t conven-
NH
tional science h a s never been able to adequately explain the phenom e-
non.
UY
Nevertheless, the Chinese an d J ap a n ese have used su ch observa-
.Q
tions for h u n d red s of years as an im po rtant p a rt of th eir earth q uake
TP
w arning system s.
Most significantly, on F ebruary 4, 1975 the C hinese successfully
O

evacuated the city of Haicheng several h o u rs before a 7.3 m agnitude
earth quake, saving nearly 90,000 lives. This w as based prim arily on
NG
observations of u n u s u a l anim al behaviour.
Helm ut T rib u tsch s classic work on the subject of e a rth q u ak e s an d
H
u n u su a l anim al behaviour - When the S n a ke s A w a ke - details n u m e r-
ous consistent acco u n ts of the phenom enon from all over the world.-
N
However, although these behaviour p attern s are very well-docum ented,
TR
m ost Am erican specialists do not take them very seriously. In fact,
m ost conventional geologists do no t believe th a t there are any e a rth -
B
quake prediction techniques which perform any b etter th a n chance;
00
th is includes u n u su a l anim al behaviour. In fact, the notion th a t odd

10
anim al behaviour can help people predict ea rth q u a k es is perceived by

+3
m ost traditional geologists in the W est as folklore an d is often treated

P2
as seriously a s sightings of ghosts, Elvis Presey, an d the Lch Ness

M onster.
C
U nusual behaviour is difficult to define, an d determ ining if there is a

A
typical behaviour p attern is not a simple, clear-cut process, although

H
there are some distinct p attern s which have em erged. An exam ple of
this, which h as often been reported, is an inten se fear th a t a p p e ars to
-
m ake some anim als cry or b ark for h o urs, an d o thers ru n away in
-L
panic. Equally typical is. the phenom enon of wild anim als losing their
u su al fear of people.
N
Although th e m ajority of accounts relate to dogs an d cats, there are

TO
also m any stories ab o u t other types of anim al in the wild, on farm s,

an d in zoos. U nusu al behaviour h a s been reported in m any o th er a n i-
NG
mal species a s well, including fish, reptiles, an d even insects. This

strange behaviour can occur at any time in advance of a quake - from

weeks to seconds.
ID
A n u m b er of theories have been proposed to explain th is phenom e-

B
non, and w h at the signals th a t the anim als are picking u p on m ight be.
B ecause m any anim als possess auditory capacities beyond the h u m a n
136

range, it h a s been suggested th a t som e anim als m ay be reacting to u l-

traso u n d em itted as m icroseism s from rock breaking below the e a rth s
surface.
N
A nother possibility is fluctuations in the e a rth s m agnetic field. Be-
NH
cause som e anim als have a sensitivity to variations in the e a rth s m ag-
netic field {usually as a m eans of orientation), an d since variations in
UY
the m agnetic field occur n e a r the epicentres of earth quak es, it h a s been
suggested th a t this is w h at the anim als are picking up on.
.Q
O ther m ysterious phenom ena are often connected w ith earthq uak es.
TP
The regular eru p tio n s of geysers have been interrupted. W ater levels in
O
wells have been reported to change, or the w ater itself h a s become

cloudy. M agnets have been said to lose their power tem porarily. Many
people report th a t th ere is suddenly an inexplicable stillness in the air,
NG
and th a t all aro u n d them becom es completely silent. Strange lights are
H
often seen glowing from the earth, and u n u su a l fogs have been re-
ported. These phenom ena are all consistent w ith the notion th a t the
N
odd anim al behaviour may result from changes in the e a rth s electro-
m agnetic field. More puzzling is the fact th a t a n um b er of people even
TR
claim to have sighted UFOs hovering around earth q u ak e sites.
B
C urrently W estern science does no t have any reliable m ean s of fore-
00
casting earth q u ak es. Any clues th a t may be u sed to help u s predict

10
when and where th e next quake is coining should be approached with

an open mind.
+3
P2
1 . W hat does the w riter say abou t the occurrence of u n u su a l anim al

C
behaviour before earthq uak es?

A. It does n ot hau pen eveiywhere in the world.
A
B. Many countries use it to predict earthquakes.

H
c. It is equally com m on before volcanic eruptions.

D. There is no generally approved scientific explanation for it.
-
2. According to the write.- of the article, m ost conventional geologists

-L
N
A. use u n u s u a l anim al behaviour to predict earthquakes.

B. th in k When the S n a kes A w ake is well-researched. '
c. believe there is no sure way of predicting earth quakes.
TO
D. su p p o rt scientific study of u n u su a l anim al behaviour.

NG
3. W hat does the w riter say ab ou t how anim als behave before an

. earthqu ake?
A. Both wild and dom esticated anim als show u n u s u a l behaviour.
ID
B. C ats an d dogs show m ore u n u su a l behaviour th a n other an i-

m als.
B
c. All anim als become frightened of people.

D. Some pets ru n away from home.
137
4: W hat is. possible-'cue iikns strange behaviour?

. A. They fei '.the. eaijth '.b a n n in g to'-ipioye. .
B. They. sen-se:;-chang$s in th e e a rth s m agnetic field,
c. T hey'are highly sensitive to magnets-.
N
D . They heai- loud: so u n d s below th e e a rth s surface.
NH
. 5. How does, th e w riter react to claim s th a t UFOs have been seen .
.. aro u n d ea rth q u ak e sites?
UY
A. He th in k s th e claim s are probably true. ' ' - - i ;
. B. He is su rp rised by th e claims. .
.Q
c . He d o esn t believe th e claim s.
TP
' D. He is concerned ab o u t th e claim s.
O
6 .W hat is the m ain point the w riter of th e article is trying to m ake?

A. More stu d ies need to be done on an im al behaviour an d e a rth -
quakes.
NG
B. W estern scientists should listen to new ideas ab o u t how to p re-
dict earth q u ak es.
H
c . People who say they can predict earth q u ak es are n o t of sou n d
m ind.
N
D. It is im possible to predict w hen earth q u ak es will occur.
GLOSSARY TR
- virtually (adv) hu nh, gn nh - to pick up on sth p ng li ci g
B
00
- prior to (prep) trc > - auditory (adj) thuc thnh gic

- t o a lesser extent mt lm mc nh - ultrasound (adj) siu m
10
hn - mcroseisms cn a chn yu
+3
- magnitude cng - fluctuation s dao ng

- classic (adj) c tnh kinh in - magnetic field t trng
P2
- to deail cung cp chi tit - variation s bin thin, s thay i

C
- numerous (adj) v s, rt nhiu - means of orientation phng cch

- consistent (adj) nht qun, tt c u nh hng
thng nht nh nhau - epicentre tm chn
A
- to be well-documented c h tr
H
- geyser sui phun nc nng

bng t liu rt y - cloudy (adj) (nc) c
- geologist nh a cht hc - magnet thi nam chm
-
- chance s tinh c ngu nhin, s may - inexplicable (adj) khng th gii thch
-L
ri c
- notion nim - stillness s tnh lng
N
- odd (adj) k d, k qui - to glow sng n

- folklore vn ha dn gian - electromagnetic fie ld in t trng
TO
- sighting s pht hin - puzzling (adj) kh hiu

- Loch Ness Monster Qui Vt H Ness - to hover bay ling, ln l, lng vng
NG
- dear-cut (adj) r rng, rnh mch - cue manh mi

- (to be) in panic hong lon - domesticated (adj) c thn

~ in the wild mi trng hoang d dung

- reptile loi b st
ID
- a sound min mt tinh thn minh

mn/ u c sng sut
B
138

60 A WEATHER FORECASTERS JOB

Millions of people tu n e into th e w eather forecast each evening on
N
television. Most of them im agine th a t the p resen ter does little m ore
th a n arrive a t the studio a few m inutes before the broadcast, read the
NH
w eather, and then go hom e.
UY
In fact, th is image is far from the tru th . The tw o-m inute bulletin
w hich we all rely on w hen we need to know tom orrows w eather is the
.Q
re su lt of a h ard d ay s work by the presenter, who is actually a highly-
TP
qualified m eteorologist.
Every m orning after arriving a t the TV studios, th e first ta sk of the
O
day is to collect the latest d ata from the National Meteorological Office.

This office provides up-to-the-m inute inform ation ab o ut w eather condi-
tions th ro u g h o u t the day,, both in Britain and aro u n d the world. The
NG
inform ation is very detailed a n d includes predictions, satellite an d ra -
H
d ar pictures, a s well as m ore technical data. After gathering all the
relevant m aterial from this office, the forecaster h a s to tran slate the
N
scientific term inology an d m aps into im ages and w ords w hich viewers
can easily un d erstan d .
TR
The final broadcast is th en carefully planned. It is prepared in the
sam e way a s other program m es. The p resen ter decides w h at to say and
B
in w h at order to say it. Next a story board is draw n u p w hich lays out
00
the script word for word. W hat m akes a w eather forecast m ore com -
10
plicated th a n o th er program m es are the, m aps an d electronic im ages

+3
w hich are required. The com puter h a s to be program m ed so th a t the

pictures ap p ear in the correct order during the bulletin.
P2
The tim e allocated for each b roadcast can also alter. This is because
C
the w eather report is screened after the news, w hich can vary in length.
The w eath er forecaster d oesnt always know how m u ch tim e is avail-
A
able, w hich m ean s th a t h e /s h e h a s to be thoroughly prepared so th a t

H
the m aterial can .be adapted to the time available.

-
A nother related com plication is th a t the w eather forecast h a s to be a

live broadcast; it can not be pre-recorded. Live show s are very nerve-
-L
racking for the p resenter because alm ost anything can go wrong. Per-
N
hap s the m ost worrying aspect for every w eather forecaster is getting
the following day's predictions wrong. U nfortunately for them th is is
TO
not an u n u su a l occurrence; the w eather is n ot always possible to pre-

dict accurately.
NG
The w eather is a national obsession in Britain, p erh ap s because it is

so changeable. Its the national talking point, an d m ost people w atch at

least one daily bulletin. It can be mortifying for a w eather m an or
ID
wom an who h a s predicted rain for the m orning to wake u p to brilliant

sunshine.
B
These days, a w eather forecasters job is even m ore com plicated be-
cause they are relied upon to predict oth er environm ental conditions.
139
For exam ple, in the sum m er, the w eather forecast h a s to include the
pollen co u n t ,for. hayfey^r'Syfferers. Some' also includ e /reports on u ltra-
violet radiatio n -intensity- to':help people avoid su n b u rn . -
The Job of :a .weather forecaster is certainly far m ore com plicated
N
th a n ju s t pointing a t m ap an d describing w e ath er conditions. It's a
NH
job for professionals who can cpe w ith stressfu l an d dem anding condi-
tions.
UY
1 . W hat perception do m ost people hve of w e ather forecasters?
.Q
A. They have m any qualifications.
TP
B. They do a h ard d ays work a t the studio,
c . They work very sh o rt hours.
O
D. They alw ays tell th e tru th .

2. M eteorologists get th eir forecasting inform ation fro m _____
NG
A. the TV studio.
B. the c o u n try s m ain w eather centre,
H
c . satellite a n d ra d a r inform ation.
N
D. th eir office.
3. C reating a w eather report is complex b e c a u s e _____
A. m ap s have to be drawn.
TR
B
B. a lot of d ata h a s to be interpreted,
00
c . ra d a r p ictu re s are technical.

10
D. the inform ation includes unreliable predictions.

+3
4. The com puter h a s to be carefully p ro g ra m m e d _____

P2
A. so th a t th e visuals are sequenced correctly.

B. so th a t th e script is visible to th e presenter.
C
c . because th e scrip t h a s to be w ritten on a story board.

D. because electronic m aps are used.
A
H
5. W eather forecasters have to know the m aterial well b e c a u s e _____

A. th e b ro ad cast is pre-recorded.
-
B. the forecast m ay be incorporated into th e new s broadcast,

-L
c . the co n tent of the report m ay have to change.

N
D. the length of th e report m ay have to change.

TO
6 . W hat does th is in the last sentence of p arag rap h 6 refer to?

A. the w eather fo recasters worry
NG
B. reading the w e ather liv e

c. giving a forecast th a t doesn t come tru e

D. an ac c u ra te prediction
ID
7. In B ritain, peoples attitu d e to th e w e a th e r_____

B
A. is n o t changeable.
B. m akes it a top discussion topic.
140

c. depends on the prediction being for a su nn y or rainy day.

D. is a national p ro b lem .\
N
8 . Nowadays, w eather forecasters have t o _____
A. do experim ents to determ ine th e pollen count.
NH
B. simply point a t m aps and describe w eather conditions,
c. cope with professionals.
UY
D. be able to cope u n d e r pressure.
.Q
TP
GLOSSARY
- forecaster ngi d bo thi tit - pre-recorded (adj) thu sn pht
O

- to tune into a program m radio hoc sau
TV nghe mt chng trnh - nerve-racking (adj) cng thng
- presenter ngi dn chng trnh - obsession s m nh
NG
- bulletin bn tin - talking point ti ni chuyn
- highly-qualified (adj) c trnh cao - mortifying (adj) gy xu h, khin mt
H
- meteorologist nh kh tng hc th din
- National Meteorological Office s - pollen count s m nng phn
N
Kh Tng Quc Gia hoa trong khng kh
- scientific terminology thut ng khoa - hayfever bnh st ma c kh
hc TR - ultraviolet radiation intensity cng
- story board ct truyn, kch bn bc x cc tm
B
- to allocate (time) for sth dnh ra - stressful (adj) gy cng thng thn
00
(mt khong thi gian) cho ci g kinh

10
- to screen pht hnh - demanding (adj) i hi nhiu cng

+3
- a live broadcast chng trnh pht sc

sng trc tip
P2
C
61
A
H appiness is not having w hat you w ant b u t w anting w hat you

H
have, according to Ja m es Stewart; Although scientists now u n d e r-

stan d the roots of depression m ore clearly th a n they used to, hap piness
-
still rem ains a m ystery. Recently, however, som e interesting discoveries

-L
have been m ade.

N
Those who say they are happy, for example, tend to be less self-
centred, less hostile and abusive, and are less prone to disease and
TO
general ill health. Interestingly, th e affluent are not notably happier

th a n their less-well-off counterp arts, and seemingly, no particu lar time
NG
of life is significantly h appier th an any other. Even though some people

see life as a tragedy, w hen questioned, m ost people said they were gen-
erally happy - painting a m uch rosier picture regarding peoples general
ID
m oods and dispositions.

B
R esearch h a s show n th a t people have two basic rew ard centres in

th eir b rain s th a t are stim ulated by two different chem icals which cause
happiness. The first, dopam ine, is triggered by activities like exercise,
141
>reiaxatioTi.i.a^;d; th e q u t r-p le a s u r e s . T h e s e c o n d c o m p ris e s a s e t o f

adrenaiine-tp chemicls^ which are triggered by exciting or frightening
activities.. D opam ine'provokes response of passive "happiness, while
the second set of chem icals provokes a high-energy state of hap piness,
N
the feeling one m ight get from public speaking or m o u n tain climbing.
NH
While un d e rsta n d in g the chem ical process b eh ind h ap p in ess is im -
portant, it does not' explain why only some people are corlsistently
UY
happy. The answ er m ay lie in peoples perceptions of hap pin ess.
.Q
One of the reaso n s we have su ch a problem w ith h ap p in ess is th a t
TP
m any confuse it with>a life unto uch ed by anxiety, rage, do u bt an d sa d -
ness. The belief th a t -happiness m eans th a t nothing ever goes w rong is
O
naive; in order to be happy, we m u st know not how to avoid d istu rb ing

events, b u t how to deal with them .
NG
The key to coping with lifes u n p lea sa n t aspects, while rem aining
content, com es from an everyday practice w hich Mihaly C sikszentim i-
H
halyi calls the flow. He describes the flow a s the state one is in when
doing som ething completely absorbing. It com es w hen one is p u sh ed
N
right up to th e lim it of ones ability, b u t n ot beyond it. People can get a
TR
feeling of flow from d angerous sports like m o untain clim bing or driving
fast, he says b u t t can also come .from som ething relaxing like p a in t-
B
ing or reading a good book. The point is th a t its an activity you do for
00
the pleasure of doing it..You are n ot looking for praise or rew ard. W hat
10
is im portant, is to keep your brain busy if you w an t to be happy. The

+3
professor explains, If you leave som eone oil th eir own w ith nothing
P2
specific to do, m ost of their th oug hts will be w orries. People tend to
th ink ab ou t all the things they w ant and h av ent got ra th e r th a n how
C
good their life is. It seem s the key to hap pin ess lies in having an active
an d challenging lifestyle.
A
H
The scientific study of h app in ess will help u s u n d e rsta n d how to

build a world th a t improves h u m a n well-being an d self-esteem , an d
-
how to get the m ost satisfaction from their goals an d circum stances.
-L
1 . Studies have shown th a t h a p p in e s s _____

N
A. is positively influenced by wealth.

TO
B. is n ot influenced by wealth.
c. is negatively influenced by wealth.
NG
D. does n ot influence wealth.

2. Dopam ine is produced b y _____ .

A. recreational activity
ID
B. fright
B
c. high-energy activity
D. pleasure
142

3. A com m on m isconception ab o u t h ap p in ess is t h a t ____ _

A. rich people are happier.
B. h a p p y p eo p le p erc e iv e th in g s d ifferen tly ,
N
c . h ap p in e ss im plies never having problems.
NH
D. h ap p in e ss stem s from being naive.
4. In reality, con sisten t h ap p in ess lies in
UY
A. not feeling anxious.
.Q
B. being able to han d le problem s,
TP
c . n ot having problems.
D. n o t confusing o u r feelings.
O

5. W hat does it in th e sentence b u t it can also come from ... {next-
to-last paragraph) refer to?
NG
A. people
B. a d an g ero us sport
H
c . th e flow
D. research
N
6 . According to C sikszentim ihalyi, th e flow is triggered b y _____
A. external reward. TR
B. doing nothing.
B
00
c . challenging others.
10
D. activities done for personal pleasure.

+3
7. W hen we are in a c tiv e _____ .

A. we d o n t get w hat we w an t
P2
B. we try to challenge ourselves

C
c. we experience more anxiety

D. we th in k everything is fine
A
H
GLOSSARY
-
- self-centred (adj) ch k - t o trigger khi dy, lm khi pht

- hostile (adj) c thi th nghch,
-L
- relaxation s th thi
thiu thn thin - to provoke khiu khch, khi gi dy
N
- abusive (adj) hay chi ra ngi khc - perception s nhn thc

- t o be prone to sth (adj) thdng hay - untouched (adj) khng b nh hng
TO
b/ mc phi ci gi bi, cn nguyn vn

-affluent (adj) giu c - rage cn gin d
NG
- well-off (adj) kh gi - naive (adj) ngy th

- counterpart ngi/vt tng ng - content (adj) hi lng

- rosy (adj) lc quan., ton mt mu hng - absorbing (adj) hp dn

- disposition tm trng, tnh kh, tnh - well-being cnh sng yn vui,, s hnh
ID
tnh phc
- to stimulate kch thch - self-esteem lng t trng
B
- misconception quan nim sai lm
143

62 THE QUALITIES WE PRIZE IN OUR CHILDREN

A recent intern atio nal study h a s shown some su rp risin g an d a p p a r-
ently contradictory re su lts on the question of the priorities p a re n ts
N
aro u n d the world have w hen raising th eir children. While the survey
NH
showed th a t som e virtues are universally prized, interesting regional
an d n atio n al tre n d s em erge w hen p aren ts are ask ed to ra te th e im por-
UY
tance of various qualities they w ish to instil in th eir children.
.Q
P arents aro u n d the world seem to agree th a t good m an n ers, a sense
of responsibility and respect for oth ers are im p o rtan t qualities to teach
TP
th eir children. B ut while W est E u rop ean s give all th ree qualities m ore
O
or less equal importance-, E ast E uropean s an d N orth Am ericans ra te a

sense of responsibility a s by far the m ost im p ortan t, an d relegate re-
spect for oth ers to fourth place.
NG
Interestingly, a sense of im agination rank ed th e lowest priority
H
worldwide, although W est E uropeans gave the quality of flexible th in k -
ing twice the im portance any o ther group did. The Italians stress the
N
virtue of cultivating their y o u n g sters 5im agination m ore th a n m ost o th -
ers surveyed, w ith th e exception of Switzerland. The supposedly staid
Swiss prize im aginative youth. TR
B
E tiquette-m inded Belgians, Spaniards an d Greeks placed, th e high-
00
est prem ium on politeness, while the D anes an d Swedes p u t good

10
m ann ers lowest on the list. The new ly-capitalist E astern bloc cou ntries
also ra te d good m ann ers a s relatively u n im p o rtan t, p erh ap s because
+3
th e y are being confronted with com m ercial com petition for th e first
P2
time. Together w ith the Swiss an d the T urks, on the o th er h an d , they

C
prized the ability to com m unicate w ith others.

The virtues of tolerance and respect for o th ers were m ost highly re-
A
garded in Scandinavia, France, Britain, Switzerland, the N etherlands

H
and Spain. This w as not th e c a s e ' in Greece a n d the form er E astern

bloc nations, w hich rated these as being of lesser im portance.
-
G erm ans, A ustrians an d Swedes esteem personal independence, b u t

-L
the in d u strio u s F rench hold th e quality of conscien tiou sness a t work

more dear th a n any o th er E uropean nationals. The re sp o n ses in the
N
industrialized nations of Sweden an d B ritain showed, p e rh ap s bewil-

TO
deringly, th a t nationals of those cou ntries gave little im portance to con-

scien tio usn ess a t work.
NG
Polite Belgians answ ered th a t for them , obedience is am ong their

param o u n t values; th is sentim ent is sh ared to a lesser degree by th e

B ritish, Greeks an d Irish. The Italians, according to th eir question -

ID
naires, ranked th is very low.

W hen rearin g th eir children, the Greeks, T urk s an d Irish are alone
B
in th eir em p hasis on instilling strong religious beliefs.
144

One of th e prim ary difficulties the research ers faced w as tra n slatin g
th e qu estio n s a s perfectly a s possible in order n o t to d isto rt the result.
N
Im agination, for example, can be tra n sla te d into D u tch a s conceited-
n e ss; p erh ap s th is explains why th e D utch ap peared to give imagi-
NH
natio n a low priority.
Also, som e qualities are so ingrained in certain c ultu re s th a t they
UY
are tak en for granted, while o th ers are given great em p h asis because
.Q
they are felt to be lacking in a p rticu lar society.
TP
1. The survey show s t h a t _____
O
A. some valu es are general an d others vary.

B. no p a tte rn s emerged.
c . different n ation s contradict each other.
NG
D. th ere are no clear results.
H
2. For the North A m ericans, a sense of responsibility i s '_____
A. m ore im p o rta n t th a n it is for E ast E uropeans.
N
B. m ore im p o rtan t th a n respect for others,
TR
c . as im p ortan t a s it is for West Europeans.
D. a s im po rtan t a s resp ect for others.
B
00
3. A sense of im agination i s _____

10
A. m ost im p o rtan t to th e Italians.

B. m ost im p o rtant to the Swiss.
+3
c . im p o rtan t to all except th e Swiss.

P2
D. equally im p o rtan t to th e Italians an d th e Swiss.

C
4. Politeness is less im portant in th e E astern bloc b e c a u s e _____

A. they enjoy confrontation.
A
B. they are competitive people.

H
c . they are still getting u sed to capitalism .

-
D. they are relatively uncom m unicative.

-L
5. They (underlined) in p arag rap h 4 refers t o _____

A. com m ercial com petitors.
N
B. th e Swiss a n d Turks,
TO
c . good m ann ers.

D. E astern bloc countries.
NG
6 . A lthough th eir societies are industrialized, th e B ritish a n d Swedes

A. are not conscious of it.

ID
B! are bew ildered by industry,

B
c . do n o t think h ard work im portant.

D. do n o t th in k th e nationality im portant.
145
C .'o oije knewr-hoyv to tran slate.certain words.
N
D. it had to be conducted in so m any languages.
NH
GLOSSARY
UY
- t o prize qiitrong, nh gi cao - This is not the case (in/with) iu
- contradictory: (adj) tri ngc nhau, ny khng ng (ti/vi)
.Q
mu thun - to esteem qu trng
TP
- priority s/ quyn u tin - industrious (adj) sing nng, cn mn,
- virtue phm cht tt p, c hnh cn c
O
- to instil sth n sb lm cho ci gi thm - conscientiousness s tn tm

nhun vo, truyn th - bewilderingly (av) d gy hoang
- to rank xp hng mang
NG
- flexible thinking s suy ngh linh - nationals ngi n (trong mt nc)
ng/ mm do/ khong t - paramount (adj) ti cao, tt bt
H
- to stress nhn mnh - questionnaire bn cu hi thm d/
- to cultivate vun p, trau di, tu thm vn lc
N
dng - to rear a child nui dy mt a tr
- supposedly (adv) c cho !, theo - to distort lm btn dng, lm mo m
nh ngi ta ngh th TR
- conceitedness tnh t ph, tnh kiu
- staid (adj) trm tnh, im m ngo
B
- etquete-minded (adj) coi trng php - ingrained (adj) n su vo, thm
00
x giao cn c
10
- premium tm quan trng - to be taken for granted c xem l

~ capitalist (adj) thuc ch ngha t bn chuyn bnh thng
+3
- Eastern bloc countries Kha cc quc - to contradict each other ni ngc

P2
gia ng u nhau, mu thun nhau

- to be confronted with phi i mt - capitalism ch ngha t bn
C
vi - uncommunicative (adj) khng thch

- tolerance s/lng bao dung giao tip
A
- to bewilder sb lm ai hoang mang

H
63
-
-L
Nigel w as one of my best friends. In the seventeen years weve

known each other, weVe done the sort of things th a t m ates do. WeVe
N
gone ou t for d rin k s together, played in a nu m b er of sad rock b a n d s to -

gether. Weve got a history, a s they say.
TO
When a personal d isaster of catastrophic proportions left me out on

the streets w ith a couple of cardboard boxes an d a rucksack, it w as
NG
Nigel who supplied a sofa' and a well-stocked fridge. And w hen I got

m arried, it w as Nigels plum -coloured Rover P5 Coupe th a t w as waiting,

engine purring, outside the registry office.
ID
However, it cam e as som ething of a shock w hen I realised th a t I

B
h a d n t actually seen Nigel for nearly six m onths. W hat h ad gone

wrong? Its n o t a s if wed fallen out. We still worked an d lived in th e
146

sam e town. We h a d simply fallen victim to som ething th a t afflicts mil-

lions of m en in th eir late tw enties an d thirties. They s ta rt m isplacing
th eir friends.
N
Once you a n d y o ur m ates were inseparable. Now th ere never seem s
NH
to be enou gh tim e to cram everything in. T heres work, a hom e, kids
even. In reality, its getting to th e point where it's n o t so m uch a q u e s-
UY
tion of m eeting up, more a question of having a reunion. Its been so
long since you got together its actually becoming em barrassing.
.Q
The irony is th a t y o u ll continue to in sist th a t th ese m en, w hom you
TP
hardly ever see, are y o u r closest friends in the world, even though in
O
every m eaningful sense th ey now barely qualify a s ac q uaintan ces. You

probably have a closer relatio nship w ith the m an who collects your
ticket a t th e railway station.
NG
Men seem to need a practical reason to spend time together. Psy-
H
chologist Dr Malcolm George says, As m en, we very m uch form our
friendsh ips aro u n d doing som ething m utually. B ut the problem is th a t
N
th e m ain ten an c e is depen den t on doing th e thing. W hen the d em ands
of career and fam ily'kick in, those relationships get squeezed o u t.
TR
Dr George believes th a t th ere is a n essential difference in th e n a tu re
B
of m ale an d female friendship. Men have a more limited expectation of
00
th eir friendships, partly b ecause the m an-w om an relationship is still

10
looked up o n a s th e vehicle for em otional fulfilment. Mens relationships

+3
with o th er m en are regarded a s having no real em otional content. They

serve a function - playing in th e football team or whatever. Women ac-
P2
tually expect to sh a re th e ir em otional life with their friends - th a ts the

C
difference.
It seem s as though yo u r p a rtn e r m ay determ ine the friends you
A
H
keep. This m ay be becau se people ten d to m ake new acq u ain tan ces at
work and its very h ard to convert those work friends into family
-
friends. W hen m en la u n c h into a relationship a n d lose co ntact with

-L
th eir friends, they m ake bigger d em and s on th eir p a rtn e r by expecting

h e r to supply all th e friendship th a ts missing.
N
Most wom en w ant m en to keep th eir friends - a s long a s they can

TO
express them selves w ithin th ese friendships an d talk problem s over.

After all, m e n s inability to express th eir feelings is one of th e things
NG
th a t m akes relatio n sh ip s flounder.

1. W hen d isa ste r stru ck , N igel _;___

ID
A. b o ug ht h is friend a fridge.
B. provided a sofa for h is friends flat.
B
c. allowed his friend to stay with him.

D. helped his friend with his boxes an d rucksack.
147

. 2:1 Wh id. theâut&brjstojj ;seeing:: j$ g el?..

A.They fe;t,;' ^ - r - ^ ' ' ' ' -
B. Nigel moved-away.:; - V -
N
. c. :thr.pec;ts;f'thipliveS'to^'eT^';,
D. The 'aior got m arried.
NH
3. Millions-of m en in th eir'th irties ____ ;
UY
: A: d o n't know 'w here to find th eir friends.
B. have disagreem ents w ith th e ir friends,
.Q
c. lose to uch , w ith their friends.
TP
D. are 1 longer in terested in friendship.
O
4. Who does they (underlined in parag rap h 5) refer to?

A. people w ithout qualifications
B. the w riters relations
NG
c. m en in general
H
D. people th e w riter alm ost never sees
5. Men form friendships t h t _____
N
A. they m ain tain by spending tim e together.
TR
B. can be m aintained if there is a com m on activity,
c. a re n t dep en den t on career a n d family dem an ds.
B
D. are m utually satisfying.
00
10
6 . Men d o n t expect a lot from th e ir m ale frien dships b e c a u s e ____

A. th e ir relation ship s w ith women help th em w ith th eir feelings.
+3
B. they are not very emotional.

P2
c. they gain h ap p in ess from looking after th eir vehicles.

C
D. football is m ore im p o rtan t th a n relationships.

7. A m inority of w om en w a n t _____
A
A. m en to stay on good term s w ith th eir m ates.

H
B. m en to sp eak to th eir friends on a n em otional level,

c. m en to b re ak off th eir friendships.
-
D. m en to express their feelings to save th eir relationships.

-L
N
GLOSSARY
- mate bn thn - irony s tr tru, s oi om
TO
- proportion t l, tm mc - to qualify as tiu chun cng .

- cardboard box thng cc-tng nhn l
NG
- rucksack ci ba l - acquaintance ngi quen

- psychologist nh tm l hc

- a well-stocked fridge mt t lnh

cht y thc n - mutually (adv) h tng, ln nhau
- maintenance s duy tr
ID
- plum-coloure (adj) mu qu mn
- to purr (mo) ku r r; (ng c) - to kick in bt u l din/ bt u c
B
ang n ch tc dng
- registry office phng ng k kt hn - to be/get squeezed out b x ra ngoi
148

- to fait out bt ng, xch mch nhau - to look upon sb/sth as xem ai/ci g
- to fall victim to sth tr thnh nn nh l
nhn ca - vehicle xe c phng tin
N
- to afflict nh hng, tc ng n - content ni dung
- to misplace t khng ng ch, - to convert sth into sth chuyn ha ci
NH
sai ch gi thnh ra ci g
- inseparable (adj) khng tch ri nhau, - missing (adj) thiu mt, tht lc
UY
lun i lin nhau - to talk problems over bn bc k (
~ to cram everything in nhi nht mi gii quyt) vn
.Q
th vo - to flounder ng tng khng bit xoay
TP
- reunion s on t x ra sao, c nguy c tht bi vi gp
- embarrassing (adj) gy ngng kh khn
O
ngng, gy bi ri

64
NG
A global television-channel which will appeal to the entire world pop-
H
ulation is possible, according to research from a Germ an in stitute. The
a u th o r of the research, Dr Helm ut Ju ng , chief executive officer of the
N
M olln-based Sam ple In stitu t, says th a t in order to m ake it work, the
TR
ta stes of people in various countries need to be taken into considera-
tion.
B
00
While a possible global television channel is an ideal, in practice

10
people in different countries have different program m e preferences. In

the form er USSR, eighty-seven per cent of the people who took p art in
+3
the research w anted to see m ore full-length films, .com pared with a
P2
global average of sixty p er cent. In the Middle E ast, eighty-one per cent
C
of people w anted more hom e-produced news* as did seventy-nine per

cent in Asia. Only ab o u t half the resp ondents from W estern Europe,
A
N orth America an d J a p a n felt they needed m ore dom estically produced

H
news.
In places where program m ing 1S left to television controllers ra th e r
-
th a n political or religious officials, television audiences are generally

-L
happy. J u n g identified regions where m any people were u n h ap py with

N
program m ing schedules, including C entral Europe, the form er USSR

an d Latin America, as having state-ru n television, w hereas regions
TO
su ch a s W estern E urope and North America, w hich have independent

program m ing, got a clean bill of health.
NG
Despite his confidence th a t global television will eventually arrive,

J u n g th ink s there is a more realistic alternative for the n ea r future,

nam ely M ulticultural Regional TV or MRTV. speakin g recently in New
ID
York, J u n g said, Im convinced.th a t the concept of global television is

B
basically prom ising an d th a t the process of globalisation will continue

a n d will first of all happen in th e area of m edia and telecom m unica-
tions. B ut Pm also convinced th at the idea of global television will be
149
.'restricted to a ,lim ite d ;num keiyof channel.s. a n d .rtb;-^pfee|iic'-;types of pro-

gram m e s.: The options .for:the next- tw enty '.JOr 'thirty^y e ar S;' will be m ore
in the area of regional'television.
N
J u n g also said th a t global televisions tim e h a d ; not vet come. It
would have t om it certain -program m es due to un popu larity in certain
NH
regions w hich other people m ight w ant to see. Viewers still prefer
hom e-produced news, and cu ltu ral differences rem ain. For example,
UY
Asian audien ces look for education, while Latin Am ericans a n d E uro-
.Q
pean s generally reject violent program m es.
TP
J u n g s researc h h as been supported by surveys in Europe which
O
found th a t pan-E uropean channels su ch as Euro sport were tem pting

more people to w atch television. The presence of in ternation al c h a n -
nels, for example, increased the average n u m b er of h o u rs of television
NG
watched by w ealthier people in Austria, G erm any an d Sw itzerland by
H
fifteen per cent an d in sou thern Europe by three per cent.
It rem ains to be seen w hat im plications the globalisation of televi-
N
sion will have. It is certain to stren g th en the position of English a s the
TR
top language for m edia in the world, and m ay u nderm ine the s ta tu s of
the languages of m ore economically disadvantaged cu ltures. B ut d e-
B
spite increasing internationalism , national differences rem ain.
00
10
1. J u n g feels th a t global television could be possible i f _____

+3
A. everybodys opinion is taken into account.

P2
B. only pop ular program m es are considered.

C
c. various stud ies were carried out.

D. each co u n tiy is considered individually.
A
H
2. According to research, people in the form er U S S R _____

A. d id n t w atch the new s because they w erent interested in c u r-
-
re n t affairs.
-L
B. were happy w ith their program m e schedules.

N
c . preferred to w atch a film th an to play a sport.

D. th o ug h t th a t the nu m b er of films shown on th eir natio n al tele-
TO
vision statio n s was inadequate.

NG
3. Some Ja p a n e se viewers felt t h a t _____

A. th eir new s program m es were not good enough.

B. they d id nt have enough news program m es.
ID
c. they didnt have enough Jap a n e se news program m es.

B
D. they w anted news program m es like w estern E uropean ones.
150

4. According to J u n g s survey, TV viewers across the world were

h a p p y _____
N
. A. w hen schedules were completely unregulated.
B. w hen TV controllers wrote the program m es,
NH
c . w hen TV controllers decided on schedules.
D. w hen m ost program m es had. a political or religious content.
UY
5. How does J u n g feel ab out global TV?
.Q
A. He is positive abo ut it.
TP
B. He is negative ab o u t it.
c . He th in k s it could work in certain areas.
O

D. He h as mixed feelings ab ou t it.
6. W hat is J u n g s prediction abou t th e future?
NG
A. Everyone will w atch the sam e TV program m es.
H
B. Global TV is im possible because of differing ta s te s -
c. MRTV is m ore likely to succeed in the long ru n.
N
D. MRTV is th e m ost probable short-term developm ent.
TR
7. The advent of global TV could m ean th a t m inority la n g u a g e s __
A. will become economically disadvantaged.
B
B. will becom e m ore internationally accepted.
00
c . will be overwhelm ed by English. '

10
D. will highlight national differences.

+3
GLOSSARY
P2
- to appeal to sb hp n, thu ht at - Multicultural Regional TV Truyn

C
- chief executive officer gim c iu Hnh Khu vc (nhng c tnh) a vn

hnh Ha
A
- Mol in-based (adj) t c s ti th trn - globalisation s ton cu ha

H
Molln ( o) - to b restricted to b gii hn li trong

- the former USSR Lin X c phm vi
-
- a full-length film mt b phim c - to reject bc b, khc t

-L
di ng chun - pan-European (adj) lin Chu u, ton

N
- home-produced news tin t c c Chu u

sn. xut trong nc - It remains to be seen vln chuci thy r
TO
- respondent ngi tham gia tr li cuc - implication hu qu, h ly

thm d - to undermine ph hoi, lm sp
NG
- programming vic hoch nh chng trnh - economically disadvantaged (adj)

- official vin chc thit thi v mt kinh t

- state-run (adj) do nh nc qun l. - unregulated (adj) khng b rng buc

ID
- a clean bill of health giy chng nhn bi. cc-qui nh, khng b khng ch
sc khe - to have mixed feelings about sth CO
B
- realistic (adj) c tnh hin thc nhng cm nhn tri ngc nhau v
- alternative phng n khc chn - to be overwhelmed by b thng tr bi
la, chn la th hai - to highlight im ni bt
151
65
If the very idea of a fitness routine leaves you feeling ex h au sted an d
you shiver at th e th o ug h t of jogging round the p ark in the w inter wind,
N
th en Qigong m ight be ju s t the form of exercise you are looking for.
NH
This new gentle form of oriental gym nastics is com posed of a system
of m editative exercises which involve standing in a series of p o stu res
UY
for up to h alf an h o u r a day, or com bining simple m ovem ents with
.Q
breathing exercises. Although this type of exercise does not build m u s-
TP
cles, it is quickly growing in popularity as it is considered to be a good
way of reducing stress, stim ulating the circulation an d strengthen ing
O
the bodys im m une system .

Qigong, literally tran slated , m eans training your energy, an d h as
NG
been com pared to acu p u n ctu re w ithout needles. According to C hinese
beliefs, qi is vital energy w hich circulates w ithin th e h u m an body and
H
th ro ughou t n atu re . Qi is thought to flow along a system of bodily
channels, sim ilar to the way th a t sap flows throu gh a tree. Conse-
N
quently, Qigong is based on th e hypothesis th a t illness and psychologi-
cal problem s are caused when the n a tu ra l energy flow is blocked or de-
TR
ficient. Qigong directs energy to the trouble spot, and can be u sed to
B
alleviate allergies, asth m a, hypertension, insom nia an d rheu m atism .
00
This m ethod h a s also been shown to be successful in treatin g obesity;

10
one p atien t who weighed 230 kg w as able to lose 70 kg. Another D utch
patient weighed 168 kg when her father took h er to a Qigong practitio-
+3
ner two years ago. I w as veiy sceptical, she says. Id tried so m any
P2
diets, b u t I always p u t weight back on again. Once she started the

C
Qigong routine h er weight began to drop, despite only m inor m odifica-

tions to her diet. In six m onths she lost 50 kilos. Its not difficult a t all.
A
Since started doing the exercises I h aven t been so hung ry an d Ive

H
had m ore energy, so Im more active.

-
Chinese practitioners have found it difficult to pe rsu ad e the w estern

-L
m ind of the powers of Qigong. B ut although conventional m edicine c a n -

not explain it, governm ents keen to cu t rising h ealthcare costs are e n -
N
dorsing it. In Germ any, for example, Qigong is available on the national
healthcare system , a n d m any doctors are prescribing it for aches,
TO
swellings an d allergies. Many patients who have suffered from allergies

NG
for years have found th at, since startin g Qigong, they h av en t been ill a t
all, or only suffer from very slight allergic reactions.

In Europe, for the m ost part, it h a s been used to trea t relatively m i-

ID
nor conditions, b u t recently Qigong h a s achieved dram atic resu lts with
more serious conditions. In one case a French air stew ardess w as told
B
by h er doctor th a t she only h ad a few m o nth s to live because she h ad

cancer. Conventional treatm ent, including chem otherapy, h ad been
152

unsuccessful. I t m ade h er so ill th a t she nearly died. After starting

Qigong, however, the p atient im mediately began to feel better. S ubse-
N
quently, the doctors could find no further traces of .the disease and the
p atien t w as able to re tu rn to work. While th is m ay so u n d like a m ira-
NH
cle, one should point o u t th a t Qigong may not necessarily cure every-
one, a s it depends on how m uch you exercise an d on the individuals
UY
psychological m otivation. N evertheless, even if it does no t cure you, it
.Q
h a s the potential to prolong your life.
TP
1. Qigong is perfect for those w h o _____
O
A. do no t like vigorous exercise.

B. enjoy jogging,
NG
c . are exhausted.
D. do n ot enjoy routines.
H
2. Q igong _____
N
A. is a type of body building.
B. helps the body fight disease more effectively,
TR
c . is a form of acu pun ctu re.
B
D. is like aerobics.
00
3. Qi is believed to b e _____
10
A. the training of energy.

+3
B. a ch ann el in the body,

P2
c . the life-force.
D. the circulatory system .
C
4. Some governm ents approve Qigong b e c a u s e _____

A
A. they are keen on it.

H
B. .it is cheap.
c . they have been persuad ed th a t it works,
-
-L
D. it is b etter th a n conventional m ethods.

5. In Europe, Qigong h a s m ainly been u s e d _____
N
A. for serious conditions.

TO
B. for those who c a n t afford private treatm ent,

c . for easily treated ailm ents.
NG
D. for those with allergic reactions to drugs.

6 . W hat does It (underlined in the last paragraph) refer to?

ID
A. cancer
B. Qigong
B
c . the established way of treatm en t

D. limited life expectancy
153
7. Accor4ng/'t>he'cQelu:Soi'o,the passage, Qigong

. -,'A: will-defiriitely-make'you .liye longer;.t
B i . w ill;:0 n l y i'G u r e * ,y Q U ': i f '- y p u rbliv
c . has.'.miracuroTis-effqc.ts:
N
- D, is ineffective.
NH
GLOSSARY
UY
- fitness routine vic tp th dc hng - asthma bnh hen suyn
ngy
.Q
- hypertension chng tng huyt p
- to shiver at the thought of rng mnh - insomnia chng mt ng
TP
khi ngh n - rheumatism bnh thp khp
- Qigong Kh crg - obesity chng bo ph
O

- meditative (adj) thuc v suy tng, - practitioner ngi ang luyn tp/
thuc thin qun truyn dy (mt php mn)
- posture t th ca c th - sceptical (adj) oi ngh
NG
- circulation s tun hon - modification s sa i
H
- immune system h min dch - conventional (adj) thng thng, theo
- literally (adv) theo ngha en ca t quy c
- acupuncture khoa chm cu - to endorse chp thun, tn thnh,
N
- bodily channels cc kinh [c trong c chng thc
th
- sap nha cy
-
-
TR
swelling ch sng
allergic (adj) do d ng gy ra
B
- hypothesis gi thuyt - chemotherapy php ha tr
00
- to be blocked b tc nghn - trace vt tch, du vt

- to alleviate lm gim nh
10
- to prolong ko di
- allergy s d ng - the circulatory system h tun hon
+3
P2
66 LEAVING THE RAT RACE

C
Many people long to escape from th e h u stle a n d b u stle of m odern-

A
life. But few people would, actually give up a w arm com fortable hom e to
H
move to a rem ote island in th e middle of th e North Sea. The S irrs fam -
ily, however, decided to do exactly th at. U nhappy w ith th eir busy life-
-
styles they sold their 400 year-old cottage in Yorkshire to move to the
-L
tiny Scottish island of Graem say.

Incredibly, for less th a n the price of a m odest sem i-detached hou se,
N
it w as possible to buy h alf of the island. A ttracted initially by the low

price, Rob an d Jill contacted th e agent concerned an d discovered th a t
TO
the esta te advertised actually com prised a post office, six h o u se s an d

NG
a private sandy-beach - all for 60,000.

Interested, the young couple a n d their three children decided to go

an d have a look. Knowing th a t th e island would look its b est in the

ID
sum m er, they chose to view the property in December. They d id n t

w ant to be u n d e r any illusions. Despite a seaso nal chill, the w eath er
B
w as clear a n d the sea calm. The island looked m ore beau tiful th a n they
154

could ever have im agined. While they left their children playing on the
beach, the S irrs looked aro u n d and realised th a t the deal w as even
more astonishing th a n they had first thought. The six-bedroom house
N
cam e w ith a farm an d 300 acres of land.
NH
Once on the island the Sirrs tried to im agine w hat life could be like
for them . They were anxious to m eet their neighbours a s soon as pos-
UY
sible. However, they h ad no need to worry. On th a t first trip they m et
u p to h alf of the sixty or so island in h ab itan ts and were given a warm
.Q
welcome! The couple were thrilled th a t the people of Graem say were so
TP
friendly. Many of th e m urged the couple to com plete the tran saction as
O
soon as possible. W ithin two weeks of their visit, the S irrs bid of

55,000 w as accepted.
The move h a s brought new challenges to the family. Rob-'-and Jill
NG
have started a sheep farm an d renovated the cottages to ren t out as
H
holiday hom es. Thy in sist th a t the only thing they m iss about their
previous life is going to the cinem a. If anything, moving to the rem ote
N
island h a s brough t the family closer together.
TR
Before they moved, the Sirrs th ough t long and h ard abo ut bringing
th eir children u p in su ch a rem ote place. B ut the children are young
B
enough to ad ju st an d seem hap pier in the new environm ent.
00
They are content with their own com pany an d m ake th eir own e n te r-
10
tainm ent. A lthough they are the only pupils at the local school, they
+3
receive lots of atten tion and are able to take advantage of the schools
P2
m odem facilities.
C
Since the move, the family have been isited by m any friends who
are envious of th eir beautiful surroundings. The family consider them -
A
selves lucky. For very little cost, they have all the benefits of a beautiful
H
place to live. They also hope th a t by improving their property they can,
in future, give som ething back to the island.
-
-L
1. Why did the S irrs family move to the island?

N
A. They had always w anted to live on an island.

B. It w as a chance to escape.
TO
c. They hated Yorkshire.

NG
D. Their children were unhap py a t school.

2. They decided to visit the property in December b e c a u s e _____

A. it w as the only time of year they could travel.
ID
B. the w eather was u nusu ally good.

B
c . they w anted to spend C hristm as in Scotland.

D. the}' w anted to see w hat the place was like a t the w orst time of
the year.
155

3; W hen they first visited th e is la n d , the Sirrs _ . . . ..

A, were, a little shy ard-;fit islted-; .
. Bl: could not;jm agm e wfrat their neighbours would be like,
c. .wanted; to get to know the .island pple. : ' ..
N
D. were:'anxious ab o u t m eeting th e island people:
NH
4. W hich b est describes the S irrs feelings before the move?
A. excited b u t apprehensive
UY
B. nervous an d worried
.Q
c . happy an d cam
TP
D. sad b u t resigned
O
5. W hat does them (underlined in parag raph 4) refer to?

A. The Sirrs.
B. Their children.
NG
c . Their next door neighbours.
D. The people of the island.
H
6 . Their n e ig h b o u rs _____
N
A. told them to buy the property before som eone else got it.
B. urged them to bid a higher price.
c. told them th a t 55,000 w as acceptable.
TR
B
D. urged them to com plete the sale of th eir hou se in Yorkshire.
00
7. One advantage m entioned of being the only stu d e n ts is _____

10
A. peace an d quiet.
+3
B. little financial cost.

P2
c . greater use of school resources.

D. fewer discipline problem s.
C
GLOSSARY
A
H
- the rat race cnh sng bon chn ua - transaction s giao dch mua bn
i - bid gi a ra thng lng
-
- to long to do sth khao kht lm g - to renovate tn trang, i mi

-L
- the hustle and bustle s x b, s si - to rent sth out em ci g ra cho thu

ng - to be content with their own com-
N
- estate khu nh t, khu bt ng sn pany hi lng vi vic t lm bn vi

- to comprise gm c nhau
TO
- to be under an illusion chu nh - envious of (adj) ganh ty vi

NG
hng ca o tng - apprehensive (adj) io s, e s

- chill ci cm gic lnh - resigned (adj) t ra cam chu, nhn

- deal s tha thun mua bn nhc

- acre mu t (Anh) - to bid a higher price tr mt gi cao
ID
- thrilled (adj) cm thy hi hp th v hn

B
- to urge sb to do sth thc gic ai lm

g
156

67 NEW LINK FOUND

BETWEEN HUMANS AND MAD c o w DISEASE
N
Mad Cow D isease is a deadly illness of th e b rain a n d it is th e n o n -
NH
technical term for BSE or Bovine Spongiform E ncephalitis. This is so
difficult to say th a t jo u rn a lists an d even some doctors prefer the more
UY
vivid Mad Cow Disease. It is believed to be caused w hen cows eat food
m ade from th e bones and organs of diseased an im als, particularly
.Q
sheep. Cows are basically vegetarian an d the policy of farm ers in B rit-
TP
ain of feeding them a cheap, m eat-based diet seem s to be responsible
O
for Mad Cow Disease.

W hen the disease ap peared in the 1990s, it caused, a huge contro -
versy, b u t it had first been discovered in cows in the late 1980s. Many
NG
people began to be afraid to eat beef because it w as n o t known w h ether
H
th e disease could be cau g h t by h u m a n s who ate m eat from infected
cows. The disease in its h u m an form is known as Creutzfeldt Jak o b
N
Disease or GJD, an d it becam e familiar to the general public, not only
in B ritain b u t also in Europe, when several people were th o u g h t to
TR
have died from the disease after eating beef infected w ith BSE. In 1996,
several E uropean governm ents b an n ed th e im port of beef p ro d ucts
B
00
from Britain. This action cau sed outrage in B ritain in th e p op ular press
10
a n d am ongst governm ent m inisters, who co ntin u ed to claim th e link

between Mad Cow D isease an d CJD h ad no t been scientifically proven.
+3
The B ritish governm ent now ad m its th a t people' m ight get

P2
Creutzfeldt Ja k o b from eating beef, after scien tists found sym ptom s of
C
CJD, w hich is alw ays fatal, in ten victims. Since th e n, th e sales of beef
have dropped dram atically, except am ongst the poorer m em bers of the
A
com m unity, who have tak en the opportunity of a drop in prices to enjoy
H
beef in a way they could not in the p ast. F ast food stores all over
Europe have begun to m arket a new (and they claim even tastier) v er-
-
sion of th e ir pop ular burger, the vegiburger, w hich does n o t contain

-L
m eat.
N
S cientists w orking in B ritain have now published evidence in the

science jo u rn a l Nature th a t could show Mad Cow D isease an d CJD are
TO
closely connected. They say b rain proteins linked w ith both d iseases
NG
show very close sim ilarities. This could explain why people develop CJD
after eating m eat from cows infected w ith BSE. The research could also

explain wiry people never got CJD from eating sheep, w hich also suffer
from a kind of m ad sheep disease. We do not sh are the protein
ID
prion w ith sheep, b u t it is som ething people a n d cows have in com -

B
mon.
W hat h ap p e n s exactly w hen h u m an beings get the disease? The key
157
seems-to. be the protein prion. Normal prions are im po rtant if th e brain

is to function riormally. ;'^nH 'hiS:'-g;wri|' w ith pnii,-. however, the
brain becomes-'Spohge-Uke/which;is also what happens ~iiv'COWS who
suffer from. M ad Cow Disease. Scientist Professor K rakauer a n d his col-
N
leagues have been exploring genetic sim ilarities between h u m an s, an d
NH
cows. We needed to find a sim ilarity we share w ith cattle th a t we d o n t
sh are w ith sheep, said K rakauer, and th a ts w hat we have found.
UY
They com pared cow prion genes an d h u m an prion genes to those found
in other anim als, su c h as?' sheep a n d m onkeys. They found two striking
.Q
sim ilarities in cows, h u m an s, chim panzees an d gorillas. Scientists be-
TP
lieve these findings hatve to be tak en seriously a s they are the first th a t
O
link h u m an s w ith ca ttle.

1 . We use the expression Mad Cow Disease b e c a u s e _____
NG
A. it is more accurate.
B. it is easier to say.
H
c . it links cows w ith people.
D. it so u nd s less scientific.
N
2. Cows are infected with the disease b e c a u s e _____ '
A. they need a vegetarian diet. TR
B
B. they are forced to. eat dead sheep,
00
c . they eat m eat from infected cows.

10
D. they are fed p a rts of diseased anim als.

+3
3. As a resu lt of Mad Cow D isea se _____

P2
A. people have stopped eating m eat.

B. good m eat h as become expensive,
C
c . poor people are eating more beef.

D. a new kind of beefburger h a s been invented.
A
H
4. Scientists believe C J D _____

A. is cau sed by eating beef.
-
B. m ay be cau sed by eating sheeps m eat,

-L
c . is cau sed by lack of proteins.

N
D. may be cau sed by eating beef.

5. W hat do we know about m ad sheep disease?
TO
A, It is dangerous to h u m an s.
NG
B. It could be fatai.
c . It is sim ilar to Mad Cow Disease.

D. It cannot-cause CJD.
ID
6 . Prion is protein found in

B
A. sheep an d cows.
B. people an d sheep.
158

c . cows a n d people.
D. a n u m b e r of anim als.
N
7. W hat does th e passage suggest ab o u t o u r u n d erstan d in g of Mad
Cow D isease ______
NH
A. We know little ab o u t the real causes.
B. There is no danger in eating meat.
UY
c . little progress h a s been m ade by scientists.
.Q
D. We know things we did not know before.
TP
GLOSSARY
O
- Mad Cow Disease Bnh B in - version phin bn

- non-technica term tn gi khng - burger mn.tht b bm
mang tnh k thut t ^ - ,sponge-lke (adj) xp nh bt bin
NG
- vegetarian (adj) (thu) an co; (ng!) _ genetic (adj) thuc di uyn
H
-controversy Stranh ci -genegien
-o u tra g e cn phn n - * * " 9 similarities nhng im
N
-minister b trng tu^g ng rt r rt
- fatal (adj) gy cht ngi chimpanzee con tinh tinh
- to market tung ra th trng TR
- gorilla con khi t
B
00
68 CHARLIE CHAPLIN - A COMIC GENIUS

10
His early life'Was a time of great hardsh ip. He w as bo m in a very

+3
poor p art of London, b u t his family were a t first well off enough to af-
P2
ford a maid. However, while he w as still a child, his family gradually

lost everything. His father was a comedian and his m other worked a s a
C
dancer an d singer. Neither of them w as very successful an d the family

A
h ad very little money. They were so poor that, a t one time, he and his
H
b rothers had only one pair of shoes between them an d they h a d to take
tu rn s w earing them . His father eventually deserted the family, and later
-
died of alcoholism. The strain caused by this desertion affected his

-L
m other deeply. Her career fell ap a rt and in the end she becam e insane.
W hen his m other had to go into an asylum , he w as sen t to an o rp h an -
N
age.
TO
The first tim e he him self earned, any money w as by dancing and
singing w hen he w as only five years old. As a young boy he h ad many-
NG
different jobs, b u t w hat he loved m ost of all w as working in the theatre.

As he said in h is autobiography, he felt quite a t hom e on the stage, in

m ore w ays than one - the stage becam e an escape from the pain of his
ID
family life. W hen he w as abo ut fifteen, he joined a travelling theatre

com pany n w ent on trips to America. On one su ch to u r he w as of-
B
fered a p art in a film, so he went to Hollywood, where eventually he be-

cam e both a n ac to r an d a film director.
159
In his films we see the influence of his early life: a strong feeling of
pity for the poor, a rom antic view of women (he w orshipped h is mother)
and a love of applause. His com edies were im mediately successful. As
well as m aking policem en look foolish, he also often used th e situ ation
N
where people find them selves in a ridiculous position, b u t refuse to
NH
adm it they have a problem . The b est example of this is th e d ru n k en
m an who, though obviously d ru n k in the way he w alks an d talks, tries
UY
to pretend he h as no t touched a drop. One of h is m ost fam ous roles is
the little tram p who tries b u t fails to be a gentlem an, an d so m akes u s
.Q
laugh. His films are n ot always comic; they are often sad an d som e, like
TP
The Great Dictator, contain a strong political m essage.
O
As a director he w as known to be a perfectionist an d som etim es

m ade actors repeat a scene m any tim es until he w as finally satisfied
with it. Many of the people he worked with found him m ean an d ty ra n -
NG
nical, b u t it w as probably his early experiences of poverty th a t m ade
him so anxious to be successful. He is undoubtedly th e m ost p opu lar
H
com edian of all time. He died in Switzerland in 1977 a t th e age of 88 .
There is now a statu e of him in London, the city of his birth.
N
1 . Although the family were p o o r _____
A. they got on well w ith each other.
TR
B
B. they quickly becam e famous,
00
c. things had once been better.

10
D. they were able in m ake ends meet.

+3
2. His m o th ers career ended w h e n _____

P2
A. she began to drink too m uch.

B. she w ent m ad.
C
c. h er h u sb a n d left her.
A
D. she becam e too old.

H
3. W hat he liked m ost about th e theatre w as .

A. th a t it helped him t forget his problem s.
-
B. the m oney he earned.

-L
c . the ap p lau se of the audience.

N
D. th a t his family worked there.

4. In w hat way did his early life affect his w ork in cinem a?
TO
A. He w anted to m ake people laugh.

NG
B. He m ade a film abo ut his m other,

c . He showed the life of the poor.

D. He w anted his films to m ake money.

ID
5. The d ru n k e n m an is funny b e c a u s e _____

A. he behaves seriously.
B
B. he talk s in a dru n k e n m anner.
160

c. he behaves a s if he is sober.
D. he keeps falling down.
6 . His films can be described a s _____
N
A. ju s t entertainm ent.
NH
B. political a n d rom antic,
c. serious and comic.
UY
D. love stories.
.Q
7. W hat w as he like as a director?
TP
A. He w as difficult to please.
B. He w as keen to please everyone.
O
' c. He w as anxious to finish.

D. He w as never satisfied with his work.
NG
GLOSSARY
H
- comic (adj) hi hc, khi hi - travelling theatre company gnh ht
- genius thin ti rong
N
- well off (adj) kh gi - romantic (adj) th mng, lng mn
- maid c gip vic TR - to worship tn sng, sng bi
- applause s/ trng v tay tn thng
- comedian din vin hi
B
- to take turns doing sth thay phin - ridiculous (adj) l bch
00
nhau lm gi - drunken (adj) (dng trc danh t)

10
- to desert sb b ri ai ang say ru

+3
- alcoholism s nghin ru - drunk (adj) (dng sau ng t lin kt

- strain s cng thng m t ch ng) ang say ru
P2
- desertion s b ri (gia nh) - tramp k v gia c, k du th du thc

C
- to fall apart sp - gentleman qu ng

- insane (adj) in lon - perfectionist ngi u ton
A
- asylum nh thng in, bnh vin - mean (adj) keo kit

H
tm thn - tyrannical (adj) c on, c ti

- orphanage tri tr m ci - sober (adj) tnh to (= khng say
-
- autobiography t truyn, tiu s t ru), sng sut

-L
vit
N
69
TO
W hen my Uncle Alan tu rn ed u p at my th irtee n th birthday party

NG
w ithout a present, I cou ld nt hide the disappointm ent on my face. He

w as my favourite uncle, and he always bought me fantastic presents.

D ont look so sad, A nna, he said kindly. I h av en t forgotten to get

ID
you a present. I ju s t cou ld nt bring it w ith me. Tomorrow, Im taking

you abseiling.
B
I d id n t know you h ad a boat, I said.
161

No, not saving!-bslmg!

What's tiba.t?Wii askedt alfy neveir
Y oull see,:he said mysteriously^ ^
N
Early the :nxt da>v P 'n cle. Aan."drv-; re.:. to'.' lrnerton Adventure
Park. Id. never been there before., b u t h a d often told m y .m um an d dad
NH
how excitm g.it'.fu n d e d . s we drove.through th e gates, it seem ed th at,
: once again, Uncle- Alan-.'nad found me a birthday p resen t Id never for-
UY
get. W hen we arrived, we w ent to. firid my instructo r, friendly young
wom an called Isabelle. S he p u t m e completely a t ease, an d I knew that,
.Q
whatever.1 w as going to be doing, Id be quite safe w ith her.
TP
So, Anna, have you ever been abseiling before? she asked. I adm it-
O
ted I d idnt even know w hat abseiling was. Well, its always fun to ex-

perience som ething new, is n t it? she said;
We walked th rou gh the park, an d ended u p at a rocky hill. The big-
NG
gest rock face w as extremely high and steep, b u t th ere were smaller,
H
easier faces too. W hen I saw the equipm ent w aiting for me - a rope, a
h a rn ess an d a helm et - I guessed w hat I was going to be doing.
N
Oh, Im going rock climbing! I said excitedly.
Not exactly, said Uncle Alan.
TR
Isabelle explained- With rock climbing, you s ta rt a t th e bottom an d
B
go u p, b u t with abseiling, you sta rt a t the top an d go dow n. Now I u n -
00
derstood.
10
We carried the equipm ent up a p ath to the top of the sm allest rock
+3
face. I carefully looked over the edge. The ground w as ab o u t live m etres
P2
below. This is going to be fun , I thought. Isabelle tied the rope care-
fully to a m etal ring, and then threaded it throug h my h arn ess, which
C
by now I was w earing round my waist. She threw the other end of th e
A
rope over the edge of the rock face, a n d it fell to the ground.
H
This is w here I say goodbye, said U nde Alan. Im going back down
to the bottom. Ill be holding th e other end of the rope, so y o ull be quite
-
safe. See you w hen you come down! Isabelle w as the perfect in stru c -
-L
tor. She talked m e through w hat to do step by step. I stood on the edge
of the rock face with my back to the drop. My left h a n d w as holding th e
N
rope in front of me, my right h an d holding the rope behind me. Now,
TO
she said, gently lean b ack. This w as the m ost difficult part. Its a te r-
ribly scary experience leaning back over a cliff, especially the first time
NG
you attem p t it, an d for the first few m in utes I w ondered w hether I could
actually do it. Finally,"I decided to risk it. I d id n t w an t Uncle Alan

thinking I w as a coward. Keeping my feet still, I leant back a little. Then

ID
a little more.
B
F antastic! shouted Uncle Alan from below me.
162

T h a ts w onderful, said Isabelle. Now, slowly sta rt to walk down the

rock. It w as more like bouncing th a n ac tu al walking, b u t I started to
go down. It d id n t take long to reach th e bottom, b u t I felt a huge sense
N
of achievem ent w hen I p u t my feet on the ground next to Uncle Alan.
NH
Im so proud of you! he said. Do you w an t to try a higher rock face
now? You bet! I said. The higher, the better!
UY
1. W hen Uncle Alan saw A nnas disappointm ent, he realised t h a t ___
.Q
A. he sho uld have b ro ug ht a p resen t with him.
TP
B. he really w as h e r favourite uncle.
O
c . she th o ugh t he h a d forgotten to bring h er a present.

D. he h ad to take h er somewhere the next day.
NG
2. A nna h a d frequently told h er p aren ts t h a t _____
A. Lam erton Adventure P ark appealed to her.
H
B. she had never been abseiling before.
c . Uncle A lans birthday p resen ts were unforgettable.
N
D. abseiling so unded like a very interesting activity.
3. Isabelle m ade A n n a _____ TR
A. ad m it how little she knew ab o u t th e park.
B
B. feel totally secure an d comfortable.
00
c . th in k abo ut previous enjoyable experiences.

10
D. realise th a t abseiling would be easy.

+3
4. W hen A nna saw the equipm ent, she _____

P2
A. u nderstoo d im m ediately w hat abseiling was.

C
B. tried h a rd to guess w hat it would be used for.

c. asked Isabelle for a n explanation.
A
D. still d idn t u n d e rsta n d w hat she would be doing.

H
5. Uncle Alan d id n t stay a t the top of the rock face b e c a u s e ______ .

-
A. he w anted to see A nna when she reached the bottom.

-L
B. he h a d to hold the rope a t the bottom.

c . the rope h a d fallen over the edge by m istake.
N
D. he th o u g h t she would be safer without him u p there.

TO
6 . As A nna started to lean back, s h e _____

A. felt extrem ely frightened.
NG
B. wondered if she was a coward,

c . knew she h a d to risk the danger.

D. rem em bered the first time sh e d done this.
ID
7. After reaching th e bottom, A n n a _____

B
A. th o u g h t she h ad achieved enough for one day.

B. w anted to abseil down a more difficult rock face.
163

c . m de/'bt; w i t h e r , uricie ab out th height'of the rock.

' 'D. flt relieê to'be.:oR:tiie ground gari w ith her.uncle.
GLOSARY ' ; V
N
- a bseiling mn thetiiao 'tt xung ni - drop cH mt t tht xung, dc ng
NH
bng dy thng - to lean back ng ngi ra sau, d
- to put sb at ease khin ai an lng/ ng ra
UY
cm thy d chu - scary (adj) ng s
- seep (adj) dc ng - coward k nht gan, k hn nht
.Q
- harness b dy nt (eo quanh ngi - to bounce ny bt ln (nh qu bng)
TP
nhy d hoc leo ni) - "You bet!" "ng nhin ri!"; "D
- to thread lun si dy qua nhin!"
O

70
NG
Oliver glanced a t h is w atch. There were ten m in utes left un til the
su perm arket closed an d he was ru sh in g ro und , quickly dropping things
H
he needed for the weekend into h is trolley. He h a d n t been in h is own
flat long an d now his m other had invited herself for d in n er the follow-
N
ing day. He really w anted to im press her with h is ability to cope on his
TR
own, b u t he knew th a t the u su al critical com m ents would soon appear
if everything w a sn t perfect. He hoped th a t the th ree days h e d sp en t
B
cleaning the place from top to bottom w ouldnt be w asted, an d h e d
00
even gone so far a s p ainting the front door. His m other w ouldnt notice
10
th at, though, of course. W hat she would notice w as the d u s t on top of

+3
th e pictures, or the 'old sofa, or one of a th o u sa n d oth er th ings th a t

P2
Oliver had forgotten about. Still, he w as determined, to give h e r a good

meal, an d m aybe th a t would p u t h er in a slightly b etter mood th an
C
usual.
A
He checked his shopping list again and b en t over to look th ro u g h his

H
trolley. He m entally ticked off the item s and th en realised th a t he still

needed eggs. As he straightened up to set off tow ards the dairy section,
-
there w as an enorm ous collision, a clatter of tin s an d a loud shriek of

-L
pain. W hen Oliver had recovered his balance, he saw n attractive

wom an of ab o u t nineteen on h e r knees, pu tting tin s an d vegetables
N
back into a h andh eld basket.

TO
Why don't you w atch where y o u re going?" she snapped a t him over
h er shoulder. Some people ju s t have no m anners. Honestly ...
NG
Er ... sorry, stam m ered Oliver. Let me help you . He began to pick

tins up. It really w a sn t my fault, though, you know. I w as ju s t ... The

girl grabbed a tin of tu n a from his hands.
ID
Never mind> she said, her b ask et now full, an d she strode off down
B
the aisle w ithout looking back: Oliver w atched h er go an d sighed. He

never seem ed to have m uch luck with girls. Maybe th a t w as ju s t w hat

he needed to show his m other how grown u p he was. He tu rn ed back to
his own trolley and began to p u sh it. Maybe if she cam e to dinner an d
N
he introduced h e r to an intelligent, charm ing young wom an then she
NH
would stop calling him every day to check he w as okay. As Oliver
th o u g h t abo u t th is possibility, som ething caug ht his eye a n d he
UY
stopped his trolley. There w as a red leather purse on top of his shop-
ping. It m u st have come out of the girls basket and landed in his trol-
.Q
ley. Oliver quickly glanced aro und , -looking for the girl. She w ouldnt be
TP
able to pay for h er shopping. He picked up the p urse, left his trolley
O
and sprinted tow ards the line of checkouts.

W hen he got there, he scanned the lines of custo m ers waiting to
pay. There were ab o u t a dozen queues, b u t Oliver co u ldn t see the girl
NG
in any of them . T hinking th a t she m u st still be shopping som ew here in
H
the superm ark et, Oliver tu rn ed to go and find her w hen he suddenly
heard a fam iliar voice a t the front of the queue next to him.
N
Im su re I had it here a m inute ago. I w ant to speak to the m anager.
I th in k its been stolen. It m u st be som eone in this superm arket be-
cause I know ..." TR
B
'S he stopped as she realised th a t Oliver w as stand in g next to her,
00
holding h er p u rse out tow ards her.

10
Lost som ething? Oliver asked.

The girl sm iled, then recognised Oliver and frowned, before h er ex-
+3
pression softened again an d she took the pu rse with, a faint smile on
P2
her lips.
C
T h an k s, she said quietly. .

A
1. Oliver is anxious to prove to his m other th a t h e _____

H
A. h as'le arn e d a lot ab o u t cooking.

B. is capable of living independently.
-
c . know s she looked after him very well.

-L
D. h as learned no t to be so negative.
N
2. W hen she visits h is flat, Olivers m other w ill _____

TO
A. appreciate the effort h h as m ade.

B. find som ething she isn t happy about.
NG
c . help him do u p his flat.

D. rem ind him to get new furniture.

3. The young wom an drops h e r shopping b e c a u s e _____

ID
A. she and Oliver bum p into each other.

B
B. h er b asket is too full.

c.. she is frightened by Oliver.
D. she feels pain in h er knees.
165
4. W hen Oliver offers to hetp. th e young wom an ;,

A. forgives-him'for w hat lie h a s dorie!; .
B. show s th a t she d o esn t t r u s t hirrt' ; -
c . ianks.him . despite h e r anger. ;
N
D. refuses to listen to his explanation.
NH
5. Oliver th in k s th a t his m other m ight give him m ore independence if
h e _____ ' - , .
UY
A. found a friend for her.
.Q
B. h ad a girlfriend.
TP
c . told h e r to stop, phoning him.
D. h ad nicer friends.
O

6. W hen he sees the purse, Oliver realises t h a t _____
A. he m ight be accused of theft.
NG
B. th e re s no money in it.
c . he could get his revenge.
H
D. it fell into his trolley by accident.
N
7. Oliver m anages to find the girl because h e _____
A. sees h er stan din g in one of the queues.
B. knows where she is still shopping. TR
B
c. recognises h er voice w hen she speaks.
00
D. joins the sam e queue as her.

10
GLOSSARY
+3
- to glance at ic mt nhn - to snap at sb xng ging vi.ai,, ni

P2
- trolley xe y mua hng trong siu th nh mng ai

C
- to cope on ones' own t minh xoay x - to have no manners ra bt lch s

ly - to stammer ni p bp
A
- critical comments nhng li ch trch - to grab chp iy

H
- to (even) go so far as doing sth - tuna c ng

thm ch [ (lm g ) .../ i xa , - to stride (strode - stridden) si
-
n mc l bc, ro bc
-L
- mental?Y (adv) thm trong u - aisle li i gia hai hng gh/ hai dy
- t o tick sfth off nh du ci gi i k trong siu th
N
mua/lm xong - to caught one's eye khin a ch /

- to straighten up ng thng ngi ln p vo mt ai
TO
- dairy (adj) thuc sn phm t sa b - to Sprint chy nhanh, chy v

- checkouts nhng ngi ang sp hng
NG
- collision s va chm/ m vo nhau

- clatter ting ku long xong ch thanh ton tin

~ tin hp kim loi/ ion thic - to scan nhn lt qua

- shriek ting la tht - to frown cau my (t v kh chu)
ID
- to recover one's baance ly [i thng - to soften tr nn du li/ mm i

B
bng - faint (adj) m h, xa xi

- handheld basket chic gi xch - to bump into each oher va vo nhau
166

71
I looked o u t of the window again a n d th e n back a t th e clock. Typi-
N
cal Helen! I th o ug h t to myself, w ondering w hat excuse sh e would try
NH
th is time. We h ad had th is arran g em ent for a year now. We took it in
tu rn s to drive to work, stopping along the way to pick th e other up. It
UY
saved petrol an d w as b etter for th e environm ent, w hich w as som ething
th a t Helen claim ed to care about, although I h ad seen h er em pty h er
.Q
a sh tra y o u t of the car window more th a n once. For me, th e m ain a d -
TP
vantage w as th e stre ss reduction. If I could avoid battling the city cen -
O
tre -traffic a few days a week, Id p u t up w ith any am o u n t af m eaning-

less gossip along th e way. A c a r h orn sounded an d I looked u p to see
Helen waving from h er c a r window an d pointing a t h er w atch a s if to
NG
say, H urry u p . I deliberately sa t down out of view and counted to
thirty before picking up my jack et an d bag a n d heading tow ards the
H
car, locking the front door behind me.
N
Sorry, V anessa! Helen called. J u s tin ju st, w ouldnt get ready for
school th is m orning . If Helens excuses werfe to be believed, then
TR
J u s tin w as the m ost difficult child im aginable. He also seem ed to be
th e u n iu ck iest, having suffered from half a dozen different m inor ill-
B
n esse s in th e last m onth alone. It w as strange th a t he never seemed to
00
have any problem s on m ornings w hen it w as my tu rn to drive.

10
Never m ind, 1 replied, fastening my se at belt. We should be okay.

+3
Helen set off an d we joined th e ru sh h o u r traffic.

P2
Did you read th e rep o rt? she ask ed me after a m inute a n d I nod-
ded. W hat did you th in k ?
C
I h a d been expecting the question, b u t still I h esitated for a m om ent.

I co u ld n t say w hat I really thought, w hich w as th a t Helen would be
A
H
lucky to keep h e r job b ecause the repo rt was very critical of h er de-
p artm en t. Helen glanced a t me.
-
I know , she said. Its bad, is n t it? I knew th a t Peterson w as o u t to

-L
get m e.
Carl P eterson w as th e a rea m anager. The repo rt w as the re su lt of a
N
m onth-long stud y of the.com pany an d we h ad all been ask e d to read it

TO
over th e w eekend. I u nd ersto o d why Helen d id n t get on w ith him . Both

were determ ined to get to the top in the.com pany. The difference was
NG
th a t w here Helen h ad no idea how to deal w ith oth er people a n d sp ent

h e r time finding ways of avoiding blam e, Carl w as a talented m anager.

Im su re th a ts not th e case, I said. H es j u s t doing his jo b .

ID
H elens lips tightened. Hmm, she said. After a m om ent, she co ntin-
ued. Look. I know Im not perfect, b u t its not my fault. I ...
B
J u s t a t th a t m om ent, a young child on a bicycle pulled o u t into the

road in front of us. I sh o uted "Look out! and Helen slam m ed on the
167
brakes and tu rn e d the wheel quickly. There w as a cru n ch of m etal as

we hit th e back of the car in front, which had stopped a t the traffic
lights. The boy glanced over h is shoulder before quickly pedalling off.
N
Steam began to rise from u n d er the bonnet. Helen hit the steering
wheel in anger an d frustration. You okay? I asked.
NH
Yes, fine, she replied, and then I saw h er expression change from
anger to shock and she let h er head fall forward onto the wheel. I fol-
UY
lowed where she had been looking and. saw w hat she h ad seen. The
.Q
driver of the other ca r had got o ut a n d w as stand in g by the car, looking
TP
at u s with a fixed expression. It was Carl Peterson.
O
1. W hen V anessa th in k s 'Typical Helen! she im plies t h a t _____

A. she feels sorry for Helen.
B. Helen is often late.
NG
c . Helen will be in a hurry.
H
D. they will be late for work.
2. V anessa m entions Helen emptying her a sh tray to s h o w _____
N
A. how m uch Helens views on the environm ent have changed.
TR
B: how th eir arrangem ent m akes a big difference to pollution.
c . th a t she th in k s their arrangem ent is a bad idea.
B
D. th a t she doub ts th a t Helen really cares abo.ut the environm ent.
00
10
3. V anessa feels th a t the driving a rra n g e m e n t _____

A. gives h er and Helen a good chance to chat.
+3
B. m akes getting to work m ore relaxing.

P2
c . c au ses arg um ents between her and Helen.

C
D. helps to reduce the am ou n t of traffic on the road.

A
4. V anessa w aits before leaving the house to join H e le n _____

H
A. to show th a t she w ont allow Helen to h u rry her.

B. to check th a t she h as everything she needs,
-
c . because she knows they have plenty of time.

-L
D. because she h a s to check th a t the door is-locked.

N
5. V anessa believes th a t J u s t i n _____

A. gets ill m ore th a n other children his age.
TO
B. is u sed as an excuse' by his m other.

_ c. is a difficult child to deal with.
NG
D. should learn to deal w ith his problem s him self.

6 . V anessa th in k s th a t C a rl _____
ID
A. is jealo u s of H elens success.

B. w an ts Helen to do his job for him.
B
c . is very good a t his job.

D. gives everyone too m u ch work to do.
168

7. In the final paragraph Helen realises th a t

A. she an d V anessa will be late for work.
N
B. she is lucky to be alive,
c . the boy is badly injured.
NH
D. she h a s m ade h er situation worse.
UY
GLOSSARY
.Q
- excuse ci c - area manager gim c khu vc
- to take it in turns to do sth thay - sb's lips tightened mi mm cht li/
TP
phin nhau im g mm cht mi li
O
- stress reduction s gim bt stress - to slam on the brakes p mnh chn

- gossip chuyn ngi l i mch, chuyn phanh
bun da l, chuyn tm pho - crunch ting ku lo xo
- car horn ci ci xe -t - to pedal off p xe i mt
NG
- deliberately (adv) mt cch c - steam hi nc
H
- jacket o khoc - bonnet np my -t
- to b critical of sb (adj) t ra ph - frustration cm gic tht vng/ chn
phn/ chi trch ai chng
N
- to be out to get sb quyt tm hi ai/
h uy tn ca ai
TR
B
72
00
C ongratulations, Angela! Youve won the car, youVe won the holi-
10
day for two in the C aribbean, an d now y ou re throug h to the final for a
+3
chance to win one million pounds!

P2
Angela w as su re th a t even the scream ing an d clapping of the a u d i-

C
ence w ouldnt be able to drown ou t the sound of h er beating heart. She

co uld n t believe it - the first tim e sh e d ever tak en p art in a gam e show
A
and here she w as in a potentially life-changing situation.

H
Stay calm , she th o ugh t to herself. Dont lose control now.*

-
Okay, Angela, said Bob, the presenter. Now, skill h a s got you this
-L
far but, a s you know, th e re s always a n elem ent of chance in the final
and th is week is no exception. Angela nodded. Shed never m issed an
N
episode a n d knew w hat every round entailed. So lets have a look at

how you could win one million pounds!
TO
A brightly-coloured board descended from the ceiling of the studio.

NG
On the board were three large doors. Angela, behind one of these
doors is one million pounds. Pick the right one, and youre going hom e

today a millionaire. Pick the wrong one and yo ure going hom e with...
ID
The audience d id n t h esitate to complete Bobs catch p h rase for him:

ju s t your b u s fare! Even Angela m outhed it, she.knew it so well.
B
T h ats right! And we-dont w ant th at, do we? So pick a door, Angela,
and m ay luck be w ith you! Angela th o u g h t carefully before answering.
169
The m iddle 'o.E'p.les,3bi_ .sh .said'.finally. The m iddle door! re-

peated Bob: ' ky Eiutêfore.we.-laaye'&.'io0k, Im gbing to open a door
th a t you were se-t-'tocjb.pe. 'fe.ojensed .the .door on th e far left,
N
revealing a pitre bus' ticket. The; :audience cheered. Angelas
h e a rt starte d beating faster^ _ '
NH
Now, Angela, said ;Bob: ' <<Were.''going: 't0'be nice to. you. Youve got
an o th er choice to-.naake. ;Yo. can eith er stick'w ith your original choice -
UY
th e m iddle':dorT.^Qr.you-can: change your-, decision atiid .opt-for the door
.Q
1 the right-hand.'side^.W-hats it to' be?- \
TP
As,a m ath em atician , Angela had cme cro ss the 'very sam e problem
at university. "Now, here she was, facing it in real life. She couldn't b e-
O

lieve her luck. S he knew w hat not m any people know, a fact th a t
seem ed to contradict all reason an d com m on sense. She did the m a th s
NG
in h e r head one m ore tim e ju s t to m ake su re she w a sn t m istaken. She
w a sn t. W hen s h e d picked the first door, she had a one in th re e chance
H
of being rig h t Looking a t it the o ther way round, she h a d a two in three
chance of being wrong. Those were not good odds. B ut one of th e wrong
N
doors h ad now been elim inated, so if she changed h er choice to the
TR
other possibility, she would double h er ch ances of being right, of w in-
ning the million. It seem ed im possible, b u t she knew it w as tru e. W hat
B
are you going to do Angela? Stick w ith your original choice or sw itch-to
00
the o ther door? Bob, Id like to switch, please.

10
Angelas going to switch!- Lets get th is right, Angela. You now be-
+3
lieve - you now hope - the million pounds is behind the rig h t-hand
P2
door. Is th a t correct?
The right-hand door, yes, said Angela weakly.
C
Not th e m iddle door?

A
No, not the m iddle door.

H
W hat are you going to do if it is actually behind the m iddle door?

asked Bob. Cry, probably! said Angela. The audience laughed, Im
-
going to open the door you chose, Angela - the rig h t-h an d door. Lets
-L
hope th ere isn t a b u s ticket behind it. Here we go!

N
Time seem ed to stan d still as Bob ou tstretch ed his arm an d began to

open the door. Angela had never known a feeling like this. S urrou nd ed
TO
by so m any people, sh e felt like the only person in th e universe. Here

w as th e m om ent of tru th , an d she w as not su re she could face the con-
NG
sequences, w hatever they were.

1. W hen she got th roug h to the final, Angela co uldn t believe t h a t ___
ID
A. h er h ea rt w as beating so loudly.
B. sh e d never taken p art in a gam e show before.
B
c . the audience were supporting her so m uch.

D. h er life m ight be abo ut to change completely.

2. The p resen ter tells Angela th at

A. she will need som e luck to win th e money.
B; he w ont m ake an exception for her.
c. h e r skill will increase the chances of her winning.
N
D. th ere is a sm all chance her skills will be useful.
NH
3. W hen the p resen ter d oesnt finish a sentence, its clear th a t
UY
A. the audience h as already been told w hat to say.
B. the p resenter is u n su re exactly w hat to say.
c. the p resen ter is well known for saying som ething.
.Q
TP
D. Angela had to complete a well-known saying.
4. W hen the p resen ter opens th e first door,
O
A. he knows th a t Angela h a s won the money.

B. he d oesnt know which door the money is behind,
c. he knows which door th e m oney is behind.
NG
D. he th in k s she h a s m ade a bad choice.
H
5. Angela couldnt believe h er luck t h a t _____
A. h er education would help h e r w ith this decision.
N
B. the p resen ter w as giving her an extra chance,
c. s h e d been in the sam e situation at university.
TR
D. she knew far m ore facts th a n m ost people.
B
6 . Angela was absolutely certain t h a t _____
00
A. the m oney w as behind the right-hand door.

10
B. she could increase h er chances of winning,

c. she h a d an im possible decision to m ake.
+3
D. she had to analyse the problem in a different way.

P2
7. As Bob began to open the right-hand door, Angela fe lt.

C
A. there were too m any people aro u n d her.

B. knowing the tru th was the m ost im portant thing,
A
c. worried by w hat the future would bring.

H
D. annoyed by Bob being so slow.

GLOSARY
-
-L
- dapping s/ ting v tay - to mouth sth ni ra iu g- to opt for

- to drown out a sound t i/ nhn sth chn l ci g
N
chm mt m thanh - mathematician nh ton hc

- life-changing situation tnh hung - reason l tr
TO
em li s i i - one in three chance mt phn ba c

- presenter ngi dn chng nh
may
NG
- element of chance nhn t may ri

- episode mt k pht sng, mt chng/ - the other way round theo hng

hi/ tp (truyn/ phim) ngc li, o i

- to entaii sth ko theo/ dn a n - odds t l t cc
ID
iu g - to eliminate loi tr
- catch phrase khu hiu, cu ni ca - to outstretch one's arm vn cnh
B
ming, cu ni quen thuc tay ra
171
73 .. ; ; .
Things^werent Wolag:-t-.qte;;;Ls^l::had- ;ipete<. Hed been
in London foiv six: m onth's now arid:, all :hs. early optim ism h a d alm ost
N
disappeared: None of th: galleries were interested in his paintings and
NH
he w as tired of carrying the sam e p ictures from one b uy er to th e next.
The respon se w as always the sam e: a shake of the head, som e com -
UY
m ent ab o ut p o rtra its not being fashionable th ese days an d a suggestion
to try som ewhere else, usually som ewhere he h ad already tried. He w as
.Q
beginning to lose hope an d w as thinking of going back hom e. It would
TP
be difficult, an d he would have to face his p are n ts saying I told you
O
so, b u t at least he could find a steady job.

He was sitting on a bench in a p ark one day considering th is w hen
he noticed a new spaper beside him . He glanced a t it an d th e word a r t-
NG
ist caught his eye. He picked the paper u p and read m ore closely. It
H
w as a job advertisem ent. An advertising com pany w as looking for a
portrait artist to work on a new advertising cam paign. Lazio ripped the
N
advertisem ent out of the paper and started to look for a public phone.
I wont be able to choose my sub jects, Lazio thought to him self, b u t
TR
a t least 111 be able to pay the rent, an d th a ts a bit m ore im p o rtan t right
now. He spotted a phone, p u t a few coins in an d dialled. After a few
B
00
m om ents, a female voice answ ered. Lazio explained who he w as and

10
th a t he w as applying for the job; They arranged for him to go to their

office the next day with some of his work. He w ent hom e excited and
+3
nervous.
P2
T h at night, h e chose th ree paintings from th e dozens in h is flat th a t

C
he tho ught show ed w hat he w as capable of. He selected a self-portrait

he h ad done a few years before; he th oug ht it showed a thoughtful side
A
to his work. He also chose a p ortrait of an old m an th a t he h ad m et in a

H
cafe. It w as simple b u t clear, an d Lazio thoug ht th a t m aybe th a t w as

the style they would w ant for an advertising campaign. The th ird one
-
was a painting of h is m other. It had always seem ed to him th a t th a t

-L
picture ca ptured a lot of feeling th a t w as difficult to p u t into words. A

N
lot of people th o u g h t it w as the best p ortrait he h ad ever done, an d

Lazio knew th a t if anythin g w as going to im press them , th a t painting
TO
would.
NG
The next m orning, he woke early an d got ready. He rolled th e pic-

tu res up, placed them in a large tube so th a t they w ouldnt get d am -

aged a n d set off towards the b u s stop. There w as a lot of traffic, b u t he

arrived on time. W hen he got to the office, he saw th a t an o th er four
ID
people were waiting, each with a large tube of paintings ju s t like his.
B
The secretary asked him to take a seat.
172

Lazio sa t and waited for his nam e to be called. He knew th a t a lot

depended on the next half an h ou r or so. With a job, he could begin to
sort out his life, m aybe doing his a rt in his spare time. He knew he
N
would never com pletely give up on his dream , b u t he h ad also come to
NH
realise th a t he had to live in the real world, an d talent d o esn t pay bills.
W ithout a job, he w ouldnt survive the m onth; he had ju s t about
UY
enough for the ticket hom e. The secretary picked u p the phone and had
a short, quiet conversation. She turned to Lazio.
.Q
You can go in now, she said, smiling.
TP
O
1. W hen Lazio first arrives in London, h e _____

A. im mediately loses his job.
B. is confident of success.
NG
c. d o esn t expect to stay for six m onths.
D. know s th a t he will have to work hard.
H
2. The people a t the a rt galleries Lazio visits ______
N
. A. are very im pressed by his work.
B. often give him helpful advice.
TR
c . ask him to come back with different paintings.
B
D. tell him th a t his work is old-fashioned.
00
3. It seem s th a t Lazio's p a r e n ts _____

10
A. disapprove of his choice of career.

+3
B. forced Lazio into becoming an artist,

P2
c . will be happy to welcome him home.

D. can help him to achieve his am bitions.
C
4. Lazio th ink s the job w ill _____

A
A. give him more artistic freedom.

H
B. provide him with a salary. '

c . m ean th a t he h a s to move house.
-
D. stop him from studying.

-L
5. Lazio chooses to take the portrait of h is m other b e c a u s e _____

N
A. it w as the third one he thoug ht of.

TO
B. it w as used in an advertisem ent before,

c . the people a t the com pany ask to see it.
NG
D. it expresses em otion well.

6 . At the office, Lazio realises t h a t _____

A. his paintings are the sam e as everyone elses.
ID
B. he is n t the only person interested in the job.

B
c. he should have chosen different paintings.

D. he h a s come a t the wrong time.
173

7.' O ne-of^he-things Lazlps ^ p 'e rie n c e h a s t a u g h t . _____

..A. h e n eeds money to .live.. .. . . :
B. :a rt is m ore im p ortant th a n money.
N
G. following'your dream is a w aste of time.
D. he has-n o artistic talent.
NH
GLOSSARY
UY
- Optimism s ic quan - nervous (adj) hi hp
- advertising company cng tiqung - self-portrait bc chn dungt ha
.Q
co - to roll sth up cun trn ci g li
TP
- advertising campaign chin dch - tube ci ng
qung co - to sort sth out chnh n, thu xp li
O
- to rip x rch cho ngn np

- to spot pht hin - artistic (adj) thuc ngh thut, c nng
- to dial quay s gi in thoi khiu ngh thut
NG
H
74
N
Sean h a d never felt so nervous before in his life. S itting alone o u t-
side th e closed door, he suddenly realised h e w as physically shaking.
TR
This is rid iculou s, he th o u g h t to himself. Pull yourself together.
Youve got to stay calm .
B
00
This w as easier said th a n done, an d w hen a m iddle-aged w om an in

10
a sm art b u sin e ss su it opened the door an d asked, S ean P erkins?,

there w as a definite trem or of fear a n d w eakness in his voice as he a n -
+3
swered th a t th a t w as indeed him.

P2
Hello, I'm Katie S uth erland . Do come in.

C
Sean w as invited into a com fortable an d sp acious office. The w alk

from the door to the chair he w as to sit on seem ed to la st a lifetime,
A
H
an d Sean w as terrified w ith each step th a t h e d suddenly trip or stu m -

ble. How could som ething so sim ple -as walking a n d sitting down be so
-
difficult?
-L
As th e interview progressed, however, S ean slowly began to relax. If

h e d ha d tim e to th in k ab o u t it, he would have realised h e w as an sw er-
N
ing th e qu estion s p u t to him quite well. He w as giving clear, full a n -

TO
sw ers w ithout saying too m uch or anything irrelevant. Then cam e a

question w hich, a t first, he w as u n ce rtain how to answ er.
NG
So, tell me, why do you w ant to leave your c u rre n t job?

S ean hesitated. Should he tell h er the tru th ? This w as, of course,

th a t he d id n t feel respected. His boss, Air Dominguez, took him for
ID
granted, overworked him , was often rude, patron ising an d u n p le a sa n t

B
and m ade him dread going in to work each m orning. S ean decided a
more positive respo n se w as called for.
174

Well, he said, Ive been w ith Brookes B rothers for over four years
now, and altho ug h I've learned a lot there, an d Im very grateful for the
opportu nities they Ve given me, I th in k its tim e for so m e new ch al-
N
lenges, a n d th is seem s th e ideal com pany to provide them . From w hat
NH
IVe seen, Fisher & F isher is a n extremely dynam ic com pany, an d Id
* like to be a p a rt of th a t. I really th in k I could help co n tribu te to the
UY
com panys future su cc ess.
S ean w as pleased w ith h is answ er an d knew h e d been right no t to
.Q
criticise his c u rre n t employer. From Katie S u th e rlan d s expression, it
TP
seem ed she w as satisfied with h is answ er too. Her next question
O
prom pted Sean to smile. W hat would you say w ere'your biggest w eak-

n esses, S ean ?
Hed th o u g h t he m ight be asked this, and so h a d already rehearsed
NG
an answ er. He d id n t w ant it to sound rehearsed, though, so he p u r-
H
posefully h esitated slightly before answ ering. T h ats a tricky question,
isn t it? h e said. In fact, I think we both know its a bit of a triek q u es-
N
tion too, b ecause if I give a list of serious w eaknesses, you w ont th in k
Pm suitable for the job, an d if I say I h avent got any, y o u ll th in k Im
TR
arro g an t a n d over-confident. So, in answ er to your question, Id have to
say th a t one of my biggest w eaknesses is not being able to talk ab o ut
B
00
m yself in too negative a light, even w hen I know Im n o t perfect. For any
10
o th er w eak nesses Ifve got, you m ight be b etter off asking my cu rre n t
em ployer, Mr Dom inguez.
+3
His an sw er w as a risk, b u t he knew th a t if he said it in a fairly light-

P2
h earted m an ner, h e could probably get away with it. From Katies re -
C
sponse, it w as clear th a t he had. Yes, she said, it is a bit of a silly

q u e s tio n , is n 't it? Y o ud be a m a z e d w h a t so m e p eo p le s a y w h e n I a s k it,
A
though. It can tell me a lot. Im glad you d id n t fall into th a t trap .

H
This w as th e first clearly positive com m ent th a t Katie h ad m ade on

h is interview so far, a n d filled Sean both w ith joy a n d hope. P erhap s he
-
really was in with a cha n ce of getting this job. P erhaps he w ould be

-L
able to p u t Mr Dom inguez an d Brookes B rothers behind him once and

N
for all.
TO
1. W aitingoutside for th e interview, Sean realises t h a t _____

A. his sh aking m u st look totally ridiculous.
NG
B. staying calm is n o t difficult to do.

c . he h a s to tak e control of his em otions.

. its the first time h e s ever been nervous.
ID
2. W hen S ean en te rs the office, h e _____

B
A. w ishes th e ch air h e h a s to sit on is n ea rer the door.

B. tak es too long to walk from the door to the chair.
175

c . alm ost trip s over the chair he is supposed to sit on.

D. tries to get to the ch air w ithout doing anything foplish.
3. The answ ers Sean gives to the questions h e is a s k e d _____
N
A. do not contain u n n ecessary inform ation.
B. show he know s he is doing quite well,
NH
c . are a little longer th a n they should be.
D. show he is often u n su re w hat to say.
UY
4. S e a n feels t h a t th e q u e s tio n a b o u t w h y h e w a n ts to lea v e h is CUIV
.Q
ren t job ______
TP
A. deserves a totally truth fu l answer.
B. should n ot be answ ered in a negative way.
O
c . w as not ask ed in a respectful way.

D. is a n im possible question to answer.
NG
5. S ean s answ er to the question ab o u t why he w a nts to leave h is c u r-
re n t job implies th a t .
H
A. he is not a t all happy with th e way he is treated a t Brookes
Brothers.
N
B. Fisher & Fisher will be m ore successful in the fu ture th a n
Brookes Brothers. TR
c . both he an d Fisher & F isher could benefit from him joining the
B
company.
00
D. the work a t Fisher & Fisher will be m uch m ore difficult th a n his
10
cu rre n t work.
+3
6 . Sean is careful to hide from Katie S uth erland the fact th a t h e _____
P2
A. h a s practised giving a n answer.

C
B. h a s a lot of serious w eaknesses.

c . th in k s he doesnt have any w eaknesses.
A
D. knows she is trying to trick him.

H
7. Katie suggests th a t she ask s the silly question b e c a u s e _____

-
A. sh e s always am azed by the answ ers she gets.

-L
B. she w an ts the people answ ering to feel trapped,

c . people usually give long answ ers to th a t question.
N
D. the answ ers people give can reveal things ab o u t them .

TO
GLOSSARY
NG
- to pull oneself together t ra binh - to rehearse din tp, tp trc

tnh, trn tnh - purposefully (av) c tnh, c

- business suit b ng phc cng s - to hesitate do d, chn ch, lng l

- tremor of fear s run ry v s - a tricky question mt cu hi [t lo
ID
- spacious (adj) rng mnh mng - a trick question mt cu hi nh by

B
- to trip bc ht chn - arrogant (adj) kiu ngo

- to stumble i lo o, vp t. - over-confident (adj) qu t tin

- to progress din bin, tin hnh - to be better off doing sth nn lm g

- irrelevant (adj) khng thch hp th tt hn
- to take sb for granted xem thng ai - risk s liu lnh
- to overwork sb bt ai lm vic qu sc - light-hearted (adj) vi v ung ung,
N
- patronising (adj) ra v b trn/ k c th thi
- dynamic (dj) nang ng - trap ci by
NH
- to criticise ch trch - to deserve sth xng ng vi ci g
- to prompt sb to do sth thc gic ai - to trick la phnh
UY
lm g
.Q
75
TP
The ticket inspector hand ed the ticket back to D ora w ith a nod of his
O
head an d con tinued on his way down the train. He w as a handsom e

young m an, D ora tho ught, an d he rem inded h er a little of h e r h u sb a n d
w hen he h a d been the sam e age. She smiled a little a t the th o u gh t as
NG
she w atched the countryside roll p ast the window of the train. She was
H
now eighty-four an d although she regularly forgot things th a t other
people found so easy to rem em ber, like where she h ad p u t h er glasses,
N
th a t M arch day w hen she and Ralph had got m arried stood out clearly
in h er mind. They h a d n t known each other long, an d relatives had
TR
tried to advise Dora against it, b u t they h ad both known th a t it w as the
B
right thin g to do. They quickly found a house to buy an d the wedding
00
w as organised in a couple of days. Dora w as grateful for the forty happy

10
years, they h ad had together.

+3
The sou nd of som eone sniffing brought D oras atten tion back to her
surroundings. Sitting opposite h er in the carriage w as a w om an, who
P2
Dora estim ated to be in h er early thirties. She looked u p at Dora, who

C
realised th a t the w om an would welcome conversation. Dora pulled a

tissu e from h er bag an d passed it over.
A
H
W hats h is nam e? D ora asked with a friendly smile. The wom an

wiped h er eyes w ith th e tissue.
-
Michael. Hes ju s t got a new job ... the w om an began, th en laughed

-L
a little. How did you know ?

N
I w a sn t always old, you know, Dora said and.looked m ore closely

at the wom an. She w as sm artly dressed, although h e r clothes w eren't
TO
new. Clearly she h ad h a d money in the p a st b u t now couldnt afford

luxuries. Dora noticed th a t she had brought h er own sandw iches on
NG
the journey, ra th e r th a n spend money on the train. She h a d the air of

som eone who is educated b u t who h as never h a d m u ch lu ck at tu rn in g

th a t education into money. Dora knew w hat it w as like to keep up a p -
ID
pearances on a sm all income and h er h ea rt w ent out to h e r fellow trav-

B
eller.
Tell m e ab o u t it, she said. For the next half an hour, the wom an,
177

whose-.name,jtprt;^fe4je-.Sanaa,- told h er story-: D ora.listened. The

details of .th -latonpscape^nDr "ag&cfc'-Sandra -m entioned people
w ithout 'explaimrig -it'w asn't Im portant.
; S a n d ra ^^r^ cfeo k m g ^ ^ ^so liitib ias^ ^ frcî^D o ra. T he nly th in g th a t
N
; m attered w as;th a t she gave- sandra" a shoulder to cry o n a iid a sym pa-
NH
thetic ear. She nodded in- .all the .right places an d by th e tim e the train
pulled in at' the next;.; station, S andra seem ed a lo t'h a p p ier. S an d ra
UY
looked u p an d cried, Oh, th is is my stop!" She grabbed h e r bags,
th anked Dora for listening and hu rried off the train.
.Q
Dora sa t back an d closed her eyes. A feeling of sad n ess cam e over
TP
her for a m om ent. Listening to S andra talk h ad been w hat sh e im ag-
O
ined being a grandm oth er w as like. It would have been nice to have h ad

children an d w atch their children grow up. still, it w a sn t to be an d she
and Ralph h ad sp en t m any happy years travelling the world. She
NG
opened h er eyes "and looked out onto the platform a s the train pulled
H
away. S an d ra w as looking up a t the train window an d w aving-at her.
Dora waved back and smiled, w atching over h er shoulder as th e train
N
station got sm aller and sm aller. She tu rn ed back to see a teenage girl
standing beside h er seat. She had a su itcase in one h an d an d the
TR
m ake-up arou n d her eyes had ru n as if she had been crying. She
looked exhausted.
B
00
Excuse m e, she said in a quiet voice. Is anyone sitting here? She

10
pointed to th e seat w here a n d ra h ad been sitting.

+3
No, my dear. Sit dow n, said Dora, and began to reach into h er bag
for a tissue. Its going to be one of those days, she th o u g h t to herself.
P2
C
1. D ora h a s problem s rem em bering _____

A. how long she w as m arried to Ralph.
A
B. simple, everyday things.

H
c . w here h e r h u sb a n d had gone.

D. w hat h er wedding day w as like.
-
-L
2. Before getting m arried, D ora and h er h u s b a n d _____

A. waited un til they knew each other well.
N
B. asked their families for advice.

TO
c . arranged everything very carefully,

D. m ade su re they h ad som ew here to live.
NG
3. Dora th in k s the young w o m a n _____

A. would like to chat.

B. w an ts to a sk her for a tissue.
ID
c . looks younger th a n she really is.

B
D. is looking a t h er in a strange way.

4. The young w om an seem s t o _____

A. be poorer th a n she once was.
N
B. like only hom e-m ade food,
c. have problem s finding a job.
NH
D. be careless about h er clothes.
UY
5. While S an d ra talks ab o u t h er life, D o ra _____
A. gives h er some useful advice.
.Q
B. tries to focus on the im portant details,
TP
c. ask s h er to explain things more clearly.
D. ac ts a s if she u n d ersta n d s everything.
O

6 . W hen S an dra leaves, Dora feels -unhappy for a m om ent because she
NG
A. m isses her h u sband .
H
B. never h ad children,
c . feels sorry for Sandra.
N
D. d oesnt see h er grandchildren often.
TR
7. Dora th in k s its going to be one of those days because _
A. she would prefer the gir to.sit somewhere else.
B
B. she ca n t find the tissues in h er bag.
00
c . the girl seem s to have the sam e problem s as Sandra.

10
D. the girl doesnt realise th a t Dora is exhausted.

+3
GLOSARY
P2
- ticket inspector ngi sot v - luxuries nhng mn xa xi

C
- to sniff ht vo, st st, tht tht - to keep up appearances c gi b

- surroundings khung cnh chung ngoi tm tt khi mt th din
A
quanh (d t tin)
H
- carriage toa xe la - one's heart goes out to sb thng

-tissu e khn giy xt ai
-
- to be smartly dressed an mc [ch s - to grab chp ly, nm cht

-L
76
N
I w ant everyone to be absolutely clear how seriously Im taking

TO
th is, said Mrs Lowry. The twelve children stared a t h er silently an d in -

tently, their frightened expressions dem onstrating th a t they did indeed
NG
recognise th e gravity of the situation.

We will no t tolerate stealing in this school. Its quite simple. Who-

ever h a s tak en J u lie s p u rse m u st retu rn it to m e during the lunch
ID
break. If you do th at, we w ont say anything more ab o u t it. I s h a n t

B
p u n ish you, an d I w on't tell the head teacher or your parents. B ut if

Ju lie s p u rse h a s n t been retu rn ed by the end of lunch, then Im afraid
111 have no choice b u t to go to Mr Jen k in s, and you know w hat h ell do.
179
' Theres SfchoV;plic ..for situ ation s Like this and th e res no getting out
: of it. Thaits rig h t'- h e ll: bring.the poHce.ifi. .TlêyTi com e .this afternoon,
an d th ey ll interview yo all. Thev.il; find o ut who took the p urse, Im
N
sure of. it, wKqevecfit;s wUl beim'. very,. ,yery^ seripus -trouble. So,
please; for you r own' goody if you took J u lie s;p u rse , bring it to m e d u r-
NH
ing the lu nch break.. Ill be in here, on. my own, the whole tim e. Does
everyone u n d ersta n d ?
UY
Yes, Mrs Lowry, said th e group of nine-year-olds in chorus.
Lunch break cam e and w ent w ith no one h an d in g in the p u rse to
.Q
Mrs Lowry.
TP
T h is is a great sh am e, said Mrs Lowry sadly. Before I go a n d talk
O
to Mr Jen k in s, Im ju s t going to ask you, Julie, one m ore time: are you

absolutely one hu n d red p er cent sure you brought your p u rse to school
this m orning?
NG
Yes, Mrs Lowry.
H
And when did you last see it?
D uring the break, at eleven o clock. J u s t a s I told you. I took o u t a
N
pound coin to go an d buy a can of Coke: W hen I cam e back w ith the
change, it had gone.
TR
And Elizabeth, you saw Ju lie take the pound coin o u t of h e r pu rse,
B
did you? Yes, Mrs Lowry, said the girl sitting next to Julie. J u lie s
00
telling the tru th . We w ent to the d rinks m achine together an d w hen we

10
cam e back, J u lie s p u rse wasn't, in h er bag anym ore. T h a ts w hen we

+3
cam e to find you.

P2
Ill a sk you all one m ore time. Does anyone know an y th in g ab o u t

th e w h ereabouts of J u lie s p u rse? There w as absolute silence in the
C
classroom . Then I shall go and get Mr Je n k in s now.

A
Mrs Lowry h ad already opened the door a n d stepped into th e corri-

H
dor w hen a voice shouted: Mrs Lowry!

She im m ediately tu rn ed an d cam e back into the room. W hat is it?
-
she asked.
-L
David, sitting right at the back of the class, w as pointing excitedly a t

N
the radiato r on th e wall next to him. Look, Mrs Lowry! B ehind the r a -
diator! I th in k it's Ju lie s purse!
TO
There did seem to be som ething colourful behind the radiator. Mrs
NG
Lowry ra n to the wall, bent down and picked it up. Is th is your p urse,
Ju lie ? Yes! said Julie.

Rem ind me how m uch w as in it. A five-pound note.

ID
Mrs Lowry opened th e purse. T hank goodness for t h a t s h e said.

Ju lie, here you are. David, Id like to talk to you outside, please. The
B
re st of you ju s t sit quietly until I re tu rn .
180

"~ TVirs~T0wry'ancf X)aviastoocf silently outside the rT~Sh~looked"at

him sadly. Im waiting, David, she said eventually. W hat for, Mrs
Lowry? For an-explanation.
N
W hat do you m ean? Tears were already beginning to well u p in his
NH
eyes.
Im not stupid, David. Dont think I am. I w ant you to tell me ex-
UY
actly w hat you did an d why you did it. If you do th a t, it 11 go no further,
.Q
I prom ise.
TP
I d id n t do anything! I saw the purse an d I called you in.
I d o nt thin k y ou r p aren ts are going to believe th a t,'a re they? t)o
O

you w ant them to know youre a thief?
Im not a thief! Im not! He wiped his eyes w ith his sleeve. "How can
NG
I m ake you believe m e?
H
1. The children s faces showed th a t th e y _____
A. were going to rem ain silent for a long time.
N
B. were scared of having things stolen.
TR
c . knew exactly w hat Mrs Lowry would do.
D. were aw are how serious the theft was.
B
00
2. Mrs Lowry said th at, if the pu rse w asn't return ed , she would have
10
t o ____ _
A. p u n ish all of the children.
+3
B. tell their parents.

P2
c . tell the head teacher.

C
D. inform the police.

A
3. Mrs Lowry w as confident t h a t _____

H
A. the purse would be return ed during the lun ch break.

B. she knew who h ad taken J u lie s purse.
-
c . the police would be able to solve the crime.

-L
D. the thief w as really a good person.

N
4. After lunch, Mrs Lowry w anted to m ake certain t h a t _____ ;

A. J u lie s p u rse h ad been stolen.
TO
B. J u lie s p u rse w as still missing.

c . E lizabeth h a d n t taken the purse.
NG
D. J u lie s p u rse did have money in it.

5. Mrs Lowry showed she w as relieved t h a t _____

ID
A. it w as actually J u lie s purse.

B. J u lie s money w as still, in the purse,
B
c . it w as David who h ad found the purse.

D. Julie h a d n 't had more money in the purse.
181
6 . In the corridor with; Dayidy'Mrs Lowry

asked'-David
A. ask xln -whv'-he
ed Dvid to explain was
w hV he was.crying.
B. realised how sad he w as ab o u t w hat h a d happened.
c. felt very Sony th a t David h ad to experience this. V
N
D. w as hoping th a t David w ould confess to the crime.
NH
7. M rs Lowry m ade it clear to David th a t
UY
A. sh e d definitely tell his p aren ts he w as a thief.
B. she knew why he had stolen Ju lie s p urse,
.Q
c. she would n ot tell anyone if he confessed.
TP
D. his crying would not change anything.
O
GLOSSARY

- gravity 1) trng [c 2) s trm trng/ - change tin thi [i
NG
nghim trng - drinks machine my bn thc ung
- to tolerate chap nhn, dung th - whereabouts tung tch, nhng ni ai
H
- purse v nh cm tay gh qua
- iunch break gi ngh n trite - corridor hnh ang
- head teach er ng hiu trng - excitediy (adv) vi v phn khch, si
N
- policy chnh sch ni
- to say in chorus cng nhau ni, ni - radiator my si
ng thanh
TR
- tears well up n sb's eyes ai ang
- shame s xu h, iu ng tic
B
a nc mt
00
- a pound coin ng tin mnh gl 1 - sleeve tay o

bng Anh - to confess to the crime th nhn
10
- a can of Coke mt lon Coca-Cola phm ti

+3
P2
77
C
The first time I saw Ben w as w hen his family moved in next door. It
w as a hot, su nn y day an d wed heard th a t the new neighbours were a r-
A
riving th a t day. O ur old neighbours, the Sharpes, h ad moved out a

H
couple of m onths before and, to be honest, we h ad not been sorry to

see them go. They were an argum entative couple and once a m onth
-
there would be one or other of them a t the door, going on ab o u t noise,

-L
or our cat, or w here Dad parked his car. We were all hoping th a t w ho-
N
ever moved in next w ould m ake a bit m ore of an effort to get on.
T hat m orning, Mum and Dad were both busy on various projects of
TO
th eir own. W ith Mum, it was her ongoing attem p t to tu rn herself into
her idea of a traditional housewife, a t least for a weekend. She w as go-
NG
ing through a baking phase so she spent h o u rs in the kitchen m aking

biscuits th a t were either too h ard or too sweet for even my young taste.
She h ad a successful career as a lawyer so she didnt take h er dom estic
ID
failure too badly. Dad w as decorating one of the bedroom s. I w as cy-

B
cling u p and down the street, looking for the removal van every tim e I
reached the co m er and tu rn ed back. I w anted to be th e first to see it so
182

th a t I could th en be the one to d ash inside w ith th e news. Finally, a

large green van w ith the words B axters Removals in gold lettering on
N
the side tu rn e d into ou r street, followed by a blue car. I c a n t say th a t
th a t w as th e m om ent w hen I first saw Ben, although I suppose I regis-
NH
tered th a t there were people in the car. I was too b usy dropping my bi-
cycle by the side of the road and ru n n in g into th e house shouting,
UY
T h ey re here! Theyre here!
.Q
Mum wiped her h an d s on a towel an d said, Yes, Katy. Let them set-
TP
tle in, though. W ell give them a few h o u rs before we s ta rt bothering
them , shall we? I felt disappointed th a t h er reaction w a sn t m ore like
O
my own. I ra n back outside an d down ou r garden p ath to the front

gate. I stood on the gate, watching. By this time, the removal van an d
the car had both pulled up next door and two large w orkm en h ad be-
NG
gun to open u p the back of the V ein. Inside were neatly packed item s of
H
furniture. The family had also got out of th e car and were looking up a t
the house a s if theyd never seen it before, although Dad said h e d seen
N
them looking round w hen they were thinking of buying it. The m an was
tall and dark-skinned, while the w om an w as very beautiful an d looked
TR
younger th a n my own m um . They were clearly .enjoying the m om ent of
B
arriving a t a new place. A boy of about my own age stood between
00
them , looking a t me. He d id n t smile.

10
They unlocked the door and w ent inside, the w orkm en following with
+3
the first of th eir belongings. I w atched for a while a s they cam e back
and forth w ith boxes, banging them down noisily, occasionally pointing
P2
to tell each oth er where to p u t things. I had an odd feeling of being

C
w atched and som ething m ade me look up. At one of the windows stood
the boy, looking down a t me. I smiled and he disappeared into the
A
room. I had h ad su ch high hopes, and now it seem ed th a t it w as going

H
to take a lot of h ard work to m ake friends. I sighed an d w atched the

w orkm en a little longer. J u s t a s I w as thinking of going inside to see
-
how Dad w as getting on, I heard a sm all voice behind me.

-L
Im Ben. Hello.
N
I tu rn ed to see the boy standing behind me.

TO
1. According to the writer, the S h a rp e s_____

NG
A. were very noisy neighbours.

B. often found things to com plain about.

c. were sad to leave the street.

ID
D. cam e ro u nd w ith helpful advice.

B
2. The w riter says her m o th e r_____

A. is annoved th a t she h a s to work so m uch.
B. d o esn t know w h at h e r child likes to eat.
183
c . tries to do som ething she is n t very good at.

D: th in k s th a t m ore wom en should have careers.
3. Judging from th e text, the word d a sh in p arag raph 2 probably
N
m ean s '
NH
A. ru n very quickly.
B. w rite som ething down,
UY
c . m ake u p a story.
D. becom e excited.
.Q
4. W hen the van finally arrives, the w rite r _____
TP
A. is eager to tell her family w hat is happening.
O
B. tries .to follow'it on her bicycle,

c. sees Ben for th e first time.
D. falls over an d h u rts herself.
NG
5. The w riters m o th e r _____
H
A. decides to go to m eet the new neighbours.
B. feels a s excited a s th e w riter does.
N
c . tells h er to go an d help title neighbours move in.
TR
D. suggests th a t she w aits before going to introduce herself.
6 . The family sta n d outside the house looking a t it b e c a u s e ___
B
00
A. they are not su re theyre a t the. right house.

B. they are happy to be moving into a new house,
10
c . it's the first tim e they have seen it.

+3
. D. they are trying to decide w hether to buy it or not.

P2
7. The w riter looks u p to see the boy a t the window b e c a u s e ___

C
A. she h ears a loud noise.

B. the w orkm en p oint in th a t direction.
A
. c . she h ea rs a voice from, th a t direction.

H
D. she feels someone is looking a t her.

-
GLOSSARY
-L
- argumentative (adj) (ngi) c tnh - to register ghi nhn, nhn thy

N
hay tranh ci, hay gy g - to settle in n nh sau khi n ni

- to go on about ni en, li nhi v, ca mi
TO
cm v - to puii up (xe) li, dng li

- ongoing (adj) ang tin trin - to be neatly packed c gi ghm
NG
- to go through a phase ang tri qua gn gng

giai on - belongings ti sn/ d c c nhn

- baking s lm bnh - back and forth (adv) ti lui, qua [i

- removal van xe ca dch v dn nh - to bang sth down th phch ci gi
ID
- to dash phng chy tht nhanh xung

- lettering dng ch ghi - to sigh th di
B
184

78
Although Ju lie had been with Mrs W orthington ju s t three days, she
N
h ad already learnt th a t her boss w as the kind of person one h ad to be
NH
careful with. Her changes of mood could be rapid, she definitely did not
tolerate failure, laziness or poor work an d she firmly believed th a t eve-
UY
ryones highest priority should be their work for the com pany. Ju lie
w as enjoying h e r job a s Mrs W orthingtons personal secretary, b u t she
.Q
knew th a t today would be tough.
TP
For several days, Ju lie had been experiencing toothache. At first, it
O
w as merely a m inor annoyance th a t could be ignored. Itll probably go

away by itself, Ju lie told herself. If not, 111 see the d entist w hen Im
m ore settled here a t work. Its not that-u rg ent.
NG
It d id n t disappear, however, and after an extremely uncom fortable
H
night, Julie awoke to severe dental pain. T hats ju s t w hat I need, she
said to herself. Maybe I can get a d en tists appointm ent for this eve-
N
ning, after w ork.
. Ju lie called the dentist's. Im afraid the only tim e th e dentist has
TR
available today is a t 3.30 pm this afternoon, said th e receptionist.
B
Julie h ad to m ake an im m ediate decision. Ill take it, she said.
00
The question was, how was Mrs W orthington going to react? Would
10
she say, Of course you can leave early, Julie. In fact, leave a t lunchtim e
+3
and dont come back until you're completely better,? Julie knew a far
P2
more likely response would be som ething along the lines of: Well, that
really is m ost inconvenient. Couldnt you have arranged to see the den-
C
tist in your own time? You have to think about the com pany as well, you
know. We c a n t all take time off whenever we feel like it. Wed never get
A
any work done if we all spent the day running around seeing doctors and
H
dentists. C an't you change the time of your appointm ent?

-
The pain w as increasing in intensity, though, and Julie knew she

-L
h ad to see a d en tist today. If the only solution w as to leave work early

an d face Mrs W orthingtons displeasure, th en so be it.
N
H eres your coffee, Mrs W orthington, said Julie, as she went into
TO
h er b o sss office for the first time th a t morning.

T hank you, Ju lie, said Mrs W orthington, w ithout looking up.
NG
Dont forget I need those reports typed up by three oclock at the lat-

est. Ive got a m eeting with Mr Price this afternoon. Yes, Mrs Wor-
thington. IVe nearly finished them . Uram ... Sorry, Mrs W orthington,
ID
b u t I wonder if I could ask you som ething. Its quite im portant.

B
W hat is it, Ju lie? She looked up from the docum ents sh e d been
studying, an d w ithout giving Julie a chance to reply, said: Oh my
185
goodness! What^s.;happ.ene'd:ito yo u r'face? Its all swollen on one side.

Are you all r i g h ^ . _ I"
Ive got rely;bd -tootftaetteV-M^ I. called the den tist
N
an d trid to m&;aii: a p p o m ti^ b u t the.only tim e he
can see me- is a t;h a lf p a st -th ree; an d I. know::th a t w ould m ean leaving
NH
.early- b u t I :d0n 1 Mriow. w hat else .....
StopJ* said .Mrs W orthington. I quite u n d ersta n d . T hese things
UY
have to be-dealt'w ith, or they only get worse, d o nt they? Get it sorted
.Q
but, a s quickly as possible.
TP
' T hank you, M rs W orthington.
O
Do you th in k you can w ork this m orning, Ju lie? If you c a n t, tell me

and w ell find a solution. If you can, ju s t finish those reports a s quickly
as you can an d th en go home. Have you taken anything for it, by th e
NG
way?
No, I h av ent. I th in k Vd better wait as the d en tist will probably have
H
to give me an an aesthetic and you have to be a bit careful, d o n t you?
But, yes. I can definitely stay and finish the reports. Its not th a t b ad .
N
Well, it looks bad enough. I do appreciate it, Julie. I really do.
TR
As Ju lie re tu rn ed to h er desk, she w ondered if she h a d n t m isjudged
B
Mrs W orthington. I couldnt have asked for a m ore u n d ersta n d in g per-
00
son to work for - this m orning, at least, she said to herself, an d

10
smiled, despite the pain.

+3
1. Julie know s th a t Mrs W orthington _____

P2
A. th in ks all of h e r staff are lazy and bad a t th eir work.

C
B. is only in a good mood for a few m in utes each day.

c . th in k s th a t Ju lie is not hard-w orking enough.
A
D. w ants Julie to p u t her work before everything else.

H
2. W hen Ju lie says T h ats ju s t w hat I need (paragraph 3), s h e _____

-
A. m eans the opposite of w hat she says.

-L
B. is being optim istic ab o u t the situation.

c . is trying to pretend she is okay.
N
D. suggests she h a s found a solution.

TO
3. Julie expects Mrs W orthington to respond b y _____

A. suggesting Ju lie sees a doctor instead.
NG
B. allowing Ju lie to leave work early,

c . criticising Ju lie for being selfish.

D. telling Ju lie to stop complaining.
ID
4. Mrs W orthington d o esn t look at Julie because she is b u s y _____

B
A. drinking a cup of coffee.
186

B. talking to Mr Price,
c. typing som e reports.
D. looking a t som e docum ents.
N
5. Mrs W orthington in terru p ts Ju lie to _____
NH
A. give h er perm ission to see the dentist.
B. tell h er to leave the building immediately,
UY
c . express h er displeasure a t w hat she said.
.Q
D. find out some m ore inform ation from her. -
TP
6 . Mrs W orthington ask s Ju lie w hether s h e _____
O
A. can thin k of a solution to the problem.

B. h a s taken an y m edicine for th e pain,
c . .has already finished typing the reports.
NG
D. can tell h e r w hat work h a s to be done.
H
7. W hen Ju lie leaves Mrs W orthington's office, s h e _____
A. feels th a t she h a d n t m isjudged Mrs W orthington after all.
N
B. w onders why sh ed m isjudged Mrs W orthington so badly,
c. recognises some go qualities'in Mrs W orthington.
TR
D. w ishes Mrs W orthington had been more u nderstanding.
B
00
GLOSSARY
10
- a change of mood s thay i tm - then so be it th cng nh vy/ nh

+3
trng phi nh th thi

- tough (adj) gay go, kh khn, gian nan - swollen (adj) sng v ln
P2
- annoyance s bc mnh - to get sth sorted out gii quyt n

C
- urgent (adj) khn cp. tha vic g

- intensity cng - anaesthetic thuc m
A
- displeasure s khng hi lng - to misjudge nh gi sai, phn xt sai

H
79
-
The plane circled a n d the pilot pointed down into the A ustralian de-
-L
sert below. T hat's the runw ay th ere, he said, next to the store.
N
Nancy looked. There w as a strip of level ground next to a few wooden

buildings. It looked sm all and u n im p o rtan t in th e middle of the empty
TO
stretch es of red earth a n d sm all b u sh es th a t stretched a s far as the eye

NG
could see, b u t Nancy knew th a t it was a vital link to th e outside world

for the farm ers in the area. As she looked, a figure appeared a t the door

of one of the buildings and waved u p a t them . The pilot tu rn ed the

plane expertly an d they soon to.uched down on the line of h ard sand.
ID
They cam e to a stop by the largest building and Nancy stepped out. A
B
wom an of perh ap s forty held o ut h er hand.

Hi. Welcome to C arters Cross. Im Shelley. Nancy looked at her.
187
She w as not u nattractive, although long h o u r s in h .s u n were begin-

n in g . t o ' ta k e : th eir toll: an d she h ad a n u m b er of.vime&înd wrinkles.
; Nancy w as surprised; t- see th t her clothes were quite, fashionable, de~
spite bit of d u s t. Soiething in N ancys expression m u St have com -
N
m unicated itself to Shelley because she laughed an d said, Were not
NH
quite as backw ard a s you m ight think. This is th e 2 1 st century. Come
on into the store.
UY
They w ent inside while th e pilot checked his plane. The store w as
.Q
well stocked w ith fanning equipm ent, tinned food an d clothes. An old
m an w as cleaning the counter. He looked up w hen they entered an d
TP
then carried on w ith his ta sk w ithout catching .Nancy's eye. Now, come
O
on, D ad, Shelley said. We all know how you feel ab o u t them finding

oil outside C arters Cross, b u t th a ts no reaso n to be rude. This is
Nancy Edw ards, from the university. She tu rn e d to Nancy. Hes stu ck
NG
in his ways. T hinks itll m ean the end of farm ing ro u n d here. Not su ch
H
a bad thing, if you ask m e.
Well, nobody did ask you. It was the old m an. My granddad
N
farm ed th is land, a n d so will my grandson.' I'm n o t having th is land
turn ed into a great big ugly oil refinery. He looked a t Nancy. And I
w ont be bought off, eith er.
TR
B
Nancy h ad heard from h er colleagues th a t th is kind of resistan ce
00
ju s t disappeared w hen people realised quite w hat the find w as w orth

10
and they happily packed up a n d headed for th e com forts of th e n ea rest

+3
city. She hoped this tim e would be no exception.

P2
Im here to a sse ss th e environm ental im pact, Mr W illiam son,

Nancy said. I have no intention of building any th ing. The old m an
C
looked a t h er and th e n walked to the door. He pointed out a t th e land.

A
Environm ental im pact? He shook his head. W hat environm ent?

H
Its a baking desert a n d a person's got to work h a rd to m ake a living off

sheep in a land like this. You a re n t going to find any endangered spe-
-
cies out there, and so you 11 go back and write your rep ort and the oil
-L
com panies will move in. B ut there's one thing th a t 1 bet you d o n t m en -
N
tion in y our report. The village. He looked o u t into the su n again.

Nancy w as a little confused. There had been no m ention of a village in
TO
any of the inform ation she had read. W hat village? she asked.
There are ten farm s th a t rely on th is store. Together, they cover an
NG
area, of nearly 400 squ are kilom etres. And th ey re o u r neighbours. We

. never m iss a birthday, or a wedding, or any o th er event. Youre going to

destroy our. village. Nancy could th in k of nothing to say. Shelley
ID
shrugged her shoulders. Nancy w andered back to th e plane to get h er

B
equipm ent.
188

1. The buildings Nancy sees from the plane a r e _____

A. sm aller th a n she expected.
B. very im portant to the local people,
N
c . left em pty m ost of th e time.
NH
D. used to store farm ing equipm ent.
2. The p hrase take their toll in paragraph 2 m eans t h a t _____
UY
A. the su n h as improved Shelleys appearance.
.Q
B. Shelley enjoys spending time in the sun.
TP
c . Nancy and Shelley both find the su n too hot.
D. the su n h a s dam aged Shelleys skin.
O

3. Shelley laughs w hen she realises th a t N ancy _____
A. w asn t expecting her to be w earing new clothes.
NG
B. d id n t know th a t there would be so m uch dust.
c . is usin g strange expressions.
H
D. w ants to be invited into the building.
N
4. The m an ignores Nancy a t first because he doesnt _____
A. like m eeting new people.
TR
B. approve of w hat is happening,
c . see h er behind Shelley.
B
00
D. w ant h e r to see how u p set he is.

10
5. Nancy hopes th a t the old m an will change his m ind w h e n _____

+3
A. he lea m s how comfortable the city is.

B. he sees there is no point hiding his tru e feelings,
P2
c. he is offered enough m oney .

C
D. she explains how im portant the find is.

A
6 . Mr W illiamson believes t h a t _____

H
A. Nancy h a s no intention of doing h er job properly.

B. the discovery of oil th reaten s the local wildlife.
-
c . the oil com panies will ignore w hat Nancy tells them .
-L
D. there is no wildlife w orth saving in the area.

N
7. Nancy doesnt u n d ersta n d Mr W illiamsons reference to the village

b e c a u s e _____
TO
A. it covers a large area an d is never m arked on m aps.

B. the oil com pany d id nt give her all the relevant inform ation,
NG
c . h e s talking ab o u t relationships an d not a physical place.

D. its a long way from w here they are.

ID
GLOSSARY
B
- to circle (chim/ my bay) ln vng - farming equipment nng c

quanh - tinned food thc phm ong hp
189

- a strip of level ground mt di-t He's stuck in his ways :<h kh gi

bng phang ' . y-- - thi quen/ quan ierr ca mnh
- stretch vng (t/nc) .tri rng . to farm canh tc
- to stretch as fa r as th e eye can see ~ oi-refinery nh my lc du
tri di n ht tm mt to be bought off b mua chuc bng
N
- a vital link to sth mtin kt quan . tin, chu nhn tin bi thng
NH
trng vi resistance s "khng c/ phn i
- expertly (av) mt cch kho lo - find mn pht hin
- to touch down (my bay) p xung . to head for a place nhm hng no
UY
- unattractive (adj) khng xinh p, i n
khng quyn r to assess nh gi
.Q
- to take its toll lm hi n, c tc - environmental impact tc ng n
TP
ng xu n mi trng
- lines and wrinkles np nhn trn da baking desert sa mc nng nh thiu
O
- backward (adj) c hu t

- to be well stocked with sth d tr to make a living off sth kim sng
y , c sn rt' nhiu hng ha nh vo ci g
NG
to shrug ones shoulders nhn vai
H
80
N
W hether you call it a gap year, a. year o u t' or a y ear ofF, the deci-
TR
sion to delay going to university for a year after leaving school is a diffi-
f cult, b u t im portant, one.
B
00
Becky Roberts, now studying history a t the University of Warwick,

doesnt regret h er decision to take a year off. Id worked so h ard for my
10
A levels, she says. I knew it would do me good to do som ething totally

+3
u n related to studying before em barking on a three-year degree course.

P2
My y ear off w orking for my d a d s com pany w a sn t a holiday by any

m eans, b u t it w as a break from the world of education, an d th a ts ju s t
C
w hat I needed.
A
Carl Sanchez agrees. Now halfway through a biology degree a t Car-

H
diff University, Carl spent m uch of his gap year travelling. I w orked for
about three m onths to save up enough money, th en w ent to stay w ith
-
some friends who live in France. I ended u p travelling ro u n d m ost of

-L
Europe, an d even got over to R ussia for a few w eeks, which w as fa n tas-
N
tic. Both Becky and C arl enjoyed their year off, b u t do they feel its
benefited them in term s of th eir university life now? Definitely, says
TO
Carl. W hen I left school, I w as a norm al, fairly irresponsible eighteen

year-old. I h a d n t been anyw here, I h a d n t done anything. A y ear later,
NG
when I w ent to university, I felt m uch more like an ad u lt th a n a child.

I know a few people at Warwick who took a year off, says Becky.
Generally, were m ore dedicated to our stu dies th a n those stu d e n ts
ID
who cam e straig h t from school. Weve got different priorities. We w an t

B
to have fun, of course, b u t we realise w ere here to get ou r degrees. I
190

d o n t think som e of the others have quite realised why th ey re t u n i-

versity yet.
There are draw backs to taking a gap year, thought Penny C artw right
N
w ent straig h t from school to study m edicine a t Im perial College, Lon-
NH
don. I th o u g h t ab o u t taking a gap year b u t decided ag ain st it and
do nt regret the decision for a m inute. Becoming a doctor tak es such a
UY
long tim e - Ill be ab out 26 years old before I can s ta rt earning any
m oney - th a t the sooner you start, th e better, in my opinion. It m ight
.Q
be fun, b u t its really ju s t a w asted year in term s of career develop-
TP
m ent.
O
T heres also the financial consideration. If you do. decide to take a

year off, an d you d o n t w ant to work the whole time as Becky did, you
have to be able to pay for it. S usan Jen k in s, a C areers Officer, points
NG
out th a t p aren ts are now less likely to fund th eir childs year off.
Twenty y ears ago, it was fairly comm on for p are n ts to say to their son
H
or daughter, H eres two th o u san d pounds, go an d have fun abroad for
N
a few m o n th s. Nowadays, because p aren ts have to pay so m uch more
for their childs edu cation while they're a t university, they ju s t c a n t af-
TR
ford to pay for th is extra year too.
One option, of course, is to do w hat Carl did: work for a few m o nths
B
00
in order to save u p for a trip abroad. Another option is to find casu al

10
work while travelling abroad. There are now a lot of books an d web-
sites with loads of inform ation for people who w an t to do th is, says
+3
S usan. Its a great way to see the world, gain experience, an d get
P2
money for living expenses all a t th e sam e time. B ut d o n t expect to earn

C
enough to save any m oney.

So, should you take a gap year? The answ er is: it depends. If you
A
w ant a b reak from books an d essays, then its probably a good idea -
H
a s long a s you, or your parents, can afford it an d a s long a s you re go-

ing to do som ething w orthwhile during your tim e off. Sitting a t hom e
-
w atching TV d oesnt count! If you w ant to get your degree an d s ta rt

-L
regular em ploym ent a s quickly as possible, a gap year m ay not be so

N
sensible.
TO
1. Becky took a year off because s h e _____

. A. needed to see w h at working for her father w as like.
NG
B. felt she needed a long holiday before university.

c . h ad done so well in h er A level exam s at school.

D. w anted to do som ething different for a while.
ID
2. Carl says th a t a year off helped h im _____

B
A. learn the im portance of saving money.

B. becom e m ore m atu re and experienced.
191

c , m ake friends in m any different countries.

D. become m ore knowledgeable ab o u t geography.
3. According to Becky, stu d e n ts who d id n t take a year o ff.
A. are less hard-w orking th a n those who did.
N
B. probably w ont en d u p w ith a degree,
NH
c . d o n t w an t to have fun a t university.
D. are less intelligent th a n those who did.
UY
4. According to Penny, a year o ff_____
.Q
A. should be taken when youre abo ut 26 y ears old.
TP
B. is better once y o u ve actually started your course,
c . m erely delays the tim e w hen you can get a job.
O
D. can be enjoyable and useful for yo ur futu re work.

5. In the p ast, p aren ts were m ore likely t o _____
NG
A. pay for th eir childs education a t university.
B. encourage th eir child to go straight to university,
H
c. force th eir child to tak e a year off before university.
D. give th eir child m oney to help w ith th eir year off.
N
6 . S u san issu es a w arning a b o u t _____
A. inform ation from books and w ebsites. TR
B
B. low wages for casual work abroad.
00
c. paying for everyday expenses abroad.

10
D. the difficulty of finding casu al work.

+3
7. This article would probably NOT a p p ear in

P2
A. a textbook for university stud en ts.

B. a handbook for school-leavers,
C
c. a m agazine for young people.

D. the education section of a new spaper.
A
H
GLOSSASRY
-
- a gap year mt nm tm ngh hc ( - to end up doing sth rt cuc (phi)

-L
i du lch)- lm gi
- A levels chng trnh d b i hc (hai - to bene sb c ]i cho ai
N
nm cui trung hc, chun b cho hc - in terms of xt v mt

sinh vo thng cc trng i hc - to be dedicated to sth chuyn tm,
TO
Anh)
- to do sb good c li cho ai chuyn cn, dn ht tm tr vo
NG
- to embark on sth bt tay vo lm gi - drawback iu bt tin

- a three-year degree course kha hc - a Careers Officer nhn vin t vn

ko di 3 nm ua n bng c nhn .hng nghip

- n o t... by any means hon ton khng - to fund ti tr, chu cp
ID
cht no - casual work vic lm thi v

- a break thi gian ngh x hi
B
- worthwhile (adj) c ch
192

81
W hen they first saw the dog, they w erent sure, in fact, th a t it was a
N
dog. A sm all pile of ru b b ish by the side of the litter bin began to move.
Verity and Sally, walking p a st on their way to th e beach, bo th jum ped
NH
back, expecting a ra t to emerge from the litter. W hat they saw instead
UY
w as the back end of a sm all brown dog, which seem ed to be connected
to a plastic bag. They both let out shrieks of delight.
.Q
Oh, its a puppy! cried Verity, and ben t down to release the dogs
TP
head from the plastic bag. The dog looked up a t them w ith k etch u p on
O
its face. Now th a t they could see the whole anim al, it w as clear th a t it

was not quite a s young as Verity had th oug ht a t first sight. It carried
one o r two scars of life on the streets - it h ad a cu t below one eye and
NG
one ear seem ed to be perm anently a t an angle - b u t on the whole it was
not in bad health for a stray dog. Its coat was shiny an d you co u ld n t
H
see its ribs u n d er the skin, like you could with m any dogs in a sim ilar
position. Ju dging by the litter bin, visitors to the beach were a good
N
source of chips, hot dogs and ham burgers w ithout knowing it. The dog
TR
sat, looking u p a t the girls with its tongue hanging o ut as it panted.
Come o n , said. Verity. Lets take him down to the beach! Sally
B
00
hesitated a m om ent before agreeing. She could see where it w as lead-

10
ing. Her father always told h er to walk away from a stray anim al be-
cause th ere w as a danger you would w ant to keep it. Then it would be
+3
h ard er when you actually did have to waik away. However, she could nt
P2
deny th a t the dog w as cute, so she w as pleased when it trotted along

C
behind them on the way to the beach.

They spread th eir towels on the beach a n d got suncream ou t of their
A
bags. W hen they tu rn e d round, the dog h a d settled on one of the towels
H
a s if he owned the place. He seem ed glad of the opportunity to re st and

Verity could im agine the co n stan t battle he faced each day to survive.
-
Apart from the search for food and shelter, which p erh ap s were less of
-L
a problem here th a n they would have been in the city centre, there was
N
the com petition from other dogs. This dog m u st be p retty sm art, she
decided, to survive against the others b ecause he certainly w ouldnt
TO
win too m any fights, even if his injuries showed th a t he d id n t give up

easily.
NG
They sp en t the day lazing in the sun, swim m ing an d playing beach

tennis. The dog joined in after resting for a while. To the casual ob-
server, it would have looked like two girls and their dog playing to-
ID
gether. Sally knew, however; th a t th a t w a sn t the case an d she was

B
dreading the m om ent w hen they would have to leave. Eventually, the
su n began to set and it got cooler. Verity stared a t th e sun, a s if willing
193
it to stay in 0e>,sky;for"sm other^houE^She;ivoded looking a t Sally and

"didnt 5eem /to.:^ t 3!ce$M 0 ^ ^ i ^ Verity stroked th e dog,
which;. w;as lixig,on th ^ ^ .n e x tto : ^ :^ a n ^ k n e w ' th a t .they co uld nt
p u t it off an y lngi:-.. i': / !-. :;
N
Its probably '/itime we. were - getting .back, she said a t last. Verity
NH
tu rn ed .round .and ;Sally;^saw te a rs -m i g . down h e r face. The dog
looked from one'.of them to .th e other arid .waited.
UY
.Q
Verity arid Sally's -first reaction is:'
A. am u sem en t a t the dogs appearance.
TP
B. worry: ab o u t th e dogs condition.
O
c . fright a t w hat m ight be u n d e r the rubbish.

D. curiosity a t the dogs behaviour.
NG
2. The dog seem s to b e _____
A. in good condition despite its injuries.
H
B. in a worse state th a n m ost stray dogs,
c . ra th e r overweight for its size.
N
D. in u rgent need of m edical attention.
3. It seem s th a t people who go to this b e a c h _____ TR
A. enjoy feeding the stray dogs.
B
00
B. are careless with th e rubbish,

c . throw a lot of food away.
10
D. d o n t know they are harm ing the dogs.

+3
4. Sally d o esnt im m ediately agree to take the dog to th e beach b e-

P2
cause _____
C
A. they d o n t have a lead to p u t on the dog to control it.

B. h er father stops h e r from doing w hat she w an ts to do.
A
c . she th in k s the dog m ight be dangerous, in spite of his ap p ea r-

H
ance.
D. she d o esn t w ant to form a relationship w ith th e dog.
-
-L
5. Verity th in k s th a t the d o g _____

A. needs th eir help to avoid th e other dogs.
N
B. is a cow ard w hen it com es to fighting other dogs,

TO
c . is m ore attractive th a n the other dogs.

D. u ses his brains to b eat the o ther dogs.
NG
6 . The girls d o n t w ant to leave the beach b e c a u s e _____

A. they th in k the dog will be attacked.

B. they w ant to su n b ath e for an o th er hour,
ID
c. they w ant people to th in k its their og.

B
D. they are trying to delay leaving the dog.
194

7. Sally feels uncom fortable b e c a u s e _____

A. she an d Verity have argued abo ut.the dog.
N
B. she th in k s th a t someone is w atching them ,
c. she knows th a t leaving the dog will be hard.
NH
D. she w ants to get rid of the dg w ithout Verity knowing.
UY
GLOSSASRY
.Q
- a pile of rubbish mt ng rc - shiny bng lng
- litter bin thng rc - rb xng sn
TP
- to emerge from chui ra t, xut hin - chips khoai ty rn
O
- shrieks of delight ting reo mng - hot dog bnh m kp xc xch

- puppy con ch con - to. pant th hn hn
- to release sth from sth tho g ci g cute (adj) d thng
ra khi - suncream kem chng nng
NG
- ketchup nc xt c chua "r- to aze nghi ngi th gin
H
- at first sight mi thot nhn - to the casual observer i vi ngi
- scar vt so ngoi cuc
- to be at an angle nghing mt bn, - to stroke vut ve
N
khng ngay ngn - lead dy dn ch
- a stray dog con ch i c/ v ch - coward k hn nht.
TR
B
82
00
10
W hen C arrie joined the schools debating team , she h a d n t consid-

ered the fact th a t she would have to speak confidently and clearly in
+3
front of an audience of strangers. Shed merely gone down the list of

P2
possible T hursday afternoon activities, crossing off first the ones which
C
she liked the least. W hen there was one activity left on the list - the
Debating Club - she thou ght to herself, Well, a t least its indoors. She
A
p u t a tick next to it an d thoug ht no more ab out it.

H
The reality of w hat m em bership actually involved s u n k in the follow-

-
ing Thursday. This year, w ell be com peting w ith schools in the local
-L
area, said Miss Forbes. The first debate is next S aturday evening at
D aversham College. W ell need two speakers, and the topic is capital
N
punishm ent. We halve to argue in favour of it. Any volunteers?

TO
There w as silence in the room. Nobody? said Miss Forbes. Well, in

th a t case i l l decide w hos going to speak. Alison, will you do the m ain,
NG
five-m inute speech, and Carrie, can you do the tw o-m inute sum m ing
up at the end?

Although Miss Forbes h ad ph rased it as a question, it was not the

ID
kind of school where you could say no to a teacher. Yes, Miss Forbes,
said Carrie weakly.
B
Miss Forbes explained to Carrie exactly w hat she would have to do.
The actu al sum m ing up of ou r m ain argum ents should be the last
195
thirty seconds or so of your speech. That, b its easy , an d can be w ritten

in advance. D iscuss with Aon w hat the m ain points s h e s m aking
are. F or the first in in u te a n d a h though^you have to respond to the
points m ade by th e opposition, a n d explain, why th ey re wrong. I w ont
N
lie to you, its n o t;asf'u .have to listen,very, veiy carefully to w hat
NH
they say in th e ir'm a in speech, m ake notes a s you listen, and come up
with reasons why those points are wrong.
UY
Carrie w as terrified. S hed never done anything like th is before in
.Q
her life, an d w as sure she would m ake a fool of herself. W hat if she
TP
couldnt think of anything to say? A m inute a n d a h alf is a lifetime
when youre standing in front of a m icrophone an d everyones looking
O
at you. Still, a t least none of her friends would be th ere to see h er m ess

up. T hank goodness its not a t o u r school, she thought.
NG
The debate a t D aver sham College w as held in the Main Hall. The
whole school w as present. The rows of unknow n faces seem ed to Carrie
H
to be waiting for h er to fail. Her h e art had never beaten so fast, an d a s
she walked across the room with Alison an d Miss Forbes, h e r h a n d s
N
were shaking so m uch she could hardly hold th e pen an d p ap er she
was carrying.
TR
Alison opened the debate. Although she had w ritten her speech out
B
in full, she rarely glanced a t the papers in front of her. She m u st have
00
learnt it by h e a rt, th o ug h t Carrie admiringly. Alison m ade som e force-

10
ful argum ents, h er points were clear, her tim ing w as excellent, and
+3
there was th u n d ero u s ap plause a s she sat down. Carrie ju s t h a d time

P2
to w hisper, Well done, Ali. Great job! before th e m ain speaker of the
opposing team stood up. Come on, Clare Dalton of D aversham Col-
C
lege, th o u g ht Carrie. Say som ething ridiculous th a t I can easily argue

against.
A
H
For the first thirty seconds of C lares speech, Carrie co u ld n t find

any points to disagree with. She stared a t h er blank piece of paper, and
-
dreaded w hat would happen if it rem ained blank for the whole five
-L
m inutes. Suddenly she found herself thinking, W ait a m inute. W hat

sh es ju s t said d oesn t m ake sense. Does it? No, it doesnt! As quickly
N
as she could, she wrote down Clares exact w ords, an d m ade a note
TO
next to them a s to why her point w as illogical. One or two m ore like
th a t, th o u gh t Carrie, and Ill be able to m ake a speech after all.
NG
1. Carrie had chosen to join the Debating Club because it w a s _____

A. at the bottom of th e list of possible activities.

ID
B. the only activity which d id n t take place outdoors.

c. the activity on the list she disliked least of all.
B
D. a chance to give speeches in front of strangers.
196

2. The following Thursday, Carrie realised, for th e first tim e t h a t ____

A. she would actually have to speak in public.
B. she d id n t believe in capital p u nishm ent at all.
N
c . Miss Forbes would always decide the speakers.
NH
D. she w as allowed to volunteer to be a speaker.
3. Miss Forbes told Carrie, th a t C arries m ain responsibility would be
UY
t o _____ :
.Q
A. help Alison come up with a list of points to make.
TP
B. write Alisons speech for h er before the debate.
c . answ er th e oppositions questions during the debate.
O
D. disagree w ith argu m en ts m ade by the opposing team :

4. Carrie w as glad the debate h ad been arranged a t ano th er school
NG
because
A. she would be able to use a m icrophone there.
H
B. h er friends w ouldnt be able to see h er fail,
N
c. th e atm osphere w ould help h er succeed.
D. she h ad never taken p art in a debate there.
5.
TR
In the Main Hall before the debate, Carrie felt th a t everyone in the
B
room 1
00
A. co.uld h e a r h er h eart beating.

10
B. w as looking a t h er h a n d s shaking,
+3
c. expected h e r to do badly.
D. knew she would drop h er things.
P2
6 . Carrie was particularly im pressed th a t A lison_____

C
A. h ad w ritten h er speech on several pieces of paper.

A
B. had. m ade so m any clear, forceful argum ents,

H
c. d id n t look a t the papers in front of h er a t all.

D. h ad m em orised h er speech before th e debate.
-
7. During C lares speech, Carrie w as surprised th a t s h e ______

-L
A. h ad found a point to m ake in her own speech.

N
B. w as able to rem em ber Clares exact words.

c . had time to m ake a note next to C lares words.
TO
D. could m ake notes on the piece of paper so quickly.

NG
GLOSSASRY

- debating team i tranh iun - to phrase din t bng t ng

- to cross sth off gch b ci g (trn 1 - argument l l
ID
danh sch) - the opposition i th

- Debating Club cu Lc B Tranh Lun - to make a fool of oneself bin mnh
B
- a tick du tick thnh k ngc nghch

- membership s tr thnh hi vin/ t - to mess sth up m hng bt ci g
cch hi vin - admiringly (adv) t v thn phc/ hm
197
- to sinkin hin r: ngha'trong* l ai/ m ^.

khri thm tti nghia'.V- ~ forceful (adjmnh rri
- capital punishment a t tinh ' . -- timin s nh gid'
- to argue in favour of sth a ra l- l r opposing team i i th
N
ung h ci g' - illogical (adj) phi I-gch> khng hp l
NH
83
UY
Terry stood on deck a s the ferry slowly arrived a t the island. He
w atched the sailors throw ropes to their colleagues on shore a n d theti
.Q
looked up a t th e villages of sm all white ho uses th a t dotted the m o u n-
TP
tainside above the sm all town. He was p lannin g a six-m onth stay,
m uch longer th a n the few days or weeks th a t the noisy crowds of to u r-
O

ists aro u n d him were planning. He had given him self th a t long to write
a novel and he was determ ined to succeed, whatever the tem ptation s to
NG
enjoy him self m ight be. Leaving his life behind was ju s t the thing he
needed, he thought, and th e island seemed to him to be th e ideal place
H
for it. He collected his things an d m ade his way onto the concrete quay.
He w as im mediately su rro und ed by local people, all rudely push ing
N
each other o ut of the way to offer him a room th a t w as gu aran teed to
TR
be the cheapest in town, although he knew th a t they cou ld nt all be
th e cheapest. Terry politely shook his head and peered aro u n d for the
B
Paradise Hotel and one Mrs Magda. She had sounded quite intim idat-
00
ing on the phone, so w hen a young woman approached him a n d quietly

10
asked in perfect English if he w as Terry Snow, he w a sn t su re how to

+3
respond. The wom an smiled and said: Perhaps you were expecting my
P2
m other? I hope you are not disappointed.

C
,N ... No, no. Not a t all, stam m ered Terry. She picked u p one of his
bags and they set off into the sm all town. She asked him ab o u t his stay
A
and he told her th a t his plan was to stay a week a t the hotel while he
H
found more p erm an en t accomm odation.

Six m o nths is a long time to be on the island, she said. Youll find
-
it different in winter. Once, there was farm ing and fishing on the island
-L
but' th ey ve practically disappeared. Tourism is th e only source of in -

N
come and so few of the locals fancy sitting an d w atching w inter come
w hen the to u rists leave, Almost all of them have second jo b s on the
TO
m ainland an d the h e a rt h as been ripped ou t of the place. And you?

Terry asked.
NG
I w ent away to the m ainland for my education. Since I cam e back, I

stay here all year rou nd. They stopped outside a hotel. It rem inded
Terry of an old wom an who still m anaged to keep a certain air of dig-
ID
nity. It could do w ith a bit of pa in t and one of th e letters in the nam e

B
was m issing, b u t it m u st have once been one of the m ost im pressive

buildings on the island. Terry began to w onder ab o u t its decline and.
198 .

w h at caused it b u t realised th a t the young w om an w as w aiting for him

to say som ething.
N
Im sorry, he said. W hat did you say?
I ask ed you w hat you thought of th e hotel. She looked a t it. Since
NH
Dad died, it h a s n t been the' same. Mum gets a few of the local m en in
to help ou t every now and then, b u t you never do as good a job when
UY
youre being paid a s w hen its an act of love, do you? And D ad loved
.Q
th a t hotel. It w as his gift to his grandchildren, he used to say. Terry
TP
looked at the hotel again. He felt th a t he h ad come som ew here w here
buildings were m uch m ore th an shelter. Each brick held a stoiy ready
O
to be unlocked an d he felt inspired ju s t by touching them . If he felt like

th a t after such a short time, imagine w hat he m ight achieve in six
m onths.
NG
Well, m aybe I could help ou t a bit, while Im h ere, he said, excit-
H
edly. The young w om an nodded and said, Maybe, before leading the
way into th e cool interior of th e hotel.
N
TR
1. Terry th in k s the island lo o k s _____
A. like it will be too noisy for him.
B
B. suitable for w hat he w ants to do.
00
c . too far from the m ainland for him.

10
D. so relaxing th a t he will never do any work.

+3
2. Terry rejects the offers of room s b e c a u s e _____

P2
A. he h a s heard th a t it is easy to be cheated.

B. no one sk s him politely to look at a room,
C
c . he h a s already booked somewhere.

A
D. he would ra th e r find a hotel himself.

H
3. Terry is surprised w hen th e young w om an speaks to him because

-
A. she w as m uch less attractive th a n he h ad hoped.

-L
B. h e r English is b etter in real life th a n on the phone,

N
c. he w as expecting to m eet som eone different.

D. he th ought he would have to find the hotel on his own.
TO
4. The young w om an tells Terry t h a t _____

NG
A. traditional sources of money have becom e less im portant.

B. m ost local people are relieved w hen the to u rists finally go.

c . people com plain ab o u t the effects of tourism on local industry.

ID
D. som etim es tou rists find work and decide to stay longer.
B
5. It seem s to Terry th a t the h o te l _____

A. h a s never been a n attractive building.
B. h a s had work done on it recently.
199
c. m akes a n im pression on everyone who sees it.

D. u sed to be nicer th a n it is now.
6 . The young w om an says th a t one problem is t h a t _____
N
A. h er m o th er ca n no longer afford to pay people to work on the
hotel.
NH
B. nobody in the a rea is willing to do th is sort of work.
c. w orkm en are less careful w hen they d o n t own th e building.
UY
D. some people p retend to enjoy the work an d th e n do it badly.
.Q
7. Terry is excited by th e idea o f _____
TP
A. finally doing some physical work in stead of ju s t writing.
O
B. getting ideas for his work from the things aro u n d him.

c. spending six m onths researching the history of the island.
D. building a ho use of his own on th e island one day.
NG
GLOSSASRY
H
- ferry chic ph - to sammer ni lp bp
N
- to dot to thnh tng m nh/ c mt - practically (adv) gn nh, hu nh
lc c ti mt ni - locals ngi dna phng
- mountainside sn ni - TR
to fancy doing sth thch lm g
- temptation mi cm d - mainland t lin
B
- concrete (adj) bng xi mng/ b tng - dignity s/ v ng knh
00
- quay cu tu - It could do with sth N s p hn

10
- rudely (adv) mt cch th l nu c c...

+3
- to peer nheo mt nhn k - to decline xung cp, suy gim

- to sound nghe ting c v - to inspire gi cm hng
P2
- intimidating (adj) khin ai phi e d/ - interior pha bn'trong

C
s hi
A
84
H
Ask a hu n d re d com edians w hat the secret of good comedy is, an d

-
y o u re gu aran teed th a t a t least ninetv-nine of them will come u p with

-L
the sam e response: timing. Although th is is undoubtedly tru e, it is not

the com plete answ er, a s w hat exactly good comedy is should, surely,
N
involve the concept of m aking people laugh. Successful politicians also

TO
have, to have good timing, b u t m ost of them would soon face an em pty
audience if they ever chose to perform a t a comedy club.
NG
So w hat is th e secret of good comedy? There clearly is n t one straigh t

answ er, b u t th e re s no doubt th a t m uch of m odern B ritish h u m o u r re-

lies on comedy throu gh language, com edians like Charlie C haplin an d
ID
Benny Hill an d present-day ch aracte rs like Mr B ean being p a rt of a dif-

ferent tradition of slapstick comedy th a t relies on the physical ra th e r
B
th a n the verbal.
200

The joke is the m ost obvious example of language comedy. With lan -
guage comedy, how you phrase w hat youre saying - particularly the
pun chline, the final line of a joke th a t draw s the laugh - is m ore im-
N
po rtan t th a n w hat y o ure saying. Take this traditional double-act joke:
NH
First m an: I say, I say, I say. My wifes gone to the C aribbean.
Second m an: Jam aic a? ,
UY
First m an: No, she w ent of her own accord.
.Q
Ignoring the fact th a t its not particularly funny to m odem ears (if it
TP
ever w as funny), a t first sight it appears th a t the h u m o u r rests in the
fact th a t Ja m a ic a is confused for D you. m ake her?, i.e. Did you
O
m ake her go to the C aribbean?. Try puttin g a different final line on the

joke, though. No, she chose to go. contains exactly the sam e m eaning
but, well, its ju s t not a s funny, is it? Its all'in the phrasing.
NG
This may be one of the reasons why B ritish h u m o u r do esn t tra n s -
late into other languages very well. W hen one tran slates, one keeps the
H
m eaning b u t the p hrasing changes, losing the basis of the hum our.
N
The second secret of comedy to my m ind is characterisation. By this,
I m ean the creation of a character, or characters, by the com edian
TR
through w hich the jokes or stories are told. Comedy is acting and, like
any play, a great script in the wrong h an d s can be a d isaster a n d a te r-
B
rible script in an experts h an d s can be m ade into som ething quite spe-
00
cial.
10
I rem em ber a s a child w atching the com edian Peter Sellers being in -
+3
terviewed on the P arkinson show. Michael Parkinson, the studio au d i-

P2
ence, and my p aren ts w atching with me at hom e were crying with

-laughter at everything th a t Sellers did or said. I sat there thinking:
C
Hes ju s t waving a handkerchief around. Nobody laug hs w hen 1 do

that. Why are they laughing a t him ? I now know w hat I d idnt know
A
H
then - th a t he w as a comic genius, and Im not. And by th at, I m ean

th a t he had the ability to create characters th a t people found genuinely
-
funny, w hatever they did. He could have sa t there in silence and people
-L
would still have been laughing. And - lets be clear - even though Sell-
ers w as appearing on a ch a t show supposedly as himself, he was in
N
character. As anyone w hos read the biography of Peter Sellers by Roger

TO
Lewis knows, Sellers off-stage w as an incredibly violent an d difficult

m an.
NG
So is it possible to learn to be a com edian, or is it ju s t a n a tu ra l tal-

ent? There m ay well be people who will never, ever succeed at being

professional com edians however h ard they try. Very few of u s will ever
be an E instein, Mozart or Shakespeare in our respective fields. How-
ID
ever, all com edians will tell you th a t the m ore experience you get, the
B
more experienced, and therefore th e better, you become. And theyre

not joking.
201
1. In th e first;paragrapfcL,. the. w riter suggests th a t p o litic ia n s_____

. ofr'tmi^ hum ur in their ,speeches. >
.B. a r e , t h e y ; ^ r m ; '
N
c L r e - ^ d : o . : f a , n g l e m p t 'R e n c e s : ' V - ' ' .";:--
DA;'re'n;;god:^ ^
NH
2. According to the-'text, slapstick com edy -V
UY
. does not m ake,u se of language to be funny.
B: is different to the comedy of Benny Hill.
.Q
G. is only, found in m odern B ritish hum our.
TP
D. does no t exist in Britain anym ore.
O
3. The w riter tells th e joke ab o u t Ja m aic a t o _____

A. d em o n strate how m any old jo kes are n o t funny today.
B. explain why m any jo kes need two people to tell them .
NG
c . show how th e a c tu a l words used in a joke are im portant.
D. point o u t th a t some jokes contain confusing p h rases.
H
4. W hether a comedy a c t is a d isaste r or som ething quite special
N
dep en d s o n _____
A. the quality of the script being performed.
B. th e ability of th e perform er to p erfo rm .'
TR
B
c . how m uch th e act is like a play.
00
D. which c h a rac te r tells which joke.

10
5. W atching the P arkinson show, the w riter did n o t u n d e rsta n d why

+3
P2
A. Peter Sellers w as doing the thing s he w as doing.

B. nobody w as laughing a t him a t th a t m om ent,
C
c. Peter Sellers was a comic genius an d he w a sn t.

A
D. everyone laughed a t Sellers doing ordinary things.

H
6 . The w riter m entions a book by Roger Lewis t o _____

A. enable people to find out more inform ation ab o u t Peter Sellers.
-
B. prove th a t he h a d n 't m ade u p the story ab o u t Peter Sellers.

-L
c . m ake it clear th a t Peter Sellers often played u n p le a sa n t ch a ra c -

N
ters.
D. em phasize th a t Peter Sellers w as acting d u rin g the c h a t show.
TO
7. In the final parag rap h, the w riter m akes the point t h a t _____
NG
A. none of u s can learn to be good com edians.

B. all co m edians skills improve th rou gh practice.

c . it's not w orth trying to become a professional com edian.

ID
D. E instein, Mozart an d S h akespeare w erent com edians.

B
202

GLOSSASRY --------
- secret 1) iu b mt 2) b quyt - double-act joke mn tu hi gm 2
- comedy hi kich dinvin
N
- comedian dien vin.hi - to do sth of one's own accord t V
- concept quan nim lm g
NH
- a straight answer mt cu tr li n - characterisation s ha thn thnh
gin nhn vt
UY
- humour c/tnh hi hc - script kch bn
slapstick comedy loi hi kch s dng - a chat show chng trnh tn gu trn
.Q
ng tc chc ci TV
TP
- verbal (adj) thuc/ bng li ni - off-stage khi khng din trn sn
- punchline cu kt bt ng c tc dng khu/ ngoi i
O
gy ci ca mn tu hi - respective (adj) tng quan/ ring ca

tng ngi
NG
85
H
New w ords are Invented all the time. I know th at, an d I know its in-
evitable. For my part, and oerhaps th is is because Im an old m an now,
N
I tend to th in k weVe got enough words already an d if we only used
them properv we w ouldnt need to come up w ith new ones.
TR
There is a fairly new word, though, which I h eard for the first time
B
only a year or two ago. I believe its American in origin, which m akes it
00
all the more surprising th a t Ive added it to my vocabulary. And, m u st

10
point out, its not unwillingly th a t Ive accepted an d em braced it. I h on -

+3
estly cannot imagine how I got through eighty-two years of life w ithout
it. Looking back, I can see occasion after occasion where the word
P2
would have been useful, where its existence m ight actually have
C
changed thin gs for the better, because to define som ething is to u n d er-
stan d it, an d be able to change it. The word is: nimby.
A
H
For those of you who are still unaw are of th is word, let me explain. A
nimby is a person who does not w ant som ething su ch a s a new b uild-
-
ing or road built n ea r where they live. Its not th a t they c a n t see the
-L
value of the building project; often they can. They ju s t w ant it built
som ewhere else - som ewhere th a t w ont distu rb th eir peace an d quiet
N
a t home. If you have an in terest in language, you may like to know th a t

nim by is an acronym , its letters being formed from the first letters of
TO
the w ords Not In My Back Yard.

NG
I have lived in the sam e small village in S ussex (population: 2,500)

for over 30 years. I had always th o u g ht I w as su rro un d ed by

neighbours, friends an d fellow lovers of ru ra l life. Now I have discovered

I am su rro u n d ed - with a few notable exceptions - by nim bys (or nim -
ID
ble s, opinion seem s to be divided on the plural). The village is a t war

B
with itself, and, unfortunately, the nimbys are winning. A few of u s are
fighting them , though, an d I am confident th a t we shall win eventually.
203

The w ar is over a proposed new com m unity centre. I see it - a s any

sensible per sop. s h o u l d ; a m uch-needed, addition to th e village. It
w ould be a plce for the -youth of tile-village -to m eet a t nigh t a n d would,
N
frankly, help- keep-them.; U o f trouble. It would be a place for p en sion -
ers like m e to go for a coffee a n d c h a t in the m ornings. It would have
NH
m eeting rooms', a cafe, spo rts facilities, a sm all stage for perform ances,
even a gym. It would create jobs. How could anyone oppose it? B u t of
UY
cou rse for nim bys, th e issu e is n o t th a t th e village d o e sn t need a com -
m unity centre. I th in k Im right in saying th a t every single one of th em
.Q
su p p o rts the con cept in principle. They ju s t d o n t w a n t it n ext to th eir
TP
house.
O
There are four possible sites. This m ean s there are four groups of

nimbys. E ach group w a nts th e centre to be b uilt in one of th e three
sites th a t are n o t n ea r th e ir own houses. While they fight am ongst
NG
them selves, the cen tre is not being built. It could have opened six
H
m o nth s ago, if th e village h ad un ited an d backed th e proposals. The
money - all 25 0 ,00 0 of it - is sitting in a b an k ac co u nt w aiting to be
N
spent. Some d o u b t it ever will.
TR
For me, th e cam paign goes on an d I have one key stren g th . One of
the proposed sites is alm ost right next door to my house. Am I terrified
B
th a t th ere will be busloads of people arriving in the m iddle of th e night
00
an d distu rb in g my sleep? No, I am not. Am I afraid th a t all th e y o u th s

10
leaving the cen tre w hen it closes will sm ash my window s a n d burgle my
+3
h ouse? No, I am not. Am I worried th a t a com m unity centre next door

will decrease th e value of my ho use? No, I am not. Am I p rou d th a t I
P2
am not an d never will be a nim by? Yes, I am.

C
1. In th e first p arag rap h, the w riter says th a t h e _____

A
A. recognises the im portance of inventing new words.

H
B. believes he can stop th e invention of new words.

-
c . th in k s th e invention of new words is u nn ecessary.

-L
D. is very careful to always use new w ords properly.

2. The word nim by is now u sed by the w riter despite the fact t h a t __
N
A. it originally cam e from th e USA.

TO
B. he w as unwilling a t first to u se it.

c . it would have been more useful in th e past.
NG
D. he c a n 't u n d e rsta n d exactly w hat it m eans.

3. The w riter suggests th a t a nimby w ould nt o p p o se _____

A. w orthw hile co nstructio n in th eir neighbourhood.
ID
B. co nstru ctio n in th eir neighbourhood if its quiet.

B
c . co nstru ctio n in o th er peoples neighbourhoods.

D. any co n stru ctio n th a t ad d s value to th eir life.
204

4. The w riter h a s re c e n tly _____

A. discovered th a t he h a s new neighbours.
B. le arn t the tru th about his neighbours,
N
c. realised he is alone in his struggle.
NH
D. become more confident bout winning.
5. The word frankly in parag raph five em phasises t h a t _____
UY
A. the centre would solve all the problem s caused by young people.
.Q
B. there are very few young people living in the village anyway,
c. m ost people do not believe the centre would be used a t night.
TP
D. young people in the village do som etim es get into trouble at
O
present.

6 . The four groups of n im b y s ___ _
NG
A. agree th a t the village doesnt need a new centre.
B. have agreed where the centre should not be built,
H
c. disagree ab o u t where the centre should be built.
D. agree th a t one of the four sites is acceptable.
N
7. The first three questions which the w riter ask s in the final p a ra -
graph _____
TR
B
A. dem onstrate how courageous the w riter is.
00
B. help show u s w hat nim bys are scared of.

10
c. suggest th a t nim bys som etim es use violence.

D. show th a t th e w riter h a s a very secure house.
+3
P2
GLOSSASRY
C
- inevitable (adj) tt yu, khng th - community centre trung tm sinh

trnh c hot cng ng
A
- to come up with sth ngh ra (mt iu - much-needed (dj) ang c mong

H
mi m) mi
- to embrace 1) m hn, m chong y - addition to mn b sung cho
-
2) v vp ci g v qu thch/ h hi
- frankly (adv) thnh thc m ni
-L
n nhn
- to change things for the better, lm - to keep sb out of trouble gip ai
trnh c rc ri
N
cho mi s tr nn tt p hn
- acronym t vit tt thnh m tit c - pensioner ngi lnh lng hu
TO
c - gym nh tp th de
- fellow lover ngi cng yu thch nh - in principle v mt nguyn tc
NG
mnh - terrified (adj) s hi

- rural life i sng nng thn - busloads of nhng chuyn xe but ch

- notable (adj) ng ch y
- to be at war with sb ang c chin - to smash p nt
ID
tranh vi ai - to burgle a house n trm mt ngi

- proposed (adj) ang c xut
B
nh
205
86 SMART EXERCISE
Are you preparin g for a big test? If so, you m ay w an t to go play some
b asketball in betw een hitting th e books. Doctors are sta rtin g to find
N
more and m ore: inform ation th a t suggests a connection betw een exer-
NH
cise an d brain developm ent. Ju d y Cam eron, a scien tist a t Oregon
H ealth an d Science University, studies b rain developm ent. According to
UY
h er research, it seem s th a t exercise can m ake blood vessels, including
those in th e b rain, stronger an d m ore fully developed. Dr. Cam eron
.Q
claim s th is allows people who exercise to co n cen trate better. As she
TP
says, While we already know th a t exercise is good for th e h e a rt, exer-
O
cise can literally c au se physical ch an g es in th e b ra in .

The effects of exercise on b rain developm ent can even be seen in b a -
bies. Babies who do activities th a t require a lot of m ovem ent a n d phy si-
NG
cal activity show g reater b rain developm ent th a n babies who are less
H
physically active. With babies, even a little m ovem ent can show big re -
sults. M argaret B arnes, a pediatrician, believes in th e im portance of
N
exercise. She th in k s th a t m any learning disabilities th a t children have
in elem entary school or high school can be traced bac k to a lack of
TR
m ovem ent as babies- "Babies need m ovem ent th a t stim u la te s th eir five
B
senses. They need to 'establish a connection between m otion a n d m em -
00
ory. In th is way, a s they get older, children will begin to associate

10
physical activity with higher learning, says M argaret.

Older people can beef u p th eir b ra in s as well. Cornell University
+3
studied a group of seniors ranging in age from seventy to seventy-nine.

P2
Their study showed a sh o rt-term m em oiy increase of u p to 40 p ercent

C
after exercising ju s t th ree h o u rs a week. The exercise does n o t have to

be very difficult, b u t it does have to increase the h e a rt rate. Also, ju s t
A
like th e m otion for infants, exercise for older people shou ld involve
H
some complexity. Learning some new skills or m otions, su c h a s with

yoga or tai-chi, helps to open u p mem ory p a th s in the b rain th a t m ay
-
not have been u sed for a long time.

-L
For m ost people, any type of physical activity th a t in creases the

h e a rt rate is helpful. The m ain goal is to increase th e b ra in s flow of
N
blood. And y o u r b rain ca n benefit from as little a s two to th ree h o u rs of

exercise a week.
TO
NG
1. W hat is th e m ain idea of th is reading?

A. How to exercise

B. How exercise helps th e brain

c . How to get good scores on a te st
ID
D. How th e brain can change

B
2. According to th e reading, w hat is the connection betw een exercise

an d brain developm ent?
206

A. Exercise m akes u s stupid.

B: The b rain need s special m ental exercise.
G. The m ore exercise, th e bigger the brain.
N
D. Physical exercise helps u s th in k better
NH
3. The m inim um am o u n t of exercise required to gain any benefit is
A. th ree h o u rs per week
UY
B. 40 h o u rs p er week
.Q
c . th ree h o u rs p er day
TP
D. 40 h o u rs p er m onth
.4. Why is yoga recom m ended for seniors?
O
A. It is easy on joints.

B. It does not increase the h ea rt rate,
c . It can be done in groups.
NG
D. It includes learning new motions.
H
5. W hat type of patients, does a pediatrician probably tre a t?
A. Poor people
N
B. Children
c . Animals
. D. Old people TR
B
00
GLOSSARY
10
- to hit the books bt tay vo vic hc - motion s chuyn ng, ng tc

+3
tht chm chi - to beef up sth tng cdng ci g

- blood vessel mch mu . - senior ngi cao tui, bc lo thnh
P2
- paediatrician bc s nhi khoa - short-term memory tr nh ngn hn

C
- learning disability chng thiu nng - heart rate nhp tim

- hc tp - infant tr s sinh
- to be traced back to c ngun gc t
A
- complexity s/ phc.tp
H
- to stimulate kch thch - tai-chi thi cc [mn th dc dng

- the five senses nm gic quan sinh]
- flow dng chy, dng lu thng
-
-L
87
N
D am ian would never have called him self a bully. A victim of bullying
him self on occasion, if h e d th ou g ht for one second th a t h e w as bullying
TO
his classm ates, he would have been devastated. The id ea th a t he b u l-

NG
lied his friends h ad never even entered his head. B ut now he w as hav -
ing to face up to the fact th a t p erhaps in certain w ays he w as a bully.

It h ad all started in th e m id-m orning break, when- D am ian and a

ID
couple of his friends were discussing w hat to do ab o u t F ran k Rice.

F rank Rice w as a bully and the whole school knew it. The question
B
was, should they tell a m em ber of staff the next tim e F rank picked on
one of them ? D am ian thought they should. Chris and Will th o u gh t th a t
207

they sh o u ld n t. As they were arguing, D am ian said: Weve got to do

something. Hes m aking peoples lives a misery. It c a n t go on like th is.
There w as silence w hen Chris replied: Well, h e s n ot th e only one, you
know! You should tak e a look in the m irror, D am ian, before accusing
N
other people. Youre not perfect, yoil know.
NH
D am ian w as so shocked, he d id n t know how to reply. He d id n t
know where to begin. Finally, he m anaged to ask: W hat on ea rth do
UY
you m ean? Youre not suggesting Im a bully, are you? How am I like
Frank Rice?
.Q
TP
Will explained. No, y o u re no t like F rank Rice a t all. C hris d id n t
m ean th at. You don't hit people, you d o n t w an t to be horrible an d
O
nasty. Youre usually ju s t trying to be funny, b u t som etim es the thing s

you say do h u rt people. Quite often, in fact.
NG
Give me an exam ple, said Damian.
Well, tak e yesterday, for exam ple, said Will, w hen we were in the
H
changing room after football. You kept saying how C hris w as su ch a
terrible goalie, you seriously wondered if h e d been bribed by the other
N
team .
TR
I w as only joking! protested Damian. You know th a t, C hris, d o n t
you? I w as only teasing. T h ats exactly the point, said Will. You were
B
00
teasing Chris. And you do th a t a lot. It's n ot very nice, you know. I
could see th a t Chris was u pset, even if you d id n t notice.
10
Were you, C hris?

+3
Well, I c a n t say I enjoyed it, to be honest. And Wills right. You do

P2
seem to do it a lot.
C
The bell rang, and they w ent off to class. D am ian found it h ard to
concentrate for the re st of the m orning. The conversation h e d h ad with
A
H
Will an d C hris kept coming back to h a u n t him. W as he a bully? If he

was, he certainly d id n t m ean to be. B ut th ere w as no escap ing 'th e fact
-
th at two very good friends of his th ou ght th a t his com m ents often h u rt
-L
them .
At lunch, D am ian, a s usu al, sat next to C hris an d Will. Guys, Ive
N
been thinking ab o u t w hat we were talking ab o u t earlier an d I th in k

TO
yo ure right. I ju s t w ant to say th a t Im really, really sorry. Youre my

best friends, an d Id never do anything to h u rt you on purpose. I can
NG
see th a t do som etim es say things th a t would u p se t you, an d Im going

to m ake a real effort n ot to do th a t from now on. Still friends?

Of course we are, D am ian, said Chris. B ut th a n k s.

ID
No problem , said Will.

B
In the changing room th a t afternoon after football practice, Dam ian,
208

C hris a n d Will were discussing th e game. Will h ad fallen over the ball
a t one point, a n d D am ian w as ju s t ab o u t to m ake a joke ab o u t it when
he stopped himself. Am I allowed to say som ething like th a t? he
N
th o u g h t to himself. We are friends. Weve got to be able to joke with
NH
each other. Or is it too n asty ? D am ian decided n o t to say anything on
this occasion, b u t he began to realise th a t keeping his prom ise to. Chris
UY
an d Will w ould n ot be a s easy a s he'd thought.
.Q
1. From th e first paragra p h we learn th a t D am ian h a s _____
TP
A. som etim es been bullied by other people.
O
B. never th o u g h t ab o u t bullying before.

G. briefly considered bullying his classm ates.
D. only been bullied once in his life.
NG
2. The boys disagree ab o u t w hether .
H
A. F rank will bully them again in the future.
B. they sho u ld have told a teach er ab o u t Frank,
N
c . F ran k is m aking people feel very m iserable.
TR
D. to tell a teach er if F rank bullies them again.
B
3. W hen Chris tells D am ian to "take a look in the m irror, he m eans
00
D am in sho uld :
10
A. look a t w h at F ran k h a s done to him.

+3
B. tak e m ore care w ith h is appearance,

c . th in k ab o u t h is own behaviour.
P2
D. rem em ber th a t no one is perfect.

C
4. Wills explanation to D am ian suggests th a t F rank R ic e _____

A
A. never tries to m ake people laugh.

H
B. sometimes uses physical violence,

c . d o esn t w a n t to be n asty either.
-
D. only u se s language to h u r t people.

-L
5. The exam ple from th e previous day th a t Will gives show s t h a t ____
N
A. Will th in k s it is extrem ely funny w hen D am ian tease s Chris.

TO
B. D am ian only teases C hris an d never m akes jo kes ab o u t Will,

c . D am ian's jo k es ab o u t Chris an d Will can som etim es be cruel.
NG
D. Chris gets more u p se t by D am ians com m ents th a n Will does.

6 . D am ian finds it difficult to concentrate in class b ecau se h e _____

A. is angry h is friends have accused him of being a bully.
ID
B. believes he will never be friends w ith C hris a n d Will again.

B
c . is continually looked a t by Will an d C hris du ring th e lessons.

D. c a n t stop thinking ab o u t w hat h e s been accu sed of.
209.
7., In the c h a n g ^ g 'room ^D a#.i& ;:"iindexstan.ds th a t

A. it is difficult td 'b al^ c^m aJiH ig 3okes;:w ith being nice.
B. he' ha- ^ a ^ b ^ ^ - ^ x r p i m ^ Q ^ h r i s a n d Will,
c. keeping his promise; TS fee-m ostim portant thing to him.
N
D. stopping him self;from saying.n a sty thing s will be im possible.
NH
GLOSSASRY . -
UY
- bully k/bt nt,(ngi:nhQtur hn) misery s kh s/ khn kh - chang-
- on occasion thnh thong ing room phng thay.qun o
.Q
- devastated (adj.) cam thy sng s/ goalie th mn
TP
sng st/ choang vng to bribe hi l
- a member of staff mt thy c gio to protest phn i
O
trong ng

- to pick on sb chn ai ( trng tr/ to tease chc gho
chi trch/ ln n) to haunt m nh
NG
88
H
That night as E aston walked home th ro ug h th e rain he felt very d e-
N
pressed. It h a d been a very bad sum m er for m ost people a n d he h ad
not fared b ette r th a n the rest. A few weeks w ith one firm, a few days
TR
with ano ther, th en ou t of job, th en on again for a m o n th p erhap s,
B
an d so on.
00
William E aston w as a m an of m edium height, ab o u t 23 years old,

10
with fair h a ir an d m o ustache and blue eyes. His clothes, though

+3
shabby, were clean an d n eat b u t the holes in his shoes m ade it painful
to walk.
P2
He w as m arried: his wife was a young wom an w hose acq u ain tan ce
C
he had m ade w hen he happened to be employed w ith o thers painting

th e outside of the h ouse where she w as a general servant. E aston h ad
A
H
been in no hu rry to m arry for he knew th a t, taking good tim es w ith

bad, h is w ages did not average a pound a week. However, after going
-
out for 18 m o n th s they were finally m arried.

-L
T hat w as a year ago.

N
As a single m an he h ad never troubled m uch if he h ap p e n ed to be

ou t of work. He always had enough to live on an d pocket m oney b e-
TO
sides, b u t now th a t he was m arried it w as different; the fear of being

o u t h a u n ted him all the time.
NG
He h ad sta rted for R ushton an d Co. on the previous M onday after

having been idle for three weeks and, a s the ho use w here he w as w ork-
ing h ad to be done right through, he had con gratulated him self on h av -
ID
ing secured a jo b th a t would la st till C hristm as; b u t he now began to

B
fear th a t w hat h ad happened to J a c k Linden - a m aster craftsm an -

m ight also h ap p e n to him self a t any time. He would have to be very
210
careful n o t to offend Bill C rass in any way. He w as afraid th a t the latter

did not like him very m uch a s it was. He knew th a t C rass could get him
N
the sack a t any time an d would not scruple to do so if he w anted to
m ake room for some pal of his.
NH
C rass, th e forem an, w as quite w ithout special abilities; he was if
anythin g inferior to the majority of the m en he supervised. Even so, he
UY
pretended to know everything, and the vague references h e w as in the
.Q
h ab it o f m aking to ton es an d sh ad es an d harm ony h ad so im -
TP
pressed Frederick H u n ter th a t the latter w as completely tak en in. It
was by p u sh in g him self forward in th is way th a t C rass h a d m anaged to
O
get him self p u t in charge of the work.

Although C rass did a s little a s possible himself, he took care to work
NG
the oth ers h ard. Any m an who failed to satisfy him w as reported to
H u n ter a s being no .good or too slow for a funeral an d w as then' dis-
H
pensed w ith a t th e end of the week. Knowing this, all the workers
feared an d hated the wily'Crass.
N
Some, by giving him pipefuls of tobacco an d p in ts of beer, m anaged
TR
to stay in C ra sss favour an d often kept th eir jo b s w hen b etter m en
were dism issed.
B
As he w alked hom e th ro ugh the rain thinking of these things,
00
E aston realized th a t it w as not possible to foresee w hat a day or even

10
an h o u r m ight bring.
+3
P2
1. As he walked hom e, E aston felt depressed b e c a u s e _____

C
A. it h ad been a bad sum m er for m ost people, including him.

B. he w as afraid of losing his job.
A
H
c. he had recently got m arried, despite his low wages.

D. his sho es were worn o u t an d his feet were hurting.
-
2. The fifth p arag ra p h m entions E a sto n s fear of being o u t. Is th is a

-L
fear o f _____
N
A. being unem ployed?

TO
B. n o t having any money?

c. having now here to live?
NG
D. falling o u t w ith h is wife?

3. The m o st senior person m entioned in th e passage i s _____

ID
A. J a c k Linden.
B. Frederick H unter.
B
c. Bill C rass.
D. William Easton.

4. C rass got'.his^Qsition^'beeau se H unter tho ug ht h e :w as good at
A. using-language: ;v
N
B. m anaging Qther'people.
c . u n d e rsta n d in |:q o lo u r schem es.
NH
D. repairing or decorating houses.
5. To keep h is job, anyone w orking u n d e r C rass h ad to ;
UY
A. work hard.
.Q
B. give him p resents.
c. take care n o t to offend him.
TP
D. m ake room for h is p a ls.
O
6 . C rass w as _____

A. a skilful w orker b u t lazy.
B. not very skilful b u t h a rd working,
NG
c. no t very skilful an d also lazy.
H
D. a skilful m an a n d a h a rd worker.
7. A good title for the passage would b e _____
N
A. Forem an C rass. B. An U ncertain F utu re,
c. Too Slow for a Funeral. D. A M iserable Walk.
TR
GLOSSASRY
B
00
- to fare lm n/ sinh sng - if anything [cch ni lm mnh

- moustache b ra mp thm mt pht biu ph nh trc
10
- shabby (adj) xc xch, c tng ] thm ch l cn.../ cn hn th

+3
to make sb's acquaintance lm quen na/ m tri i cn

- inferior to sb (adj) thua km ai
P2
vi ai
- general servant ngi gip vic nh - to supervise gim st, cai qun
C
- to take good times with bad ly lc - vague (adj) m h

khm kh b cho lc tng thiu - tones, shades, harmony [ni v trang
A
- to average t c s bnh qun l tr/ sn nh ca] nhng cch phi

H
- to trouble bn tm mu, cc .sc , s hi ha mu sc

- idle (adj) nhn ri/ n. khng ngi ri - to put sb in charge of sth giao cho ai
- to do right through a house trang tr ph trch vic g
-
cho xong mt c Jih - to be taken in b la di

-L
- to secure sth nm vng/ cm chc/ - to work sb hard bt ai lm vic vt v

kim c ci g - to be dispensed with b vt b/ b loi
N
- master craftsman th th cng tay thi *

- wily (adj) xo tr, qu quyt
TO
ngh cao/ vo hng bc thy

- to offend lm mt lng - a pipeful of tobacco mt ng tu nhi
y thuc ht
NG
- to give sb the sack sa thi ai

- to scruple to do sth ngi ngng khng - pint [ung tch] mt panh (= 0.57 lt

mun lm g M] _
- to make room for dnh sn ch cho - to stay in sb's favour vn c lng
ID
- pai bn thn ai, vn c ai ng h/ bnh vc

- foreman vin c cng - senior (adj) (vai v) cp cao hn,
B
cp trn

89 ALL IN A DAYS WORK

reported by Jenny Paterson
N
When most people are asked to describe their job, their description does not in-
clude running through burning buildings and jumping out of tenth floor windows!
NH
Being a stuntperson, however, is no ordinary job! Last week, i was lucky enough
to meet Stanley Pilot, who has been working as a stuntman for over twenty years.
UY
He was kind enough to agree to see me during his short stay in London.
.Q
Q O ur readers would love to find ou t how you got started a s a s tu n t-
TP
m an. Had you always w anted to do th is kind of work?
A Well, actually, it took me a while to realise th a t th is was the job for
O
me. You see, w hen I w as a child,. I was always th e one to climb the

highest trees in the neighbourhood. The others would w atch an x -
NG
iously to see if I w as going t survive my latest stu n t. My mother,
an d I got used to spending m ost w eekends in the local ch ild ren s
H
hospital! I rem em ber h er saying to me on my sixteenth birthday,
Youre too old for th is now; Stanley; next time, y o ure on your own.
N
Q W hat did she m ean?
TR
A Sh ed h ad enough! She thou ght I w as old enough to know w hat was
dangerous. She m ade m e realise th at, although I loved doing d an -
B
gerous things, I needed some guidance. T hat sum m er I joined the
00
local m ountaineering club and, from th en on, nothing could stop

10
me.
+3
Q W hat other spo rts did you learn?

A You nam e it, Ive done it! Actually, I was learning w hitew ater rafting
P2
when I applied for my first job. David, one of the oth ers on the
C
course, told me th a t he worked a s a s tu n tm a n for a small inde-

pend en t film com pany th a t had been filming on location in our
A
area.
H
Q Did you get a job there, too?

-
A Yes, I w as very lucky. David took me along one day, an d I showed

-L
th em w hat I could do. The director liked w h at he saw, an d I got my

first job!
N
Q W as it easy to find work after th at?

A No, it w a sn t! To be fair, the film com pany w as a great help, b u t
TO
even so, d id n t find any work for a long time. It got easier when Id
NG
been in a few films, though. I m et other stu n tm en an d m ade some

good friends. Actually, one of the people who h a s helped me a lot

h a s done s tu n ts for Clint Eastwood.

Q Do you have a favourite stu n t?
ID
A Yes, I really enjoyed jum ping o u t of a helicopter in the Alps. Words

B
c a n t describe the thrill you feel as you fall th rough the air. Al-
th ough you are only in the air for a few seconds. It feels like forever!
213
Q Your job; m u st be very dan gero us. Have, you ever b een seriously in -
ju red ?
A Apart from a few broken bones, no. I u sed to be foolish a n d th in k It
; will never h ap p en to me! Some people say Ive been lucky., b t for
N
y ears Ive m ade su re th a t th e com pany I work for h a s a good safety
NH
record. A good com pany can tak e days to set u p a s tu n t w hich may
tak e only a few m in u tes to film. -Im- u se d to w aiting on film se ts for
UY
h o u rs an end. I ts b e tter th a n risking y o u r life b ecau se y o u re too
im patient.
.Q
Q T h a ts veiy sensible. W hat would you say to people in terested in
TP
th is line of work?
O
A Id tell th em its h a rd work, b u t th a t th ere are plenty of op p o rtu ni-

ties in the film industry. Go for it!-
NG
1. W hen did the stu n tm a n m eet the interviewer? While
H
A. he w as living in London. -
B. he was visiting London.
N
c . he w as w orking in London.
D. she w as visiting London. TR
B
2. Why did the children w atch him ? T h ey _____
00
A. w anted him to fall from the tree.

10
B. w anted him to go to hospital.

+3
c . w anted to see him doing his stu n t

P2
D. were worried h e m ight get h u rt.

3. When he took u p m o u n tain eerin g , _____
C
A. he w as sixteen.
A
B. he w ent to hospital,
H
c . he found a job.
-
D. som eone tried to stop him.

-L
4. How did David help Stanley?

A. He gave him a job a s a stu n tm a n .
N
B. He told him ab o u t the course,

TO
c . He told h im he h ad got a job.

NG
D. He took him to see the director.

5. Finding work w a s _____

A. easy b ecau se the film com pany helped.

ID
B. difficult bec au se no one helped.

B
c . very difficult in the beginning.

D. easy w hen h e d been in a film.

6 . How long w as Stanley in the air?

A. Less th a n a m inute B, More th a n a m inute
c. A long time D. Forever
N
7. How h a s Stanley avoided serious injury?
NH
A. He h as a good safety record.
B. He h a s never broken any bones,
c. He is careful who he works for.
UY
D. He h a s been lucky.
.Q
TP
GLOSSASRY
T Stuntman din vin ng th (cc hnh - whitewater rafting mn bi xung
O

ng nguy him), cascadeur trn sngrchy xit
. - stunt hnh ng nguy him - to film on location quay phim ti thc
- to have had enough of sth chn a (khng phi quay trong phim
NG
ngy c g trng .
- mountaineering club cu ic b leo - helicopter my bay trc thng
H
ni - the Alps rng ni Alps
- You name i t ,... Nhiu im khng k ra - thrill cm gic hi hp thch th
N
ht c/ Bn c vic k tn ra bt k - film set b o c ng phim
th g th th ti cng (lm ri) - for (hours) n en sut hng gi lin
TR - to go for sth la chn ci g
B
00
90 BODY TALK
10
by Mrk Evans
+3
You will probably laugh when I tell you th a t my interest in body lan -
P2
guage w as sparked by a favourite professor of mine a t university. He

m entioned Pinocchio Syndrom e to me one w intry m orning after claim -
C
ing th a t I always rubbed my nose when giving excuses for being late to
A
his lectures. Apparently, w hen someone tells a lie, th e p erso n s blood

H
ru sh e s to the nose an d the extra blood m akes it itchy. So if you think

som eone is not being entirely honest with you, perhap s like my profes-
-
sor you should w atch to see if they scratch their nose! This little exam -
-L
ple of non-verbal com m unication inspired me to become a body lan -

guage expert.
N
Now, I earn my living by training people in non-verbal com m unica-

TO
tion. Knowing w hen someone is lying and knowing how to convince

people y ou re telling the tru th are two of the m ost im portant skills
NG
yo ull ever learn. For examplei lawyers build their rep utatio n on their

deductive skills w hen cross-exam ining in court, while politicians need

to rely on th eir powers of persuasion to gain support.
ID
I have dedicated my life to studying th e ways the h u m an body gives

B
more reliable inform ation th an the w ords we speak. The words say one
thing b u t the body may say som ething completely different. This is the
215

theory of body language an d m ost of u s are fam iliar w ith th e basics. We

know th a t crossed arm s can be seen as either defensive or aggressive,
b u t w hat ab o u t facial expressions, gestures, p ostu re, a n d the in to n a-
tion an d rhy thm of o u r speech? All of th ese speak volum es a n d can be
N
und erstood if you only know how to m ake sen se of the signs.
NH
Take the eyes, for example. If I told you a lie, you w ould probably
expect me to look awav ra th e r th a n look you full in the face.
UY
However, th is is not, as commonly th oug ht, the su re sign of a lie,
.Q
b u t the reflexive m ovem ents we m ake w hen we are trying to rem em ber
TP
something. B ecause of this, glancing away is no t as easy to in terp ret as
you m ight believe. A, good liar is no t searching h is m em ory for the
O
tru th , so he can quite easily look you straigh t in the eyes a s he sp eaks

to m ake the lie more convincing. Heres a tip, though. W atch the pupil
NG
of the eye; does it change size? If it gets bigger, th is probably an in-
voluntaiy sign th a t som ething is being hidden.
H
Body language is som ething th a t the m ajority of u s can n o t control;
its w hat escapes w hen were concentrating on som ething else. I m ight
N
think Im creating a good im pression because my voice is strong an d
TR
steady an d my speech is clear, b u t the sw eat pouring off my forehead
and my constantly moving feet say otherwise.
B
00
B usiness clients are constantly in need of my services a n d I try to

improve th eir confidence in them selves by teaching them ab o u t body
10
language. I give advice ab out h an d sh a k es, w hich should always be firm

+3
and steady, an d I teach the im portance of personal space, explaining

P2
th a t people who live in warm clim ates stan d a lot closer to one a n o th er
th a n people in cooler clim ates. They may seem like m inor m atters, b u t
C
th ese codes of behaviour can be the key to m aking or breaking a b u si-

A
ness deal.
H
My working life gives me a great deal of satisfaction. I feel th a t Im

providing a public service, b u t it is a service th a t h a s h ad its downside.
-
W henever I m eet som eone new an d I tell them w hat I do for a living,
-L
they im m ediately p u t th eir guard up and th ey re no longer relaxed.

N
They quite literally freeze in the attem p t to hide all the signals th a t they
assu m e Im reading. It m akes life difficult a t tim es, b u t I consider it a
TO
sm all price to pay for a job I enjoy so m uch.

NG
1. The w riter originally becam e interested in body language b ecau se

A. of a com m ent som eone m ade to him.

ID
B. he w anted to know why people tell lies.

c. he w anted to learn, m ore about Pinocchio Syndrom e.
B
D. h is professor recom m ended the subject to him.
216

2. According to the writer, non-verbal com m unication is im portant

b e c a u s e _____
A. it helps lawyers to b more skilful.
N
B. politicians need to know when people are lying.
NH
c . it can help m ake people believe w hat you tell them .
D. it provides a unique way of earning ones living.
UY
3. W hat does the w riter assu m e ab out his readers?
.Q
A. They are able to change their intonation.
TP
B. They need to develop good posture,
c . They Ue only w ords to com m unicate.
O
D. They know som ething about the subject.

4. According to the writer, it is not easy to recognise w hen someone is
NG
lying b e c a u s e _____
A. they have a n hon est look on th eir face.
H
B. they move their eyes very rapidly.
N
c . listeners read th eir body language incorrectly.
D. listeners do not .look into their eyes.
TR
5. To have a positive effect on someone, you should try to avoid _____
B
A. m aking any facial expressions.
00
B. having any involuntary reactions,

10
c. giving the im pression of not caring.

D. moving your legs ab o u t too m uch.
+3
P2
6 . W hat is the m ost im portant thing for businessm en to learn?

A. th e laws of a particu lar country
C
B. the correct way to behave

A
c. the necessity of being polite

H
D. the skill of appearing confident

7. Why do people react in a negative way when they m eet the writer?
-
A. They th in k he is too self-confident.

-L
B. They assu m e th a t he is always lying,

N
c. They have h eard abo ut him previously.

D. They believe he is studying them.
TO
8 . W hat do we learn ab o u t the writer from the passage?

NG
A. He m akes a lot of money from his job.

B. He travels the world giving advice,

c. He is dedicated to his work.

ID
D. He train s body language experts.

B
GLOSSARY
- body language ngn ng c th - aggressive (adj) c thi gy hn,
- to spark lm khi pht chc tn cng
217
WWW.DAYKEMQUYNHON.UCOZ.COM
"/ : '-'--'?; : WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/DAYKEM.QUYNHON
- . V - V fi- .. * ; :
-V L .S'- r' >;: >
Pinocchio Syndrome H-hng ttig; facial expressions v mt, nt biu l

ngi g Pnodii khi T'ni -i th ^ "trn mt
mi n i ra] v / intonation ng iu
wintry (aj) lnh gi to speak volumes ni ln rt nhiu
to rub ch xt, c mnh ";pieu
N
to give excuses for sth vin c gii reflexive movements c ng phn
x
NH
thch ci g ' " . : Y:
itchy (adj) nga pupil ;ng t, con ngi
to scratch gi (vi nga) - involuntary (adj) ngoi mun, bt
UY
non-verbai communication s giao . gic
tip khng dng li ni sweatrno hi
.Q
to inspire sb to do sth gi cm hng -clientthn ch, khch hng
TP
cho a lm gi - firm (adj) rn chc
deductive (adj) c tnh suy din - codes of behaviour quy tc ng x
O
to cross-examine truy vn ro rit - to make or break a business deal

- powers of persuasion nng ic thuyt kt thc thnh cng hay tht bi mt
phc thng v/ tha thun giao dch
NG
to gain support ginh c s ng h - downside mt tri ca s vic
- to dedicate one's life to doing sth - to put one's guard up t ra th th/
H
ginh ht c i ra lm g phng
- crossed arms hai cnh tay khoanh li - literally (adv) ng ngha l
N
- defensive (adj) gi t th phng th, - to freeze khng ngi li/ mt v t
t ra th th nhin
TR
B
91 THE SERENGETI
00
As daw n breaks over the vast Serengeti an eleph an t herd slowly

10
w anders to the side of the w aterhoie to drink, nearby a pride of lions is

+3
lazing in the dry yellow g rass an d a wild dog howls in the distance. The
P2
w aterhole is a gathering place for the wildlife in th is p art of the Seren-

geti and for people, too. At night, the anim al kingdom reigns over the
C
area b u t the day brings-tourists to photograph the wildlife, biologists to

A
study the ecosystem and Masai tribesm en to w ater their herds of cattle.
H
It appears th a t anim als and h u m an s are m anaging to live together in

harm ony in one of the last great wildlife refuges in Africa.
-
The nam e for the Serengeti com es from a M asai word th a t m eans
-L
the place w here the land ru n s on forever b u t it m ay not be big enough

N
for th e Masai to continue their traditional way of life there for m uch
longer. Although the M asai were once free to roam w herever they
TO
pleased, since 1959 they have been confined to one sm all p a rt of th e

Serengeti ecosystem, the Ngorongoro Conservation Area. The area w as
NG
established as a place where the Masai could continue with th eir no-

madic life style > where wildlife could be protected an d to urism could
flourish.
ID
Wildlife a n d tourism are both doing very well b u t the sam e can n o t
B
be said for th e Masai tribes. In the p a st fifty y ears the M asai population
218

h a s increased from ab o u t 10,000 to over 50,000. The re su lt is th a t

th ere are too m any people an d too few resources to su pp o rt th e tra d i-
tional M asai way of life. The and available for them to graze th eir cattle
N
is limited a n d they are only allowed to grow enough food to live on for
fear th a t large scale farm ing will affect the a re a s n a tu ra l h abitat.
NH
The rise in the Masai population is also worrying because of how it
UY
m ight affect the an im als in the conservation area. H erds of w ildebeest,
zebras an d o th er an im als travel th rou g h the Ngorongoro region on their
.Q
m igratory p aths. Masai settlem ents, farm s an d grazing cattle could in -
TP
terfere with these im p ortan t ro u tes an d conservationists do no t w an t to
cause any problem s for the now growing n u m b ers of an im als in the
O

area. So its the Masai who are being asked to move cftit o f th eir hom e-
lands a n d to change th eir way of life, even though th e conservation
NG
zone w as originally created to be a m ultiple-use a rea n o t ju s t for wild-
life.
H
In th e Masai village of Endulen women with shaved heads, gleam ing
N
silver jewellery an d colourful red robes are busv w ashing clothes in the
stream . Tall, spear-carrying w arriors h iss a t their cattle as they drive
TR
them down th e dusty m ain street tow ards the only w ater supply in the
village. There is a hospital, a school and a m ark et in th is village of
B
00
8,000 b u t th ere is no fresh w ater supply, only th e stream . A stream

th a t supplies all the needs of the people an d anim als for drinking,
10
washing, cooking and bathing. It is without do ub t th e life source of th is

+3
bustlin g com m unity, a com m unity which continues to grow year by

P2
year.
C
Yet th e conservation au th o rities do no t w ant to provide th e Masai

with a perm an en t w ater supply. This is because they do not w ant to
A
encourage p erm a n en t settlem ents within th e conservation area. As far

H
as .the au th o rities are concerned, the M asai are only allowed to live in
the a rea a s no m ad s who m ake light u se of th e land. If th e Masai w ant
-
to m ak e th e s h ift from a nom adic existence to a fanning com m unity

-L
with full am en ities su ch as a w ater supply an d electricity, th en they

N
should, once again, be moved o u t of the Ngorongoro region.

The Masai have o ther ideas, though. Namely th a t they have no in-
TO
tention of being moved on again. Although the old ways are slowly fad-
ing, they still keep th eir livestock and go out on the land, even if it is
NG
only for days a t a time ra th e r th a n m onths. In the village they work on

vegetable plots outlaw ed by the autho rities an d live in p erm an en t

dwellings. The flowing traditional red robes a nd leath e r sa n d a ls are still
ID
worn by m any Masai b lit you can also see train e rs an d T -shirts, too. As
B
an o th er cell phone s ta rts to buzz it becom es obvious th a t the M asai are

m aking the long, slow tran sition to a m ore m odem way of life.

W hat im pression. ds/tK^Ter.giv of th is p art pf tH. Serengeti?

A. The anim als ruleon:tb;is-regiQn\of Africa.
B. People and/wildHiîexIst peciPy^hre.
N
0. There-are oo m ah people com ing to the area.
D. It is one of the few places to see wildlife in Africa.
NH
W hat does, th e w riter say h as changed ab o u t the M asai way of life?
A. They have had to accept living w ith anim als a n d to urists.
UY
B. The Serengeti is no longer large enough to sup p o rt them .
.Q
c. They are no longer allowed to go w herever they w ant.
TP
D. They cannot continue their traditions in the conservation area.
O
Why does the w riter feel the growing Masai population h a s caused

problem s for the tribe?
A. It h as m ade it very difficult to continue th eir traditions.
NG
B. They are unable to grow, enough food to survive. .
H
c . There is too little room for.them an d the to urists.
D. They do not have sufficient space to graze their cattle.
N
C onservationists w ant the Masai to move to an o th er area because
TR
A. there h a s been a recent fall in the wildlife population.
B
B. the conservation area was designed to protect anim als,
00
c . the wildlife could be a danger to their way of life.

10
D. they could d istu rb the m ovements of the wildlife.

+3
W hat does the w riter find u n u su a l abo ut the village of E ndulen?

P2
A. There are h erd s of cattle walking through the streets.

C
B. The com m unitys w ater supply comes from a single source.

c . The com m unity cann ot provide enough w ater for the residents'.
A
D. The women d re ss u p before going to clean th eir clothes outside.

H
The w riter u ses the ph rase to m ak e th e s h if t (paragraph 6 ) to

-
m e a n _____
-L
A. a change in lifestyle.
B. a move to a new area.
N
c. th e Masai have become farm owners.

TO
D. the tribe m ake too m any dem ands.

How does th e w riter feel about the changes in the Masai com m u-
NG
nity?

A. They are noticeable and unavoidable.

B. They h av en t really affected their traditions,
ID
c . They are happening m uch too fast.

B
D. They will result in the M asai moving again.

8 . W hat was the w riters purpose in writing the text?

A. To criticise the conservation authorities.
B. To show how wildlife and people can live together,
N
c. To describe the problem s the Masai are-facing.
NH
D. To explain th e effects of tourism on African culture.
GLOSSARY
UY
- the Serengeti [tn khu bo tn i - wildebeest inh dng u b
.Q
sng hoang d Tanzania] - zebra nga vn
TP
- As dawn breaks Khi bnh minh l - migratory (aj) thuc s di c, di tr
dng; Lc ngy va rng - multiple-use area vng a dng, vng
O
- herd n ng vt

s dng cho nhiu mc ch
- waterhole vng nc - shaved (adj) co ht tc/ trc
- a pride of lions mt n s t - gleaming (adj) sng lp lnh
NG
- to laze nm/ ngi thnh thi - spear ngn [ao/ gio
H
- to howl (ch si) tru, ku r ln - warrior chin binh
- to reign over an area ng tr/ thng - to hiss at sth (to ra ting) xut xut
N
tr mt vng thc ci g i
- tribesman ngi dn trong b tc - bustling (adj) rn rng, lng xng
TR
- to water a herd of cattle n n gia - to make light use of sth khai thc ci
sc ung nc g mc nh/ va phi
B
- refuge ni lnh nn, ni tr n an ton - amenities cc tin nghi sinh hot
00
- to roam an area i lang thang khp - namely (adv) c th l

10
mt vng - to fade ang phai tn dn, ang nht

+3
- to be confined to a place b gii hn nha dn

li trong phm vi mt ni - livestock n gia sc
P2
- conservation area khu bo tn - vegetable plot m t trng rau

C
- nomadic (adj) thuc i sng du mc; - to outlaw sth cm on ci g

du canh du C - flowing (adj) (qun o) bung chng
A
- to flourish pht trin mnh, pht in xung

H
- to graze cattle chn th gia sc - to buzz (in thoi) reo ln

- large scale farming lm nng nghip - transition to s chuyn i sang
-
trn qui m ln
-L
92
N
CAUGHT IN THE ACT

w a sn t expecting it to be a great day, ju s t a norm al work day, b u t I
TO
neither w as I expecting it to be quite a s bad a s it tu rn ed out. It started

pleasantly enough, with a quiet cup of coffee w atching the morning
NG
news before setting off for work. Then the doorbell rang, so I opened the
door thinking perhaps the postm an w as m aking a n early delivery. In-

stead, I found myself face to face with two uniform ed police officers. OJ
ID
course, I w as tak en aback b u t I m anaged to ask calmly w h at I could dc

for them . W ith very grim looks on th eir faces, they told me I w as being
B
arrested for the robbery of a local post office an d th a t I w as being taken

to the station for questioning.
221
They p u t m in a n interrogation room. I w as so stu n n e d th a t I don't

know how long I sa t th e re ju s t starin g blankly a t th e. w alls. It felt like
Id been in th ere for h o u rs ;and. for all t knew ,;it had been h o u rs. Then
N
my m ind started racing w ith a th o u sa n d questions. Why h a d no one
come to q u estio n m e? How could they th in k th a t I w as a crim inal w hen
NH
I had been a law -abiding citizen all my life? Most of all, how co u ld .th is
have h ap p en ed to m e? It w a sn t long before I found out.
UY
A stem -faced detective entered the room an d I sm iled nervously. He
.Q
gave me a long, h a rd look an d asked me ab o u t my w h ereab o u ts on the
TP
18th of th e m onth. I started to pariic b ecause th a t w as th e day I had
called in sick a t work a n d rd stayed at home. This m e an t I h ad no alibi,
O
of course. Then h e d ro p p e d th e b om bsh ell. He knew I w as guilty be-

cau se th e robbeiy h a d been ca u g h t on CCTV a n d som eone h a d called
in to identify me. My mood suddenly changed from fear a n d alarm to
NG
outright fury. I dem and ed to see a lawyer an d I was n o t going to answ er
H
any m ore q uestio n s u n til I got one.
While I waited for the lawyer to arrive, I sat there fum ing a b o u t who
N
could have identified m e as th e robber. There w as no way it could be a
close friend or a m em ber of my family. I w as su re of th at. I wondered if
TR
it w as som eone who h a d m ade a genuine m istake. B ut th a t d id n t seem
B
likely either. P erh aps it w as som eone with a grudge a g a in st me. All
00
knew for su re w as th a t it felt very strange to be wrongly accu sed of a

10
crim e by som eone who m u st know me.

+3
Finally, my lawyer w alked into th e room. She h ad su c h a stro ng air

P2
of confidence ab o u t h e r th a t I immediately relaxed. She fired rapid

qu estio ns ab o u t my a rre st a t the detective a n d raised a questionin g
C
eyebrow when he told h e r th a t I'd been identified on CCTV. She d id n t

seem in the least bit im pressed by th is supposedly crucial evidence an d
A
dem anded to see th e pictures. It w as now the detective who w as begin-

H
ning to look a bit worried a s h e scuttled off to fetch th e pictures.

-
He placed a series of p ictu res on th e table. In one, I could see a very

-L
faint image of a m an of my height and build w ith a sim ilar hairstyle to

N
mine. A nother picture showed a close-up of th e m a n s face b u t the pic-

tu re w as so b lu rred th a t it w as im possible to tell who it was. It could
TO
have been m e or th o u sa n d s of o th er young m en w ith sim ilar features.

My lawyer laughed, althou gh she d id n t seem very am u sed . W ith barely
NG
controlled an g e r she told th e detective th a t su c h pictu res could n o t be

u sed to identify m e an d th a t no cou rt would accept them . S he added

th a t a s I h ad no crim inal record an d w as a citizen of good standing, I
ID
should be released im m ediately u n less they h a d any fu rth e r evidence

B
ag ain st me.
222

To my u tte r relief I w as released w ithout charge ju s t over an hou r

later. W hat h a s my experience tau g h t me? D espite the fact th a t this
country h as m ore CCTV surveillance th an any other country in the
N
world an d the governm ent h a s spent millions of pound s on it, m any of
th e im ages are so bad it can re su lt in a completely innocent person
NH
spending a day a t the police station. People are alw ays com plaining
UY
th a t Big B rother is w atching b u t in my personal experience its worse
w hen h e s cau g ht sleeping on the job.
.Q
TP
1. We learn in the first paragraph th a t the w riter w as surprised when
O
A. his m orning routine was interrupted.

B. his doorbell rang so early.
c. he opened the door to the police.
NG
. he saw the look on the policem ens faces.
H
2 . By th e tim e the detective entered the interrogation room, the w riter
N
A. d id n t know how m uch time h ad passed.
B. h ad begun to blam e him self for his situation,
TR
c. had prepared m any questions to ask.
D. was beginning to realise the seriousness of his situation.
B
00
3. The w riter u se s the ph rase h e d ro p p ed th e b o m b sh ell7 (para-

10
graph 3) to show t h a t _____

A. the detective w as not. telling the tru th about th e crime.
+3
B. the detective revealed some shocking inform ation.

P2
c . the detective h ad become angry and started shouting.

D. the detective w as not im pressed w ith the w riters alibi.
C
4. Who did the w riter believe had identified him ?

A
A. A close relative.
H
B. A total stranger,
c . His b est friend.
-
D. He w a sn t sure.
-L
5. W hen th e lawyer arrived, s h e _____

N
A. w as very critical of the detective.

B. show ed h e r disapproval of CCTV.
TO
c . insisted th a t the w riter w as innocent.

D. d id n t seem convinced by the evidence.
NG
6 . The lawyer tho u g ht th a t the pictures were unacceptable because

A. they d id nt show the m an s face.

ID
B. they were of very poor quality,

c . they were taken from a distance.
B
- D. the m an in them d idnt look like the writer.
223

7. The w riter w as eventually released b e c a u s e _____

A. there w as a lack of evidence. .
B. new evidence proved him innocent,
c. the real culprit was found.
N
D. a co u rt ruled th a t he should be.
NH
8. W hat did th e w riter leam from his experience?
A. Despite disadvantages, CCTV cam eras are still beneficial to so-
UY
ciety.
B. B ritain h a s too m any CCTV cam eras.
.Q
c. CCTV cam eras have a disadvantage th a t m ost people d o n t
TP
th in k of.
D. CCTV cam eras bring m ore harm th a n good.
O

GLOSSARY
NG
- to be caught in the act b bt qu - to fire questions at sb hi ai dn dp
tang ang phm ti - to raise a questioning eyebrow
H
- uniformed (adj) ang mc ng phc nhng .my n t v thc mc
- to be taken aback cm thy bt ng, - supposedly (adv) c cho l
N
ngc nhin - crucial (adj).quan trng
- grim (adj) (nt mt) d tn, ng ng - to scuttle off nhanh nhn chy i
st kh TR
- to fetch i y mang n
- interrogation room phng thm vn/ -faint (adj) m nht, khng r rng
B
hi cung - build vc ngi
00
- stunned (adj) sng st - hairstyle kiu tc

10
- to stare blankly at nhn chm chm - a close-up mt bc hnh cn cnh/

mt cch ngy di chp gn
+3
- for all I know theo nh ti bit/ ti - blurred (adj) m nhe

P2
bit chc l... - feature c im gng mt, nt c

- a law-abiding citizen mt cng dn bit trn gng mt
C
tun th php lut - criminal record tin n tin s

- stern-faced (adj) v mt nghim khc - a citizen of good standing mt cng
A
- whereabouts nhng n lui ti dn tt

H
- to panic hong ht, hong lon - to be released c tr t do

- to call n sick at work gi in n - utter (adj) cc ki
-
th lm xin ngh vi m - charge ti anh

-L
- alib bng chng ngoi phm - surveillance s gim st

- to drop the bombshell u ra ci tin - Big Brother [hinh tng ca s theo
N
gy chn ng/ gy sng st di thng trc - mn tn gi trong

- CCTV (Closed-circuit television) h tiu thuyt 1984 ca nh vn Anh
TO
thng camera quan st ni b George Orwell]

- to identify nhn dng - to be caught sleeping on the job bi
NG
- mood tm trng bt qu tang ang ng gt trong khi

- outright fury cn phn n cc im lm nhim v

- to fume rt tc gin - to be critical of sb ch trch ai

- a grudge against sb mi c cm i - culprit k phm ti, th phm
ID
vi ai - to rule that... (ta n) a ra phn

B
quyt rng...
224

93 LONESOME GEORGE
Only one tortoise remains to tell the story of the existence of its subspe-
N
cies on the tiny isolated island of Pinta, Tony Harper reports.
NH
Som etim es th e road to rom ance is long. Lonesome George, a giant
Galapagos tortoise, is the last of his subspecies an d th u s profoundly
UY
alone. Living fax o ut in the Pacific on the island of Pinta in the G alapa-
gos Islands, he is officially the rarest living creature on E arth.
.Q
TP
No anim al better captures the history and m ysterious beauty of the
Galapagos Islands th an the giant tortoise. There used to be th o u san d s
O
of them roam ing over these islands, including the volcanic slopes of

Pinta. O bservations of them by C harles Darwin, who visited the islands
in 1835, even formed p a rt of his world-changing theory of evolution.
NG
Sadly, however, m ostly as a result of centuries of passing sailors
H
hu n tin g the giant tortoises for food, there are now only an estim ated
fifteen tho usand left in the Galapagos Islands! Of the fifteen known
N
subspecies, four are already thought to be extinct, as was the Pinta gi-
a n t tortoise un til Lonesome George w as discovered in 1971. This came
TR
as a p leasa nt surprise to scientists since no other Pinta tortoises had
B
been found on Pinta Island since 1906.
00
In the decades since George w as discovered, he h as become the sta r

10
attractio n at the Charles. Darwin Research Station where conservation-

+3
ists have been hoping to rescue some of h is genes by m ating him with
ano ther tortoise. Two females from the nearby island of Isabela, the
P2
m ost closely related to the Pinta subspecies th a t could be found, were

C
p u t into his enclosure w ith him in 1992, b u t he failed to take the h in t.

Then, Professor Jeffrey Powell, an evolutionary biologist from Yale
A
H
University, cam e u p w ith a possible reason why Lonesome George was

not finding tru e rom ance with the ladies from Isabela. Perhaps, he sug-
-
gested, they were simply too different to him to be a suitable m atch.

-L
Sailors often carried the tortoises from one island to another, he

pointed out. His question, therefore, was: How do we know these tor-
N
toises are Lonesome Georges closest relatives? In other words, there

could be a perfect Pinta m atch for George alive an d well on Isabela or
TO
even on som e more d istan t island.

NG
To begin testing his theory, Professor Powell, together with a team of

researchers, analysed DNA from seven Pinta tortoises - six from de-

ceased m u seu m specim ens and one from George him self - an d com -
pared it w ith blood sam ples from tw enty-seven giant tortoises living on
ID
the side of a volcano on the northern tip of Isabela. Among these sam -
B
ples, they found one tortoise, about thirty years old, w ith clear signs of
Pinta ancestry. Sadly, however, the newly discovered tortoise w as not a
225
suitable rom antic .partner for was. m ale. He w as n o t p u re -

bred, eith er^ w t : r h ^ ; ^ h e r ;ic>r^naily from Pinta Island, his
. . m other e a r n e r from-W(>if^ypi^no oi^ sbia/-.Powell- sees th is a s a b re ak -
th ro u g h ,''howeveri;' .lêause" it proves.' .that a n there ce n t p ast, a Pinta
N
. . male w as b reeding on. the island: If th a t's the case, it is possible th ere
NH
. are o ther P inta individuals b ut there, maybe even a.fem ale.
Powell also notes th a t there are ab o u t eight th o u sa n d giant tortoises
UY
living on Isabela, an d their study looked at only a sm all ran do m sam -
ple. His team of researchers inten ds to re tu rn to th e island an d tak e
.Q
blood from m ore th a n two th o u sa n d tortoises. If they do indeed find a
TP
Pinta female, they hope to take h er to Georges en closure an d attem p t
O
to breed the pair.

The possibility rem ains, then, th a t Lonesome George m ay one day
not be so lonely after all. When asked how great Georges ch an ces of
NG
reproducing really are, however, Dr Henry Nicholls, an evolutionary
H
ecologist an d au th o r of the book Lonesome George, still feels th a t h is
p ro s p e c ts a re bleak. As far as h is s ta tu s a s a conservation icon is
N
concerned, th o u g h , he says, his prospects have never been better.
George really is an am azing am bassador for the conservation ca u se in
Galapagos and even beyond. TR
B
00
1. The w riter m entions C harles Darwin in order t e m p h a s is e ______

10
A. his im portance as a scientist.

+3
B. his strong connection to the Galapagos Islands.

P2
c . the large nu m b ers of tortoises on the Galapagos Islands.

C
D. the significance of giant tortoises.

2. According to the th ird paragraph, scientists were pleased th a t
A
H
A. there w as a larger n u m b er of tortoises on the islan d s th a n p re-

viously believed.
-
-L
B. one subspecies of giant tortoise w as n o t extinct, a s previously

thought.
N
c . a new subsp ecies of giant tortoise h ad been discovered.

TO
D. they h ad been the ones to m ake a p articu lar discovery.

3. The w riter u ses the ph rase h e failed to ta k e th e h in t (paragraph
NG
4) to show th a t Lonesome G eorge_____

A. did nt behave in the way th e conservationists were hoping.

B. d id n t seem to get on with the tortoises from Isabela,
ID
c . behaved differently to the tortoises from Isabela.

B
D. w a sn t used to the com pany of other tortoises.

4. W hat does the writer suggest about Pinta tortoises in the fifth paragraph?
A. They could have originally come from Isabela Island.
N
B. They m ay be found on islands other th a n Pinta Island,
c. Most of them were tak en by sailors to Isabela Island.
NH
D. Sailors used to h u n t th em more th a n o th er subspecies.
UY
5. After carrying o u t his research on Isabela Island, Professor Powell
.Q
A. becam e m ore u n ce rtain ab o u t h is theory.
TP
B. w as confused ab ou t Lonesome Georges ancestry,
O
c . felt hopeful of a future discoveiy.

D. w as disappointed w ith h is findings.
NG
6 . W hen Powell co ntinu es his research, he will test
A. a s m any female tortoises a s he can find.
H
B. th e tortoises from the previous study again. .
c . all th e tortoises on Isabela Island.
N
D. a m uch larger sam ple of tortoises th a n before.
TR
7. When the w riter u se s the p h rase his prospects are bleak (last
paragraph), he is referring to Lonesome Georges _____
B
00
A. bright future.
10
B. role in conservation,
c . poor chances.
+3
D. w orsened situation.
P2
8 . Which of the following best describes the w riters tone?

C
A. cautiously hopeful B. extremely pessim istic

c. sym pathetic
A
D. relieved
H
GLOSSARY
-
- lonesome, (adj) c n - a suitable match mt ngi/vt xng

-L
- tortoise con ra (loi sng trn cn) i va la

- subspecies phn loi - to analyse phn tch
N
- isolated (adj) c lp, bit lp - deceased (adj) cht

TO
- romance chuyn i tnh lng mn - museum specimen mu vt trng by

- profoundly (adv) mt cch su sc, vin bo tng
NG
thm thy - blood sample mu mu

- theory of evolution hc thuyt tin - ancestry dng di t tin

. ha - romantic (adj) lng mn, th mng

- passing (adj) ang i ngang qua - pure-bred (adj) thun chng
ID
- to mate an animal with another cho - to breed sinh sn

mt con vt giao phi vi mt con - random sample mt mu ly ngu
B
khc nhin
- enclosure khu t c ro nht ng - to reproduce snh sn
vt
227
- to take the hint hiu v lm .theo i - ecologist nh sinh thi hc

gi bng gi ; - - prospect trin vng
- evolutionary (acfj) lin qun.n s - bleak (adj) v vng, m mt, u m
tin ha . - ; . -status a: v, tcch t th
N
- - conservation.icon biu tifang ca s
- ; : : ^'.Vbo : . _ V
NH
UY
94
.Q
From the m om ent we retu rn ed from the violent h e a t of E ast Africa
TP
we were soaked by the contin uo us drizzle of a fine English sum m er. It
was not a particularly prom ising introduction to life b ack in E ngland
O
after three y ears of being baked u n d e r the Kenyan su n. Nevertheless,

the leaden skies of A ugust could n ot m ake me any less en th u siastic
about my fast approaching re tu rn to B ritish education. I w as ab out to
NG
en ter a South London com prehensive.
H
At the time I w as totally unaw are of the shock th a t w as aw aiting me,
one m uch worse th a n ad apting to the dism al climate. I w as ju s t looking
N
forward to m aking lots of new friend? an d getting stu ck into school life.
TR
I w as u n d e r the im pression th a t the other pupils would be in terested in
my stories ab o u t Africa an d would instan tly w arm to my sparkling p er-
B
sonality. U nfortunately, however, I had really been lo o k in g a t th in g s
00
th ro u g h ro s e -tin te d g lasses and it w asn t long before I experienced a

10
m uch darker, unappealing side of things.

+3
On the first day of term I bounded into the noisy assem bly hall eager
P2
to size u p my new classm ates. As I scanned the room, w hich w as

packed w ith hu ddled clu sters of teenagers, I got my first suspicions
C
th a t becom ing p a rt of th eir cosy groupings m ight not be a s easy a s I

had imagined. They all seem ed to have an air of belonging a s they
A
H
laughed an d ch atted together. I tried to look relaxed an d carefree b u t

no one so m uch a s glanced in my direction, let alone tried to introduce
-
them selves. It tu rn ed o u t to b an uncom fortable m orning in my new

-L
class, b u t a s the h o u rs dragged by, I tried to work o ut w h at would be a

good plan of attac k for getting in on the action.
N
It began to daw n on m e th a t w hat w as needed w as a little effort on

TO
my part. So a t break, I swallowed my pride an d strolled over to a.gro up

of boys stand ing by the gates to say hello. The tallest w as a dark-haired
NG
lad with a p erm an en t sneer on his face. W here did you get your shiny

shoes, m ate? w as all he said. I looked down a t my new leather shoes

and noticed th a t everyone else was w earing the latest train ers. Before I
ID
could th ink of som ething am using to say, they h ad begun to w ander

back to class leaving me red-faced and dum bfounded by the gate.
B
At the end of my first day, I storm ed ou t o f th e classroom as soon
228

as the final bell rang, alm ost knocking over a girl who w as passin g
along th e corridor. I w as fuming. I h ad arrived th a t m orning full of
N
hopes for a bright new future, only to have them d ash e d on the h ard
rocks of teenage indifference. The d ark ciouds above my h ead seem ed
NH
to settle aro u n d me a s I trudged back home, rem inding me of how grim
th e day h a d been, I w as so enraged th a t I alm ost d id n t h e a r som eone
UY
calling my nam e a n d I tu rn ed ro un d to see a boy from my class, Brian,
.Q
ru n n in g to ca tch up w ith me.
TP
You h a v e n t exactly been m ade to feel welcome today, have you ? he
said beam ing a t me. You could say th a t, I replied sarcastically. He
O
laughed an d suggested I give him my mobile n u m b e r an d he would text

me later. B ut h aven t got a mobile! I told him, my h e a rt sinking once
again. A look of u tte r am azem ent spread across his face a n d he su d -
NG
denly w ent very quiet while I waited for him to reply. Finally, he took a
H
deep breath . Look, if I were you, rd get a mobile. Everyone h as one!
And while y o u re a t it, so rt yourself out with a decent p air of tra in e rs.
N
Then h e w as gone.
I walked into th e h o use an d flung my blazer an d bag down in th e
TR
hall. My m um popped h e r head ro u n d th e living room door and asked
B
how my first day h a d gone. Can you please tell me why I need a mobile
00
phone an d tra in e rs if. I w ant to m ake any friends? I replied. I was so

10
stony-faced th a t I th in k she knew b etter th an to reply, so she ju s t stood

there looking confused a s I stom ped up the sta irs an d slam m ed my
+3
bedroom door shut.

P2
C
1. How did th e w riter feel ab o u t being back in England?

A. He was pleased to be back in a cooler climate.
A
H
B. He w as u n su re of his feelings.
c . He w as optim istic, despite the bad w eather..
-
D. He w as nervous ab o u t startin g school.

-L
2. The p h ra se looking a t thin gs thro ug h rose-tinted g lasses (para-

grap h 2 ) m ean s _____
N
A. only seeing a situ atio n from your own point of view.

TO
B. seeing things in a very simple way.

c . only seeing the p leasa n t aspects of som ething.
NG
D. having too m u ch confidence in yourself.

3. W hen the w riter first m et his classm ates, h e _____

ID
A. felt a little afraid of them .

B. su sp ected he h a d little in common w ith them .
B
c . realised it m ight tak e some time before they accepted him.

D. found h e lacked th e confidence to introduce himself.

4'. W hen th e w riter approached th group of boys, thy responded by
A.m aking fun of h im .- : .;

B. m aking a joke.' ; ;
N
c . ignoring him. '
D. com plim enting him.
NH
5. The w riter u ses the ph rase I storm ed out of th e classroom (para-
UY
graph 5) to show th a t he left a ro o m _____
A. quickly and noisily because he w as angry.
.Q
B. a s soon as he could.
TP
c . w ithout anyone seeing him leave.
D. w ithout looking where he w as going.
O

6 . On the way home, a boy from the w riters c la s s _____
A. offered him an apology. B. gave him some advice,
NG
c. lost his tem per with him. D. criticised h is attitud e.
H
7. W hen the w riter spoke to his m other, h e _____
A. quickly regretted it.
N
B. wished he h ad said it in a different way.
c . felt annoyed by h e r response.
D. understood why she did n t reply. TR
8 . How did th e w riters attitud e change d uring the passage?
B
00
A. He began to lose confidence in himself.

10
B. He began to see things as they really were,

c . He began to realise the need to change.
+3
D. He began to u n d ersta n d him self better.

P2
GLOSSARY
C
- to be soaked b t sng - to fume rttc gin .

A
- drizzle cn ma phn - to be dashed b p v tan tnh

H
- leaden (adj) mu xm nh ch, xm xt - indifference sth-, v lnh nht

- comprehensive trng trung hc tng - lad cu trai, anh chng
-
hp - sneer ci v ch nho, v nho bng

-L
- dismal (adj) bun thm, ti tm, m - mate (ting xng h) ny anh bn

m -dumbfounded (adj) cm thy b sc
N
- to warm to hng ng, nng nhit n n khng ni ra [i, lng ngi i

nhn, c thin cm vi v sng st
TO
- sparkling (adj) lp !nh, lng lnh, long - to trudge l bc nng nhc

ianh - enraged (adj) phn n, tc gin
NG
- rose-nted glasses cp knh eo mt - to beam at sb ci tht ti vi a

mu hng - sarcastically (adv) vi v chua cht/

- unappealing (adj) khng hp dn ma mai
ID
- to bound into a place bc vo vi v - to text sb nhn tin cho ai bng in

hng hi thoi i ng
B
- assembly hail hi trng - to fling (flung - flung) nm mnh
230

- to size sth up xt ci gi nh gi - blazer o khoc

- to scn nhn lt qua - to pop one's head round the door i
- huddled (adj) tm tm li vi nhau u vo khung ca
N
- cluster chm, chm, nhm - stony-faced (adj) v mt lnh nht
- cosy (adj) m cng khng thn thin, v cm
NH
- air of belonging v t nhin (ca - to know better than to do sth cm
ngi gp mi trng thch hp) thy ng lm gi thi tt hn
UY
- carefree (adj) v t, khng cht lo u - to stomp dm bc tht mnh khi i
- to drag by (thi gian) chm ri tri qua - to Siam ng ca nh sm, ng p
.Q
- to dawn on sb (iu g ) cht sng ca
TP
ln trong tr ai; a cht hiu ra - to compliment khen ngi, chc mng
rng - ose one's temper with sb ni cu vi
O
ai

NG
95 NATURES FURY
H
M ount St. Helens, the volcano in Clark County, W ashington State,
erupted on Monday m orning. The disaster has caused a t least ten
N
d ea th s a s well as m assive destruction .in th a t region of the state.
TR
The m ou ntain w as hit by two earthq uakes ju s t before h alf p ast
eight. Then, at eight thirty-two, the top of the. m ountain w as blown off
B
by an explosion th a t w as heard two hu nd red miles away. Huge blocks
00
of ice and rock fell onto th e surro und ing area an d the m o untain was
10
left 1,300 feet shorter. Then the trem endous h eat inside w as released.
+3
Hot ash an d gas came o ut of the m ountain, causin g a lightning storm

P2
as it rose into the air. W hite ash , along w ith steam an d thick m ud, con-
tinue to p o u r from the giant crater left by the explosion.
C
At each stage of this dram atic eruption people have been killed. The
A
explosion caused the first casualties; several people were injured or

H
died du e to the force an d h eat of it. Then the h ot a sh started fires

w hich have burn ed vast area s of forest, causing m ore death s. Fortu-
-
'nately, fxre-fighters have m anaged to p u t m ost of them out. The vol-

-L
canic cloud w as so large an d dark th a t it w as said to have tu rn ed day

into night, forcing airp o rts t close temporarily! One m ore life was lost
N
as pilot flew his aeroplane into th e cloud an d hit electricity cables.

TO
Mud from th e volcano is running down the m ountainside an d filling

rivers, causin g flooding. People living nearby have been forced to leave
NG
th eir hom es a s the w ater continues to rise.

R escue w orkers have picked up casualties an d survivors by helicop-

ter, an d are moving them away from the dangerous areas. More victims
ID
are expected to be found during the next few days. One w itness said
th a t it h ad been like the end of the world. I really tho ug ht we were ail
B
going to die, Jerry Irvine said. Ive never been so terrified in my life.
231

Scientists say th a t the top of the m o untain h a d been growing, by

five feet per day for several weeks before the explosion. They say th a t
ash an d m ud could continue to p o u r ou t of St. H elens for u p to fifteen
N
years. Meanwhile, th e people of Clark C ounty axe learning to cope with
n a tu re s fury.
NH
1. W hen the volcano erupted, th e top of the m o u n ta in _____
UY
A. grew taller.
.Q
B. landed two hun d red miles away,
TP
c . tu rn ed into m u d . ,
O
D. w as broken into pieces.

2. The first people to die were killed b y _____
NG
A. the forest fires.
H
B. the explosion,
c . the th ick m ud.
N
D. the lightning storm.
3. The volcanic cloud ' TR
A. m ade everything very dark.
B
00
B. dam aged m any aeroplanes,

10
c . w a sn t very big-
+3
D. dam aged the forest.

P2
4. People h ad to leave th e hom es a s _____

C
A. their h o uses were burnt.

B. the m o u n tain fell on th eir hom es,
A
c . they had no electricity.

H
D. there w as flooding in the area.

-
5. Before the e ru p tio n _____

-L
A. scientists h ad been m aking the m ou ntain bigger.

N
B. the people of C lark C ounty had learn t how to cope w ith a vol-
cno.
TO
c. the m ou ntain h a d been getting taller.

NG
D. ash and m ud had been pouring out of St. Helens for fifteen years.

GLOSSARY
ID
- fury cn thnh n - crater ming ni l, h ln hnh phu

B
- massive (adj) to ln, khng ! - electricity cable dy cp dn in

- tremendous (adj) khng khip - rescue worker nhn vin cu h
232

96
Helen Keller, a n inspiration to all, w as a n advocate for the blind,
deaf an d disabled. She w as b om on J u n e 27 1880 to p a re n ts C aptain
N
A rthur Henley Keller an d Kate Adam s Keller, in T uscum bia, Alabama.
NH
She w as b o m healthy, w ith full sight an d h ea ring u n til tragedy stru ck
h er a t the young age of 19 m o nths old. She co n tracted a life-altering
UY
disease, believed to be scarlet fever or m eningitis, w hich left h er .blind,
deaf a n d m ute. Her family found no m ethod to edu cate h er u n til the
.Q
age of six w hen they so ug ht advice from Alexander G raham Bell, a n a c -
TP
tivist in deaf education. Bell suggested they con tact the Perkins In stitu -
O
tion for th e Blind in Boston an d requ est th a t they try to find a teacher

for Helen. Anne Sullivan w as chosen a n d sen t to T uscu m b ia to begin
tu toring Helen right away. Anne becam e a live-in teach er a n d im m edi-
NG
ately began to u se finger spelling, the tracing of w ords on the palm , in
H elens h a n d to nam e objects. Although Helen learned the finger spell
H
p attern s, she did not yet relate them to nam es for objects. This
changed one day w ith trip to the w ater pum p. Anne placed one of
N
H elens h a n d u n d e r th e w ater coming from th e pu m p an d spelled WA-
TR
TER repeatedly on H elens free hand. Suddenly Helen h ad a realization;
th e letters were a way of referring to th e liquid coming from the pump!
B
She finally u n d ersto o d th a t w ords were related to things. Keller w as so
00
im pressed th a t she w an ted to learn the n am es of everything aro u n d h er

10
an d on th a t sam e day she learned 30 new words.

+3
There w as no stopping Helen after th a t. Anne ta u g h t Helen to read

P2
with raised lette rs an d w ith Braille, an d later to w rite w ith both ordi-
nary and Braille typew riters. She eventually learned to u n d e rsta n d
C
w hat people, were saying by touch ing their lips a n d th ro at. She also
A
w anted to learn to sp eak b u t unfortun ately since h er vocal chords were

H
not properly train ed, h er speech did not develop far.

In 1900, Helen enrolled a t Radcliffe College, H arvards college for
-
women. D uring h e r college years she wrote h e r first book, a n autobiog-

-L
raph y titled The sto ry of My Life w ith the help of editor Jo h n Albert
N
Macy. It w as p ublish ed in 1903. On J u n e 28 1904, Helen Keller be-

cam e th e first deaf-blind individual to g ra du ate from Radcliffe College,
TO
com pleting a B achelor of Arts degree.

In 1921, The Am erican F oundation for the Blind was organized an d
NG
Helen w as invited to be a spokesperson for th e organization. She trav -

eled extensively w ith Anne Sullivan an d Polly Thom son, an o th er one of

h er aids, giving speech es an d raising fun ds for th e blind an d related
ID
causes. Along, w ith h e r m any books an d o th er w ritings, th is w as to be-

B
com e h e r lifes work. On October 20 1936, Helen Kellers beloved

teach er died. Although greatly affected by th is loss, it did not hin der
233

Helen's v o lu n t^ :''W o r^ ;:S'he;eontiaed- traveling th w orld w ith Polly,

trving' to raise; m pney::forf tiie AmenGap^ Foiiindation . for the O verseas
Blind. ^ :
. In 1953, :!ne'; ;dcijTienryfilm ibt' vHelens life,' The U ncon-
N
quered*, w on a n 1, Helen-Kellers p u b -
NH
lic^ life-was d ra w irto 'a''.close: ^ e n sh e'su ffered the first of a series of
strokes. Helen; Keller: received manyÛwards'Jtliroughout h e r lifetime in -
UY
cluding th e P resintia Meidai of Freedom ,w h ich 'w a s given to h e r by
.Q
- Helen Keller died peacefully in h er sleep a t th e age of 88 on J u n e 1
TP
1968. Her legacy lives on a s F o undations are formed to co ntin ue th e
O
work of conquering blindness.

1. Helen Keller w as b o m _____
NG
A. deaf an d blind.
H
B. w ith all senses,
c . deaf and m ute.
N
D. blind an d m ute.
2. Until Helen w as six, s h e _____
A. w as ed ucated by h er family.
TR
B
B. w as ta u g h t by Alexander G raham Bell.
00
c . w ent to th e Perkins Institutio n for the blind.

10
D. h ad no education.
+3
3. Anne Sullivan ta u g h t Keller t o _____

P2
A. read Braille.
B. be totally independent,
C
c . speak.
A
D. p u m p w ater from a well

H
4. Helen Keller connected words to th in g s _____

A. a t a young age.
-
B. a t Radcliffe College.
-L
c . by tracin g w ords on peoples palm s.

N
D. by touching peoples lips and throats.

TO
5. Helen learned to w rite _____

A. using Braille.
NG
B. usin g two kin d s of typewriters,

c . u sin g raise d letters.

D. before sh e learned to read.

ID
6 . Helen Kellers s p e e c h _____

B
A. becam e worse d u rin g h e r teen years.
234

B. did not progress m uch,

c. developed during h er college vears.
D. improved th an k s to Polly Thomson.
N
7. Helen Keller travelled the world t o _____
NH
A. raise money for the deaf an d m ute.
B. prom ote h e r book.
UY
c. inform people ab o u t the problem s of those w ithout sight.
.Q
D. get inspiration for her books.
TP
GLOSSARY
O

- inspiration ngi hoc vt truyn cm - water pump ci bm nc
hng - raised letters ch nh cao, ch ni
NG
- advocate ngi bin h, ngi bnh - vocal chords dy thanh m, dy thanh
vc/ ng h cho i - to enrol ng k theo hc
H
- disabled (acjj) tn tt - autobiography t truyn, tiu s t
- to contract a disease mc phi mt vit
N
bnh - a Bachelor of Arts degree mt vn
- scarlet fever bnh st ban 'bng c nhn khoa hc-x hi nhn
- meningitis bnh vim mng no TR vn
- life-altering (adj) lm thay i cuc - spokesperson ngi pht ngn
B
i - extensively (adv) rng khp, khp ni
00
- activist ngi tch cc ng h/ vn - to raise funds gy qu

10
ng cho - cause l tng, mc ch

+3
- to tutor dy km, im gia s - to hinder cn tr

_ a ive-in teacher thy/c gio ngsy - volunteer work cng vic tnh nguyn
P2
lun trong nh - overseas (adv) hi ngoi

C
- finger spelling s vit ch bng u - unconquered (adj) khng chu b khut

ngn tay phc
A
- to trace vch thnh ng nt - to be drawn to a close sp kt thc

H
- palm lng bn tay - stroke cn t qu

- to relate sth to sth lin kt ci g vi - legacy di sn
-
ci g - to conquer chinh phc

-L
97 THE JIM TWINS

N
TO
You take it for granted th a t you axe a unique person, different from
everybody else on E arth, an d you u n d ersta n d th a t everybody else is
NG
also unique. Identical tw ins are fascinating because they challenge this
notion: they are unique people, of course, b u t th ey re also unnervingly

sim ilar to each other - an d not only in term s of appearance. They often
ID
sh are opinions, m an nerism s and personality traits.

Identical twins are rare, occurring in abo ut th ree out of every 1,000
B
births. They seem to occur a t random , regardless of the age or ethnic

background of th e m other (unlike non-identical tw ins which are, for

example, far m ore comm pn am ong Africans th a n .Asians). Although

there may be tiny îffeiexrc.es^ in . phy sical appearance-s -betw een two
identical twins, which ail'ow family, a n d close';friends to tell them ap a rt,
they do h av e exactly the sam e DNA^ T hisis 'b ecause they develop from
N
a single egg w hich divides in- two during th e very early stages of preg-
NH
nancy.
For scientists, the non-physical sim ilarities between identical tw ins
UY
are the m ost interesting: are they the resu lt of growing u p together in
the sam e hom e, or are they the result of th eir identical DNA? By stu d y -
.Q
ing identical twins who have not grown up together, research ers can
TP
see w hich sim ilarities rem ain an d which disappear. In oth er words,
O
they can learn w hich aspects of a persons identity are determ ined by

genes an d w hich are influenced by the environm ent. The M innesota
Twin S tudy is probably the best-know n twin stu dy to date. The study
NG
provides inform ation abou t how o ur environm ent an d genes work to-
H
gether to influence everything from attitu d es, talen ts a n d abilities, to
job selection, to falling in love, to aging and health.
N
Identical tw ins Jim Lewis and Jim Springer were only four w eeks old
when they were separated; each infant was taken in by a different
TR
adoptive family. At age five, Lewis learned th a t he h ad a twin, b u t he
B
said th a t the idea never truly soaked in until he w as 38 years old.
00
Springer learned of his twin a t age eight, b u t both he and his adoptive
10
p aren ts believed the b roth er h a d died. The two J im s were finally re-
united a t age 39.
+3
The sim ilarities the tw ins shared not only am azed one an o th er, b u t
P2
also am azed research ers a t the University of M innesota. The very fact
C
th a t both tw ins were given .the sam e nam e w as a big coincidence. B ut

th e re s more.
A
H
As youngsters, each Jim had a dog nam ed Toy.

Each Jim h ad been m arried twice - the first wives were b oth called
-
Linda an d the second wives were both called Betty.

-L
One Jim h a d nam ed his son Ja m e s Allan an d the o th er Jim h ad

nam ed his son Ja m e s Alan.
N
Each twin h ad driven his light-blue Chevrolet to the sam e beach in

TO
Florida for family vacations.

Both Jim s h ad a t one time held part-tim e po sts as sheriffs.
NG
0 Both were fingernail biters and suffered from m igraine headaches.

While not as eerily sim ilar a s the Jim twins, m any m ere instan ces of

strange likenesses can be found am ong tw ins who were raised ap art.
ID
For example, identical tw ins Tom Patterson an d Steve Tazurni h ad very

different upbringings. Raised in a C hristian family by two ja n ito rs in
B
ru ral K ansas, Tom still m anaged to choose the sam e career a s his
236

brother. Steve, who lives in Philadelphia, w as raised in a B u dd h ist

household. Both m en own body-building gyms.
N
Its obvious from these tw ins stories th a t genetics are a m ajor factor
in sh aping who we are. In fact, research so far indicates th a t c h a rac te r-
NH
istics su ch as personality are m ainly related to genes. This m ean s th a t
o ur c h a ra c te r tra its as ad u lts are largely determ ined before we are born
UY
- a n d th ere is very little th a t we, or anybody else, ca n do to change
.Q
them .
TP
1. Identical tw ins look the s a m e _____
O
A. b u t usually have very different ch aracters.

B. and are usually identical in ch arac ter too.
c . an d are often very sim ilar in ch aracte r too.
NG
D. b u t rarely th in k in the sam e way.
H
2 . Unlike non-identical tw ins, identical tw ins a r e _____
A. more com m on am ong Asians th a n Africans. *
N
B. becom ing m ore and more common.
TR
c . more com m on am ong older m others.
D. equally com m on everywhere.
B
00
3. S cientists are particularly interested in identical tw ins w h o _____

10
A. have been raised by different families.

B. are genetically exactly the same.
+3
c . look a n d behave in very sim ilar ways.

P2
D. are n o t alike in term s of personality.

C
4. While they were growing up, twins Jim Lewis an d Jim sp rin g er
A
A. were in regu lar contact.

H
B. knew ab o u t th eir twin, b u t had no contact,

-
c. did n o t know they h ad ever had a twin.

-L
D. were prevented from seeing each other by th e ir adoptive fami-

lies.
N
5. W hen the two Jim s m et a s ad u lts, how did they react to the sim i-
TO
larities betw een them ?

A. They h ad always expected them .
NG
B. They found th em very am using.

c . They did n o t realise how sim ilar they were until the researchers

told them .
ID
D. They were very surprised.

B
6 . As a d u lts, th e tw ins ;
A. b o th h ad onlv one child.
B. both got m arried twice.
237
c. had pets, w ith th e sam e nam e. ,

' S. m arried women- who were identical,tw ins. ^ ..
7.. How o other, .cases'of -twins raised ..apart .compare .with th e Jim
N
.twins?!;>;v ; ^ V :: Mi
A. They are all ju s t a s surprising. t
NH
B. They are less surprising, b u t often show in tere stin g coinci-
dences.
UY
c . Many of them are even more surprising.
.Q
D. Most of them show th a t other pairs of identical tw ins are not
TP
very similar.
O
8. According to the text, you m ight find it difficult to change your p er-

sonality b e c a u s e _____
A. only other people can change it.
NG
B. it is determ ined m ainly by how your p aren ts tre at you.
c. you c a n t control your surround ings.
H
D. you get your personality from your parents.
N
GLOSSARY
to take it for granted that... xem l
chuyn ng nhin rng...
TR
- to age tr nn gi i, io ha
- infant tr s sinh
B
unique (adj) c o - adoptive family gia nh nhn con
00
identical, twins nhng cp sinh i nui

10
ging ht nhau - to soak in (mt tng) hin hin r

notion khi nim - coincidence s trng hp ngu nhin
+3
unnervingly (adv) khin ngi ta cm - sheriff cnh st trng

P2
thy ng ngng - fingernail biter ngi c thi quen

mannerism t li c x
C
gm mng tay
personality traits cc c im v - migraine headache chng nhc na
A
nhn cch u
H
at random (adv) mt cch ngu nhin - eerily (adv) gy cm gic rn ngi v

ethnic (adj) thuc chng tc s
-
non-identical twins cp sinh i - instance trng hp xy ra

-L
khng ging nhau' - likeness s ging ht nhau

- to tell sth apart phn bit c hai ci - upbringing mi trng nui dy
N
gi -janitor nhn vin v sinh v chm sc

stages of pregnancy cc giai on khu nh
TO
mang thai, thai k - rural (adj) ti/ thuc nng thn

non-physical (adj) khng thuc v th - Buddhist (adj) theo o Pht
NG
Chat - body-building gym phng tp th dc

- aspect phng din, kha cnh th hnh

- identity bn sc, nt ring - genetics s di truyn
ID
- to date (adv) tnh cho n nay - character traits cc c im v tnh

cch
B
238

98 NUCLEAR WEAPONS
It is generally well know n th a t in a num ber of particularly, dangerous
N
p a rts of the world, for exam ple the Middle E ast an d the In d ia/P ak ista n
border region, th ere are countries which either possess, or have the
NH
technology to produce, nuclear weapons. It is also w orth rem em bering,
however, th a t the country which possesses more n u clear w eapons th a n
UY
any other, the United States, is the only power ever to have u sed n u -
.Q
clear w eapons ag a in st people.
TP
Nuclear w eapons were first developed in the United S tates during
th e Second World War, to be used against Germany. However, by the
O
tim e the first bom bs were ready for use, the w ar w ith Germ any had

ended and, a s a result, the decision w as m ade to use th e w eapons
against J a p a n instead. Hiroshim a an d Nagasaki have suffered the con-
NG
sequences of th is decision to the present day.
H
The real reaso n s why bom bs were dropped on two heavily-populated
cities are not altogether clear. A n um ber of people in 1944 an d early
N
1945 argued th a t th e Use of n u clear weapons would be u nnecessary,
TR
since Am erican Intelligence w as aw are th a t some of the m ost powerful
and influential people in J a p a n had already realized th a t the war was
B
lost, an d w anted to negotiate a Jap a n ese surrender. It was also argued
00
that, since J a p a n h a s few n atu ral resources, a blockade by the Ameri-

10
can navy would force it to su rren d er within a few weeks, an d the u se of

+3
nuclear w eapons would th u s prove unnecessary. If a dem onstration of

force w as required to end the war, a bom b could be dropped over a n
P2
un po pulated area like a desert, in front of Ja p a n e se observers, or over

C
an area of low population inside Ja p a n , su ch as a forest. Opting for

this course of action m ight minimize the loss of fu rth er lives on all
A
sides, while th e power of nuclear w eapons would still be adequately

H
dem onstrated.
-
All of thee argum ents were rejected, however, and the general con-
-L
sen su s w as th a t the quickest way to end the fighting would be to use

n uclear w eapons ag ain st centres of population inside J a p a n . In fact,
N
two of the m ore likely reasons why this decision w as reached seem
TO
quite shocking to u s now.

Since the beginning of the Second World W ar both Germ any and
NG
J a p a n h ad adopted a policy of genocide (i,e. killing as m any people as

possible, including civilians). Later on, even the us an d B ritain had

used th e strategy of fire bom bing cities (Dresden an d Tokyo, for exam -
ID
ple) in order to kill, injure an d intim idate as m any civilians as possible.

Certainly, the general public in th e West had become used to hearing
B
ab ou t the d ea th s of large n u m bers of people, so the d ea th s of an oth er

few th o u sa n d Jap a n ese , who were the enemy in any case, would not
239

seem particularly unacceptable - a bit of justifiable revenge for the

Allies own losses, perhaps.
The second reaso n is n ot m uch easier to com prehend. Some of th e
N
leading scientists in the world h ad collaborated to develop nu clea r
w eapons, an d th is developm ent h a d resulted in a n u m b er of m ajor a d -
NH
vances in technology an d scientific knowledge. As a resu lt, a lot of
norm al, intelligent people w anted to see n u clear w eapons used; they
UY
w anted to see ju s t how destructive th is new invention could be- It no
.Q
doubt tu rn ed o u t to be even more effective th a n they h a d im agined.
TP
1. In paragraph 1, the w riter is suggesting t h a t _____ .
O
A. th e U nited S tates should, if necessary, use n u clea r w eapons

again.
B. the United S tates is more likely th a n o ther countries to use n u -
NG
clear weapons.
H
G. the United S tates is one of several co untries to have used n u -
clear w eapons.
N
D. the United S tates could potentially use n u clear w eapons again.
TR
2. The w riter refers to norm al, intelligent people in parag rap h 6 b e-
cause _____
B
A. he w ants to em phasize the fact th a t they were am ong the clev-
00
erest scientists.
10
B. he feels the decision to use n u clear w eapons ag ain st J a p a n w as

+3
correct.
c. he believes this m akes the decision to u se n u clea r w eapons
P2
seem m ore shocking.

C
D. he w ants to show how m any people w anted to observe the

bom bs being dropped.
A
H
3. According to p arag raph 3, a blockade would have been successful

b e c a u s e _____
-
A. J a p a n h a s to im port m ost of its n atu ra l reso urces like coal an d

-L
steel.
B. J a p a n would not be resourceful enough to bea t a blockade.
N
c . an a ttac k would probably destroy J ap a n e se reso u rces w ithin a

TO
few weeks.
D. the Am ericans could defeat J a p a n s navy since it w as sh o rt of
NG
resources.

4. In the last sentence of parag raph 6 , th e w riter implies t h a t _____

A. he agrees w ith the decision to u se n u clear w eapons again st J a -
ID
pan.
B
B. he th in k s th e decision to drop n uclear bom bs on J a p a n ese cit-

ies w as wrong.
240

CTnuclear w eapons w orked m uch b etter th a n the scientists

probably expected.
D. th e w eapons proved to be effective because J a p a n su rren dered
N
soon after.
NH
5. The first sentence of p arag raph 6 suggests the w riter believes th a t
UY
A. th e decisions were m ade by intelligent peop a n d were difficult
to follow.
.Q
B. his p resen tatio n of th e arg u m en t in parag rap h 5 is difficult to
TP
understand.
c . th e re aso n s given for th e decision are h ard for. u s to accept
O
nowadays.

D. th e decisions were complex and m ade by highly intelligent peo-
NG
ple.
6 . According to p arag raph 5, w hich of the following is t r u e _____
H
A. people in th e West h ad got u sed to hearing the so un ds of people
dying.
N
B. it w ould probably n o t be wise to inform people in th e W est of
th e deaths. TR
c . scientists th o u g h t only a few th o u san d people would die if the
B
bom bs were used.
00
D. people in the W est would accept th a t some people h ad to die to

10
end the war.

+3
7. How m any reaso n s ag ainst using the w eapons are given in p a ra -

P2
graph 3?
A. two B. th ree c . four D. five
C
8 . From th e last sentence o f'paragraph 4, we can infer t h a t _____

A
A. th e real reaso n s for the 'decision may never have been m ade
H
clear.
B. the w riter probably expects u s not to agree w ith his opinion.
-
c . th e w riter h a s not done m u ch research on th is subject to e stab -

-L
lish th e facts.
D. the w riter h a s attem pted to p re sen t title facts a s objectively a s
N
possible.
TO
9. W hat does th is refer to in parag rap h 3 _____ .

A. blockading J a p a n a n d dropping a n uclear bom b on a n area of
NG
low population

B. u sin g a bom b ag ain st some Jap a n e se observers or on a n a rea of

low population '
ID
c . dropping a bom b in a n area of low population in front of J a p a -

nese w itnesses
B
D. dropping a n u clea r w eapon over a forest in Ja p a n
241

10. W hich 1of ;ihe fo'll^wiîg oould b est .replace .n a tu ra l reso u rces in
parag raph 3 . . V- '
A. characteristics such- as. detejqpbination. an d resou rcefulness
N
B. ports a n d harbo urs. ''
c . w orkers w ith n a tu ra l ability-
NH
D. m aterials su ch s coal an d iron
UY
1 1. W hich is closest in m eaning to' the last sentence of p arag ra p h 2:
A. the cities of Hiroshim a an d N agasaki were badly dam aged w hen
.Q
they were bom bed
TP
B. H iroshim a an d Nagasaki suffered because J a p a n would n o t
agree to end th e w ar
O

c. the awful effects of dropping n u clear bom bs on th ese cities can
s till be fe lt
NG
D. the end of the wax w ith Germ any m ean t th a t H iroshim a an d
Nagasaki would suffer
H
12. justifiab le in p arag raph 5 is in inverted com m as b e c a u s e _____
N
A. the word is. used in an u n u su a l way.
B. th e w riter is quoting from th e decision m akers,
c . it is no t really correct English. TR
D. it m ight not be altogether appropriate here.
B
00
10
GLOSSARY
+3
- nuclear weapon v. kh ht nhn - to minimize gim thiu, thu nh n

- consequence hu qu
P2
mc thp nht
- heavily-populated (adv) ng dn c - genocide s/ ti dit chng
C
- altogether (av) hon ton, ht thy - civilian dn thng

- intelligence s/ ngnh tnh bo - strategy chin lc
A
- influential (adj) c nhiu th lc - to intimidate sb lm ai s hi

H
- to negotiate thng thuyt, thng - justifiable (adj) c th bin minh c

lng - revenge s tr th
-
- surrender s u hng - the Allies phe ng minh (trong Th

-L
- blockade s phong ta Chien II)

- navy hi qun - to comprehend hiu c
N
- demonstration of force s biu - to collaborate hp tc

dng lc Ing - destructive (adj) c sc hy dit/ gy
TO
- unpopulated (adj) khng c dn c . nhiu tn ph

NG
- to opt for sth chn ia ci g - potentially (adv) c tim nng

- a course of action phng hng - objectively (adv) mt cch khch quan

hnh ng - resourcefulness ti xoay x kho lo

- to quote trch dn
ID
B
242

99 THE REAL THING?
N
One of th e m ost successful com m ercial p ro d u c ts ever launch ed is
said to have come ab o u t a s th e re su lt of a m istake. In 1896, Ja c o b s
NH
Pharm acy in A tlanta, Georgia, w as selling a nerve tonic known as
F rench Wine Cola - Ideal Nerve Tonic. By accidentally ad ding fizzy
UY
w ater in stead of still w ater to the recipe, a p h arm acist called Jo h n s.
Pem berton invented w h a t h a s today become th e m o st popular soft
.Q
drink in th e world: Coca-Cola. Along w ith its closest rival - Pepsi -
TP
which appeared on th e m arket three y ears later, Goke h a s enjoyed
phenom enal su ccess worldwide, particularly in the p a st fifty years. In-
O
deed, old Coke bottles an d lim ited edition c a n s can often fetch con-

siderable su m s from collectors, an d th ere are even stores w hich deal
exclusively in Coke p rod u cts an d memorabilia.
NG
W hat could possibly acco unt for the am azing su ccess of Coca-Cola?
H
How h a s th is com bination of carbonated w ater, sugar, acid an d fla-
vourings come to symbolize the American way of life for m ost of the
N
world? After all, even the m an u factu rers could h ardly describe Coke as
a healthy p rod uct since it con tain s relatively high a m o u n ts of su g ar
TR
(admittedly n o t the case with Diet Coke which con tain s artificial sweet-
B
eners instead of sugar) an d phosphoric acid, both of w hich are know n
00
to dam age teeth.

10
One explanation m ay be found in the nam e. The. original recipe in -

+3
cluded a flavouring from th e coca p lan t an d probably included sm all

am o u n ts of cocaine (an addictive substance), b u t since th e early p a rt of
P2
th is cen tu ry all trac es of cocaine have been removed. However, Coke

C
(like all cola drinks) also includes a flavouring from the cola tree; cola
extract co n tain s caffeine, which is a stim ulan t, a n d the Coca-Cola
A
com pany adds ex tra caffeine for good m easure. While caffeine is not
H
th o u g h t to be a n addictive su b stan c e in itself, th ere is considerable evi-

dence th a t over a period of time the consum ption of caffeine h a s to be
-
increased in order for its stim ulating effect to be m aintained, and so

-L
sales of Coke p erh ap s benefit a s a result.

A m ore likely reason for the end uring popularity of Coke may, how-
N
ever, be found in th e com panys enviable m arketing strategies. Over the

TO
years it h a s come up with some of the m ost m em orable com m ercials,

tu nes, slogans an d sponsorship in the world of advertising, variously
NG
em phasizing intern atio n al harm ony, yo uthfulness an d a carefree life-

style. Few o th er com panies (arguably including Pepsi) have been able to

m atch su c h m arketing ploys so consistently o r effectively. As suggested

earlier, th e influences of American cu ltu re axe evident ju s t ab o u t eve-
ID
rywhere, an d Coca-Cola h a s somehow come to rep resent a vision of the

B
United S ta tes th a t m uch of th e re st of th e world dream s ab o u t an d a s -

pires to. P erh ap s drinking Coke brings people th a t little bit closer to the
dream .

1. In parag rap h .1. can s can. often fetch considerable su m s m eans

'. the sam e as' ' r" : ^ ' yY
: A-: Coke iS'guite expensive in some p arts of the world
N
B. collectors consider carefully how m uch they are paying for a can
NH
V of Coke J :
c . some collectors will only d rin k Coke in exclusive stores
UY
D. certain Coke cans are worth a lot of m oney a s collectable item s
.Q
2. The w riter u ses for good m easure in p aragrap h 3 to em phasize th e
fact t h a t _____ .
TP
A. there is a lQt of caffeine in Coke
O
B. the am o u n t of caffeine in Coke is carefully m easu red

c . the extra caffeine improves th e tast of Coke
D. the extra caffeine balances the am o u n t found naturally in the
NG
cola extract
H
3. Coke h a s enjoyed phenom enal success" p arag rap h 1 suggests the
w rite r _____ .
N
A. th in k s th a t the success of Coke is very strange
B. believes th a t the success of Coke h as been im pressive
c . ra th e r disapproves of the success of Goke
TR
B
D. considers the su ccess of Coke to be undeserved
00
4. Describing Cokes m arketing strategies a s enviable in p arag ra p h 4,

10
m eans t h a t _____ .
+3
A. the strategies are based on envy

P2
B. Cokes m arketing staff are encouraged to be envious of each

o th ers ideas
C
c. people are p ersu ad ed to buy Coke because they are envious of

A
oth ers
H
D. rivals are envious of the Coke com panys successful m ethods of

m arketing
-
5. variously em phasizing in p arag rap h 4 is closest in m eaning t o __

-L
. stressing a t different tim es

N
B. using a wide variety of em phasis

c . stressing at the sam e time
TO
D. using a p artic ula r order of em phasis

NG
6 . In the last sentence of the passage the w riter implies t h a t _____ .

A. m ost people would like to live in America

B. m any people w ish for a lifestyle like they im agine m ost Ameri-
ID
cans have
c. drinking Coke rem inds a lot of people of visiting America
B
D. living in the United S tates is a bit like living in a dream
244

Y '
7. both of w hich in paragrap h 2 refers to ____ .
A. phosphoric a n d acid
B. su gar an d artificial sweetener
N
c. su g ar a n d phosphoric acid
NH
D. artificial sw eetener an d phosphoric acid
8 . In p arag rap h 1, the w riter points out t h a t _____ .
UY
A. Coke is so pop ular th a t some shops sell nothing else
.Q
B. only certain people are allowed to en ter the m ost popular Coke
stores
TP
c . some stores can successfully sell Coke at higher prices
O
D. Coke is. so pop ular th a t some shops only sell goods w ith the

Coke label
9. The sentence in lines 33-35 m eans t h a t _______ .
NG
A. Pepsi an d a few other com panies have h ad better m arketing
H
th a n Coca-Cola
B. the Coke com pany h a s been m ore successful in m arketing th a n
N
m ost o thers
c . some com panies have copied Coca- Colas m arketing strategies
very effectively
TR
B
D. no o th er com pany h a s been as successful as Coca-Cola in m ar-
00
keting its products

10
10. ju s t abou t everywhere in paragraph 4 is closest in m eaning to ___

+3
A. in a lot of countries
P2
B. in every p a rt of the world

c . in a m ajority of places
C
D. in alm ost every p a rt of the world

A
11. In the last sentence of paragraph 2, the writer im plies t h a t _____ .

H
A. it is easy for the com pany to argue th a t Coke is a healthy drink

B. h e /s h e considers Coke to be un healthy a s a drink
-
c . the com pany believes Coke is n ot a n un h ea lth y product

-L
D. Coke is, in fact, quite a healthy drink

N
12. Along w ith its closest rival - Pepsi paragraph 1 refers to the fact
t h a t _____ .
TO
A. Coke an d Pepsi work very closely together

NG
B. Pepsi is Cokes only com petitor

c . Coke an d Pepsi are com petitors in the sam e m arket

D. Coke a n d Pepsi between them keep rivals out of the m arket

ID
13. In the second sentence of parag raph 2, the w riter seem s surprised
t h a t _____
B
A. som ething so norm al could have such im portance

B. all the ingredients can be found in m ost countries
24
c . m ost o f the ingredients; are not very healthy

D. Coke m u st be so easy to produce -
14. W hich of the .following, statem ents a b o u t the passage is t r u e __ _
N
A. Cocaine an d caffeine are addictive su bstances.
NH
B. At least one of the ingredients of Coke is addictive.
UY
c. The stim ulating effect of caffeine is reduced over time u n less
consum ption of it is increased.
.Q
TP
D. The Coca-Cola com pany h a s gradually increased th e am o u n t of
caffeine it p u ts in Coke.
O

GLOSSARY
NG
- to launch a product tung mt sn - stimulant cht kch thch
H
phm ra th trng
- for good measure nh th/ mn
N
- nerve tonic thc ung bi b thn kinh thm vo ci c sn
- accidentally (adv) do v tnh - stimulating effect tc dng kch thch
TR
- fizzy water thc ung c ga - enduring (adj) lu di, vnh cu
B
00
- phenomenal (adj) nh mt hin - enviable (adj) khin ngi khc thm

10
tng, gy n tng mnh mun/ ganh t

+3
- exclusively (adv) mt cch c quyn - marketing strategies cc chin lc

tip th
P2
- to deal in sth bun bn mn g

- commercial on phim qung co
C
- memorabilia cc mn lu nim
- tune giai iu, iu nhc
- carbonated water nc s-a
A
- slogan khu hiu

H
- flavouring cht to hng v

- harmony s ha thun, h ha
- Diet Coke Coca-Cola dnh cho ngi
-
n king - youthfulness tnh cht tr trung

-L
- artificial sweetener ng nhn to - carefree (adj) v -t, khng phi lo lng

N
- coca plant cy cca - arguably (adv) c kh nng l, rt c

TO
th l
- cocaine cht c-ca-in
- ploy mnh ii, xo thut, tr ma mnh
NG
- addictive (adj) c tnh gy nghin

- consistently (adv) mt cch nht qun

- trace du vt, vt tch

- to aspire to sth khao kht/ ao c c
- cola extract cht chit sut t cy c-
ID
c ci g
la
B
246

100 LETTER OF COMPLAINT

D ear Sirs,
N
Your sh ip m en t of twelve th o u sa n d S m art w atches w as received by
NH
o u r com pany th is m orning. However, we wish to m ake a n u m b er of
com plaints concerning th e serious delay in delivery and y ou r failure to
UY
c a n y o u t o u r explicit in stru ctio n s w ith regard to th is order.
It w as stressed from the o u tset th a t the delivery date h a d to be les
.Q
th a n six w eeks from the initial order, in order to comply w ith o u r own
TP
c u sto m ers requ irem ents. While we appreciate th a t delays in prod uc-
O
tion are occasionally inevitable, we m u st point o u t th a t the m ajor rea -

son why th e order w as placed w ith y o ur com pany w as b ec au se we were
a ssu re d by you of its straightforw ardness, an d th a t y ou r existing
NG
stocks were sufficiently high to ensu re im m ediate shipm ent. Late deliv-
ery of the goods h a s caused u s to disappoint several of o u r m ost valued
H
custom ers, a n d is b ou nd to have a n adverse effect on potential fu tu re
orders.
N
The second com plaint concerns th e discrepancy in colour between
TR
the w atches we ordered an d those delivered. It w as stated clearly in the
original order th a t w atches in com binations of g re en /p u rp le a n d or-
B
00
a n g e /p u rp le only were required. However, only half the w atches in th e

delivery received are of th e colours specified. O ur Hong Kong ag ent a s -
10
su re s u s th a t she stressed to you the im portance of following o u r in -

+3
stru ctio n s precisely, since we consider th ere to be only a limited m arket

P2
in th is country for w atches of o th er colours a t th e present, time. Any

w atch es th a t are n o t of th e specified colours will, of course, be retu rn ed
C
to you.
A
We are also som ew hat concerned ab o u t th e ra th e r poor quality of

H
the goods received, since it is ap p a ren t th a t the w atches th a t finally a r-

rived have been p roduced from inferior m aterials and have been m a n u -
-
factured to a lower stan d ard th a n those in th e sam ple. We have also

-L
found th a t a n u m b er of the w atches do not ap p ear to be functioning.

W hether th e la tte r problem is due to poor m an u facture, dam age in
N
tra n sit or defective b atterie s is not yet clear, b u t we should like to point
TO
o u t th a t we feel th is m atte r to be entirely your responsibility.

As a re su lt of th e above problem s, therefore, we. feel th a t the m ost
NG
suitable course of action is to re tu rn to you u np aid any of the goods

considered unsatisfacto ry , a n d to ded u ct any costs in cu rred from our

final settlem ent. .We shall also, of course, be forced to reconsider
ID
w hether any fu rth e r orders should be placed with y our com pany.
B
We look forward to y ou r prom pt reply.
247

1. How m any of th e w atches will be retu rn ed to the m an u fa ctu rers?

A. 6,000
B. less th a n 6,000
c . more th a n 6,000
N
D. th e passage d oesnt give enough inform ation to answ er
NH
2. The m an u fa ctu rers of S m art w atches were given th e order b e-
cause _____ ..
UY
A. they were assu re d a n d there was sufficient space for im m ediate
.Q
shipm ent
B. the w atches would be easy to m ake an d the designs were al-
TP
ready prepared
O
c . they prom ised they could produce enough stocks quite quickly

D. they claim ed the order would be easy since the w atches were al-
ready in stock
NG
3. Receiving w atches in the wrong colours is a problem b e c a u s e ____.
H
A. the Hong Kong agent stressed the need to fulfil the order exactly
B. these w atches will be difficult to sell
N
c . they will n ot be able to get into the limited m arket
D. people will not buy the w atches a s presents
4.
TR
Which of th e following does th e latter problem in p arag rap h 4 re-
B
fer t o _____
00
A. the poor quality of the goods

10
B. the u se of inferior m aterials

c . the low stan d a rd of m anufacture
+3
D. some of th e w atches no t working

P2
5. The last sentence of parag raph 5 h a s been included in o rder to

C
suggest t h a t _____ .
A. the receiving com pany m ay cease trading w ith th e w atch m a n u -
A
factu rers
H
B. th e com pany will probably .reduce the n u m b er of w atches it or-

ders in future
-
c . th e w riters are afraid their com pany m ight go ou t of b u sin ess

-L
soon
D. the com pany are probably willing to give the m an u fac tu rers a n -
N
other ch ance
TO
6 . Late delivery will have an adverse effect on futu re orders in p a ra -

graph 2 b e c a u s e _____ .
NG
A. the com pany will no longer place orders with the m an u factu rers

B. future orders will have to be delivered sooner

c . the com pany is su re to lose some of its b u sin ess w ith its c u s-
ID
tom ers
D. the com pany will certainly have to advertise itself m ore effec-
B
tively in future
248

7. limited m ark e t in th is country for w atches of o th er colour s in

parag rap h 3 m e a n s _____ .
A. not m any shops are able to sell su ch w atches
N
B. o th er w atch com panies m ake it difficult for new com ers to entei
the m ark et
NH
c. m ark et stalls d on 't seem to sell su ch w atches here
UY
D. not m any people are interested in buying su ch w atches
8 . adverse in p arag raph 2 m eans the sam e a s _____ .
.Q
A. unfavourable B. positive
TP
c . reduced D. prom otional
O
9. W hich of th e following does th is refer to in p aragraph 4 ' _____ .

A. poor m an ufactu re
B. dam age during transp orta tion
NG
c. poor m an u factu re, dam age d uring tran sp o rta tio n a n d defective
H
batteries
D. the problem of w atches not working
N
10. In th e last sentence of p arag rap h 4 the w riter im plies t h a t _____ .
TR
A. the w atch m an u fa ctu rers have tried to cheat th e com pany
B. h is /h e r com pany does not intend to pay for dam aged w atches
B
c. the m an u factu re rs have behaved irresponsibly in this m atter
00
D. the com pany w ould prefer not to attac h blam e for the problem
10
11. In th e last sentence of paragrap h 3, specified colours refers to

+3
P2
. A. th e w rong colours
B. w atches of other colours
C
c. the'colou rs originally ordered

D. none o f the above
A
H
12. W hich of the following best describes the general tone of the letter
-
A. angry an d aggressive B. firm b u t polite

-L
c . reasonable b u t impolite D. polite an d forgiving

N
GLOSSARY
TO
- shipment s/ s lng hng ha vn - discrepancy s khng nht qun,

chuyn khng khp, s lch, s thiu thng
NG
- explicit (adj) rrng, y chi tit, nht

minh bch - in combinations of theo cc cch kt

- to stress nhn mnh hp (mu sc)

- from the outset ngay t u - specified (adj) c xc nh r
ID
- to comply with sth tun th chp - agent i l bn hng

hnh ci g - precisely (adv) mt cch chnh xc
B
- inevitable (adj) tt yu, khng th - inferior (adj) thp km, km cht

trnh c lng, ti

^ to place an order wi;stf rnua ;': -.V -rSamp.le.mau hangt: ...

; hng vi i. t V ' ; ^ ' ' ~ n ti^nsjt trong lc chuyn ch
- straightfonvrns^ s-,gian^.s. . . -''defective (adj) c khiiyet tt, c trc
r rng, d hi ' 4 :tro ' ' ' ^
N
-stock ltng.hiîia-tg^TOng..-'--,'-''' :'-uhpard;:(adj) khng c tr tin
kho .> ' ' - t deduct khutr ' 1 :
NH
- to be bound ;t'.do 5th nht nh/ chc - t o incursth gnh chu, mc.phi, b ci
chn s lm g... ; g
UY
- adverse (adj) bt li, gy hi . - stall giari hng, quy hng
.Q
101 REALITY TV
TP
Chris Dufford gives u s the scoop on reality show s.
O

T heres a new kind of program me on television, an d its hardly like
television, at all. Its called reality TV and, a s the nam e suggests, it is
NG
supposed to show u s som ething very real. The p articip an ts a re n t a c -
tors a t all, b u t ordinary people in th eir daily lives. We, the viewers,
H
m ight see them eating, sleeping, arguing or having a good time. We can
hear all their conversations and w atch their every move. Reality shows,
N
therefore, are not regular television program m es a t all. Instead they
give u s a close-up look into other people's lives. TR
Why have reality shows become so popular? W hat m ak es u s w an t to
B
00
w atch reality show s on TV? To begin with, we feel th a t we get to know

the p articipants. We know their n am es from the beginning an d g ra d u -
10
ally we learn m ore abo ut them . We might even come t like some of
+3
them. O th ers, we m ight not like a t all! Reality shows take u s inside the
P2
lives of other people. Mostly, people wonder w h at its like to be som eone
else. Experiencing other peoples lives can be a great escape from o u r
C
own.
A
Some people say this h a s a very healthy effect on society a n d its a

H
harm less an d en tertaining way of passing the time. O ther people,- how-
ever, are not in favour of reality TV. Critics say th a t it is no t really en -
-
terta in m en t at all. W hat could be entertainin g ab o u t two people doing

-L
th eir laundry or preparing the evening meal? Who w ants to w atch th at?
N
Who w ants to h ea r all of th eir secrets and gossip? Some social scien-
tists even say th a t reality TV could have dam aging effects on society.
TO
W hat kinds of people ta k e: p art in reality program m es? Well, since

NG
the particip an ts m ay win a prize, they m ight be doing it for th e money.

There could be o ther reason s a s well. For example, the participa n ts on

these show s become well known to the viewers. They m ay even become
fam ous an d find more work in TV after the reality show ends. Not only
ID
th at, b u t some people may really like the atten tio n of millions of eyes
B
on them everv day an d night. Clearly, reality TV is not for shy people!
250

New reality show s ap p e ar all the time. They ca n take place on a

farm , in a n ap a rtm e n t or even on an island. E ach time a new show be-
gins, it seem s to be even more daring th an the previous one. W hat do
N
you th in k the fu tu re holds for reality TV? Could the next show take
NH
place in your city, neighbourhood or school? Eventually, th e day may
come w hen we are all p a rt of reality TV!
UY
X. W hat does the w riter say ab o u t reality TV?
.Q
A. Its like ordinary television.
TP
B. The p a rtic ip a n ts are professional actors.
c. It gives u s an idea of w h at other peoples lives are like.
O

D. It sh o u ld n t be shown on TV.
2. The w riter th in k s reality shows have become popular becau se
NG
H
A. we leam the nam es of th e participants.
B. viewers are c uriou s ab o u t o th er peoples lives,
N
c . we like to w atch fam ous people.
D. they have a healthy effect on society..
TR
3. W hat does O th e rs in p arag raph 2 refer to?
B
A. people on reality shows
00
B. reality shows
10
c . different kinds of TV program m e

+3
D. th e ways some people live

P2
4. Some people are against reality TV because they s a y _____

C
A. people m ight learn dangerous secrets.

B. it w astes peoples time,
A
c . it is un interesting .
H
D. gossip can h u rt peoples feelings.

-
5. W hich o? th ese reaso n s for going on a reality show does the w riter
-L
NOT m ention?
A. m aking money
N
B. attra c tin g attentio n

G. w orking in th e m edia
TO
D. developing you r personality

NG
6 . W hat does th e w riter predict ab o u t the futu re of reality TV?

A. They will m ake program m es on a farm.

B. Reality TV will become less popular.

ID
c . Everybody m ay get the chance to tak e part.

D. They will m ake program m es in fewer areas.
B
251

GLOSSARY
- reality w truyn hinh th u t-te . .^/-cnticTiha ph bnh, ngui ch trch';
- a scoop on sth'thong.tiQ.'.fnî 'nhat v . < to; doône's laundry git qun o
close-up look mpt cai .phin cn cnh; : r.-gossp chuy?n n9i ! i mch' chuy?n
N
' . 2 /, :buO;dal
NH
102 TKHE SURGEON o l1' CRQWTHORNE
UY
The Surgeon o f Crowthome tells th e fascinating story of how one of
.Q
the m ost im p ortan t reference works in the E nglish language, the Ox-
TP
ford English Dictionary, cam e into being an d of two m en who devoted
m uch of th eir lives to th e H erculean ta sk of its production. It is also a
O
study of the h u m an condition, and particularly, of m adness.

The story begins on a cold, dark w inters night in Lam beth, w hich
NG
was a seedy London slum in the year 1871. The peace th a t night w as
suddenly broken w hen g u n sh o ts were fired in the still, quiet air. A po-
H
lice constable h eard the shots' an d w ent ru n n in g to see w h at h ad taken
N
place. George M erritt, a young Irish labourer who h ad been on h is way
to work h ad been shot dead and William C hester Minor, a n Am erican
TR
doctor who w as living in London at. the time, freely adm itted th a t he
w as the perpetrato r of the crime. In the confusion of h is to rtu red m ind,
B
00
Minor h ad been convinced th a t M erritt was torm enting him . Minor was
tried and sentenced to be detained for life in Broadmoor,, a n asylum
10
which h ad been specially built to house the crim inally insane.

+3
Ja m e s M urray w as the brilliant an d m ainly self-taught scholar who

P2
had been appointed to take over the im m ense ta sk of w riting the Ox-
C
ford English Dictionary a t a time when there were fears th a t th e dic-

tionary would never be complete.d- M urray knew th a t it w as a ta sk far
A
too great for one m an to complete alone and so, on being given th e a s -
H
signm ent, he h ad leaflets printed inviting m em bers of th e public to con-

trib u te entries to the dictionary.
-
-L
One of th ese leaflets found its way to Broadm oor, an d Doctor Minor
read it avidly. Books h ad become a way of life for him an d they lined
N
the walls of h is cell. Minor becam e one of M urrays m ost productive

TO
contributors, supplying him with th o u san d s of illustrative quotations

for the dictionary. A long correspondence a n d friendship developed b e-
NG
tween the two m en whose com mon bond w as th eir love of books an d
words. However, M urray h ad no idea th a t his devoted friend an d con-

trib u to r w as a lunatic an d m urderer, as Minor gave h is ad d ress as

ID
simply Broadm oor, C row thorne,.B erkshire. Not u n n atu rally , M urray
assum ed th a t his friend was the governor of B roadm oor or a doctor
B
working w ith the inm ates. He invited Minor to visit him on n u m ero u s
252

occasions, b u t Minor pleaded poverty an d a n indisposition to travel.

Since, in tho se days, travelling aro un d th e coun try w as ex h au sting and
N
expensive a n d correspondence w as a m uch m ore com m on a n d n a tu ra l
way for people to com m unicate, th ese reaso n s were accepted by the
NH
learned scholar.
UY
Nevertheless, M urray w as n atu rally eager to m eet his sta r co n trib u -
tor a n d so h e finally se t o u t for B roadm oor one day in 1897, nearly
.Q
tw enty y ears alter th e ir correspondence h ad begun. W hen he arrived
TP
there, he w as asto n ish ed to discover th a t Doctor William M inor was no t
O
th e Governor or a senior m em ber of staff, as h e h a d supposed, b u t an

inm ate himself.
The sad a n d often harrow ing story of how M inor ended u p in
NG
Broadm oor, a n d the u n h ap p y circ um stan ces of his life before th a t fate-
H
ful m orning in 1871, is recounted in gripping detail; a s is th a t of Ja m e s
M urray, a sch olar a n d linguist who h ad a t le a st a w orking knowledge of
N
virtually every language th a t exists. Their stories, an d th a t of th e u n -
dertak in g of the colossal work of scholarship th a t is the Oxford English
TR
Dictionary, are bo u n d together in th is fascinating w ork by Sim on W in-
B
chester.
00
10
1 . The Surgeon o f Crowthom e i s _____

A. a detective novel.
+3
B. a m edical textbook,
P2
c . a reference book.
C
D. a biography.
2. In th e 19^ century, L a m b e th _____
A
H
A: w as a very run-dow n area.

B. h ad poor street lighting,
-
c . w as a dangerou s place to live.

-L
D. w as no t p a rt of London.
N
3. William M in o r _____
A. claim ed he w as being tortured.
TO
B. denied being involved in th e m urder,

c . w as found to be m entally ill.
NG
D. w as on a visit to England.

4. Ja m e s M urray
A. w as th e first perso n to work on th e new dictionaiy.
ID
B. knew h e w ould need help to finish the dictionary.

B
c . d oubted w hether it was possible to write a dictionajy.

D. printed leaflets asking people to send him money.
253
5,. William Minor aiid .Jairies tM urray becam e friends because

- A. they were both ascatd by langg'.
B- both irthem- enjoyed. writing lngrle tte rs.
N
c.they shared.ail'.interest iri.illustrations.
D. they came from sim ilar backgrounds.
NH
6 . Why did it tak e so long for Minor an d M urray to m eet each other?
A. Travel in the 19th century w as too costly a n d tiring.
UY
B. Meeting people w as not considered to be im portant,
c. M urray w as unaw are of M inors circum stances.
.Q
D. William Minor did not like going on long journeys.
TP
7. According to th e w riter, Simon W in ch ester _____
O
A. h a s w ritten an absorbing and rem arkable account.

B. did a lot 'of work on the Oxford English Dictionary,
c. is th e a u th o r of several interesting books.
NG
D. can be expected to produce more books in the future.
H
GLOSSARY
N
- surgeon bc s - correspondence th t giao dch
- to come into being ra i, xut hin - common bond mi lin kt chung, s
- Herculean (adj) cn c sc mnh nh TR
gn b yi nhau
ca thn Hercules, i hi nhiu cng - devoted (adj) trung thnh
B
sc - lunatic ngi in
00
- seedy (adj) ti tn, nhch nhc - governor ngi cai qun

10
- slum khu nh chut - inmate til nhn

- gunshot ting sng n - numerous (adj) v so
+3
- police constable cnh st vin - to plead poverty y c l ngho kh

P2
- Irish (adj) thc Ai-len (i Nh Lan) - indisposition (to do sth) s cm thy

- labourer cng nhn lao ng chn tay khng mun m gi
C
- perpetrator k gy ra ti c, hung th - exhausting (adj) gy kit sc, khin

- confusion s .hn lon, s ri tung ngi ta rt mt nhc
A
- a tortured mind mt tm tr b dn vt - learned (adj) uyen be, hc rng bit

H
- to torment hnh h nhiu

- to be detained for life b giam gi n - senior (adj) quan trng, cp cao
-
trn i - member of staff thnh vin ca ban

-L
- asylum bnh vin tm thn qun tr

- to house sth cha ci gi bn trong, - harrowing (adj) thng tm, gy au
N
cung cp ch cho ci g lng

- the criminally insane nhng ngi - fateful (adj) nh l nh mnh
TO
phm ti vi b in lon - to recount k li

- self-taught (adj) t hc - gripping (adj) hp n, thu ht
NG
- schoar hc gi - linguist nh ng hc
- to appoint b nhim, giao nhim v - to have a working knowledge of sth

- to take over tip qun, m nhn kh thng tho ci g

- immense (adj) to ln - to undertake m ng, gnh vc
ID
- leaflet t ri, t truyn n - colossa (adj) to ln, v i, khng

B
- avidly (adv) y v ho hc, chm ch - a work of scholarship mt cng trnh

- to line a wall xp thnh hng trn mt uyn bc
bc tng - to be bound together c gn kt li
254

- ceil phng giam, x lim vi nhau

- contributor ngi ng gp bi v cho - a run-down area mt khu vc ti tn/
mt n phm, ngi cng tc vit b'] xung cp
N
- illustrative (adv) dng minh ha - illustration tranh minh ha
- quotation li trch n - absorbing (adj) hp dn, thu ht
NH
103 THE WAITING ROOM
UY
.Q
Dr. Brow ns d e n tal practice w as on the ground floor of a large su b
u rb a n h o u se w hich h a d been built tow ards th e en d of th e 19 th century
TP
The front room, which served both a s the waiting room an d a n office fo:
O
th e secretary, w as furnished with d usty arm ch airs an d a couple of so

fas th a t looked as th ou gh they m u st have been, bought second-harit
w hen th e h ou se w as first occupied. The u su al selection of m agazines
NG
all hopelessly o u t of date and falling to pieces, were scattered on th<
H
scratch ed coffee table th a t stood on the w orn-out carpet in th e centre o
the room.
N
J o h n w ondered where all these m agazines cam e from. Somehow, hi
could not im agine Dr. Brown reading m agazines w ith titles liki
TR
W om ans F ash ion Weekly and Home an d Family in his spare time.
B
Perhaps the secretary brought them in, he tho ug ht, a s he sa t fidgeting
00
on the uncom fortable sofa next to his serious-looking father. He wanted

10
to ask h e r? b u t it som ehow seem ed wrong to speak; ju s t ab o u t th e onlj

so u n d s th a t could be h eard in the room was tjie steady tick of the clock
+3
w hich stood on the m antelpiece over the fire-place a n d the tap -tap oj
P2
th e secretarys typewriter.
C
Some of th e people sitting in the waiting room idly flipped through

th e old m agazines while others, probably reg u lar visitors, read the
A
m orning n ew spapers they h ad wisely brought w ith them . One lady sat
H
next to th e fire quietly knitting w hat looked like long scarf, exactly as
if she w ere sittin g in h e r own living room a t hom e. Another w om an kept
-
looking a t th e clock a n d m oaning softly, b u t there w as no conversation

-L
am on gst th e w aiting patients.

N
Bored, J o h n started to play a game. W hat w as wrong with all these

people, h e ask e d himself. Were they all here for the sam e routine
TO
check-up a s he w as? Surely not; th a t lady w as clearly in pain; so he

NG
decided th e o th ers m u st all have terrible problem s a s well. He im agined

th a t th e kn ittin g lady h a d absent-m indedly p u t one of h e r k n ittin g nee-

dles in h e r m o u th an d bitten it, breaking a tooth. He w as su re th is was

the. case because his m other w as always w arning him th a t th is would
ID
hap p en t him if he d id n t stop chewing his pen w hen he w as doing his

B
homework. And th a t m a n w ith th e grey hair; w a sn t h is right cheek ju s t

a little bit swollen? Obviously he h ad eaten som ething w ith a maggot in

it and now the maggot w as still there in h is m outh, eating throu gh his
gum s... . ,
Suddenly, J o h n w as b ro u g h t back to ea rth by th e so un d of footsteps
N
in the hall outside a n d th en a bell rang som ewhere in th e room. Every-
body looked u p a t the secretary as she consulted a list of n am es in the
NH
diary on h er desk. Mrs. B arker, she called out, and th e lady by th e
fire carefully p u t h er knitting away in the plastic bag she carried an d
UY
rose to her feet, heading tow ards the door and th e d e n tis ts chair. The
.Q
other p atien ts seemed to relax a little a s they re tu rn e d to th eir reading;
TP
even the m oaning from th e clock-w atching lady .ceased for a few sec-
onds. J o h n sighed inwardly and picked u p one of th e m ore colourful-
O
looking m agazines in front of him. He h ad h ad enough of his game, b u t

he h ad a horrible feeling th a t it w as going to be a long tim e before he
got to see th e dentist.
NG
H
1. The fu rn itu re in the waiting room w a s _____
A. m ade before the house was built.
N
B. very shabby an d dirty looking,
c . not new w hen it w as bought.
D. not suitable for a dental practice. TR
B
2. J o h n w as quite sure th a t Dr. B ro w n _____
00
A. never read the m agazines in the w aiting room.

10
B- told h is secretary to buy new m agazines,

+3
c . did not know where th e m agazines cam e from.

P2
D. did not have enough ,time to read m agazines.

C
3. Why d id n t J o h n a sk the secretary abou t th e m agazines?

A. His father would be angry.
A
B. He could see she was very busy,

H
c . He w as too shy to do so.

D. Nobody else w as talking.
-
-L
4. The w riter suggests th a t some patients h a d brough t new spapers

w ith them b ecause .
N
A. they w anted to catch up with the news.

B. they did n't w ant to talk to each other,
TO
c . they knew the m agazines were old.

NG
D. they h ad been to the dentist before.

5.. Why did J o h n have to see the dentist?

A. He h ad broken one of his teeth.
ID
B. He was in a lot of pain,

c . His m other insisted on it.
B
D. It w as tim e for his regular visit.
256

6 . The secretary knew the d en tist w as ready to see the next p atien t
b e c a u s e _____
N
A. she h eard footsteps in the corridor.
B. the clock sounded the hour,
NH
c . the bell w as a signal to her.
D. Mrs. B arker p u t h er knitting away.
UY
7. Why did J o h n stop playing his game?
.Q
A. He h a d got bored with it.
TP
B. It w as tim e to see the dentist,
c . He w anted to read a magazine.
O
D. It w as not very relaxing.

GLOSSARY
NG
- practice s hnh ngh (bc s/ iut s) - scarf khn qung
H
- suburban (adj) ti/ thuc ngoi - to mon rn r
- to be furnished with sth (mt cn - routine (adj) vic lm thng ngy
N
phng) c trang b mn gi hoc theo nh k
- a selection of sth mt tp hp nhng - check-up s kim tra sc khe
ci g TR- absent-mindedly (adv) mt cch/ vi
- to fall to pieces tan r ra tng mnh,
B
v ng tr
00
long ri ra - swollen (adj) sng v in

10
- to be scattered nm vng vi - maggot con gii

- scratched (adj) try st - gum -i/ nu
+3
- to sit fidgeting ngi nhp nhm, bn - to consult tham kho kin ai/ d tim
P2
chn khng yn v trong sch

- tick ting tch tc - diary nht k, s ghi chp
C
- mantelpiece mt bng trn l si - to rise to one's feet ng bt dy

- fire-place i si - to head towards a door tin v pha
A
- tap-tap ting lch cch cite

H
- ly (adv) mt cch nhn nh - to cease thi, ngng

- to flip through a book [t d nhanh - to sigh th di
-
cc trang sch - inwardly (adv) m thm trong lng

-L
N
104
TO
On April 26 1986, one of histo rys w orst n uclear accidents occurred

a t th e Chernobyl N uclear Power Plant in the Ukraine (the former Soviet
NG
Union). At 4:23 AM, technicians at .the Chernobyl plant allowed the

power in the fourth reactor (reactor-4) to fall to low levels a s p art of a

controlled experim ent, which w ent terribly wrong. The reactor over-
ID
h eated an d caused a meltdown of the core. This resulted in a n explo-

sive force of steam , which blew off the lid of the reactor. Large am ou nts
B
of radioactive m aterial were released into the atm osphere. The reactor-
4 explosions released more radioactivity th a n the atom ic bom bs
257
dropped on H iroshim a a n d Nagasaki during World W ar II. Most of the.

d isch arged '-m ateri^: W as.;deposited.'close^y a s d u s t a n d debris, b u t
wind carried, th e lighter radioactive m aterial .over the U kraine, B elarus,
R ussia and parts- of Eurap. :
N
The o p erato rsoverr confident :pson-Kking, a flaw in th e design
NH
' of the T ea c tc ri^ d :in a d e ^ ia ^ ^ sa ^ % -is^ |e m s:a re believed to be th e m a- '
_ ; jo r fctrs tliat''case" the:',Chemobyl.îsaster.
UY
' Many- people 'wefe affected'by 't^s:Gat'S;tfphe. The': accident caused
.Q
. 31 immediat-e d ea th s tht, were m ainly th e 're s u lt of exposure to radia-
TP
O
crew of aro u n d 200,000 people w as initially employed t o f

site. Later th e n u m b e r swelled t o -600,000. This crew w as exposed to r
high doses of radiation, w hich might affect their health in the long ru n . *
NG
Many children in the surroun ding are as developed thyroid'
H
d ue to the radiation em itted. Many U krainians, R u ssian s a n d B e l a r u s - ?
sians were evacuated from w ithin a 30-kilom etre co ntam inated rad iu s
N
and later given new hom es in a different area. .
TR
Today reactor-4 is bu ried in a' cem ent tom b w hich w as quickly b ilt' I' i '
in order to allow th e other reactors t the power statio n to continue
B
working. However, th is shelter is not strong an d will n ot la st an d th ere
00
are plans to replace it. Many people have suffered in som e way a s a re-
10
su lt of the Chernobyl d isaster an d millions of dollars are still being

+3
sp ent today to contain reactor-4 an d assu re th a t no fu rth e r radiation

P2
leakage occurs.
C
1. The Chernobyl d isaster is th ou gh t to b e _____

A. as serious a s the Hiroshim a an d N agasaki bom bings.
A
H
B. a m inor accident w ith no fu ture consequences,

c . one of m any sim ilar accidents.
-
D. E uropes greatest catastrophe.

-L
2. W hen th e C hem obyl-4 reactor o v erh eated _____

N
A. technicians tu rn e d it down.
B. it m elted th e core.
TO
c . the power p lan t w as filled w ith steam .

D. it sealed th e lid of the reactor shut.
NG
3. One of the ca u ses of the accidents w a s _____

A. the raising of the power in reactor-4 to high levels.

ID
B. a design fault.
c . th e installation of proper safety b ack-up system s.
B
D. the technician s lack of confidence.
258,

4. The reactor-4 explosion resulted in t h e _____

A. spread of the heavier radioactive m aterial by the wind.
B. im m ediate d eath of 200,000 people.
N
c. release of d u st and debris into the atm osphere.
NH
D. release of reactor-4s cover.
5. Most of the people who died as a result of the explosion were
UY
A. firefighters.
.Q
B. m em bers of the clean u p crew,
c. operators of th e reactor.
TP
D. children.
O

6 . The m em bers of the clean-up crew _____
. developed thyroid, cancer.
NG
B. p u t out the fires.
c . were subject to high levels of radiation.
H
D. were u nh arm ed by th e radiation.
N
7. Reactor-4 _
A. is still leaking radiation.
B. is enclosed in cem ent TR
c. will be replaced in the future.
B
00
D. cost millions of dollars.

10
GLOSSARY
+3
- nuclear power plant nh my in - radiation bc x

P2
ht nhn - liquidating crew i ph trch thanh

- the former Soviet Union un x c ty khu nhim x
C
- technician k thut vin - to swell sng v lp; (s lng) tng

- reactor l phn ng mnh n
A
- to overheat tr nn qu nng - dose liu lng

H
- meltdown s tan chy ca li l phn - in the long run v sau ny

ng ht nhn do qu nng gy ra s . - thyroid cancer .ung th tuyn gip
-
gii thot nng ng phng x - to emit pht r a

-L
- core li, phn nhn - to evacuate s tn

- explosive (adj) c kh nng gy n - radius bn knh
N
- steam hi nc - shelter ch tr n, ni c tr
- lid ci nlp y - to contain ngn chn, rri nn, kim
TO
- radioactive materia! nguyn liu ch

phng x - leakage s r ri
NG
- radioactivity mc 'phng x - to seal sth shut nim kn ci g li

- to discharge thi ra - back-up system h thng d phng

- debris mnh v vn - cover ci np y

- operator ngi vn hnh my mc - to be subject to sth phi hng chu
ID
- over-confident (adj) qu t tin ci g

B
- decision-making s a ra quyt nh - to be enclosed in sth b trm kn bn

- flaw khuyt im trong
- exposure to sth s b nhim ci gi
25S
105 WARNING OT GLOBAL ÂRM ING

Global .w arm ing could' cause d ro ug h t ânciipossibly fam ine in China,
the source o f -much .of H o n ^K o ng ^ i d : ^ : 2050, a new repo rt pre-
N
diets-- Hong kong^blô^.bvat:- r^pKoodiigas sea levels rose.
The rep ort r.Gmmends buiidin'gjsea^:aH'^ o n d tow-lying area s su ch
NH
as the-new po rt -^ c L a i^ o r t re c la ^ the W orld Wide
UY
F u n d for N a& re;(V W F ^ 'i^ '.re ^ rt> :^ M e ii;m ^ u d e s work-by m em bers of
the C hinese Academy of..Met;<k>rqfogicaiv$^nces, u se s th e m ost recen t
.Q
projections o n clim ate change t- point-fo'a gloomy^ outlook for China.
TP
By 2050 a b o u t 30 t o . 40' per c e n t' of the country will experience
O
changes in the type of vegetation it su pports, w ith tropical an d su b -

tropical forest conditions shifting no rthw ard-and h o t d esert conditions
rising in the w est where currently :the desert is tem perate. Crop-
NG
growing areas will expand b u t any benefit is expected to be negated by
increased evaporation of m oisture, m aking it too dry to grow crops
H
su ch a s rice. The growing season also is expected to alter, becom ing
sh o rter in so u th ern an d central China, the m ain lan d 's b readbasket.
N
The rapid changes m ake it unlikely th a t p lan ts could adapt.
TR
C hina will produce, sm aller crops. In the central an d n o rth e rn a r -
eas, an d the so u th ern part, there will be decreased production because
B
00
of w ater lim itations, Dr. Rik Leemans, one of the a u th o rs of the report,
10
said during a brief visit to the territory yesterday. Fam ine could resu lt
because of the dem and s of feeding the population - particularly if it
+3
grows - an d the dim inished productivity of th e land. It looks very diffi-

P2
cult for the world as a whole, he said.

C
Global w arm ing is caused by the burnin g of large am o u n ts of fossil

fuels, su ch as coal an d oil, which release gases th a t trap h e a t in the
A
atm osphere. World tem peratu res already have increased th is centu ry
H
by ab o u t .6 degrees Celsius an d are projected to rise by between 1.6

degrees and 3.8 degrees by 2100.
-
-L
Dr. Leem ans said C hina's reliance on coal-fired power for its in d u s -
trial growth did not bode well for the world clim ate. I th in k the political
N
and economic powers in C hina are m uch greater th a n the environ-

m ental powers, an d [greenhouse gas em issions] could accelerate, Dr.
TO
Leem ans said. C hina is no t taking the problem seriously yet, although
NG
it is trying to incorporate th is kind of research to see w h at is going to

h ap p e n .

The clim ate change report, w hich will be released tom orrow, focuses
ID
on China b u t Mr David Melville of WWF-Hong Kong said some of th e

depressing scenarios could apply to the territory. Food supplies, for in -
B
stance, could be affected by lower crop yields. Maybe we could afford
260

to im port food from elsewhere b u t you have to keep in m ind th a t the

type' of chang es experienced in so u thern C hina will take place else-
N
where a s well, he said. Sea levels could rise a s glaciers m elted and the
higher tem p eratu res expanded the size of the oceans, threaten ing
NH
m uch of developed Hong Kong w hich is bu ilt on reclaim ed land. C ur-
re n t projections are th a t sea levels worldwide will rise by 15 to 90 cen-
UY
tim etres by 2 10 0 , depending on w hether action is tak en to reduce
.Q
greenhouse gas em issions.
TP
Hong Kong h a s su b stan tial areas built on reclaim ed land and sea
level rises could im pact on th a t, not only on Chek Lap Kok b u t the
O
W est Kowloon Reclam ation and the C entral and W estern Reclamation -

the whole lot, Mr Melville said, adding th a t sea-walls would be needed.
Depleted fresh w ater supplies would be an o th er problem because in-
NG
creased evaporation would reduce levels. Mr Melville said the general
outlook could be helped if Hong Kong used w ater less wastefully and
H
encouraged energy efficiency to reduce fuel-burning. He also called on
the W est to help C hina improve its efficiency.
N
TR
1-. Overall, w hat sort of picture is painted of the future effects of global
w arm ing?
B
A. d isa stro u s
00
B. potentially d isastrou s
10
c . relatively optimistic
+3
D. on balance things are going to be satisfactory

P2
2. W hat is th is passage?
C
A. a report
B. a preview of a report
A
c . an article describing a response to a report

H
D. an article previewing a report

-
3. Mr David Melville suggests th a t m future m ore food could be im -

-L
ported into Hong Kong. He th in k s these m easu res could b e _______ .

A. efficient B. sufficient c. insufficient D. inefficient
N
4. The m ain point of p arag rap h 3 is to describe .

TO
A. effects of changes in th e climate of C hina on food production

B. fu tu re changes in th e clim ate of C hina
NG
c . effects of changes in the climate of C hina on the growing season

D. projected fu tu re changes in the climate of C hina

5. The m ain point of paragraph 5 is to d esc rib e _____ .
ID
A. global w arm ing

B
B. the effects of global warm ing

c . the ca u se s an d projected effects of global w arm ing
D. the cau ses and effects of global w anning
261
i.6 . 4 W hdoes4foe w r^te'F;add^fee:infoâtioiivm squ are;b raek ets in

T" paragrapfi' ' 5?~c r v\ V : - \ = ' '
A. beca.\^\^ }^ & ^ ^ ^ '?^ c^ s ^ uag 'user whose com-
N
m and'of-E ^^shH s iio t.p e n e c i ^ -
B. becas,-ik h o ^ ith y ^ a r e ^ ^ i r t- Q th e original quote, th e
NH
,.. additional-ii o iation/givenis'necessary to u n d e rsta n d th e
statem ent. . . . ' w : ; ' .
UY
c . b ecause the w riter is quoting from an o th er source.
.Q
D, because., the' -Writer wants'.to em phasize th e m eaning of these
TP
words-, " -
7.. In p arag rap h 7,. w hich point is Mr Melville NOT m aking?
O

A. suggesting th a t there is a potential d isaster in Hong Kong
B. suggesting th a t reclam ation areas are a t risk
NG
c . criticising c u rren t safeguards
H
D. m aking a call for action
8 . How would you describe the Dr. Leemans attitu d e tow ards C hina?
N
A. m ainly favourable
B. critical
c . supportive in theory
TR
B
D. adm iring
00
9. In p arag ra ph 2 n e g a te d is closest in m eaning t o _____ .

10
A. . m ade possible B. m ade ineffective

+3
c . reduced D. paid for

P2
10. In paragraph 7 depleted could be replaced by which of the following?

A. reduced B. poor c . decaying D. decim ated
C
GLOSSARY
A
H
- sea-wall tng chn sng bin, bao - reliance (on) s l thuc, s nh cy

st b bin - coal-fired power in sn .xut bng.
-
- reclamation vng t san lp ln bin than

-L
- Academy of Meteorological Sci- - to bode wei bo trc im tt

ences Vin Khoa Hc Kh Tng - to accelerate tng tc, gia tc
N
- projection s c tnh, s lng d - to take sth seriously nghim tc xem

bo xt x ci g
TO
- gloomy (adj) u m, en ti - to incorporate sth st nhp, kt hp,

- outlook iu d bo, trin vng kt np
NG
- vegetation thc vt - depressing (adj) ng bun

- tropical (adj) thuc nhit i - scenario kch bn

- sub-tropcal (adj) cn nhit i - crop yield sn lng cy trng
ID
- to shift chuyn i sang - glacier ni bng, bang sn

- temperate (adj) n ha - reclaimed land vng t san lp ln
B
- to negate ph nh, ph nhn bin
262

evaporation s bay hi - substantial (adj) c kch thc/ gi tr/

moisture m tm quan trng to ln
growing season ma gieo trng - Kowloon Reclamation Khu san lp ln
N
mainland i lc (ch c a Trung bin Cu Long ( Hng Kng) .
quc khng k n Hng Kng v i - to deplete lm cn kit, lm suy kit
NH
Loan) - wasteful ly (adv) mt cch lng ph
breadbasket ngun cung cp lng - energy efficiency s s dng nng
UY
thc chnh, va la lng hiu qu
diminished (adj) b gim bt, suy gim - optimistic (adj) lc quan
.Q
productivity nng sut - preview s duyt trc, li gii thiu
TP
to trap lm mc by, lm c g kt li - safeguard s/ bn php bo v
O
to project d kin, d bo s lng

106 INVESTIGATORS TO PROBE TERROR FLIGHT
NG
Senior air staff will today laun ch an investigation after a flight from
H
Hong Kong w ith 300 passengers on board suffered severe dam age to its
nose cone and cockpit w indscreens during an electrical storm.
N
Dragonair Flight KA330 tu rn ed back shortly before landing a t Beijing
TR
airport on S aturday after encountering atrocious w ether.
In sim ilar situ atio n s investigators are asked to satisfy them selves
B
th a t conditions along the route were adequate w hen the plane took off;
00
w hether evasive action could not have been taken sooner; w hether the
10
plane w as fully airw orthy to re tu rn to Hong Kong; an d w hether peoples

+3
lives were p u t a t risk unnecessarily:

P2
The T riS tars nose cone, w hich h ouses its ra d a r system , w as to m

open, one w indscreen w as sh attered and an o th e r w as dam aged. An
C
aviation expert said it w as rare for su ch dam age to occur. Usually, he

A
said, lightning w as discharged by special conductors aro u n d the outer

H
skin of the plane.

Among th ose on bo ard w as the B ritish A m bassador to Beijing, Sir
-
Robin McLaren, who w as retu rn in g to the Chinese capital for more

-L
Sino-B ritish talks. Sim on Heale, chief operating officer for Dragonair,
said a review of how the pilot handled the problem would be conducted.
N
This would be carried o u t by experts from C athay Pacific, a 43 per

TO
cent shareh old er of Dragonair a n d supplier of the pilot for Flight

KA330. He said he could see no reaso n to p repare a repo rt for the Civil
NG
Aviation D epartm ent (CAD).

Mr Heale added th a t the w eather forecast w as perfectly acceptable

when the pilot took off. W hen he approached Beijing, eight Chinese air-
ID
craft were being diverted to other airfields. The pilot decided to re tu rn

B
to Hong Kong where he could do an auto-land. He h ad enough fuel to

retu rn . I th in k the issu e for the pilot w as visibility. His w indscreen was
cracked.
263
We only have an agreem ent to land the T riStars a t Beijing or

7:Sjharighai. Once, yu-'decide; t -divert, th eres n o t a :m |^ ^ i re n c be-
' tiyeen Hong Kong:-and-r.,S'hattgljair .I- :hav::n&t i^^v-i:F|he.- pn w as
< -I>j lr'?$K$M
N
vreettinan -the^.G; âife^'ReguIati'on :Dvisi'nj Mr p. . Birkett, said they
NH
h a ^ ^ e a r d - n o tin g 'a b o u t th e incident.
. Pssmgj?s, gave harrow ing accoun ts of the six-hr'Journey on,"Sat- "
UY
urd w hich left them sh ake n and fearing for their lives--S ew rar; of
them q u e s tio n e d th e w isdom o f allow ing the flight to take off a t alii .
.Q
VMeike Laesch, 24, a production m anager for an advertising com pany in
TP
Germany, w ished she h ad taken the train. I saw people praying an d I
got really scared. P assengers were scream ing, she said.
O

Flight KA330 carrying ab o u t 300 p assen gers took off late from Kai
Tak airport a t 4.10 pm. At ab out 7.10 pm th e pilot an n o u nced th a t the
NG
, plan e would be landing a t Beijing in 17 m inutes. All of a su d d en we
ran into turbulence! It w as like roller co aster ride, one passenger
H
said.
After half-an-hour, th e pilot announced th a t he w as heading back to
N
Hong Kong. As we cam e in to land a t Hong Kong we could see fire en-
TR
gines lined u p on stan d b y . Everyone clapped th eir h a n d s w hen we
cam e down. It w as a sm ooth landing, a p assen ger said.
B
00
1. This passage is a b o u t _____ .

10
A. a m id-air investigation
+3
B. a m id-air d isaster
c . a m id-air collision
P2
D. a m id-air incident
C
2. According to the p a s s a g e _____ .

A
A. th e plane w as n ot airw orthy

H
B. the plane did n o t have enough fuel

c . the plane w as slightly dam aged
-
D. the pilot perform ed poorly

-L
3. According to th e p assage after the problem occurred . .

N
A. th e plane lost height

B. th e plane lost f u e l.
TO
c . th e plane landed a t th e nearest airport

D. the plane changed direction
NG
4. The m ain point of paragraph 2 is to tell the read er _ .

A. w hat th e investigators are going to do

B. w h at the investigators .usually do
ID
c . ab o u t the conditions along.the route

B
D. w hether peoples lives were p u t a t risk
264

5. In p arag rap h 3 th e reader is NOT told abo ut w hich of the following:

A. the dam age to the plane
B. a survey on the safety of T ristars
N
c. w hat a n aviation expert th in k s
NH
D. how su ch problem s are usually dealt with
6 . In p arag rap h 6 it is suggested th a t Mr Heale th in k s ;
UY
A. the pilot should never have taken off in the first place
.Q
B. a report should be prepared for the Civil Aviation D epartm ent
TP
c. the pilot co uldn t see properly
D. the pilot could have landed in Beijing
O

7. W hich of the following is the w riter implying in paragraph 7?
A. the pilot m ade the right decision
NG
B. the plane w as unsafe
c . the pilot m ade the wrong decision
H
D. S hanghai was closer th a n Hong Kong
N
8 . W hich of the following is NOT m entioned in p arag rap h 9?
A. the attitu d e of the passengers
B. eye w itness accou nts TR
B
c . criticism s of the passengers
00
D. w h at people did on landing

10
9. In p arag ra p h 5 T h is refers t o _____ .

+3
A. a review
P2
B. a Civil Aviation D epartm ent report

c . a D ragon Air report
C
D. a C athay Pacific report

A
10. The phrase-,q u e stio n e d th e w isdom o f allow ing in parag rap h 8

H
is sim ilar in m eaning to w hich of the following _____

A. strongly criticised the decision of allowing
-
B. queried the sense of letting

-L
c . implied it was crazy to allow

D. were angry a t the decision to let
N
GLOSSARY
TO
investigator nhn vin iu tra - Si no-British talks cc cuc thng

o probe iu tra lng gi Trung Quc v Anh
NG
terror flight chuyn bay kinh hong - to conduct a review of stfa tin hnh
senior air staff cc lnh o cp cao nhn xt nh gi ci gi

ca hng hng khng - shareholder c ng

nose cone phn mi ca my bay - supplier nh cung cp
ID
cockpit bung li my bay - Civil Aviation Department (CAD) y

B
windscreen knh chn gi pha c Ban Hng Khng Dn Dng

electrical storm cn bo in t - to be diverted to c chuyn hng
to encounter gp phi, chm trn sang
265
- atrocious (adj) 1 )hung bo,; tn. bo 2) : - airfield sn bay

' xu, t hi : - - auto-land s h cnh t ng
- to take evasive action ra-rnqt; - v&biiity tm nhn xa -
' hnh ng ; tranb ta.r rti'i :v;"0--rackM {adj) rn nt, CGvt nt
N
" - airworthy (dj);: iu kiri: ba -:,;; v |i- Sfiartha Thng Hi. . .
- t o be put at risk bi a yo. ch Rgu j- - Safety Regulation Division Ban Ph
NH
.. him- :' "v/..'i [ ~'; V_;. TrclrCc QuyDinh v An Ton
-TiriStar [tn hng my bay]' '':-'. -. - shaken (adj) rng-ng, hong lon
UY
. - to be ton] open bi x rch toc - to pray'cu nguyn
- to be shattered bfcp ySten nt - turbulence vung nhiu ng khng kh
.Q
Haviation nganh hang' khng . - a roller coaster rde chuyn i trn
- expert chuyn ga : on tu trt siu tc
TP
- to dischargexiht in, ha gii dng - to line up on standby sp hng ch
O
in sn

- conductor thit b dn in - smooth (adj) sung s, m i
- outer (adj) pha bn ngoi - md-air (adj):gia khng trung
- ambassador (to a country) i s - collision s/ v m vo nha
NG
(ti mt nc) - to query nghi ng, thc mc
H
- sense ngha, s sng sut
N
107
TR
In the sixteenth century, a n age of great m arine a n d terrestrial ex-
ploration, F erdinand Magellan led the first expedition to sail aro u n d the
B
world. As a young Portuguese noble, he served the king of Portugal, b u t
00
he becam e involved in the quagm ire of political intrigue a t co u rt an d

10
lost the kings favor. After he w as dism issed from service to th e king of
+3
Portugal, he offered to serve the futu re Em peror C harles V of Spain.

P2
A papal decree of 1493 h ad assigned ail land in th e New W orld w est

C
of 50 degrees w longitude to Spain and all the land e a st of th a t line to

Portugal. Magellan offered to prove th a t th e E ast Indies fell u n d er
A
S panish autho rity. On Septem ber 20, 1519, M agellan set sail from
H
Spain with five ships. More th a n a year later, one of th ese sh ip s was
exploring the topography of S outh America in search of a w ater route
-
acro ss the continent. This ship sank, b u t the rem aining four ships
-L
searched along th e so u th ern p enin su la of S outh America. Finally they

N
found the passage they sought n ea r a latitude of 50 degrees South.

Magellan nam ed th is passage the S trait of All Saints, b u t today we
TO
know it a s th e S trait of Magellan.

NG
One ship deserted while in th is passage an d re tu rn e d to Spain, so

fewer sailors were privileged to gaze a t th a t first p an o ram a of the Pacific

Ocean. Those who rem ained crossed the m eridian we now call th e In-
tern atio n al Date Line in th e early spring of 1521 after ninety-eight days
ID
on th e Pacific Ocean. D uring those long days a t sea, m any of Magel-

B
la n s m en died of starvation an d disease.
266
Later Magellan becam e involved in an insular conflict in th e Philip-

pines an d w as killed in a tribal battle. Only one ship an d seventeen
sailors u n d er the com m and of the B asque navigator Elcano survived to
N
complete th e w estw ard journey to Spain and th u s prove once an d for
all th a t the world is round, w ith no precipice at the edge.
NH
UY
1. The sixteenth century w as an age of g re a t _____ exploration.
A. cosm ic B. land c. m ental D. com m on m an
.Q
2. Magellan lost the favor of the king of Portugal w hen he becam e in-
TP
. volved in a po litical _____ .
O
. entanglem ent B. discussion

Cl negotiation D. problem s
NG
3. The Pope divided New World lands between Spain an d Portugal a c -
cording to th eir location on one side or the other of an im aginary
H
geographical line 50 degrees west of Greenwich th a t extends in a
direction.
N
A. n o rth and so u th
B. easterly
c . so u th east
TR
B
D. n o rth an d west
00
4. One of M agellans ships explored t h e _____ of S outh America for a

10
passage a cro ss the continent.

+3
A. coastline B. m ountain range

P2
c . physical features D. islands

C
5. F our of th e ships soug ht a passage along a s o u th e rn _____

A. coast
A
B. inland
H
c . body of land w ith w ater on three sides

D. border
-
-L
6 . The passage w as found near 50 degrees South o f _____ .

A. Greenwich B. the equ ator c. Spain D. Portugal
N
7. In the spring of 1521,the ships crossed the . now called the

TO
Internation al Date Line.

A. im aginary circle p assing through the poles
NG
B. im aginary line parallel to th e equator

c. area
D. land m ass
ID
B
267

GLOSSARY
;marine (aj)-thue: v ;bln -stratOibin .
terrestrial (adjj freh.mat;t -. : y v: :~,sanfciw"thnh. .
expedition clun-thmîm.:, .: < desert o ngu, -b cc
N
"Portuguese (dj) thuc .'-B'Nh . - t>e privileged to do sth c c ci
:l' ^V;v.c-q:uyn/-:ci;.m mn lm g
NH
noble nh qu tc l-:
quagm n^tnh^ng. 'b s y : - to gaze: t nhn ctm. chm vo
a political"intrigue mt rrrmchnh - panorama tn';chlyb qut, -bc :
UY
tr tranh ton cnh
court triu nh - meridian kinh tuyn gc
.Q
to lose sb's favor khpg con c ai - the International Date Line ng
TP
yu mn/ b tht srig i vi ai phn gi quc t
papal (adj) thuc Gio hong - starvation s thiu n, s cht vi i
O
decree sc lnh - insular (adj) hp hi, thin cn, c u

to asSigfi'sth to sb gn/'giao ph ci c cc b a phng, khng sn
g cho ai sng chp nhn kin hoc ngi [
NG
emperor hong - conflict cuc xung t
the East Indies vng ng n - tribal (adj) thuc b tc/ b lc
H
to fall Under sb's authority thuc - battle trn nh
quyn kim sot ca ai - Basque [tn mt x Ty Ban Nha]
N
topography a mo, a hnh - navigator nh hng hi
- water route thy [ - once and for all (adv) mt fan dt
- peninsula bn o TR
khot
- passage li bang ngang qua bin - precipice vch ni dng ng
B
00
10
Rock, or rock-and-roll, is a form of m usic th a t w as invented in the

+3
United S tates in th e 1950s. It h a s become po pu lar in th e United States,

P2
Europe, an d m any other p a rts of the world. African Am erican perform -

C
ers like Little Richard, F ats Domino, Ray C harles, an d Big Jo e T urner
were am ong the first people to come o ut with tru e rock-and-roll, a
A
com bination of various elem ents from country an d w estern, gospel,

H
rhythm and blues, an d jazz. The influences of early perform ers like
bluesm an M uddy W aters, gospel perform er R uth Brown, an d JSLZZ m u -
-
sician Louis Jo rd a n on rock-and-roll are still felt today. For example,

-L
the songs of early co un try legend H ank W illiams affected m usician s

N
from early rock sta r Buddy Holly to 80 s rocker B ruce Springsteen.

TO
In the segregated 95 0s, African American m usical forms were not

considered ap propriate for white audiences. M uch of th e U.S. popula-
NG
tion h ad no t been exposed to them . All th a t changed, w hen, in 1953,

Cleveland disc jockey Alan Freed began to play rhyth m an d b lues to a

largely non-African American audience. Freed w as successful, a n d a lot

ID
of records were sold. The m usic spread, an d the term th a t Freed h ad

adopted for th e m usic - rock-and-roll - began to spread a s well.
B
Teenagers, a n d the money they were willing to sp end on records,

provided an im petus for rock-and-roll. On their way to becom ing rock

stars, m any perform ers copied songs from the original artists. For in -
stance, Pat Boone scored a hit w ith a toned-dow n version , of Little
N
R ichards song, T utti F ru tti, prom pting Little Richard to com m ent,
He goes an d outsells me with my song th a t I w rote. In 1955-56,
NH
Chuck Berry, Bill Haley and the Comets, an d particularly Elvis Presley
becam e fam ous for their version of traditional rhythm an d blues. Elvis
UY
Presleys first television appearance in Ja n u a ry 1956 m arked rock-and -
.Q
roll's ascendancy into the world of pop m usic.
TP
1. W hat is the m ain topic of th is passage?
O
A. American popular m usic

B. the careers of successful rock m usicians
c . the m usical elem ents th a t distinguish pop from classical m usic
NG
D. th e origins of th e m usic th a t cam e to be called rock-and-roll
H
2. Who is NOT m entioned a s an African American perform er who was
am ong th e first to come out w ith rock-and-roll?
N
A. F ats Domino B. Little Richarc '
c. Elvis Presley TR D. Ray C harles . ,
B
3. According to the passage, tru e rock-and-roll is characterized by a
00
com bination of which of the following?

10
A. the m usic of Bruce Springsteen and H ank Williams

B. m usical influences from Europe and Asia
+3
c. forms of m usic heard on m ost radio stations in the early 1950s

P2
D. country and w estern, gospel, rhythm and blues, and jazz

C
4. In the 1950s rock-and-roll

A. w as invented
A
H
B. w as n ot considered appropriate for white audiences

c . sold few records
-
D. w as the property of Buddv Holly

-L
5. Many perform ers copied songs fro m _____

N
A. classical m usic B. Pat Boone

c . original a rtists D. T u tti'F ru tti
TO
6 . W hich of th e following is NOT m entioned in the passage as bng a

NG
factor in the com mercial su ccess of early rock-and-roll?

A. th e p u rchasing power of early rock e n th u sia sts

B. the charism atic personality of disc jockey Alan Freed

c . the exposure of a non-African American audience to African
ID
American m usical forms

B
D. rocks popularity w ith teenage audiences
269

GLOSSARY - : .... V i
h% i ^p l l i l i i l ;
^prtrrar g^^sbeu rri- A:- y) 'z^x~- v r^ ^ s^ 0 n g Me,_syc thc y
hit'Ch.0:ra-irhrit bn nhc
^v'jipM^^'ff;|ac tfto^ni4c^. >!v^Snvlhlch nht- f " " ',l- ,
N
:^lu^mEOT^3G^^^c:)us...: :: ^'tond-own version, mt phin bn c
NH
- egn ho to i^ -'^''.- '- ', -'giontfdilu nh nhng hn
- rocker c s nhaefot^?-:: '>.?---V:': ;-
:..:;;-;^>tQ,'ôrapt sb.tQydo sth nhc/ khin ai
UY
-segiâfed^^âiig^^rig'-ftrth-.lTaHg :,k ^-vm.gi -r '
phn bit chn tc 7 '. r- t comment bnh phm/ a ra nhn
.Q
- musical forms cc li htnt nvnhc xt
TP
- disc jockey (D3) ngi din tu v - to outsell sb bn chy hn ai
bnh lun nhc trn radio hoc truyn . -.ascendancy s i ln .
O
hnh - charismatic (adj) c uy tn, c sc thu

. ht qun chng
NG
109
H
A highly acclaim ed motion picture of 1979 concerned a nearly d is a s-
tro us accident a t a nuclear power plant. W ithin a few weeks of the
N
l ^ s release, in a chilling coincidence, a real-life accident startlingly
sim ilar tb the fictitious one occurred a t the Three Mile Island p la n t n ear
TR
H arrisburg, Pennsylvania. The two incidents even corresponded in cer-
B
tain etails; for instance, both in the film an d in real life, one cause of
00
the m ishap w as a false m eter reading cau sed by a jam m ed needle.

10
^ u c h sim ilarities led m any to w onder w hether the fictional movie

+3
jftots'ixajl been, prophetic in o ther ways. The movie depicted officials of

P2
m e po^fer in d u stry a s seriously corrupt, willing to lie, bribe, an d even

kill to conceal th eir culpability in the accident. Did a sim ilar cover-up
C
occur in the Three Mile Island accident? Perhaps we will never know.
We do know th at, despite the endeavors of reporters an d citizen groups
A
H
to uncover th e cau ses of the accident, m any of the facts rem ain u n -
known. Although they declare th a t the public is entitled to th e tru th ,
-
m any of the power indu stry leaders responsible have been re lu c tan t to
-L
cooperate with independent, im partial investigators.

N
1. The n uclear accident described in the m ovie _____

TO
A. w as successfully concealed by power in d u stry leaders an d offi-

cials
NG
B. w as caused by a series of coincidences

c . w as a surprisingly accurate foreshadowing of ac tu al events

D. took place a t the Three Mile Island

ID
2. Officials of the n uclear power industry ______

B
A. have com m itted m u rd ers to m ake possible a cover-up of the in -

cident a t H arrisburg

B. h ad predicted that' n u clear accidents were likely to occur

c. have been re lu cta n t to reveal the full story ab o u t th e Three Mile
Island incident
N
D. have tried to m ake all the facts freely accessible to those con-
cerned
NH
3. According to th e passage, public concern over the accident n ear
UY
H arrisburg- _____
A. h ad no effect on the su b seq uent investigation
.Q
B. w as lessened by th e quick response of indu stry leaders an d offi-
TP
cials
O
c. prom pted w idespread panic throu g hou t Pennsylvania

D. persisted a s m any questions were left unansw ered
NG
4. R eporters looking into the accident a t Three Mile Is la n d _____
A. uncovered more facts th a n did citizen groups
H
B. did n o t succeed in uncovering all the facts abo ut the cau se of
th e accident
N
c . cooperated closely with power ind u stry officials
D. k ept docum ented inform ation from the public
TR
5. All of th e following are tru e EXCEPT
B
A. The movie abo ut a nuclear accident has been praised.
00
B. The p re ss h a s sough t fuller inform ation ab o u t th e Three Mile Is-

10
land m ishap. .
+3
C .^. m echanical breakdown was a p artial cause of th e H arrisburg

P2
accident.
D. The release of title movie came only w eeks after the Three Mile
C
Island accident
A
H
GLOSSARY
- to acclaim ca tng, khen ngi - culpability s c ti, s phi chu trch
-
- release s tung ra th trng, s cng nhim

-L
chiu (mt b phim) - cover-up s giu nhm, m nhm, che

- chiiling (adj) gy cm gic n lnh v y
N
ng s - endeavor s n lc
TO
- coincidence s trng hp ngu nhin - to uncover phanh phui, vn mn b

- startling ly (adv) khin ngi ta git mt
NG
mnh - to be entitled to sth c quyn c

- fictitious (adj) c tnh tng tng, hng ci g

khng c tht - reluctant to o sth (aj) ngn ngi,

- t o corresponded khp nhau, ging o d khng mun lm gi
ID
nhau - impartial (adj) khch quan, khng

B
-m ishap iu ri ro, bt hnh thin v

- meter reading s c c trn ng - to foreshadow bo hiu, l im bo
h o trc
271

-jammed (adj) b:mt kt - to commit murder phm ti git ngi

- needle cy kirn (ca ng h o) - accessible (adj) cb th tip cn c,
' - fictional (adj) gi tng, khng c tht c th s dung 'c
. ngoi - subsequent (adj)din ra sau
N
- plot ct truyn ' - to prompt sth thc y ci g' xy ra,
- to depict m t gy ra ci g
NH
- official vin chc/quan chc - to persist c tn ti dai dng
- power industry ngnh in lc - mechanical breakdown s hng hc
UY
- corrupt (adj) tham , tham nhng my mc
- to be willing to o sth sn lng lm gi - partial (adj) c tnh mt phn
.Q
- to bribe a hi l - documented (adj) c t liu chng
TP
- to conceal che giu minh
O

110
Traditional nineteen th-centu ry education is usually associated w ith
NG
the imê of a stern teach er standing in front of a b lackboard in a one-
H
room sshoolhouse, teaching only the three Rs of reading, writing, an d
arithm etic, an d dem anding rote learning in an atm osp here of silence
N
an d resti'aint.
A ccurate or not, th a t image conflicts sharply with ?1the m odem real-
TR
ity. Today, the typical public school offers stu d e n ts ^ d iv e rsity of su b -
B
ject areas, a p le th o ra f educational m aterials, an d a: variety of activi-
00
ties from creative dram atics to journalism . The m oderfi school complex
10
contains an array of educational facilities. W ithin th e classroom set-

+3
ting, stu d e n ts are encouraged to speak up and engage in guided d is-

cussion. In fact, articulate speech an d debate are desirable skills. Chil-
P2
dren are encouraged to interrelate on class projects, th a t are in depend -

C
ent of the teacher. T eachers may certainly d em and quiet w hen n eces-
sary, b u t they in tu rn are expected to be flexible ab o u t individual s tu -
A
dent needs.
H
.Contemporary schools reflect the th ru s t of a progressive educational

-
philosophy whose m ain proponent was the pragm atic philosopher Jo h n

-L
Dewey. Dewey believed th a t education m u st serve th e whole, child in

order to fully prep are him or h er for an active role in society. To th a t
N
end, the school curriculum w as to include both academ ic a n d u ti li ta r -

ian courses. He firmly believed th a t children have in n ate curiosity an d
TO
talen ts w hich will be stim ulated by an environm ent varied enough to

NG
call forth these qualities and provide an outlet for th eir expression.
Following the precepts of progressive educational philosophy, the

Gary Ind iana school system- initiated the Gary Plan between 1908 and
ID
1915. The plan w as later em braced by schools th ro u g h o u t the country.

In addition to classroom space, the Gary Plan provided room for recrea^
B
tional activities, a. th eater, science laboratories, an d c ra ft shops'. The
272 f

ac tu al m erit of progressive philosophy is still a very controversial issue,

especially in light of figures th a t indicate a high degree of illiteracy
am ong high school g rad u ates in the p a st two decades. However, to this
N
day, Deweys progressive philosophy continues to exert a strong influ-
ence on American education.
NH
1. How does the au th o r feel ab out the stereotypical image of nine-
UY
teenth -cent ry education?
.Q
A. It is valid.
B. It is n ot accurate.
TP
c . Its accuracy is no t im portant.
O
D. It is accu rate, b u t only to a point.

2. In line 8 , p le th o ra is closest in m eaning to which of th e following?
A. lack B. m ultitude c . supply D. group
NG
3. It can be inferred th a t in the stereotypical nin eteenth -cen tu ry class-
H
room., active stu d e n t involvem ent _____
A. w as a prim ary educational goal
N
B. consisted of crafts an d skills
c. occurred in one subject a rea only
D. w as n.ot actively encouraged TR
B
4. In line 5-6 of paragrap h 3, u tilita r ia n is closest in m eaning to
00
w hich of the following?

10
A. u seless B. practical c. organized. D. aw e-inspiring

+3
5. The parag rap h following th is passage would m ost likely go on to

P2
ad d ress
A. Deweys life after his involvement in education
C
B. th e effects of progressive philosophy on the n in eteen th -cen tu iy

classroom
A
c . m odem ram ifications of Deweys work in education

H
D. the differences between m odem education an d nineteenth-

century education
-
-L
GLOSSARY
-S tem (adj) nghim khc - t o reflect phn nh, phn chiu
N
- one-room schoolhouse ngi trng - thrust sc mnh xc ti

ch c mt phng hc - progressive (adj) c tnh tin b
TO
- arithmetic mn s hc - philosophy trit l

- rote learning s hc vt - proponent ngi ng h
NG
- restraint s g b, s km ch - pragmatic (adj) theo ch ngha thc

- to conflict with sth xung t vi, mu dng

thun vi - philosopher nh trit hc

ID
- diversity tnh a dng - curriculum chng trnh hc

- plethora tinh trng nhiu n mc tha - utilitarian (adj) c tnh thc dng
B
thi - innate (adj) bam sinh

- dramatics mn kch ngoi kha ( - outlet ch thot ra
trng hc) - precept tn chi, gii lut
273
- journalism mn bo ch - to initiate khi xng, xng

- complex khu lin hp - t embrace 1) m chong ly 2) nhit
- array s b tr cc thnh phn the tnh chp nhn
hng rigang v hng dc; mng : - cra ft Shop ca hng th cng m ngh
N
- articulate (ad;) (lnoi) c pht-m - inent gi'tr, cng trng
. r rng - controversial issue mt vn gy
NH
- to interrelate in kt mt thit vi tranh ci
nhau, hp tc:vi nhau . - figure con s
UY
- n turn (av) n lt (ai ) thi - illiteracy tnh trng m ch
- flexible (adj) linh ng, mm-d, uyn - stereotypical (adj) c tnh khun mu
.Q
chuyn . - awe-inspiring (adj) gy cm gic knh
- contemporary (adj) ng thi, ng
TP
i ramifications kt qu, hu qu
O

111
A survey is a study, generally in the form of a n interview or a q u es-
NG
tionnaire, th a t provides inform ation concerning how people th in k an d
H
act. In the United States, the best-know n surveys are th e G allup poll
and th e H arris poll. As anyone who w atches th e new s durin g p resid en-
N
tial cam paigns knows, these polls have become a n im p o rtan t p a rt of
political life in th e United States.
TR
North Am ericans are fam iliar w ith the m any perso n on th e street
B
interviews on local television news shows. While su ch interviews can be
00
highly entertaining, they are not necessarily a n ac cu rate indication of

10
public opinion. F st, th e y reflect the opinions of only th ose people who
+3
appear a t a certain location. Thus, su ch sam ples can be biased in favor

of com m uters, m iddle-class shoppers, or factory w orkers, depending on
P2
which a re a th e newspeople select. Second, television interviews ten d to

C
a ttra ct outgoing people who are willing to ap p ear on th e air, while they
frighten away oth ers who m ay feel intim idated by a cam era. A survey
A
m u st be b ased on a p recise, representative sam pling if it is to genu -

H
inely reflect a broad range of the population.

-
In preparing to conduct a survey, sociologists m u st e x e r c is e .great

-L
care in the wording of questions. An effective survey question m u st be

simple an d clear enough for people to u n d ersta n d it. It m u st also be
N
specific enough so th a t there are no problem s in interpreting th e re-

sults. Even qu estio ns t h a t are less stru c tu red m u st be carefully
TO
ph rased in order to e lic it the type of inform ation desed. Surveys can
NG
be indispensable sources of inform ation, b u t only if the sam pling is

done properly an d the questions are worded accurately.

There are two m ain form s of surveys: the interview an d th e q u es-

ID
tionnaire. E ach of th ese forms of survey research h a s its advantages.

An interview er c a n obtain a high response ra te because people find it
B
more difficult to tu rn down a personal req u est for an interview th a n to
274

throw away a w ritten questionnaire. In addition, an interview er can go

beyond w ritten questio ns and probe for a subjects underlying feelings
an d reasons. However, questionnaires have the advantage of being
N
cheaper sold m ore consistent.
NH
1. W hat does the pas.sage m ainly discuss?
UY
A. The history of surveys in North America
B. The principles of conducting surveys
.Q
c . Problems associated w ith interpreting surveys
TP
D. The im portance of polls in American political life
O
2. The word they in line 10 refers to J_____

A. North A m ericans B. news shows
c . interviews D. opinions
NG
3. According to the passage, the m ain disadvantage of person-on-the-
H
street interviews is th a t th e y _____
A. are not based on a representative sam pling
N
B. are used only on television
c . are not carefully warded
D. reflect political opinions
TR
B
00
4. The word precise in line 16 is closest in m eaning t o ____

A. planned B, rational c . required D. accurate
10
5. According to parag rap h 3, which of the following is m ost im portant

+3
for an effective survey?

P2
A. high n u m b er of respondents
C
B. Carefully worded questions

c . An interview ers ability to m easure respo n d en ts 7feelings
A
D. A sociologist who is able to interpret the re su lts

H
6 . The w ord exercise in line> 18 is closest in m eaning t o ____ _

-
A. utilize B. consider c . design D. defend

-L
7. The word elicit in line 23 is closest in m eaning to _____

N
A. com pose B. rule ou t c. predict D. bring out

8 . It can be inferred from the passage th a t one reason th a t sociologists
TO
m ay become frustrated w ith questionnaires is t h a t _____

NG
A. resp o n den ts often do not complete an d re tu rn questionnaires

B. q u estio nnaires are often difficult to read

c . q u estio n n a es are expensive an d difficult to d istribute

D. respo n d en ts are too eager to supplem ent questions w ith their
ID
own opinions
B
9. According to th e passage, one advantage of live interviews over

question naires is th a t live interview s _____
A. cost less
275
B. can produce m ore.inform ation

c . are easier to in terp ret v!
D. minimize th e m ftuence of the researcher
N
10. The word probe in the last paragrap h is closest in m eaning to
NH
A. explore . influence V c . analyze D. apply
UY
GLOSSARY ,
.Q
- survey cuc kho st - genuinely (adv) ng tht
TP
- questionnaire bn cu hi ttm - range phm vi, tm mc
kin; thm vn lc. - sociologist nh x hi hc .
O
- poll cuc thm.d d lun - to exercise care in doing sth s

- presidential campaign cuc vn ng dng s thn trng khi lam g
tranh c trig thng - to word pht biu, din t brtg t
ng, chn ch chn .li
NG
- the person/ man pn th e Street ngi
bnh thng - structured (adj) c cu trc r rng/
public opinion cng lun c dng xc nh
H
- sample 1) mu hng ha 2) mt phn - to phrse [p vn, chn t ng din
lm mu t
N
- to be biased in favor of sb/sth c xu - to elicit rt ra c/ thu c (1 cu
th thin v ai/ci gi tr li)
- commuter ngi sng ngoi vo TR
- indispensable (adj) rt cn thit,
thnh ph lm vic hng ngy khng th thieu c
B
- midle-class (adj) thuc gii trung [u - response rate t l ngi tr li
00
- newspeople gii phng vin - to probe thm d, iu tra

10
- outgoing (adj) thn thin, thch giao - underlying (adj) nm n. bn di/

du nm ng sau, c bn
+3
- to frighten sb away khin ai s phi - consistent (adj) nht qun, trc sau
P2
trnh xa nh mt.
- to intimidate lm ai s hi - respondent ngi tham gia tr li
C
- precise (adj) chnh xc - frustrated (adj) tht vng

- representative sampling s ly mu - to supplement sth with sth iy ci g
A
c tnh i din b sung cho ci g

H
112
-
-L
The term folk song h a s been cu rren t for over a h u n d re d years, b u t

there is still a good deal of disagreem ent as to w h at it actually m eans.
N
The definition provided by the International Folk Music Council states

TO
th a t folk m usic is the m usic of ordinary people,- w hich is p assed on

from person to person by being listened to ra th e r th a n learned from the
NG
printed page. O ther factors th a t help shape a folk song include: conti-
nuity (many perform ances over a num ber of years); variation (changes

in words an d melodies either throug h artistic interp retation or failure of

memory); an d selection (the acceptance of a song by the com m unity in
ID
w hich i t evolves).
B
W hen songs have been su b je c te d to these processes th eir origin is
276

usually im possible to trace. For instance, if a farm laborer were to

m ake u p a song an d sing it to a couple of friends who like it and
N
m emorize it, possibly w hen the friends come to sing it them selves one
of them m ight forget some of the w ords an d m ake u p new ones to fill
NH
the gap, while the other, perh ap s more artistic, m ight ad d a few decora-
tive touch es to the tu n e and improve a couple of lines of text. If this
UY
happened a few tim es there would be m any different versions, the
.Q
songs original com poser would be forgotten, an d th e song would be-
come com m on property. This co n stan t reshaping an d re-creation is the
TP
e sse n c e of folk m usic. Consequently, modem popular songs an d other
O
published m usic, even though widely sung by people who are not pro-

fessional m usicians, are no t considered folk music'.
The m usic and w ords have been set by a printed or recorded source,
NG
limiting scope for fu rth e r artistic creation. These songs origins cannot
H
be disguised an d therefore they belong prim arily to th e com poser and
not to a com m unity.
N
The ideal situatio n for the creation of folk m usic is an isolated ru ral
TR
com m unity. In su ch a setting folk songs an d dances have a special
pu rpose a t every stage in a p erso n s life, from childhood to death. Epic
B
tales of heroic deeds, seasonal songs relating to calendar events, and
00
occupational songs are also likely to be sung.

10
+3
1. W hat does th e passage mainly d iscuss?

A. Them es commonly found in folk m usic
P2
B. Elem ents that-define folk m usic

C
c . Influences of folk m usic on popular m usic .

D. The stan d ard s of the International Folk Music Council
A
H
2. W hich of th e following statem ents about the term folk song is

su pp orted by th e passage?
-
A. It h a s been used for several centuries.

-L
B. The Internatio nal Folk Music Council invented it

c . It is considered to be out-of-date.
N
D. There is disagreem ent abo ut its m eaning.

TO
3. The word i t .in line 10 (end of paragraph 1) refers t o _____

A. com m unity B. song c . acceptance D. memory
NG
4. W hich of th e following is NOT m entioned in the passage as a c h a r-

acteristic of th e typical folk song?

ID
A. It is constantly changing over time.

B. it is passed on to other people by being performed,
B
c. It contains complex m usical stru ctures.

D. It appeals to m any people.
277
N
NH
UY
.Q
TP
O
'A. A udiences prefer-songs com posed by professional m u sic ia '

B. Singers dislike th e decorative touches in folk' song tu n es. '
. c . N um erous variations of folk songs come to exist a t th e sam e
NG
time.
H
D. Folk songs are n ot considered an im portant form of m usic.
8. T h e w o rd e s s e n c e in lin e 16 is 'C losest in m e a n in g t o ______
N
A. basic n atu re ,B. growing im portance
c . full extent TRD. first phase
9. The a u th o r m entions th a t published m usic is n ot considered to be
B
00
folk m usic b e c a u s e _____

10
A. the original com poser can be easily identified

B. the songs a ttra ct only the young people in a com m unity
+3
c . the songs are generally perform ed by professional singers

P2
D. the com posers write the m usic in ru ral com m unities

C
GLOSSARY
A
folk song bi dn ca - tune iu nhc

H
to be passed on to sb c truyn li - composer nh son nhc

cho ai - to reshape ti to [i
-
to shape hnh thnh - essence tinh cht, ct li

-L
continuity tnh liri tc - folk music nhc dn gian

melody giai iu - scope phm vi
N
artistic (adj) c tnh ngh thut - to disguise ngy trang, ci trang

- interpretation s din gii/ s l gii - isolated (adj) bit lp, b c lp
TO
to evolve tin ha - setting bi cnh, khung cnh

- to be subjected to sth b bt phi - epic tale mt thin trng ca
NG
hng chu ci g - deed hnh ng, k tch

to trace truy tm tung tch, tm 'du vt - seasonal (adj) theo tng ma

to memorize hc thuc lng - occupational (adj) [tn quan n ngh
ID
decorative touches nhng nt chm nghip

ph trang tr, nhng thm tht nh - subject matter ch , ti
B
lm p thm
278

113
It is estim ated th a t over 99 percent of sill species th a t ever existed
N
have become extinct. W hat cau ses extinction? W hen a species is no
longer ad ap ted to a changed environm ent, it m ay perish. The exact
NH
ca u ses of a species death vary from situation to situation. Rapid eco-
logical change m ay re nd er an environm ent hostile to a species. For ex-
UY
am ple, tem p eratu re s m ay change and a species m ay n ot be able to
.Q
adapt. Food resources m ay be affected by environm ental changes,
TP
which will th en cau se problem s for a species requiring th ese resources.
O ther species m ay become b etter adapted to an environm ent, resu lting
O
in com petition an d , u ltim a te ly , in the d eath of a species.

The fossil record reveals th a t extinction h a s occurred th ro ug h o u t the
NG
history of E arth. Recent analyses have also revealed th a t on som e oc-
casions m any species becam e extinct a t the sam e tim e - a m ass extinc-
H
tion. One of th e best-know n examples of m ass extinction occurred 65
million y ears ago with the d em ise of d in o sau rs a n d m any other forms
N
of life. P erhaps th e largest m ass extinction w as th e one th a t occurred
225 million y ears ago, when approxim ately 95 p ercent of all species
TR
died, m a ss extinctions can be ca u sed by a relatively rapid change in
B
the environm ent an d can be w orsened by th e close interrelationship of
00
m any species. If, for example, som ething were to h ap p e n to destroy

10
m uch of th e p la n k to n in th e oceans, th en the oxygen con tent of E a rth

would drop, affecting even organism s not living in th e oceans. Such a
+3
change would probably lead to a m ass extinction.

P2
One interesting, an d controversial, fin d in g is th a t extinctions during

C
the p a st 250 million y ea rs have tended to be more intense every 26 mil-

lion years. This periodic extinction m ight be due to intersection of the
A
E a rth s orbit with a cloud of com ets, b u t th is theory is purely sp ec u la-

H
tive. Some re searc h ers have also speculated th a t extinction m ay often

-
be random . T h at is, certain species may be elim inated and o thers may
survive for no p artic u lar reason. A species survival m ay have nothing
-L
to do with its ability or inability to adapt. If so, some of evolutionary

N
history m ay reflect a sequence of essentially random events.

TO
1 . The word i t in line 3 refers to ______

A. environm ent B. species c . extinction D. 99 percent
NG
2 . The word u ltim a te ly in line 10 is closest in m eaning t o _____

A. exceptionally B. dram atically

ID
c . eventually D. unfortunately
B
3. W hat does the a u th o r say in p arag rap h 1 regarding m ost species in

E a rth s h isto ry'_____
279

A. They have rem ained basically unchanged from their original

forms.
B. They have been able to ad a p t to ecological changes,
c . They have cau sed rapid change in th e environm ent.
N
D. They are no longer in existence.
NH
4. W hich of th e following is NOT m entioned in p arag ra p h 1 a s re su lt-
ing from rapid ecological change?
UY
A. T em perature c h a n g e s'
.Q
B. Availability of food resources
c. Introduction of new species
TP
D. C om petition am ong species
O

5. The word d em ise in line 5 of paragraph 2 is closest in m eaning to
NG
A. change B. recovery c. help D. d ea th
H
6 . Why is p la n k to n m entioned in line 11 of p arag rap h 2?
A. To dem onstrate the interdependence of different species .
N
B. To em phasize the im portance of food resou rces in preventing
m ass extinction.
TR
c . To illu strate a com parison between organism s th a t live on the
land a n d those th a t live in the ocean
B
00
D. To point out th a t certain species could never become extinct.

10
7. According to p arag ra ph , evidence from fossils suggests th a t

+3
P2
A. extinction of species h a s occurred from time to tim e th rou g h o u t

E arth s history.
C
B. Extinctions on E arth have generally been m assive. .

c. th ere h as been only one m ass extinction in E a rth s history.
A
D. d in o sau rs becam e extinct m uch earlier th a n scien tists origi-

H
nally believed;
-
8 . The word finding" in the first line of the la st p arag raph is closest
-L
in m eaning t o _____
N
A. . published inform ation . B. research method,

c. ongoing experim ent D. scientific discovery
TO
9. W hich of the following can be inferred from the last parag raph
NG
A. Many scientists could be expected to disagree with it.

B. Evidence to sup p ort the theory h a s recently been found,
ID
c. The theory is no longer seriously considered.

B
D. Most scien tists believe the theory to be accurate.
280

10. In p arag rap h 3, th e au th o r m akes which of the following sta te -

m ents ab o u t a species survival?
A. It reflects the interrelationship of m any species.
N
B. It m ay depend on chance events.
c. It does no t vary, greatly from species to species
NH
D. It is associated w ith astronom ical conditions.
UY
11. According to the passage, it is believed th a t th e largest extinction of
a species o c c u rre d ____ _
.Q
A. 26 million years ago B. 65 million y ears ago
TP
c. 225 million y ears ago D. 250 million y ears ago
O

GLOSSARY
- to perish cht tn li - organism sinh vt, t chc c s sng
NG
- ecological (adj) thuc v sinh thi - controversial (adj) gy tranh ci
- to render sth + adj bin ci gi thnh - periodic (adj) theo inh k
H
ra - intersection s rt ln nhau, s giao
- hostile (adj) th nghch, khng thn ct
N
thin - comet sao chi
- ultimately (adv) rt cuc, cui cng - speculative (adj) c tnh suy on
- fossil yt ha thch TR - to speculate suy on
- analysis (p / analyses) s phn tch - random (adj) ngu nhin
B
- m ass extinction s tuyt chng hng - to eliminate loi tr
00
lot - evolutionary (adj) thuc v s tin

10
- demise s cht ha
- to worsen lm cho tr nn t hi hn - sequence chui, lot
+3
- interrelationship mi tng quan, mi - interdependence s l thuc vo nhau

P2
quan h ln nhu - to be in existence ang tn ti

- plankton sinh vt ph du . - ongoing (adj) ang tin hnh
C
- content hm ng - astronomical (adj) thuc thin vn

A
H
114 WORLD POPULATION AND CLIMATE CHANGE

In many, ways, the increasingly rapid p ace of clim ate change is a di-
-
rect re su lt of th e growth of the h u m an population. In the last 100

-L
years, th e world population h a s more th a n tripled, from ju s t u n d er 2

N
billion a t the beginning of the century to nearly 7 billion today. Obvi-

ously, th is h a s m eant th a t the world h a s needed to produce three tim es
TO
a s m uch food, energy, a n d other n atu ra l resources.

NG
In addition, th e average person u ses more energy and n a tu ra l re -

sources th a n the average person one h u n d re d years ago, m eaning th a t

the ra te s of c o n s u m p tio n are actually m uch higher th a n ju s t the in-

crease in population would imply. For example, it took the world 125
ID
years to use the first one trillion barrels of oil. The next trillion barrels
B
will be u sed in less th a n 30 years, which is alm ost 5 tim es as fast, not
three.
281

All of th ese activities: food production, energy usage, an d the u se of

n a tu ra l re s o u rc e s ,' contribute to' clim ate change in som e way. The
greater a m o u n ts of oil-and o ther fuels bu rn ed to create energy release
chem icals w hich ad d t global w annm g. In.-order to produce more food,
N
farm ers c u t down -trees;, to. gain m o re '.l^ u ;for th eir fields. In addition,
NH
:we cu t down trees, to.'bt. R e h o u ses .needed for a larger population.
Those trees are an. essential "p a rt o f controlling ,global- w arm ing. These
UY
are ju s t twGêxamples :'oi .the; impacts,.iLat ithe growing population has
; on global waranriing;. o th e rs are too niim e rons;.to m entio n.
.Q
. - n a d d itio n 'to a .growing.p o p u la tio n th e ' world also h a s a population
TP
th a t desires a highr stan d rd of living th a n in th e p ast, a n d a higher
O
stan d ard of living requires the u se of even more .'iural resources. A

look a t one cou ntry will provide a clear exam ple of th is fact. C hina is
the w orlds m ost populous nation, with 1.3 billion people. C urrently,
NG
the stan d ard of living for m ost of those people is far below th a t of peo-
H
ple in first w orld nations. Therefore, the average Chinese citizen uses
far fever n a tu ra l resources an d less energy th a n the average citizen of
N
the US or J a p a n . B ut C hina is growing in power, an d m ore of its citi-
zens are beginning to expect a first world lifestyle. I f ev e ry C h in ese
TR
p erso n a tta in s a firs t w orld life sty le, th e a m o u n t o f e n e rg y a n d
n a tu ra l re s o u rc e s n e e d ed in th e w orld w ill d ou b le, e v e n if th e
B
00
s ta n d a r d o f liv ing in ev e ry o th e r n a tio n o n E a rth re m a in s t h e sa m e

10
as it is to d a y .
+3
1. The word pace in th e passage is closest in m eaning t o _______ .

P2
A. growth B. speed c. problem D. pollution

C
2. The word consum ption in the passage is closest in m eaning to

A
H
A. developm ent B. usage . c. population D. increase

3. According to th e passage, how does food production contribute to
-
global warm ing?

-L
A. Producing m ore food leads to growth in the world population.

N
B. Food production u se s m any chem icals which ad d to global

warming.
TO
c. Food production requires th a t the forests be cleared to create

NG
farm land.
D. Food production decreases the ability of the air to release heat.

4. Why does the u th o r m ention the rate a t w hich oil is being u sed in
ID
parag rap h 1 ? ^
A. To illustrate th a t we are usin g resources faster th a n the speed
B
a t w hich the population is growing.
282

B. To suggest th a t m ost of the problem s of global w a nnin g are a s -

sociated w ith o u r rap id u se of oil.-
N
c. To suggest th a t o ur oil is likely to ru n o u t som etim e in th e next
th irty years.
NH
D. To c o n trast the differences in lifestyle betw een people giving 100
y ea rs ago an d people living today.
UY
The word o th ers in the passage refers t o _____ .
.Q
A. problem s of global w arm ing in the m odem world
TP
B. exam ples of th e environm ental consequences of population
growth
O
c . way's in w hich o u r usage of oil will effect the world clim ate

D. th e re aso ns why tree s are essential in controlling global w arm -
NG
ing
According to the passage, how does th e sta n d a rd of living affect
H
global warm ing?
A. Higher sta n d a rd s of living are better for the environm ent. ;
N
B. F irst world natio n s create less population th a n developing n a -
tions. TR
c . The u se of n a tu ra l reso urces is directly related to th e stan d ard
B
of living.
00
D. High sta n d a rd s of living lead to increases in world population.

10
W hich of the sen ten ces below best expresses th e essential inform a-
+3
tion in the highlighted sentence (in bold) in th e passage? Incorrect

P2
choices change the meaning in important w a ys or leave out essential

C
information.
A. If C hina becom es a first world nation an d all o th er n atio n s keep
A
th e c u rre n t stan d ard of living, th e usage of energy a n d n a tu ra l

H
resou rces will double.

B. If C hina doubles its usage of n a tu ra l resources, its will atta in a
-
b etter sta n d a rd of living, b u t other n atio n s will have to rem ain

-L
as they are today.

N
c . Even if the stan d ard of living in every o th er nation on E a rth re-

m ains as its is today, C hina will still try to a tta in a first world
TO
sta n d a rd of living.
D. W hen C hina a tta in s a first world lifestyle, th e am o u n t of energy
NG
an d n a tu ra l reso urces used by other natio n s to keep th eir c u r-

re n t sta n d a rd of living will double.

Why does th e a u th o r d iscu ss China, Ja p a n , an d the United S tates?
ID
A. To com pare th e sta n d a rd s of their citizens

B
B. To explain why C hina will n o t be able to become a first world

nation

..c.-To'better illiisirate. theêffectsof an-: increasei-n sta n d ard s of.liv-.;

ing ^ :'-iv'
. D^'ôê^plai^-why^he-w.orlds ^ s e of energy w31:nAd.tO'doubLe
J 's o o n '
N
NH
GOSSRY '' * _
climate change s-thay kh hu - barrel thng trn
UY
- pace nhp , tc .... .-.populous (adj) ng .dn c
- t o triple tang gp ba -first world nations nhng quc gia
.Q
- consumption s tiu th thuc th gii th nht
TP
- trillion mt ngn t - to attain t c
O

115
In science,-a .theory is reasonable explanation of observed events
NG
th a t are re la te d . A theory often involves an im aginary model th a t helps
scien tists picture the way an observed event could be produced. A' good
H
example of t h i s is found in the kinetic m olecular theory, in w hich gases
are pictured a s being m ade u p of m any sm all particles th a t are in con-
N
sta n t motion.
TR
A useful theory, in addition to explaining p a st observations, helps to
predict events th a t have not a s yet been observed. After a theoiy h as
B
been publicized, scientists design experim ents to test the theoiy. If ob-
00
servations confirm the scien tists 1 predictions, th e theory is s u p p o rte d .

10
If observations do no t confirm the predictions, th e scientists m u st

+3
search further. There may be a fault in the experim ent, or th e theoiy

P2
may have to be revised or rejected.

C
Science involves im agination an d creative thinking a s well a s collect-

ing inform ation an d perform ing experim ents. Facts by them selves are
A
not science. As this m athem atician Ju le s Henri Poincare said: Science

H
is built w ith facts ju s t a s a h ou se is built with bricks, b u t a collection

of facts ca n n o t be called science any m ore th a n a pile of bricks can be
-
called hou se.

-L
Most scien tists s ta rt an investigation by finding out w h at o th er sci-

N
en tists have learned ab o u t a p articu lar problem . After known facts

have been gathered, the scientist com es to the p a rt of the investigation
TO
th a t requires considerable im agination. Possible solutions to the prob-

lem are form ulated. These possible solutions are Clled hypotheses. In
NG
a way, any hypothesis is a leap in to th e u nk n ow n . It extends the sci-

e n tists thinking beyond the know n facts. The scientist p lans experi-

m ents, perform s calculations an d m akes observations to test hypothe-

ses. For w ithout hypotheses, fu rth er investigation lacks p urpose and
ID
direction. W hen hypotheses are confirmed, they are incorporated into

B
theories.
284

1 . The word re la te d in line 2 is closest in m eaning to.v

A. connected B. described c . com pleted D. identified
N
2 . The w ord th is in line 4 refers t o _____
A. a good example
NH
B. a n im aginary model
c . th e kinetic m olecular theory
UY
D. a n observed event
.Q
3. According to th e second p aragrap h, a useful theory is one th a t
TP
helps scien tists t o _____
O
A. find errors in p a st experim ents

B. m ake predictions
c . observe events
NG
D. publicize new findings
H
4. The word su p p o rte d " in line 10 is closest in m eaning t o _____
A. finished B. adjusted c . investigated D. upheld
N
5. B ricks are m entioned in p arag rap h 3 to indicate h o w _____ .
TR
A. m ath em aticin an s ap proach science
B. building h o u se is like perform ing experim ents
B
00
c . science is m ore th a n a collection of facts

10
D. scientific experim ents have led to im proved technology

+3
6 . In th e fo urth p aragrap h , the a u th o r im plies th a t im agination is

P2
m ost im p o rtan t to scientists w hen th e y ____ _

A. evaluate previous work on a problem
C
B. form ulate possible solutions to a problem

c . g ath er know n facts
A
H
D. close a n investigation
7. In the la st p arag rap h , the a u th o r refers to a hypotheses a s a lea p
-
in to th e u n k n o w n in order to show th a t h y p o th e se s _____

-L
A. are som etim es ill-conceived

N
B. ca n lead to dang erous resu lts

c . go beyond available facts
TO
D. require effort to form ulate

NG
8 . In the la st p arag ra ph , w hat does the a u th o r imply a m ajor function

of hypotheses?

A. Sifting th ro u g h know n facts

ID
B. C om m unicating a scien tists th o ug h ts to o th ers

c . Providing direction for scientific research
B
D. Linking together different theories
285

N
NH
GLOSSARY v /-
UY
- to picture hnh.dung, tng-tng ra - to formulate thit: [p ci g mt cch
- kinetic molecular theory iiithuyet V;- heh thong, hnh thnh ;
.Q
' ng lc phntiy. '/' -hypothesis (hypotheses p) gi
TP
- particle ht vt-chat: V .: ' . tit ' .- .
- (to be) in constant motiovliri .tuc -leap.bc nhy
O
chuyen ng /: .V;-:" ' - the unknown ci cha bit, n s

- to publicize cng bo - to extend ko di, m rng
- to confirm khng nh - to incorporate sth intosth tch hp/
NG
- to revise xt li, duyt li , kt hp ci g vo trong ci g
- to reject bc bo J - to sift sang lc
H
- creative thinking s suy ngHTsang to
N
116
TR
n th e early days of the U nited S tates, postal cha rg es were paid
by th e recipient a n d charges v a rie d w ith th e d istance carried. In
B
1825, the United S ta tes Congress perm itted local p o stm asters to
00
give letters to mail carriers for hom e delivery, b u t th ese carriers

10
5 received no governm ent salary an d th eir entire com pensation de-

+3
pended on w h at they were paid by the recipients of individual let-

P2
ters.
In 1847 the U nited S tates Post Office D ep artm en t adopted the
C
idea of a postage stam p, w hich of course simplified th e p aym ent

A
10 for po stal service b u t cau sed grum bling by th o se who did n o t like
H
prepay. B esides, th e stam p covered only delivery to th e p o st office

an d did n o t include carrying it to a private ad d ress. In Philadel-
-
phia, for exam ple, w ith a population of 150,000, people still h a d to

-L
go to the p o st office to get th eir mail. The confusion a n d conges-

15 tion of individual citizens looking for th e ir letters w as itself enough
N
to discourage u se of the mail. It is no w onder th a t, d u rin g th e

TO
y ears of th e se cu m b e rso m e arrang em ents, private letter-carrying

an d express b u sin esses developed. Although th eir activities were
NG
only semilegal, th e y thrived, an d actually advertised th a t betw een

20 Boston an d P hiladelphia they were a half-day speedier th a n th e

governm ent mail. The governm ent postal service lo st volum e to

ID
private com petition a n d w as n o t able to h an d le efficiently even the

b u sin e ss it h ad.
B
Finally, in 1863, C ongress provided th a t th e m ail carriers who
286

25 delivered the m ail from the p ost offices to private ad d resse s should
receive a governm ent salary, an d th a t th e re shou ld be no extra
charge for th a t delivery. B ut th is deliveiy service w as a t first c o n -
N
fin e d to cities, an d free hom e delivery becam e a m ark of u rb a n -
NH
ism. As late as 1887, a town had to have 10,000 people to be eligi-
30 ble for free hom e delivery. In 1890, of the 75 million people in the
UY
United S tates, fewer th a n 20 million had m ail delivered free to
th eir doors. The rest, nearly th ree -q u arte rs of th e population, still
.Q
received no m ail u n le ss they w ent to th eir post office.
TP
1. W hat does th e passage mainly d iscu ss?
O

A. The increased u se of private m ail services
B. The developm ent of a governm ent postal system
NG
c . A com parison of u rb a n an d ru ral postal services
D. The history of postage stam ps.
H
2. The w ord varied in line 2 could b est be replaced b y ___ __
N
A. increased B, differed c . retu rned D. started
TR
3. W hich of th e following was seen a s a disadvantage of the postage
stam p?
B
A. It h ad to be purchased by the sender in advance.
00
B. It increased the cost of mail delivery,

10
c . It w as difficult to affix to.letters.

+3
D. It w as easy to counterfeit.
P2
4. Why does the au th o r m ention the city of Philadelphia in lines 12?

A. It was the site of th e first post office in the United S tates.
C
B. Its postal service w as inadequate for its population,

A
c . It w as th e largest city in the United S tates in 1847.

H
D. It w as com m em orated by th e first United S tates postage stam p.

5. The word cum bersom e in line 17 is closest in m eaning t o _____
-
A. b urd enso m e B. h an d som e c . loathsom e D. quarrelsom e

-L
6 . The w ord they in line 19 refers t o _____

N
A. B oston an d Philadelphia
TO
B. b u sin e sses
c . ' arrang em e n ts
NG
D. letters

7. The private p o stal services of the n in eteen th centu ry claim ed th a t

they could do w hich of the following fe tte r th a n the governm ent?
ID
A. Deliver a h igher volume of mail.

B. Deliver m ail more cheaply,
B
c . Deliver m ail faster.

D. Deliver mail to ru ra l areas.
287

8 . In 1863 the United S tates governm ent began providing w hich of th e

following to mail carriers?
A. A salary
B. H ousing
N
c . T ransportation
NH
D. Free postage stam p s
9. The word confined in lines 27-28 is closest in m eaning t o _____
UY
A.granted B. scheduled
c . limited
.Q
D. recom m ended
TP
GLOSSARY
- express businesses cc doanh nghip
O
- postal charges cc phi butJ in
- recipient ngi nhn chuyn pht tc hnh

- postmaster trng trm bu in - semilegal (adj) bn hp php
- mail carrier ngi a th - to thrive (throve - thrived) tr nn
NG
- compensation mn tin n b, bi thnh vng, pht t
thng - speedy (adj) nhanh, mau l
H
- to simplify n gin ha - volume mt s ing ln
- to grumble cri nhn, cu nhu - Congress Quc Hi M
N
- to prepay tr tin trc - to provide th a t... quy nh rng...
- to cover trang tri (mt chi ph) - to be confined to a place b gii hn
- congestion s chen chc nhau vi qu ti mt ni TR
ng, s tc nghn - urbanism [i sng th
B
- to discourage sth khin ai nn lng - to be eligible for iu kin c
00
khng cn thch/ mun ci g na hng ci g

10
- cumbersome (adj) cng knh, nng - to affix sth to sth dn/ nh ci g vo

n, khng hiu qu' ci g
+3
- to counterfeit lm gi (tin/ giy t)

P2
C
117 THE HISTORY OF THE ROLLER COASTER

A
The first roller coasters were created in R ussia in th e 17th cen -

H
tury. However, they were n ot like m o dem ones. They were m ore
like big sleds. People rode down steep ice slides. These sleds re-
-
quired very good navigation skills to slide down safely, a n d there

-L
were m any accidents..

N
At the end of the 19th century, American railway com panies in -

troduced roller coasters. T h ey set u p am u sem en t p a rk s to m ake
TO
money on the w eekends, w hen people rarely traveled. In 1884, title

first real roller coaster appeared. It w as a gravity-driven train . Pas-
NG
10 sengers clim bed flights of stairs to board the car. Then th e ca r w as

p u sh ed from the statio n to move down a hill an d over a few

bum ps. At th e bottom , p assengers got o u t of th e ca r an d w orkers
ID
lifted the car to the second station.

B
D uring the early 20th century, there w as great progress in roller

15 coasters. Unlike previous coasters, the new ones em p lo y ed me-
288

chanica tracks. The first was built in 1912. This w as a great a d -

vance. It enabled people to enjoy greater speed an d steeper hills
b u t w ith m uch m ore safety th an previous ones. T hrough the
N
1920s, m any roller coasters were built, b u t after World W ar II, the
20 n um b er of roller coasters significantly decreased.
NH
D isneyland, Americas first them e park, opened in 1955. It
opened a new era for am usem ent parks. Disney adopted the first
UY
tu b u la r steel roller coaster in 1959. Before this, roller coasters al-
.Q
ways h ad been built O1 wooden frames. The steel track no t only
TP
25 offered greater stability b u t also opened the door for loops and
corkscrew s.
O

1. The word T h ey in line 7 refers t o _____
NG
A. R ussians
B. roller coasters
H
c. railway com panies
D. passengers
N
2. According to p arag rap h 2, w hat can we infer ab out roller coasters?
TR
A. They took a lot of effort to ru n.
B. They were no t fun to ride,
B
c. They were reliant on ice.
00
D. They h ad lots of e n th u siasts.

10
3. The word em p lo y ed in line 15 is closest in m eaning to

+3
A. followed B. used c. left D. hired

P2
4. According to the passage, all of the following are tru e EXCEPT _

C
A. The first roller coaster was created in the 17th centu ry .

B. After the Second World War, more roller coasters were built
A
H
th a n ever before.
c. D isneyland opened in 1955.
-
D. The 20th century saw great advances in roller coasters.

-L
5. All of the following are m entioned in the passage EXCEPT _____

N
A. the setup of am u sem en t parks in America

B. D isneys adoption of wooden frame coasters
TO
c . the rise in construction of coasters in the USA

D. the advantages of tu b u la r steel construction
NG
6 . Why does the au th o r introduce Disney?

A. B ecause it created the first American roller coaster

B. B ecause it opened m any am usem en t p ark s in the U.S.
ID
c. B ecause it created m any coasters during World Wax II

B
D. B ecause it first introduced the. steel roller coaster
289

GLOSSARY
- roller coaster toa tu trt cao toe . - mechanical tracks ng ray c kh
.- sled xe trt tuyt - theme park cng vin gii tr theo ch
- steep (adj) c c cao
N
- ice slide sn -dc bng . . ' ' . - era. -k nguyn
- navigation skH k nng lo li, ti i - tubular (aj) c dng ng
NH
khien - stability s on nh
- amusement park cng vin gii tr V- loop ng di chuyn ln vng
UY
- gravity-driven (adj) chuyn ng th - corkscrew 1) ci kha xon rut g (
nguyn l trng'lc m nt ca chai ru vang) 2) ng
.Q
- a flight of stairs mt di cuthang xon trn c
TP
- bump ch nh cao lri trn mt ng
O

118
One of the m ost popular literary figures in Am erican literature is a
NG
I'o m a n who sp e n t alm ost half of h er long life in C hina, a coun try on a
cbntinen t th o u sa n d s of miles from th e United States. In h er lifetime she
H
earned th is co u n try s, m ost highly acclaim ed literary aw ard: th e Pulitzer
Prize, and also th e m ost prestigious form of literary recognition in the
N
world, the Nobel Prize for Literature. Pearl s . B uck w as alm ost a
household word th rou g hout m uch of h er lifetime b ecause of h e r prolific
TR
literary o u tp u t, w hich consisted of some eighty-five p ub lished works,
B
including several dozen novels, six collections of sh o rt stories, fourteen
00
books for children, an d more th a n a dozen w orks of nonfiction. W hen

10
she w as eighty years old, some twenty-five volum es were aw aiting p u b -

lication. Many , of those books were set in C hina, the land in w hich she
+3
spen t so m u ch of h er life. Her books and h er life served a s a bridge be-

P2
tween th e c u ltu re s of the E ast and the West. As the pro d u c t of those
two c u ltu res she becam e as she described herself, m entally bifocal.
C
Her unique background m ade h er into an u n u su ally interesting an d

versatile h u m an being. As we exam ine the life of Pearl Buck, we can n o t
A
H
help b u t'b e aw are th a t we are in fact m eeting th ree sep arate people: a
wife an d m other, a n internationally fam ous w riter a n d a h u m an ita rian
an d ph ilanthropist. One cannot, really get to know Pearl B uck w ithout
-
learning, ab o u t each of the three. Though honored in h er lifetime with

-L
the William Dean Howell Medal of th e American Academy of Arts an d

N
Letters in addition to th e Nobel and Pulitzer prizes, Pearl B uck a s a to -

tal h u m an being, no t only a fam ous au th o r, is a captivating subject of
TO
study.
NG
1. W hat is th e a u th o rs m ain purpose in the passage?

A. To offer a criticism of the w orks of Pearl Buck.

B. To illustrate Pearl B ucks views on C hinese literature.

ID
c . To indicate th e background an d diverse in terests of Pearl Buck.

D. To d iscu ss Pearl B ucks influence on the cu ltu res of the E ast
B
an d the West..
290

2. According to th e passage, Pearl Buck is known a s a w riter of all of

the following EXCEPT ________ .
A. novels . B. childrens books
N
c. poetiy D. sh o rt stories
NH
3. W hich of the following is NOT m entioned by the au th o r a s.a n aw ard
received by Pearl.Buck?
UY
A. The Nobel Prize
B. The Newberry Medal
.Q
c . The William Dean Howell medal
TP
D. The Pulitzer prize
O
4. According to the passage, Pearl Buck w as an u n u su a l figure in

American literature in th a t she _ . ; ,
A., wrote extensively abou t a very different culture.
NG
B. published half of her books abroad.
c. won more aw ards th a n a n y o ther wom an of h er time.
H
D. achieved h e r first success very late in life.
5. According to the passage, Pearl Buck described herself a s "mentally
N
bifocal to suggest th a t she was .
TR
A. capable of resolving the differences between two distinct linguis-
tic system s.
B
B. keenly aw are of how the p ast could influence the future.
00
c . capable of producing literary works of in terest to both ad u lts

10
a n d children.
D. equally fam iliar with two different cu ltural environm ents.
+3
P2
6 . The a u th o r's attitu d e toward Pearl B uck could best be described as

C
A. indifferent B. adm iring c. sym pathetic . D. tolerant

A
GLOSSARY
H
- a literary figure mt gng mt thuc versatile (adj) a hng, a t

gii vn hc . - cannot help but do 5th khng th
-
- acclaimed (adj) c ca tng ' khnglm g .

-L
- literary award gii thng vn hc - humanitarian (adj) c lng nhn t

- prestigious (adj) danh ga, c uy tn - philanthropist ngi giu, lng t thin
N
- a household word mt cai tn m ai ^honored (adj);c tn vinh, c vinh

cng bit/ c mi ngi thng danh
TO
xuyn nhc ti - the William Den Howell Medai of

- prolific (dj) c sc s.ng tc mnh the America n Academy of Arts
NG
- output sn ng, tng s tc phm ra and Letters.Huy Chng ca Vin

i Hn Lm M Thut v vn Hc Hoa Ki

- nonfiction th loi bin kho hoc k s mang tn William Dean Howell.

- mentally, bifocal' (adj) ging nh mt - captivating (adj) hp dn, y m
ID
ci knh hai trng v mt t duy hoc

B
- background hon cnh xut thn, bi - subject of study ch nghin cu

cnh
291
119
The oldest living things on arth' se trees. Some of Californias
sequoias have for four . thousand., years looked down on the
N
changes in i lan d sca p e a n d the com ings and goings of h u m an s.
/ -"They spxQut^d fE0m . ; ^ 3'''seeds:'ab&ut:;th;e. tiine the Egyptian pyra-
NH
5 m ids w.er :lD.emg bililt^ .Tby these, g ia n t p a tria r c h s seem a s re-
.mote arid inaccessible as>the Yocks- an d' m o un tain cliffs on w hich
UY
- they grow,;like:cath ed ral colum ns holding up the sky. It is h ard to -
.Q
V imagine them playing any p art in the lives of m ere h u m a n s or be-
TP
. ing in any way affected by the creatu res th a t p ass at th eir feet.
Lesser trees, however, have played an intim ate role in the lives
O
^ of people "since th e y first appeared on E arth. Trees fed th e fires

th a t warm ed hum an s: they provided shelter, food an d m edicine
NG
an d even clothing. They also shaped peoples spiritual, horizons.
Trees expressed the gra n d eu r and m ystery of life, a s they moved
H
throug h the cycle of seasons, from life to d ea th an d b ack to life
15 again. Trees were the largest living things aro u n d h u m a n s an d
N
they knew th a t some trees .had been stand ing on the sam e sp ot in
th eir p a ren ts an d g ra n d p aren ts 1 time, an d would con tinue to
TR
stan d long after they were gone. No wonder these trees becam e
B
symbols of strength , fruitfulness, and everlasting life.
00
20
10
+3
1. W hat is the m ain idea of the passage?

P2
A. Trees grow to great heights.

B. Trees have been im portant to people th ro ug hou t history,
C
c . Trees m ake h u m an s seem superior.

A
D. Trees th a t grow in California are very old.

H
2. W hich of the following is NOT m entioned in the passage a s a way in

which people have u sed trees?
-
A. For fu rn itu re B. For fuel

-L
c . For housing . For n o u rish m en t

3. In line 5, the p h rase g ia n t p a tria rc h s could b e st be replaced by
N
w hich of the following?

TO
A. tiny seeds B. im portan t leaders

c. towering trees . D. Egyptian pyram ids
NG
4. In line 11, the word th e y refers to w hich of the following?

A. Trees
B. G randeur an d m ystery
ID
c . S easons ...................
B
D. Peoples spiritual horizons
292

5. The a u th o r implies th a t, com pared with sequoias, other tree s have
N
A. been in existence longer __
B. ad ap ted m ore readily to their environm ents
NH
c . been affected m ore by anim als
D. had a closer relationship w ith people
UY
6 . W here in the passage does the a u th o r m ake a com parison between
.Q
trees and p a rts of a building?
TP
A. Lines 1-3 B. Lines 5-7 c. Lines 11-13 D. Lines 14-19
O
GLOSSARY

- sequoia cy c tng (loi cy cao ln v - cathedral column ct ln trong nh
i California) th
NG
- to look down on sb/sh 1) t v - to hold up the sky chng 6 bu tri
khinh thng ai 2) nhn xung k - intimate (adj) thn thit, gn gi
H
thp hn vi v ngo ngh - spiritual (adj) thuc v tm iinh
- to sprout ny mm, m chi - grandeur v hng v, v oai nghim
N
- patriarch bc ng lo, v i io - cycle chu ki
-cliff vch ni - fruitfulness s sinh si ny n phong
- inaccessible (adj) khng th ti gnTR ph
c - everlasting (adj) ng cu, vnh vin
B
00
10
12 0
Amelia E arh art w as born in K ansas in 1897. Thirty-one years
+3
later, she received a phone call th a t would change her life. She
P2
w as invited to become th e first woman passen ger to cross the At-

C
lantic O cean in a plane. The flight took more th a n 20 ho urs -

5 ab o u t th ree tim es longer th a n it routinely tak es today to cross the
A
Atlantic by plane. E arh a rt was twelve years old before she ever saw
H
an airplane, an d she d id n t take her first flight un til 1920. But she
w as so thrilled by h er first experience in a plane th a t she quickly
-
began to take flying lessons. She wrote, As soon as I left the

-L
ground, I knew I myself had to fly.

N
10 After th a t flight E arh art became a m edia sensation. She was

given a ticker tape parade down Broadway in New York and even
TO
President Coolidge called to congratulate her. B ecause her record-

NG
breaking career a n d physical ap pearance were sim ilar to pioneer-

ing pilot an d American hero C harles Lindbergh, she earned the

nicknam e Lady Lindy. She wrote a book ab ou t h e r flight across

15 the Atlantic, called 2 0 Mrs., 40 Min.
ID
E arh art continued to break records, an d also polished her skills

B
as a speaker an d w riter, always advocating w om ens achievem ents,

especially in aviation: Her next goal w as to achieve a tran sa tla n tic
crossing alone. In 1927 C harles Lindbergh becam e the first person
293
2Q to m a k e a so lo n o n s to p flig h t a c r o s s th e A tla n tic . Five y e a r s la te r ,

E arh art becam e the first wom an to repeat th a t feat. Her popularity
grew even m ore an d she was the u n d ispu ted queen of the air. She
N
then w anted to fly arp un d the. world, an d in J u n e 1937 she left
Miami with Fred. Noonan a s her navigator. No one know s why she
NH
25 left b e h i n d ' . i m p o r t a n t - n a v i g a t i o n in stru m en ts.
P e r h a p s it:w as tofmcLkeVroom:for additional fuel/for the long flight.
UY
The p air ;made- it. ,to- New .Guinea. in ;.2 l days .and th e n .left for
.Q
Howland. Island, a;tm y islaild in-the. m iddle of--the Pacific O cean ..
TP
y The last comm unication, from E rh rt an d Noonan w as on Ju ly 2,
30 1937 with a nearby C oast G u a rd : ship. The U nited S tates Navy
O
conducted, a m assive search for more th a n two w eeks b u t no trace

of th e plane of its passengers was eyr found. Many people believe
they got lost an d simply ra n ou t of fuel an d died.
NG
H
1. W ith which of th e following subjects is the passage m ainly con-
cerned?
N
A. The history of aviation
B. The tragic d eath of the queen of air
c . Achievem ents of early aviation pioneers TR
D. The achievem ents of a pioneering aviatrix
B
00
2. According to the passage, which of the following sta te m en ts ab o u t

10
E a rh a rt is NOT true?
+3
A. She wrote a book ab o u t h e r solo non stop flight across the Atlan-
' tic, called- 20 Hrs., 40 Min.
P2
B. In her la st adventure, she d id n t take com m unication an d navi-

C
gation in stru m en ts by accident, an d th a t led to the tragedy.

c . She is regarded as the female C hare.Lindbergh in aviation.
A
D. She w as in h e r late tw enties w hen she took h er first flight.

H
3. According to the passage:, when did Amelia E a rh a rt began h e r first

-
flig h t _____ .
-L
A. w hen she w as 12 years old

B. 1920
N
c. w hen she first saw an airplane

D. w hen she started to tak e flying lessons.
TO
4. The word sen satio n in line 10 is closest in m eaning to .

NG
A. feeling B. hit c . excitem ent D. perception

5. Amelia E arh art w as called Lady Lindy b e c a u s e _____

A. she w as the u n disp u ted queen of the air.
ID
B. President C oolidgegave h e r the nicknam e.

B
G. she repeated C harles Lindberghs feat.

E>. of h er career and h er physical resem blance to Lindbergh.
294

6 . The word u n d isp u ted in line 22 is closest in m eaning t o ______

A. contem porary B. undeceived
N
c . dissipated D. u nd o u bted
NH
7. The word it in line 26 refers to _____ . .
A. plane B. com m unication
UY
c . th e reason D. aviation
.Q
8 . The word m assive in line 31 is closest in m eaning t o _____
TP
A. su b sta n tial B. general c . large D. careful
O

9. It m ay be inferred from the passage th a t Amelia E a r h a rt _____
A. w ould n o t have developed h er love of flying if she h ad not been
NG
. invited to become the first wom an passeng er to cro ss th e Atlan-
H
tic in a plane.
B. would have continued to seek new ad v e ntu res a n d records to
N
break if she had not died a t the age of 39.
TR
c . becam e too confident and took too m any risk s to be able to live
B
to old age.
00
D. did n o t w ant to re tu rn to the United S tates.

10
+3
GLOSSARY
P2
- routinely (adv) theo thng l, bnh - to advocate sth bnh vc, ng h

C
thng th - achievement thnh tu, thnh tch

A
- thrilled (adj) hi hp mt cch th v -aviation ngnh hng khng

H
- to take flying lessons hc li my bay - solo nonstop flight chuyn bay mt

- a media sensation tin tc gy xn xao mnh khng ngh
-
'd lun trn cc phng tin truyn - feat k tch

-L
thng/ tin gy ch cho cng chng - undisputed (adj) khng cn g nghi

N
- a ticker tape parade cuc diu hnh ng na, kh cn phi bn ci

TO
trong ngi ta nm giy qua ca - navigator 1) nh hng hi 2) ha tiu

s cac to nh cao cho n ngi dn ng .
NG
ni ting - to make room for sth dnh ch

- record-breaking career mt s cho ci g

nghip ph k [c - Coast Guard Lc ing Tun Duyn,
ID
- pioneering (adj) c tnh tin phong Lc lng Canh Phng B Bin

B
- to polish 1) nh bng 2) trau di, rn - trace du vt, vt bch

luyn - aviatrix n phi cng
295
121 ...
In the late 1960s, m any people in K orth America tu rn e d th eir
atten tion to environm ental problem s a n d new steel-and-glass sky-
N
scrap ers were widely criticized: Ecologists pointed out th a t a clu s-
ter of tall buildings in a city often overburdens public tran sp o rta -
NH
5 tion a n d parking lot.capacities.
UY
S kyscrapers are also lavish consum ers, an d w asters, o f electric
power. In one recent year, the addition of 17 million sq uare feet of
.Q
skyscraper office space in New York City raised th e p eak daily d e-
TP
m and for electricity by 120,000 kilow atts - enough to supply th e
10 entire city of Albany, New York, for a day.
O

G lass-w alled skyscrapers can be especially w asteful. The h ea t
loss (or gain) through a wall of half-inch plate glass is m ore th a n
NG
ten tim es th a t th ro ugh a typical m asonry wall filled with insulation
board. To lessen the strain on. heating a n d air-conditioning equip-
H
15 m ent builders of skyscrapers have begun to u se double glazed
panels of glass, and reflective glasses coated with silver or gold
N
m irror films th a t reduce glare a s well a s h e a t gain. However, mir-
TR
ror-walled sky scrap ers raise the tem peratu re of th e su rrou n d in g
air an d affect neighboring buildings.
B
00
20 Skyscrapers p u t a severe strain on a city's san itatio n facilities,

10
too. If fully occupied, the two World Trade C enter tow ers in New
York City would alone generate 2.25 million gallons of raw sewage
+3
each year - as m uch as a city the size of Stam ford, C onnecticut,

P2
which h a s a population -.of more th a n 109,000.

C
25 S kyscrapers also interfere with television reception, block bird

flyways, an d o b stru ct air traffic. In Boston in the late 1960s, some
A
people even feared th a t shadow s from skyscrapers would kill the

H
grass on B oston Common.

-
Still, people continue to build skyscrapers for all th e reaso n s

-L
30 th a t they have always built them - personal am bition, civic pride,

an d the desire of ow ners to have the largest possible am o u n t of
N
rentable space.
TO
1. The m ain pu rpose of the passage is t o _____

A. com pare skyscrapers w ith other m odem stru c tu re s
NG
B. describe skyscrapers and their effect on the environm ent

c. advocate the u se of m asonry in the construction of sk yscrapers

D. illustrate some arch itectu ral designs of skyscrapers

ID
2. According to the passage, w hat is one disadvantage of sky scrapers

B
th a t have m irrored walls?

A. The exterior su rrou n d ing air is heated.
296

B. The windows m u st be cleaned daily,

c. C onstruction time is increased.
D. E xtra air-conditioning equipm ent is needed.
N
3. According to the passage, in the late 1960s some resid e nts of Bos-
NH
ton were concerned with w hich aspect of skyscrap ers?
A. The noise from their construction
UY
B. The removal of tree s from building sites
c . The harm fu l effects on the citys g rass
.Q
D. The high cost of rentable office space
TP
4. The a u th o r raises issu es th a t would m ost concern which of the fol-
O
lowing groups?

A. E lectricians
B. E nvironm entalists
c. Aviators
NG
D. T eachers
H
5. W here in th e p assage does the a u th o r com pare th e energy con-
sum ption of skyscrapers w ith th a t of a city?
N
A. Lines 6-10
B. Lines 17-19 TR
c . Lines 20-24
B
D'. Lines 25-28
00
GLOSSARY
10
- steel-and-glass skyscraper ta nh - double glazed glass (adj) knh hai lp

+3
chc tri bng thp v knh - a panel of glass mt tm knh

P2
- to criticize ph bnh, chi tr-c-h - mirror film lp trng mng bin

- ecologist nh sinh thi hc knh thnh gng
C
- cluster cm, khm, chni - glare nh sng chi mt

- to overburden gy qu ti, tr thnh - mirror-walled (adj) c tng l nhng
A
mt gnh nng cho ai ' tm gng

H
- parking lot capacities sc cha ca - sanitation facilities cc tin nghi v

bi xe sinh
-
- glass-walled (adj) c tng lm bng - to generate pht sinh, pht ra

-L
knh - raw sewage cht thi cha x l

- reflective (adj) c tnh phn chiu - to interfere with television recap-
N
- to be coated with c trng/ bc tion cn tr s thu sng TV

mt lp mng - to block bird flyways cn na chim
TO
- wasteful (adj) gy nhiu lng ph bay

- heat loss s tht thot nhit - to obstruct gy cn tr
NG
- heat gain s tch nhit - common bi c cng cng

- plate glass knh tm - ambition tham vng

- masonry wali tng xy bng gch - vic pride nim t ho ca cng dn

hoc th
ID
- insulation board tm cch nhit - rentable (adj) c th em cho thu

- to lessen the strain on sth gim bt c
B
s cng thng cho

22
The Kobel.Peace Prize is .awarded::n^ and ;tKe 'Hret 'WQmarir
to. win this, p rize' Baroness; Berth. FeUcie'-Sopliie^yon'; Suter:
N
. in l-9-05. i n fact, :.her,Jw0rk, inspired; the- creation -bf .the Prize. The
X.' first A m en ca n w o m a jitd win^'this. prize w as J a n e Addams, in 1931.
NH
7-5 However, Addm s is'.b'est :,knowii-, a s the founder of H ull House.
UY
J a n e Add am s w as born .in 186.0, into a wealthy family. She w as
one of a . sm all n u m b er of women in her generation to graduate
.Q
from college. Her c o m m itm e n t to im proving th e lives of those
TP
aro u n d h e r led ier to work for social reform an d world peace. In
10 the 1880s Jarie Addam s traveled to Europe. While she w as in Lon-
O

don, she visited a settlem ent h o use called Toynbee Hall. Inspired
by Toynbee Hall, Addams and h er friend, Ellen G ates S tarr,
NG
opened Hull House in a neighborhood of slu m s in Chicago in
1899. Hull House provided a day care center for children of work-
H
15 ing m others, a com m unity kitchen, an d visiting n u rses. Addams
and h e r staff gave classes ini English literacy, art, an d o th er su b -
N
jects. Hull H ouse also becam e a m eeting place for clu bs a n d labor
TR
unions. Most of the people who worked with Addam s in Hull
House were well educated, m iddle-class women. Hull H ouse gave
B
20 them an opportunity to use th e ir education an d it provided a
00
training ground for careers in social work.

10
Before World War I, Addams was probably the m ost beloved

+3
wom an in America. In a new spaper poll th a t asked, Who am ong

P2
o u r c o n te m p o ra rie s axe of the m ost value to th e com m unity?,

25 J a n e Addam s w as rated second, after Thom as Edison. W hen she
C
opposed Am ericas involveient in World W ar I, however, new spa-

A
per editors called h er a traitor and a fool, b u t sh e never changed

H
her m ind. J a n e Addams w as a strong cham pion of several other

cau ses. Until 1920, American wom en could no t vote. Addams
-
30 joined in th e m ovem ent for wom en's suffrage an d w as a vice presi-

-L
de n t of the National American W oman Suffrage Association. She

was a founding m em ber of the National Association for th e Ad-
N
vancem ent of Colored People (NAACP), an d w as p resident of th e

TO
W om ens International League for Peace a n d Freedom. H er repu ta-

35 tion w as gradually restored during the la st y ea rs of h e r life. She
NG
died of cancer in 1935..

1. With w hich of th e following subjects is the passage m ainly con-

ID
cerned?
A. The first aw ard of the Nobel Peace Prize to a n Am erican wom an.
B
B. A w om ans work for social reform an d world peace.
298

c . The early developm ent of Social Work in America.

D. C ontributions of ed ucated women to American society.
N
2. Which of the following ca n be inferred from th e passage?
A. the w ork of B aroness B ertha Felicie Sophie von S u ttn e r w as an
NH
inspiration to J a n e Addams.
B. J a n e A ddam s is m ost fam ous for h er opening of Hull House,
UY
c . those who lived n e a r Hull House had very poor literacy skills.
.Q
D. Jarie A ddams considered herself as a citizen of th e world ra th e r
TP
th a n of one particu lar country,
3. The word c o m m itm e n t in line 8 is closest in m eaning t o _____
O

A. involvem ent B. obligation c . dedication D. e n th usiasm
4. J a n e Ad d am s w as inspired to open Hull House b e c a u s e _____
NG
A. it gave ed u cated wom en a n opportunity to u se th eir education
H
an d develop careers in social work.
B. sh e traveled to Europe in the 1880s.
N
c . she visited Toynbee H all
D. she w as invited by a .settlem ent h o u se in Chicago.
TR
5. The word t h e ir in line 20 refers to
B
A. children of working m others
00
B. m iddle-class w o m e n '
10
c . visiting n u rse s
+3
D. labor -union m em bers

P2
6 . The word c o n te m p o ra rie s ' in line 24 is closest in m eaning t o ___

A. people of the sam e time
C
B. fam ous people still alive

A
c . elected officials
H
D. people old enough to vote

7. According to the passage, Ja n e A ddam s re p u ta tio n w as dam aged
-
w hen s h e _____
-L
A. allowed Hull House to become a m eeting place for club s an d la-

N
b or u n ion s
B. joined in th e m ovem ent for w om ens suffrage
TO
c . becam e a founding m em ber of the NAACP

D. opposed A m ericas involvement in World W ar I
NG
8 . W here in th e passage does the a u th o r m ention th e services p ro-

vided by Hull House?

ID
A. Lines 6-14
B. Lines 14-21 ,
B
c . Lines 22-28
D. Lines 28-34
299

GLOSSARY
- to inspire.gi.cam hng; ,. involvement in s tham gia vo
- founder ngi sang .lp '-V... - tratork phn bi
N
- commtmen-istKnhit tinih/^50'^' - champion 1) nh v ch 2) ngi
o ' hng h muon lam gi . r ^ :7 . ;J nhit, tinh ng h ; .
NH
- social reform s ci 'cch xa hr - cause 1) nguyn nhn 2) [ tng, mc
- slum kh nh chut ; ch
- a day care center'trng tm. chm sc
UY
- suffrage quyn u phiu ca ph n
tr vo ban ngy - vice president ph/chtch ,.
- working mother b m ang phi lm. - founding member thnh vin ban
.Q
vic .. - . sng lp .
TP
- community kitchen nh bp tp th - National Association for the Ad-
- literacy kh nngcVit c bn vancement of Colored People
O
- labor union cng on, nghip on (NAACP) Hip Hi QucGia v s

- middle-cass (adj) thuc gii trung iu Tin B Ca Ngi Da Mu
- p o ll cuc thm d kin - Women's International League for
NG
- contemporary ngi sng cng thi Peace and Freedom Lin on
- to be rated c xp hng Quc T Ph N v Ha Bnh v T Do
H
- to oppose chng i - to restore phc hi, khi phc
N
123
TR
The Moon h a s been w orshipped by primitive peoples an d h a s
inspired h u m an s to create everything from lu n ar ca len dars to love
B
00
sonnets, b u t w hat do we reallv know ab o u t it? The mos-t accepted

theory about the origin of the Moon is th a t it w as formed of the
10
5 debris from a m assiv e collision with the young E arth ab o u t 4.6

+3
billion years ago. A huge body, perhap s the size of M ars, stru ck
P2
the E arth, throwing out an im mense am ou n t of d e b ris th a t coa-

lesced and co o led in orbit around the E arth. '
C
The developm ent of E arth is inextricably linked to the moon;

A
10 the Moons gravitational influence upon the E arth is th e prim ary

H
cause of ocean tides. In fact, the Moon h as m ore th a n twice the

effect u p o n the tides th a n does the Sun. The Moon m akes one ro-
-
tation and com pletes a revolution aro un d the E a rth every 27 days,
-L
7 hours, an d 43 m inutes. This synchronous rotation is cau sed by

N
15 an u n ev e n distribution of m ass in the Moon (essentially, it is

heavier on one side th a n tile other) an d h as allowed the E a rth s
TO
gravity to keep one side of the Moon perm anently facing E arth. It
is an average distance from E arth of 384,403 km.
NG
The Moon h as no atm osphere; w ithout an atm osphere, the

20 Moon h a s nothing to protect it from m eteorite im pacts, an d th u s

the surface of the Moon is covered w ith im p a c t c ra te rs , both large
ID
and small. The Moon also h a s no active tectonic or volcanic activ-

B
ity, so the erosive effects of atm ospheric w eathering, tectonic

shifts, an d volcanic upheavals th a t tend to e ra se an d reform the
300

25 E a rth s surface features are not a t work on the Moon. In fact, even
tiny surface features such as the footprint left bv an a stro n a u t in
the lu n ar soil are likely to last for millions of years, u n less obliter-
N
ated by a chance m eteorite strike. The surface gravity of the Moon
NH
is abo ut one-sixth th a t of the E a rth s. Therefore, a m an weighing
30 82 kilogram s on E arth would only weigh 14 kilogram s on the
UY
Moon.
The geographical features of the E arth m ost like th a t of the
.Q
Moon are, in fact, places such as the Hawaiian volcanic craters
TP
and the huge m eteor crater in Arizona. The climate of the Moon is
O
35 very unlike either Hawaii or Arizona, however; in fact the tem pera-

tu re on the Moon ranges between 123 degrees c to -2 3 3 degrees
c.
NG
1. W hat is the passage primarily about?
H
A. the Moons effect u pon the E arth
B. the origin of the Moon
N
c . w hat we know ab out the Moon and its differences to E arth
TR
D. a com parison of the Moon and the E arth
2. The word m assiv e in line 5 is closest in m eaning t o ___________
B
00
A. unavoidable B. dense c . huge D. im pressive

10
3. The word d e b ris in ine 7 is closest in m eaning t o _____

+3
A. ru b b ish B. satellites c. moons D. earth

P2
4. According to the passage, the Moon i s _____

A. older th a n the E arth
C
B. protected by a dense atm osphere

A
c . com posed of a few active volcanoes

H
D. the prim ary cause of E arth's ocean tides

5. The word u n e v e n in line 15 is closest in m eaning t o ______ -
-
A. Heavier
-L
B. Equally distributed
N
c . Orderly
D. Not uniform
TO
6 . Why does th e au th o r m ention im p a c t c ra te rs in line 21?

NG
A. to show the result of the Moon not having an atm osphere

B. to show the result of the Moon not having active tectonic or vol-

canic activity
c . to explain why the Moon has no plant life because of m eteorites
ID
D. to explain the corrosive effects of atm ospheric w eathering

B
7. The word e ra s e in line 24 is closest in m eaning to-_____

A. change B. im pact c . obliterate D. erup t
301

8 . A person on the Moon would weightless th a n on the E arth because
N
c. th e Moon h a s rio atm osphere
NH
D. the. Moon h a s no active tect.onic or volcanic activity.
9. All of the following are tru e ab o uV* tw th e Moon EXCEPT __
UY
1 li. W.V./C4. 1VJ
A. it h a s a wide range . te m p e ra tu res.
.Q
. B. it is heavier on .one side than- the o ther
TP
G. it is unable to protect itself from 'meteorite atta ck s
, D. it h a s less effect upon-the tides th a n th e S u n
O

10. W hich of the following can be inferred from the passage?
A. the Moon is not able to support h u m an life
NG
B. if the Moon h ad no gravitational influence, the E arth would not
have tides
H
c. people living in Hawaii an d Arizona would feel a t Home on th e
Moon
N
D. M ars could have been formed in a sim ilar way to the Moon
GLOSSARY TR
B
- to worship sng bi, tn th - mass khi Sng'
00
- primitive (adj) nguyn thy, s khai - gravity ng lc

10
- lunar calendar m lch, lch theo mt - permanently (adv) mt cch vnh vin,
+3
trng mi mi.
- love sonnet bi th tinh, bi xon-n . - meteorite impact s va p mnh do
P2
tr tnh (gm 14 cu) thin thch gy ra

C
- debris mnh v vn - impact crater h hnh phu do va

- massive (adj) to ln . chm mnh to r-
A
- collision s va chm, s m vo nhau - tectonic (adj) thuc v kin to

H
- to coalesce kt dnh i thnh mt khi - erosive (ad)c tc dng bo mn

- to cool ngui i - atmospheric weathering s bin i
-
- inextricably (adv) khng th tho g hnh dng o kh qun. g ra

-L
ra c - shift s dch chuyn

- gravitational (adj) thuc trng lc - upheaval s thng trm, s bin ng
N
- tide thy triu ln

- rotation vng quay qunh trc - to obliterate hy dit, xa sch
TO
- revolution vng qua tron - a chance meteorite strike mt s va

NG
- synchronous (adj) ng b p tinh c ca thin thch

- uneven (adj) khng bng phng, - dense (dj) dy.c,-rm rp

khng ng u - uniform (dj) ng nht

- distribution s phn b,'s phn phi - composition thnh phn cu to
ID
B
302

124
William Sydney Porter (1862-1910), who wrote u n d er th e p se u -
N
donym of o . Henry, was born in North Carolina. His only formal
NH
education w as to atten d his Aunt Lina's school u n til the age of fif-
teen, where he developed his lifelong love of books. By 1881 he
UY
5 w as a licensed pharm acist. However, within a year, on th e recom -
m endation of a m edical colleague of his fathers, Porter moved to
.Q
La Salle-C ounty in Texas for two years herding sheep. D uring th is
TP
time, W ebsters U nabridged Dictionary was his co n stan t com pan-
O
ion, and Porter gained a knowledge of ran ch life th a t he later in-

10 corporated into m any of his sh ort stories. He then moved to Austin
for three years, and during this time the first recorded use of his
NG
pseudonym appeared, allegedly derived from his h abit of calling
Oh, Henry to a family cat. In 1887, Porter m arried Athol E stes.
H
He worked a s a draftsm an, th en as a bank teller for th e First Na-
15 tional Bank.
N
In 1894 Porter founded his own hu m or weekly, the Rolling
TR
Stone, a v e n tu re th a t failed within a year, and later wrote a col-
u m n for the H ouston Daily Post. In the m eantim e, th e First Na-
B
00
tional B ank w as examined, an d th e s u b se q u e n t indictm ent of

10
20 1886 stated th a t Porter had embezzled funds. Porter th en fled to

New O rleans, and la ter to H onduras, leaving his wife an d child in
+3
A ustin: He retu rn ed in 1897 because of his wifes continued ill-

P2
health, however she died six m onths later. Then, in 1898 Porter
C
w as found guilty an d sentenced to five years im prisonm ent in

25 Ohio. At the age of thirty five, he entered prison a s a defeated m an;
A
he h ad lost his job, his home, his wife, and finally his freedom. He
H
em erged from prison three years later, reborn as o . Henry, the

pseudonym he now used to hide his tru e identity. He wrote a t
-
least twelve stories in jail, and after re-gaining h is freedom, went

-L
30 to New York City, where he published m ore th a n 300 stories and

gained fame as Americas favorite sh o rt story writer. Porter m ar-
N
ried again in 1907, b u t after m onths of poor health, he died in New

TO
York City a t th e age of forty-eight in 1910. o . H enrys stories have

been tran slated all over the world.
NG
1. Why did the au th o r write the passage?

A. b ecause it is a tragic story of a gifted writer

ID
B. to outline the career of a fam ous American

c . because of his fame a s Americas favorite sh o rt story w riter
B
D- to outline the influences on o . Henrys writing
303

2. According to the passage, P orters F ather w a s _____

A. responsible for his move to La Salle County in Texas
B. th e person who gave him a life-long love of books
c . a m edical doctor
N
D. a licensed p h arm acist
NH
3. The word a lleg e d ly in line 9 is closest in m eaning t o _____
A. supposedly B. reportedly c . wrongly . m istakenly
UY
4. W hich of th e following is tru e, according to th e p assage?
.Q
A. both of P o rters wives died before he died
TP
B. Porter left school a t 15 to become a p h arm a cist
O
c . Porter wrote a colum n for the H ouston Daily Post called Rolling

S tone
D. th e first recorded use of his pseudonym w as in A ustin
NG
5. The .word v e n tu re in line 17 is closest in m eaning t o _____
H
A. challenging experim ent
B. bold initiative
N
c . speculative action
D. sorry experience
TR
6 . The word s u b s e q u e n t in line 19 is closest in m eaning t o _____
B
A. re su ltin g B. police c . alleged D. official
00
10
7. Porter lost all of the following when he w ent to prison EXCEPT his
+3
A. hom e B. wife c . job D. books

P2
8 . According to the a u th o r, how m any stories diti P orter write while in

C
prison for th ree years?

A. more th a n 300 B. 35
A
c . a t least 12 D. over 20
H
9. The a u th o r im plies which of the following is tru e?

-
A. Porter would probably have w ritten les$ stories if he h a d not

-L
been in prison for th ree years

N
B. Porter was in poor h ealth th ro u g h o u t his life

c . o . Henry is as pop ular in m any o th er co un tries a s he is in
TO
America
D. P orters wife m ight have lived longer if he had not left h er in
NG
A ustin w hen h e fled.

10. W here in the passage does the a u th o r m ention a h a b it of Porter

th a t w as to become very useful for him later?
ID
A. lines 7-13 B. lines 16-22

B
c . lines 22-28 D. lines 28-34
304

- pseudonym tn gi - draftsman ngi v s thit k,

- licensed pharmacist mt dc s c ngi phc tho - humor weekly t
N
cp php hnh ngh tun bo tro phng
- on the recommendation of theo li - venture cng vic knh doanh y mo
NH
khuyn ca him
to herd sheep chn cu - column ct bo, chuyn mc trn bo
UY
- unabridged (adj) khng rt ngn, ton - indictment s buc ti
tp - to embezzle bin th cng qu
.Q
- ranch tri chn nui - to flee (fled - fled) chy trn
TP
- to incorporate hp nht, tch hp, kt - defeated (adj) b nh bi, tht bi
hp, sat nhp - to emerge from xut hin, bc ra
O
- allegedly (adj) c cho l khi (mt ni)

- to be derived from sth (t ng/ tn - identity l lch, nhn thn
gi) pht sinh t -jail nh t
NG
- to re-gain y li c
H
125 DEATH OF THE CLASSROOM
T he New Wave o f O nline E d u c a tio n
N
By Scoff Reekie
TR
Picture a society where learning can happ en a t any time, in any
place an d can be com pleted w ithout ever going to class. This could be
B
the new wave of education an d the Internet technology now exists to
00
sup po rt su ch a system .
10
The v irtual classroom is here. If you are interested in English, or

+3
Civil Engineering, th en head to the university an d click yourself a de-

P2
gree. Well, m avbe its no t th a t .easy, b u t you would be on the right

track. The flexibility of studying a t your own pace, an d the money you
C
save w ith online courses are two of the m ain attractions.

The Web is a powerful educational tool. Yet som e feel th a t virtual
A
H
classroom s will isolate stu d en ts from each other, w hich will result in
problem s developing interpersonal relationships an d th a t these skills
-
are m u ch m ore im portant th a n com puter skills. Should teachers teach

kids how to behave in society, how to respect others a n d how to co-
-L
operate or should kids have already learned th is from th eir p aren ts? No
N
one is saying th a t social skills a ren t im portant, however, virtual class-

room s are fa r'a b o u t m ore th a n ju s t com puter skills. Some strongly be-
TO
lieve th a t education can be tau g h t via the Web an d social skills can be
gained from joining sports team s, sum m er cam ps, or ju s t hanging out!
NG
O thers argue th a t th is virtual classroom may place p ressu re on s tu -

dents: to become com puter literate or be left behind in life. Is this u n -

due p ressu re or reality? Maybe being left behind in life is a little d ra -

ID
m atic, b u t the reality is th a t the com puter age is here. W hether you
w ant to pay for your new je a n s with your debit card, or check to see if
B
the library h as the book you w ant, youre going to need some com puter
skills.
305

The developm ent of flexible, inquiring m inds h a s rarely been th e

m ain concern in th e design, of educational system s. After all, if you
have ov er th i r t y in q u irin g m in d s a n d on ly o n e te a c h e r, flexibility
could be a problem .'.It seem s th a t developing stu d e n ts p ro per social
N
behaviour h a s always xceded .the .concern to develop stu d e n ts crea-
NH
tivity. C om puter technology ca n m ake individualized atten tio n a real
possibility. At th e In stitu te for the Learning Sciences, system s are being
UY
developed to allow people to t out things in sim ulated worlds. This
technology wiU anow. for .lii'e'individual creative growth in stu d en ts.
.Q
The Web will provide am azing opportunities for th e education of o ur
TP
society. Anyone with a phone line an d a com puter h a s ac cess to unlim -
O
ited am ounts- of knowledge an d program s designed to help th em learn

and u n d erstan d . T h e ,teachers an d p are n ts involved w ith th ese p ro-
gram s will be given th e job of m aking sure th a t stu d en ts lead well-
NG
balanced lives th at.co m b in e W eb-based education an d positive social
interaction w ith their, friends an d neighbours. Im agine your recreation
H
room h a s now become your classroom , and your p a re n ts seem to be
N
doing a s m uch hom ework as you are! So, be prepared a s the virtual
classroom may find its way to a com puter screen, n ea r you!
TR
1. W hat is the a u th o rs overall attitu d e tow ards a virtual classroom ?
B
A. He is enthu siastic. B. He is skeptical,
00
c . He is indifferent. D. He is disapproving.
10
2. Why are people attracted to online education?

+3
A. B ecause it is cheap an d flexible.

P2
B. B ecause it is fashionable an d new.

c . B ecause it is powerful/and easy.
C
D. B ecause it is unlim ited an d fast,

A
3. W hat do the advocates of online education m aintain?

H
A. It increases stu d e n ts social skills.

. B. It develops com puter skills,
-
c . It com plem ents education at home.

-L
D. It will boost stu d e n ts creativity. .

N
4. W hat do the opponents of online education m aintain?

TO
A. The virtual'classroom will resu lt in dram atic changes.

B. The virtual classroom will, place a burd en on stu d en ts,
NG
c . S tu d e n ts academ ic perform ance will suffer.

D. S tu d en ts cannot ignore the reality of th e com puter age.

5. Why does th e a u th o r m ention over th irty inquiring m inds an d only

ID
one teach er (paragraph 4)?

B
A. To prove th a t inquiring m inds have been the m ain concern of

the educational system.
306

B. To prove th a t teachers-Qveresiiijaate the value of stu d e n ts social

behaviour.
c . To prove th a t individualized attention is hardly possible in a
N
traditional classroom .
NH
. D, To.prove th a t teac h ers feel no special concern for developing
stu d e n ts flexibility.
UY
6 ..What role are p are n ts supposed to play in the w eb-based education
.Q
of society?
TP
A. They will have to do hom e assignm ents together w ith th eir kids.
B. They will have to balance social, activities an d learning of th eir .
O
kids.

c . They will have to control the virtual, an d real-life activities of
NG
their kids.
' D. They will have to. help their kids get access to the virtual class-
H
room..
GLOSSARY
N
- virtual classroom phng hc o - computer literate (adj) bit s dng
TR
- Civil Engineering ngnh k s cng .. my tnh
trinh - undue (adj) khng ng c
B
- to click oneself a degree kch chut - inquiring (dj) t m, ham hiu bit
00
nhn bhg i hc ' - to exceed vt qu

10
- to be on the right track i ng - creativity tnh/ c sng to

hng . . - individualized attention s ch
+3
- flexibility s mm do,, tnh linh ng/ dnh cho tng c nhn

P2
uyn chuyn - flexible (adj) - simulated (adj) m phng, gi lp

- at one's own pace theo toe ca - well-balanced (adj) cn i, qun binh
C
.ring minh - interaction with s tng tc vi

- to isolate sb from sb cch li ai vi ai - recreation s gii tr
A
- interpersonal relationships cc mi - to boost y mnh

H
quan h gia ngi vi .ngi - burden gnh nng

- to hng out la c ni ny ni n
-
-L
126 YOUTH REVIEW

N
New:statistics show th at, a s schools in Britain prepare to break up

for tKe holidays, over one million teenagers could be w andering the
TO
stre ets b ecause there is now here'else to go. The yex-long enquiry con-
su lted 16,000 UK teenagers and recom m ends radical action to tra n s -
NG
form -their, lives, including a youth h u b in every com m unity to tackle

anti-social behaviour arid crime:

The Review, u n d ertak en by childrens charity 4Children and s u p -
ID
ported by Nestle, com es a t a time of unprecedented debate ab o u t the

B
welfare of young people in .th e UK - with- statistics d em onstrating wor-

rying .trends in all asp ects of teenagers lives 'from risky behaviour to
307
youth-on-youth violence and anti-social behaviour. R esearchers spent

12 m on ths touring each region of the country an d consulting over
16,000 teenagers of all ages to find ou t w hat life is truly like for young
people today in the UK an d how they them selves believe th a t improve-
N
m en ts can be made. Publicising the report today., pop s ta r an d youth
NH
icon Lily Allen said: I w ant to see a new sta rt for teenagers in com m u-
nities where they have nothing to do, nowhere to go an d now here to
UY
call th eir o w n;' The Youth Review h a s ..consulted 16,000 teenagers
across the country, an d th eir m essage w as clear: they said to give young
.Q
peoplem ore of a stak e in -communities an d give u s m ore opportunities.
TP
The n u m ber of teen agers .who go off the rails is a problem for u s all and
O
instead of helping them only after they re in crisis we need to stop them

getting into trouble in the rs place.
The enquiry discovered;
NG
Young people were fearful for th eir own safety, w ith 60% of young
H
people in deprived areas becoming viptinis of crime in th eir com -
m unity.
N
80% of young people said they had nowhere to go an d noth ing to
do outside school an d h u n g aro u n d on the streets a s a result.
TR
70% of teenagers said th at, in th eir opinion, young people got in -
volved in anti-social behaviour because they were bored.
B
00
More th a n 70% of 11-16 year olds said th a t they have w itnessed

10
anti-social behaviour over the last, year, w hilst 12 % of young peo-

ple belong to a gang.
+3
62% said th a t they did not know where to go to get help or infor-
P2
m ation if they needed it.'

C
Youth crime costs u p to 13 billion per year com pared to L .6 bil-

lion sp en t by governm ent on positive prevention a n d you th pro-
A
gram m es. It costs 35,000 to p u t a young person in a detention

H
centre for a year.

The Review is calling for an urgent transform ation of su p p o rt for
-
teenagers, it recom rnends a program m e of government investm ent and

-L
action to provide positive opportunities for all young people, w ith early
N
sup p o rt an d intervention for troubled teen agers to prevent difficulties

escalating.
TO
The key recommendations are:

NG
A Youth C entre in eveiy com m unity providing dedicated spaces for

young people to m eet, a s well as access to m usic, creative arts,

sports,- classes an d specialist intervention an d su p p o rt for teenag-

ID
ers in difficulty.
Mobile Intervention Team s to work in area s of high deprivation and
B
u n re st - offering teenagers specialist an d positive support.
308

Action on bullying an d a new Victim Support schem e for young

people who have been th e victims of crime.
N
Young Mayors elected in every area to give teenagers re p resen ta-
tion and a say in their com m unity.
NH
Free public tra n sp o rt and leisure for all young people u n d e r 18 tc
UY
en su re access for all.
Oona King, C hair of the Review said: Growing u p can be tough and
.Q
we are simply not doing enough to help the next generation to flourish.
TP
On average we spend 17p for each young person per day on you th ser-
O
vices and th is h a s to change. Young people need to be a p art of OU

com m unities otherw ise we spend billions dealing w ith the conse-
quences of anti-social behaviour, crime and violence.*
NG
1. The Youth Review w as carried out b y _____
H
A. the Government.
B. young people.
N
c. a charity, with su pport from the Government.
TR
D. a charity, with sup p o rt from a company.
B
2. According to Lily Allen, the m ain m essage from young people i s ___
00
A. they w ant more opportunities.

10
B. they d o n t w ant to get into trouble,

c . they don't need more things to do.
+3
D. they d o n t agree th a t there is a crisis.

P2
3. W hat is the m ain cau se of anti-social behaviour, according to young

C
people?
A. Boredom.
A
H
B. Gangs.
c . A lack of information.
-
D. A lack of detention centres.

-L
4. W hat would the Youth C entres recom m ended by the report offer to
N
young people?
A. Help with their problems.
TO
B. A place to meet,
c . A place to learn.'
NG
D. AU ofA-C.

5. W hat would be the purpose of electing Young Mayors, according to

ID
the text?
A. It would help teach young people how th e political system
B
works.
B. It wotild allow laws to be passed giving young people free public
transpo rt.
30
c . It would g iv e pg-people a voice in th e com m unity.

D It vvould-make'yQurig':jpebpie th in k more seriously ab o u t the is-
su es ' ; I./
N
6. Choose th-bt :s)|^^^<?if:Jbe5rît!s|ncluins:
NH
A. The G overnm ent'cis-to provide- m ore m oney so th a t teenag ers
are lessrhOTed. and';inoreinvolved in th e ir communities..
UY
' B. .Most teenagers are valuable m em bers of the com m unity, b u t
; th e G overnm ent nes to focus on the sm all m inority who b e - .
.Q
; ; come involved in crime!
TP
C. There are enough recreational facilities for young people, b u t
O
m ore money needs to be sp en t on-dealing w ith the conse-

quences of teenage crime.
D. Although we spend lot of money for youth development, there
NG
is still too m uch anti-social behaviour, crim e a n d violence.
am ong teeangers.
H
GLOSSARY
N
- youth review s nh gi; li gii tr - youth icon bu tng ca tui tr
- to break up for the holidays (trng)
ng ca ngh h
TR
-stak e phn chia, phn c hng, c
tc
B
- enquiry cuc iu tra - to go off the rails bt u c hnh vi
00
- to consult sb tham kho, hi kin ai . ngang bng/ lch [c

10
- radical (adj) cp tin, t - crisis cn khng hong

- to transform ci to, chuyn ha, bin - deprived (adj) ngho kh
+3
i -to hang around lang thang, lng vng,

P2
- youth hub trung tm sinh hat thanh th .thn

nin - gang bng ng
C
- to tackle x l, gii quyt - detention centre trung tm tm giam

- anti-social behaviour hnh vi chng - investment s u t
A
li x hi . - intervention s can thip

H
- to undertake sth m ng, gnh -troubled (adj) ang gp rc ri

vc - to escalate eo thang, tng mnh
-
- charity hi t thin - dedicated (adj) dnh ring

- unprecedented (adj) cha tng c - deprivation s.ngho kh
-L
trc y - unrest s bat on

N
- debate cuc tranh ci - bullying, s bt nt tr nh hn

- welfare s hnh phc,.cnh sng yr - mayor th trng
TO
vui - to give sb representation and a say

- trend xu th, xu hng em li s i din v ting ni'cho ai
NG
- risky (adj) nguy him - tough (dj) kho khn, gian; kh

- to tour an area i khp mt khu vc - to flourish tr nn pht t, thnh

- to publicise cng b vng

ID
B
310

127
In Egyptian m yth, Apophis w as the an cien t spirit of evil an d de-
N
structiQn. So it seem ed a fitting nam e for a 390-m etre wide asteroid
NH
th a t is potentially on a collision course with o u r planet. NASA h a s e s-
tim ated th a t a n im p act from Apophis, w hich h a s a n ou tsid e chance of
UY
hitting th e E arth in 2036, would release m ore th a n 100,000 tim es the
energy released in th e n u clear b last over Hiroshim a. T h o usan d s of
.Q
sq u are kilom etres would be directly affected by the b last b u t th e whole
TP
of th e E arth w ould see th e effects of th e d u st released into th atm o s-
phere.
O

Apophis h a d been, interm ittently tracked since its discovery in J u n e
2004 b ut, in Decem ber, it started causing serious concern. Projecting
NG
the orbit of th e asteroid into th e future, astronom ers calculated th a t
th e odds of it h itting th e E a rth were alarm ing. As m ore observations
H
cam e in, th e odds got higher. The asteroid w as placed a t four ou t of ten
on the Torino scale - a m easu re of the th re a t posed by a n ea r-E a rth
N
object, where ten is a certain collision. This w as the h ighest of any a s -
teroid in recorded history. TR
Alan Fitzsim m ons, a n astron om er from Q ueens University Belfast,
B
00
said: W hen it does p a ss close to US in April 2029, the E arth will deflect
10
it an d change its orbit. T heres a sm all possibility th a t if it p asse s

through a p artic u la r point in space, th e so-called keyhole, the E ar tins
+3
gravity will change things so th a t w hen it com es back aro u n d again in

P2
2036, it will collide w ith u s. The chance of Apophis passin g through

C
the keyhole, a 600-m etre p atch of space, is 1 in 5,500 b ased on cu rre n t

inform ation.
A
There is no shortage of ideas on how to deflect the asteroid. No

H
technology h a s been left unconsidered; even potentially dangerous

ideas su c h a s n u clea r powered spacecraft. The favoured m ethod is also
-
potentially th e easie st - throw ing a spacecraft a t the asteroid to change

-L
its direction. One idea th a t seem s to have no su p p o rt from astro no m ers

N
is th e u se of explosives. The next opportunity for ra d a r observations of

Apophis will no t be u n til 2013. NASA h a s argued th a t a final decision
TO
w hether or n o t to go ah e ad w ith a full-blown m itigation m ission will

have to be m ade a t th a t stage. In 2029, astronom ers will know for sure
NG
if Apophis will pose a th re a t in 2036 b t if th e w orst-case scenarios

tu rn o u t to be tru e a n d the E arth is not prepared, it will be too late to

do anything.
ID
B
1. A p o p h is _____
A. h a s th e potential to destroy the whole of th e E arth.
B. m ay ca use dam age com parable to th a t of a n u cle ar bomb.
311

c. is larger th a n any asteroid.recorded by NASA so far.

D. h as been given a nam e reflecting.its om inous n atu re.
2:: W hen Apophis-'was.'is.cverd, scientists :
N
A. took some tim e to calculate its orbit.
B. im mediately realised how dangerous it was.
NH
c. decided they would never let it out of sight.
UY
D. invented a scale to m easure the th re a t it posed.
3. According to Professor Alan F itzsim m on s _____
.Q
A. its probable Apophis w ont come n ear the E arth in 2029.
TP
B. passing through the keyhole may prove to be a decisive factor,
O
c. in 2029, the asteroid may change the E a rth s gravity.

D. the chance of Apophis hitting the E arth is 1 in 5,500.
4. S cientists believe t h a t _____
NG
A. we have no effective technology now to solve the problem.
H
B. the b est way to deal w ith the asteroid would be to blow it up.
c. a controlled collision could stop Apophis from h itting th e E arth.
N
D. the last m om ent to send a m itigation m ission will be 2029.
GLOSSARY TR
B
- myth chuyn thn thoi - the Torino scale thang cp Torino
00
- spirit of evil and destruction bng - to deflect sth lm ci gi i hng bay

10
ma ca s c c v hy dit - so-called (adj) c gi

- fitting (adj) thch hp - keyhole l kha
+3
- asteroid tiu hnh tinh - to collide With va chm vi

P2
- collision s va chm, s m sm vo - patch mng, m, khong

- impact s va p mnh - explosive cht n, bom, min
C
- nuclear blast v n ht nhn - to go ahead with tip tc thi hnh,

- intermittently (adv) thnh thong, tin hnh
A
H
chc chc - full-blown (adj) pht trin y ,

- to track theo di, ln theo du vt ton din
-
- to project lng on, tnh ton, c - mitigation s lm gim bt nguy

chng hi
-L
- odds kh nng xy ra - mission s mnh, nhim v

N
- alarming (adj) ng bo ng, ng s - worst-case scenario kch bn xu

- to pose a threat lm hin hin mt nht
TO
mi e da - ominous (adj) b im xu
NG

ID
B
312

128 A DANGEROUS HABIT

The world of online gaming is a growing phenom enon w ith millions
N
of young m en an d women aro un d the globe logging on to join in role-
NH
play gam es w hich allow them to in teract with o th er players. EverQuest
an d World o f Warcraft are two of the biggest online gam es. Seven mil-
UY
lion people su b scribe to World o f Warcraft an d join a virtual world of
Lord o f the Rings type ch aracters.
.Q
However, a study of 7,000 online com puter gam ers h a s revealed th a t
TP
one in nine were displaying the sam e signs of addiction a s gam blers
O
an d drug u sers. The subjects, mostly m ale an d w ith a n average age of

21, were ask ed to fill ou t two q uestionnaires. The addictive signs they
displayed included w ithdraw al sym ptom s su ch a s depression a n d crav-
NG
ing, loss of control an d neglect of other activities. The re su lts will prove
H
alarm ing for p a re n ts whose children spend h o u rs on th e com puter.
EverQuest, a fantasy gam e in w hich players populate a virtual m ystical
N
world of dragons a n d wizards- h a s proved to be particularly addictive,
a n d h a s been blam ed for m arriage break-ups, child-neglect an d even
TR
an obsessive players suicide. An EverQ uest widows su p p o rt group h a s
been set up for people who never see th eir p artn e rs because they are
B
00
always playing th e game.

10
The study is th e work of Professor Mark Griffiths, director of the In-

te rn a tio n a l Gaming R esearch Unit a t Nottingham T rent University, in
+3
the UK. Addicted gam ers were com pared to the rem aining norm al
P2
players a n d it w as found th a t they played for m uch longer periods and

C
were significantly more likely to report w ithdraw al sym ptom s. Last

night Prof Griffiths said it was a largely ad u lt phenom enon because
A
m ost online gam ing sites require a credit card subscription. {Fees are
H
typically ab o u t 8 a m onth.) The average age of a n online gam er is 29

to 30: However, he did find th a t some teenagers were playing, aftei
-
p a ren ts sub scribed to th e sites. About 20 p er cent of players are

-L
women, draw n by the social a n d co-operative elem ent of th e games.

N
A lthough I th in k genuine addiction is fairly low, the thing aboul

online gam ing is th a t th e game never stop s, said Prof Griffiths, With
TO
stan d -alo ne game, you can sw itch it. off and come back the next day
b u t w ith an online game its veiy difficult to log off w hen you know hal
NG
the world h a s ju s t logged on. Many gam ers play excessively a n d displa}

few negative effects. There is nothing wrong in itself with doing som e-
thing excessively, a n d unlike gambling, gam ing h a s little or no fm ancia
ID
consequence. However, th e 2 4 -h o u r a day never-ending online game!

B
may provide a potentially addictive m edium for those w ith a predisposi

tion for excessive gam e playing.
31:
In. o th er p a rts of the world, such gam es have come in for m uch
greater criticism . In C hina a g l died after playing World o f Warcraft for
three days w ith barely a break, and a w om an in th e USA blam ed a
N
game for the: d ea th of h er 2 1 -year-old son, who h ad a history of m ental
health problems',..ajid shot him self w h ile still; sitting a t his com puter. In
NH
these co untries a whole h ost of special trea tm en ts an d clinics are
available w h ic h claim to hold a cure for th e com pulsive gam er. In
UY
S outh Korea, th e auth orities have become so concerned by th e n u m -
.Q
bers of .young people spending too m u ch tim e on com p uters th a t the
g o v ern m en t.launched a nationw ide addiction hotline to help com bat
TP
the problem.
O

GAMING FORUM
NG
Kevin, L iv e rp o o l
I used to play gam es every day, b u t last m onth I deleted every game
H
on my com puter an d cancelled my subscription to Warcraft. The
problem is th a t you get totally im m ersed in the gam es an d becom e
N
oblivious to the.real world. W hat have you achieved after 11 h o u rs in
TR
a virtual world? You m ight have developed your virtual ch aracter,
fought a battle, killed a few dragons, b u t su ch achievem ents are illu-
B
sory - w hen you re tu rn to the real world you're a t exactly the sam e
00
point a s w hen you started.

10
Martin, Cardiff
+3
I started playing EverQuest five years ago, an d for th e next two years
P2
the game dom inated my life. B ut they were w onderful years an d I

C
have no regrets. I had th e m ost am azing experiences an d m ade loads

of friends through the game. OK, so its escapism , b u t how is it any
A
different from w atching TV? I know people who spend seven or eight
H
h o u rs a day w atching TV b u t no one ever suggests they have a seri-

ous addiction.
-
-L
1. A study h a s show n th a t '

N
A. some of the players of online gam es gamble an d take drugs.

TO
B. 11% of players are addicted to online games,

c. people who play online gam es are depressed.
NG
D. 7,000 players showed signs of addiction.

2 . According to th e study ^____

A. it is m ostly children who experience addiction problem s.
ID
B. gam ing sites are too expensive for m ost people,

c. the m ajority of gam ers were adu lts.
B
D. very few gam ers are over 30.
314

3. The m ain problem with online gam es is-_____

A.- not enough women play them .
B. too m any people log on t' the sam e time.
N
c . its impossible .to switch off the corriputer while the game is in
NH
progress.
. D. people find it difficult to stop playing because the game never
UY
ends.
.Q
4. Online gam es are particularly dangerous fo r _____ .
TP
A. people who may be predisposed to spending too m uch time
playing. .
O
B. evervone who plays too m uch.

c . people who d o n t have m uch money.
D people who d o n t- u n d ersta n d the financial consequences of play-
NG
ing. '
H
5. In some co untries __ :
A. compulsive gam ers have to attend special clinics.
N
B. compulsive gam ers can b cured of their addiction,
TR
c. help is given to compulsive gamers.
D. people are m uch less critical of online games.
B
00
6 . W hich sentence best su m s .up the conclusion of the study?

10
A. Online gam es are essentially harm less.

B. Everyone who plays too m uch will eventually become addicted,
+3
c. Online gam es should be banned.

P2
D. Online gam es are dangerous for a minority of people who play

C
excessively.
7. Kevin, from Liverpool _____
A
A. stopped playing online gam es because he h ad a problem with

H
h is com puter:
-
B. th in k s th a t players c a n t tell the difference between virtual

worlds, an d real world.
-L
c . th in k s th a t you gain nothing from online games.

N
D. th in k s th a t fighting battles and killing dragons are great

achievem ents.
TO
8 . M artin from Cardiff._____

NG
A. th in k s th a t playing online gam es is no worse th a n w atching TV.

B. th in k s th t people who watch a lot of TV also have a serious

addiction.
ID
c . h as.been playing online gam es for five years.

D. w ishes he could play EverQuest again.
B
315

GLOSSARY
- phenomenon hin tng ' credit; card subscription s ng k
- to log on ng nhp . bg. th tn dng
- role-play game game to be d rawn by b hp dn bi
N
- to i nteract with tag iac :vi V stand-alone game game c lp/
- sub ject ch th game chi mt minh
NH
- questionnaire bn cu hi/ thm vn to switch sth off tt ci g i
lc to og off ng xut, thot ra khi
UY
- addictive (adj) gy nghin, chng t mng
ang nghin ; excessively (adv) mt cch thi qu
.Q
- withdrawal symptom triu chng ln medium phng tin
TP
cn nghin khi phi cai nghin predisposition xu hng thin v
- depression s trm cm to come in for criticism b ch trch
O
- craving s thm kht break qung ngh gii lao

- neglect s b b, chnh mng to shoot oneself t st bng sng
- to populate cung cp dn cho/ em a host of sth mt s rt ng ci g
NG
ngi n 1 vng clinic bnh vin
- mystical (adj) y b him compulsive (aj) qu ham m, m
H
- wizard ph thy, thut s m
- marriage break-up s tan v hn hotline ng y nng
nhn
N
to combat chin u chng li
- child-neglect s b b con ci to be immersed in sth m mnh vo,
- obsessive (adj) nh b m nh
- suicide s t st
TR
m mi vi
oblivious to (adj) qun ht, khng cn
B
- partner ngi v/ chng nh gi n
00
~ gamer game th illusory (adj) mang tnh o tng

- gaming site trang mng chi game escapism s thot li thc t, s chy
10
trn thc ti
+3
P2
129
C
Twenty-five years after they were invented a s a form of com puter-

geek sh o rth an d , em oticons are now everywhere. The smiling, winking
A
and frowning faces th a t in habit the com puter keyboard have evolved
H
into a quasi-accep ted form of p u n ctu atio n. T hese sweet hieroglyphs

have conquered both the young an d th e old, as o u r daily com m u n ica-
-
tion relies m ore an d more on text ra th e r th a n the spoken word. There

-L
was a tim e w hen em oticons seemed naively youthful. Yet now adays,
N
applied appropriately, em oticons can no longer be dism issed a s ju v e-

nile. They come in hand y in m any a d u lt social in teraction s, a n d help
TO
avoid serious m iscom m unications.

NG
Psychologists say it is only n a tu ral. People instinctively look for sig-

nals of intim acy in th e h u m an face. This re su lts from co u n tless g enera-

tions of evolution, d uring which people relied on th ese signs a s life-or-

d ea th signals to survive. W hen infants are given a series of geom etrical
ID
p attern s, th eir eyes will n atura lly be draw n to those th a t seem to rep re-
B
sen t a face.
316

Faced w ith th e absen ce of facial expressions in e-com m unications

we sho uld m ake u p for it by com posing e-m ails th a t m ake it clear
thro u gh o u r language th a t we are being cheerful, b u t th a t, of course,
N
h ap p e n s only in the ideal world. And so weve tu rn ed to em oticons. At
NH
first glance it seem ed th a t only the younger generation took to th e little
faces. B u t in fact, in a recent em oticon survey of 40,000 u se rs of Yahoo
UY
M essenger, 52 p ercen t of th e resp on dents were older th a n 30. Among
th o se; 55 per c e n t said they u se em oticons every day. 82 p ercent con-
.Q
sidered wom en more likely to use em oticons. B ut for m en, who have a
TP
h a rd time usin g term s of tend ern ess, em oticons can be very helpful in
O
conveying affection.

Em oticons have now entered even th e m ost serious a rea s of life. One
m ilitary veteran says th a t he u se s plenty of em oticons in h is com m uni-
NG
cations even w ith adm irals a t the Pentagon, where they provide a cer-
tain cover for high-ran kin g leaders to com m ent on sensitive m atters. A
H
win'k says quite a lot, he says. It could be a th o u sa n d different things
N
- b u t I know w hat it m eans. Its a kind of code. Also on Wall Street,
b u sin essm en will u se th e term QQ (from a n em oticon sym bolising cry-
TR
ing eyes) in conversation as" a sarcastic way of saying boo hoo.
Supposedly, it all sta rte d in 1982. Scott Fahlm an, a professor of
B
00
com pu ter science, w as linked to a n electronic university bulletin board

w here com p uter e n th u sia sts posted th eir opinions. In one note a joke
10
a b ou t elevators w as m isinterpreted by som e a s a safety w arning. So

+3
Fahlm an suggested u sin g :-) as a way to indicate jokes a n d :-( for seri-
P2
o u s rem arks. F ah lm an s joke m ark ers spread quickly an d w ithin a

m onth or so techies a t Xerox were circulating a list of strikingly sop h is-
C
ticated new em oticons. He never received a trad e m ark for his invention,
an d never m ade a dim e from it. Before long, em oticons h ad accom -
A
plished w hat E speranto never could, a universal lingua franca.

H
1. In the p ast, em oticons w e re _____

-
A. perceived a s ra th e r childish.
-L
B. used- in stead of pu nctu atio n.

c . ca u sin g som e m isu n derstan d in gs.
N
D. only smiling, winking an d frowning.

TO
2. The use of p ictu res representing th e h u m an fa c e _____

A. helped people to survive in the past.
NG
B. m akes o u r e-m ails m ore cheerful.

c . is spread ing am ong th e older generation.

D. is h a rd for m en who are n o t affectionate.
ID
3. W hich of th ese sen ten ces is true?

B
A. The Pentagon leaders refuse to com m ent on th eir u se of em oti-

cons.
317

B. In .military com m unication, mtcris can have special'm ean-

ings. . C yC ' _ . .
c. Wall S treet 'bu sin essm en especially like the crying emoticon.
D. QQ is a speeiai^w î S tre e t code emoticon.
N
4. Professor F ahlm an - '
NH
A. cam e u p w ith th e smiling emoticon because he liked jokes.
B. used h is connections to spread the idea of em o tico n s.'
UY
c. first cam e u p with' the idea of usin g the sm iling emoticon.
.Q
D. w as a huge fan of the idea' of' lingua franca an d E speranto.
TP
GLOSSARY
O
- computer-geek ngi m my. tnh - admiral c hi qun

- shorthand li vit tc k - the Pentagon Lu Nm Gc/ Ng Gic
- emoticon biVtng cm xc : \ . i (tr s b quc phng M)
NG
- to wink nhy mt ra h - cover ci v bc 'ngy trng
- to frown cau m y . - high-ranking (adj) co cp
H
- to evolve into tin ha thnh ra - to comment on nhn xt/ bnh,.phm
- a quasi-accepted (adj) tm chp nhn v
N
- form of punctuation dng chm cu - sensitive matters nhng vn nhy
- hieroglyph ch tng hnh "
- to conquer chnh phc
cm
TR
- wink ci nheo mt ra hiu .
B
- naively (adv) mt cch ngy; ng . -co d e mt m
00
- juvenile (adj) thuc v la tui thanh - to symboiise biu trng cho

10
thiu nin - sarcastic (adj) v ma mi. .

- to come in handy t ra rt tin li boo hoo ting khc hu' hu
+3
- social interactions giao tip x hi - bulletin board bn tin

P2
- miscommunications s hiu lm - enthusiast ngi say m

trong giao tip - t o post ng ti,'a !n mng .
C
- psychologist nh tm i hc - elevator thang my

- instinctively (adv) v mt bn nng . - to misinterpret l gii/ ct ngha sai
A
H
- intimacy s thn mt, s gn. gi , - joke marker biu tng nh du cu

- geom etrical p attern dng thc hnh " ni a
-
hc - techie ngi thnh tho my mc in

-L
- facial expression v. mt . t . .
- excommunications s gia tip in - to circulate lu hnh
N
t . - strikingly (adv) mt cch ng ngc

- to make up for.sth .b p. cho nhin
TO
- to take to sthm r thch ci g - sophisticated (adj) thng minh, kho

- respondent ngi.tr i cho':CUC t .
NG
.thm d . . . . . -tradem arkthng hiu'.

- term of tenderness t-biu l s tru

- dime-ng 10 xu c. M
mn - Esperanto quc t ng
ID
- affection "s/ lng yu thng . - universal lingua franca mt ngn ng

- mil ita ry veteran, cu .chin binh ' trung gian ph qut
B
318

130 HOW TO BE A GOOD PARENT: A TEENAGERS GUIDE

Sixteen-year-old Eilie, who lives with her parents, Louise, 38, and Peter, 43,
N
has written a book to tell us what parents of teenagers are doing wrong.
NH
All a d u lts th in k teena gers are a nightm are. According to them , were
moody, argum entative, ru d e a n d disruptive. B ut have any a d u lts ever
UY
stopped to. th in k th a t p erh ap s they are responsible for the u n p re d ict-
able an d confusing way we behave?
.Q
Take me, for instance. I m ay be a teenage nightm are, b u t th is is all
TP
to do w ith my p aren ts, n o t me. With my m other, I stam p my feet, storm
O
out. of sh o p s in th e middle of arg u m e n ts a n d m oan u n til I get my own

way. J u s t last week, for example, I p ersu ad ed m um to buy me a pair of
shoes th a t she had said I co uldnt have. B ut my father, on th e oth er
NG
h an d , tu rn s m e into a shining example of teenage perfection. I do a s he
ask s, I do nt answ er back and I happily accept th a t no m ean s no.
H
My p a re n ts have very different p arenting styles. While my d ad brings
N
o u t th e b est in me, by being calm an d reasonable a n d tre a tin g me like
an ad ult, my m um , like so m any o th er p a ren ts of teenagers, inadver-
TR
tently m akes m e w an t to rebel by being com bative an d speaking to me
a s th ou g h Im still a child. Last sum m er, after yet a n o th e r row in a
B
00
shop w ith my m other, I decided to sta rt w riting down th e way I felt

10
a b o u t things.
A few m ore rows later a n d Id w ritten m ore th a n 10,000 w ords of a d -
+3
vice for p aren ts.

P2
In December, having contacted various publish ers, I signed a book

C
deal. My p aren tin g book, How Teenagers Think , is going to be p u b -

lished next year, the first of its type actually w ritten by a teenager.
A
Much of my book is b ased on my own experiences, b u t IVe also in ter-

H
viewed my friends ab o u t th e ir parents. Surprisingly, we all sh are sim i-

lar views on w h a t o u r p a re n ts are doing wrong. And it u su ally com es
-
down to the fact th a t o u r p a re n ts care too m uch ab o u t u s an d d o n t

-L
w a n t to let u s grow up. For example, m um drove m e crazy, a few weeks

N
ago w hen she kept w orrying Id broken my neck after ! fell off my bike.
Yes, my n eck h u rt, b u t Id been to th e doctor a n d h e d told m e I w as
TO
fine, so why did she w an t to tak e me to hospital?

NG
Instead of fu ssin g aro u n d th eir teenagers-like w ere sm all children,

p aren ts could be u sin g our desire to feel grow n-up t th e advantage.

If were behaving badly, why n o t tell u s straig ht ou t th a t we d o n t d e-

serve to be treated like a n ad ult? Then w ell try to e a rn y our respect.
ID
And why not rew ard u s when we do behave m aturely? Recently, I

B
w anted to tak e a tra in to P ortsm outh to see a friend - a jou rn ey Id

done w ith m um before. Dad w as fine with th e idea of me going alone,
319

b u t it took weeks of argu m ents before m um agreed. Why w as it su ch a

big deal?
P arents need to learn to tru s t teenagers. And w hen p aren ts are w or-
N
ried abou t u s, th ere is no point becoming angry - th a t ju s t m akes
things worse. A few m onth s ago, m um lost h er tem per w hen I told my
NH
parents Id been receiving e-m ails from a stran g er I'd m et in a c h a-
troom. She in stan tly b an ne d me from usin g the In ternet an d we ended
UY
up having a huge row. B ut Im not stupid. Most teenagers know talking
.Q
to stran g ers online is not a good idea, so Id told them w h at w as h a p -
pening - I d p n t w an t to get abducted, ju s t a s m u ch a s they d o n t w ant
TP
me to. So why be angry with me, m um ? It m akes me not w ant to con-
O
fide in you. Surely its better for me to feel you w ont be angry, so I can

talk to you?
Many of my friends feel the sam e way. They end up n ot telling their
NG
p arents w h at theyre up to because they ll be cross. Everyone I in ter-
H
viewed for my book loved the idea of being really close to their p aren ts.
Despite the way we behave, we all w ant close relation ships w ith ou r
parents. We also ail know deep down th a t o u r p aren ts u sually do know
N
best. B ut p art of being a teenager is feeling free to take steps down new
TR
p a th s an d learning from o u r own m istakes. O ur p aren ts have to u n -
wrap the cotton wool they place aro u n d u s a n d let u s get on w ith w hat
B
is ju s t a n atu ra l p hase of life.
00
10
1. W hat happened w hen Ellie w anted a new p air of shoes?

+3
A. She asked h er father nicely and he said yes.

B. Her m um said no, th en changed h e r mind,
P2
c . Ellie ju s t w ent out an d bought them .

C
D. Her m um said she couldnt buy them so she d id n t.

A
2. Why does Elie always obey h er father?

H
A. B ecause he sets a good exam ple of how to behave.

B. B ecause he alw ays gives h er w h at she w ants,
-
c . B ecause he is very strict.

-L
D. B ecause he d oesn t get cross and talks in a reasonable way.

N
3. Ellies ideas ab o u t p a re n tin g _____

A. are shared by m any people of her own age.
TO
B. are u n u su a l for a teenager.

NG
c . come from a book- called How Teenagers Think.

D. have surprised m any of h er friends.

4. Teenagers would respect p aren ts more i f _____

ID
A. p a ren ts d id n t argue w ith them.

B. p aren ts told them more often th a t they didn't deserve to be
B
treated like ad ults.
320

c. p a re n ts
rew arded them more often.
D. they d idn t trea t them like little children.
5. How does Ellie react to h er m um s lack of tru st?
N
A. It m akes h er feel stupid.
NH
B. It m akes h er tell h er m um exactly w hat is happening in h er life.
c. It m akes h er not w ant to talk abou t herself to h er m um .
UY
D. It m akes h er th in k h er m um is stupid.
6. W hich sentence best su m m arises the m ain idea?
.Q
A. F athers are m uch better a t dealing w ith teenagers th a n m others
TP
because they u n d ersta n d them better.
O
B. If p aren ts tru sted teenagers more an d were less controlling,

th e n they would get on m uch better with them .
c. Its b est not to tell your paren ts w hat you are doing because
NG
they will either get angry or worried.
H
D. A dults have a poor opinion of teenagers, b u t they often behave
badly them selves an d set a bad example for their children.
N
GLOSSARY
- nightmare cn c mng TR - to drive sb crazy khin ai mun pht
B
- moody (adj) tnh kh thay i tht in ln
00
thng - to fuss around lm rm beng ln v,

10
- argumentative (adj) hay anh ci [m ri tung n v

- disruptive (adj) hay ph ri - to use sth to one's advantage li
+3
- confusing (adj) gy ri tr, gy hoang dng ci g

P2
mang - straight out (adv) ngay lp tc

- to stamp one's feet dm chn - t o earn sb's respect ginh c lng
C
- to storm out of hng h chy ra khi, knh trng ca ai

b i ra vi v tc gin - maturely (adv) mt ceh chn chn/
A
- to moan rn r trng thnh

H
- a shining example mt tm gng - a big deal chuyn to tt, chuyn quan

sng trng
-
- perfection s hon ho - to lose one's temper ni cu

-L
- to answer back ci - chatroom phng Chat trn mng

- parenting style li lm cha m - to get abducted b bt cc
N
- inadvertently (adv) v tnh, khng c - to confide in sb tm s/ th l chuyn

TO
ring t vi ai
- to rebel ni lon - to end up doing sth rt cuc li lm g
NG
- combative (adj) sn sng gy hn - to be up to sth m mu/ ang toan

- row cuc ci v tnh iu g

- to sign a book deal k mt hp ng - cross (adj) gt gng, bc bi

xut bn sch - to unwrap the cotton wool ngng
ID
- it comes down to the fact that... ngay s bo bc con ci qu trn

B
chung qui !i l... - phase giai an, thi k
321

131 ORGANIC FOOD: WHY?

A recent NOP* poll found th a t 82 per cen t of UK consu m ers w ant a
retu rn to traditional farm ing, even if it m eans paying m ore for food. To-
N
day, m any sins are laid of the feet of conventional farm ing. BSE, foot-
and -m outh, pollution, obesity and th e disappearance of sparrow s have
NH
all been blam ed on m odern agriculture. And governm ents across
E urope are keen to show they care. They are increasingly keen to be
UY
seen a s prom oting not conventional fanning m ethods, b u t the new-age
version: organic. E urope is now th e biggest m ark e t for organic food in
.Q
the world, expanding by 25 per cent a y ear over th e p ast 10 years. The
TP
G erm an ag riculture m in ister w an ts to m ake 20 per cent of G erm an ag-
riculture organic by 2010, an d D enm arks agriculture m in ister is h e r-
O

self an organic farmer.
Organic farm ing is often claimed to be safer th a n conventional farm -
NG
ing - for the environm ent, for our children a n d for u s. Yet after lengthy
and ongoing research worldwide, science co ntin ues to reject th is claim.
H
The UKs cross-party House of Commons com m ittee on agriculture a n -
nounced th at, despite exhaustive investigation, it h ad failed to find any
N
scientific evidence to vprove th a t any of the m any claim s m ade for or-
ganic farm ing are always an d invariably tru e . TR
The notion th a t organic food is safer th a n norm al food is co n tra-
B
00
dicted by the fact th a t m any of our m ost com m on foods are full of
n a tu ra l toxins. Yet educated E uropean s are more scared of eating
10
traces of a few, strictly regulated, m an-m ade chem icals th a n they are of
+3
eating the ones th a t n atu re created directly. Why? For m ost of h u m a n

P2
history the m ore artificial an d elaborate your diet, the better; when
dom inating n a tu re w as a co n stan t battle, it w as a sign of cu ltu red liv-
C
ing. The an cient R om ans distinguished between foods n ot as proteins

A
versus carbohydrates, or even m eat versus vegetables, b u t a s cultivated

H
versus w ild.. F arm ed anim als were a more civilised food th a n game.
Wine an d bread, because they were created by m an, were sym bols of
-
cultured living - only b arb arian s ate wild plants. Today, E uropeans,
-L
su rround ed by plentiful food, fear not natu re , b u t science. O ur ob ses-

sion with the ethics an d safety of w hat we eat w ith antibiotics in an i-
N
m als, additives, 'GM foods, a n d so on - are sym ptom atic of a highly

TO
technological society th a t has lost faith in its ability' to p u t technology

to a positive end. In th is context, the less touched by h u m an h an d
NG
som ething is, the m ore virtue we see in it.

A do m inan t contem porary fear is th a t we are wrecking n atu re . This

is the real significance of the NOP poll. It is no t a vote of positive s u p -
ID
port for traditio nal or organic farm ing - ab o u t w hich m ost of US are
B
blissfully ignorant - b u t ra th e r a vote against h u m an intervention in

the countryside.
322

*NOP - National Opinion Polls; a leading market research organisation.
N
1. According to parag ra ph o n e _____
A. E urop ean governm ents su ppo rt organic farming.
NH
B. th e re aso n why B ritish co nsum ers tu rn organic is obesity.
c . m o d em agriculture is responsible for environm ental degrada-
UY
tion.
D. the B ritish believe traditional farm ing could be cheaper.
.Q
TP
2. W hat inform ation does parag rap h two provide?
A. Organic farm ing is safer for the environm ent th a n for people.
O
B. No proof h a s been found th at conventional fanning is worse

th a n organic.
NG
c . The com m ittee on agriculture raised objections to organic farm -
ing.
H
D. The research on organic food was n o t entirely reliable.
3. W hat does the a u th o r say ab o u t the a n cien t R om ans?
N
A. They d idn t appreciate the m eat of wild anim als.
TR
B. They preferred m eat to b read and vegetables.
c . T heir diet w as healthier th a n th a t of m odem E uropeans.
B
D. They introduced the distinction between proteins a n d carbohy-
00
d rates.
10
4. W hich of th e following is closest to the a u th o rs opinion?

+3
A. Organic food is favoured by those who su p p o rt m odem technol-

P2
ogy.
C
B. In an c ie n t tim es people couldnt afford organic food.

c . h e B ritish are m ore organic-oriented th a n o th er nations. '
A
D. Many people d o n t know m uch abo u t organic farming.

H
GLOSSARY
-
- organic food thc phm hu c/ thc - cultivated (adj) c nui trng

-L
phm sch - wild (adj) hoang, di, ngoi thin nhin

- sin ti li - farmed animal ng vt c chn
N
- BSE bnh b in nui

- foot-and-mouth bnh l mm long - game th rng, th hoang
TO
mng - barbarian ngi man r, ngi d man

- obesity chng bo ph - obsession mi m nh
NG
- sparrow chim s - ethics o c, lun l

- to promote qung b, pht huy - antibiotics thuc khng sinh

- agriculture minister b trng nng - additive cht ph gia

nghip - GM foods [genetically modified foods]
ID
- to reject bc b thc phm bin i gien

B
- claim li tuyn b - symptomatic of (adj) l triu chng

- cross-party House of Commons ca
committee y ban gm cc thnh - to lose faith in mt nim tin vo
323
vin n t nhiu ng ca h vin - In this context Trong b cnh ny

Anh - virtue phm cht cao qu, c hnh
- exhaustive (adj) thu o, ton din, - dominant (adj) ni bt, chim u th
khng b st iu g . - vote l phiu bu
N
- notion quan nim - blissfully ignorant about sth (adj)
- to contradict ni ngc li, c h n g k i n g b: n mt xu ca cai g
NH
minh ngc li ' intervention s can thip vo .
- toxin chat c ' - NOP [National Opinion Polls] c quan
UY
- trace du vt : / Thm D lun Quc gi
- strictly regulated (adj) c iu tit - market research s nghin cu th
.Q
cht ch trng
- elaborate (adj) phc tp, t mi, tinh vi - degradation s thoi ha
TP
- to dominate khng ch, ch ng - to be favoured by c ng h bi
- cu Itured Jiving l sng c vn ha - organc-orented (adjj c khunh
O

- versus (prep) chng li hng thch nhng th hu c
- carbohydrates thc n c cha hy-
drat-cacbon
NG
H
132 THE MAN WHO IS PAID TO BE AN ALIEN
Roo Reynolds h a s a job a t IBM which m any people would envy: to
N
spend as m uch tim e as possible playing online gam es like Second Life
TR
and E ntropia Universe, in which players, move an d act w ithin a three-
dim ensional digital world. Im bringing the id e a 'o f v irtual worlds to
B
IBM, said Mr Reynolds, helping IBM to u n d erstan d virtual w orlds an d
00
how we m ight use them .

10
Com panies like IBM are being forced to tak e note of th ese 3D digital
+3
worlds which are populated by av atars, on-screen rep resentatio n s of

P2
real people. This is simply because they are becoming so popular. Sec-
C
ond Life, which w as created by the Internet com pany Linden Lab, a n -
nounced at the s ta rt of 2007 th a t it h ad two million u sers. The m ost
A
im pressive thing ab o u t this statistic is th e fact th a t,'o n ly eight w eeks

H
earlier, the com pany h a d an n ounced a figure of one million u sers. The
speed of growth is astonishing.
-
And Second Life is not alone. E ntropia Universe, created by a com -

-L
pany called M indark, is a virtual world based on the im aginary planet

N
of Calypso. It recently passed the half-million m ilestone for its popu la-
tion. Many of th ese new m em bers of the population are young. In ad d i-
TO
tion, Second Life h a s a 50:50 split of m en and women. For th ese two
reasons, advertisers an d m arketing d ep artm en ts have a very real in ter-
NG
est in the virtual populations of Second Life and E ntropia Universe. In

Second Life, sp o rts m anu facturers Adidas an d Reebok sell virtual tra in -
ing shoes, Toyota an d Nissan sell virtual cars while Starwood Hotels,
ID
owner of the W estin and S heraton chains, test o u t new hotels w ithout
B
having to build them . O ther com panies are also taking note. The BBC
holds m usic events on a virtual island. The R euters new s agency now
324

h a s a p erm an en t reporter who lives in th e virtual world of Second Life.

Second Life allows people to do w hat they do in the real world withoul
leaving th eir chair. People m eet, chat, 'dance an d socialise. Residents
N
can also m ake an d sell goods in exchange for the worlds currency, the
NH
Linden Dollar. This h a s a n exchange rate w ith the u s dollar, so m onej
th a t you m ake in Second Life can be transferred to the real world.
UY
B u t whv are virtual worlds suddenly becoming so popular? I th in t
it w as the right tim e for Second Life, said Dr Jim Purbick, a senioi
.Q
software engineer, a n d the only full-time employee of Linden Lab. D]
TP
Purbick believes th a t the increase in th e n u m b er of bro adban d useri
O
and the ever faster speeds of personal com puters are two of the m air

reasons b ehind the growth in popularity.
Roo Reynolds believes th a t th e virtual worlds are here to stay, anc
NG
will become a bigger a n d bigger p art of life. Nobody believes th a t ex-
H
periencing som ething online is really the sam e as experiencing it in rea
life, he says. However, not everyone can afford to go to m ajor sporting
N
events like the Olympics or the World Cup. Experiencing these event:
in a virtual world is the next best thing. So Mr Reynolds job, whic?
TR
involves convincing people of the benefits of Second Life an d similai
online environm ents, m ay not last long. My job will become un n eces
B
00
sary because everyone will be using it, he says.

10
1. Why does Roo Reynolds spend a lot of tim e in online 3D universes?

+3
A. B ecause h is job is to. provide his em ployer with inform ation

P2
about them .
C
B. B ecause h e s a software engineer who creates virtual worlds,

c . B ecause h e s working on a joint project with IBM and Second
A
Life.
H
D. B ecause h e's addicted to online games.

-
2. W hat is an avatar?
-L
A. Its a ch aracter in Second Life.

B, Its a real p erso n s equivalent in a digital world,
N
c . Its a 3D digital world.

D. Its an Internet company.
TO
3. The p lanet Calypso i s _____

NG
A. p a rt of a n online game called Mindark.

B. a real p lanet scientists have recently discovered,

c . a place invented by the com pany M indark.

ID
D. a place you can only visit in Second Life.

B
4. A dvertisers are particularly interested in Second Life b e c a u s e _____

A. m ost of tine u se rs are young men.
32

B. th ere a re .equal n u m b ers of yig m n an d women,

c. th e u se rs spend a lot .of money.'ionline:.:
N
*5.
NH
B re p o rts - on m usic evrts:m' Second Lifev;
; c . tests o u t new hotels,ln.SeGond"Life. ;
UY
D. .only -exists :in th e virtual world of Second Life-.
.Q
6 . In Second. Life'you can _ ____
TP
1 try. o u t new hotels.
O
B. become a reporter for R euters,

c. order real goods from real com panies.
D. buy virtual goods from com panies su c h a s Reebok an d N issan.
NG
7. The money th a t people m ake in Second Life _____
H
A. can be converted into real dollars.
B. can only be u sed for socialising.
N
c. can only be. exchanged for virtual goods an d services.
D. can be tran sferred to E ntropia Universe.
TR
8 . According to Dr Purbick, why h a s th ere been a su dd en grow th in
B
the popularity of online digital worlds?
00
A. B ecause of an increase in the popularity.of science fiction.

10
B. B ecause of a n im provem ent in the stan d ard of software.

+3
c. B ecause of a reduction in the n u m b er of people in full-time

P2
work.
D. B ecause of faster Intern et connections an d com puters.
C
9. Roo Reynolds believes th a t he will eventually lose his jo b because

A
H
A. other people will share their experiences online.

B. people will realise th a t virtual worlds can never be th e sam e as
-
real experiences.
-L
c . everybody will already know ab out these virtual worlds.

N
D. th ere axe no long-term benefits to virtual worlds.

TO
GLOSSARY
- alien ng ngoi hnh tinh - permanent reporter phng vin
NG
- to envy cm thy ganh t thng tr

- a three-dimensional digital world - to socialise giao lu kt bn

th gii k thut s trong khng gin 3 - in exchange for i ly
ID
chiu - currency n v tin t

- to take note of lu n - exchange rate hi sut, t sut hi
B
- to be populated by gm cc dn c oi
l, ng c nhng Cdn l - to be transferred to c lu chuyn
326

avatar hnh nh i din n

on-screen representation hnh biu - senior (adj) cp cao
hin trn mn hnh - full-time employee nhn vin ton c
N
statistic con s thng k hu
imaginary (adj) tng tng, khng c - broadband [c kt ni] bng thng
NH
tht rng
milestone ct mc, ct cy s - to be here to stay tr thnh mt thc
a 50:50 split s phn chia ng u t ng nhin/ tn ti vnh vin
UY
marketing department b phn tip - the next best thing iu k cn vi
.Q
th iu tt p nht
training shoes giy tp th dc - to market tip th
TP
Chain chui ca hng - to be converted into c chuyn i
Reuters news agency thng tn x thnh
O

Reuter
NG
133 iP O D S b y IV E
H
Jo n a th a n Ive w as on stage, lovingly, taking ap a rt an iBook laptop in
front of a n audience of fascin ated .designers. For over an hour, he de-
N
scribed its creation, the necessity of every curve, binge an d surface.
Then he pointed to a tiny toolset built into the back of the case, a won-
TR
derful idea for any service engineer. His attentio n to detail is amazing,
B
b u t h is talen t goes deeper th a n that.
00
The 39-year-old vice-president of industrial design is widely re-

10
garded a s todays m ost im portant B ritish designer. From h is studio a t

+3
Apple C om puters in California, Ives team have defined th e look of a

generation, first with the iBook and iMac, and lately the iPod, whose
P2
owners include the Queen, Tony Blair a n d George Bush.

C
Beyond Ives talent, he is fam ous for his privacy. He rarely gives in-
terviews. His IVTio's Who entry states only th a t he w as b o ra in 1967,
A
H
and fails to m ention h e is th e father of twins. W hat is known is th a t he

is thoughtful, brutally honest, passionate an d critical of himself. With
-
his family, he leads a simple life in a two-bedroom ho use in Twin

-L
Peaks. His only luxury is h is Aston M artin, bought, naturally, because

of its looks.
N
Ive studied in d u strial design a n d im mediately displayed a great ta l-

TO
ent. He would find u n u su a l influences for his designs a n d instinctively

tu rn them into am azingly m odem -looking products. For his final-year
NG
project, Ive developed an alternative m onetary system , a pebble-like ob-

je c t which could be charged u p and used instead of cash or credit

cards.
ID
In 1990, he worked on projects from toilets to video cassette record-

ers for a London design company. Asked to design a new bathroom , he
B
bought m arine biology books and searched them for influences from
nature. Ive joined Apple in 1992 and his first m ajor success, th e col-
327

ourful all-in-one iMac com puter, w as inspired by th e glistening tra n s -

parency of guradrops, a n d w as a reaction ag ainst th e d u lln ess of the
beige desktop com puters worldwide. Yet his g reatest su ccess is the
N
iPod, th e MP3 player w hich h a s sold m illions of u n its a n d become a
classic. In 2003 he won the Design M useum 's designer of the year
NH
com petition. And he know s b etter th a n anyone w h at were going to be
holding in o u r h an d s five years from now.
UY
.Q
1. Jo n a th a n Iv e ______ _
A. used to act in a theatre.
TP
B. used to be a service engineer,
O
c. is am azed by sm all details.

D. gives talks for other designers.
NG
2. At p resent J o n a th a n Iv e ______
A. designs products w hich are a sign of ou r tim es.
H
B. lives an d w orks in Great Britain.
c. works only for very im portant people.
N
D. creates luxu rio us designs for Aston M artin.
.3. J o n a th a n Iv e _____ TR
A. expects a lot from himself.
B
00
B. lives a life of luxury in Twin Peaks,

c. loves giving interviews.
10
D\ is described in detail in Whos Who.

+3
4. During his studies Iv e _______

P2
A. showed a great talent for m aking money.

C
B. found very uncom m on inspirations,

c. developed only during his last year.
A
D. got a credit card an d spent a lot of money.

H
5. W hen Ive started work, h e ______

-
A. w as a designer of n a tu ra l bathroom s.
-L
B. w as im mediately searched out by Apple,

c . h ated boring designs of practical things.
N
D. m ade a lot of m oney selling classic iPods.

TO
GLOSSARY
NG
- iovingly (adv) vi v tru mn - Aston Martin [tn kiu xe hi hng

- to take sth part tho ri ra tng sang ca Anh]

mnh - ffinal-year project n lm vo nm

- curve ng cong cui i hc
ID
- hinge bn le.- alternative (adj) khc... thay th

B
- toolset b dng c - monetary system h thng tin t

- Tony Blair [tn cu th tng Anh] - pebble-like (adj) ging nh vin si
328

- George Bush [tn cu tng thng M] - marine biology ngnh sinh hc bin
T- privacy s ring t - al-n-one (adj) tt c trong mt
- W ho's Who [tn t in danh nhn] - to be inspired by c gi cm hng
N
- entry mc t (trong t in) bi
- thoughtful (adj) hay suy ngh, hay -glistening (adj) lng [nh
NH
trm t - transparency s trong sut
- brutally honest (adj) cc k thnh thc - gumdrop oi ko nhai nhiu mu v
UY
- passionate (adj) giu cm xc tri cy
- critical of (adj) c thi ph phn, - dullness s t nht
.Q
hay ch trch - a classic mt tc phm mu mc/ kinh
TP
- luxury mn xa Xi/ sang trng in
O

134
Ju lie Lewis from Oregon, in the United S tates, is w earing an expen-
NG
sive-looking pair of boots. They are durable yet fashionable. To look at
th em you would never know th a t they were m ade entirely of recycled
H
m aterials. Ju lie owns h e r own shoem aking com pany a n d h a s achieved
a long-term am bition to tu rn w aste into som ething useful. The shoes
N
are m ade from all sorts of otherw ise useless m aterials, including textile
TR
scrap s, ru b b e r from tyres, an d plastic bags. Ju lie know s th a t she c a n -
not solve the world's environm ental problem s single-handed, b u t no ne-
B
th eless she feels she is doing good a t a local level.
00
. Recycling h a s become extremely p op ular in th e us, particularly ir

10
recent years w hen th e n u m b er of recycling schem es h a s increased bj

+3
500 percent. 65 percent of alum inium carts are recycled p lu s a quart

P2
of pap er a n d 20 p ercent of glass. The en th u siasm for re-usin g materials

C
h a s come from th e realisation th a t Am ericans produce far more wasti

per person th a n m ost Europeans; a total of 200 million to n s a year
A
T his is twice a s m u ch per capita a s Germ any, for exam ple, an d i

H
would be enough to fill a line of d u stb in lorries stretchin g eight time!

aro un d the world.
-
America even exports its waste. Taiwan b u ys u se d p ap er to mak<

-L
m ore p ap er an d J a p a n u se s American scrap m etal a n d m akes it int<

new cars, w hich it th en sells back to th e us. Two th ird s of the rem ain
N
ing w aste is buried in landfill sites. D isposal of w aste Doses a majo

TO
problem . Landfill sites c a n cau se pollution of w ater supplies. And a

sites fill u p , new ones need to be found. Some ru b b ish is b u rn t b u t thi
NG
pollutes the atm osphere. The obvious answ er, then , is to recycle more

Recycling is already big b u sin e ss - Ju lie Lewis being a perfect example

Her com pany h a s already attra cted millions of dollars w orth of invest
ID
m ent. Recycled p ro d u c ts are no longer seen as poor quality gds bu

as desirable alternatives.
B
A hugely successful schem e h a s been operating in Palm B ead

C ounty since 1988. R ubbish is sorted into different categories. Pape]
32
glass a n d plastic are sold to recycling firms. Kitchen w aste is u sed to

power a g enerato r w hich supplies electricity to 30,000 h o uses, o th e r
m aterials are u s e d to m ake-soil, which, is .then u sed for growing fruit
N
and vegetables. _ 4/ f '
There are of course economic a rgu m en ts ag ain st recycling. It can be
NH
expensive to ru n the schem es. A n d 'as Lynn S carlett, a governm ent a d -
viser from Los Angeles' argues, it does n o t m ake economic, or- environ-
UY
m ental sense to tra n sp o rt m aterials for recycling from a re a s w hich still
.Q
have plenty of landfill space:
TP
M an ufacturers in G erm any are trying to solve th e problem a t the
production stage, m ainly by looking a t how th eir goods are packaged.
O

Soap pow ders are now m ore concentrated a n d packed in sm all con-
tainers, to o th paste tu b e s are sold w ithout boxes and plastic w rapping
NG
h a s been reduced.
In a tim e w hen new spapers a n d TV new s b u lletin s a re filled w ith de-
H
pressing stories of environm ental d isasters, it is im p o rtan t to rem ind
people, especially children, th a t they can m ake a difference. After all,
N
they ca n recycle th eir w aste every day of th eir lives.
TR
1. Ju lie Lewis h a s always w anted .
B
A. to ru n h er own busin ess,
00
B. to be involved in recycling,
10
c . to look fashionable.
+3
D. to w ear expensive shoes.

P2
2. A m ericans now recycle far m ore th a n they u se d to b e c a u s e _____

C
A. they are com peting w ith Germany.

B. they w an t to m ake a profit from recycling,
A
c . they need m ore alum inium .

H
D. they produce m ore ru b b ish th a n o ther countries.

-
3. W hat does this* in p arag rap h 2 refer to?

-L
A. th e type of ru b b ish produced

B. th e am o u n t of ru b b ish produced
N
c . A m ericans e n th u siasm
TO
D. th e re-u se of w aste m aterials

4. Of w hat is Ju lie Lewis a perfect exam ple?
NG
A. The fact th a t re-using w aste is a m oney-m aking activity.

B. The fact th a t m ore ru b b ish should be b u rn t,

c. The fact th a t wom en can a ttra c t investm ent
ID
D. The fact th a t recycled p ro du cts ca n be of high quality.

B
5. W hat does th e Palm Beach County schem e involve?

A. m aking energy o ut of w aste
330

B. selling fruit a n d vegetables for profit

c . producing plastic bottles
N
D. opening new recycling bu sin esses
NH
6 . One of the arg um ents against recycling is t h a t _____
A. it m akes no sense using landfill sites.
UY
B. it dam ages the en viro n m en t..
c . no one is interested in ru n n in g the schem es.
.Q
D. it can be uneconom ical to ship w aste produ cts cross-country'.
TP
7.' Germ an m a n u fa c tu re rs _____
O
A. are concentrating on improving soap powders.

B. sell too thpaste in boxes instead of tubes,
c . have c u t down on packaging.
NG
D. are trying to m ake goods cheaper.
H
8 . Why is recycling particularly im portant for children?
A. It encourages them to read new spapers.
N
B. It show s them th a t they can do som ething useful,
c . It is depressing. TR
D. It is specially planned for them .
B
00
GLOSSARY
10
- durable (adj) bn, lu hng - to fill up y p, ht ch

+3
- otherwise (adv) xt v mt khc thi.. - alternative mn thay th

P2
- textile scrap vi vn - county qun ( M)

- singie-handed (adj) n l, ch mt - to sort phn [ai, la ra
C
mnh - category loi, hng

- recycling scheme n ti ch - generator my pht in
A
- aluminium nhm - to make sense c ngha

H
- plus (prep) cng thm - to package ng gi

- enthusiasm lng nhit tnh - soap powder bt git
-
- per capita mi u ngi - concentrated (adj) c c c li, c

-L
- dustbin lorry xe ti ch rc nng cao

- to stretch ko di n - wrapping bao b
N
- scrap metal st vn, st ph liu - news bulletin bn tin

TO
- landfill site bi rc depressing (adj) ng bun

NG

ID
B
331
135 TO BECOME WEALTHY

As a kid, I always w anted to become.-'wealthy. I knew if I could
achieve this, I would be able to consider m yself successful. At th e time,
N
I had no worries a n d felt my h ap p in ess would be based on w hether I
NH
could fulfill ail my needs an d w ants. My simple philosophy of th a t time
w as if 1 w as rich, I would definitely be content w ith my life.
UY
My father always stressed, his belief th a t h ap p in ess .includes, m uch
m re th a n money. I can rem em ber him lecturing m e ab o u t how m oney
.Q
does n ot m ake an individual happy; other th ings in life su ch as: health ,
TP
family, friends, an d memorable- experiences m ake a person genuinely
happy. At this tim e in my life, I took w hat my d ad said for granted a n d
O
did not give any th o u g h t to his words. All I could see w as the great life

my co usins had b ecause they h ad everything a kid ever dream ed of.
NG
At a young age, I noticed society w as extrem ely m aterialistic. The
m edia seemed to portray the -wealthy as happy people who ad d value to
H
o u r society. My opinions did not change; in high school I still sought a
career th a t would eventually yield a high salary. I still felt th a t th e po s-
N
sibility of living life from paycheck to paycheck would autom atically
TR
tran slate into my u n h ap p in ess. However, things changed w hen I de-
cided to tak e a n in ternship in the accounting d ep a rtm en t for th e su m -
B
m er after my second year of college.
00
S tarting th e first day on the job in the accounting departm ent, I

10
found myself extremely bored. I w as forced to do m onotonous work,

+3
such as au d it eight th o u sa n d travel an d expense rep o rts for a potential

P2
duplicate. In addition, I h a d to relocate away from friends an d family in

order tD accept the position. I w as earning the money I always w anted;
C
however, I noticed th a t having money to spend w hen you are by y ou r-

A
self w as n ot satisfying.
H
I began to th in k back to w hat my dad always said. After a .few

m onths in the job, I truly realized th a t m oney does not bring h a p -
-
piness. A m ore satisfying experience for me wou,ld have been doing an

-L
ordinary sum m er jo b for far less money. For me to u n d e rsta n d th a t

N
concept, it took a n experience as painful a s th is one.. I often contem -

plated how m u ch m oney it would take me to do th is a s my everyday
TO
job. I concluded, w hatever the salaiy for th is position I w ould never be

capable of fulfilling a happy life an d m aking a career ou t of th is job.
NG
As I looked forward to the su m m er to draw to a close, I truly com-

prehended the m eaning of my d a d s words. C ontrary to my prior be-

liefs, I firm ly. believe thro ugh experience th a t money can n o t m ake a
ID
person happy. The term w ealth is a broad term , an d I believe title key
to hap p in ess is to become w ealthy in great m em ories, friends, family,
B
and health. This I believe.
332

1. In h is childhood the n a rra to rs idea of hap p in ess w as t o ____ _

A. get w hat he w anted. ^
B. live an interesting life,
c . be an influential person.
N
D. m ake other people happy
NH
2. The n a rra to r h eard w hat his father used to say, b u t did n o t _____
A. believe him.
UY
B. agree with him.
.Q
c . u n d e rsta n d him.
TP
D. th in k over his words.
O
3. From his early childhood till he finished school the n a rra to r w as

convinced t h a t _____
A. society w as extremely unfair.
NG
B. m edia added value to society.
c . m oney w as the only thing th a t ensu red happiness.
H
D. the wealthy could not spend money properly.
N
4. After the second year in the college the n a rra to r decided to ______
A. s ta rt to work.
B. quit his studies,
TR
B
c . change th e college.
00
D. tak e a sum m er course.

10
5. The n a rra to rs internship proved t h a t ____ _

+3
A. it w as not a money-m aking job.

P2
B. h h ad chosen the wrong job.

c . he could n ot cope with professional tasks.
C
D. he had to get rid of h is family an d friends to keep the position.

A
6 . It becam e obvious to the n arrato r th a t h e _____

H
A. needed to th in k of an o th er career.
B. would like to work only in sum m er,
-
c . would like to have a higher position.

-L
D. preferred ordinary non-professional work.

7. The sum m er for the n arrato r w a s _____
N
A. m onotonous an d lonely.
TO
B. dragged out an d boring,

c . dynam ic and satisfying.
NG
D. difficult b u t inspirational.

GLOSSARY
ID
- to be content with (adj) hi lng vi - accounting department b phn k

- to stress nhn mnh tan
B
- to lecture sb about in lp ai/ ging - monotonous (adj) n iu, t nht,

gii cho ai v bun chn

- to take sth for granted xm.ci g - to audit Idem tan, kim tra s sch
bnh thng chng ng- quan tm - duplicate bn sao
- materialistic (adj) thin ve vt'cht, - to relocate i ch
ham m vt chat - to contemplate suy gm
N
- to portray m t to draw to a dose sp kt thc
. - to yield sn sinh ra, mang li - to comprehend hiu
NH
- paycheck chi phiu tr l n g , - to drag out tri qua chm chp
- 1&translate into ha ra, ha thnh - inspirational (adj) mang li nhiu cm
UY
- internship s i thc tp . - 'hng
.Q
136 SHOULD KIDS BE ABLE TO SURF THE INTERNET?
TP
Dear Editor, : ; ; ; :
O

Most public libraries now offer all visitors, kids an d a d u lts alike, free
access to all sites on the Internet; J.ust like any powerful tool, limits
NG
m u st be placed on it. After all, not all sites are good for children or a p -
propriate for them . Some are violent.:Some, in th e nam e of free speech,
H
say irresponsible things. O thers, feature incorrect .information for re -
search. And many, should be labeled For Adults Only.
N
In 2000, th ere were 7.1 million publicly available sites on th e Web,
TR
with over 200 new ad u lt sites added each day. Couple th is figure w ith
the fact th a t th ere are roughly 200 million Am erican child ren u n d e r the
B
age 18 w ith In tern et access, a n d you have a recipe for d isaster.
00
Back in 1967, the American Library A ssociation (ALA) p a sse d a reso -

10
lution th a t sta ted a person 's right to u se a library sho uld n o t be d e-

+3
nied ... b ecau se of origin, age, background, or views." Some groups a r -

P2
gue th a t th is resolution gives children the right to free a n d to tal access

to the Intern et a n d its u nsu itab le sites.
C
This resolution w as fine in th e past, b u t it never considered the

A
birth of the Internet. Besides, the ALA isn t a governm ent agency. It h a s
H
no power to p a ss laws, a n d its resolutions are n o t legally binding.

We m u st p a ss real laws th a t tie U.S. governm ent fu nd s for libraiy
-
com p uters to the u se of software th a t blocks o u t offensive m aterial

-L
online. If the libraries dont u se th e software, then they d o n t get com -

N
puters.
As a w orking p aren t, I c a n t be w ith my child, every time he tu rn s on
TO
th e com puter. I d o n t expect libraries to be b abysitters. B u t I do expect

NG
th em to work w ith me, n o t again st me, in m aking su re my child is pro-

tected from adult-only a n d other irresponsible sites.

Sincerely,
ID
Ju lie R ichardson
Redding, California
B
334

D ear Editor,
W hat if, w hen o u r n atio n w as p u sh in g west, som eone stepped for-
N
w ard a t th e M ississippi River an d said, Okay, th a ts far enough! a n d
we h ad stopped? We would never know the w onders th a t lay beyond.
NH
Those who w ould re stric t In tern et access are th rea te n in g to destroy
expansion on a sim ilar scale. Of the nearly 9,000 public libraries in the
UY
United States, over 60 percent offer access to th e Internet. B ut this
.Q
learning tool could be seriously ham pered by the increasing n u m b er of
TP
libraries u sin g software to block access to certain Web sites.
Law m akers were threaten in g the dem ocratic m ission of libraries by
O
forcing th em to u se blocking software. This software prevents access to

m any a rea s on the Internet, including sites dealing w ith a rt, literature,
w om ens h ealth , politics, religion, an d free speech.
NG
Public libraries provide inform ation to all, regardless of race, eco-
H
nomic background, a n d age. W hat if you c a n t afford a hom e com puter
an d y o u r only choice is to use one of th e librarys? If th is com puter
N
u se s blocking software, th e n you are being denied th e ac cess th a t peo-
ple w ith hom e co m p uters have.TR
Obviously, we have to protect o u r kids from distu rb in g im ages and
B
vicious pred ato rs. B ut th a t protection would come in th e form of tea c h -
00
ing, no t preaching. As the American Civil Liberties Union suggests, we

10
should sta rt D rivers Ed-type courses th a t show kids how to navigate

+3
th e ro a d s of th e Internet. These classes would teach children to use

P2
critical th in k ing a n d reasoning skills to distin gu ish between w h a ts

valuable a n d w h a ts trash . We should give our kids th e .tools they need
C
to m ake th e right decisions, not m ake the decisions for them . Lets not
kill som ething before we u n d ersta n d it.
A
H
Sincerely yours,
All H ershey
-
Salisbury, M aryland
-L
N
1. In tern et ac cess is available t o _____

A. a d u lts a n d children in m ost libraries.
TO
B. a d u lts only in som e libraries.

c. som e visitors in some libraries.
NG
D. children if they are accom panied by an adult.

2. W hich sta te m e n t is a n opinion?

ID
A. Limits m u st be placed on Internet sites.

B. Some public libraries offer free Internet access.
B
c. The In tern et is a source of information.

D. Many libraries have com puters.
335

3. The w riter believes children should b e _____

A. encouraged to use the Intern et freely.
B. m onitored while using the In tern et to protect them from in ap -
propriate sites.
N
c . prevented from usin g powerful tools.
NH
D. exposed to violent and irresponsible Web sites.
4. W hat right of an American citizen would be violated if th e In tern et
UY
were censored?
.Q
A. th e right to vote
TP
B. the right to b ear arm s
c . the right to p u rsu e hap p in ess
O
D. the right to free speech

5. According to th e first paragrap h, libraries m u s t _____
NG
A. place lim its on Internet access.
B. allow free access to the Internet.
H
c . charge children to en ter adu lt Web sites.
D. not allow any children to su rf the n e t.
N
6 . Ju lie R ichardson wrote h er le tte r _____
TR
A. to persu ad e .the governm ent to require inappropriate sub jects to
B
be blocked on the Internet.
00
B. to ban In tern et use in libraries.

10
c . to agree w ith the ALAs 1967 resolution.

D. to require ad u lt supervision during Internet use.
+3
P2
7. The m ain id ea of All H ersheys letter is th a t blocking software ____

A. is n ecessary to protect children.
C
B. denies u se rs the right of free speech.

c . denies u se rs access to some appropriate an d im p o rtan t infor-
A
H
m ation.
D. protects children from only violent and d istu rb in g sites.
-
8. In 1 9 6 7 , _____
-L
A. m any ho useholds h ad Intern et access.

N
B. th e In tern et did not exist.

c . children were n ot allowed in libraries.
TO
D. blocking software w as popular.

NG
9. W hat is the term Ju lie R ichardson used th a t m ean s bad th ing s are
boun d to. h appen?

A. an accident waiting to hap p en

B. b u rn in g bridges
ID
c . six-to-one, half-dozen to an o th er
B
D. a recipe for d isaster
336

10. W hat does Ju lie R ichardson consider a s unsuitable* for children?

A. inform ation abou t body p a rts
B. inform ation ab o u t violent events
c . inform ation u n su itab le for every family
N
D. inform ation ab o u t weapons.
NH
11. W hat does All Hershey propose instead of blocking software?
A. joining the American Civil Liberties Union
UY
B. boycotting the library
.Q
c . restricting Internet access
D. providing classes to teach children to m ake responsible deci-
TP
sions
O
12. Ju lie R ichardson proposes th a t libraries m u st use blocking soft-

w are or they w ill _____
A. lose th e com puters.
NG
B. forfeit th eir funding for com puters,
c . close th e library.
H
D. be breaking the law.
N
GLOSSARY
- in the name of free speech nhn - vicious (adj) c c, thm c
danh t do ngn lun TR - predator con th sn mi
- to feature sth trnh by ci gi nh i - to preach ging o, thuyt php
B
00
mt c im - Drivers' Education courses cc kha

- to label'gn nhn, t tn hc dy li xe v lut giao thng =>
10
- to couple sth with sth kt hp ci g Drivers' Ed-type courses cc kha

+3
vi ci g hc tng t nh cc kha dnh cho

- roughly (adv) khong chng ti x xe hi
P2
- a recipe for disaster (tnh trng) hi - American Civil Liberties Union Hip
hi Bo v Cc Quyn T Do Cng
C
mi iu kin thm ha xy ra
- resolution ngh quyt n M
- to deny sb sth khc t khng cho ai - to navigate tm ng i
A
hng ci g - critical thinking s suy ngh c ph

H
- background hon cnh xut thn phn

- government agency c quan ca - reasoning skill k nng suy lun
-
chnh ph - trash v gi tr, rc ri

-L
- to be legally binding c tnh rng - to monitor theo di iu khin

buc v mt php l - to violate a rig h t vi phm mt quyn
N
- offensive (adj) gy kh chu - to bear arms mang v kh

- to push west ty tin, di c t v - to pursue happiness mu cu hnh
TO
hng ty phc
- expansion s bnh trng - to charge i ai phi tr tin, i l phi
NG
- to hamper cn tr, gy tr ngi - to be bound to do sth chc chn s

- lawmaker nh lp php lm g

- democratic (aj) thuc v/ c tnh dn - to boycott ty chay

ch - to break a law phm mt lut
ID
- blocking software phn mm ngn

B
chn

137
The word desertification w as first u sed in 949 by th e F rench geog-
ra p h er Andre Aubreville to describe the change in North an d equatorial
N
Africa from productive sav an n a forest, g rasslan ds, an d sh ru b la n d s into
unproductive desert. Desertification does no t refer to the expansion of
NH
existing d eserts, b u t ra th e r to th e d e g ra d a tio n of productive drylan ds
UY
(rangeland or cropland) into less productive desert. D rylands occur on
every con tinent, an d are estim ated to cover a ro u n d 40 p ercen t of th e
.Q
e a rth s surface. In /the past, drylands recovered after long drou g hts an d
TP
dry periods th ro u g h shifting agricultural practices, nom adic herding,
an d so forth. Today, however, p ressu re on dry lands is heightened due
O

to intensive agricultural practices an d increasing populations.
Desertification becam e well known in the 1930s, w hen p a rts of the
NG
G reat Plains in the United S tates tu rn ed into th e D u st Bowl a s a re-
su lt of drought an d poor practices in farm ing (although the term itself
H
was n o t used un til 1949). The m assive erosion d u ring those years h a s
been blam ed on inappropriate u se of technology (ploughing th e p rai-
N
ries), overpopulation in the affected region, an d lack of rainfsLll. Many
TR
people believe th a t the problem s related to the D ust Bowl have been
solved by resettlem ent of some of the rem aining population, th e esta b -
B
lishm ent of N ational G rassland s an d the Soil Conservation Service,
00
governm ent spending an d regulation, an d the re tu rn in m o st y ears of

10
norm al rainfall.! However, the U nited Nations rep o rts th a t Texas and
+3
New Mexico are some of the fastest, m ost severely desertifying a rea s of
P2
the world.
We have lots of nam es for th is problem: d ro u g h ts a n d floods, weeds,
C
overgrazing, wildfire, endangered species, an d th e chronic d o w n tro d -

A
d e n state of th e ag ricu ltu ral economy (in spite of m assive subsidies,

H
enorm ous technical im provem ents, an d overseas m arkets). These are

problem s for th a t tiny sector of the economy know n a s agriculture. Al-
-
thoug h we have sep arate governm ent agencies in charge of each of th e

-L
sym ptom s, th ese "rural problem s can an d do tu rn into, u rb a n prob-

lems. According to the U.N.s Kofi A nnan, droug ht an d desertification
N
th rea ten the livelihood of over 1 billion people in m ore th a n 110 co u n -

TO
tries aro u n d the world. According to th e UN C onvention to Com bat

Desertification, 70 p ercent of th e worlds dry lands {excluding hyper-
NG
arid deserts), o r some 3.600 million hectares, are degraded.

In 1992, R hodesian wildlife biologist Allan Savory cam e to a startling

conclusion. Most experts on desertification blam e overpopulatiori, over-
ID
stocking w ith livestock, overcutting of trees, poverty, w arfare, in ad e-

B
qu ate technology o r education, or shifting cultivation. In W est Texas,

where Savory w as working a t the time, none of th ese ca u ses were pre-
338

sent. R ural population w as declining, livestock n u m b ers were way

down from earlier decades, m esquite trees were e n c ro a c h in g , and
N
th ere w as peace. Money, technology, an d education were a b u n d a n t, all
land w as privately owned, a n d th ere w as no shifting cultivation. Yet
NH
West Texas w as desertifying as rapidly a s th e w orst a re as of Africa or
Asia.
UY
Savory felt th a t the decision framework th a t m ost people use, an d in
.Q
w hich they are unconsciously trained, is well adapted to tre a t sym p-
TP
tom s, b u t leaves th e ca u ses u n ad d ressed . Savory w as forced to con-
clude th a t the lack of a holistic decision framework w as the fu n d am en -
O
tal cau se of h u m an -in d u ced desertification, in both an cien t an d m od-

ern times.
NG
By 1992, th e United Nations Environm ent Program m e h a d sp en t u s
$6 billion treatin g the sym ptom s of desertification, w ith an o th er $450
H
billion called for. Though some people are skeptical of the U.Ns figures
for th e rate a t which productive land is tu rn in g into unproductive de-
N
sert, th e reality worldwide is th a t land deterioration co ntin ues to have a
serious im pact on the quality of people's lives. We owe it to ourselves
TR
an d to futu re generations to u n d e rsta n d the cau ses of desertification
an d loss of biodiversity, an d to su p p o rt the n u m erou s practition ers of
B
cost-effective, successful approaches. More efficient u se of existing wa-
00
te r reso u rces an d control of salinization have proven to be effective

10
tools for improving a rid lands. New ways are being sou ght to u se s u r-
+3
face-w ater re so u rces su ch a s rainw ater h arvesting or irrigating with

seasonal runo ff from adjacent highlands. F u rther, new m ethods of find-
P2
ing and tapping g roundw ater resources are also being p u rsu e d , as well
C
a s developing m ore effective ways of irrigating arid an d sem i-arid lands.

R esearch on th e reclam ation of deserts is focusing on discovering
A
proper crop rotation to protect the fragile soil, on u n d e rsta n d in g how

H
sand-fixing p la n ts can be adapted to local envirpnm ents, an d on how

grazing la n d s and w ater resources can be developed effectively w ithout
-
being overused.
-L
1. W hat does th e passag e m ainly discuss?

N
A. Factors limiting crop production

B. D esertification
TO
c. Inappropriate u se of technology
NG
D. R esearch on d ese rt reclam ation

2. The word dow ntrodden in th e passage closest in m eaning t o ____

A. esteem ed B. m iserable c. com m endable D. u rb a n
ID
3. W hat is th e p urpose of parag raph 3?

B
A. To explain th e significance of drought a n d desertification in the

world
339
B. To com pare effects of desertification in ru ra l an d u rb a n a rea s

c . To describe how the U.N. is com bating desertification
D: To p ersu ad e people tp help stop th e sp re ad of desertification
N
The word degradation in p arag ra p h 1 is closest in m eaning to
NH
A. deterioration '
UY
B..im provem ent ;. : - . .
;C .-enhancem ent .
.Q
D. b e tte rm e n t. 'c V
TP
The word' encroaGhing^. in the passage could best be replaced by
O

A. dispersing
B. retreatin g
NG
c . declining
H
D. advancing
According to th e passage, w hat did Savory conclude w as th e p ri-
N
m ary c a u se of h u m an -in d u ced desertification?
A. The effects of global w arm ing TR
B. Politicians have n o t tak en th e problem seriously enough,
B
c . A lack of a holistic decision fram ework
00
D. Shifting cultivation tren d s

10
It can be inferred from p arag rap h 6 t h a t _____

+3
A. th e problem of desertification m ay n o t be a s serious a s previ-

P2
ously th o u g h t
C
B. n o t enough m oney h a s been sp en t on trea tin g th e sym ptom s of

desertification
A
c . desertification is an im p ortan t global issue th a t needs cost-

H
effective solutions
D. th e U.N.s figures regarding desertification are u n d isp u te d
-
-L
W hich of th e following is NOT m entioned as a way of controlling de-

sertification?
N
A. More efficient u se of w ater resources

TO
B. R ainw ater harvesting

c . Increased governm ent funding
NG
D. Irrigating with seaso nal runoff

The word arid in the la st parag rap h is closest in m eaning to

A. dam p B. fertile c. lu sh D. b arren
ID
B

GLOSSARY
- desertification s sa mc ha - startling (adj) ng git mnh
- equatorial (adj) thuc/ gn xch o - overstocking s lu tr qu nhiu
N
- productive (adj) sn xut c * un- - livestock gia sc (b, cu) chn nui
productive (adj) trong nng tri
NH
- savanna ng c, tho nguyn - shifting cultivation s du canh [li
- shrubland vng t nhiu khm cy canh tc theo kiu t bc mu th b
UY
bi i ni khc]
.Q
- dryland vng t kh (tri vi vng - mesquite tree loi cy t ly than
sng/bin) - to encroach ln dn ti
TP
- rangeland = cropland t canh tc - abundant (adj) nhiu, phong ph
O
- the Great Plains vng i Bnh - unaddressed (adj) cha c gii

Nguyn ( M) quyt
-'Dust Bowl [tn gi vng t b nh - holistic (adj) c tnh chinh th
NG
hng ca bo bi thp k 30 M] - decision framework mt khun kh
- erosion s xi mn, s xm thc php l a ra quyt nh
H
- inappropriate (adj) khng thch hp - fundamental (adj) c tnh c bn
- prairy ng c - human-induced (adj) do con ngi
N
- resettlement s ti nh c gy ra
- desertifying (adj) ang bin n thnh - skeptical of (adj) t ra hoi nghi
sa mc TR - practitioner ngi thc hnh
- overgrazing s chn th gia sc nhiu - cost-effective (adj) li v kinh t
B
00
qu mc - salinization s mn ha
- wildfire s chy rng/ng c trn - surface-water resources cc ngun
10
din rng nc b mt
+3
- chronic (adj) mn tnh - rainwater harvesting s tch tr ndc

P2
- downtrodden (adj) b n p, b p ma
bc, b nn - seasonal runoff lng nc chy t
C
- subsidy tin tr cp ch cao n cho thp theo ma

- sector phn - adjacent (adj) k cn
A
- livelihood s !m n sinh sng, k sinh - highlands vng t cao

H
nhai - reclamation s thu hi t t sa mc/

- UN Convention to Combat Deserti- bin
-
fication Cng c Chng Sa Mc - crop rotation s lun canh

-L
Ha ca Lin Hp Quc - fragile (adj) mong manh, d v

- excluding (prep) ngoi tr - sand-fixing plant cy chng ct bay/
N
- hyper-arid (adj) qu kh cn cy gi ct
TO
- degraded (adj) xung cp, suy thoi - grazing land t chn th sc vt

- Rhodesian (adj) thuc nc Rhodesia - to overuse lm dng/ s dng qu
NG
Nam Phi mc

ID
B

138
Alfred Nobel w as b o m inr Stockholm on October 21,1833. His fattier,
N
Im m anuel Nobel, w as a n engineer a n d inven tor who b u ilt bridges an d
buildings in Stockholm . In. connection .with his co nstru ctio n w ork Im-
NH
m anu el Nobel also experim ented with different techniques, for blasting,
rocks. Alfreds "mother,. born -Andriette:";Ahisell, cam e from a wealthy
UY
family. Due. to .m sort ns in iis co n stru ction w ork cau sed by the loss
.Q
of some b a rg e s of build in g , m aterial,. Im m anuel Nobel w as forced into
bank ru ptcy th e sam e year-Alfred Nbel was' born. In 1837 Im m anuel
TP
Nobel'left Stockholm a n d his family to s ta rt new career in Finland
O
an d in R ussia.: To su p p o rt th e family, A ndriette Nobel sta rte d a grocery

store w hich provided a m odest income.
Meanwhile, Im m anuel Nobel w as successful in h is new en terp rise in
NG
St. Petersburg, R ussia. He started a m echanical w orkshop w hich pro-
H
vided equipm ent for the R ussian arm y, a n d he also convinced th e T sar
a nd his generals th a t naval m ines could be u se d to block enem y naval
N
sh ip s from th rea ten in g the city. The naval m ines designed by Im m anuel
Nobel were sim ple devices consisting of subm erged wooden c a sk s filled
TR
with gunpow der. A nchored below the surface of th e G ulf of F inland,
B
they effectively deterred th e B ritish Royal Navy from moving into firing
00
range of St P etersb urg d uring th e Crim ean W ar (1853-1856). Im m anuel

10
Nobel w as also a pioneer in arm s m an u fa ctu re an d in designing steam

engines.
+3
S uccessful in h is in d u strial a n d b u sin ess v en tu res, Im m anuel Nobel

P2
w as able, in 1842, to b ring h is family to St. Petersburg. There, h is so n s

C
were given a first class ed ucation by private teachers. The train in g in -

cluded n a tu ra l sciences, languages a n d literature . By th e age of 17, Al-
A
fred Nobel w as fluent in Swedish, R ussian, French, English arid Ger-

H
m an. His prim ary in tere sts were in English lite rature an d poetry a s well
-
as in chem istry an d physics. Alfreds father, who w anted his so n s to

-L
join his enterprise a s engineers, disliked Alfreds in te re st in poetry an d

found his son ra th e r in tro v e rte d . In order to w id en A lfred s h o riz o n s,
N
his fath er se n t him abro ad for fu rth e r training in chem ical engineering.
D uring a two-year period Alfred Nobel visited Sweden, G erm any,
TO
France a n d th e U nited S tates. In Paris, the city h e cam e to like best, he

NG
worked in th e private laboratory of Professor T. J . Pelouze, a fam ous

chem ist. There h e m et th e young Italian chem ist Ascanio Sobrero who,

th ree years earlier, h a d invented nitroglycerine, a highly explosive liq-

uid. Nitroglycerine w as produced by mixing glycerine w ith sulfuric an d
ID
nitric acid. It w as considered too dang ero us to be of an y practical use.

B
Although its explosive power greatly exceeded th a t of gunpow der, th e

liquid would explode in a very unpredictable m a n n e r if subjected to
342

h e a t a n d p re ssu re . Alfred Nobel becam e very in terested in nitroglycer-

ine a n d how it could be p u t to practical use in co nstructio n work. He
N
also realized th a t th e safety problem s h ad to be solved a n d a m ethod
h a d to be developed for the controlled detonation of nitroglycerine. In
NH
th e U nited S tates he visited J o h n Ericsson, th e Swedish-A merican en -
gineer who h a d developed the screw propeller for ships. In 1852 Alfred
UY
Nobel w as asked to come back and work in the family enterprise which
.Q
w as boom ing b ecau se of its deliveries to the R u ssian army. Together
TP
with his fa ther he perform ed experim ents to develop nitroglycerine a s a
comm ercially an d technically useful explosive.
O
The m ark e t for dynam ite and detonating caps grew very rapidly an d

Alfred Nobel also proved him self to be a very skillful e n tre p re n eu r an d
NG
bu sin essm an . By 1865 h is factory in Krum mel - n e a r H am burg, Ger-
m any - w as exporting nitroglycerine explosives to oth er co untries in
H
Europe, America, an d A ustralia. Over the y ears he founded factories
and laboratories in some 90 differerit places in m ore th a n 20 countries.
N
Although h e lived in P aris m u ch of h is life, he w as constantly traveling.
Victor Hugo a t one time described him a s E u ro p es rich e st vagabond.
TR
W hen he w as n o t traveling or engaging in b u sin ess activities, Nobel
B
him self worked intensively in his various laboratories, first in Stock-
00
holm an d later in G erm any, Scotland, France, Karlskoga, Sweden, an d

10
Italy. He focused on the developm ent of explosives technology as well as

+3
other chem ical inventions, including su ch m aterials a s synthetic ru b -

ber, leather, an d silk. By th e time of his d eath in 1896. he h ad 355
P2
paten ts.
C
Intensive work a n d travel' did not leave m u ch tim e for a private life.
At the age of 43 h e w as feeling like a n old m an. At th is tim e he. adver-
A
H
tised in a new spaper Wealthy, highly-educated elderly gentlem an

seeks lady of m a tu re age, v erse d in languages, a s secretary an d su p e r-
-
visor of h o useho ld . The m ost qualified applicant tu rn e d o u t to be an

-L
A ustrian w om an, C ountess Bertha-K insky. After working a very sh o rt

N
tim e for Nobel, she decided to re tu rn to A ustria to m arry C ount A rthur

von S u ttn er. In spite of th is Alfred Nobel and B ertha von S u ttn e r re-
TO
m ained friends a n d k ep t w riting letters to each o ther for decades. Over

the years B erth a von S u ttn e r becam e increasingly critical of th e a rm s
NG
race. She w rote a fam ous book, Lay Down Your A rm s a n d becam e a

pro m inen t figure in the peace movement.

ID
Alfred Nobel died in S an Remo, Italy, on Decem ber 10,1896. When

his will w as opened it cam e as a su rp rise th a t his fortun e was to be
B
u sed for Prizes in Physics, Chem istry, Physiology or Medicine, Litera-

tu re an d Peace. The executors of his will were two young engineers,

R agnar Sohlm an an d Rudolf Lilljequist. They set ab o u t form ing the No-
bel Foundation a s an organization to take care of the financial a sse ts
left by Nobel for th is p urpose an d to coordinate th e work of the Pri2e-
N
Awarding In stitu tio n s. This w as not w ithout its difficulties since the
NH
will w as contested by relatives an d questioned by auth o rities in various
countries.
UY
1. The a u th o rs perspective tow ard Alfred Nobel could b e st be de-
.Q
scribed a s _____
TP
A. personal B. historical c . critical D. em otional
O
2. The word they in paragraph 2 refer t o _____ .

A. B ritish Royal Navy
NG
B. steam engines
c . naval m ines
H
D. the T sar an d his generals
3. According to th e passage, why did Alfred Nobel become a chem ist?
N
A. His fath er p u sh ed him in th a t direction
TR
B. He w anted to follow in h is fath ers footsteps
c . He h ad no other options
B
D. He h ad lost in tere st in becoming a poet
00
10
4. The word introverted in the passage is closest in m eaning to ____

A. gregarious B. outgoing c . reserved D. sociable
+3
P2
5. How m any p aten ts did Alfred Nobel have by th e tim e of h is d eath ?

A. 355 B. 1896 c. 90 D. 1865
C
6 . W hich of the following could best replace the p h ra se widen Alfreds

A
horizons in parag ra ph 3?
H
A. provide Alfred with more experience

B. show Alfred a beautiful su n set
-
c . lim it Alfreds exposure to the world

-L
D. m ain tain Alfreds cu rren t level of knowledge

N
7. W hich of th e following is NOT a Nobel Prize category?

TO
A. C hem istry B. Physics

c . Literature an d Peace D. Psychiatry
NG
8 . It can be inferred th a t Alfred Nobels m ost fam ous invention w as

A. nitroglycerine
ID
B. synthetic silk
c. the steam engine
B
D. dynam ite
344

9. W hich of the following w ords or p h ra ses is LEAST accu rate in de-

scribing Alfred Nobel?
c. prosaic D. altru istic
N
A. visionary B. innovative
NH
10. The word "versed in th e passage is closest in m eaning t o _____
A. aw kw ard B. accom plished
c. incom petent
UY
D. graceless
.Q
11. W here in th passag e does th e a u th o r discu ss Alfred Nobels b u si-
n e ss life?
TP
A. P arag rap h 1 B. Paragraph 2 c . P aragraph 3 D. P aragraph 4
O

GLOSSARY
NG
- to blast ph n, lm n tung - to be subjected to sth phi chu, phi
- born + [tn ngi] c tn khai sinh l nhn lnh
H
- misfortune iu bt hnh, s r ro - controlled detonation s kch n c
- barge chic x lan kim sot
N
- building material vt iiu xy dng - screw propeller chn vt ca tu thy
- bankruptcy s ph sn/ v n - to boom pht trin rm r, pht t
- modest (adj) khim tn TR - dynamite mn
- enterprise cng cuc kinh doanh - detonating cap thit b kch n
B
- Tsar Nga Hong -entrepreneur nh kinh doanh
00
- naval mine thy li - vagabond k lang thang khng nh

10
- to block phong ta, chn ng - to engage in tham gia vo

+3
- submerged (adj) t chm di nc - synthetic (adj) tng hp

- wooden cask thng trn bng g - patent bng sng ch/ bng pht minh
P2
- anchored (adj) c neo li - mature (adj) trng thnh, chn

C
- Gulf of Finland Vnh Phn Lan chn

- to deter ngn cn, rn e, im chn - to be versed n sth thng tho ci g
A
bc - supervisor gim th
H
- firing range tm pho, lm n c th - Countess n b tc

bn ti c - Count b tc
-
- venture cuc kinh doanh - arms race cuc chy ua v trang

-L
- first class (adj) hng nht, thng - prominent (adj) xut sc, xut chng
hng, tt nht - physiology khoa sinh l hc
N
- introverted (adj) sng khp kn, hng - executor ngi thi hnh, ngi hnh
ni x (1 quyn)
TO
- chemical engineering ngnh k thut - to set about doing sth khi s lm g

ha cht - financial asset ti sn bng tin mt
NG
- highly explosive (adj) rt nhy n - to coordinate iu phi

- to exceed vt qu - Prize-Awarding Institutions cc c

- unpredictable (adj) khng th on quan ph trch cp gii thng
ID
trc c - to contest phn i

B
345
139
October 1, .1958, th e official sta rt of th e N ational A eronautics an d
N
Space A dm inistration (NAS), w as th e beginning of a rich history of
u niq ue scientific a n d technological achievem ents in h u m an space
NH
flight, aeron autics, space science, an d space applications. NASAs first
high-profile program w as Project M ercury, an effort to learn if h u m an s
UY
could survive in space, followed by Project Gemini, w hich built u p o n
.Q
M ercurys su ccesses an d u se d spacecraft built for two a stro n a u ts.
TP
NASAs h u m a n spaceflight efforts th en extended to th e Moon w ith Pro-
ject Apollo, culm inating in 1969 when th e Apollo 11 m ission first p u t
O
h u m an s on the lu n a r surface. Apollo becam e a NASA priority on May

25, 1961, w hen P resident J o h n F. Kennedy an n o u n ced I believe th a t
th is natio n should com m it itself to achieving the goal, before th is dec-
NG
ade is out, of landing a m an on the Moon a n d re tu rn in g him safely to
H
E arth . .
A direct resp on se to Soviet Union successes in space, Kennedy u sed
N
Apollo a s a high-profile effort for the U.S. to dem on strate to the world
its scientific an d technological superiority over its cold w ar adversary.
TR
In response to th e Kennedy decision, NASA w as consum ed w ith ca rry -
B
ing o u t Project Apollo an d sp ent the next 11 years doing so. This effort
00
required significant expenditures, costing $25.4 billion over the life of

10
the program , to m ake it a reality. Only th e building of the P anam a Ca-

nal rivalled th e size of the Apollo program as the largest non-m ilitary
+3
technological endeavour ever u n d ertak en by th e United States; only the

P2
M anhattan Project w as com parable in a w artim e setting. Although

C
there were m ajor challenges an d some failures - notably a J a n u a ry 27,

1967 fire in an Apollo capsule on the ground th a t took the lives o f.as-
A
tro n a u ts Roger B. Chaffee, Virgil G us Grissom, an d E dw ard H. White

H
J r. - the program moved forward inexorably. Less th a n two y ears later,

in October 1968, NASA bounced back w ith th e successful Apollo 7 m is-
-
sion, w hich orbited the. E arth an d tested the redesigned Apollo com -
-L
m and m odule. The Apollo 8 m ission, w hich orbited the Moon on De-
N
cem ber 24-25, 1968, w as an o th er crucial accom plishm ent o n th e way

to the Moon.
TO
T h ats one sm all step for [a] m an, one giant leap for maxi k ind. Neil
NG
A. A rm strong u ttere d these fam ous words on J u ly 20, 1969, w hen the
Apollo 11 m ission fulfilled K ennedys challenge by successfully landing

A rm strong and Edwin E. B uzz Aldrin, J r. on the Moon. A rm strong

dram atically 1 piloted th e lu n a r module to the lu n a r surface w ith less
ID
th a n thirty seconds w orth.of fuel rem aining. After taking soil sam ples,
B
photographs, an d doing other ta sk s on the Moon, A rm strong a n d

Aldrin rendezvoused with their colleague Michael M ichael Collins in lu -
346

n a r orbit for a safe voyage back to E arth. Five more successful lu n ar

landing m issions followed. The Apollo 13 m ission of April 1970 a t-
N
tracted th e p ub lics atten tio n w hen astro n a u ts a n d ground crew s h a d
to improvise to end the m ission safely after an oxygen ta n k b u rs t m id-
NH
way thro u g h the jo urney to the Moon. Although th is m ission never
landed on the Moon, it reinforced the notion th a t NASA h ad a rem a rk -
UY
able ability to a d a p t to th e unforeseen technical difficulties in h ere n t in
.Q
h u m an space flight. W ith the Apollo 17 m ission of Decem ber 1972,
NASA com pleted a successful engineering and scientific program . Fit-
TP
tingly, Harrison H. J a c k Schm itt, a geologist who participated on this
O
m ission, w as the first scientist to be selected a s a n astro n a u t. NASA

learned a good deal a bo u t th e origins of the Moon, a s well as how to
su p p o rt h u m a n s in o u ter space. In total, twelve a s tro n a u ts walked on
NG
th e Moon du ring six Apollo lu n a r landing m issions
H
In 1975, NASA cooperated with the Soviet Union to achieve the first
in tern atio n al h u m an space flight, the Apollo-Soyuz Test Project (ASTP).
N
This project successfully tested jo in t rendezvous a n d docking proce-
d u res for spacecraft from the U.S. an d the .S.S.R. After being
TR
launched separately from their respective countries, th e Apollo and
B
Soyuz crew s m et in space an d conducted various experim ents for two
00
days. After a gap of six years, NASA retu rned to h u m a n space flight in
10
1981, w ith the advent of the Space Shuttle- The S h u ttles first m ission,
STS-1, took off on April 12, 1981, dem onstrating th a t it could take off
+3
vertically an d glide to an unpow ered airplane-like landing. Sally K. Ride

P2
becam e the first American wom an to fly in space w hen STS-7 lifted off
C
on J u n e 18,1983, a n o th er early m ilestone of the S h u ttle program .

On Ja n u a ry 28, 1986 a leak in the join ts of one of two solid rocket
A
boosters attac h ed to the Challenger orbiter caused the m ain liquid fuel
H
ta n k to explode 73 seconds after launch, killing all seven crew m em -

bers. The S h uttle program w as grounded for over two years, while
-
NASA an d its co ntracto rs worked to redesign th e solid rocket boosters

-L
an d im plem ent m anagem ent reform s to increase safety. On Septem ber

N
29, 1988, the S huttle successfully retu rned to flight. Dozens of su c -

cessful flights followed, b u t the Space S h u ttle Columbia d isaster
TO
changed all that. The entire seven-m em ber crew w as killed on February
1, 2003, w hen the S hu ttle disintegrated over Texas du rin g re-entry into
NG
th e E a rth s atm osphere. Although th e S huttle program is currently

su spend ed, th e organization h as indicated th a t it is com m itted to re-

tu rn in g th e three rem aining sp ace S huttles to safe flight by mid-2005.
ID
B
1. With w hich of the following is the passage prim arily concerned?

A. The challenge of interplanetary travel.
B. A brief overview of NASA history an d h u m an space flight

c. A critical look a t the sp ace Shuttle program

D. The US-Soviet Union space race d uring the 1950s an d 60s
2. W hich NASA space program w as the first to p u t m en on th e m oon?
N
A. Project Gemini
NH
. B. Project M ercury ;
c . The M anhattan Project
UY
D. Project Apollo
.Q
3. The word adversary" in the passage is closest in m eaning to _
c. associate D. su p p o rter
TP
. A. opponent B. allv .
4. The word its in p aragrap h 2 refers t o _______
O

A. th e Soviet U nion B: the U.S.
c. Apollo -: a high-profile effort
NG
5. According to p aragrap h 2, the building of th e P anam a C anal w as a
H
project t h a t _____
A. w as m uch sm aller in size th a n the Apollo program
N
B. w as sim ilar in size to the Apollo program
c . exceeded the size of the M anhattan Project
TR
D. resulted in a fire th a t killed several a stro n a u ts
B
6 . The two a stro n a u ts ever to walk on the Moon w e re _____
00
A. Roger B. Chaffee an d Edwin E. Aldrin, J r.

10
B. Michael Collins an d Neil A. Arm strong

+3
c. Edwin E. Aldrixi, J r. and Neil A. A rm strong

D. Neil A, A rm strong and Roger B. Chaffee
P2
7. The word notion in the passage is closest m eaning to ______

C
A. assum p tion B. m isun d erstand ing

A
c . plan D. connotation
H
8 . Inform ation in p aragrap h 5 sup po rts which of the following conclu-

sions?
-
A. NASA h a s enjoyed a great deal of success w ith the sp a c e S h u t-

-L
tle m issions since 1986

N
B. The Space S h uttle program h as suffered some serious setb acks

c . The Space S huttle program h as been su sp en ded indefinitely
TO
D. NASA needs additional governm ent funding in order to en su re

the safety of future space S huttle flights
NG
9. The a u th o rs tone in th is passage could b est be described a s _____

A. n eu tra l and objective B; hu m orous

ID
c . tentative D. highly critical

B
348

GLOSSARY
- the National Aeronautics and space - to fulfil lm trn vn, thc hin
Administration (NASA) c quan - to pilot iu khin
N
Qun tr Hng khng v Khng gian - lunar module khoang tu dng p
Quc gia xung mt ng
NH
- unique (adj) c o - soil sample mu t
- high-profile (adj) nh m, gy nhiu - to rendezvous hn gp
UY
ting' vang, c qung b rm r - ground crew ban nhn vin mt t
- Project Mercury, Project Gemini, - to improvise ty c ng bin, ng tc,
.Q
Project Apollo [tn cc chng trnh ng theo tinh hung
TP
thm him v tr ca M] - oxygen tank bnh cha -xy
- to extend to m rng, ko di n - to reinforce tang cng, gia c
O
- t o culminate ln n nh cao - unforeseen (adj) khng tin liu c

- lunar surface b mt mt trng - inherent (adj) ni ti, sn c nh th
- priority iu u tin - fittingly (av) mt cch rt thch hp
NG
- to commit oneself to sth/ doing sth - geologist nh a cht
cam kt s lm gi -joint rendezvous cuc hn gp nhau
H
- response to cu li cho - docking procedures cc quy trnh
- superiority u th, s u vit ghp noi
- cold war adversary i th thdi chin - the advent of sth s ra i (ca mt
N
tranh lnh pht minh)
- to be consumed with sth dn ht tm
sc vo vic g
TR - the Space Shuttle tu v tr con thoi
-vertically (adv) theo chiu thng ng
B
- expenditure chi ph, ph tn - to glide ln, lt nh
00
- the Panama Canal Knh o Panama - unpowered (adj) khng c cp n<

- rival i th
10
nng .
- non-military (adj) ph qun s, khng - to lift off ri b phng
+3
mang tnh qun s . - milestone ct mc nh du chng

- technological endeavour n ic v
P2
ng
cng ngh - leak cho r ri
C
- comparable (adj) c th snh, vi/ . - joint khp ni

ngang tm vi - solid rocket booster tn la y dnc
A
- in a wartime setting trong bi cnh nhin liu rn

H
thi chin - orbter phi thuyn (dng bay quartf

- notably (adv) ng lu l qu o)
- capsule khoang tu v tr - launch s phng tu v tr
-
- inexorably (adv) khng th cn li - to be grounded (my bay) khng

-L
c ct cnh, b inh ch hot ng

- to bounce back tr li (sau khi tm - contractor nh thu
N
ngng),, ly li phong c - to implement thi hnh thc thi

- to orbit bay quanh qu o
TO
- reform s ci cch, ci t
- to redesign thit k !i - to disintegrate tan r, v ra tng
- command module khoang tu ch huy
NG
mnh
- crucial (adj) quan trng - re-entry lc vo li (kh quyn)

- leap c nhay, bc nhy - to be suspended b nh ch

- to utter a word tht ln mt li - interplanetary travel s du hnh lir
ID
hnh tinh
B
3A

140
Jo h a n n e s G utenberg w as a pioneer in' th e use of movable type.
W hen he began building printing press in 1436, he w as unlikely to
N
have realized th a t he was giving b irth to an a rt form th a t w ould take
center stage in the social-and in d u strial revolutions w hich followed.
NH
G utenberg w as G erm an, h is p ress w as wooden, a n d th e m ost im por-
ta n t a s p e c t of his invention w as th a t it w as the first form of printing to
UY
use movable type. Although Laurence Koster of H aarlem also laid claim
.Q
to the invention, scho lars have generally accepted G utenberg a s the
TP
father of m odern printing. A fu rth e r claim th a t movable type w as u sed
in C hina a s early a s 1041 .is..undisputed. However, th e C hinese types
O
were m ade of (unlike G utenbergs, which were ca st in metal), they were

com prised of only oriental: characters, an d th eir m ethods of application
NG
differed. Before G utenberg, the printing p ress w as u sed only to repro -
duce pictures, playing cards, an d designs on cloth. Designs were cu t in
H
wood, stone, or m etal arid transferred to p arch m en t or vellum. Some-
tim es a few w ords of explanation were cu t into the printing block, b u t
N
th a t w as the limit of text printing. Books were copied by h a n d by
m onks, w hich w as a labor-intensive undertaking.
TR
Detailed records of J o h a n n e s G utenbergs life an d work axe n eg lig i-
B
b le ; his nam e does no t ap pear on any of the w orks credited to him .
00
From w h at is know n, G utenberg w as b o ra in Mainz, G erm any in ab o u t

10
1400. He worked 'as a silversm ith an d also served a s a policem an. In

+3
1438, G utenberg becam e a p a rtn e r in a block p rinting firm. From 1438

P2
to 1455, he experim ented with m etal type.

P erhaps his m ost significant in n o v a tio n w as th e efficient m olding
C
a n d casting of movable m etal type. Each separate letter w as carved into

A
the end of a steel p u n ch w hich w as th en ham m ered into a copper

H
blank. The copper im pression w as inserted into a m old a n d a m olten

alloy m ade of lead a n d tin w as poured into it. The m etal cooled quickly
-
an d the resu ltin g reverse image of the letter w as attac h e d to a lead

-L
base. The w idth of th e lead base varied according to the lette rs size (for
example, the base of an i would not be nearly a s wide a s the b ase of a
N
w). This em phasized th e visual im pact of words an d clu ste rs of w ords

TO
ra th e r th a n evenly spaced letters. This novelty len t elegance an d so-

phistication to w h at seemed to m any to be th e m agically perfect regu-
NG
larity of a printed page.

. G utenberg designed a Latin-print Bible which becam e his sign ature

work. He printed approxim ately 300 two-volume G utenberg Bibles,
ID
which sold for 30 florins each, or ab o u t three years of a clerk s wage.

B
The copies of the 4 2 -line Bible th a t rem ain - ab o u t 40 in all - are

am ong the w orld's m o st valuable books. It is known as th e 4 2 -line Bi-
350

ble because m ost of its pages are printed in two colum ns forty-two lines
long. The Library of Congress in W ashington. D.c. h a s one of th e three
rem aining com plete an d perfect sets.
N
All in all, G utenbergs contributions to early printing technology
NH
should be classed w ith the greatest events in the history of the world. It
caused a revolution in the developm ent of culture, equaled by hardly
UY
any oth er incident in the C hristian Era. Thus, no t only h a s G utenbergs
a rt been insep arable from the progress of science, b u t it h a s also been
.Q
a n indispensable factor in th e education of the people a t large. C ulture
TP
a n d knowledge, un til th e n considered aristocratic privileges peculiar to
O
certain classes, were popularized by typography, although in the proc-

ess it u nfortunately brou gh t abo ut an internal revolution in th e intel-
lectual world in th e direction of w hat is ptofane an d free from restraint.
NG
1. W hat is the m ain topic of the passage?
H
A. The history of printing aro un d the world
B. The con tributions G utenberg m ade to typography
N
c. The fam ous 42-line Bible
TR
D. The different kinds of p rint type an d th e applications
B
2. The word asp ect in th e passage is closest in m eaning t o _____
00
B. type c. relation D. purpose

10
3. According to paragraph 2, how were books reproduced before the

+3
printing press?
P2
A. Monks copied them by h an d

B. Designs were cu t in wood, stone, or m etal an d transferred to
C
parch m en t or vellum
c. Books were not able to be reproduced a t th a t time
A
H
D. Som etim es a few w ords of explanation were c u t into the p rin t-

ing block, b u t th a t w as the limit of text printing
-
4. The word negligible in title passage is closest in m eaning t o _____

-L
A. insignificant B. enorm ous

N
c . well-known D. limited
5. According to th e passag e, w hat lent elegance an d sophistication to
TO
G utenberg s work?
NG
A. The letters were all th e sam e size.

B. A led base w as u sed for the letters.

c. The letters i* a n d w were very stylized.

D. The letters were aligned with perfect regularity.
ID
6 . The word innovation in. the passage is closest in m eaning t o ____

B
A. m etal B. blank c. letter . novelty
351

7. Why is G utenbergs bible called the 42-line Bible?

A. The complete bible w as w ritten in 42 lines.
B. Most pages contained exactly 42 lines.
c. Only 42 lines of the bible have been found
N
D. The bible consisted of 42 lines p er volume
NH
8 . According to th e passage, th e au th o r im plies th a t G u ten b e rg ,
A. invented the p rinting press
UY
B. w as the first to p rin t text
c. only prin ted a bible
.Q
D. w as no t successful at any job
TP
9. In p arag rap h 6 , the au th o r suggests t h a t ______
O

A. G utenberg contributed little to the developm ent f printing
B. G utenbergs a rt h a s no connection to th e progress of m odem
NG
science
c. cu ltu re an d knowledge in the C hristian E ra w as peculiar to all
H
classes
D. the invention of movable type w as a significant event In world
N
history
TR
10. W hich of th e following sentences should NOT be included in a
sum m ary of th e passage?
B
00
A. The 4 2 -line Bible is considered G utenberg's finest work.

B. G utenberg changed the way text is produced.
10
c. G utenberg w as one of the m ost fam ous G erm ans in history.

+3
. D. Movable m etal "type w as invented by G utenberg.

P2
GLOSSARY
C
movable type thut in bng con ch - t o emphasize nhn mnh

ri (tri vi in bn khc) - duster cm, nhm
A
printing press my in - evenly spaced letters cc ch ci c

H
take center stage ng vai tr quan khong cch u nhau

trng - novelty s mi l, pht minh mi
-
to lay daim o sth t xng mnh l - to lend elegance and sophistication

-L
ngi c cng/l cha ca to sth khin cho c g trng p v .

N
scholar hc gi tinh t hn
undisputed (adj) khng ai phn i - regularity s u n
TO
d ay t st - Latin-print Bible Kinh thnh bng ch

to be cast n metal c c bng kim La tinh
NG
loi - signature work cng trnh lu danh

to be comprised of gm c - two-volume (adj) gm 2 tp

oriental character con ch phng - florin [n v tin ]

- clerk nhn vin th k
ID
ng (ch Hn/ Nht/ Hn)

- playing cards G bi, nhng l bi - Library of Congress ThA/n Quc
B
- parchment da th dng lm giy Hi My
352

- v e llu m giy m bng da th - a set mt b

- printing block bn khc in - contribution to s ng gp cho
- monk thy tu - to be classed with c xp hng
N
- a labor-intensive undertaking mt chung vi
cng vic rt kh nhc - to be equaled by c snh ngang
NH
- negligible (adj) khng ng l bao, hng bi
nh nhoi - the Christian Era K nguyn Thin
UY
- to be credited to sb c qui ! do ai cha gio
.Q
c cng to ra - inseparable from (adj) khng tch ri
- silversmith th bc vi
TP
- block printing firm cng ti in bn khc - indispensable (adj) rt cn thit,
O
- innovation pht kin, sng kin ci tin . khng th' thiu

- molding s to khun c - aristocratic privilege c quyn ca
- casting s c gii qu tc
NG
-toca rv e khc - to be peculiar to sb/sth dnh ring
- steel punch mi di bng thp cho
H
- to hammer ng bng ba - to be popularized c ph cp, c
- copper blank mu ng cha c vt i chng ha
N
tch g - typography ngh in
- copper impression mu ng c ch - internal (adj) bn trong, ni ti
lm xung TR - intellectual (adj) thuc tr thc
- molten alloy hp kim nng chy - profane (adj) (li l, ngn ng) c tnh
B
00
- lead ch bng b
- tin thic - free from restraint thot khi mi gii
10
- resulting reverse image kt qu i c hn

+3
ci nh ln ngc
P2
C
KEY TO READING COM PREHENSION

A
H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
-
1 c D D D A
-L
2 c c B c A D A c G B
N
3 D B c A D
TO
4 B A D B D A
5 c B c c D D A
NG
6 c cD c A B B B

7 B A D c D c D
c c
ID
8 A D B A A
9 B D A c A B
B
10 B c B D B c
353
11 A D A D BA D B
12 B B A c B
13 D B B e cc
N
14 B c c B. cB D
15
NH
c B c B cA A
16 D A B c Ac
UY
17 e A. B B D
.Q
18 D ' .-.A. c c B
TP
19 B D A A D c
20
O
B A c D A D

21 D c A D B B c
22 B B D A B
NG
23 D B D c A c
H
24 B A B B c A D
D A
N
25 c c B c
26 D A A c D c
27 A D c B c B A
TR
B
28 A B c c D B
00
29 c B D A c A D
10
30 D A B B A c B
+3
31 c A c c B A D
P2
32 A c c D B B B
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I 10 1 11 112 I 13 I 14
A
33 D B D B B D c
H
34 B c B A B c D
-
35 c B B B A B D
-L
36 D B B c D B A
37 c B A B B c A
N
38 c B A D A D B
TO
39 c B B B D D c
NG
40 D B B A B B c
41

c B D c A D B
42 c A D D B A e
ID
43 B D A c B A
B
44 A B c A D c c
354

45 JB_ B
46 _D D _B
N
47 B_ A
NH
48 JD B_ A _B_ D _D
49 D B_ D _D_ B
UY
50 B B JD
.Q
51 D _B B_ c B c D c A
TP
52 B D B _D_
O
53 D _D_ B_

54 B D D_ R
NG
55 B B JD B c_
56 D D B
H
57 D_
N
58 B_ D JD B D B A
59 D B B TR
60 B B D B D
B
B D
00
61 B
10
62 B B JD D
+3
63 D _B_
P2
64 _D_ A D
65 B B
C
B
66 B D _D_ D
A
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
H
5_
67 B D D D D D
-
68 A
-L
69 JD B
N
70 JL B_ D _B_ D
71 B_ D B D
TO
72 _D_ A _B_
NG
73 B JD A _B_ D JB^

74 JD B _A_ D
75 B_ D A
ID
_D_
76 _D_ B_ D_
B
77 D B_ D
78 D D B
355
79 B D B D
80 D B D B
81 D D D
N
82 D B D A:
NH
83 B D B
84 D B D D B
UY
85 A B. B
.Q
86 B D D B
TP
87 A D c B
O
88 B B B

89 B D D
NG
90 B D
91 B D B
H
92 D B D D B
N
93 D B B D
94 B B D TR
95 D B D
B
00
96 B D B B
10
97 D A B D B B D
+3
98 D B D B D D
A c
P2
99 D B D B D B D B
100 D B D D B
C
D B
10 11 12 13 14
A
101 B A D
H
102 D B
-
103 B D D D
-L
104 c B B D B
N
105 B D D D B B B
106 D D B B B D B
TO
107 B B
NG
108 D c. D B

109 D B
110 B D B
ID
111 B D B A D B
B
112 B D B A
356

113 B c D c D A A D A B c
114 B B c A B c A G
N
115 A B B D c B c c D
NH
116 B B A B A B c A c
117 c A B B B D
UY
118 c c B A D B
.Q
119 B A c A D B
TP
120 D B B B D D c c B
O
121 B A c R A

122 B B c B c B A D
NG
123 c c A
D D A c B D A
124 B c A D c A D c c A
H
125 A A D B c c
N
126 D A A D c A
127 D B B c TR
128 B c D A c D c A
B
00
129 A c B c
10
130 B D A D c B
+3
131 A B A A
P2
132 A B c B D D A D c
B
C
133 D A A c
134 B D B A A D c B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
H
135 A D c A B A A.
-
136 A A B D A A c B D B D B
-L
137 B B A A D c c c D
N
138 B c A c A A D D c B D
139 B D A B B c A B A
TO
140 B A A A D D B B D c
NG

ID
B

MC LC
N
1 T H Ê ISC H ^G P^... ----------------- ....... .5
NH
2 GOAL: ENDING'GHILP LABOR...--------- ------ 7
9 PROTECT OURPLANET^WITH C A T ! . ____ .... 19
UY
10 AN UNWELCOME GEST...
.Q
12 HEALTHY LIVING FOR TEENAGERS_____________ 26
TP
13 GRAFFITI - A DANGEROUS WAY OF LIFE ................___ 28
O
14 101 WAYS TO AVOID STUDYING ______________......... 31

15 POLAR PURPOSE...._______________________ 33
NG
24 SHYNESS............................ ...... ...... ........ ....... 52
26 THE GENTLEMAN THIEF ---------- ---------------- 56
H
27 RAMBLING ROB ..................... 58
N
28 CHOOSING A LANGUAGE SCHOOL............................ 59
31
TR
A STAR IS BORN!......................................... .......... 65
32 A FAMILY TRAGEDY ------------------------------------- .... .............. ..............
B
00
33 THE BEST OF FRIENDS -----------------------------.... 69

10
34 SUPERSTITIONS EVERYWHERE .......................... .........72

39 THE eBAY ADDICTS ..................................... 84
+3
40 WIMBLEDON .............. ....................................86

P2
42 GETTING AWAY FROM IT A L L................................. 91

C
43 HOW ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY AM I?.......................93

A
45 LOUD AND PROUD IN THE NOISE CAPITAL OF EUROPE.......... 98

H
51 INDIANA UNIVERSITY............................................ .. 113

-
53 FINDING A HEALTHY BALANCE................................119

-L
56 CAN YOU PROVE WHO YOU ARE? ....................... 117

58 CHINAS BIG DAM .............................. ........ ...... 133
N
59 PREDICTING EARTHQUAKES ....................................136

TO
60 A WEATHER FORECASTERS JO B .................................... 139

NG
62 THE QUALITIES WE PRIZE IN OUR CHILDREN ................... 144

66 LEAVING THE RAT RACE....................................154

67 NEW LINK FOUND

ID
BETWEEN HUMANS AND MAD co w DISEASE..................157

B
68 CHARLIE CHAPLIN - A COMIC GENIUS......................... 59
358

86 SMART EXERCISE.................................. 206
N
89 / ALL IN A DAYS WORK ................................ 213
90 BODY TALK........................................... 215
NH
91 THE SERENGETI....................................... 218
UY
92 CAUGHT IN THE A C T .................................... 221
93 LONESOME GEORGE.................................. ,225
.Q
TP
95 NATURES FURY.......................................... 231
97 THE JIM TWINS......................................... 235
O

98 NUCLEAR WEAPONS ............................... .239
99 THE REAL THING? .................................... .243
NG
100 LETTER OF COMPLAINT............................... ,247
H
101 REALITY T V ----------------- ------------- .250
102 THE SURGEON OF CROWTHORNE....................... .252
N
103 THE WAITING ROOM...................................... .255
105 TR
WARNING ON GLOBAL WARMING.................... .260
106 INVESTIGATORS TO PROBE TERROR FLIGHT............ .263
B
00
114 WORLD POPULATION AND CLIMATE CHANGE......... .281

10
117 THE HISTORY OF THE ROLLER COASTER.............. .288

+3
125 DEATH OF THE CLASSROOM........................... .305

P2
126 YOUTH REVIEW ....................................... .307

C
128 A DANGEROUS HABIT-............................... .313

130 HOW TO BE A GOOD PARENT: A TEENAGERS GUIDE .319
A
H
131 ORGANIC FOOD: WHY?................................ .322

132 THE MAN WHO IS PAID TO BE AN ALIEN................. .324
-
133 IPODS by IVE............................................ .327

-L
135 TO BECOME WEALTHY..................... .332

N
136 SHOULD KIDS BE ABLE TO SURF THE INTERNET?.... .334

TO
KV TO READING COMPfiHNSION .35 4

NG

ID
B
359
NK XUT BN I HC Quc GIA H NI

16 Hng Chui - Hai B Trng - H Ni
in thoi: Bin tp - Ch bn: (04) 39714896
N
Hnh chinh: (04) 39714899; Tng Bin tp: (04)39714897;
________ Fax: (04) 39714899 ' _________
NH
* * *
UY
.Q
TP
Chu trch nhim xu t bn:
O

Gim c - Tng bin tp: TS. PHM TH TRM
NG
H
N
Bin tp: VN H
Sa.i: THI VN TR
B
00
Trnh by ba: THI HC

10
+3
P2
C
i tc lin k t xut bn:

NH SCH HNG N
A
H
-
-L
N
TO
_______________ ______________________ SCH LIN KT

NG
CU HI TRC NGHIM CHUYN E K NNG C HU

M s: 2L - 68H2013
In 1.000 cun, kh 16 X 24cm ti Cng ti c phn Vn ha Vn Lang - Tp. H Ch Minh.
ID
S xut bn: 337 - 2013/CXB/13 - 46/HQGHN, ngy 20/03/2013

B
Quyt nh xut bn s: 60LK - XH/Q - NXBHQGHN.

In xong v np lun chiu qu II nm 2013.

00170 Câu Hỏi Trắc Nghiệm Kĩ Năng Đọc Hiểu - Vĩnh Bá

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

00170 Câu Hỏi Trắc Nghiệm Kĩ Năng Đọc Hiểu - Vĩnh Bá

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WWW.DAYKEMQUYNHON.UCOZ.COM WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/DAYKEM.

(ENGLISH READING COMPREHENSION SKILLS)

ng gp PDF bi GV. Nguyn Thanh T WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

ng gp PDF bi GV. Nguyn Thanh T WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

(ENGLISH READING COMPREHENSION SKILLS)

NH XUT BN I HC QUC GIA H NI

ng gp PDF bi GV. Nguyn Thanh T WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

SACBTHAM KHO ' ^ \

- ~Coiictonis ihileadm g, nxb Oxford University Press, 1-98T

nxb Glendale Community College

- TOEFL Practice Tests 1999-2000, Educational Testing Service,

- Building Reading Skills for the TOEFL iBT, 2007

- Advanced E xpert CAE, ca Jane Bell v Roger Gower, nxb Pearson

- C am bridge CAE Course, ca Mary Spratt & Linda B. Taylor, Cambridge

University Press, 1997

Exam, Th Nh K, cc nm t 2004 n 2008

ng gp PDF bi GV. Nguyn Thanh T WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

(1) Lu n cu ch im (thirng nm u mi on vn).

(2) Lu ging vn ca tc gi.

(4) c k bi chn cu tr !i. Lu rng ch cu ch imkhng thicha

thng tin xc nh chnh ca bi. chnh ch c thc khi qut ha sau

2. Cu hi v s kin. Loi cu hi ny yu cu hc sinhphi tr li bng ccthng

Cu hi v s kin c dng l mt cu b lng v bn di l 4 chn la, trong ch

c mt chn la hon thnh cu b lng ng bi vn.

Phn m u ca loi cu hi ny thng c dng sau:

+ The passage states that...

e chn ng cu tr li cho loi cu hi ny, hc sinh cn:

(1) Xc nh t/cm t mu cht trong cu hi.

(2) Lt qua bi vn tm t/cm t mu cht ny, hoc cc t lin quan n t mu

(3) Sau khi xc nh c v tri ca t/cm t mu cht trongbi vn,.c k phn bi

Cu hi v s kin hu nh lun un c hi theo th t xut hin ca cc s kin

+ According to the passage, the author implies that...

+ Which of the following can be inferred from the passage?

5. Cu hi v ng ngha: Loi cu hi ny trc nghim vn t vng ca hc sinh. '

Cc cu hi ng ngha thng c dng nh sau;

+ The word subsequent in line 19 is closest in meaning to ...

k nng lm bi v t c im ti a cho phn cu hi c hiu vn.

Tp sch ny cng c th l ngun t liu c ch cho cc ng nghip trong vic son

Ngi su tp v tuyn chn

ng gp PDF bi GV. Nguyn Thanh T WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

1 THE FAMOUS CUP

of the Nazi army.

Although th e trophy m ade :it -safely through the w ar, it d id nt fare so

well du ring the tu rb u le n t 1960s. In 1966, the Cup w as stolen during a

w ear in a tra s h container, by a little dog nam ed Pickles.

trophy by w inning its third World C up title. Unfortunately, the trophy

zilian Football A ssociation had to have a duplicate trophy made.

After the first trophy becam e th e possession of Brazils football asso -

artist, Silvio Gaz&zniga, in 1974. This trophy ca n n o t be won outright,

of the trophy th a t is gold-plated, rath er th a n solid gold like the real

contain s two layers olTasem i-precious stone called m alachite, and h a s

room for 17 sm all plaques bearing the n am es of the w inning team s -

1970 B. 1974 c. 1986 D . 2002

- 18-carat gold vng 18 ca-ra vn, cha suy suyn g

ct gi cn thn - to earn permanent possession f,

- FIFA [Federation Internationale de ;sth c quyn s hu ci g trn i

Quc t Cc Hip hi Bng - to recover thu hi, ly ii

- replica bn sao - duplicate bn sao

- sculptor nh iu khc - rest assured xin hy yn tm rng

- vice-president ph ch tch cn thn

- to make it safely through the war - base ci

- to fare well tin trin tot p, n nn - semi-precious stone bn qu

- prior to (prep) (xy ra) trc - to honor vinh danh, tn vinh

ng gp PDF bi GV. Nguyn Thanh T WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON